oe aay i

rae «x

' ro

7) t

. ‘

+ i

’ '

7 ‘

‘

1 ‘

‘

’ i

* - ad

7 ‘ r #

, .

' ‘ '

144

eo. wong

' '

’ soe ‘

. ’

’ oan ‘

4 _ 4

ta \

“ o4

1 ' ‘

; ‘ ¥

: oe Es

1 ar .

. : oan 4a

Phew Fie,

. ‘ to.

' 5 oon

oem NN OW AA 8 Arte BAN Oey

= a , bern CO a) Yi ye ka o Vo POW pogd | oy ep ay Se ee ae a ee

, £ . + . Cr | Wie ees v4 ‘ ee eS ee at ver er A tyre eo eee @ Bae

- - ‘ - nit a 7 1 oe : vee Ye » ee oa en a ee) si eme ‘ bers C04 fF aett Oe

‘ ' wy ” ‘ ‘ ate ' aay we ‘

‘ : 6 Oa ¥ srs Ce ee

: ; ; Rowe we fon ey suo

' ' they wy 1901) Med

‘ ‘ ‘ ‘ 1 des EE *

: 7 " «ue one tr Vem

he ; ras Fewh, «it aie ay ‘ .

ey we ‘ hoes | ' . a: fe sme

' 1 : ‘ 4 . & em

; . 5 we ovo 1 4ous

F ae ; P ony poe ce a ae

. ‘ howe an re ne wae

‘ é a 7 : ‘ ‘ sone Le, eee Ov

: 7 ‘ ee hee as Met yad puny

ix ‘ vy ¥ c) 8 en rr ne rien

. bd 4 { ‘ oot due i . eo»

‘, 7 : fs ¥ we io 8 iw we fee

= 9 ‘ am. ¥ a ‘ KEIM y cree gs 4 ae hoe

- : \ ; u -kw Tr ne ’ va

‘ y oy on Og A a vee meet Weg ae a

} tae x ’ LIANE A yes TAH eo Ya. a oe Cee er

ee aa t epee hye time : Biohwee pF ee few ol a ae ee 949 8 we My hh net wpe os |

ene ‘ in Ne sae brig ly s lt We Pee oe da ee ee ,

: ‘ , ‘ ‘ons ' ene 2 t-3

. oo. ' ; 7 ‘ nr ar or er |

oe ove « rae , ya

. J . * ‘ . ‘ J 4 #4

fl ex vo nar rie i Sa i ' . rey &

; " - 7 1 * =a ae oe « ’

im Ss wes a & a) 3 al, oh ir

” ' ' ‘ i . wy ‘

7 7 & i in ' '

' ' 1 tt Veal ,

. . ‘ . ey toewsy

, . A , © ee

: : : ‘ ¢ nA &

: °9.- pe cme «aa o

‘ he “1 ' ‘ ow

' an ‘ v4 bo. “a

. os ‘ ,

‘ ia \ rye

. 40 ' ry ' een

i " Te i ie 4 re

. iVa = fw .

‘ ad ' 7 t ' ‘ e re 7 ee a ”

: > 7 Ey ran ae ene 7 a Rowse Pw ate

A Fi F : - 7 ) 9, yt Prades F ‘ *

A . y te 4 7 ° J

, 1 oe . 1+ eae! fedeiie 1+ vay

"yes > Ty Liedaid << ' ;

= . 7 4 ’ toe ‘ :

‘ + 2% ; a boon! i i :

x ‘ + fop 4

‘aoe 7 te

; ‘ t . .

‘ vy 3 mt Son, At il ¥

. yo yy : He . '

- . ’ ‘ . * .

: ’

eas . ‘oy fo

. j ae 2 x

‘

r ;

. -

* i * -

‘ : oy

. i a ,, ‘ + i

7 ’ i ‘ P

A . s ‘ a} :

wy f - ‘

n 7 t ' .

‘ . , a

cidyt

wi ‘ bus

' ’ n bh oR ve

: ner , ' + +2 oir et he

mt . . F ty + Ld ° ’ von or ae . a i a ee - trae * * bape ged)

7 . é faa , Ors ere oe t . ” Stee eas wt we 4 Mt oe eheesl mae oe

; . i a 4 ons ol ore. Ay a a re re a re Ws dw Sih ok gene Paes eae b woe EDN «

* 1 O18 ere de te sth ae Mates : Pike oes 10D od a ae tear

ce ‘ $y 5 . ’ a} ee ae ‘ ‘ > re ee Ca a | . ” Aue oe her * we

. ‘ ' . toe 6 oa ar ee * + eae serene .

‘ i ‘ ‘ bs ' ¥ ord. .

H 7 A 7 * io ’ a s ‘a

: i cs & . ma! fae adhe 4

* . 2 4 . ‘ f «

. re 4 i 2 Da Y ow

4 oe . ' . on Bey ew Sy

te j in Aw Om

a ‘ ‘ ‘

’ é , 2) ar, fy ‘ ' te

' fan ‘ F vee ne we i* ¥

‘ ‘ te + naw e ay 4 #30

. ‘ ’ + ' 4 oe .

‘ uot * ‘ * reste :

Sey . i a an ¢ f4 4 lage - .

: Pe ‘ , ' 7 ‘ alti

a - ‘ F ® i wind tei wg

i . - 7 + d * -

: $8 hs F . te . ’ ¢ eh ad

isa - ; i we

a JME ce F 4 Xe VOI. os pwn PB " '

: 4 oe ‘ a ee 138 AS oe

* Vt aot i 1, fe a» up ‘ “oe Pett pe , wth e De wee ate

wes te ws NO ae a pe tee Om ea hom, a8it tera nee eve we i

. 1D ap foe Meee tin pawn Ji het a

‘x : ; - ed te Pee i CNMI ge «ysl dideet us fe.

a rye ‘ ee ‘ a i6-8 ' ! ' ' ve 24% b- 2

. ar yw ob ws ee a |

wa wo ha te @ a . 2

oat 7 ' 1 $. fag » ww ibetle @ ‘ .* oa

’ ' ' ' ' * © Ms oul . o> “ie. iF . i t

Cr | c« i ’ 4 . er ‘ ” tid. @ .

D> Vay ' , ‘ hoe + a wee ae Prep nu +

‘ . aay oe gt ' ‘ byes le o6 Seay

- ‘ ’ Bh wie we We ope ‘ ee oa oi ae art

: See Pe ee a ate TM bie ot We ‘ ec aes

AY ‘ . ' . ‘ “4 , - ete . Hak aa Sa a Ce

. * to etd ” 16 be ope ‘ an © be

‘ . ce ea ’ ie ' Dib gic on ed Oe bed og wee 0 ee ey & Be see

o4 & si a cr ier) ' “> hat tet EOE me MT Ht eRe Beth ge.

: Pes se A a2 a ee Ce ey one : . me er Th eee eee oe ee eee

Yoee a ‘ Lee diet % wih oe hae goby Cee ae ANd nid Or ae by oe @ he we ee Ae b:

: bee iin wh oar) ’ Pithaw ane 4 ec ee ee fe Tot Pe br OE ee Or een ee eel

¥ ’ . . 4 ber ‘ . ie we oa Hed peed a en i ee >?

24 ' yas ’ a a i a ce i} , iL on Be ry

Velie uw ‘ a ere oa ' ' . Va Cy ee mmr

is ‘ Copy Woe vs ‘ . oe Tw Hy ' haw “ow ow Ce 2 re or

i? i es « i fete { on 1 . a4 vt od i ¢ ee ce Cee nid oe ee Li ee 1 ee

‘ ‘ , . ‘ a é ou aes - ry . a oe ee ee i etree er) ove G0 ws Ae eae Fin Fa 4 sem Bete ee Manne 04

% whe rere ' hag ry er rate ty tg 7 ra Le es ee ee oe aoe a ed 1 8 LM ay pe Redeegig

. . 1 eros Sad a He been Pare | + afin Le et ON mien a eh eee wh ee Be GWE tees aHe

eo “# Yoo4 ey i , oh MA epee mh Wo Oe te 0942 G) ee ee a are ae ee 2 Se wee ee we, 4

5 a * Fitch pus AL'S er Peau Bot Th OH 9 EE Ve pa opm ow eww & OHV eH Heer eg oe tre a awk ee

. ’ ‘ ‘ , . ‘ La Ve, a qs ’ eee #6 Se dew bow ¢ Oe Ve ageing bb tweet ay dad Ave Ww th Alm: Cie e@io pe a weet

_ : i . aad J ms ‘a we OL PT a see 8 . Bove oe. ie Se ee ee oe ar ed Ce ee es

. ‘ ‘ ‘ a re POR La a Sate 1 iw as 5 ate tee ed i ee ea Perey wae ey

. : o L Miro Oe ale 420 koe ee ey ee ct RY Mal Sente BID. La BOR Faw. ie tem eee eee a oa | jean

oe i ‘ aes 5 ar is he ’ Bete A we te atm ON ay. kee 8 be ewes see rh ee

hes * i Pi baas che oe owe PEO Nae ple pia det A wang io eokete oe Ee ee ee oe mh ay kh ee emt Meas ger ae

~ vo ‘ ae os ya’ ‘ ‘ ae hes * ee Onc ree ee a 0 aedy ob bob Wir TON tet ed ore ae ee a

‘ ’ t ’ mia ' ’ oe ety ta + " tee ee ar} Wad eine on eee ey ee oe Dri ae arm A oe aed oi vee

oes & 1 ‘ 1 . 5 ‘ ' ole fpus en oe ere | PE tee vem Ce ee a | Lhe

F ac Be ON SSH 6 4: 1 Plea ie) bl eek OV Be a ee ee cc a eee es

. ’ - Dt arm ead Lt ere tt od Se Serer ie dee

ly . i . fYivwe ee ee ee eee ee ee ee ne or Lt) Feld Od dewey

‘ . . m4 ‘ ” at ee ee re ay NV De haired sav idid eee fae & Wied sw

we he a re ye ’ wa CO ee ed ee re it Hee er ew es « © mee ee he ee oe Pe ee.

a ¢ ‘ ssh af ews ‘ tara Las bw oe ee SOFA AE Wet MAG OPP etal re. HON itt eel se, oe

. pene vy) ow ‘ i Sars 4 eR Re a ee ee De eee Ce a eet ee

. ' ‘ ' ' + ¢ ws ek Hee btm eg eb ee Vw wise wer tae + 4

ey Let a4 o4 ow Fe ee Ge hie be ow. a ec ee Ps ol) 11-8 Geko wes

\ ‘ vb fe Ye ma) am A Dat MDe erie t OO em her nae atk SAE 1 be ee Rog y hadi Gedbe oy

‘ ars OF a) 5) oe th wn aos dee ews Oe hid ona heat 8 ee gel wy Lime cert 1 lhe yom OO

ee, TEP 8 Vhs Se a Oot Peay oe het ane baw bis toh Oh wee Ch CoCr od

J . i wo oa ow 1 8 ew Stee ED mi) bee meth oe + 90»

*¢ ta re br Ast y oe Ww ee bet aw ‘aed © " ore

‘ . . . ca i. Ch eee ee ee ae a or os tay wk Bee

vg ‘ ro eae ‘ Se ore pa re eT ae re berm Ot em gt BIE ae oe

’ . . A ' ea 4 a Ee 8 ete at gee ae Wb oth Oe terse e 1B 14: am ot 198 nyo

a . ; tows ’ bbe Cyeete oo i en i he ean ere ae FW OS Hm rte ooh yee awier LOO wogy

‘ ue reer ot is fag ee 8 BE Ot wl os bon te eey et ER Ol Gm en A pare eres

r Pie ta ' : ‘ ee iar ee ee ee ie ee FN eben nga ae 4 te =

Die WM A a, eg hea ele aye Samed vb owl am 14 118 Oot HD bob Hens 208 ee ee

‘ noe re in? » chs’ 2 + <4 i ae ee Leese aot

hvae | ‘ rae tw OOH AW tg he wie ht Sure PN We 8h EUR Bet Hk ed

ne ¢ fe gee Mh OP Ph Oe ba WT wore. enw Rede w ies Lge OU Oo docoee

‘ i) i oat al : i= on det RO Aw @ te Ord & eh Gwe nebo oma ne

n 4 Hea 8 =) (h bay ‘ r'

hay Wea

Ne) ‘at a y ’ aed

I bah pi

ZIGRTT |

a, ae

MATIONAL USS”

Ze NN A ES

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES,

VOLUME III.

I.—The Patio and Cazo Process of Amalgamating Silver Ores.

BY THOMAS EGLESTON.

Read, October Ist, 1883.

The process of amalgamation which is still used both in

Mexico and Chili, is called the American method of amal-

gamation, in order to distinguish it from the process used .

so long at Freiberg, known as the Freiberg Barrel Amalgama-

tion, and that which has now for so many years been almost

exclusively used in the western part of this country, known

as Pan Amalgamation. It is effected in two different ways, ac-

cording to the country in which it is used. In Mexico it is

called the Mexican or Patio method, and in Chili it is known

-as the Chilian or Cazo method. ‘These processes do not differ

essentially, except in the mechanical appliances which are used

for carrying them on. The Patio method was, until questioned

by Dr. Percy,* supposed to have been invented in Mexico,

about 1557, for beneficiating the silver ores which occur there.

* Percy’s Silver and Gold, Part I, p. 562, London, 1880.

2 The Patio and Cazo Process.

The Cazo method was invented in 1609, in Peru,* and has

not been used much except in South America and Mexico.

The Patio method is used in Mexico on ores that have « mean

yield of from thirty to sixty dollars to the ton. Ores of much

higher grade than this are treated, provided they are not refrac-

tory, but when they are rebellious they are generally treated by

fusion. In order to do this, however, the yield must be large,

for fuel is very dear on the plains of Mexico.

It is quite rare that anything is done to the ores before

treatment, except hand-picking to sort out those of high grade

from those of less yield, and to remove some of the sterile

material. Occasionally, however, they are treated in a rude

way. At Zacatecast very impure ores are broken by hand into

small pieces, made into a pile surrounded by a rude wall laid up

dry, and imperfectly roasted with charcoal. In the districts of

‘Tasco and Sultepec, where sulphurous ores are abundant, they

are roasted with wood in the same furnace, comalillos, in which

the magistral is made, but not efficiently, though the operation

lasts twelve hours. ‘The colas, the concentrated sulphides, are

also roasted in piles. This pile-roasting is not only very insuf-

ficiently donc, but is very uncertain in its results. The object

is to remove the substances which attack the mercury, but

owing to defects both of fuel and arrangement of the pile, but

little results from it, beyond the blind following of a routine

which has little other reason than that it has been practised

somewhere else. ‘There is always danger that, in roasting these

ores, the heat will be raised sufficiently high to melt them.

When they are rich, a fusion treatment is much more rational.

It is doubtful whether, with a dear fuel, much is gained by

roasting previous to the treatment on the patio.

It is generally the gangue which determines the name of the

ore, but it is sometimes called after its size. Quartz is called

guija, and quartzose ore guijoso ; feldspar is called caliche ; feld-

spathic ores, calichoso. When there is much gangue it is said

to be desploblado. Quemazon isa black porous decomposed ore.

Large pieces of the first and second class ores are called gabarro.

The smalls are called metal granza. '

* Percy’s Silver and Gold, Part I, p. 656.

+ Phillips’s Gold and Silver, p. 352, London, 1867.

The Patio and Cazo Process. 3

The minerals which are usually found as ores, or associated

with them, are native silver, plata; kerargyrite, plata cornea

blanca ; embolite, plata cornea verde; bromyrite, plata verde ;

lodyrite, plata cornea amarillia ; argentite, plata negra; ruby

silver, rosi clara; arsenopyrite, ferro blanco ; galena, plomo ;

and zine blende, copedilla.

The ores are generally distinguished as of two kinds, the

black, negros, and the colored, colorados. The former are

found in the lower part of veins, and comprise all the ores con-

taining sulphur. ‘The colorados are found in the upper parts of

veins, and are composed generally of the iodides, bromides and

chlorides, with some native silver mixed with them. ‘The gan-

gue is generally oxide of iron, carbonate of lime, or quartz ; oc.

easionally some argillaceous schists which, when they are not

attacked by the reagents, can be as easily treated as the others.

This method is the only one that can be used in many places

in Mexico, on account of the high price of fuel.

In some places, the very rich rebellious ore is roasted and then

treated, and this should always be done with all the negros when

fuel is not so dear as to render such a treatment impossible.

When the gangue is attacked to any extent this process cannot

be used. The works where these operations are carried on

are called haciendas.

The process consists of five different operations :—

1. Crushing the ore in a Chilian mill, California stamp, or a

breaker.

2. Grinding and amalgamating the ore in an arrastra.

3. Treatment on the patio. _

a. Making the torta.

b. Introducing the reagents.

c. Separating the amalgam.

4. Treatment of the amalgam.

5. Refining the silver.

The following tree, prepared by Mr. R. E. Chism,* gives a

very accurate idea of all the details of the process.

* Patio Process, San Dimas, Trans. Am. Min. Engs., Vol. XI, Pl. 1.

—

EE i er i el tt Me

| oa

———

(‘anbuny, )

“yuey es

(‘san’)

‘SOUT[IV,

eee

(0qvT ap snutary,)

‘O10 SSUID YANO

ee a ~~) H SS Ne = ——

(‘o“appuanty ) (‘omunry) (‘ouapouan?y )

ae esc se 4.10} 03]

; (-opjadog ) (‘saypp’) (-ppj2do9 )

‘UBS[VULY ‘SOUITIG J, “UBS [VULIY

“~ —— “~

es Sie es ol Cee eee gaa EE oe |

ae |

(‘ouapnanT) “DZNYD )

“10[}108 ah IOYSB AA “IOT}JOS LO LOSE AA

wicks

(‘pwoT) (‘nunpodsnry)

‘SOUMITG ‘ssUldBi0g

“~ “~

et see eS Ss

(‘puoYyny )

‘CIYSVILY

poe A at a

(‘ouapoigang )

‘loyeorg

| peytodxq

(CanbunT ap nzuns)

‘a0 SSVTO PALYT,

‘ANTIN

(ovoyfouag ap pojay)

‘O10 SSVIO puoov0g

Se eee

(‘uornpsodxiop yniapy)

‘OLO SSBIO ISAT

“SSSA00Gd OILVd SAO SWAHOS

"O4SB AA

‘SSUITIRL,

"OySB AA

(-sajpy’)

‘SOUT[IG J,

“A

. —

“OSV AA

(anbunjanuoo jap sajpf)

(-anbunjasjuo) )

sas SUITS PG

‘paytOMol pur poysvoy ‘poyOMor 10 ‘po}LodxG “pa}lojory

(*s9709 ) (ommajog) “URS [VU

pert PTS ieee eee ey

(-ayonog )

"10}@1]U99U09 [MOG

| ‘poyiodxa

(oajog) (ood )

‘$0]¥1}U90M0D SSBID PUOIIG $9] BIJUIOUOL) SSVO ISIL

A —

—————d a a ——)

(Comyunye )

‘107B.1JU90U0D "po}10zory

(‘sayp/?) (-npjedog)

‘SSUI[IV J, ‘UIS[BVULY

a aK

SS - — — +, ee,

meet

(‘mznyo )

IOT{JOS LO LOYSB AA

‘poz.10JO.L “qUITAL OF

uIvsy uos 10 ‘poysodxy ‘O4SB AA ‘poy1odxy ‘papog ‘poy1od xn

(‘mjanzaqng )

(‘uofuasa) (njsng 01017 ) (sav) seats cp plo8 uryora (anbozpy) (‘ayooug )

(anbuny, jap saor) ——— (anbozy)

‘SSUIIe J, eco. ‘IOATISYOING)

: —— ——

. | Ir

‘ues[eury ‘“srostis Asuodg

mane

‘SSUIIG], ‘Sa}yVTjUADUOD = “AAATISYorNe

“A ——

‘MOTTING Ploy

6 The Patio and Cazo Process.

1. CRUSHING THE ORE.

The amalgamating works consist of a large court, patio, sur-

rounded by sheds, galera, in which the apparatus for commin-

uting the ores is placed. All of the ore to be treated must be

reduced to an impalpable powder. ‘The court is always paved

in some way, generally with stones; and if it is desirable that

it should contain only a single pile, is only 10 or 15 meters

square. When a number of piles are made in the same enclosure,

it must be very large, as the piles are often 7 or 8 meters in dia-

meter. The court then would be 50 or 60 meters square, or

even larger. ae

The ores are generally sorted according to their silver contents

and gangue, into three or four classes. At San Dimas* there

are four grades. The first is the lumps of pure ore picked out

by hand, metal hecho, or made ore, free from gangue, worth $400

or more to the ton. ‘This is called metal de primera classe or

metal de exportacion. 'The second is ore for the patio, called

metal de beneficio. It differs from the first only in being of less

value and by having gangue mixed with it. The third class

embraces the smalls from the hand-picking, and varies in

value according to the value of the ores from which it is selected.

It is called granza de llunque or tierras de llunque. 'The fourth

class comprises the smalls from the mine. Itis mixed with much

gangue and dirt. It is called granza de labores or tierras de

labores. At Chihuahua,t where the ores are almost entirely com-

posed of native silver in a calcite gangue, they are separated into

three classes; the first containing more than $2,500 to the ton ;

the second, more than $1,000 and less than $2,500; the third

class, under $1,000 and averaging about $250.

This classification, however, differs at every works ; the first

consideration being always the value of the ore; the second,

the kind and quantity of gangue, according as it may or may

not be attacked by the reagents; and lastly, the size of the

pieces.

* Patio Process at San Dimas. Trans. Am. Min. Eng., Vol. XI.

+ Rept. United States Mining Commissioner, 1874, p. 4386.

The Patio and Cazo Process. ,

At Chihuahua the third class ore is carried to the stamps;

morteros. the best ore, is carried to the store-house, from which it

is weighed out. The ore is crushed with small stamps, weighing

about 150 kilos each, with a fall of 0.20 m. to 0.25 m. The

slots of the screens are 0.15 m. wide. The coarse sand which

passes the screens is called granza. The lumps of native

silver which do not pass through the screens are cleaned

by hand. ‘The stamps are run by a horizontal water-wheel.

From the stamps the’ore is taken to the arrastra. At San

Dimas, and generally in the who'e country, the ore which

is not small enough is broken by hand, until it is small

enough to be stamped in old-fashioned German stamps,

with wooden stems and iron shoes. ‘Three stamps, weighing

0.50 kil. each, with a drop of 0.22 m., are capable of crushing

and forcing out of a screen with 0.15 slots, about 8 tons in 24

hours. These stamp mills, molinos, are sometimes run by mule

power. In some works rolls are used.

The Chilian mill, ¢rapiche, is also stillin use. This was

formerly a large stone, generally granite, about two meters in

diameter, with an edge of 0.40 m. wide, weighing between

three and four tons. It was made to revolve on the circum-

ference of an enclosure formerly built up of stones, on

a long horizontal arm, which pivoted on a heavy piece of

metal driven into a post placed in the centre of the grinding

space. When metal was not easily procured, the beam was made

to turn on a piece of tough wood. The stone revolved on

one end of this beam. The other end projected beyond the

outer edge, and to it a horse or mule was attached. ‘The inside

diameter of the stone is slightly smaller than the outside, so that

it inclines somewhat toward the centre. Sometimes, instead of

having one stone only, two stones are placed on the same arm,

on opposite sides of the circle, and at different distances from

its centre. These wheels run on abed of hard stone. Some-

times the crushing is done dry; but it is generally done

wet—the ground ore being washed out and allowed to settle.

The more modern mill* consists of a large wheel, of iron or

* Eng. and Min. Jour., Vol. XX XIII, p. 104.

8 The Patio and Cazo Process.

stone, 1.65 m. in diameter and 0.38 m. wide. It is bound to-

gether with an iron tire 0.10 m. thick. It rotates on a hori-

zontal shaft attached to a vertical one. ‘The other end of the

shaft projects so that a mule can be harnessed to it. ‘The wheel.

Tuns in a circular space made of iron, which is 0.50 m. wide,

on the inside of which there is a screen of five or six meshes to

the inch. When there are two wheels, the axis is generally

about three meters high, and turns on pivots—one fixed in a

step raised above the bottom of the grinding-space, and the

other held by a frame above. ‘The arm on which the wheels re-

volve is fixed to this axis, and the power is communicated by an

arm fixed above on the axis. ‘This arm may be single for one

mule, or may project on both sides; in which case yokes are at-

tached so that a mule can be harnessed at each end. The num-

ber of these mills depends on the amount of work to be done.

. When the amount is small, mules are always used; but when it

is large, water power or steam is the motor.

In some of the works both the Chilian mill and the stamps

have been abandoned for a series of crushers, Quebraderos, or for

*, ‘asingleone. In this way, by a machine readily managed and

repa.ied, a much larger amount of material can be prepared for

the arrastra than by either of the other machines.

2. GRINDING AND AMALGAMATING THE ORE

IN THE ARRASTRA.

The crushed ore goes from the stamps or Chilian mill to the ar-

rastra, which isa very important part of the process, as the yield

of the ore depends very largely on the work which is done in it.

Its action is very slow, but no machine yet invented can

compete with it in the efficiency of its work. The arras-

tra is generally circular and somewhat below the level of the

ground. Itis from 3 to 4 meters in diameter. The bottom

is sometimes made of the hardest boulders that can be found in

the country, bedded in clay with their smooth sides turned up

and ground to something like even surfaces before the operation

begins. This is a bad construction, as the open places between

The Patio and Cazo Process. 9)

{he stones would seem lhkely to produce a large loss of both

mereury and amalgam. It is surprising, however, that with

such a rude construction the loss of mercury is not very much

larger than in the better-constructed ones. This is owing to the

ereat skill which the men have acquired, not only in working,

but in picking out the mercury and amalgam from the cracks, and

refilling with slimes. Such an arrastra will have to be run the

longest time possible, fifteen or twenty days, before a clean-up is

made. It will then generally be found expedient to remove the

tailingsand work upall the material in the interstices. A properly

constructed arrastra can, however, be cleaned up every few days

without disturbing the pavement. It is generally built of paving

stones or slabs of quartzose porphyry. In the best works, the

edges of these stones are carefully dressed and they are put

together with cement, or when that cannot be had, with the very

fine tails which result from washing up the ftorta. These

stones are 0.75 m. in length. They are placed vertically.

When put in with care, the bottom will last for twelve months.

It will then be necessary to clean out all the cracks and repair

it, taking up the stones, carefully scraping them, andwi 2

the dirt upon them and that beneath them, to recu.... any

mercury or amalgam that may have penetrated into the ground.

The sides are made generally of flat stones forming a rough

curbing 0.60 m. high, which projects enough to make the interior

about 0.60 m. deep. . In the centre of the arrastra, raised above

the bottom, is a pivot hole for the central shaft, which carries four

arms, and is supported above and below. ‘T’o cach of these arms

one and sometimes two stones are attached. which act as mullers,

voladoras, to grind the ore. They are made of quartzose por-

-phyry, which must have an open grain so as to present a good

grinding surface until it is entirely worn out. A close-grained

stone would become smooth after a little wear, and would then

be no longer serviceable. ‘!hey are usually, when there is only

one to each arm, a little smaller than the half diameter of

the arrastra and about 0.40 m. thick. Two holes are drilled

in each one; into these, wooden plugs are driven to re-

ceive staples, by which they are fastened to the arms by means of

thongs, leather, or chains, in such a way that their front

edges will be about 0.05 m. above the bottom, while the rear

10 The Putio and Cazo Process.

drags. When new, all the stones together weigh from 300 to 860

kilos. The arms are sometimes niched so as to allow of chang-

ing the position of the stones at will. There are usually four of

these mullers, but sometimes only two, and in very rude arrastras

only one is used. ‘They do not last much over a month, and are

sometimes worn out before that time. When they are worn

down to about 200 kilos they are replaced one at a time, so that

there are always old and new stones in the mill at the same time.

The arrangement of the arms differs according as animal or

water-power is to be used. When mules are used, one of the

arms 1s made to project over the side of the arrastra, and to it

one and sometimes two mules are hitched. Such arrastras are

called arrastra de mula, or when they are of large size, arrastra

de marca. When water power is to be used, all the horizontal

arms project beyond the rim. From these arms rods descend,

which support a horizontal wheel, which revolves around outside

of the arrastra a few centimeters above the pit. In the circum-

ference of this wheel, at intervals of 0.15 m., rectangular floats,

slightly concave, and set edgewise, are placed. ‘These are called

spoons, cucharas, and these arrastras are distinguished as spoon

arrastras, tahona or arrastra de cuchara, in distinction from the

arrastra de mula. The men in charge of the grinding are called

tahoneros. The water strikes these paddles, the power being ac-

quired while descending through a tapering shoot which has a fall

of 0.20 m. in every 3.5 m. to4.5m. This horizontal water-wheel

runs in a channel a few centimeters deep on the outside of the ar-

rastra, as shown in the plate.* If the central space, called fosa,

which is the arrastra proper, is three meters in diameter, it is

usually not more, and about 0.50 m. deep, the wheel six meters

in diameter with a width of from 0.60 m. to 0.70 m., the out-

side diameter of the ditch would be about 7 m. Such an

arrastra would treat between 400 to 600 kilos of soft ore in

twenty-four hours, or if it is hard, 700 and 800 kilos in about

three days. This is a wasteful appliance, but there is a super-

abundance of water, so that it makes little difference. These

arrastras are constantly employed when water-power can be

* I am indebted to Dr. Drown, the obliging Secretary of the Am. Inst.

of Min. Eng., for the cliches taken from Mr. E. Chism’s paper.

The Patio and Cazo Process. 1]

had. <A wheel of this kind with a diameter of six meters will

carry two mullers for 24 hours without stopping, as fast as four

mules will, that cannot work for more than eight hours a day. *

At Chihuahua such a wheel runs both the arrastra and the

stamps. When overshot water-wheels are used, the power is

transmitted by spur gearing on the upper part of the central

shaft.

In some few cases an overshot water-wheel is used to run a

number of arrastras. The power is transmitted by wooden gear-

ings. When the arrastra is new, or when a new bottom has

been put in, redajado, it is turned either empty or with a few

cargas of tailings, jales, or low grade ores, ¢verras de labor, so

as to make the stones even and fill up the cracks—if the stones

have been simply laid together—with material of but little value.

A good deal of importance is attached to the use of the pro-

per quantity of water, and to the times as well as the way in

which it is added. Whena new bottom has been put in, one

muller is attached to the arm, and it is set to work grinding up

with water the residues of the washing of a ¢orta, to smooth down

the pavement and to fill up any cracks. This is continued for

one day. ‘The next day another muller is attached; the third day

another. On the fourth day poor ores are charged; at the end of

four or five days, the fourth muller is attached, and the usual

work is then commenced. From one-half to two-thirds of the

total quantity of ore to be treated is added at first. If there is any

free gold or silver in the ore, a little mercury is added at the

start in order to catch it. The quantity of gold contained in

most Mexican ores is so small, that if it was not separated in

- some way in the treatment, it would be absorbed in the silver,

and its separation by a parting process would hardly pay, so

that it would be lost; but by adding mercury, especially that

which has already been through the arrastra, much of it is col-

lected. When the ores contain a very considerable quantity of

native gold or silver, it is desirable to collect as much as possible

with mercury in the arrastra; and ifno other minerals are

associated with it, the whole or the greater part of the treat-

ment, as at Chihuahua, is comprised in its treatment here.

*Report of the U. 8. Mining Commission, 1872, p. 486.

12 The Patio and Cazo Process.

The usual charge is one ton; it is often greater in large and

less in small arrastras. When the charge has been introduced, a

few buckets of water are thrown in to make a sufficiently consis-

tent mud, about half the total quantity used being added at first. .

If there is too little water, the ore is raised and pushed forward

by the mullers withont being ground. If there is too much, it

packs underneath the mullers. Care is taken to add the water

us required, to keep the proper consistence. ‘To do the

work most efficiently, the mullers should be made to revolve

slowly at first, but when the larger pieces have become

reduced, the motion is increased to from six to ten turns a

minute. This is sufficiently rapid to prevent the larger and

heavier pieces from settling and thus clogging the voladoras,

and does not make the charge rise over the sides. When

the ore has been ground about eight hours, quicksilver

is added in sufficient quantities to amalgamate the free gold and

silver. The quicksilver is usually amalgamated with either

silver, copper or zinc. The quantity added depends on the

quantity of gold and silver in the ore, and on the quantity to

be worked before a clean-up is made.

When the arrastra is new, or immediately after a clean-up,

from two to five kilograms of mercury are added at once. When

the work is going on regularly, it is 0.25 kilog. every second

day. If there is no free gold or silver, no mercury is added in

the arrastra. When 400 kilograms are treated per day, which

makes about 12 tons a month, six kilograms of amalgam, con-

taining about 4.5 kilos. of quicksilver, are used. This acts readily

as long as there is plenty of free mercury present; but as this

becomes saturated with the precious metals, fresh quantities must

be added; and to determine what this quantity should be, assays,

tentadura, of the amalgam taken from the bottom, made by wash-

ing in a horn spoon, must be made every day or two. Sometimes

the assay is made on a red earthen plate, platillo, which is used

as a pan.

It is desirable that the amalgam should not be too liquid, for

it is then liable to roll into the crevices and be caught there. If,

however, it is too dry, the mercury, being already nearly satura-

ted, will not attack the precious metal. A properly constituted

amalgam flattens and spreads itself out, and presents large sur-

The Patio and Cazo Process. 13

faces for contact; a liquid one rolls around in globules and may

sink into the interstices; and even if it does not, is not so

likely to catch the precious metal.

In some places, a quarter of the arrastra* is cleaned to the bot-

tom, and the mixture of ore and amalgam taken out and washed.

This, however, is not usually done, except in very small tortas,

when the ores being treated are new, or, for some reason, do

not work well. Usually the assay is taken by probing in different

parts; the different probings being put together and then tested

in a small vessel called a jicara, by pressing the thumb or finger

against the side. With a very little experience the quantity of

mercury is quickly arrived at without so large an assay, and the

horn-spoon assay is sufficiently exact. When the amalgam is

too dry, more mercury must be added. Generally, it is not

desirable that the amalgam collected should contain more than

20 per cent. of gold and silver.

The quantity that asingle arrastra can grind in 24 hours varies

with the hardness and the richness of the ore. It will generally

be from 400 to 600 kilos., and will require the use of from 900 to

1200 liters of water. When no grit can be felt between the

thumb and forefinger, the work of the arrastra is regarded as

complete. When the hands of the men who do the work are not

very sensitive, they sometimes make the test by rubbing some of

the pulp on the lobe of the ear. There is considerabie differ-

ence in the fineness of the pulp in different sections. With

coarse ore, the amalgamation will not be so perfect ; but those

who use this practice, claim that the greater yield of fine pulp

does not pay the extra expense, and that the economy in pro-

duction and quicker returns more than pays for the loss in yield.

Those who grind fine, maintain the contrary, and claim that

their results are satisfactory, in yield, expense and time.

Probably the differences in the qualities of the ore have led to

the differences in practice in the various districts. When the

assay shows that the work is properly done, water is introduced

to thin down the mixture and allow the heavier particles to set-

tle. The thin slimes, Juma, are either dipped out into barrels

and carried to the slime-pits, /ameros, or into launders, from

* Engineering and Mining Journal, Vol. 838, p. 104.

14 The Patio and Cazo Process.

which they run into the settling-vats. Sometimes a spout or

plug is put into the sides of the arrastra for the purpose of

allowing the pulp to flow into the lawnders. ‘These troughs are

removed as soon as they have been used. When the pulp is-

dipped out, a cover is put on the floor of the arrastra to pro-

tect the amalgam. When no protection is used, care is taken |

not to go near the bottom. ‘The whole of the slimes are not

removed at any one time, except to make a clean-up. In the

pits, the slimes are allowed to settle until they are ready to be ~

carried to the patio. It takes about three days to grind a

charge. |

At Chihuahua, on native silver ores, the arrastra is generally

charged with a ton per day of third-class ore, yielding from

$250 to $1,000 per ton, requiring about 25 lbs. of mercury.

After three days’ run, ore as rich as $2,500 is added, which re-

quires more quicksilver. As much of this ore is added as is

necessary for the purpose of getting a suitable amount of amal-

gam collected in the arrastra, preparatory to the clean-up.

Some hours after adding quicksilver, the amalgamator, azugero, .

takes an assay with the horn spoon, washes it, and judges whether

the proper amount of quicksilver is present. These assays are

regularly made, and by means of them great skill is rapidly ac-

quired in learning how to add the mercury. Every morning,

after the silver seems to be amalgamated, a large quantity of

water is added to the material in the arrastra, and kept in motion

from four to six hours. This separates the amalgam from the

fine ore, and allows the heavier particles to settle to the bottom.

The fine material which has not been amalgamated runs

off, carrying with it all the finely ground ore. The coarse

grains, not yet sufficiently reduced, remain and are ground

in the next charge. The tails which are thus obtained at

Chihuahua are poor, so poor that they are not worth more

than $3 a ton for the patio process. ‘They contain all the

ores other than silver, except a small part of the ruby

and sulphide of silver, which have been reduced at the ex-

pense of the mercury. The sulphide of silver, being ductile, is

not reduced to powder, but settles to the bottom of the arrastra,

and is taken out with the amalgam. Any rich tailings which

come from the treatment of rich silver ore which has been

The Patio and Cazo Process. 15

added just before the clean-up, are saved for concentration or

treatment. |

After a number of charges have been ground, the process of

ervinding is stopped to allow of collecting the amalgam, which is

done by scraping the inside of the arrastra with great care.

This operation is called raspando. In the most primitive

arrastras it is performed as often as twice a month, or perhaps

not oftener than twice in three months. In those of the best

construction it is done from two to four times a year. As a prop-

erly made pavement lasts about a year there is no necessity for

doing it oftener. Itisdone by carefully scraping the stones and

the intervals between them with a curved tool, in order to be cer-

tain to remoye every particle of ore and amalgam; the amalgam

so collected is called raspa or raspadura. In case the pavement

is worn out, each stone is carefully scraped and washed, and the

earth for a slight depth as well. In some places the raspa

is simply washed with the addition of fresh mercury in a wooden

bowl, boliche, Fig. 4, where most of the amalgam is collected.

This operation is called dolichar. The tails are then washed

on the planillo, Fig.3, a masonry platform erected for the pur- |

pose of concentrating them. ‘The operator here is called the

planillero. When the ore contains gold, or in the more mod-

‘CHUZA . (Settler) ern works as at San Dimas,

Scale 200:1 eS AES - -

—e —-3 it is washed in a pit called a

NX at

SECTION ON A.B. Wie is

W====-. chuza, Fig. 1, which is also

used for the treatment of con-

centrated tails from the patio.

The chuza* is an excava-

tion 8m. diameter and 0.5 m.

deep, lined with cement,

with a conical wooden bowl

0.35) m: Jin diameter. and

0.30 m. deep, whose sides

rise 0.05 m. above the ce-

mented bottom on one side.

Directly above itat A, Fig. 1

* Patio Process at San Dimas.

16 The Patio and Cazo Process.

there is a wooden trough through which water flows freely.

At the opposite end there is a trough, Bb, with a gate having

three plugged holes through which to let off the slimes. The

scrapings are thrown into this trough and are carried by the.

water into the doliche; a boy sitting on the edge of the chuza keeps

the material in this bowl in constant agiiation with hisfeet. This.

disintegrates the material. ‘The mercury and amalgam fall into

and sink to the bottom of the bow]; the heavy particles other than

these are carried into the chuza, and the slimes run off by the

trough B, from which, if of value, they are collected in settling

tanks, and if not, run to waste. ‘The tails in the chuza are

concentrated by drawing out the plugs and letting the lighter

material flow away, but the work is done by hand, and yields a

very rich material called cabezuela, which is sold. When the

rich tailings have been separated, the top layer of a coarsely

ground ore is removed with iron scrapers and set on one side

for the next charge. The amalgam is scraped up and carried

in wooden bowls, dateas, to the washing-tanks. The gold

amalgam collected in the bowl is strained and retorted as the

silver is, but not with it. ‘The surplus mercury is not mixed

with that from the straining of the amalgam from the patio. It

contains considerable gold and silver, and is always used over

again to catch the free gold in the arrastra, as amalgamated is al-

ways much more lively in catching free gold than pure mercury.

The amount of gold separated in this way varies from 30 to 50

per cent. of the total contents of the ore. This gives a bullion —

that will pay to part. The rest of the gold is recovered in the

patio, either in the direct washing of the pulp, or in that of the

polvillos, or is lost in the float during the various processes of

washing. When the ore does not contain native silver, 10 to 12

per cent. of precious metals contained are taken from the arras-

tra. The amalgam taken at the clean-up usually contains from

18 to 22 per cent. of silver.* The coarser the silver is, the less

mercury is required.

The loss of mercury in the arrastra is owing to the formation

of salts of mercury by the impurities contained in the ores, and

* Engineering and Mining Journal, Vol. 33 p. 104 to 114.

The Patio and Cazo Process. liye

also to the flour formed, but more especially to the latter. Phillips

gives the following statement of the losses at Guanaxuato,*

where the ores contain gold but very little native silver, it

being in the form of sulphide:

7 Silver, 14 Ibs.

Composition of amalgam, .

Mereury,., 66.“

Weight of amalgam used, : - : OS

Mercury added independently of amalgam, - - - 330 lbs.

Mercury in amalgam, - - - . - : 56‘

Gold and silver, Plata Mixta, obtained, Gold, 18 Ibs. ) 94 The

including that used in amalgam, ae ae 6B « |

470 Ibs.

( Gold and silver, 84 lbs. |

Amalgam produced, - - 400 Ibs.

HMiencung d1l6 “

Loss, - - : - - 70 lbs.

As the gold was metallic it probably caused no loss. This

loss of mercury is only a little more in weight than the silver

contained in the bullion. It isa received opinion among the

amalgamators, azogueros, that the loss in mercury will always be

equal to the weight of silver contained in the ore.

The increase in the non-productive portion of the ore, owing

to the constant wearing of the stones of the pavement and the

mullers, may be as high as 8 to 10 per cent. Itis a great objec-

tion to the arrastra, which has therefore been abandoned in all

the other processes; but the principle of the machine is a good

one, and to this principle we shall undoubtedly have to return.

The constant rubbing of the surfaces of the ore by the mullers,

and the grinding and constant rubbing in the presence of water,

make the metal bright, and the mixing brings it in contact

with the mercury. It is a notable fact that in some cases in the

early days of California mining, when Mexicans with their rude

appliances easily made $50 to $60 a day, the most efficient mod-

* Phillips’s Gold and Silver, p. 3833. London, 1867.

1s The Patio and Cazo Process.

ern machinery did not extract more than $15 to 820. In some

instances, with the best modern appliances, an ore yielding by

assay $700 to $800 did not yield more than $20 to $30 when

treated in pans, while fully 75 per cent. of its value was recov-

ered by the use of the arrastra. In ores of lower grade, the

rapidity of the returns compensated for the loss, but in higher |

‘rade ores it did not. It is a matter of great surprise that a

machine has not yet been invented to work rapidly on the prin-

ciple of the arrastra. |

3. TREATMENT ON THE PATIO.

a. Making the Torta.—The process of amalgamating in the

arrastra is used when the ore contains considerable quantities of

iodides, bromides, chlorides or native silver or gold. When

there are none of these minerals present, it is only ground to be

subsequently treated on the patvo, as are also the tails from the

treatment of the arrastra. The material from the arrastra is

carried to the amalgamation court called the patio. This is an -

enclosure, more or less large, carefully paved and made as imper-

vious to mercury as possible. It is inclined so that water will

easily flow from it. Little by little, after several years’ use, as the

tortas are made over the whole surface of the court, the ground

will become saturated with mercury. Every two or three years,

and oftener if the pavement has to be replaced, and more especi-

ally when the hacienda has to be abandoned, it will be worth

while to clean up and work the dirt beneath the floor. Very

many methods have been tried to make and keep this flooring

tight. It has been made of artificial stone, of cement, and of

asphalt, and, in some places, of cut stone, faced on the edges

and made tight with cement. In some places, as in Nevada and

also in Mexico, timbers tongued and grooved like mill floors,

and covered with water. when not in use, have been laid down

over an area of an acre and a half. Such a floor as this will

last several years. All of these devices are excellent and work

well; but as the expense is large, the old method continues

in use, and probably will do so till the whole process is aban-

doned, as it doubtless will be in the course of a few years, when

the railroads now being built are completed, and transportation

becomes easy and cheap.

The Putio and Cazo Process. 1)

The slimes are called lama; they are brought to the patio as

aliquid mud. In order to keep it in the place assigned for the

torta, in small works adam of sand or old boards is made to con-

fine it, and it is left for some time exposed to the sun and wind, to

hasten the separation of the water by evaporation as well as by

drainage. In Jarger works, the pulp flows from the arrastra into

circular walled spaces called cajetes or lameros, which are used for

the same purpose. After sufficient material has been collected to

treat it, and when it has acquired the consistence of thick mud,

the piles, called fortas, or trillas, are made. The number and

size of these depend on the size of the works. For ore, they vary

from 30 to 130 tons each ;* for tails, they are usually smaller, or

from 16 to 20 tons. ‘They occasionally contain from half a ton to

two tons; but such fortas indicate working on averysmall scale,

and the pile is trodden by men. Asthe material is still too liquid

to support itself, a support is made around the outside with

beams or stones, the joints between them being made tight with

clay. Within this enclosure the pulp is placed. It will usually

be about 0.30 m. in thickness. An assay is always taken both to

check the work already done by the arrastra and to know what is

being done. After several days exposnre, the pile will be suffi-

ciently thick to be worked. It is spaded over and made into a

regular shape of 7 to 15 meters in diameter.

b. Introducing the Reagents.—In about twenty-four hours

after the shaping, from two to five per cent. of salt is scat-

tered over the pile, as evenly as possible. With ores con-

taining from 80 to 35 ounces of silver, four per cent. of

salt, with those containing 45 to 75 ounces, about four and

a half per cent. is added. The greater the amount of salt,

the easier the amalgamation will be, and the more rapidly it

will be effected; but notwithstanding the gain in time, it is

generally found that the cost of the salt compensates for it,

so that the amount is usually restricted to between three and

four per cent. The operation of putting in the salt is called

insalmoro. ‘The salt which is used in the process formerly came

* Phillips, p. 343, says that they vary at Guanaxuato from 30 to 80 mon-

tones, a montone there being 1.62 tons.

20 The Patio and Cazo Process.

from the evaporation of sea-water; but this was found too

expensive, on account of the long transportation. ‘There are

in Mexico a large number of salt lakes, called Jagunes, which

dry up every year. The residue contains about 20 per cent.-

of salt,* and fully 50 per cent. of sand. ‘They also contain

both sulphate and carbonate of soda. These impure residues,

saltierra, are purified to be sent to the works. When purified,

they contain from 70 to 90 per cent. of salt—the latter figure

being seldom reached—and from 10 to 15 per cent. of carbonate

of soda. ‘The impurities make no difference in the reactions,

except from there being so much less salt.

The bed of ore which is prepared with salt should be at least

from 25 to 30 centimetres in thickness, depending somewhat on

the consistence of the pulp. ‘The thinner the pulp, the thicker

the bed may be. In order to make the pile as homogeneous as

possible, it is trodden by mules or horses—8 to 25 being required

for treading a pile—the latter number being necessary for a 100

ton torta ; 16 mules and 8 men are required for a 60 ton forta.+

The thickness and consistence of the ore should be such that

they can tread it without too much difficulty, as the work is

extremely laborious. In order to have a perfectly uniform

action, the slimes should not be too thick—the thickness being

settled by the hoof of a mule beirg able to penetrate to the bottom,

and to be withdrawn without difficulty—leaving a hole which

does not close up for several seconds.t Whenever the mules

stop for rest, the spading is continued. In this way the salt is

thoroughly incorporated through the whole mass. This opera-

tion of treading is called repaso. During this time no chemical

action takes place, but only a mixture of the ore and salt has

been accomplished. Every possible effort has been made to do

away with this treading, as it is so fatiguing to the animals,

and if not well done does not allow of a full treatment of the

ore. Mechanical devices of many kinds have been invented

with more or less success. Weighted wheels,§ moved in various

ways by mechanical devices, more or less complicated, have been

* Laur, Metallurgie de l Argent.au Mexique; Annales des Mines, Series 6,

Vol. 20, p. 65. + Ibid. p. 144. t Ibid. p. 141.

S$ Percy’s Silver and Gold. Part I, pp. 611 and 613,

The Patio and Cazo Process. D1

tried with what seemed to be, in many cases, great success for

atime; but the cost of repairs has eventually caused the return

to the old way of treading with mules, which will probably be

used until the process disappears. The pile is trodden and spaded

during the day. The next morning it is again trodden by the

mules for an hour or two, and spaded again; after which, the

“magistral” isadded. This substance was formerly a mixture of

the sulphwtes of copper and iron, obtained exclusively by roasting

iron pyrites in double-hearthed furnaces called comalillos. It

contains some gangue, but this does not affect the treatment.

The substance, however, is not of equal composition, as it is

obtained by roasting copper pyrites of very variable yield.

The following analyses of this magistral show how it may vary.

Soluble in Water. Insoluble in Water.

Poor.* Best.t Poor. Best.

Water, - - - 7.60 14.84 Oxide of copper, - 5.70 0.62

Oxide of copper, - 2.50 6.44 Oxide of iron, - - 20.50 23.20

Oxide of iron, =) Gor”. -@.20 Oxide of lead, - = Oe 7 35

Line, = - = eg, O00 Lime, - - =)) 1%. 82. 0:00

Soda, - - - 1.47 4.19 Silica, - - - 38.00 28.82

Sulphuric acid, = O15" -'9:61 Sulphur, - - 2.22 2.80

Chlorine, Savice et) SAT Insoluble, 74.26 62.79

Semeue’ 2 | corn) es Soluble, 24.58 37.75

24.58 37.75 —— -

98.84 100.54

Poor. Best.

Sulphate of Copper, - - - - - 9.03 19.00

Oxide of Copper, - - - - - 5.00 5.50

Sulphate of Iron, : - - - - 6.75 14.80

Sesquioxide of Iron, - - - - 18.75 25.80

Tusoluble, - - - - - - 60.47 34.90

100.00 100.00

In Peru,{ an ore of copper which contains as high as 13.62

per cent. of sulphate of copper, already an excellent magistral,

is used for making it. ‘This is roasted with salt, and when

finished and ready to be used, contains about half the soluble

* Annales des Mines, 6th Series, Vol. 20, pp. 75, 76.

+ Berg und Hiittenmiinnische Zeitung, 1881, p. 302. } bid.

pes The Patio and Cazo Process:

sulphate that it did before. This is owing to the fact that the

tradition has indicated that the ore must be roasted with salt,

which in this case, at least, is not only useless, but is a harmful

condition. When copper ores containing sulphur are not found,

but other copper ores are, these are roasted with the addition of

iron pyrites for the purpose of making the sulphate of copper. —

When there are no ores of copper, roasted iron pyrites alone is

sometimes used.* Laur cites the following experiments :—

Two fortas of ores easily amalgamated were made and treated

in exactly the same way, and at the same time. The piles were

composed as given below :—

Sulphate of Copper. ' Sulphate of Iron.

ToRTA. TORTA. —

Dry Ore, - - - 2,000 kilos. | 2,000 kilos.

Salt, - . - 105 105

Sulphate of Copper, - - 6 o~

oe of Iron, - - 6

Mercury, - - - 12 12

Water, - - - 700 700

Each ¢orta contained 2,240 grams of silver. After 18 days,

during which time it was necessary to add 16 grams of mercury

to each of the piles, each torta was washed separately, and the

amalgam collected and distilled, with the following result:—

Silver collected in the sulphate of copper torta, - - 1,890 grams.

ey i 7. iron torta - - . 730 z

Loss in silver in the sulphate of copper torta, - - 15.6 per cent.

oe e tf iron torta - - - 65 KE

This explains sufficiently well why sulphate of copper is pre-

ferred, although the losses in such experiments, made in a very

small way, are much more than they would be ina large torta.

But even supposing that the loss is reduced to ten per cent.,

with sulphate of copper used in a large way, the loss by the use

of sulphate of iron would still be 41.6 per cent.

In Chili and Peru,+ considerable quantities of sulphate of

* Annales des Mines, 6th Series, Vol. 20, p. 262.

+ Berg und Hiittenmiinnische Zeitung, 1881, p. 302.

The Patio and Cazo Process. 23

iron are found. It is mixed with insoluble copper ores in

order to produce the necessary soluble copper salts.

Fe, 3 SO, + 3 Cu O = 3 Cu SO,, + Fe, O,.

The iron is precipitated and the sulphate of copper crystalized.

The same result is obtained with malachite. Chloride of iron

may ae be used to produce chloride of copper.

Fe, Cl, + 3 Cu O = 3 Ou Cl, + Fe, O

With atacamite, a mineral frequently found in ive countries,

a mixture of chloride and sulphate of copper is formed.

Cu Cl,, 3 Cu O + Fe, 3 SO, — CuCl, + 3 CuS8O,, + Fe, O

With chloride of iron—

| Cu Cl,, 3 Cu O + Fe, Cl, — 4 Cu Cl, + Fe, O

Decomposing iron pyrites can also be used—

2FeSO0O,+2Cu0+ 02 Cu S80, + Fe, O,.

This last reaction is a little slow; but if roasted pyrites is used,

it takes place very quickly. If a little excess of the oxide of

copper is added, no iron is left in solution. The mixture should

be roasted in such a way as not to decompose any of the sulphate

of copper, but all the sulphate of iron should yield its sulphuric

acid to the oxide of copper; this it is almost impossible to do.

But the heat makes rapid action possible.

When no sulphate of iron can be had, as in some parts of

Peru, sulphate of alumina can be used:

Al, 3 SO, + 3 CuO =3 Cu SO, + Al, O

The decomposition does not take place so rapidly or so com-

pletely as with the sulphate of iron, owing to the pasty condi-

tion of the alumina produced.

On account of the difficulty of obtaining the magistral, whose

only efficiency is the amount of sulphate of copper that it con-

tains, of the same strength at different times, sulphate of cop-

per has been entirely substituted as magistral in many places

for the roasted copper pyrites magistral, with great success and

greater certainty and celerity of working ; but, in many places,

the old magistral is still used, and even when copper pyrites

cannot be had, roasted iron pyrites is used.

24 The Patio and Cazo Process.

The imagistral is the most important reagent employed, and

at the same time the cheapest. A little salt, more or less,

makes no special difference; but an excess of magistral is always

disastrous, and its effects must be attended to at once, or they.

will cause a serious loss of both mercury and silver. The opera-

tion of adding the magistral is called itncorporo. Whatever

magistral is used, it is scattered evenly over the surface with

wooden shovels, and then thoroughly incorporated through the

pile by digging it in—the operation being called voltear la torta,

or turning the pile. When this has been done, another repaso is

made. which is repeated every second or third day for about eight

hours. ‘lhe quantity of magistral added varies from one half to

two per cent., according to the nature of the ore and the

quantity of sulphate of copper contained in it; more being

required as there are more sulphides. On the supposition

that the sulphate of copper alone is of use, about five pounds.

to the ton of a 35 to 60 ounce ore is required. Generally from six

to eight kilos of mercury, azogue, is added for every kilo. of

silver contained in the ore in the ¢torfa, as determined by the

fire assay. ‘The amount of mercury put in at this time varies

with the theory of the amalgamator. Some add two-thirds;

others three-fourths of the lowest quantity at once; others add

it in very small quantity at first, and the rest gradually. In any

case, the effort is made to add it in the smallest globules possi-

ble, by walking over the pile and squeezing the mercury through

a canvas bag containing not more than five or six kilograms

of it, or through strainers, so as to distribute it as evenly as

possible over the pile.

Immediately after the addition of the quicksilver, the animals

are set to treading, the spading being done when they rest.

This is continued for two hours. A solution of hot sulphate

of copper is then added to the pile; the quantity being larger

as the ore contains sulphur, arsenic, antimony or zine. For

ordinary pure sulphurets, about four kilograms to the ton are

used. Precipitated copper, precipitado, in the proportion of

one part of copper to five of sulphate, is also used. ‘This cools

the pile. After the sulphate is added, the ¢orta is trodden

again until3 P. M. The mules employed for this purpose do

no other work. They are generally blindfolded, and are driven

;

The Patio and Cazo Process. 25

in teams of not more than eight or nine. ‘They are usually tied

together four abreast; and are driven, by aman who stands in

the centre of the furta holding the halter, and who, by the aid

of along whip, makes them walk in such a way, commencing

at the outer edge, as to cover every part of the tforta. Some-

times two teams are at work on the same ¢orfa when it is very

large. A day’s work is from 6 A.M. to3 P.M. Itis very fatigue-

ing. When the work of treading stops, the feet of the mules are

carefully washed in a tank provided especially for that purpose,

not only to recover the rich material, but also to keep the mules

healthy ; otherwise, being in constant contact with so much

mercury, they would soon become diseased. They cannot be

prevented from licking themselves, however, to get the salt the

mud contains. Balls of amalgam, which often weigh* from 50

to 100 grams, are sometimes found in their stomachs; which,

howeyer, contain but little mercury.

The reactions in the ¢oréa commence at once after the mag-

istral is added. It is said to work cold or hot. There are two

kinds of heat: the first 1s due to an excess of the reagents; the

second results from cold, and is called calor de frio. They dif-

fer as to their cause, but the result is the same, and increases

the loss in mercury while it diminishes the extraction of the

silver. On cold mornings, the heat of the pile being greater

than that of the air, the pile steams; but as the sun rises higher

this vapor ceases. ‘This is called the calor de frio. When there

is an excess of magistral, the chloride of mercury acts on the sul-

phide of silver and makes chloride of silver and sulphide of

mercury—which latter is entirely lost. A large amount of heat

is produced in this way. When the heat is thus caused by the

excess of the reagent, wood-ashes or lime is added to decompose

the chloride of copper which is formed. Lime or ashes are,

however, never added when it can be avoided ; they do not re-

vivify the mercury, and they retard the operation and diminish

the yield of both gold and silver. When lime is used, it should

be in fine powder, and only just enough should be added to

produce the effect. If large pieces of it were used, they would

not be likely to be wholly acted on by the time the forta was right

again, and their effect would have to be counteracted, as the

* Phillip’s Gold. and Silver, p. 341.

265 The Patio and Cazo Process.

pile would become too cold. ‘Tails, or any other sand free from

soluble substances, can be used; but these are open to the ob-

jection that they increase the bulk without increasing the yield _

of the forta. When the heat is not too.great, it can sometimes

be cured by the application of cold water; but care must be —

taken not to add so much as to thin the pulp. Cold working

means simply that the operation does not proceed quickly enough,

and that an insufficient quantity of magistral has been added to

the pile. If left in this state, a large quantity of mercury would

be lost as oxide of mercury. ‘To ascertain exactly what is to be

done with the ¢or¢a when in this state, assays of from 1 to 3

kilos., ijadas, are taken, and what is required added according

to the indications which they give.

Many amalgamators prefer to work the ¢orta rather hot.

When it is manifestly too hot, they allow it to remain per-

fectly idle for a few days, taking assays all the time to ascer-

tain when it gets back to the proper condition. ‘They add

nothing to the pile in the meantime, and when it has come

back to its normal condition, go on as if nothing had happened.

They think that they gain time and do not lose any more quick-

silver than if they worked faster, and that they get a larger yield

of the precious metals. In the winter season a little less sulphate

of copper is required than during the summer. ‘They generally

begin to diminish the quantity of the reagent in September.

There have been a great many theories in regard to the action

of these reagents, and a great many investigations of them,

which can hardly be said 'to have cleared up many of the obscure

points. A resumé of what has been done is given below, which,

however, is not very satisfactory, and does not throw much light

on the subject. Some of the published reactions, after careful

trial, could not be obtained. ‘The reactions given below have

been compiled in the hope that some one may be led to make a

more careful examination of the whole subject.

The amalgamators suppose that the chloride of sodium cleans

the silver and the sulphate of copper heats it, and that the amal-

gam of silver and mercury results. The mercury lost is counted

as lost mechanically ; the amount of loss being about equal in

weight to that of the silver extracted.

The generally received theory is, that the salt and the sulphate

The Patio and Cazo Process.

of copper act, the one on the other, and ne rise to chloride

of copper and sulphate of soda :*

CuSO, + 2 Na Cl = Cu Cl, + Na,SO,.

The chloride of copper acts on the metallic silver and the

sulphide of silver; chlorides of silver are formed, which are dis-

solved in the excess of chloride of sodium.

2 Ag + 2 Cu Cl, = 2 Ag Cl + Cu, Cl..

Ag, S + Cu Ol], = 2 Ag Cl + CuS.

When mercury acts on artificially prepared chloride of silver,

it reduces it to a metallic state, when it enters into combination

with the mercur y-

2 Ag Cl + 2 He = Hg Cl, + Ag, Hg.

This reaction takes some time, and is less sensible on the

natural than on the artificial substance.

If chloride of copper is treated with mercury, sub-chloride of

copper and sub-chloride of mercury are formed.

2 Cu Cl, + 2 He = Cu, Cl, + Hg, Cl,.

This reaction takes place more rapidly than with chloride of

silver. If chloride of iron is substituted for the chloride of

copper, all the reactions take place, but much more slowly, and

this is especially true when sulphide of silver is present. The

presence of salt accelerates the reactions in all cases. If any of

the metallic silver in the ore has not been transformed into

chloride, this is attacked directly by the mercury.

When sulphide of silver and mercury are shaken together,

sulphide of mercury and amalgam are formed.

Ag, S+2Hg = Ag, Hg+ Hg.

This reaction is slow but much quicker than with chloride of

silver. All the sulphide of mercury is entirely lost.

Rammelsberg and Huntington have recently made the fol-

lowing investigations:+ If sulphide of silver and chloride of

copper are made to act on each other, either sub-chloride of cop-

* Berg und Hiittenmiinnische Zeitung, 1881, p. 303.

+ Die Metallurgie des Silbers und Goldes, von J. Percy, p. 12, Bruns-

wick, 1881, and Min. Eng. Journal, Vol. 34, p. 150.

28 The Patio and Cazo Process.

per, chloride of silverand sulphur are produced, or the sub- siderie

of copper formed becomes a sulphide.

Ag, S + 2 Cu Cl, = 2 Ag Cl + On, Cl, + 8.

Ag, S + Cu, Cl, = 2 Ag €1 + Cu, 5.

The liberation of the sulphur is, however, a secondary reac-

tion, taking place only to a very limited extent, thus:

Ag, S + Cu Cl, = 2 Ag Cl+CuS8

Cu 8 + Cu Cl, = Cu, Cl, + S.

When the solution is boiled for some time, the sulphur disap-

pears and sulphuric acid is formed. The amount of sub-chloride

formed, and of sulphur set free, is dependent on the strength of

the solvent, which in this case is salt, on the temperature, and on

the presence of air. The secondary reaction depends on the power

ef the solution to dissolve the chloride. If this could be removed,

the solvent power of the solution would be to a certain extent

regained. The action of the air in facilitating the secondary re-

action is due to its converting the snb-chloride into an insoluble

oxy-chloride.

3 CuCl, + 3 H,O +3083 CuO, CuCl,, 3 H,O 4+ 2 Cu Cl,,.

If chloride of copper and sulphide of silver are boiled together

the decomposition is complete.

Ag, S + Cu Cl, = 2 Ag Cl+ Cu 8.

When sub-chloride of copper and sulphide of silver are mixed,

the following reaction takes place:

8 +Cu, Cl, = 2 Ag Cl + Cu,

When one hundred parts of the sulphide of silver were treated

with sub-chloride, in a solution of salt, as much as 7.6 or 8.3

per cent. of the silver remains dissolved in the salt solution.

When the residue was treated with zinc, the following reaction

took place :—

Ag, S + Cu, Cl, + Zo = Zn Cl, + Cu, 8 + 2 Ag

When a salted solution of sub-chloride of copper is mixed with

a saturated solution of chloride of silver in salt, no precipitation

takes place, nor can it reduce chloride of silver when it isin pow-

der. If sulphide of silver is added to the salt solution of sub-

The Patio and Cauzo Process. 29

chloride of copper, chloride of copper, sulphide of copper, and

metallic silver are produced.

Na Cl, Cu, Cl, + Ag, 8S = Na Cl, Cu Cl, + Cu 8S + 2 Ag.

It thus appears, that while it cannot affect the chloride of silver,

the sub-chloride of copper can reduce sulphide of silver, which,

in the presence of mercury, is amalgamated without having

passed into the state of chloride at all. If ammonia is added to

the solution of the sub-chloride of copper and chloride of sil-

ver, silver is precipitated.

eee Cu C), + N H, — 2 Ac + 2 Cu Cl, + N A,

When chloride of silver, sulphide of copper, and ammonia are

heated, a blue solution is obtained. One half the chloride of sil-

ver is converted into sulphide of silver. The residue, which is

black, is composed of sulphide and chloride of silver, and con-

tains no copper.

8AgCl+ 2 CuS = Ag Cl+2Ag,58 + 3 Ag Cl + 2 Cu Cl.,.

ed —— SS

Not Dissolved. Dissolved.

Three parts of chloride of silver and two of chloride of copper

remain in solution.

If two parts of chloride of silver dissolved in ammonia are

treated with sub-sulphide of copper, a mixture of silver and sul-

_phide of copper is precipitated, about one tenth of the silver

still remaining in solution.

2 Ag Cl+ Cu, S = 2 Ag+ Cus + Cu Cl,.

If four parts of chloride of silver are used, the copper remains

almost entirely in solution, and 28.2 parts of the silver are also

in solution. The residue consists of metallic silver and sulphide

of silver.

4 Ao Cl + Cu, S = 2 Ag+ Ag, S + 2 Cu Cl,.

Prof. Huntington found, that when chloride of silver and sul-

phide of copper are mixed in an ammoniacal solution, sub-

chloride of copper is formed, which reacting on the chloride of

silver forms metallic silver and chloride of copper.

2 Ag Cl + Cu, 8 + NH, = Ag, 8S + Cu, Cl, N H,.

2 Ag Cl + Cu, Cl, NH, = 2 Ag + 2 Cu Cl, N H,.

30 The Patio and Cazo Process.

The chloride solution for this reaction must be kept at.a cer-

tain strength or the reaction will cease, and anything which

causes further dilution will undo a part of the work already ac-

complished.

When chloride of copper and diphias of arsenic are mixed,

rapid decomposition takes place, and a precipitate of sulphide a

copper and chloride of arsenic is formed.

As, 8, + 8 Cu Cl, =3 Cu + 2 As Cl,

When chloride of copper and sulphide of antimony are mixed,

a precipitate containing sulphur, copper, oxygen, chlorine and

antimony is formed. Some antimony remains in solution on ac-

count of the sulphuric acid formed. When sub-chloride of cop-

per is used, most of the copper is precipitated in the metallic

State.

If proustite and pyrargyrite are treated with chloride of copper

both are decomposed. All the silver of the pyrargyrite is

converted into chloride, while only a part of that in the proustite

is so acted on The reaction for proustite is

4 Ag, As 8S, + 12 Cu Cl, = 8 Ag Cl+ 2 Ag, 8 + 2 Cu8 +

As, S,+ 5 Cu, Cl, 4+- 2 As Cl, aa

and for pyrargyrite |

2 Ag, Sb 8, + 4 Cu Cl, = 6 Ag Cl 4 Cu, Cl,+ 2 Cu 5 +

b, 58, + 8.

In both cases, part of the reagents remain in solution.

When sub-chloride of copper is dissolved in salt and boiled

with pyrargyrite in powder, a black product is formed which

contains most of the silver, all the antimony and sulphur, and

some copper and chlorine; 7.3 per cent of the silver is dissolved

hy the salt.

2 Ag, SbS, + Cu, Cl, = 2 Ag Cl + Ag, S + 2 Ag Ms.

Sb, Sz.

When sub-chloride of copper and proustite are treated to-

gether, a gray product is formed which contains nearly all of the

silver and sulphur, two-thirds of the arsenic, and considerable

portions of the copper and chlorine.

6 Ag, AsS, + 7 Cu, Cl, 14 Ag + 4AgCl4+12CuS

+ 2 As, S. +2Cu Cl. + 2 As Cl,.

The Patio and Cazo Process. 31

The proportion of the siiver dissolved in the salt was 4.7 per

cent. :

It mercury, sulphide of silver, chloride of sodium, sand and

water are worked together, seven-eighths of the silver present is

extracted, three times as much as when the salt was not there,

If oxide of iron is present in the mixture, chloride of iron will

be formed, which is reduced to sub-chloride by the mercury, and

a chloride of mercury is furmed. A very small amount of oxide

of iron produces a very considerable loss, as the sub-chloride

constantly changes to chloride of iron, in contact with the air. If

to this last mixture sulphate of copper is added, a little less silver

is obtained, and the loss of mercury is large. If proustite, which

contains 65.5 per cent. of silver, 15.1 of arsenic, and 19.4 of sul-

phur, is substituted for the sulphide of silver, twice as much silver

combines with the mercury when chloride of copper is present.

It requires a great deal of shaking to decompose the sulphide of

silver. When sulphide of zinc is present with chloride of copper, it

causes the formation of sulphide of copper and chloride of zinc,

so that ores which contain blende always amalgamate badly.

From these reactions it would seem that, during the first two or

three days, chlorides of copper and iron are produced by the

action of the magistral on the salt; that chloride of silver is

formed by the action of these chlorides on the easily attacked

ores, and even on the sulphide of silver; that the chloride of silver

is dissolved probably at once in the excess of salt. In chloridizing

the silver, the copper and iron salts have become reduced to sub-

chlorides, which in the presence of sulphide of silver form the

chlorides, and produce metallic silver, or, when it is absent,

quickly become oxy-chloride, and produce no further action.

Sub chloride of copper reduces sulphide of silver; but the sub-

chloride of iron does not. The presence of mercury prevents the

formation of an excess of chloride of copper, for as soon as there

is an accumulation of it, it acts on the mercury and is reduced to

sub-chloride. Just as soon as the mercury is introduced the free

silver is amalgamated; the chloride of copper which is still in the

pulp forms calomel and sub-chloride of copper, which acts on the

sulphide of silver and leaves it as metal, to be acted on by the

quicksilver.

Some authors, especially Mr. Bowering, deny that chloride of

jy Tee eer

pe The Patio and Cazo Process.

silver is formed at all, as none was found in a torta left for four

months on the patio, during which time he constantly examined

the piles. Mr. Bowering says, in support of this theory, that when

only two of the reagents, sulphide of silver, chloride of so-

dium, or sulphate of copper are mixed together, no effect is

produced, and that when three are mixed in a small vessel, the

mercury combined with just half of the chlorine in the chloride

of copper, and formed sub-chlorides of both metals. As the

chloride of copper has the property of absorbing oxygen, he

concludes that it is the principal reagent. According to this

theory the mercury acting on the chloride of copper makes sub-

chlorides of both. The chloride of copper absorbs oxygen, which

acts on the sulphide of silver and makes sulphuric acid, and

leaves the silver in a metallic state to be absorbed by the mer-

cury. The sulphuric acid set free acts on the chloride of so-

dium, and forms sulphate ofsoda. Chlorine is given off, combines

with the sub-chloride to make a chloride of copper, which is again

decomposed, and so on. In this case the sub-chloride acts just

as nitric acid does in the manufacture of sulphuric acid. The ac-

tion of the chemicals in the pile is especially slow if sulphide of

silver is present, in which case the loss of mercury is also very

large. When the whole of the silver is in the state of sulphide,

a large part of it, which may sometimes be as high as 40 per

cent., is lost. The mercury transforms the chloride of copper into

sub chloride, which, like chloride of silver, is soluble in an ex-

cess of salt. The sub chloride in this state acts more energeti-

cally on the sulphide of silver than the chloride. <A sulphide

of copper is formed, while the silver is precipitated, and the

chloride of copper formed again by giving up half the copper,

which becomes a sulphide. This advantage is gained only at the

expense of a very large quantity of mercury ; and in order to

prevent this loss, experiments were made of not introducing the

mercury until much later in the process, but this did not succeed,

as the extraction of the silver was not so well done.

The next day after the first treading, another one ismade. The

torta is then allowed to rest for a day, with occasional spadings,

quite as much to make the mixture as to ascertain whether the ore

is not getting too stiff from evaporation. As the heat of the sun is

depended on for a part of the chemical action, water, when added,

The Patio and Cazo Process. 33

must be added in the morning, so.as not to cool down the /orla

after it has once become heated, and thus disturb the reactions

which are taking place. The pile must be trodden several times, the

object being to keep renewing the surface of the silver which,

without this, would become rapidly covered with a bed of solid

amalgam which would prevent further action. The operation

lasts from three to six weeks, according to the way in which it

is conducted, the temperature of the air and the size of the heap.

A succession of cloudy days or cold weather in the summer time

will retard the operation. Continued or heavy rains may so thin

the pulp as to prevent the reactions taking place, and stop all the

working until the pulp thickens up again from evaporation.

When all the conditions are the most favorable, the ¢nzorporo can

be completed in 15 to 18 days. When they are unfavorable, it

may take from 40 to 50 days. Taking several months together,

20 to 25 days will be the average time. In winter, when the

torta always works slow, it may last as iong as two or three

months.

The day after the mercury is added, assays, tentaduras, are

made, to see how the ¢orta is working, to learn if any one

of the reagents used is required, or if any of them is in

excess. To do this, a probe-sample, which will weigh about

250 grams, is taken from as many different parts of the pile

as possible. The assay is washed in a horn spoon or in an

earthen plate, platillo, 0.18 m. in diameter, and 0.02 m. deep,

a rotating motion being given to it. The lighter particles

are carried off, and the heavier ones deposited on the bottom

in the order of their gravity—the heaviest being in the centre.

The mercury which has not yet acted, is generally in the

centre, the silver-white amalgam, ceja, which, when moved,

shows a distinct tail, /isfa, next to this, then the undecomposed

black sulphurets, then pyrites, and generally a fifth ring of mer-

cury inflour. Three assays are generally made on the torta each

day, one in the morning before the work commences, one after

the treading is about half done, and a third after it has been

completed. During the first few days, the appearance of the mer-

cury remaining unacted upon shows the workman what is taking

place. The mercury is always more or lessattacked. If during

the first day it looks dull, is of a deep gray or lead color, there

34 The Patio and Cazo Process.

is too much magistral, and the ¢orta is said to be too hot, and the

temperature is really too high. A little lime is then added

which decomposes part of the sulphate of copper and slackens

the action. Lime is sometimes replaced by alkaline ashes. If on .

the contrary, the mercury is perfectly brilliant and not acted on

at all, or is broken up into little globules, or if it is of a

slightly yellow tinge, the ¢orta is too cold, and more magistral

must be added. It is always better to have too little than too

much magistral; more can always be added, but too much means

a loss of mercary. When the amalgam, limadura de plata, is

in the preper condition, it is in thin scales, which are easily col-

lected together into a mass of dry silver amalgam, pasiila, and

mercury is easily pressed from it with the fingers. When it is

very thin, so that it easily breaks up into fine globules, it is said

to be debil, or weak. When it is hard and crystalline, and so

dry that no mercury comes out from it when it is pressed, the

amalgam is said to be strong, fwerte, and more mercury

must be added. A dirty blackish appearance to either the

mercury or amalgam indicates improper working. When the

indications of color are all right, but the assay shows that no

progress is being made, salt must usually be added. Some-

times this condition is only temporary, and is owing to a sudden

reduction in the temperature of the air. Generally the defects are

owing either to heat or to cold. Excessive heat al ways signifies

a loss in mercury, and should be stopped as quickly as possible

by adding cold water or ashes. If the heat is not excessive the

torta may be allowed to stand a few days. Cold working is reme-

died by the addition of salt, or of sulphate of copper, or by addi-

tional treading. ‘To ascertain which of these is required, careful

assays must be made. Generally in the commencement, fresh ore

or cement copper is used to correct the working, and toward the

close cement copper, ashes, or lime.

When the amalgam is very fluid and easily breaks up into

very small globules, and the assay shows that at least 75 per

cent. of the silver in the pile is amalgamated, the torta is

said to be finished or rendida. Sometimes the assay shows

everything to be right, but no progress is made for several

days in the amalgamation. This is usually owing to a want of

Nee!

The Patio and Cazo Process.

salt, or tocold. If, on examining the black sulphurets, polvillos,

and rubbing the small metallic globules of mercury or amalgam

found among them with the finger, they unite to a large glob-

ule, the pile is nearly finished. If they yield a dry amalgam,

it is not. -The best way to ascertain this, is to make a fire assay

of the original pulp and of the torta, and to judge by the yield.

When the ores contain galena and blende, these substances de-

compose the chloride of copper, and the sulphur goes to the cop-

per. The proportion of magistral to be added must, therefore, be

largely increased, notwithstanding the fact that the loss in silver

is always greater when there is an excess.

When the amalgamation is complete, a considerable quantity of

mercury, in addition to that required for the amalgamation of the

silver, isadded, with the object of making sure the collection of all

the mercury and amalgam. In some districts this additional

mercury is called bavwo, The pile is still trodden for some time.

This last addition of mercury has for its effect to make

the amalgam a little more fluid, so that it may be collected

more easily, and to collect the floured mercury which would

not be caught in the subsequent washing, and to prevent as far

as possible further action of the reagents on the amalgam.

There is alwaysa lossof mercury equal in weight to that of the

silver contained in the ore. A further loss of from 7 to 10 per

cent. comes from that which is mechanicilly carried of either in

the patio or in the washing. With such ores, 40 per cent. of the

silver is often lost. The loss of mercury is often from 100 to

200 per cent. of the weight of the silver obtained. As a mean it

is from 140 to 160 percent. or 7 or 8 times the loss in the Frei-

berg barrel amalgamation process. The attempt was made to

diminish this loss by adding a little iron, but in order that the

effect may be sensibly felt, a large amount must be used, which

increases the expense and does not diminish the loss much. In

some of the works the mercury is replaced by an amalgam con-

taining 30 per cent. of copper, which reduces the loss materi-

ally. The effect of the copper is the same as that of the balls of

copper or iron which are used in the Freiberg barrel amalga-

mation process. Too much copper, however, must not be added,

or it would make the amalgam of silver too friable. The loss in

silver is increased by this method, but the loss in mercury is re-

duced to 120 to 150 per cent. The attempt was also made to use

36 The Patio and Cazo Process.

a lead or tin amalgam, but this was too viscous, and became easily

reduced to powder, so that the loss in silver was increased.

At the end of a time, more or less long, no mercury is found.

The operation is nevertheless continued until the amalgam attains

a certain consistence. If, however, the amalgam becomes too

thick, a fresh charge of mercury must be made, adding it little

by little. Sometimes the assays are made over only a smal! part

of the torta. A little salt will be added in one part and a little

magistral in another. Assays are then made to see the effect, in

order to show what should be done with the whole pile.

When the éorta is rendida, it must be washed as soon as possible,

If allowed to stand, the sulphur and the sulphate of copper which

have not been decomposed commence to act, and: cause a con-

siderable loss of silver in the state of very finely divided amal-

gam, desecho, which will not unite. It is to prevent this as

much as possible, that the large excess of mercury is ad:led, but

notwithstanding the excess of mercury the pile must be washed

at the earliest possible moment.

c. Separating the Amalgam.—The ‘amalgam, with the excess

of mercury, is scattered through a large mass of pulp, from

which it must be separated by washing. This should be done once

i. twenty-four hours.

The washing, /ava, is done in a box settler, davadero, or in a

tub, tina ; both of these methods being in use in different works.

The former is by far the most ancient. The tub, which is very much

Iike the dolly tub or

settler of California, has

been in operation for

many years, but as it re-

quires the use of power,

is only adopted in the

large haciendas.

The box, lavadero,

Figs. 2, 3, 4, is built of

--p-Stone on the sides, and

lined with cement. It is

two meters long, half a

LAVADERO (Settler) meter wide, and one

Scale 100:1 meter deep. It has a

HAG ae

PLAN |

The Patio and Cazo Process. 3

platform on one side on which

to pile the material to be treated.

Fig. 4. The front is closed with plank

in which there are six holes,

. 0.05 m. in diam., five of which

Sil ae i ee ane closed with plugs of wood.

seer COME EE These serve to let off the slimes.

Tn front of these holes is a vertical wooden trough which carries

the slimes to an inclined trough, the bottom of which is provi-

ded with several mercury traps to catch any mercury or amalgam

that may be carried off.

The davadero is built directly against the patio, the pave-

ment coming up to its front wall.’ The material from the torta

is carried to the platform of the settler by a pair of steps built

on the platformside. ‘lhe box is first filled half full with water.

Two men then get into it, while one man on the platform shovels

the ore into it. The men dance in the water, keeping it in mo-

tion with their feet, but keeping their hands out of it. The pulp

and water are added little by little, the pulp by a single spade-

ful at a time, until the slimes flow out of the top hole, while the

water is allowed to flow in only as fast as it flows out. The dis-

charge falls down the vertical to the inclined trough, over the

mercury traps and riffles, and goes from there to the settling

tanks. The heavier liquid below is from time to time discharged

by removing the lower plugs. The men are obliged to use a

great deal of discretion at this work. If they work too fast, there

is danger that some of the amalgam and mercury will be carried

off. If they work too slow, the heavier particles collect at the

bottom, and the small particles of amalgam sink through it

slowly or not at all. They know by experience from the diffi-

culty of moving their feet, when it is time to discharge through

the lower holes. They never allow the lower part of the box to

become filled. The amalgam is not removed until after the

whole of the zorta has been washed, then the supply of water be-

ing kept up, the plugs are removed one by one and the amalgam

collected.

In some districts where wood is cheap, the tub is substituted

forthe stone box. The agitation in this is done with shovels or

poles from the sides. No better results are obtained, but the

r [to ae hae

Pa ea

38 The Pativ and Cazo Process.

labor is less severe. These box settlers can only be workel dar-

ing the day, and inust, on account of the danger that some one

else may remove a part of the amiugam, be cleanel up every

night. They cost but little to build, but require the labor of six _

men, treading, charging and bringing the pulp. As erpital is

scarce, but labor very abundant, the use of this settler is almost —

universal in Mexico. |

Sometimes the washing of tle ¢or/a is done in wooden tub set-

tlers, ¢inas, which are usually driven by water power. They are

from two to five meters in diameter, and one and a half

to three meters deep. The shaft carries four arms, which

are fitted with pieces of wood 0.06 m. square and 0.10 m.

apart, which reach to within 0.30 m., or less, of the bottom of

the tub. In the sides of the tub there are two holes, one 0.8 m.

from the bottom, which is 0.15 m. in diameter, from which the

tub is emptied ; the other, 0.25 m. from the bottom, is 0.02 m.

in diameter, and from it the water overflows, and the tail assays

are taken. The axis is geared by wooden gearing to a water-

wheel. ‘These tubs were formerly constructed of stone. ‘Three

of them communicating with each other, were placed together,

and were connected by. one large wheel driven by two mules

trained especially for the purpose. The first of these tanks, into

which the pulp was put, was called tina cargadora, the third,

from which the discharge was made, was called discargadora, or

discharge tank. In some of the works these tanks are discon-

nected, though driven by the same power, each tank being used

by itself. ‘Ihe tank is filled one-third full of water, and the axis

is set 11 motion quite rapidly; when mules were used they were

set at a full gallop, and a charge of 300 kilos. thrown in.

Water is added until it reaches nearly to the top of the tub, and

the speed reduced until it is just suffivient to keep. the puip off

the bottom. In about an hour the assays taken from the top

hole show that the mercury has all settled. The bottom plug is

then removed, and the contents of the tub discharged into the

settling tanks. This isa much better and quicker method of

working. There is no danger of the tub becoming clogged at

the bottom, and there is no necessity for constantly cleaning up

at very short intervals. The tub can be kept going night and

day until the whole forfa is washed, without any danger of

The Patio and Cazo Process. 39

having a clean-up made by others. It will undoubtedly take

the place of the box settler wherever there is sufficient capital to

erect it.

When the whole ¢oréa has been washed, the patéio must be

carefully scraped, and also the interstices between the stones, to

remove any particles of pulp, amalgam or mercury. All these

scrapings, raspadura, are mixed with the last of the pulp, and

are thrown into the settler. The time required to work depends

on the number of settlers. It is usually not less than two or

three days.

The tails from the davadero or tinas consist mostly of iron

pyrites mixed with the black sulphides and some ore, their

proportion being different with the different ores treated. They

are called cabezilla or cabezuela. They contain some amalgam

which is recovered. Formerly* they were carried in wooden

bateas to a tank filled with water, called the pila apuradora,

On its surface a wooden bowl, batea apuradora, floats, which

is from 1 m. to 1.50 m. in diameter. ‘The man who washes

with this datea leans on the side of the pila, and taking hold of

the bowl with both hands gives it a peculiar motion, taking up

a small quantity of water, which after going round the Jdalea, is

discharged, taking some of the cadezilla with it. The residues

are treated on the patio. Generally the tails from the ftinas

and davadero are run over riffled launders, where some of

the mereury and amalgam is caught, into two tanks connected

with each other, which for a ¢orta of twelve to fifteen tons, are

five meters long, three wide and one deep. These are called the

tangue and contratanque. The object of the first is to catch all

the heavy materials, such as the amalgam and the coarse particles

of pulp. Most of the material containing silver and gold is

eaught here. The contratanque catches only the lighter particles,

which are much poorer, and are always kept separate, unless

found by assay to be of approximately the samevalue. The tails

from the contratanque run to waste. The materials caught in

both tanks are concentrated in the chuza, Fig. 1. Some amal-

gam, generally not less than 15 kilos., is caught here, the

amount varying with the care that has been taken in the washing.

*Phillips’ Gold and Silver, p. 344.

40) The Patio and Cazo Process.

Fig. 5. The tails from here are con-

PLANILLA (Concentrator) centrated on the planilla,* Fig.

CT! A é

pee Fiasco 5, which is a platform of mason-

é = les ry from one and a half to two-

USE Ne meters wide, and with a slope of

<a one meter in ten towards the

Midi p Maudie 2 iciice trough, which supplies a small

stream of slowly-running water. The wall at the npper side is

sloped, and furnishes a space to pile up the tails to be washed. The

workman, planillero, sits on a strip of board put across the water

trough, and with a horn spoon containing about .a quarter of a liter

throws the water upon the pile of tails. The operation is com-

menced at the lower left hand corner, and continued across the

planilla, going back again when the planilla has been crossed

to the lower left hand corner, and working always in the same

direction. The water is thrown in such a way as to spread out

as much as possible, but not to splash. When this has been re-

peated several times, the sand for about one meter from tlie

water-trough is thrown away. The heavy particles are thrown

up on the pile, and the operation recommenced. When the sup-

ply of tails is exhausted others are added. The result of the

washing is a small heap of black sulphurets, called polvillo. -

Fig. 6 . These are further concentrated in a

BOLICHE (Concentrating Bowl) = Wooden bowl called a boliche, Fig. 6,

which has the shape of an inverted

truncated cone 0.62 m. in diameter,

and 0.4 m. deep, which is a hand de-

vice in every way similar to the

keeve used in dressing copper ores

on Lake Superior,{ and in the con-

\\V 8 centration of gold ores in California.$

Seale 20:1 The Jdoliche is sometimes made

as deep as 0.8 m., and correspondingly large, though this

* Patio Process at St. Dimas... Trans, Am. Inst. Min. Eng., Vol. 11.

+ Annales des Mines, 6th series, vol. 20, plate II, Figs. 5 and 6.

t+ Metallurgical Review, Vol. 2, p. 400. § Engineering, Vol. 51, p. 404.

> ec co) S

The Patio and Cazo Process. 4]

is not usual. Water is put into the Joliche, and the sulphurets

added and stirred, and then allowed to settle. During the

settling it is tapped on the outside witha stick or mallet. The

heavy particles containing the sulphurets settle to the bottom,

and the sand is on the top. The water is soaked off with rags.

The sand is scraped off and thrown away. Below is a brownish

layer of poor sulphurets called colas, which are removed to be

roasted. Below them are the clean polviilo and a small quantity

of amalgam. The polvillo is sent to Europe with the high grade

ores for treatment. The roasting of the colas is done in an ordi-

nary pile with a central chimney. It is put in layers 0.25 m. thick,

and is used damp in order to be able to manage it better. The

cover is made of earth. The pile is set en fire, and when the

roasting is completed the half burned sticks are removed. Only

a part of the material is properly roasted, but it is all ground

in an arrastra and added to the ¢orta. In some places where

fuel is cheap, the roasting is done in a reverberatory furnace,

and is consequently much better done. There is always great

uncertainty in roasting in piles. ‘This roasted material was

formerly treated in a forta by itself; bnt it consumes a great

deal of mercury, and does not give very satisfactory results.

It is much better to mix it in the piles with the ore.

In some places, during the washing, a product 1s obtained

which contains gold and silver, and though there is not much

of it, it is richer in gold and silver than the original ores, and

also contains some Jittle amalgam. As the material is mostly

pyrites, it is concentrated, ground and roasted, and used as a

magistral. Sometimes 2 per cent. is obtained in this way.* Of

late years, in some haciendas, all the tails of the different opera-

tions have been treated by the Von Patera process. t

4, TREATMENT OF THE AMALGAM.

The liquid amalgam is carefully removed from the bottom of

the settler. All that caught in the the mercury traps is added

to it. This is carried to the mercury house, azogueria, and put

* Eng. Mining Inst., Vol. 33, p. 14.

+ Trans. Am. Inst. Min. Engs., June Meeting, 1883.

42 The Patio and Cazo Process.

into a large trough, originally always of stone, but now often

made of iron. When the whole has been collected, a large

amount of mercury, usually ten to fifteen per cent. of the quap-

tity of quicksilver used in the arrastra, is added to the amalgam

in order to clean it. It is covered with water to prevent splash-

ing, and carefully worked over. Whatever impurities rise to

the surface are removed with a cloth, and fresh water is again

added. . This operation is repeated. until the surface becomes

and remains bright. The amalgam is dried and weighed, and

is then put into a conical canvas bag, like those used in the

West, which is called manga, set over a receptacle made of

hide, pila, to catch the drippings, which, as they contain some

little silver, are of more value in the next charge than pure

mercury. This is put into flasks for preservation. ‘The amal-

gam, free from every thing except mercury, copella, after hanging

several hours, is ready for retorting.

At Chihuahua,* where very rich ores of native silver are

treated, the amalgam looks like a coarse sand, but by the ad-

dition of mercury the dirt is removed from it. This dirt, how-

ever, is very rich, and is further concentrated. When par-

ticularly pure silver is required, it is carefully washed, and

ground on a stone, in order to remove the sulphide of silver ; the .

result is a very pure amalgam, which yields silver purer than fine

bars. The amalgam cleaned with mercury is strained in canvas

cloths, and the quicksilver pressed out into small balls 0.05 m. to

0.06 m. in diameter, by rubbing them with the hands. This is

the only way they have been able to get very high grade silver.

Formerly, all the amalgam was beaten and pressed into an

iron mould, to make bricks of amalgam, dollos, of such a shape

that when six were placed together they formed a circular

cake with a round hole in the centre. One ton of these

was piled on iron supports, over a stone tank filled with water

to nearly the top of a copper or iron bell, capellina,t which is

0.90 m. high, and 0.45 m. in diameter. This left a space

0.02 m. between the amalgam and the bell which was low-

ered to its place by pulleys. A wall of adobes, leaving a

* Mining Commissioners’ Report, 1872, p. 437.

+ Annales des Mines, Vol. 20, Pl. 2, Fig. 2.

The Patio and Cazo Process. 4;

space 0.20 m. between the bell and the wall, was then built

around it and fired with charcoal for fifteen hours, and removed

when cold. The yield of silver was about 200 kilos., and the

charcoal used about 250 kilos. per charge. This process is now

abandoned.

In the more modern method, the strained amalgam is

charged into quicksilver-flasks from which the bottom has been

removed. Into these flasks others, open at both ends, are fitted soe

that the lower parts are beneath the surface of the water, in a

tank placed under the furnace. The two flasks are luted so

that the quicksilver has no outlet except into the water, where it

condenses, as the screw in the upper part of the upper flask has

been firmly set. The inside of the flask is then washed, with

milk of lime or lined with brown paper, to prevent the silver

from adhering to the sides. To be sure that the amalgam

fills the whole flask, it is first rammed in, and then pounded

Scale 20:1

SD apecin as

Se a

: Yy

SSssSs

< 77 \Y \Z : :

_. \ \ ee Lud La

LFS eh

a Gi 0

—= Set

GOOF “TG IT OF Hy

HALF SECTION ONC a } HALF ELEVATION

QUEMADERO FOR RETORTING SILVER AMALGAM.

Fig. 8.

down with a heavy mallet. 30 to 35 kilos. are charged in each

of the flasks, which are then set aside to drain off the ex-

cess of quicksilver, and to allow the amalgam to harden. As

eg : “ae sa

‘44. The Patio and Cazo Process.

soon as 8 to 4 flasks are ready, they are taken to the retorting

furnace, guemadero, Fig. 8, where they are set on end over holes

on the slab which forms the bottom of the furnace. This slab is

0.60 m. above the ground. The size of the furnace is very vari-.

able, depending on the amount to be treated. It may have

places for 8 to 10 retorts. The amalgam is kept in place by

four narrow strips of iron set into the mouth of the flask, and

bent so as to cross it beneath the amalgam. The space be-

tween the upper and lower flasks is covered with an iron plate

full of holes 0.005 m. in diameter, which is luted to both the upper

and lower flask. There is no danger of the amalgam falling

out, except with an improperly managed fire. ‘This furnace has

entirely superseded the old capellina. |

A wash of clay, about 0.005 m. thick, is put around the upper

flasks to protect them from the air. A brick wall laid up tempo-

rarily is then built round all the flasks, and a charcoal fire is made

inside of it. The first object of the fire is to dry the clay coating; it

is therefore made to burn very slowly at first, so as to make it dry

without cracking. When this his been done a brisk fire is made over

the whole of the flasks. Water is kept constantly flowing into

the tank below the flasks, both to keep up the supply and to keep

it cool. The mercury driven out of the amalgam falls into the

water and collects there.

The operation needs care. If the temperature is raised too

high, there is danger of melting the amalgam. If raised too

quickly, there is danger of. explosion from the rapid forma-

tion of the vapors of quicksilver. If the heat is not high

enough, the bullion is inipure from excess of mercury. As a pre-

caution against this, the purchaser has a right to heat the bars of

silver red hot to drive off any excess of mercury, but if the bars

melt while undergoing the process, the purchaser pays for them at

their weight before heating. If they do not, the weight after

heating is accepted. When the work is properly done, the silver

still contains one per cent. of mercury. The mercury collected

in the tank is not entirely free from silver, and must be strained.

The amalgam collected is called estrujon, is much drier than the

other amalgam, and is retorted by itself when enough has been

collected to make it worth while to do so.

The retort silver, plata pasta, is refined in a small reverbera-

The Patio and Cazo Process. 45

tory furnace built of adobes, and heated with wood, which receives

a charge of 300 kilos. of the crude bullion. This charge is refined

in four hours. A little litharge and lead are added to remove

the impurities, which are generally sulphur, arsenic, lead, iron,

and sometimes zinc. Borax and carbonate of soda are used as a

flux. The loss is seven per cent. of the crude bullion, and con-

sists mostly of quicksilver, but to some extent of silver.

The silver obtained is quite pure: it contains at San Dimas .994

of silver, .0033 of gold, leaving only .0026 for base metals. At

Chihuahua it is .998 from the arrastra, and .990 from the treat-

ment of the tails.* The bars weigh 35 kilos. The slags from

the refining furnace, with the tails from the tanks for washing

amalgam, and other products, are occasionally smelted in a shaft

furnace with the addition of galena, and the lead is used in refining

retort silver. :

The loss of mercury in retorting varies from two to six kilograms

perton. ‘The total loss of mercury in Mexico has been for many

years calculated on the supposition that it requires a loss of a

unit of mercury for every unit of silver obtained. This

being a fixed amount, is called consumido. Any amount a-

bove this which is not recovered is called perdida, or loss,

and is always attributed either to carelessness on the part

of the workmen, or to mechanical losses during the operation.

The losses, both the fixed and the variable, are always referred

to the Mexican mark, which is equal to 248.83 grams.

Consumido, - - - ; 248.83 grams.

Perdida, - - - - LAA Ao

Total loss, - - 373.20

The loss of mercury for sulphuretted ores of from $60 to $100

will be, under the most careful management, not less than four to

five kilograms. In some exceptional cases it has been three kilo-

grams for every kilogram of silver extracted. The richer the

ore the greater the loss. It may be averaged at one and a half

kilograms for every kilogram of silver produced. With ores

containing large amounts of native silver, the loss is proportion-

ately much less, and sometimes even lessin amount. The loss in

* Mining Commissioners’ Report for 1872, p. 488, Washington, D. C., 1873.

46. The Patio and Cazo Process.

silver varies from 20 to 25 per cent. of the assay value of the ore.

Some amalgamators claim that they can save as much as 80 or

even 85 per cent., but this is doubtful, even with the ores most

easily treated. When the ores contain much blende and galena -

the loss easily reaches 25 to 30 per cent., and if in addition to

this there is any amount of antimonial or arsenical sulphides, it

will reach as high as 40 per cent. A part of this loss is, of

course, counted with the loss of the amalgam, which is carried

off in fine particles. It could easily be reduced by better appli-

ances for catching the mercury, and better washing and concen-

tration, to catch a larger part of the pulp not acted on. But

there is a mechanical loss as well as a chemical one, which must

in any case be large. Just as soon as it is possible to introduce

all the modern methods of concentration, the conditions will

be such that other processes will take its place. Although

much has been done to improve it, no process with large

losses in the precious metal and excess of labor, can hope to

stand before increased facilities for transportatation. When

gold is contained in the ore as a sulphide, not more than 40 per

cent. is recovered; when it is free, 75 per cent. is often saved.*

The cost of the process will of necessity vary in different local-

ities under dissimilar circumstances, and with ores whose compo-

sition is not the same. The results vary from year to year.

Phillips gives the mean cost per ton for reducing these ores as

follows:t+

Cost oF TREATING ORES.

Coarse crushing in dry stamps and subsequent oe grinding in

arrastra, - - - : - - - $1.90

Manipulation in patio, - - - : - - 4.50

General expenses of management, - - - - 1.20

Repairs, - - - = - - - > 1.20

. $8.80

Sulphate of copper, - : - - - - $3.20

Salt (1.6 quintals per ton), - - - 6.50

Quicksilver (11 oz. per 8 oz. of iRet), - - - 6.50

$17.00

$25.00

* Eng. and Min. Jour., Vol. 33, p. 104.

+ Phillips’s Gold and Silver, 1867, p. 357.

The Patio and Cazo Process. 47

Mr. Kul* gives the cost in detail as follows, for a much more

recent period.

_ Cost OF GRINDING ONE TON OF ORE.

Mules, : : : : - $0.115

4 workmen, - - - - 0.148

1 mule-driver, : - : - 0.035

Repairs, . : - - 0.044

Night shifts, - - - - 0.208 ‘

$0.570

Cost PER TON oF WORKING TEN QUINTALS EAcH IN THIRTY ARRAS-

TRAS.

Mules, - - - - - $1.871

1foreman, - ae = s 0.142

1 helper, - - - - - 0.077

3 feeders, = - - 3 0.099

5 arrastra men, - - - - 0.219

3 watchmen, - - - - 0.132

3 men, : - - A - 0.099

Bottom-stones; - - - 0.116

Grinding-stones, - - - - 0.357

$3.112

Patio WORKING, PER Repaso.

Mules, _— - - - $0.029

7 workmen, - - - 0.021

$0.050

14 repasos at 5 cents, - - - 70

Salt, - = =. - - 1.55

Sulphate of copper, - : == ONG

Labor, - - - - : 0.17

$3.38

; SETTLERS AND DISTILLING.

“Mules, - - - - - $0.082

Various expenses, - - - 0.417

Charcoal, - - - - : 0.066

: $0.565

* Eng. and Min. Jour., Vol. 33, p. 105.

48 The Patio and Cazo Process.

GENERAL EXPENSES.

Salaries, - B 2 = 2 0.713

Rent, : : 0.270 ae

Repairs and miscellanéous,, - — - 0.384

$1.371

TOTAL COST OF WORKING PER TON. ¢

Cost of grinding one ton of ore, : : - = 02570

Cost per ton of working 10 quintals in 30 arrastras, : - 3.112

te | ee» Oe Ang avons : : : : - 3.3880

« « ** settlers and distilling, - - : : 0.565

<< « - ¢¢ salaries, rent, repairs, &c., easier ; = Sh eee

$8.998

This estimate takes no account of the mercury lost, estimating

this at about $7.00. This would make a cost of $16.00, a much

lower figure than that given by other authorities. Mr. Chism

gives as the cost of working a $60 ore in ten ton tortas as fol-

lows:*

Cost PER Ton oF 2,000 LBs.

Breaking per ton,+ : . - : : - - $1.58

Grinding, 2 : cae : : 1.40

Scraping arrastra to get out the eat amalgam, — - - . 13

Carriage of slimes from arrastra to patio, - - - .60

Mules hired, - - - - - : = OS

Labor, including driving and pages mules, spading and washing

torta, - : - : = : - 1.80

Salt at 6 Mexican dollars per carga of 98.3 5 litres, - . - 2.80

Sulphate of copper at $0.25 (Mex.) per pound, - : - - 1.88

Charcoal for eee and assaying at $0.37} + (Mex.) per arroba, - .83

Quicksilver at $0.624 (Mex.) per lb., - - 4.68

Salaries, general expenses, jailer keeping “ain feeding of mules, 6.66

Repairs, - - - - - - - 2.38

Concentration of sulphurets, — - : - - - - (eae

Total, - - - . - = - $27.58

_ The expense of working with ¢ortus of this size is much greater

than if the pile were more than twice as large. When the tortas

were of 19 tons and all the machines were driven by water

power, the expense was as follows:

* Trans. Am, Inst. Min. Eng., Vol. 11.

+ Breaking a ton of large ore costs $2.66, but as the smalls are also

worked the average cost is as stated.

The Patio and Cazo Process. 4Y

Cost PER Ton oF 2,000 LBS. IN WORKING A forta oF 19 Tons.

Breaking, grinding, and use of tools, - <) - : - $6.66

Amalgamators’ wages, - - - - : - 1.66

Scraping arrastra to get out gold amalgam, - <i. : - .16

Carrying and washing scrapings, - - - - : Jil

Concentrating tailings of ‘‘ : - - - : O07

Carrying slimes from arrastra to patio, - ~~ - : - 42

Mules and keeping, . - : - : . - 3.712

Labor, spading and mule-driving, - : - : : 1.60

a washing torta, - ~— - - - - - : 06

Charcoal for retorting silver, : - - : . AT

Concentrating tailings of torta, - - - - - 2.06

Materials, salt, 600 lbs at 8 cts.,— - : : - = 2.53

oa sulphate of copper, 125 Ibs at 25 cents, — - - - 1.65

ie precipitated ‘* Ee pe ao eae eae . - a>

quicksilver, Tea oes - = - 4.357

Vota. ¥* 2 < - 2 $26.91

There is not only a very great saving in doing the woik by

power, but in custom mills, to which these last expenses refer,

there is a considerable profit included in the cost, which will not

be less than from two to two and a half dollars per ton. It is

astonishing how such a process has been able to retain its hold

nearly three hundred years. In every country where it has been

introduced, it, like many another historical process, has yielded

before the advance of rapid means of communication, as this

undoubtedly willin Mexico. It costs but little to carry it out, and

it can be worked on alarge scale as well as a small one, the latter

having only this disadvantage, that it increases the loss. The

process requires peculiar conditions of climate, which adapt it

especially to hot countries. On account of the climatic condi-

tions it has been abandoned in the West, where it was formerly

used. It always works better on a hot day than on a cold one,

in summer than in winter. The cheapness of the plant more than

compensates for the time, as money in most of these countries

is scarce, while time is of no value. Working the tails by the

Von Patera process has, in some places, added to the yield in

silver and increased the profits. The Joss in reagents is easily

put up with, as it is the only means by which the precious metals

can be obtained. The method is only applicable to such ores

as contain the silver native, or as chloride, bromide or iodide,

50 The Patio and Cazo Process. 3 :

associated as they usually are with highly oxidized substances:

The presence of much sulphide renders the losses large.. The

process becomes difficult with the arsenio and antimonio sul-

phides, and impossible when there is much galena, blende,

tetrahedrite, or bournonite in the ores. Not the least of the dis-

advantages of the process is the facility with which other people

than the owners may make a clean-up, the only protection against

this being the difficulty of selling unrefined silver, especially in

small quantities. In very large works where much capital is in-

vested, the item of time is a matter of consequence, but there

seems to be no other process possible until transportation shall

become less difficult.

THE CAZO PROCESS

There seems to be no doubt that the patio process was in use

in South America up to about the commencement of this cen-

tury. It was still used there, to a very limited extent, until

the year 1830, at which time it seems to have been quite generally

given up, probably on account of the very large quantity of negros

or sulphurous ores which began to be found. It was replaced

in part by the Cazo, or caldron method, which is still in use

there, and in some parts of Mexico, and partly by a new method

in waich the copper bottom was replaced by an iron one, and

finally by still another process, which, while it imitated the pan

amalgamation method so far as the machinery was concerned,

added the chemicals which were supposed to form in the Patio

already prepared. We shall briefly describe all these processes.

The Cazo process was invented in Chili, in the year 1609,*

by a priest, Albaro Alonzo Barba, who, in his description of his

own process, insists that the vessel in which the work is done

should be made entirely of copper, though this was long since

found not to be necessary. ‘The ores to which this method is

applied are the rich surface ores—chlorides, bromides and iodides,

which, if they are not rich enough, must be concentrated on the

planilla. ‘The process yielded nearly the whole of the silver which

isin them. ‘The loss in mercury is from twice to two and a

half times the total quantity of silver contained. The operation

* Percy’s Metallurgy of Gold and Silver, Part I, p. 656.

~ -

The Patio and Cazo Process. 51

lasted not much over two hours, and gave tails which did not con-

tain more than $3 to $4 to the ton, but it was only applicable to

ores which contain $80 and upward per ton, free from sulphur.

‘This process was formerly used in connection with the patio.

The ores were first stamped and ground in the arrastra. ‘This is

done as a preliminary to a concentration. The grinding is not

done so fine that there is danger of any large part of the silver

being carried off in the washings. From the arrastra the pulp is

carried to the planilla, where it is concentrated to such an ex-

tent that the concentrates do not represent more than two or

three per cent. of the original ore. These concentrates are treat-

ed in the cazo, while the tails, if rich enough, were formerly

treated on the patio. ‘There are two processes known under the

name of the cazo, distinguished from each other by the size of

the vessel and the mechanical means of doing the work. ‘The

cazo is the smallest vessel. The larger one, constructed on

exactly the same principle, is called a fondon. The process

itself is very simple and rapid. It consists in boiling the concen-

trates, keeping them constantly agitated with salt and sulphate

of copper, to which mercury is added, and then treating the

amalgam.

The cazo, as originally invented, was a round vessel made en-

tirely of copper, but was afterwards replaced by a vessel, at first

made of stone, and then of wood, with a copper bottom turned

up at the sides. This vessel was originally quite small.

Its dimensions were: diameter above, 1 m; diameter below, 0.60

m.; depth 0.45 m. The thickness of the copper bottom was 0.05 m

to 0.06 m. This was set over a fireplace without grate, bars or chim-

nev, the smoke going out where the fuel was put in. A cazo of such

very small dimensions could treat only about 50 kilos. at a time.

To treat the ore, water sufficient to make a thin pulp with

the charge, was introduced. The fire was lighted, the water

brought to a boil, and salt amounting to from 5 to 15 per cent.

of the weight of the ore was then added. The workman then

rubbed the bottom of the cazo with a piece of wood attached

to a long pole, to keep the copper surface perfectly free.. If the

sult had been added before the ebullition of the pulp, it would

have collected on the bottom, from which it would have been

difficult to separate it. As soon as all the salt is dissolved, the first

ae “

52 The Patio and Cazo Process.

addition of mercury is made. This will generally be introduced in

several portions; one quarter only being added at first. In ten or

fifteen minutes an assay is taken, with an open horn attached toa

long handle, so as to pick out the heavy parts of the ore and amal--

gam. This is washed, and if the amalgam shows itself as a

clear gray sand, polvo, the charge is ready for the second addi-

tion of mercury. The same quantity as before is added, the

heat and movement being kept up. In-an hour or two after

the start, another assay is taken, and another addition of mereu-

ry made, and so on until an amalgam containing two parts of

mercury for one of silver results. The operation is then con-

sidered as finished. The amalgamator, cazeador, takes a last

assay, praueva en crudo, which he washes to get ont the gan-

gues, then adds a large excess of mercury to dissolve out the

amalgam, separates it from the tails, and then examines it by’

rubbing it against the sides of the vessel to see if any of the

ores remain, If they do, the operation must continue; if not,

and the amalgam remains fluid, it is stopped. At the end of six

hours the cperation 1s complete. ‘The muddy material is run off

into outside receptac'es, and what remains in the cazo is dipped

out, and treated in dateas with an amvuunt of mercury equal to

that which has already been used.

It is of the greatest importance, during the whole of the

operation, to prevent anything from adhering to the bottom.

If the salt was introduced before ebullition took place, it

would collect on the bottom, and the apparatus would have to

be emptied before it could be removed. It is more especially

important to prevent any adherence of mercury, which would

prevent the action of the salts of silver on the copper, and

thus make the amalgamation progress: very slowly.. It would

besides cause a great loss in mercury, as it alone, and not the

copper, would reduce the silver salts. If the proportion of the

mercury and silver are as two to one, no adherence of the

mercury takes place. 3

The cazo was replaced by a much larger vessel,* 2.15 m. diame-

ter above, and 1.80 m. below, and 0.85 m. deep, called a fondon.

* Ann. des Mines, 6s., Vol. 20, p. 216, Pl. III, Fig. 7.

The Patio and Cazo Process. 53

‘The bottom is made of impure cast copper, and is 0.18 m. to 0.20 m.

thick, 1.80 m. in diameter, and 0.18 m. deep. On the inside of the

rim of the basin a place is cut out to receive the staves, which rest

on the bottom of the cut made in the rim of the copper basin.

These staves are 0.70 m. long, and are held in position by iron

hoops. All the joints between the copper and wood are made

tight with clay, and then adobesare built up around the whole

to a thickness of 0.45 m. In the centre a raised space is pro-

vided for the pivot of the upright arbor which carries two arms,

one 0.45 m. from the bottom, of a little less diameter than the

interior of the fondon, and the other at 0.85 m., projecting beyond

‘it for the purpose of hitching a single mule to it. The lower

arm carries two pieces of copper, each of which weighs 140 kilos.,

which are used as mullers. ‘They must be so arranged as to rub

over the whole surface of the copper bottom to keep anything

from becoming attached toit, as it would otherwise be impos-

sible to grind with such soft materials as a copper muller. The

whole is placed over a furnace with grate bars, on which the in-

ferior fuel of the country is used. Such a fondon will last for

ten years. The cost is*

60 quintals of copper for bottom, at $20, - - $1,200

Two mullers, - - - : - - 120

25 staves at 38 reals, - - : - - 9

Furnace, - - : - = - 40

W ood-work for the mules, - ~ = - 10

House, - - - - - - 200

$1,579

When everything is ready, the fondon is charged with 500 to

600 kilos. of rich ore, and 30 to 40 kilos. of the powder of unwashed

ore, and sufficient water to form a thin mud. Fireis kindled on

the grate, and the muller set in motion. At the end of two hours

the material is boiling; 52 kilos. of salt, or about ten per. cent.

of the weight of the ore, areadded. ‘This relatively large amount

isnecessary, as the success of the process depends to a great de-

gree upon the quantity of salt used, and the velocity of the

mullers. With the richest ores, the quantity of salt does not ex-

* Ibid., p. 217.

~ om 7

i 2 we

‘ ian © er

: F

54 The Patio and Cazo Process.

ceed 25 per cent., and whatever may be the necessity for it, the

number of turns of the muller will hardly exceed ten. Abont

half the weight of silver contained in the ore is then added in

mercury, and the mullers set in motion at the rate of ten turns

per minute. The amalgamation commences at once. At the end

of an hour an assay is taken from the bottom, taking care to

take it ahead of the muller. If the amalgam washed out looks

like light grey sand, it is composed of two of mercury for one of

silver; the same quantity of mercury is again added, and at the

end of an hour another assay is made, and so on, until the

amalgam, even after it has been worked in the fondon for half

an hour, shows an excess of mercury. ‘The prueva en crudo is —

then made, and if any ore is found, the operation is continued

half an hour without any addition of mercury. At the end of

six hours the operation will generally be finished. |

If there is an excess of mercury, there is danger that the

sides of the vessel will be attacked; if there is no excess,

but if the velocity of the muller is decreased, the copper

and mercury become alloyed, and the bottom of the fondon be-

comes coated with avery thin coating of silver amalgam which

is very difficult to remove. As the copper surface is much di-

minished, the operation is very considerably lengthened. ‘There

is also danger that the mercury will flour, and the loss in silver

will be very great. ‘here is only one remedy for this, which is

to empty the fondon, and scrape the bottom clean. It is very easy

to prevent this accident by adding the mercury carefully and in

small quantities at a time, and by keeping up a uniform but

rapid motion of the mallers. With these precautions, the work

is very nearly independent of the skill and intelligence of the

men. The results are quite uniform, and are obtained in a very

short time. |

As the reactions are not performed at the expense of

the mercury, there is no occasion for any loss of it. If the

operation is well carried out, all the mercury used should

be collected at the end of the process; but this is never

done. Some of it is floured, some of it volatilized, so that the

loss is counted at about two per cent. The reason why there is

such a small loss probably is that the work is done hot. ‘The

loss in silver is variable. The ores almost always contain sul-

The Patio and Cazo Process. 5d

phides more or less rich in silver, which are not acted on by this

method. The tails vary from twenty-five to forty dollars to the

ton, so that the fondon process can generally be used only as a pre-

liminary method, and the patio, or some other process, is usually

associated with it. ‘The residues remaining in the fondon consist

for the most part of the oxides of lead and iron, and some sul-

phurets containing silver and floured mercury. ‘These are

washed in large wooden bowls in a water-tight vat, adding as

much mercury by weight as there is material to be treated, in

order to collect the flour. The amalgam is treated as usual.

In Mexico, the slimes which have been removed are put into

catch-pits where the excess of water evaporates. They are then

made into small fortas, which are trodden by men. Two to twoand

a half per cent. of salt is added to them, but no magistral, for the

water coming out of the fondon contains enough copper salts to

do the whole of the work. The amalgamation is conducted as

usnal, except that it is very slow, lasting often as long as three

months. The loss in silver is as much as 20 to 25 per cent. The

mercury used is 125 to 150 per cent. of the silver contained.

This method is one of the most rapid and least expensive of the

Mexican processes. The cost is given below:*

Cazeador (amalgamator), - - - - $0.500

Atizador (furnace man), - - - - 0.280

Wood for heating the furnace, : : - 1.562

Salt, 75 lbs., at $6 for 300 Ibs., - . - 1.500

Mules, - : - - - - - 0.187

Mercury, two per cent., loss, - - . 0.416

Cost of distillation, etc., age - - - 0.250

$4,665

In a single operation 1,200 pounds of ore are treated, which

is 9.33 reals per charge.

If to these the expenses of dressing and concentration on tho

planilla are added, calculating the expenses in grammes of fine

silver per ton, we have as follows:

* Ibid., p. 221.

56 The Patio and Cazo Process.

Grammes,

Crushing with mule power, — - : : - 17.360

ia in arrastra, - - - - 57.860

Washing on the planilla, - : tie - 17.360

{ Labor : 34.720

| Power - - 8.657

MBH | Fuel 72.313

Amalgamation. ) Salt ; _ 69.443

| Mercury 19.258

| Distillation - 11.5738

215.964

Cost in grammes per ton al ini? . 308.544

The very friable nature of the gangues has much to do with

the small cost of the concentration. The cost elsewhere in

erammes is:

Grammes

Cost of extraction and sorting, - - -. 92.59

Transportation, : - - - 69.44

Treatment, - - - - : -- 231.47

393.50

This includes the cost of mercury, and shows a minimum for

the metallurgical treatment. The treatment of these ores gives

400 grammes in the cazo, which pays the cost, the profit being

in the treatment of the tails.

Anattempt was made in Chili* to treat rich sulpburous ores

with sulphate of copper and salt, but though it was a rapid process,

and the tails were poor, the enormous losses in mercury caused it

to be entirely abandoned. It was replaced by a method no longer

used, but which is interesting as showing how another grew out

of it. | |

The ores upon which the process is used are the rich bromides,

chlorides and iodides of the upper part of the veins. ‘The gan-

gue is oxide of iron, the carbonates of baryta and lime, and some

clay. They contain generally from $300 to $400 of silver to the

ton. When such ores as these became rare, some other process

had to be used. This method caused the almost complete aban-

donment of the Cazo process proper; and it was not until the

ores became so very poor that it was no longer applicable, that it

* Revue Universelle des Mines, Series 1, Vol. 31, p. 489.

The Patio and Cazo Process. D7

was replaced by the process now used in the vicinity of Copiapo.

The ores were reduced to pulp by methods analogous to that

inthe patio process, from which this one originated. The pulp is

carried away by astream of water to settling-tanks 2 m. in diame-

ter and 3 m. deep, made of sheet iron, the number in use de-

pending on the size of the works. As fast as one of these set-

tling-tanks is full, the stream is turned into another, and so on.

The tanks, when full, are left from eight to twelve hours. The

clear water above is then run off, and the mud below carried to

the ¢imas. ‘These are wooden tanks with cast-iron bottoms.

They are 1.80 m. in diameter, and 1.20 m. deep. In the centre

is an axis which carries a muller, which runs on or close to the

bottom of the fina. This machine was undoubtedly sug-

gested by the arrastra. The charge for each fina is one

and a half tons of pulp. It is introduced into the tina

while the muller is still. Mercury is added, to about twenty

times the amount of silver contained in the ore, and the muller

put into very slow motion, not over four times a minute. At

the end of twenty hours the amalgamation was supposed to be

completed. A stream of water was then introduced, and the light

particles were thus carried off. When the water ran clear, the

particles being too heavy to remain suspended in it, the mercury

and amalgam were removed through a hole made in the fina for

that purpose, and collected in a cast-iron vessel called a cocha.

A complete operation, including the grinding, lasts about 60

hours. The cost for ores yielding $80 to the ton is $10 per

ton, including the loss in mercury. The tails usually contain

from $8 to $10 aton. They are not allowed to contain more

than from $25 to $30. As the ores themselves are very pure, the

silver obtained is about .990 fine. So long as the ores were rich

und pure, little was done toimprove the process, but as they be-

came poorer and more impure, the tails grew constantly richer,

and it became necessary not only to treat them, but to treat the

poor ores, desmontes, which had been thrown aside as not worth

treatment. Barrel amalgamation was tried, but failed, as did

also the attempt to chlorinize the ores and dissolve out the chlo-

ride of silver, as the ammonia cost too much. Recourse was

then had to the abandoned Cazo process, which, with a number

of modifications, proved successful.

58 The Patio and Cazo Process.

The process which took the place of this* is a very simple one,

applicable to all the ores of silver except argentiferous sulphides

of copper, galena, or blende, and to ores which contain more than

one per cent. of free arsenic, which causes great losses in the

mercury. ‘he inventor of it is not known, but it has been in

constant use about Copiapo since 1862. *y

The ores must be carefully sorted, so as to separate ‘hea into

different classes, keeping the especially rich ores by themselves, as

these are worked much more rapidly than those of lower grade.

The difference of time in the treatment of the different ores

more than makes up for the trouble it costs.

The rich ores, including the sulphides, are treated in copper

tanks with sulphate of copper, salt and mercury. The solutions

are all made by steam, and beforehand, five per cent. of the

weight of the mineral being added in salt. ‘The sulphate of cop-

per solution is made up to 20° B., and to it salt is added until no

more will dissolve. The sulphate of copper is in this way trans-

formed into chloride of copper, and the soda to sulphate of soda.

When the liquor is saturated, itis decanted into large wooden

tanks, and metallic copper, usually old copper sheathing, is put

into the liquor, which is heated to ebullition by a current of

steam at a pressure of three atmospheres. ‘This causes the cop-

per to be attacked, and a sub-chloride of copper is formed which

is used in the process. The operation is finished when, by taking

about 50 c. c. of the liquor and putting it into a liter of water,

the oxychloride precipitates as a white powder, leaving the liquor

colorless. The sub-chloride is then formed. ‘The salt requires

one vat, the sulphate of copper two, and the snb-chloride one, in

their preparation. When the sub-chloride is formed it must be

used as soon as possible, to prevent the formation of the oxy-

chloride, and in order to do this as far as can be done, the solu-

tion is slightly acidulated with sulphuric acid.

A cast-iron Chilian mill, ¢rapiche, each wheel of which weighs

four tons, is used for grinding the ores. The bottom of the mill is

called solera. This is usually made of cast-iron, but sometimes of

steel. The mill turns at the rate of 10 to 12 turnsa minute. The

ore, which is ground sufficiently fine, is carried off by a current of

* Revue Universelle des Mines, 1 Series, Vol. 31, p. 498.

The Patio and Cazo Process. 59

water, the quantity of which is regulated according to the fine-

ness to which the ore is to be ground. ‘This water is made to

pass through slime-pits five meters by two meters, and one

meter Jeep, enough to run off perfectly clear from the last one.

When one of the tanks is full, the stream is turned on to another.

The full one is left for 8 to 10 hours. ‘The clear water is then

drawn off, and the pulp thrown out with shovels upon an area

called cancha, to dry. When the ore is sufficiently dry, it is

charged into barrels similar to the Freiberg amalgamation bar-

rels. ‘They are of different sizes, their capacity being from one

to four tons, the larger the better. ‘Those which hold four tons

are 1.80 m. by 1.50, with a thickness of stave of 0.075 m. ‘To

the four tons of ore, enough of the salt solution is added to form —

a thick mud. The quantity of magistral to be added depends on

the kind of gangue, much more being required for carbonate of

lime than for clay or oxide of iron, as the former decomposes

the sub-chloride. For an ore of about $80 to the ton, and a

variable gangue, 28 to 30 litres of the magistral are added.

‘I'he barrels are turned from twenty minutes to half an hour

to make the mud quite uniform. Mercury amounting to from

20 to 25 times the quantity of silver contained, is then added.

If there is a large amount of chloride or bromide of silver in the

ore, twenty-five per cent of the weight of the silver contents of

the ore is added in lead. This is amalgamated with mercury

before it is introduced, and has for its object to prevent the for-

mation of chloride and bromide of mercury, and a consequent

loss. Lead is very easily attacked by the chlorine and bromine

set free—much more easily than mercury. ‘This saves the

the mercury from being lost as chloride, and also prevents a me-

chanical loss, as the chloride of mercury, once formed, envelops

the globules of mercury and prevents both their coming together

in amass and their action on the silver. Besides this, the mer-

cury ismuch more easily reduced to a powder by this means, and

is kept so, causing a great loss. This simple device of using lead

reduced the loss in mercury, when the chloride and bromide ores

were used, from 150 per cent. to 25 per cent. As soon as

the mercury is introduced, the barrels are turned at the rate of

four to five turns a minute for six hours. The operation is then

complete. Water is added in considerable quantities, the barrel

60 The Patio and Cazo Process.

being turned for a short time, and the tails, amalgam and mer-

cury discharged as in the Freiberg process. The amalgam re-

covered is not pure. It contains oxide of copper, produced by

the action of the lime of the gangue on the chloride of copper,

and the sulphides of copper produced by the action of the

sulphate of copper on the sulphide of silver. These must be

separated, the one by mechanical means, the other by chemi-

eal action. ‘The first is done in a tina. The amalgam is

charged with ten per cent. of fresh mercury. Water is added,

and the muller is made to revolve at the rate of sixteen

turns a minute. When the water which comes off is entirely

clear, all the sulphide and a part of the oxide of copper will

have been removed. ‘To remove the oxide, all the water of the -

tina isrun off, and two per cent. of carbonate of ammonia is ad-

ded. The muller is revolved for five hours. At the end of that

time it isstopped, and the amalgam washed with water. If this

has been properly done no oxide will be left. The amalgam is

distilled in a capellina. The mercury which is strained from

the amalgam becomes little by little quite impure. After it has

been used five or six times, it amalgamates very slowly. It is

then purified by adding to i1t.20 grams of sodium amalgam for

every 100 kilos. of impure mercury.

The resulting silver, pina, is refined in a reverberator y fur-

nace. It contains some arsenic, which is extracted by the iron

of the tools, and floats on the surface of the bath and is removed.

The method of refining does not differ in other respects from

that used elsewhere. ‘The silver obtained is 980 fine. By this

process, tails which do not contain more than $6 to $5 to the ton,

and ores of from $10 upward, are worked. When the ores do not

contain more than $80 to the ton, the tails do not contain much

more than two to three dollars. Plenty of good water isa ne-

cessity for such works, both for purposes of washing aid for

power if possible.

To treat eight tons of ore in twenty-four hours, requires an

area of 500 square meters for the ores, and one of 1,000

square meters for drying the pulp; two Chilian mills requir-

ing about six horse-power; two settling tanks, and two amalga-

mation barrels requiring about eight horse power; a vat to col-

lect the water from washing the barrels, to recover the floured

mercury; one trough for washing the amalgam; one distilling

a ool oat +

The Patio and Cazo Process. 6]

furnace; one reverberatory furnace for refining the silver; a

tank for the preparation of the magistral, with a three-horse

power boiler attached; two vats for dissolving the sulphate of

copper; a vat with hydraulic cement to make the salt solution,

with a boiler for boiling it; a syphon for clarifying the liquors,

which must all be treated with lime to precipitate the copper

contained in them ;—these constitute the machinery and appa-

ratus for the works. The cost of treating a ton of ore of about

$40, not including interest nor sinking fund, would be—

Crushing, - E : E : : $1.60

Mercury, magistral and salt, —- . ; : 4.00

Purifying the amalgam, . - - - 04

Distillation, - - . - - - 04

Fusion and firing, — - - . - - 09

Various expenses - - - - 1.00 to 1.10

$6.87

The whole operation is yery simple,—quicker. and with less

loss, than the barrel, more certain in its reactions than the patio,

and appleable to almost all the ores found in Chil. It is even

cheaper, under some circumstances, than the lead fusion.

62 The Patio and Cazo Process. |

GLOssARY OF TERMS USED IN THIS ARTICLE... ~

Adobes,

Arrastra,

Arrastra de cuchara,

Arrastra de marca,

Arrastra de mula,

Arroba,

Atizador,

Azogue,

Azogueria,

Azoguero,

Bafio,

Batea,

Batea apuradora,

Bolichar,

Boliche,

Bollos,

Bonanza,

Cabezilla,

Cabezuela,

Cajetes,

Caliche,

Calichoso,

Calor de frio,

Cancha,

Capellina,

Carga,

Cazeador,

Cazo,

Ceja,

Sun-dried bricks. ,

Mexican mill for grinding ore.

A spoon arrastra.

A large arrastra.

An arrastra worked by mules.

Mexican weight of 40 lbs.

Furnace-man.

Quicksilver.

The mercury-house.

The amalgamator. _

Excess of mercury used in the forfa.

A bowl.

Wooden bowl floating on the Pila apura-

dora to receive the cabezilla.

Treatment in doliche.

Bowl for concentrating.

Triangular bricks of amalgam.

Rich pocket in a vein.

Residue after washing the forta.

Concentrates rich in gold and silver. °

Walled receivers for the ground slimes.

(See lameros. )

Feldspar.

Feldspathic.

Steam caused by the difference between the

heat of the pile and of the air.

Space for drying shmes.

Bell covering Jollos while distilling off the

the mercury.

Mexican weight of 300 lbs.

Amalgamator.

A vessel with a copper bottom, for heat-

ing and amalgamating the ore.

Silvery-white amalgam.

Chuza,

Colas,

Cocha,

Colorados,

Comalillos,

Consumido,

Contratanque,

_Copela,

Copelilla,

Cuchara,

Debil,

Descargadora,

Desecho,

Despoblado,

Desmontes,

Ensalmorar,

Estrujon,

Estufa,

Ferro blanco,

Fondon,

Fuerte,

Galeme,

‘Galera,

Granza,

Granza de llunque,

Guija,

Guijoso,

Hacienda,

Tjadas,

Incorporo,

The Patio and Cazo Process. 63

Washer or settler.

Brown sulphurets above the polvillo in

the doliche.

A cast-iron vessel.

Colored ores containing silver.

Calculation furnaces for making magistral.

Fixed loss of mercury.

Second settling-tank.

Dry amalgam in bag after draining.

Zinc blende.

A hollowed spoon-shaped float on the ar-

rastra. ,

Term applied to amalgam when very fluid.

Discharging tank, from which the slimes

are run off last.

Broken-up mercury. The attacking of

the amalgam by the sulphur, etc.,

causing loss of silver.

Ore with much gangue,

Poor ores.

The addition of salt.

Amalgam strained from the mercury col-

lected in the basin of the furnace.

Stove for evaporating the mercury from

the amaigam.

Arsenopyrite.

A large cazo.

Strong; applied to amalgam needing more

mercury.

Lead cupellation furnace for silver.

A long shed on each side of the patio.

Coarse sand from _stamping-mill.

Third class ore.

Quartz.

Quartzose.

Establishment for treating ores.

Assays of two to five pounds.

Mixing the magistral and mercury in the

torta.

64 The Patio and Cazo Process.

Insalmoro,

Jicara,

Jules,

Lagune,

Lama,

Lameros,

Lava,

Lavadero,

Limadura de plata,

Lista,

Magistral,

Manga,

Marc,

Marmajas,

Metal calichoso,

Metal de beneficio,

Metal de exportacion,

- Metal hecho,

Metal de primera

clase,

Metal gabarro,

Metal granza,

Metal de labores,

Metal de llunque,

Monton,

Molino,

Morteros,

Negros,

Oroche,

Pasilla,

Patio,

Salting the toréa.

A small vessel or bow! in which le assay

sample is washed and the oe

tested.

Tailings.

“A small lake.

Shimes.

Shme pits; walied receivers for the ground

slimes. (See cajetes. )

Washing the forta..

The ordinary settler;

Dry silver amalgam.

Tail of impure mercury.

Roasted copper pyrites, sulphate of cop-

per, etc., used to reduce silver ores im

the torta.

Canvas bag to drain amalgam.

Mexican weight for weighing silver _

gold, eight ounces.

Concentrated sulphides.

Feldspathic ore.

Second class ore worked on the patio.

First class ore ready for sale.

Hand-picked rich ore. —

First class ore ready for sale.

washing apparatus.

First and second class ore, from the size

of an egg to that of an or ee

Fine ore, smalls.

Smalls from the workings of the mine.

Smalls from the cleaners.

Mexican weight varying from .75 to 1.62

tons.

Stamp-mill for ore.

Stam ping-mills.

Black ores of silver.

Bullion after retorting.

Dry silver amalgam.

Amalgamation court.

The Patio and Cazo Process. 65

Perdida,

Pila,

Pila apuradora,

Pina,

Planilla,

Planillero,

Plata,

Plata cornea ama-

rillia,

Plata cornea blanca,

Plata cornea verde,

Plata mixta,

Plata negra,

Plata pasta,

Plata pifia,

Plata verde,

Platillo,

Plomo,

Polvillo,.

Polvo,

Precipitado,

Prueva en crudo,

Quebradero,

Quemadero,

Quemazon,

Quintal,

Raspa,

Raspadura,

Raspando,

Relaves,

Rendido,

Repaso,

Loss of quicksilver beside the corsemido.

A trough of hide.

Tank to receive the residues from the

washing-tanks.

Retort silver.

Inclined platform to concentrate tailings.

Operator on planilla.

Silver.

lodyrite.

Kerargyrite.

Embolite.

Alloy of gold and silver.

Argentite.

The spongy bars of silver after retorting.

Silver after retorting.

Bromyrite.

Earthen plate for testing the slimes.

Galena.

Rich black sulphurets left on planilla.

Fine grained amalgam from cazo.

Metallic copper precipitated by iron or

zinc.

An assay from the cazo.

Breaker or crusher.

Distillation furnace; retort.

Black decomposed ore.

A hundred pounds.

That portion of the precious metals ob-

tained by scraping the arrastra, or the

patio.

Scrapings.

Scraping; removing the amalgam from

the arrastra by scraping.

Material remaining after the washing of

the dortas. (See polvillo.)

Term applied to ¢orta, when the amalga-

mation is concluded.

‘Treading of the ore in the /orta.

66. The Patio and Cazo Process. 7

Rosiclara,

Saltierra,

Solera,

Tahona,

Tahonero,

Tanque,

Tentadura,

Tierras de labores,

Tierras de llunque,

Tina,

Tina cargadora,

Torta,

Tosa,

Trapiche,

Trilla,

Voladora,

Voltear la torta,

Ruby silver. .

Impure salt from lagunes.

Cast iron bottom of a Chilian mill.

A spoon arrastra. 3

Man in charge of the tahona or andere.

First settling-tank.

Assay.

Smalls from the workings of the mine.

(See Metal granza de labores.)

Smalls from the cleaners. (See Metal

granza de llunque.)

A circular tank; a round dolly-tub.

Tank into which the slimes are first dis-

charged.

_ Heap of slimes on the patio.

Grinding-space in the arrasira.

Chilian mill.

Heap of slimes on the patio. (See Torta.)

A muller.

Spading: turning the ¢orta.

Upon a Fourth Monobromphenol. 67

Il.—Upon a Fourth Monobromphenol.

BY FE. <PITTICA,

OF THE UNIVERSITY OF MARBURG; CORRESPONDING MEMBER N. Y. A. S.

Translated by Prof. Frederick Stengel, New York.

Read December 3d, 1883.

In spite of the circumstance, that besides the previously* pre-

pared isomeric nitrobenzoic acids, there have been obtained,

the year 188], by myself, two new mononitro-phenols,t the very

existence of which is altogether inconsistent with the adoption

of Kekulé’s benzol-hypothesis, the adherents of this hypothesis

insist upon taking up a position in regard to the new facts of a

purely negative or silent character; and Kekulé himself, who

had not yet published any investigations of his own in opposi-

tion to mine, declares in his Manual{ that I had discovered the

new nitrobenzoic acids by peculiar artifices, which consisted

essentially in my avoiding with much care all methods of venus

cation adopted by other chemists.

However weighty this reproach may be, when it comes from

one. Who is looked upon as the first authority on the subject of

the chemistry of aromatic compounds, every man free from pre-

judice must, after having actually perused my treatises, become

convinced that in truth this reproach is undeserved. For, as

we all know, no conclusion can be correct if the premises are

false, and the statement of the use of ‘‘ peculiar artifices, etc.,

has as yet never been proved by any one. ‘The progress of sci-

ence has always brought along methods that may appear to be

artifices.

Nobody will deny that cyanate of ammonia is different from

urea, though the ‘‘ artifice” of preparing the former consists

* Journal f. prakt. Chem (2), 17, 184.

+ The same ©), 24, 1.

t 1881, Vol. 2, 304.

68 Upon a Fourth Monobromphenol.

simply in the exclusion of water; that accordingly it could also

here be said that cyanate of ammonia did not exist. So, too,

according to the usual method (by means of hydrochloric acid

in an alcoholic solution), or also, from its silver-salt, by ethyl- .

iodide containing iodine, maleic acid* does not give its charac-

teristic ether, but that of fumaric acid, while maleie acid-ether

is formed only where special precautions are taken, and so forth.

These are facts which are undisputed, and quite analogous to

those discovered by me. |

‘In the following, however, I believe I have furnished new

proofs for maintaining in good faith the existence of chemically

pure substances derived from benzol, which are not possible ac-

cording to the benzol-hypothesis. ‘This time the methods of

preparation are also less difficult than before, and special ‘arti-

fices” of treatment are not needed. We may therefore be con-

fident that we can convince ourselves, with less trouble, of the

correctness of my results.

The new compounds prepared by me, are a fourth monobrom-

phenol and its derivatives. In regard to the new nitro-deriva-

tives of benzol, it might have been concluded, though on insuf-

ficient evidence, that the isometry of benzoic acid, in respect to

its phenol derivatives. was to be traced back to a different struc-

ture of the nitro-group NO, itself. It was therefore important

for me to prepare adequate new derivatives of benzol, of which,

from the very beginning, the structure of the ‘lateral series ”

could not be discussed. Such bodies are the halogen derivatives

of phenol, and therefore, after very wearisome and lengthy ex-

periments, not having succeeded in preparing a new iodophenol,

I endeavored subsequently, and with success, to obtain a fourth

monobromphenol. Moreover, I had already proved the existence

of a fourth oxybenzoic acid. +

In what way the investigations made hitherto concerning the

equivalence of the benzol-hydrogen, or the internal arrangement

of the atoms in the benzol-molecule, will stand criticism, I

have discussed before.{ Meanwhile, new facts have come to my

* Jahresb. d. Chem., 1878, 713 ; 1879, 688.

+ The same, 1878, 757.

+ Journal f. prakt. Chem. (2), 17, 428, etc. ; (2), 24, 2.

Upon a kourth Monobromphenol. 69

knowledge which confirm my views. Menschutkin*® explained

already, in 1877, when speaking of his experiments on the forma-

tion of ether, that aromatic compounds behave simply like “ non-

saturated ” compounds; hence there could not be the question

of a specially-constructed ‘‘main substance. Brithl,t in his

treatise on the ‘‘ thermal and optical properties of liquid organic

compounds,” arrived at the conviction that the so-called “ double

bonds” of the hydrocarbons do nodt signify a more intimate,

but, on the contrary, a weaker attraction of the atoms in respect

to the simple chain—an explanation which, in the first place,

must put in question the constitution of benzol according to the

prevailing opinion.

Goldschmidt} recognized, in his investigation upon the action

of ‘*molecular” silverupon carbon-chlorides, that the affinities

of carbon are not equivalent—results with which my own inves-

tigations are in perfect harmony.

To what monstrosities in general the upholding at any cost of

the benzol-hypothesis may lead, Schoonmaker and Van Mater§

have but lately shown. Because the formation of their isomeric

fluid p—dibrom-mononitro-benzol from p—dibrombenzol, can-

not be harmonized with the hypothesis, they suppose, in a simple

nitration, a so-called atom-wandering within the molecule, and

determine also most accurately (p—dibrom-mononitro-benzol

being converted by sulphuric acid into the liquid isomere),

that this atom-wandering couid only take place after the intro-

duction of the nitro-group. ‘To seek to support a hypothesis

with such forced suppositions, can under no circumstances be of

any advantage to it.

Every advance of science Sects generally, in a simplification

of the fundamental ideas. So it was in abandoning the notions

about the philosopher’s stone, the tartarus, the alkahest,

phlogiston and the vital force. And so, likewise, when the be-

lef in the equivalence of the carbon-affinities is completely

abandoned—as we may expect in not too long a time—not a

* Jahresb. d. Chem., 1877, 323.

+ The same, 1881, 1108, etc.

+ The same, 1881, 375, etc.

S The same, 1881, 541.

10 Upon a Fourth Monobromphenol.

complication, but a simplification of the chemical notions will

be manifest.

IsomERIC MONOBROMPHENOLS.

Hiibnerand Brenken* have been the first to prepare a crystal-

line monobromphenol from phenol, in a glacial acetic acid solu-—

tion with bromine, as well as also from #—brom-salicylic acid.

They gave its melting-point from 63° to 64° ; its boiling-point,

235° to 236°. 3

Fittig and Magert gave to this product the boiling-point of

238°, by identifying it with a body which they obtained, from

p—bromnitro-benzol. Hereby was, at the same time, in the sense

of the benzol-hypothesis, this bromphenol characterized as a

paraderivative, especially as, by melting it with potassic hydrate,

it passed over into resorein (formerly cousidered to be p—dioxy-

benzol.) Ko6rnert prepared this (para) bromphenol from com-

mon nitroacetanilid, and gave its melting-point 66.4°, while

Fittig and Mager§ retained the one previously found (64°).

These|] described, also, the isomeres, o—brom and m—bromphe-

nol, the former as a body of the boiling-point, 194° to 195,”

which, when cooling, does not solidify; the latter having a

melting-point of° 32 to 33°, and a boiling-point of 236° to 236.4”.

Koérner® obtained, further, from p—bromphenol a monobrom-

dinitro-phenol of the melting-point 75.6° ; from o—brompheno!,

& monobrom-dinitro-phenol of the melting-point, 118.2° (previous.

ly prepared by Laurent) ; from m-bromphenol, besides other pro-

ducts, a monobrom-dinitro-phenol melting at 91.5°. A monobrom-

mononitro-phenol of the melting-point, 88°,** was likewise pre-

pared from p—brom-phenol by Korner.+t

Jahresb. d. Chem., 1883, 409, etc.

The same, 1874, 461.

The same, 1875, 336.

; The same, 1875, 417.

| The same, 1875, 416, 417.

“| The same, 1875, 335, 336.

** Brunck, Jahresb. d. Chem., 1867, 618.

++ Jahresb. d. Chem., 1875, 336.

So tee

Upon a Fourth Monobromphenol.

Very interesting and important, as an illustration to my own

experiments, is the fact that, according to Fittig and Mager,*

all the three mentioned bromphenols, by melting with potassic

hydrate (besides some pyro-catechin) form chiefly resorcin

(m—dioxybenzol.) We shall see, that also, the new isomere

prepared by me forms no exception to this behavior.

For the preparation of a fourth meonobromphenol, I tried at

first by a method analogous to that used in the preparation of

the new isomerest formerly discovered by me, to let bromethyl

uct on phenol. I had, however, to learn that such action was

of no practical value, and if ever it took place the process was

very slow. The reaction succeeded better when I prepared syn-

thetically the bromethyl in a mixture with phenol, by adding

bromine to the alcoholic solution of the latter, after having

introduced a corresponding quantity of amorphous phosphorus.

Finally an accident taught me that the amorphous phosphorus

was not only superfluous for the reaction, but unprofitable.

Accordingly, I first prepared the fourth monobromphenol ac-

cording to the following method ; afterward, however, I omitted

the amorphous pho: phorus from the mixture that was in other

respects the same.

FourRTH MONOBROMPHENOL.

Ten gr. phenol are dissolved in 10 gr. absolute alcohol; then

mixed with 3 gr. amorphous phosphorus, and then 17 gr. bro-

mine are added, through a funnel-shaped capillary tube, cooling

at the same time with cold water.. Without the application of

the capillary tube, even when the bromine is poured in by drops,

a very violent reaction takes place, with a considerable elevation

of temperature, which prevents the formation of the new body.

It is expedient to see that the temperature of reaction does not

exceed 20° ; with reference to which point, however, I may ob-

serve that IT. have never noted the formation of au isomeric

bromphenol, even at a somewhat elevated temperature. After

having worked for some time according to this method, I forgot

* Jahresb. d. Chem., 1875, 416, etc.

+ Journal f. prakt. Chem. (2), 17, 184; (2) 24, 1.

ae Upon a Fourth Monobromphenol.

on one occasion to use the phosphorus in the reaction, whereby,

to my great surprise, I did not obtain smaller but larger quanti-

ties of the fourth monobromphenol. I therefore retained in the

future the above method, but without the addition of p»osphor-

us; and also, as it proved practical, I used in my work the

above-mentioned small quantities of the substance only, or the

double quantity at once. After completing the operation, the

raw product is poured into water; the separated oil is washed

with water and a weak solution of carbonate of soda, then with

water again, and then dried and rectified. The following ob-

servations were made concerning the distillation :

Up to 195° very little was distilled. That which boiled be-

tween 195° and 205° solidified in a freezing-mixture of ice and

common salt, partly ; that which boiled between 205° and 210°,

completely ; the remaining fractions, however, 210° to 225°

225° to 235°; 235° to 238°, and 238° to 240°, did not solidify.

Above 240° nothing distilled ; from the residue in the jar, how-

ever, there could still be obtained, by distillation with aqueous

vapor, a thick yellowish oil, which curdled gradually at a low

temperature.

From the fractions, 235° to 238°, and from 238° to 240°,

which behaved in precisely the same manner towards nitric

acid, I was able, by a repeated careful fractioning—that is, in

boiling-points 236° to 238°. The same cannot be distilled in a

pure state without decomposition, nor can it be rectified in large

quantities. In an experiment to rectify, with the usual pres-

sure, about 200 grammes of raw product, of the boiling-point

225° to 240°, the total quantity was entirely decomposed, with

the evolution of large quantities of hydrobromic acid and a

plentiful separation of coal. The product, distilled over in

small portions between 236° and 238°, gave the following analy-

tical data :

(1.) 0.2989 gr. of substance furnished 45.79 per cent. Br.

(II.) 0.3144 gr. of substance furnished 41.10 per cent. C and

3.41 per cent. H. |

(III.) 0.3325 gr. of substance furnished 41.14 per cent. C, and —

3.16 per cent. H.

(Calculation for C, H, 2. ©, 41.62 per cent.; H, 2.89 per

4 Br

Upon a Fourth Monobromphenol. ip:

cent., and Br., 46.24 per cent.) According to this, the body

is actually a monobromphenol. It must be specially mentioned

that combustion takes place only with difficulty, in conse-

quence of which, a little tube drawn to a point is not available.

It is necessary to mix carefully the liquid substance with the

chromate of lead itself, and afterwards to burn it by means of

oxygen. ~The boiling-point of the new bromphenol is according

to the above, [230°], the same in fact as that of the p—brom-

phenol ; but it differs from this physically, as it cannot be solidi-

fied at a temperature of —10° to —12°, while para-bromphenol

is a solid body, melting at 64°. It is, moreover, nothing new

that bodies chemically different manifest the same boiling-points.

This is, for instance, the case with the toluidines as well as the

isomeric chlorphenyloic, oils,* and an example of the same melt-

ing-point of two isomeres is found in the dinitro-tolnidines. +

Moreover, the boiling-points of meta- and para-bromphenol (see

above) differ only two degrees—a difference that cannot be of

any consequence.

In the following I shall, however, describe the behavior of the

fourth monobromphenol towards nitric acid, which is entirely

different from that of p—bromphenol (which js here the first

point in question), as well as from that of the other isomeres.

NITRO-COMPOUNDS OF THE FOURTH BROMPHENOL.

As above already briefly mentioned, Korner} obtained a mono-

brom-mononitrophenol from p—bromphenol, which proved to

be identical with that obtained by. Brunck§ by tho action of

bromine upon nitro-phenol. It melted at 88°. From the same

bromphenol, the former prepared—by using more nitric acid—||

a monobrom-dinitro-phenol of the melting-point 75.6°. By

means of the bromphenol obtained by Hiitbner and Brunken,&

* Jahresb. d. Chem., 1879, 349 ; 1880, 627.

+ The same, 1881, 545.

+ The same, 1875, 336.

S$ The same, 1867, 618.

| The same, 1875, 336.

“| The same, 1873, 409, etc.

Oe a q

i4 Upon a Fourth Monobromphenol.

Armstrong and Brevost* received as main product a monobrom-

dinitro-phenol that melted at 78°, and which accordingly may

fairly be considered identical+ with the above prepared by Kér-

ner. ‘The latter[ prepared besides, from m—bromphenol, an

isomeric monobrom-dinitro-phenol of the melting-point 91.5°,

which he likewise obtained§ from a dinitro-dibrom-benzol by

the action of potash-lye: o—bromphenol gives, according to

Korner, || as the only product of reaction with nitric acid, the

brom-dinitro-phenol obtained before by Laurent from a dini-

trophenol with bromine, and to which Korner gives the melting

point 118.2°. Surely the very same body has also been prepared

by other investigators, and described] with the melting-point

117°,4 115°,** and 116°++ respectively.

None of the above nitro-derivatives will form if the nitration of

the new bromphenol is made-according to the method employed

by Korner (in a solution of glacial acetic acid).

If one part of bromphenol is dissolved in about three parts of

glacial acetic acid, and this solution is dropped into nitric

acid of 1.4 specific gravity, which is kept constantly cool, an

oily mass is first obtained. This, on being put in a cool place,

solidifies gradually. This combination is a molecular combina-

tion. Itis true that it can be once recrystallized from alcohol

for rectification, but by a continued treatment with it, especially

boiling for some time, it decomposes into different nitro-pro-

ducts, according to conditions which I did not follow up more

closely. After one careful crystallization from warm (not boil-

ing) alcohol, it melts at 60° to 65°. For combustion, such a

product gave the following numbers :—

0.3516 gr. furnished 29.34 per cent. C, and 1.90 per cent. H.

A body of theformula C,H,Br (NO,) OH. C, H, Br(NO,), OH.

* The same, 1874, 461, etc.

+ According to another communication (Jahresb. d. Chem., 1875, 339)]

however, the melting point of these bodies is equal to 85.6°.

t+ Jahresb. d. Chem., 1875, 335.

§ The same, 1875, 340.

| The same, 1875, 335.

“ The same, 1874, 461 and 467.

** The same, 1873, 411.

tt The same, 1875, 427.

n°

Upon a Fourth Monobromphenol. (3.

would have to furnish 29.93 per cent. C, and 1.45 per

cent. H. Accordingly, we have a molecular compound of

monobrom-nitro- and dinitro-phenol. In spite of the somewhat

low numbers for carbon and the single analysis, I must uphold

the existence of this compound, because, as aforesaid, a pure

preparation of it is very difficult. I succeeded, however, in pre-

paring from it, in two ways, a well characterized monobrom-

dinitro-phenol, which proved to be isomeric with the above

mentioned bodies.

If the monobrom-nitro-dinitro-phenol is heated with nitric

acid of 1.5 spec. gr., a further nitration ensues by the splitting

into two molecules of monobrom-dinitro-phenol. ‘This can be

easily separated from the raw product by water, and can be

obtained from alcohol in solid yellow prisms that melt at 108°

to 110°. They are not soluble in water, and are hard to dis-

solve in alcohol. The same body is also obtained by boiling the

molecular combination for some time with baryta-water, filtering

when hot, and decomposing the filtered residue with hydro-

chloric acid. The compound subsequently recrystallized from

alcohol, showed the same melting-point (108° to 109°) and the

same aspect, as also the same behavior.

(I.) 0.1976 gr. gave 27.60 per cent. C, and 1.73-per cent. H.

(II.) 0.2774 gr. gave 30.71 per cent. Br.

(Calculation for C, H, Br (NO,), OH: C = 27.37 per cent. ;

H = 1.14 per cent., and Br. = 30.42 per cent.)

Once I obtained, also, the same substance (melting-point

110° to 111°), by dissolving a bromphenol boiling at 238° to 240°

in a /ittle acetic acid, and then treating it with nitric acid of

1.5 sp. gr. in great excess ; of this product, however, I have not

been able to make any analysis.

We might now have expected, that if monobrom-dinitro-phenol

was separated from the above-mentioned molecular combination

by hydrate of barium, monobrom-dinitro-phenol would be found

in the mother-lye of the separated dinitro-product as the second

product of this treatment. This, however, is not the case; the

latter (the mother-lye) contains, strange to say, a mew and in-

deed more constant molecular combination, of the melting-point

68° to 70°. It consists of two molecules of monobrom-nitro-

76 Upon a Fourth Monobromphenol.

and one molecule of monobrom-dinitro-phenol, and has, there-

fore, the formula 2 C, H, Br (NO,) OH:-C, H, Br (N@ias

It can be obtained pure by precipitating the above-mentioned

mother-lye with hydrochloric acid, and by crystallizing several

times from alcohol the yellow, amorphous, and somewhat greasy

mass, which is deposited after a few hours. This compound is,

strange to say, much more stable than the one spoken of before

of, equal molecules of monobrom-nitro and dinitrophenol.

Without changing its melting-point, it can be crystallized in

various ways from hot alcohol properly diluted ; it appears, ac-

cordingly, in small yellow needles united in the form of stars,

which color the skin and other organic substances (paper, etc.),

an intense yellow, as does also the above molecular combination.

Analysis :

I. 0.2878 gr. gave 30.51 per cent. C, and 2.20 per cent. H-

II. 0.1948 gr. gave 30.61 per cent. C, and 2.23 per cent. H.

III. 0.1941 gr. gave 33.94 per cent. Br.

(Caleulation for 2 C,H, Br (NO,) OH. C, BH, Br’ GVO} ae

) = 30.90 per cent., H = 1.57 per cent., and Br. = 34.33 per

cent. )

The determination of hydrogen resulted in both cases a little

too high ; the cause of this is, that the copper spirals were not

free from hydrogen when applied, which was noticed afterwards.

Besides these substances, I have yet to mention two nitro-

compounds—one of which, it is true, I obtained only once—the

second, however, repeatedly. ‘The former gave, according to a

single determination, but tolerable numbers for a monobrom-

mononitro-benzol ; but I rather believe that it represents a molecu -

lar combination. I obtained it once by treating the fourth

bromphenol, after the solution in an equal volume of glacial

acetic acid, with a mixture of nitric acid of equal volumes of the

acid of 1.4 and 1.2sp. gr. It melted within five degrees (between '

50° and 55°). and it was manifest that it changed its melting-

point by a further crystallization. ‘The substance melting be-

tween 50° and 55° gave in the analysis the following numbers :—

0.3328 gr. substance furnished 37.27 per cent. bromine.

(Calculation for C, H, Br (NO,) OH: Br ==36.70 per cent.)

In respect to the variability of its melting-point, I must, how-

a a

e a . sh

at a eS ee ee

Upon a Fourth Monobromphenol.

ever, doubt that this product is a simple atomistic combination.

I have not, therefore, endeavored to obtain it again.

~The second of the above-mentioned nitro-compounds is free

from bromine. It forms when, through a capillary tube, the

fourth bromphenol is admitted by drops, into yellow nitric acid

of 1.5 sp. gr. After the usual rectification, a substance is ob-

tained of the constant melting-point 118°, which crystallizes

from alcohol in small yellow needles that color the skin and

paper deep yellow. If heated above its melting-point, it explodes

violently, so that, during its analysis, the combustion-tube was

broken. ‘The analytical numbers (for C, H, and N) showed,

however, that it is a very complicated compound, which contains

probably 12 atoms of carbon, and does not fit any longer the

benzol-derivatives. I have, therefore, desisted from further

examination of it.

Finally, Imust mention, that the fourth bromphenol gives, like

the three known isomeres, when carefully melted with potassic hy-

drate, a mixture of (chiefly) resorcin, with a ttle pyro-catechin.

The raw product indeed shows, with sesqui-chloride of iron, a

ereen coloring; the greatest part, however, boiled in the neigh-

borhood of 270°, and gave the well-known violet coloring (resor-

cin-reaction). And although the part that boiled at about

270°, after congelation and squeezing, melted between 76° and

78° (resorcin melts at 104°), and gave in the analysis proper

numbers for a dioxybenzol, I cannot believe as yet, consider-

ing the boiling-point (resorcin boils at 271°) and the same be-

havior towards perchloride of iron, that I had an isomeric dioxy-

benzol in my hands.

From the foregoing data, the existence of a new (fourth)

bromphenol results most clearly—a fact which is wholly incom-

patible with the benzol-hypothesis. It must be specially men-

tioned that the tendency of this derivative toward the forma-

tion of molecular combinations according to fixed proportions is

very manifest, as is also the case with the new nitro-benzoic

acids*, as well as with the fourth nitrophenol.t

* Journal f. prakt. Chem. (2), 17, 219.

+ The same (2) 24, 5. |

nee Upon a Fourth Monobromphenol.

This tendency seems, therefore, to be a property of those

combinations, which, according to my hypothesis,* founded on

the supposition of unequal valencies of the benzol hydrogen, are

constructed unsymmetrically. Hitherto, I have not observed -

anything as to a direct transformation.of my new bromphenol

into either of those already known; it will, howeyer, probably be —

effected. At all events, we have to point out, in opposition to

the isomeres, the decomposition by distillation to which the

fourth bromphenol is subject.

To characterize the molecular combinations, I have yet to

observe, that also a— and J—dinitrc—p—xylolt crystallize to-

gether, forming a combination of one and the same melting-

point, and that likewise a chemical combination of butyl- and

crotonyl-alcobolt exists, showing the same boiling-point. An

investigation of such combinations, principally of aromatic

bodies, will surely be of great importance in rendering our views

_ on this subject clear.

Marburg, July, 1883.

* Journal prakt. Chem., (2) 17, 428.

+ Jahresb. d. Chem., 1881, 399.

¢ The same, 596.

Iii.—WNotes on the Jaw and Lingual Dentition of Pulmonate

Mollusks.

BY W. G. BINNEY.

Read March 3rd, 1884.

I propose in this paper to give, both in text and plates, a

synoptical view of the jaws and lingual dentition of all the spe-

cies of each genus which I have examined,—the descriptions and

figures already published having lost a great deal cf their useful-

ness by being scattered through the publications of many years

of numerous scientific periodicals. I shall also have an opportu-

tunity to judge of the limits of variation, and of the amount of

reliance to be placed on the characters of these organs for the

purposes of classification, 7

In the fifth volume of the ‘‘ Terrestrial Mollusks and Shells

of the United States” (Bulletin Mus. Comp. Zool., IV), I have

given an account of the various forms of lingual dentition, mode

of extraction, etc., and descriptions of those organs in the genera

found in the United States. These I will not repeat here; but,

in order to understand the terms I use, I will state, that appa-

rently the normal condition of the lingual membrane is to have

three types of teeth: the central, the lateral and the marginal,

named from their position on the lingual. Between the laterals

and marginals there are generally several transition teeth, as the

change is not sudden. ‘The central tooth normally (that is, in

the greatest number of species as yet examined) consists of a

quadrate base of attachment (a, 0, ¢, d, of pl. VII, fig. 1), with

expanded lower outer angles, and the whole upper surface re-

flected. The reflection (e) is tricuspid (one median, f, and two

80 Dentition of Pulinonate Mollusks.

side ones, g, 4), and each cusp is continued into a cutting point

(7, 7, &). This last I have shaded in my figures, for the purpose

of distinction, but no shading exists in nature, ‘The lateral

teeth differ from the central by the suppression of the inner

lower angle of the base of attachment and the inner cusp and

cutting point of the tooth. Thus they are asymmetrical. As

they pass outward, they become modified into marginals by the

comparative enlargement of the reflection and diminution of

the base of attachment, and by the splitting of each cutting

point, as well as by the much diminished size of the whole tooth.

This form of dentition is, as seen in my description, character-

ized by quadrate marginal teeth, from which the other large

division is distinguished by having marginal teeth of a strictly

aculeate form (see pl. Il, fig. H, three left-hand teeth). For

the purposes of classification, this distinction of quadrate and

aculeate marginal teeth is most important. It sometimes occurs

that the central (see fig. K, of pl. X VIL) is missing, or the laterals

are missing (fig. H, pl. XVII). When the dentition does not agree

with either of these two forms, I have considered it abnormal,

and described its characters, unless the genus is found in the

United States, when I simply refer to my descriptions in Terr.

Moll. U. 8., V.. It must be remembered, however, that there

is some variation found from the tooth referred to on pl. VII;

the side cusps and cutting points, especially, being in some genera

obsolete (see all the figures on plate IX.)

A complete list of the hngual membranes examined by me is

given in Bull. M. C. Z., Vol. V, No. 16, pp. 339-390. | Wage

the original description will be found the name of the person

furnishing the membrane. Those from the West Indies were

identified by Mr. Thomas Bland. The mounted lingual mem-

branes will be found in the Museum of Comparative Zoology at

Cambridge. |

W. G. BINney,

Burlington, New Jersey.

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 8]

AGNATHA.

Chiamydephorus.

Chlamydephorus Gibbonsi, W. G. Binney. Natal Colony,

Africa, Mr. J. S. Gibbons.

The lingual membrane is long and broad, consisting of about 52 chevron-

shaped rows of 27-1-27 teeth, all as in Glandina, the central one differing

only in being smaller than the adjacent marginals, and symmetrical, with a

long, slender cutting point; there are no laterals, all the side teeth being

purely aculeate marginals, and first rapidly increasing and then gradually

decreasing in size as they pass off laterally, as is usual in Glandina. Buccal

_ mass very large indeed. (PI. XVII, fig. A.)

The plate shows the central and three adjacent marginal

teeth, the eighth marginal, aud the twenty-third to the twenty-

seventh, which is the last.

Glandina.,.

For the description of the dentition of the genus, see Terr.

Moll. U. 8., V. All the species examined by me agree with it.

There are no lateral teeth.

Glandina semitarum, Rang. (Varicella), Martinique. Gov.

Rawson.

There are about 30-1-39 teeth. The central is long, narrow, and sharply

pointed. (Plate XVII, fig. C.)

Glandina Phillipsi, Ad. (Varicella.) Jamaica.

As in the last species; Pl. XVII, fig. D, shows an outer mar-

ginal. ‘There is a peculiar notch in the upper edge of the base

of attachment. | |

Glandina rosea, Fer. Nicaragua. Mr. McNiel.

Membrane with 36 rows of 25-1-25 teeth. Centrals long, narrow, slightly

incurved at sides, emarginate at top, rounded at base, and bearing a short,

blunt, stout, cutting point. (Pl XVII, fig, B.)

Glandina aurata, Mor. Costa Rica, Dr. W. M. Gabb.

Referred to as an undetermined species in Ann. N. Y. Ac. Sci.

eecl.

Teeth, 36-1-36. The central tooth has a long slender cutting point.

(Pl. XVII, fig. E.) The central tooth and first four marginals.

82 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. —

Glandina solidula, Pfr. (Oleacina.) New Providence.

Lingual membrane as usual in the genus. |

Glandina Albersi, Pfr. Lower California. |

In L. and Fr. W. Sh. of N. A., I, 19, isa figure of the dentition of the

species, drawn by Mr. E. 8. Worse. There are 32-1-32 teeth.

eer aeien

Mauritius. Consul Pike.

There are no laterals. The central tooth has a short, blunt, rounded cut-

ting-point. 'The marginals increase at first very rapidly in size.

G. palanga, Fér. Teeth, 37-1-37. (Pl. X VU, fig. F.) A pho-

tograph of this membrane will be found in Am. Journ. oo,

Nis OMe

G. Newtoni, H. Ad. Teeth, 6-1-6. (Pl. XVII, fig. G.)

G. Mauritiana, Morel. Teeth, 12-1-12. (PI. XVII, fig. H.)

G. modiolus, Fér. Teeth, 25 1-25. |

G. Neville, H. Ad. Teeth, 21-1-21.. (Pl. AVI) ae

G. sulcata, Mill. Lingual membrane as in the other species

examined.

Ennea,

Ennea clavatula, Lam. Mauritius. Pl. XVII, fig. J. Consul

Pike.

Lingual membrane as in Gonospira.

Spiraxis.

Spiraxis Dunkeri, Pfr. San Domingo. Mr. J.-S. Gibbons.

The membrane (pl. XVII, fig. K) has no central or lateral teeth. Those

present are all marginals, of the form common in Glandina, and arranged en

chevron. ‘The figure gives three on each side of the centre of the membrane.

Rhytida.

Rhytida vermicosa, Krauss. Cape Town, South Africa.

This genus also, has no central or lateral teeth. The marginals are

arranged as in Glandina.. Pl. XVII, fig. L, gives the whole of one half of

one transverse row of teeth. The formula is 14-0-14. The rows of teeth

are close together, not separated.

The species cannot be retained in Pella, a sub-genus of Heliz,

where Von Martens placed it.

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 83

Onchidium.

Onchidium Schrammi, Bl. and Binn. Pointe a Pitre, Guade-

loupe. Mr. A. Schramm.

EY; Til, Fig. A. Both the teeth on each transverse row, and the rows

themselves, are greatly crowded. The general arrangement of the lingual

membrane is the same as I have described for that of Onchidella in Terr.

Moll., V. sd

Onchidium is allied to the preceding genera merely by the

absence of a jaw.

HOLOGNATHA VITRINEA.

This section includes genera furnished with a jaw in one single

piece, and marginal teeth of the lingual membrane acwuleate.

Sienopus,

Stenopus decoloratus. Demerara. Mr. J. 8. Gibbons.

Jaw low, wide, slightly arcuate: ends blunt and but little attenuated ;

cutting-edge without median projection.

Lingual membrane (pl. XVII, fig. M) long; teeth 23-1-23, arranged en-

chevron; centrals small; upper margin elongated, tricuspid; no lateral teeth;

all the side teeth are aculeate marginals; those nearest the median line some-

what modified in shape.

Not having examined a living specimen, I am not able to say

whether the species has the caudal appendage characteristic of

Stenopus.

Limax.

For description of jaw and lingual membrane, see Terr. Moll.

Mes. Vv.

Limaz semitectus, Mérch. Costa Rica. Dr. W. M. Gabb.

Jaw (pl. XV, fig. I) smooth, arched, ends attenuated; a median projec-

tion to the cutting-edge; a reinforced space on the centre of the jaw.

The lingual membrane (pl. II, fig. G) is long and narrow. There are

44-1-44 teeth. The centrals have side cusps and cutting-points. The late-

rals, twelve in number, on each side of the central, are bicuspid; the mar-

ginals are aculeate,—all of them are bifid by having the side spur often

found on the side marginals in this genus. The 18th, 14th and 15th teeth

form the transition into the marginals.

The figure gives the central, the first lateral on one side of the

median line, and two marginals, the sixteenth and forty-fourth

teeth.

d4 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks.

Urocyclus. .

Urocyclus Kirkii, Gray. Mozambique. Mr. J. 8. Gibbons.

Jaw (pl. XVI, fig. K) very low, slightly arcuate; ends scarcely attenuated,

blunt; anterior surface without ribs; no median projection to the cutting-

edge; a strong muscular attachment.

fal membrane (pl. XVII, fig. N) with tricuspid centrals, bicuspid lat-

erals, as in Zonites, and aenilenieWnae ginals, all of which are bifid.

The figure shows one central, one lateral, and two marginals.

Nanina.

The species of this genns have tricuspid centrals, bicuspid

laterals, and bifid aculeate marginals. I have examined from

Mauritius (Consul Pike),—

Nanina Caldwelli, Benson.

NN. Rawsonts; Barclay: (Plies, BD.)

W. argentea, hye. (Pl. A tie rG:)

N. wmplicaia, Nev. (PI. Ti, fig. B.)

N. stylodon, Pfr.

The last cannot be retained in Hrepta, a sub-genus of Helia,

where it was placed by Von Martens. All the above have similar

dentition. Also from Mauritins—

N. philyrina, Morelet.

Though this species agrees in other respects with the above-named, the mem-

brane is very broad, the teeth exceedingly numerous, arranged in oblique

rows. The centrals, which Iam confident of having seen, are small, narrow,

high. The other teeth are the same in form to the edge of the membrane.

They appear to have the usual aculeate form of the marginal teeth in Nanina;

but instead of narrowing towards the cutting-point, they are broadly and

obliquely truncated, reflected, and minutely denticulated. This lingual mem-

brane is also figured by Semper (Phil. Archip., pl. VI, f. 35); but his figures

give more the impression of the usual Nanina marginals with denticulated

side and bifid points. The teeth are, however, so exceedingly numerous

and small that it is very difficult to understand them.

Nanina inversicolor, Fér.

Also from Mauritius, has the character of animal, jaw, and lingual mem-

brane of Nanina, so that it cannot be retained in Caracolus, a sub-genus of

Helix.

Nanina militaris,

Of same locality, for the same reasons cannot be retained in Stylodon, and—

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 85

Nanina leucostyla, Pfr.

Nanina rufozonata, HW. Ad.

From Mauritius, prove also to belong to Nanina.

Nanina radians, Pfr. (Microcystis). Rarotonga Island.

Mr. A. Garrett.

Plate XVII, fig. P, represents one central, lateral and marginal tooth.

There are 40-1-40 teeth, eight on each side being perfectly formed laterals.

The marginals are sometimes trifid.

Nanina conula, Pease. Island of Huahine. Mr. A. Garrett.

Central and lateral teeth as in N. radians, Pfr. (See above.) Lateral

teeth, seven in number on each side. Marginals aculeate, multifid, very

numerous. | ,

Nanina calculosa, Gould. Island of Huahine. Mr. A.

Garrett.

Jaw.as usual in the genus. Lingual membrane long and narrow. Teeth,

38-1-38. Centrals and (7) laterals asin N. radians. (See above.) The lat-

ter, however, have slightly developed inner side cutting points. First 15

marginals bifid, the rest multifid.

Nanina Cressida, Gould. Island of Huahine. Mr. A.

Garrett.

Jaw arched, high; ends blunt; cutting-margin with a median beak-like

projection.

Lingual membrane (Pl. XVII, fig. Q) with 55-1-55 teeth. The bifurcation

of the cutting-point of the marginals commences in the 11th tooth. There

are no side cusps to the centrals and laterals, which have a long, narrow

base of attachment on each side. I figure one central, one lateral and one

marginal tooth.

Nanina OChamoissi, Pfr. West Maui, Sandwich Islands.

Gulick.

Pl. XVII, fig. O. The marginal teeth have three or four points. An un-

identified species from Oahu has similar dentition.

Nanina subcircula, Mousson. Raiatea, Society Islands. Mr.

Garrett.

Lingual membrane (PI. II, fig. A) as in the other species.

Nanina cultrata, Gould.

Lingual membrane as usual in the genus. Laterals six on both sides;

extreme marginals multifid.

Nanina Calias, Benson. Foot of Himalayas. Mus. Comp.

Zool.

86 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. .

Lingual membrane with ten laterals on each side, still more bifid mar-

ginals. (Pl. IJ, fig. E.) On the same plate, fig. F, is figured a central.

tooth from another part of the same membrane, in which the cutting point

is abnormally developed.

Velifera.

Known only by the single species, V. Gabdi, Costa Rica. ©

Dr: WoiM..Gabb:

Jaw with smooth anterior surface and beak-like projection to the cutting

edge.

Lingual membrane (PI. II, fig. H) with the general arrangement of Zo-

nites ; the first laterals have an inner side cutting point; marginals aculeate,

with side spur.

Its lingual membrane resembles that of Limazx agrestis, in

having the inner, abnormal side cutting point to its first lateral

teeth. All the marginals are bifid. .

Macrocyclis.

Macrocyclis Baudoni, Petit. Guadeloupe, Mr. Schramm:

Dominica, Mr. Guppy.

Jaw delicate, transparent, colorless; ends pointed; anterior surface

smooth ; cutting edge with median projection.

Lingual membrane as in Macrocyclis. (See Terr. Moll., V.) I could not

distinguish the characters of the very small central tooth.

Macrocyclis euspira, Pir. Placed in Ammonoceras, a sub-

genus of Hyalina, by von Martens, but, from its lingual mem-

brane, shown to belong to Macrocyclis.

Jaw low, crescentic; ends pointed; cutting margin with a decided,

sharp, median projection.

Lingual membrane (pl. II, fig. I) long and narrow; teeth arranged as in

Macrocyclis. There are, however, no transition teeth, as in the American

species; all the side teeth being true marginals of the aculeate type.

Teeth, 30-1-30. The centrals are deeply emarginate at the upper edge of

their base of attachment, and have expanded lower lateral angles ; they

have also a well-marked, simple, median cusp, with a decided cutting point.

Zonites. (See Terr. Moll., V.)

Zonites? Bermudensis. Pfr. Bermuda. Mr. J. J. Crooke;

Mr. J. Matthew Jones.

Jaw extremely thin, arched, with a blunt, median projection to its cutting

edge.

Lingual membrane long and narrow. Central teeth tricuspid ; laterals

bicuspid ; the cusps in each long and slender. Marginals numerous, acu-

leate, in oblique rows.

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 87

The result of my examination of the lingual membrane throws

light on the generic position of this species. It can no longer

be retained in Caracolus, a sub-genus of Helix, as proposed by

von Martens, since it has the dentition of the Vifrinea of von

Martens’ arrangement. It differs, however, from Zonites, in

having no longitudinal furrows above the margin of the foot,

and no caudal mucus-pore. It seems to belong to no described

genus.

Janulus.

Junulus stephanophora, Desh. Madeira. Dr. Hillebrand.

Jaw strongly arched ; ends pointed; cutting margin with a sharp, greatly

produced median projection.

Janulus bifrons, Lowe. Madeira. Dr. Hillebrand.

Jaw smooth, with median projection.

Lingual membrane with 34-1-34 teeth, of which four on each side are

laterals, all as in Zonites.

HOLOGNATHA HELICEA.

This section contains the genera furnished with a jaw in one

single piece, and quadrate marginal teeth to the lngual

membrane.

A. JAW RIBLESS.

I still retain this section, though several species in various

genera have ribs on their jaw.

Tebennophorus. (See Terr. Moll., V.)

Tebennophorus Costaricensis, Morch. Costa Rica. Dr. W. M.

Gabb.

Jaw strongly arched, of equal width to its blunt extremities. There are

sub-obsolete anterior ribs about the centre of the jaw, the ends of five of

which denticulate the cutting margin.

_ The lingual dentition is figured on Plate VIII, fig. N. There are about

28-1-28 teeth. The centrals have a long base of attachment, with a strong

line of reinforcement running parallel to its margin at the lower edge and

for a short distance at the sides. The reflection is small, and bears a short,

stout median cusp, and small stout side cusps; all three cusps bearing short,

stout cutting points. The lateral teeth are like the centrals, but asymmet-

rical by the suppression of the inner cusp and cutting point and the inner

lower expansion of the base of attachment. The marginals are but a modi-

fication of the laterals; the inner cutting point not becoming bifid, though

the outer one is so on the extreme marginals. There are hardly more than

twelve perfect laterals on each side. The change into marginals is very

gradual.

88 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks.

Sagda.

Sagda connectens, Ad. Jamaica. Mr. Jas. Milligen.

Lingual membrane with 26-1- 26teeth. The centrals have their plates

short in comparison to the reflection, and broad. The middle cusp is long,

with a long slender point. The side cusps are sub-obsolete, with short,

acute, triangular points. The laterals are of the same type as centrals, but

bicuspid, the outer cusp more developed than the external cusps of the cen

trals. The marginals are wide, low, with one long, oblique, blunt, narrow

inner cusp, and one or more side small cusps.

The genus is included in the Vitrinea of von Martens; but I have shown

that it belongs to the Helicea, the marginal teeth being quadrate, not aculeate.

Sagda Haldemaniana, Jay. Jamaica. Messrs. Gloyne and

Vendreyes. : .

Jaw slightly arcuate, of almost equal height throughout ; ends blunt; no

anterior ribs; no median projection to the cutting edge.

Lingual membrane with about 30-1-30 teeth, as in the last species. (PI.

tno IK.)

Sagda Jayana, Ad. Jamaica. Mr. Henry Vendreyes.

Jaw smooth ; scarcely any median projection to cutting edge.

Lingual membrane with teeth characterized as in last species.

Endodonta.

I regret not succeeding in obtaining the jaw of any species of

this genus, the more because some doubt of its existence has been

expressed. It is, however, probable that it will be found, as no

agnathous genus has yet been noticed with the quadrate marginal

teeth which characterize #. icerta, and also H#. twumuloides,

Garrett.

Endodonta incerta, Mousson. Huahine Island. Mr. A.

Garrett.

Lingual membrane (PI. I, fig, N) with 11-1-11 teeth, of which four on

each side are perfect laterals. The marginals (of which the last is shown in

the figure) are but a simple modification of the laterals. They differ from

those of twmuloides in not having a bifid inner cutting point, unless indeed I

have, from their exceeding minuteness, failed rightly to interpret them.

Eindodonta tumuloides, Garrett. Rarotonga Island, Cook’s

Island. Mr. Garrett:

Lingual membrane (PI. II, fig. M) with 17-1-17 teeth, with about seven

perfect laterals on each side. Teeth as in last species; but the inner cutting

point of the marginals is bifid.

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 89)

Patula.

Patula Huahinensis, Pfr. Huahine Island. Mr..A. Garrett.

Jaw not examined.

Lingual membrane with 18-1-18 teeth, of which about six on each side

are laterals. The type of dentition is about the same as in Endodonta incerta,

described above. The marginals are, however, different, the two cutting

points being bifid, the base of attachment low and wide. (Plate II, fig. L.)

Pella.

The character of the jaw does not allow the genus to hold a

position here, among ‘‘ribless jaws.”

Pella rariplicata, Benson. Cape Town, 8. Africa. Mr. J.S.

Gibbons.

The jaw has flat, crowded, numerous ribs, such as I have described for

Microphysa Lansingi, in Terr. Moll., V.

Lingual membrane (PI. III, fig. I) long and narrow. About 16-1-16 teeth,

with four laterals on each side of the central tooth. The central tooth has

small side cusps and cutting points. Laterals like the centrals, but slightly

asymmetrical by the lesser development of the inner side; an unusual arrange-

ment in the Helicide. The marginals are low, wide, with one inner, wide,

bifid cutting point, and one smaller, bifid outer cutting point, giving a

serrated appearance to the cutting edge.

A central tooth, with its adjacent laterals, and two marginal teeth, are

given in the figure.

Poly mita.

Having found two different forms of dentition in the species

referred by Von Martens to Polymita, I propose to restrict this

genus to those species which have the abnormal dentition of its

type, P. muscarum, leaving those with the usual dentition of

the Helicide under the name of Hemitrochus.

~The peculiar dentition of Polymita, entirely unexpected from

the appearance of the shell, is one of the most interesting facts

IT have met with. It is not only different from that of its allied

forms, but aiso from that of all species of the Pfeifferian genus

Helix as yet examined.

The peculiar dentition is shared by picta, Born, and may be

looked for in sulphurosa, Morelet. These two species are placed

by von Martens, in Liochila, together with Helix Jamaicensis.

The two former I put with muscarwm in Polymita. For the

last, see below.

90 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks.

Polymita muscarum, Lea. ae

Jaw wide, low, arched, delicately striated; ends attenuated, bluntly

rounded ; no anterior ribs; no median projection to the cutting edge. (PI.

>. G's ites 5G) ia

Lingual membrane long and narrow, composed of numerous rows of

about 75-1-75 teeth each. The transverse rows are arranged en chevron.

Centrals with base of attachment long, narrow, incurving at the sides ;

upper margin slightly rounded; lower margin trilobed and fringed; on the

lower fourth of the base of attachment springs a trilobed, gouge-shaped,

cutting edge, broader than the base, and bearing three cusps, each produced

into a cutting point, the central triangular, the external ones curving out-

wards, neither produced beyond the lower margin of the base of attach-

ment. The side teeth (which do not resemble the usual form either of later-

als or marginals) are of the same form as the centrals, but rendered asym-

metrical by the lesser development of the inner lower angle of the base of

attachment, and by its being thrown abruptly off towards the margin of the

membrane; the lower edge is also rounded, and not trilobed as in the cen-

trals; the laterals, also, are longer, narrower, with a less expanded upper

margin of the base of attachment than in the centrals, in a contrary direc-

tion from which they are also thrown off by the irregular curving of the

base of attachment. The cusps and cutting points of the side teeth are like

those of the centrals. |

In one lingual membrane examined, I noticed two abnormal rows of

teeth down the whole length of the membrane, in which the cutting edge

was divided into four lobes, instead of three, all bearing cutting poe

These abnormal lines of teeth were separated by a normal line.

The figure (Pl. III, fig. C) shows a group of central and side teeth, while

a single central, still more enlarged, is shown in D.

These peculiar, long, subquadrangular bases of attachment, not reflected

along the upper margin, as usual in the Helicide, but bearing the gouge-

shaped, expanded cutting edge, soldered as it were upon its surface, can

only be compared to those of Geotis, and those of the marginal teeth of

Orthalicus and Liquus.

Polymita picta, Born. Cuba. The specimen examined was

fuund on a bunch.of bananas in New York.

Jaw as in muscarum.

Lingual membrane (PI. III, fig. E) with the same characteristics as that

of muscarum; but the teeth are shorter and stouter. (Plate III, fig. E.)

HEMITROCHUS.

I have examined only five species of those remaining in von

Martens’ Polymita, after removing its type, muscarum, as ex-

>) to) 5 5)

plained above. Helix versicolor, Born, is the only remaining

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. YI

species in which the dentition of muscarwm and picta may be

looked for. The others will probably agree with varians, ete.

The jaw of varians, gallopavonis, Troscheli, rufoapicata,

graminicola, is high, arched, without ribs, with a blunt median

projection. In one species, Millert, the jaw is lke this, except-

ing that it has one decided, stout, central rib, denticulating

either margin. ‘This shows that the presence or absence of ribs

on the jaw cannot be considered a reliable generic character.

(See, also, Dentellaria. )

Hemitrochus varians, Mike. (See Terr. Moll., V.)

Hemitrochus Troscheli, Pfr. New Providence, Bahamas.

Gov. Rawson.

Jaw as described ; a strong, transverse line of re-enforcement.

Lingual membrane (PI. IV, fig. A) long and narrow. Central teeth very

long ; the upper margin of base of attachment greatly produced above ; the

reflected portion not extending to the lower margin; median cusp with a

short, blunt cutting point; side cusps and cutting points obsolete. Laterals

like the centrals, but asymmetrical ; the upper margin still more produced ;

outer laterals with bifid inner cutting point, and side cusp and cutting point.

Marginals quadrate, with one large, oblique, rounded, bluntly bifid cutting

point, and one or two side, small, blunt cutting points. The membrane is

peculiar in the extension of the upper margin of the base of attachment of

the teeth.

Hemitrochus gallopavonis, Val. 'Turk’s Island. Gov. Rawson.

Jaw as described.

Lingual membrane as described in last species. (Pl. IV, fig. B.)

Hemitrochus rufoapicata, Poey. Cuba. Mr. Arango.

Jaw and lingual membrane (Pl. IV, fig. C) as described above.

Hemitrochus graminicola, Ad. Jamaica. Messrs. Vendreyes

and Gloyne.

Jaw as described.

Lingual membrane (Pl. IV, fig. E) as described. Teeth 40-1-40.

Of the above species, the figure gives one central, the adjacent

lateral or laterals, and one or more marginals.

Hemitrochus Milleri, Pfr. Fortune Island, Bahamas. Dr.

J. J.-Brown.

Jaw differing from that of the above species by the presence of a stout,

92 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks.

median rib-like prominence, denticulating either margin. (PL XVI, fig. J.)

See above, under generic name.

Lingual membrane with 33-1-33 teeth, characterized as in the other spe-

cies. Fig. D, of pl. IV, shows one central and adjacent lateral, an outer

lateral (7th tooth) showing the side cusp and cutting point; the eighth later-

al, in which the inner cutting point first is bifid, the sixteenth tooth, still a

lateral, though somewhat modified in form, and a marginal, the last tooth.

It will be noticed that, on the central and first lateral, the cutting point has ©

a side bulging, probably a modification of the missing side cutting point.

No doubt this bulging exists in the other species of the genus, though not

shown in the focus under which my figures were drawn.

Acavus.

Acavus Pheniz, Pfr.

Jaw wide, low, arcuate ; ends but slightly attenuated, blunt, very thick

and coarse; no anterior ribs; no median prominence to the cutting edge.

Lingual membrane (PI. II, fig. O) with long and narrow centrals and lat-

erals; the upper margin of the base of attachment produced and rounded;

the reflection is stout, as are the cusp and cutting point, of which only the

middle one exists. Marginal teeth simply a modification of the laterals.

Caracolus.

In this genus, also, there is a difference as regards the presence

or absence of ribs on the jaw.

Lingual membrane characterized by the absence of side cusps

and cutting points.

Caracolus Bermudensis, of von Martens’ list, I have above

shown to be more nearly allied to Zonites than to any known

genus. Curacolus inversicolor I have above referred to Nanina.

Caracolus excellens, Pfr. San Domingo. Dr. Newcomb.

Jaw not examined.

Lingual membrane (Pl. IV, fig. F).

Caracolus sagemon, Beck: Cuba. Mr. Arango.

Jaw high, arcuate; ends rapidly but slightly attenuated, blunt; cutting

margin with broad, blunt, median projection;, no anterior ribs.

Lingual membrane (PI. IV, fig. G) very long and narrow, with 36-1-36

teeth; the transverse rows of teeth being unusually oblique, though not so

represented in my figure. The change from laterals to marginals is very

gradual, so that it is difficult to count the former. Centrals with base of

attachment long, constricted at the middle, expanded above, and with

greatly produced lower lateral angles; reflection large, with obsolete side

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 93

cusps and no side cutting points, and with a very broad, short median cusp,

bearing a short, widely-expanded, square edge (as it cannot be called a

point), Laterals like the centrals, but asymmetrical, as usual, and with an

asymmetrical cutting edge larger than in the central tooth. The cutting

edge becomes more developed as the teeth pass off laterally, in proportion

to the base of attachment and the cusp also. Thus the marginals become

formed without any splitting of the inner cutting point, or any development

of a side cusp and cutting point, excepting that on some of the teeth a blunt

obsolete side cusp may be shown.

The form of this species from Gonave Island, Haiti, (Prof. Linden,) is

said by Mr. Bland to have a white, instead of a reddish-brown, peristome.

The lingual membrane is figured on Pl. IV, fig. H. The cutting points on

all the teeth are more produced than in the Cuban sagemon and Arangiuna ;

after the eighth tooth there is a decided side cutting point on the laterals

and marginals. The jaw is the same as in sagemon.

Caracolus Arangiana, Poey. Cuba. Mr. Arango.

Jaw (Pl. XV, fig. M) greatly arched ; ends blunt, scarcely attenuated ;

cutting margin with a blunt, median projection.

Lingual membrane (Pl. IV, fig. 1) with 33-1-33 teeth, arranged as in

sagemon. The lower margin of the base of attachment seems delicately

fringed.

Caracolus marginella, Gmelin. Porto Rico. Mr. R. Swift.

The jaw differs from that of the other species examined, in having stout

anterior ribs.

Lingual membrane (PI. IV, fig. J).

Leucochroa.

The genus Leucochroa is adopted by von Martens, the type

being Helix candidissima, Drap., a species whose anatomy has

been described by Moquin-Tandon as being more nearly related

to Zonites than to Heliz. The genus is classed by von Martens

among the Vitrinea, the section of Helicea containing the genera

furnished with ribless anterior surface and median projection to

the jaw, and aculeate, marginal teeth to the lingual membrane.

Among the species catalogued by von Martens is Leuwcochroa

Boissieri, Charp. We find, however, that both jaw and lingual

membrane in this species indicate that the genus belongs to the

Flelicea.

Leucochroa Boissiert, Charp. Palestine. Mr. John Van

Nostrand.

Jaw very low, long, arcuate; ends but little attenuated, bluntly rounded;

cutting edge with a decided median projection; anterior surface free from

Q4 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 3

ribs, with a strong transverse line of reinforcement. The jaw resembles

that of Clausilia or Pupa more than that usually found in Helix, 3

Lingual membrane as usual in the Helicide. Centrals short, and stout,

with a blunt cutting point to the central tooth; the cusps obsolete. Laterals

with a very long, oblique, blunt inner cutting point; the outer cutting point.

obsolete. Marginals subquadrate, with several short, blunt, cutting points.

(PI If ng J.)

Ochthephila.

In this genus, again, the presence or absence of ribs on the

jaw is not a reliable character.

Ochthephila tiarella, Webb and Broll. Madeira. Dr. Hil-

lebrand.

Jaw low, slightly arcuate; ends scarcely attenuated; anterior surface with

about 15 flat, broad, crowded ribs, scarcely denticulating the cutting margin.

Lingual membrane with 21-1-21 teeth, of same character as figured in

Plebecula lurida, About nine laterals.on each side of the median line.

Ochthephila abjecta, Low. Madeira. Dr. Hillebrand.

Jaw low, slightly arcuate; ends attenuated; cutting edge with a blunt

median projection; no anterior ribs.

Lingual membrane with 24-1-24 teeth, about four on each side being per-

fect laterals, characterized as in the last species.

Cysticopsis.

The jaw described under C. tumida is peculiar. ‘There is

considerable difference in the dentition of the two species

examined.

Cysticopsis tumida, Ptr.

Jaw (Pi. XVI, fig. Aj wide, low, slightly arcuate, scarcely attenuated at

the blunt ends; a slight, broad, median projection to the cutting edge;

with delicate, separated, longitudinal strie, passing into a long, narrowing,

conical prolongation of the jaw, springing from about the centre of its sur

face, and distinct from the muscular attachment of the jaw.

Lingual membrane (Pl. V, fig. A) with 22-1-22 teeth. Centrals very

broad, with a small reflection bearing three distinct cusps and cutting points.

Laterals like the centrals, but bicuspid and asymmetrical. Marginals low,

wide, with one inner, larger, cutting point, and one outer, smaller, bifid

cutting point.

Cysticopsis pemphigodes, Pfr. Cuba.

Jaw not examined,

Jingual membrane (Pl. V, fig. B) long and broad. Teeth as in Plagiop_

tycha, not as in Cysticopsis tumida.

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 95

Plagioptycha.

Jaw arcuate, ends slightly acuminated, blunt; no anterior ribs ;

a decided median projection to the cutting edge:—P. lozodon,

Pfr., Aldersiana, Pfr,, monodonta, Pfr., diaphana, Lam., macro-

glossa, Pir. In P. Duclosiana, Fér., however, there is a decided

median, stout rib, denticulating either margin. Thus the pres-

ence or absence of ribs on the jaw cannot be considered a generic

character in Plagtoptycha.

The character of the lingual dentition in the species examined

agrees.

Plagioptycha loxodon, Fer. San Domingo. Dr. W. Newcomb.

Lingual membrane (PI. V, fig. C) long and narrow. Centrals having a

long, narrow base of attachment, with expanded lower angles and lines of

reinforcement within them; reflected portion small, with a single stout cusp

and cutting point ; laterals like centrals, but asymmetrical ; outer laterals

with outer cusp and cutting point; the inner cutting point becomes bifid as

the teeth pass into marginals, which become low and wide, with two broad,

- bluntly rounded, usually bluntly bifid cutting points.

Plagioptycha Albersiana, Ptr.

Jaw as above.

Lingual membrane like last. (Pl. V, fig. D.)

Plagioptycha monodonta, Pfr. San Domingo. Dr. Newcomb.

Jaw as above.

Lingual membrane (Pl. V, fig. E) like that of P. loxodon.

Plagioptycha Duclosiana, Fer. Exuma, Bahamas. Dr. J. J.

Brown.

Jaw as described above.

Lingual membrane (Pl. V, fig. F) with about 30-1-30 teeth. The figure

shows the gradual changes in the teeth, the seventh being the last lateral.

The side bulgings in the cutting points of central and first laterals are shown

by using a different focus in the microscope than that used in drawing the

figures of the other species. It represents the side cutting point.

Plagvoptycha diaphana, Lam. Porto Rico. Dr. Cleve.

Jaw as above.

Lingual membrane (Pl. V, fig. G) as in loxodon.

Plagioptycha macroglossa, Ptr.

Jaw as above.

Lingual dentition (Pl. V, fig. H) as in lowodon.

96 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. -

Leptoioma.

Only one specics examined :—

Leptoloma fuscocinctu, Ad. Jamaica.

Jaw thin, arcuate, high, ends bluntly truncated; with perpendicular striz ;

cutting edge with a median projection. tye

Lingual membrane (PI. V, fig. I) as in Plagioptycha.

Achatinella.

In Annals of Lyceum of Nat. Hist. of New York, X, 331;

XI, 190, are given in detail my observations on the anatomy of

Achatinella. Uhere give a summary only of what relates to the

jaw and lingual dentition.

Most of the specimens examined were sent by Mr. Gulick.

A few were received from the Museum of Comparative Zoology.

I have here grouped the species according to von Martens’

arrangement and sub-genera. I will state that, of Mr. Gulick’s

arrangement, the species examined represent the sub-genera—

Achatinella, Bulimella, Apex, Partulina, Auriculella, Laminella,

Amastra, Leptachatina,—all except Newcombia: Carelia is treated

below.

The result of my examination may be briefly stated, viz.:

that I find two types of dentition, one (a) including the species

of Partulina and Achatinella, s. s.; the second (6) comprising

all the species examined, of Newcombia, Laminella, Leptachatina.

Bulimella, Apex and Labiella, of von Martens’ arrangement,

were not examined. Of these we may expect to find the first

two agreeing with my first section (a) in dentition; the last, with

my second (8).

In the section (a) suggested by me, the species are all charac-

terized by a jaw so extremely delicate as to be found with great

difficulty. It cannot be extracted by potash. It is arcuate, ex-

tremely thin, transparent, with blunt ends. The lingual mem-

brane agrees with that figured by Heynemann of A. dulimoides.

It is very broad in comparison to its length. In one lingual

there were 175-1-175 teeth. They are arranged en chevron.

There is but one form of tooth for centrals and side teeth (it is

difficult to call the latter laterals or marginals), but the centrals

are somewhat smaller and symmetrical. The base of attachment

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 94

is long and narrow, squarely truncated below, rapidly widening

and curving outwards at its upper third, so that the upper mar-

gin is twice the breadth of the lower; it is rounded and reflected

along its whole breadth ; reflection small, bearing five or more

cusps and cutting points, the median the smallest. There is

some variation in these cusps. Of this type of jaw and den-

tition are :—

Partulina jucunda, Smith. W. Maui.

plumbea, Gulick. E. Maui.

eburnea, Gulick. KE. Maui.

solidissima, Smith. E. Maui.

solida, Gulick. Oahu.

teniolata, Pfr. Oahu.

marmorata, Gld. Oahu.

pallida, Nutt. Oahu.

Achatinella (s.s.) producta, Rve. Oahu. (PI. ILI, fig. G.)

Johnsonit, Newe. Oahu.

livida, Swains. Oahu.

varia, Gulick. Oahu.

auricula, Fér.

In the last three species, I failed to extract the delicate jaw.

Achatinella auricula, Fér., on account of its having this type of

dentition, I remove from Partula, where it is placed by von

Martens.

The pecuhar type of dentition shared by the above species is

seen on my Pl. III, fig. G. (4. producta, Rve.)

(6) Of the second type of jaw and dentition are the remainder

of the species examined. ‘The jaw is stout, arcuate, ends blunt,

no anterior ribs; generally a median projection to cutting edge.

In Laminella Mastersi it is low, wide, slightly arcuate, horn-

colored; no median projection. (Pl. XVI, fig. E.) It is the

same in the other species of Laminella. The same type of jaw,

though more arched, is found in all the species of Newcombia

and Leptachatina. In picta (Pl. XVI, fig. M) there is a slightly

produced, blunt, median’ projection to the cutting edge. There

are often delicate vertical striz on this type of jaw.

Ys Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks.

The lingual dentition in this section is entirely different from

that in the last. The membrane islong and narrow. The trans-

verse rows of teeth are horizontal, not en chevron. The teeth

are like those usually found in the Pulmonata, with quadrate

base of attachment and tricuspid centrals, bicuspid laterals, bi-

cuspid, multicuspid, or even pectinate marginals. ‘The ceutrals

are very much smaller, than the laterals, both in height and

width.

Newcombia picta, Mighels. W. Maui.

Jaw described above. Lingual membrane, Pl. VI, fig. B. The margin-

als have two cutting points, each point becoming bifid as the teeth pass off

laterally.

Newcombia venusta, Mighels.

Jaw slightly arcuate, with blunt ends; a few vertical wrinkles.

Lingual membrane (PI. VI, fig. A) shown in all its changes. The mar-

ginals are decidedly pectinate in the teeth figured, but some are seen with

only two cutting points. Teeth 24-1-24, eight being laterals on each side of

the median line.

Laminella Mastersi, Newe. West and Kast Maui.

Jaw described above. (Pl. XVI, fig. E.)

Lingual membrane (PI. VI, fig. E) with simply two or three cutting points

to the marginals. A group of these latter, and of centrals and laterals, is

given.

Laminellu obesa, Newe.

Lingual membrane (PI. VI, fig. C) with 27-1-27 teeth, of same type as in

the last species. ' :

The tooth shown in the figure is the 19th, a marginal, with one large,

inner cutting point, and three very small outer ones. On the same mem-

brane, however,.are some marginals having three cutting points and some

which are quite pectinate. This variation shows that my distinction be-

tween b and c, in my former paper, referred to above, was not well founded,

The jaw is as in A. Mastersi.

Laminella decorticata, Gulick. Oahu.

Lingual membrane (Pl. VI, fig. D) as in Mastersi.

Laminella luctuosa, Pfr. Oahu.

Lingual membrane (PI. VI, fig. F) as in Mastersi.

Laminella nigrolabris, Smith. Oahu.

Lingual membrane as in Mastersi.

Leptachatina nitida, Newe. W. Maui.

Lingual membrane (PI. V1, fig. H), marginals pectinate.

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 99

Leptachatina grana, Newe. W. Maui.

Dentition as in last species.

Leptachatina dimidiata, Pfr. Oahu.

Same dentition.

Leptachatina textilis, Fér.

The dentition is as in the other species of the subgenus examined by me.

There are 26-1-26 teeth, with eight laterals on each side. On Pl. VI, fig. G,

I figure the whole change from central to extreme marginal teeth. The last

are not pectinate.

TFornatellina.

Considered by von Martens as a sub-genus of Cionella, but by

its dentition closely related to Achatinella, s.s. ‘The Jaw was

not examined.

Tornatellina aperta, Pease. UWuahinelsland. Mr. A. Garrett.

Lingual membrane (PI. III, fig. F). The figure represents the central,

with the first and secona side teeth. There is an exceedingly large number

of teeth beyond this, of the same type, quite to the exterior margin of the

membrane, The teeth are arranged obliquely in waving rows, as is also

the case in Achatinella, s.s. Teeth of same type as those of Achatinella,'s. s.

Tornatellinu oblonga, Pease. Huahine Island. Mr. A. Garrett.

Lingual dentition the same as in the preceding species.

Clausilia,

The West Indian species alone examined.

Clausilia tridens, Chemn. Porto Rico. Mr. Robert Swift.

Jaw (Pl. XV, fig. J) slightly arcuate, smooth, wide, low; ends slightly

attenuated, blunt; cutting edge with a blunt, wide, median projection. In

the jaw figured, the lower margin is developed, but much thinner, beyond

the cutting edge.

Lingual membrane (PI. VII, fig. H) short and broad, with about 30-1-30

teeth. Centrals with long, narrow base of attachment, incurved at the

sides and base, where it is also excavated or thinned, rounded at top, and

reflected; reflection small, with one large cusp bearing a short, blunt, cut

ting point, and sub-obsolete side cusps; laterals like centrals, but asymmetri-

cal, the base of attachment much wider, the reflection and cusp with its cut-

ting point much stouter and longer; outer laterals with distinct side cusp

and cutting point; the base of attachment of the laterals is squarely cut

away on its inner angle; about the eleventh tooth the teeth begin to change

to marginals; the extremes of which last are subquadrate, wider than high,

broadly reflected into a large cusp bearing two oblique, large, irregularly

bifid cutting points:

Se a ee

100 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks.

The figuresof the jaw and lingual dentition of this species were photo-

graphed from the microscope by my friend, Mr. Samuel Powel, of Newport,

to whom I am greatly indebted for assistance in my studies of lingual den-

tition.

Stenogyra.

See Terr. Moll., V, for dentition of S. subula, Pfr., and

decollata, Lin.

Stenogyra gonostoma, Gundl. Cuba. 1. Rafael Arango.

Lingual membrane as in next species.

Stenogyra octona, Chemn. Bahia. J. G. Anthony.

Lingual membrane short and broad.

Teeth about 30-1-30. Centrals with base of attachment long, narrow, an-

gularly expanded at centre; reflection small, bluntly tricuspid, the central

cusp bearing a short, stout, cutting point; laterals much larger, as wide as

long; reflection very large, with an inner median large, and a small outer

cusp on each side of it, all the cusps bearing distinct cutting points; mar-

ginal teeth low, wide, irregularly denticulated by minute cutting points.

The peculiarity of the dentition, as in the other species of Stenogyra, is the

small central as well as distinctly tricuspid laterals; the latter are not

crowded on the membrane.

Stenogyra hasta, Pfr. Cuba.

Jaw (Pl. XV, fig. I) low, arcuate, ends somewhat attenuated, blunt; no

median projection to cutting margin; anterior surface with numerous, ver-

tical, delicate, strie.

Lingual membrane (PI. VII, fig. D). Teeth 18-1-18, as usual in the genus.

(See Terr. Moll., V.)

Stenogyra juncea, Gld. Island of Huahine. Mr. A. Garrett.

Described by Gould and Pfeiffer as a Bulimus.

Lingual membrane with 28-1-28 teeth, eight of which on each side are

laterals; dentition as in S. hasta.

Strophia.

See Terr. Moll., V, for jaw and lingual dentition of S. incana.

Strophia decumana, Fér. Castle Island, Bahamas.

Jaw stout, strongly arcuate, ends slightly attenuated, bluntly rounded;

anterior surface ribless, transversely striate, and with several stout lines of

reinforcement; a small, blunt, median projection to the cutting edge. ;

Lingual membrane (PI. VII, fig. A) with 301-80 teeth ; centrals short,

about as broad as long, with short, stout median cusps to the reflection,

bearing a stout, broad cutting point, and subobsolete side cusps bearing

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 101

short cutting points; laterals like the centrals, but bicuspid and asymmetri-

cal; the outer laterals have the inner cutting point bluntly bifid; marginals

a modification of the laterals, low, wide, with one inner, large, blunt, bifid

cutting point, and one outer smaller.

Strophia mumia, Brug. Abaco, Bahamas.

Jaw slightly arcuate, stout, rough, rather high, ends but little attenuated,

blunt ; cutting edge with a wide, blunt, slightly developed median pro-

jection.

Lingual membrane (Pl. VII, fig, B) with about 30-1-30 teeth, as in the

last species. There is a line of reinforcement to the lower margin of the

base of attachment of the central and lateral teeth.

Strophia tostoma, Ptr.

Jaw as in other species of the genus.

Lingual membrane (Pl. VII, fig. C) not differing from that of the allied

species. Teeth about 29-1-29.

Cionelia.

Cionella Gloynei, Gibbons. Curacao. Mr. J. S. Gibbons.

Jaw and lingual membrane, as usual in Slenogyra.

Pl. VII, fig. E, represents the central and first lateral teeth.

Cecilianella,.

Cecilianella Gundlachi, Pfr. St. Martin. Dr. H. HE. Ry-

gersma. ;

Jaw low, (Pl. XVI, figs. F, G,) wide, slightly arcuate, ends attenuated ;

whole surface covered with about 22 crowded, broad, flat ribs, denticulating

either margin.

Lingual membrane (PI. VII, fig. F) long and narrow. Teeth 18-1-18,

with four perfect laterals. Centrals with their base of attachment long,

narrow, their reflected portion about one-half the length of the base of at-

tachment, tricuspid; the middle cusp stout, with a short blunt cutting point,

side cusps subobsolete, but with small, distinct cutting points. Lateral

teeth with their base of attachment subquadrate, much longer, and very

much broader than that of the centrals, the reflected portion short, stout,

tricuspid, the middle cusp very stout and long, reaching the lower edge of

the base of attachment, beyond which projects the short, stout cutting

point; side cusps subobsolete, but bearing distinct, though small cutting

points. There are four perfect laterals, the fifth tooth being a transition to

the marginals, by the base of attachment being lower, wider, not exceeding

the reflected portion, with one inner large cusp bearing one outer large cut-

ting point representing the outer cutting point of the first four lateral teeth

and one inner, still larger, cutting point, representing the middle cutting

102 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks.

point of the first four laterals, and one smaller, outer cusp, bearing one

small, sharp, bifid cutting point, representing the outer side cutting point

of the first four laterals. The sixth tooth has the largest cutting point

bifid. The balance of the teeth are true marginals. They are very low,

wide, with two low, wide cusps, bearing each several irregular, blunt, cut-

ting points.

The dentition of this species is, as would be anticipated, of the same

type as the allied Cecilianella acicula, as figured by Lehmann (Lebenden

Schnecken Stettins, p. 128, Pl. XIII, fig. 48,) and Sordelli, 1. c., fig. 26).

The jaw, however, has no appearance of the *‘ brace” like ribs described in

that species by Sordelli (Atti Soc. Ital. Sc. Nat., XIII, 1870, 49, Pl. I, fig.

25). The ribs are quite like those figured of Helix Lansingi (Terr, Moll., V),

although they are narrower.

Lithotis.

Lithotis rupicola, Blandf. Bombay.

Referred by Pfeiffer to Succinea, but widely differing from

that genus in not having an elasmognathous jaw.

Jaw (Pl. XVI, fig. C) arcuate, with a depression or excavation in the

centre of its upper margin; scarcely attenuated towards the ends; cutting

edge with a decided median projection; anterior surface with vertical striz,

but no trace of ribs.

Lingual membrane (Pl. VII, fig. G): one with long and narrow base

of attachment; the reflected portion has one long, median cusp, bearing a

long cutting point; laterals like the centrals, but asymmetrical; the outer

laterals have a bifid side cutting point; marginals a simple modification of

outer laterals.

Limicolaria.

Limicolaria Numidica, Rve.

Jaw thin, highly arcuate, smooth, ends attenuated.

Lingual membrane not examined.

(6) JAW WITH DECIDED STOUT RIBS.

This section, also, is unsatisfactory, as the species included in

it are not all so characterized.

Anadenus.

Anadenus ———-? Himalaya Mountains. An undetermined

species.

The jaw is thick, low, wide, slightly arcuate; ends but little attenuated;

anterior surface with fourteen stout, unequal, separated ribs, denticulating

either margin.

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 103

On Pl. VII, fig. I, I have figured the lingual dentition of this slug, whose

specific name is unknown to me. There are 58-1-58 teeth.

The dentition is of the same type as described in the genus by Heyne-

mann, Malak. Blatt., X, 1868, p. 138.

Carelia,

Carelia bicolor, Jay. Dr. W. H. Dall.

Through the kindness of Dr. Dall, I have been able to examine this spe-

cies, formerly known as Achatina bicolor. Thus I have increased the list of

subgenera or groups of Achatinella of Gulick’s arrangement, whose jaw and

lingual dentition is known, leaving still to be examined Newcombia only of

the same arrangement. (See ante, p. 96.)

It will be seen from my description, that while Carelia (or at least this

species) differs utterly in jaw and dentition from Gulick’s Achatinella, s. s.,

Bulimella, Apex, Partulina, Auriculella, it agrees in dentition with his Laminella,

Amastlra, Leptachatina, but differs in having a costate jaw. Carelia, there-

fore, must stand distinct from any other groups of Achatinella.

The jaw (Pl. XVI, fig. D) is low, slightly arcuate, with but little attenu-

ated, blunt ends; anterior surface with ten stout ribs, denticulating either

margin.

Lingual membrane (PI. VI, fig. I) long and narrow; teeth 37-1-37, of same

type as in the species of Laminella, Newcombia, and Leptachatina (see above),

the marginals being irregularly and obliquely pectinate as in Achatinella obesa.

Geomalacus,.

Geomalacus maculosus, Allm. Ireland. Mr. Gwynn Jeffreys.

Jaw stout, arched, ends not attenuated, blunt; anterior surface with about

twelve, broad, crowded ribs, of which four in the centre are more developed

and deeply denticulate either margin.

Lingual membrane (PI. III, fig. H’; centrals with long and narrow base

of attachment; reflection large, with a stout median cusp bearing a long,

stout cutting point; side cusps obsolete; laterals like the centrals, but asym-

metrical; marginals to the extreme edge of the membrane a simple modifi-

cation of the laterals, low, wide, with one inner, long, oblique cutting point,

and a smaller, side cutting point.

Veronicelia,

See Terr. Moll., V, for a description of jaw and hngual mem-

brane of the genus. ‘The following species agree in lingual

dentition :—

Veronicella occidentalis, Guild. Guadeloupe. Mr. Schramm.

Jaw with about 30 ribs.

104 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. —

Veronicella Sloanet. Jamaica.

Jaw with 20 broad ribs. iat

Veronicella ———. Rio Janeiro, Brazil. J. G. Anthony.

The species undetermined, Body very long and slender. |

Jaw with about 30 ribs. :

Lingual membrane figured on PI. III, fig. B.

Veronicella ———. Rio Janeiro. J. G. Anthony.

The species undetermined.

Jaw with 20 broad ribs,

Veronicella ———. Costa Rica. Dr. W. M. Gabb.

An undetermined species. Body long and narrow. |

Jaw with from 380 to 40 ribs. ;

Veronicella ———. Mozambique. Mr. J. S. Gibbons.

An undetermined species.

Jaw with over 22 ribs.

Veronicella olivacea, Stearns. Folvon, Occidental Depart-

ment, Nicaragua. Mr. McNeil.

Jaw with over 20 ribs.

Lingual membrane, see Terr. Moll., V.

Simpulopsis.

Shuttleworth describes the jaw as having numerous, stout,

anterior ribs.

Simpulopsis corrugatus, Guppy.. Trimidad. Mr. Guppy.

Jaw not observed.

Lingual membrane (Pl. VII, fig. J) with teeth of same type as figured by

Heynemann for S. sulculosus. Centrals smaller than the laterals; base of

attachment almost as broad as long, its lower margin excavated as in Sue-

cinea ; reflection large, with three cusps and cutting points. Laterals like

the centrals, but larger and asymmeirical, the inner, larger cusp of the re-

flection bearing a very large, expanded, blunt cutting point.

Cryptostrakon.

Cryptostrakon Gabbi, W. G. Binn. Costa Rica. Dr. W. M.

Gabb.

Jaw (Pl. XVI, fig. L) high, solid, decidedly arched, ends scarcely attenu-

ated ; anterior surface with a few stout ribs, denticulating the lower

margin.

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 105

Lingual membrane (PI. VII, fig. K) long and narrow; central teeth tri-

cuspid ; laterals bicuspid; marginals quadrate, irregularly bicuspid, the

inner cutting points the larger and bifid.

Microphysa.

Microphysa is put in Helicea by von Martens. M. minuscaula

(Terr. Moll., V), and ctrcumfirmata, Redf., both belong to Vitri-

nea, having aculeate marginal teeth, and jaw of Zonites. M.

turbiniformis, Pfr., has a jaw as in Cylindrella, Bulimulus, ete.,

?. €., with numerous very delicate, distant ribs, giving the ap-

pearance of separate plates. It would be put in Goniognatha

of Mérch, though there are no upper triangular median plates.

M. vortex and incrustata (see Terr. Moll., V) have quadrate

marginal teeth ; the jaw of tzcrustata has numerous, crowded,

flat ribs; that of vortex was not observed.

Microphysa? circumfirmata, Redfield.

Jaw not observed.

Lingual membrane long and broad, centrals tricuspid, laterals bicuspid,

cusps long and slender, marginals aculeate.

From the above description it will appear that this species

belongs to the Vitrinea rather than to the Helicea of von Mar-

ten’s arrangement, in which latter it is classed in ‘‘ Die Heli-

ceen” as a species of the subgenus Microphysa. I leave it here,

not knowing what else to do with it.

Microphysa turbiniformis, Pfr. Jamaica. Mr. Henry Ven-

dreyes.

Jaw (Pl. XV, fig. C) so extremely thin and delicate as to fold over on

itself along its margin and at its extremities; very light horn-colored, almost

transparent ; strongly arched, attenuated towards its obtuse ends ; about

forty delicate ribs, such as are found in Cylindrella, serrating either margin

on about the centre of the jaw isa curving line of reinforcement, somewhat

parallel to the lower margin; the upper margin slightly incurved at its cen-

tre; the ribs at the centre of the upper margin do not run en chevron as do

those of Cyiindreiia,

Lingual membrane (Pl. VII, fig. L) long and narrow; teeth about 25-1-25.

Centrals large in proportion to the laterals, with a subquadrate base of at-

tachment; three decided, separated cusps and cutting points; laterals tri-

cuspid; marginals low, wide, with both inner and outer cusp bearing an

oblique, broad, bifid cutting point.

106 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks.

Fruticicola.

See Terr. Moll., V, for #. rufescens and hispida. °

Fruticicola pubescens, Pir. Haiti. Mr. V. P. Parkhurst.

Jaw (Pl. XV, fig. H) thin, semitransparent, low, slightly arcuate, ends.

scarcely attenuated, blunt ; upper margin with a strong muscular attach-

ment ; no median projection to cutting edge ; anterior surface with about

twenty ribs denticulating either margin; these ribs appear in most cases to

be broad, flat, with narrow interstices, but in others there are: appearances

such as I have described in Bulimulus limnaeoides see below’.

Lingual membrane long and narrow (PI. VI, fig. J). Teeth as usual in the

Helicine. The change from laterals to marginals is very gradual, not formed

by the splitting of the inner cutting point. The 12th tooth (figured) shows

the commencement of the transition. The 22d (figured) is a marginal tooth.

The inner cutting point of the marginals is rarely bifid. Teeth 24-1-24.

Doreasia.

There is wide variation in the characters of the jaws in this

genus. For D. griseola, Pir., see Terr. Moll., V.

Dorcasia similaris, Fer. Brazil. J. G. Anthony.

Jaw arched, ends not attenuated, blunt ; anterior surface with eight sepa-

rated ribs, denticulating either margin. :

Lingual membrane (Pl. VI, fig. L) long, with unicuspid centrals and

laterals; marginals low, wide, each cusp bifid.

Dorcasia globulus, Mull.

Jaw low, wide, scarcely arcuate, ends not acuminated; no anterior ribs.

Lingual membrane (Pl. VI, fig, M) with about 40-1-40 teeth ; teeth with

almost square bases of attachment; both centrals and laterals are very dis-

tinctly tricuspid ; marginals a simple modification of laterals, the broad

cutting point trifid.

Both by jaw and lingual dentition this does not agree with the other spe-

cies of Dorcasia examined.

- WTurricula,

For 7. terrestris, see Terr. Moll., V.

Turricula tuberculosa, Cony. Palestine. A dried specimen

in Mr. Bland’s collection.

Jaw with numerous, crowded, broad, flat ribs, denticulating either

margin.

Lingual membrane (PI. VI,. fig. N) long and narrow. Teeth 28-1-28;

centrals and laterals without decided side cusps or cutting points, but the

central cutting point has a decided lateral bulge; marginals low, wide.

a Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 10%

with one inner, oblique, large bifid cutting point, and two outer smaller

cutting points. A marginal is shown in the figure, with a central and

lateral.

Coryda.,

Coryda Gossei, Pfr. Jamaica. Messrs. Vendreyes and Gloyne.

Jaw not examined.

Lingual membrane (PI. V, fig. J) broad; of same type as in Plagioptycha,

Plebecula.

Plebecula lurida. Madeira. Dr. Hillebrand.

Jaw low, slightly arcuate, ends scarcely attenuated; anterior surface with

about eight broad, separated ribs.

Lingual membrane (PI. V, fig. K) with tricuspid centrals, bicuspid later-

als, all the cusps bearing cutting points; marginals with one, inner, long,

oblique, bifid cutting point, and one outer, smaller, bifid cutting point.

Leptaxis.

Leptaxis undata, Lowe. Madeira. Dr. Hillebrand.

Jaw described by Mérch as narrow, with numerous ribs converging to

the centre.

Lingual membrane (PI. VIII, fig. C) of the individual examined, pecu-

liarly abnormal, the malformed teeth as figured being repeated frequently

on each transverse row, and down the whole length of the membrane.

Such malformations are often found in lingual membranes.

Pomatia.

See Terr. Moll., V, for description of jaw and membrane of

P. aspersa.

Pomatia Sieboldtiana, Phil. Japan.

Jaw high, arched, ends but little attenuated, blunt; anterior surface with

eight stout, separated ribs, denticulating either margin; no median projec-

tion to cutting edge. (PI. XVI, fig. H.)

Lingual membrane (Pl. VIII, fig. B) long and narrow; teeth 39-1-39,

with 21 perfect laterals on each side of the median line; base of attachment

of centrals long and narrow, reflection broad, with stout median cusp and

cutting point; side cusps and cutting points wanting; laterals like the cen-

trals, but asymmetrical, the fifteeenth lateral is the first with the side cutting

point; marginals low, wide, with one broad, oblique, bluntly bifid cutting

point, and one side, short, cutting point.

The species was put by von Martens in Acusta, a sub-genus

of Nanina.

108 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks.

Pomatia Humboldtiana, Val. Mexico. Dr. E. Palmer.

Jaw short, arched, bluntly ending; with six broad, separated, stout ribs,

denticulating either margin.

Lingual membrane (PI. VIII, fig. A) with shorter, stouter teeth than in

the last species. The centrals are pear-shaped, with no side cusps or cut-

ting points.

Thelidomus.

Jaw with stout anterior ribs.

Lingual membrane the same in the species examined, in gen-

eral characteristics, but there will be found variation as to the

presence of side cutting points on centrals and laterals.

Thelidomus aspera, Fér. Jamaica. Mr. V. P. Parkhurst.

Jaw wide, low, arcuate, ends but slightly attenuated, blunt; anterior sur-

face with eight sharp, prominent ribs, strongly denticulating either margin.

Lingual dentition (Pl. VIII, fig. E) long and narrow. Teeth 41-1-41.

Centrals and laterals with stout broad cusps and cutting points; no side

cusps or cutting points; marginals with one long, bluntly bifid cutting

point.

Thelidomus discolor, Fer.

Jaw arcuate, thick, ends blunt. Anterior surface with seven unequal,

decided, stout ribs, denticulating either margin.

Lingual membrane (PI. VIII, fig. D) long and narrow. Centrals with a

long narrow base of attachment expanded at the base, and bearing at its

corners a small reinforcement; lower margin extending beyond the cusp;

reflection bluntly tricuspid, the median cusp long, stout, with a short blunt

point; side cusps subobsolete.- Laterals as the centrals, but asymmetrical,

and with a shorter base of attachment. Marginals quadrate, wide as high,

with two short, blunt denticles, the inner one slightly the longer.

Thelidomus auricoma, Fer. Lomas de Camoa, Cuba. Mr.

Arango.

Jaw arched, with blunt, scarcely attenuated ends; twelve broad ribs dis-

tributed over the whole anterior surface and denticulating either margin.

Lingual membrane (Pl. VIII, fig. F) with 42-1-42 teeth, of which 25 may

be called laterals, but the change is gradual into marginals. Teeth as in

provisoria.

Thelidomus notabilis, Shuttl. Tortola. Mr. Robert Swift.

Jaw arcuate, low, ends blunt, narrower at the centre; decided separate

ribs denticulating either margin.

Lingual membrane (PI. VIII, fig. G). Centrals tricuspid; laterals bicuspid;

the base of attachment about as wide as high, the larger cusp with a long

cutting point extending beyond the lower margin of the base of attachment.

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 109

Marginals quadrate, of equal width and height, with two short, wide, blunt,

round cusps, the inner one slightly the larger.

Thelidomus lima, Fer. Porto Rico. Mr. R. Swift.

Jaw arcuate, ends blunt; anterior surface with seven stout ribs; a strong

muscular attachment.

No lingual membrane examined.

Thelidomus Jamaicensis, Chemn. Jamaica. V. P. Parkhurst.

The species is placed in Liochila. by von Martens, but Mr. Bland places it

in this genus. .

Jaw thick, arcuate, ends attenuated ; anterior surface with 14 decided

but unequal ribs, irregularly disposed Sid denticulating either margin.

Lingual membrane (Pl. VIII, fig. H) long and narrow, with 41-1-41 teeth;

there are no distinct side cusps and cuttting points on the centrals and inner

laterals.

Thelidomus provisoria, Pfr. New Providence, Bahamas. Goy.

Rawson.

Jaw very slightly arcuate, wide, low, of equal height throughout to its

blunt ends; anterior surface with 10-15 ribs, separated by irregular intervals,

not always reaching the cutting edge, which has a broad, blunt, median

projection.

Lingual membrane (Pl. VIII, fig: I) with 40-1-40 teeth ; the centrals and

jaterals have a distinct side cutting point.

Eurycratera.

Hurycratera angulata, Fer. Porto Rico. Mr. R. Swift.

Jaw stout, dark claret-colored, low, wide, ends blunt; about seven very

wide, very crowded ribs, bluntly denticulating either margin.

Lingual membrane (Pl. VIII, fig. oh central and laterals with distinct

side cutting points.

Eurycratera crispata, Fér. San Domingo. Dr. Newcomb.

Jaw thick, arcuate, ends blunt; anterior surface with ten stout ribs.

‘Lingual membrane (PI. VIII, fig. K). Centrals and laterals with the

upper margin of the base of attachment produced into angles as below, with

distinct side cutting point; middle cutting point of centrals and inner cutting

point of laterals greatly produced.

Poltydonies.

No jaw of this genus examined.

Polydontes Luquillensis, Shuttl.

Lingual membrane (Pl. VIL, fig. L) as usual in the Helicide. Centrals

tricuspid, laterals bicuspid; cusps wtih long, sharp cutting points, extend-

110 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks.

ing beyond the base of attachment; marginals bicuspid, cusps short , bluntly

rounded, the inner one, as usual, the longer, each beams short cutting

points.

Stylodon.

I have shown H. militaris, Pfr., placed in this genus by

von Martens, to be a Nanina.

Stylodon Studeriana, Fér. Seychelles. Consul Pike.

Jaw stout, strongly arched, ends but little attenuated, blunt; anterior sur-

face without ribs ; there are, however, a few coarse, broad, vertical wrinkles.

One jaw had a slightly developed median ae A to its cutting edge,

another has no approach to a projection.

Plate VIII, fig. M, shows the lingual dentition; teeth 69-1-69, with about

22 laterals on each side. There is considerable resemblance to the dentition

of Merope fringilla described below. The cutting points on centrals and

laterals are, however, more pointed. There are no side cusps or cutting

points to centrals or inner laterals; the outer laterals and margmals have

very oblique, broad, bluntly trifid cutting points.

Dentetiaria,

In this genus, the presence or absence of ribs on the jaw is

not a reliable generic character.

I have examined a large proportion of the known species.

The jaw varies somewhat, so that each description should be

studied. There seems a tendency to a median projection to the

cutting edge, and to the presence of ribs. D. pachygastra, Gray,

has seven decided ribs and no median projection; orbiculata,

Fér., has traces of ribs and no median projection; Jsabella,

Fér., has decided ribs. and no median projection; dentiens,

Fér., has decided ribs and no median projection; nueleola,

Rang., has one decided rib and a median projection; badia has

eight decided ribs; formosa, Feér., has no ribs, but a strong

median projection; perplexa, Fér., ia obsolete ribs and median

projection; lychnuchus, same as last; punctata, Born, has

median projection and decided ribs ; Josephine, Fer., is strongly

arched, has no ribs, but a median projection.

The species agree in their dentition.

Dentellaria orbiculata, Feér.

Jaw striated, thick, slightly arched, ends squarely truncated; cutting

edge irregular, showing traces of the ends of subobsolete ribs, no median

projection. (Pl. XVI, fig. W.)

—

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 111

Lingual membrane (Pl. IX, fig. A) long and broad, with 47-1-47 teeth.

Base of attachment long and narrow in centrals, a line of reinforcement

near its upper margin ; reflected portion small, stout, with a short, stout

median cusp bearing a short, stout cutting point, no side cusps or cutting

points; first laterals like the centrals, but asymmetrical; outer laterals with

side cusp and cutting point ; marginals low, wide, with one large, inner

bluntly bifid cutting point and one outer small bifid cutting point.

Dentellaria Isabelle, Fér. Barbadoes. Gov. Rawson.

Jaw. striated vertically and horizontally, with about eight well-defined

ribs denticulating either margin.

Lingual membrane (PI. IX, fig. B) as above.

Dentellaria dentiens, Fer. Dominica. Mr. Guppy.

Pl. LX, fig. C, gives full details of the changes of the teeth from centrals

to marginals, especially the side cusp and cutting point of the outer

laterals, and the transition from laterals to marginals; teeth 33-1-33.

Jaw (Pl. XVI, fig. N) with 4-5 stout ribs denticulating either margin.

Dentellaria nucleola, Rang. Martinique. Gov. Rawson.

Jaw thick, arched, ends blunt; cutting margin with an obtuse median

projection ; one central, stout rib, denticulating either margin. (Pl. XVI,

fig. O.)

Lingual membrane as usual in orbiculata. (Pl. IX, fig. D.)

Dentellaria nuxdenticulata, Chemn. Martinique. Gov.

Rawson.

Jaw (Pl. XVI, fig. V) stout, arched, ends blunt; blunt median projection

to cutting edge; one stout, well-developed rib on the centre of the jaw, and

three less developed, separated, on either side of it.

Lingual membrane (P1. LX, fig. E) as in the other species.

Dentellaria pachygastra, Gray... Guadeloupe. Mr, Schramm.

Jaw (Pl. XVI, fig. P) stout, slightly arcuate, ends blunt; anterior surface

with about seven irregularly disposed ribs; both ends free from ribs.

_ Lingual membrane (Pl. IX, fig. F) as in the other species.

Dentellaria badia, Fer.

Jaw stout, arched, ends blunt; eight decided ribs. (Pl. XVI, fig. Q.)

Lingual membrane (PI. TX, fig. G) as in other species.

Dentellaria formosa, Fér. Antigua. Mr. Robert Swift.

Jaw arched; ends blunt; several strong, transverse lines of reinforce-

ment, but no ribs; a median projection to cutting edge. (Pl. XVI, fig. R.)

Lingual membrane as usual in the genus. (PI. IX, fig. H.)

Dentellaria Josephine, Fér. Guadeloupe. Mr. Schramm.

Jaw (Pl. XVI. fig. $8) stout, ribless, horseshoe-shaped, ends bluntly

112 3 a a Pulmonate La

rounded ; a decided’ median Penjeeios to the cutting edge, marked with

strong porsea strive. 7 8

Lingual membrane as in other species. Pl. IX, fg. I )

Dentellaria perpleca, Fér. Island of Grenada. Gov. Rawson.

Jaw with a median projection to its cutting edge, The anterior surface |

js of irregular thickness, showing some approach to the ribbed form of jaw.

(PL XV DE tig. 2) .

Lingual membrane as usual. Central and lateral teeth with short, stout,

blunt cusps.’ Marginal teeth quadrate, with one wide, stout, bluntly rounded

median cusp, and two small, blunt side cusps. (Pl. IX, fig. J.)

Dentellaria lychnuchus, Mill. Guadeloupe. Mr. A. Schramm.

Jaw (Pl. XVI, fig. U) arched, ends blunt, cutting margin with a broad,

blunt, median projection; strong vertical striz and transverse lines of re-

inforcement, and subobsolete ribs, which denticulate the upper margin.

Lingual membrane as in the other species. (Pl. IX, fig. K.)

Pleurodonta.

The jaw is decidedly costate. Lingual membrane much as in

Plagioptycha and Dentellariva.

Pleurodonta acuta, Lam. Jamaica.

Jaw arched, thick, ends blunt, attenuated; anterior surface with seven

distant, stout ribs, denticulating either margin.

Lingual membrane (Pl. X, fig. A) with 40-1-40 teeth as above; the mar-

ginal figured has only one long, oblique cutting point.

Pleurodonta Chemnitziana, Pfr. Jamaica. Mr. Robert Swift.

Jaw stout, arched, ends attenuated, blunt ; anterior surface with about

six irregularly disposed ribs, stout.and denticulating either margin.

No lingual membrane received.

Pleurodonta Carmelita, Fér. Jamaica. Mr. Robert Swift.

Jaw arcuate, ends blunt, anterior surface with about six stout ribs, den-

ticulating either margin.

Lingual membrane (PI. X, fig. B) as usual in the genus. Central teeth

short, bluntly pointed on the middle cusps, the side cusps subobsolete; lat-

erals like centrals, also with obsolete side cusps and cutting points; mar-

ginals low, wide, with an inner large, oblique, bluntly trifid cutting point.

Pleurodonta Schroeteriana, Pfr. Jamaica. Mr. Vendreyes.

Jaw not examined.

Lingual membrane (Pl. X, fig. C) as in other species.

Pleurodonta invalida, Ad. Jamaica. Mr. Henry Vendreyes.

Jaw not examined.

Lingual membrane (Pl. X, fig. D) as in the other species. Centrals and

laterals short and stout.

»., "> eS

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 115

Merope.

Merope fringilla, Ptr. Admiralty Island. Prof. A. G.

Wetherby.

The dried remains of the animal in the shell of a cabinet specimen fur-

nished the lingual membrane and jaw here described. The shell is the

variety with the pink peristome.

Jaw with numerous crowded, stout ribs, denticulating either margin.

Lingual membrane (PI. X, fig. E) long and narrow; teeth 28-1-28, with

about 11 laterals. Centrals with base of attachment longer than wide; side

cusps obsolete, side cutting points wanting; middle cusp broad, blunt, with

a very short, broad, blunt cutting point. Laterals like the centrals, but

asymmetrical; the cutting point becomes longer as they pass off laterally,

and at the 12th tooth it commences to be bluntly trifid. The marginals are

peculiar; their base of attachment is subquadrate, with a single broad cusp,

bearing a very broad, oblique, expanding, trifid cutting point; the outer

division very small, pointed; the median longer, very broad, squarely trunc-

ated; the inner one about half the size of the median, recurved and sharply

pointed.

The left hand figure in the plate shows a marginal in profile.

The dentition of this species is peculiar, resembling that common in

Orthaiicus rather than the type usual in Heliz.

Heliz, -———. Costa Rica. Dr. W. M. Gabb.

Jaw not observed.

Lingual membrane (PI. V, fig. L) long and narrow. Teeth 15-1-15. Cen-

trals with a base of attachment longer than wide, with lower lateral ex-

pansions; reflection large, decidedly tricuspid, each cusp surmounted by a

cutting point. Laterals like the centrals, but asymmetrical and consequently

bicuspid. Marginals low, wide, irregularly denticulated or serrate, the

inner three cutting points being longer than the outer ones, of which there

ure several.

Helix astur, Souv. Ido not know the position of this species.

New Caledonia.

Jaw (Pl. XVI, fig. B) low, wide, slightly arcuate, ends scarcely attenu-

ated, blunt; anterior surface without ribs; a wide, blunt, median projection

to the cutting edge; a line of reinforcement running parallel to the cutting

margin; a strong muscular attachment to the upper margin.

Lingual membrane (PI. X, fig. F) with 30-1-30 teeth, nine perfect laterals

on each side; teeth as usual in the Helicide ; with decided side cusps and

cutting points.

Heliz convicta, Cox. Australin. Dr. Cox.

Subgeneric position unknown to me.

Jaw highly arcuate, thick, ends blunt; anterior surface with seven sepa-

rated, stout ribs, denticulating either margin.

114 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks.

Lingual membrane (Pl. X, fig. G) with 30-1-30 teeth, ten laterals on each

side; centrals and inner laterals without side cutting points; marginals low,

wide, with one inner, large, oblique bifid cutting point, and one smaller

side cutting point.

Cochilostyla..

The only subgenus examined is Canistrum, and this only in

one species :—

Canistrum fulgetrum, Brod.

Jaw arcuate, thick, wide, low, ends but slightly attenuated, blunt; an-

terior surface with more than twelve stout, broad ribs, denticulating either

margin.

Lingual membrane (Pl. XI, fig. G) long and broad. with 80-1-80 teeth;

centrals and inner laterals without side cusps and cutting points, the reflec-

tion and cusp stout, the cutting point blunt ; marginals with greatly pro-

duced, bluntly pointed upper margin to the base of attachment.

Bulimus.

Of this genus species of several subgenera were examined.

Macrodontes odontostomus, Sowb.

Jaw wide, low, slightly arched, smooth.

Lingual dentition (Pl. X, fig. H). Teeth 34-1-34; the cusps and cutting

points are short and stout; no side cusps or cutting points.

Pelecychilus auris-Sileni, Born. St. Vincent.

Jaw with delicate, distant ribs, as in Cylindrella, q. v.

The cutting points on the teeth of the lingual membrane are very long.

(Pl. X, fig. I). The upper, as well as lower, lateral angles of the base of

attachment in the centrals and laterals are greatly developed.

Pelecychilus glaber, Gmel. Island of Grenada, W. I.

Jaw as in last species.

Lingual membrane (Pl. X, fig. J) with decided side cusps and cutting

points to all the teeth.

Anthinus multicolor, Rang.

Jaw thick, greatly arched, ends attenuated, striate; no anterior ribs; no

median projection to cutting edge.

Lingual membrane (Pl. XJ, fig. A) with 40-1-40 teeth; base of attachment

very long, reflection small, with a short blunt cutting point; no side cusps

or cutting points.

Pachyotus egregius, Jay.- Brazil. J. G. Anthony.

Jaw not examined.

Lingual membrane (Pl. XI, fig. B); the upper margin of the base of at-

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 115

tachment is carried beyond the reflection in the centrals; teeth stout, with

stout cusps and cutting points.

Borus oblongus, var. albus, Mill. Tobago. Goy. Rawson.

Jaw slightly arcuate, stout, wide, of almost equal height throughout;

ends but slightly attenuated, blunt; anterior surface with vertical and

transverse striz and perpendicular wrinkles, scarcely distinguishable from

the ribs, of which there are ten well-developed, crenulating either margin.

Lingual dentition as published by Heynemann for 8B. oblongus in Mal.

Blatt., 1868.

Orphnus Hanleyi, Pfr. Brazil. J. G. Anthony.

Jaw stout, strongly arched, transversly striate; ends but little attenuated,

blunt; cutting edge with a broad, stout, striated median projection.

Lingual membrane (Pl. XI, fig. D) long and narrow; teeth 50-1-50; the

lower margin of the base of attachment is excavated in centrals and lat-

erals; no side cusps or cutting points.

Orphnus foveolatus, Rve. Northern Peru. Prof. Orton.

Jaw slightly arched, wide, low, thin, with over 50 delicate ribs of the

kind described below under Bulimulus Lobbi, Rve.

Lingual membrane (Pl. XI, fig. C) long and narrow, with 34-1-34 teeth;

no side cusps or cutting points to centrals and laterals; reflection short,

stout; the membrane is of the same width to its abruptly truncated ends,

and very thick.

Orphnus magnificus, Grat. Brazil.

Jaw stout, low, wide, slightly arched, ends slightly attenuated, blunt;

entire anterior surface covered with numerous stout ribs, breaking the

regularity of both upper and lower margin, but not actually denticulating

them.

Lingual membrane long, rather broad, with 30-1-30 teeth. Teeth as in

O. Hanleyi.

Dryptus pardalis, Fer.

Jaw thick, low, wide, slightly arcuate, ends but slightly attenuated,

blunt ; whole anterior surface occupied by 12 broad ribs, denticulating

either margin.

Lingual membrane not examined.

Dryptus marmoratus, Diinker.

Lingual membrane (PI. XI, fig. E) long and broad; no side cusps or cut-

ting points. .

Furytus aulacostylus, Pfr. St. Vincent. Gov. Rawson.

Jaw thin, transparent, slightly arcuate, with about sixty delicate ribs, as

116 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks.

found in Cylindrella ; no upper median ribs en chevron, but all the ribs slightly

oblique. ;

Lingual membrane (PI. XI, fig. F); centrals tricuspid, laterals’ bicuspid,

each cusp with long cutting point.

OBLIQUELY TOWARDS THE CENTRE,

Several species are fuund in the last genus with this type of

jaw.

Geotis.

The genus Geotis was described by Shuttleworth,* founded

on a curious mollusk from Porto Rico. ‘The lingual dentition

was said by him to be nearly the same asin Vitrina and Zonittes,

the teeth arranged in oblique rows, centrals obtusely tridentate,

laterals scarcely differing from the centrals, marginals length-

ened, awl-shaped, arcuate, at base ? bifurcate. The presence of.

a jaw was not verified by Shuttleworth. The character of the

dentition was considered such as to denote carnivorous habits of

the animal.

An examination of an unidentified Porto Rico specimen (Mr.

R. Swift) has furnished the following description.

Geotts

Jaw (Pl. XV, fig. A) long, low, slightly arcuate, ends attenuated, ex-

tremely thin and delicate, transparent; in one single piece, but divided by

over forty+ delicate ribs into as many plate-like compartments of the type -

common in Cylindrella and Bulimulus, but with no upper median triangular

space; the ends of the ribs serrate the upper and lower margins.

Lingual membrane (PI. XI, figs. H, I) long and broad, composed of nu-

merous rows of teeth arranged en chevron. Centrals with base of attachment

very long, narrow, obtuse above, incurved at sides, obtusely rounded and

expanded at base, near which is a short, gouge-shaped, expanded cusp,

whose lower edge has three bluntly-rounded cutting points. Laterals same

as centrals in shape, but a little larger, and asymmetrical from the dis-

proportionate expansion of the cutting point. Marginals same as laterals,

but more slender, with more developed and graceful cutting points, of

* Férussac’s figure of Parmacella palliolum seems to show a jaw with stout

ribs; I do not think Geolis can belong to the same genus, Peltella.

+ Fragments only of the jaw were saved; the largest one I have

figured, and from it estimate the whole number of ribs.

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. ba be

which the median is pointed, often bifid. There is much variety in the

shape and denticulation of the cusps. The middle denticle is always the

smallest. Teeth aculeate when seen in profile. ;

By its jaw, @q@otis calls to our mind the genua Amphibulima,

and many species of Bulimulus and Cylindrella. ‘Vhere is some

resemblance in its lingual dentition to the marginal teeth of

Orthalicus and Liguus, as well as of Polymita muscarum. It

also forcibly reminds one of some of the features of the denti-

tion of Zriboniophorus.

Amphibulima,

Amphibulima patula, Brug. Dominica. St. Kitts.

Jaw (Pl. XV, fig. E) slightly arcuate, low, ends attenuated: extremely

thin and transparent, with prominent transverse striz, divided longitudi-

nally by about forty-five delicate ribs into so many plate-like sections of the

same character as those of Cylindrella, Macroceramus, and many species of

Bulimulus. No upper triangular median plates as in Cylindrella. Margin

serrated by extremities of ribs.

Lingual membrane (PI. XIII, figs. C, D) from a specimen from Dominica,

long and broad, composed of numerous horizontally-waving rows of teeth,

of the form usual in the Helicide, Centrals with subquadrate base of attach-

ment extended at basal angles, narrowing towards the centre, expanding

towards the upper edge, which is reflected and tricuspid, extending quite to

the base of the tooth; the cusps are stout, the median one bluntly pointed,

each bearing a cutting point. The lateral teeth are of the same type as the

centrals, but asymmetrical. The marginals are long and narrow, rounded

at base, narrowed at apex, reflected and bicuspid; cusps short, stout, bear-

ing a cutting point, and generally a simple modification of those of the

laterals. The extreme marginals have irregular cutting points, like simple

papille. Fig. D shows a group of laterals. Fig. C shows the changes from

centrals to extreme marginals.

Pl. XIII, fig. A, shows the dentition of the St. Kitts form, fig. B giving

a group of laterals.

Lately the question of identity of these shells with the Guadeloupe patula

has been raised (see Journal de Conchyliologie, X XI, 12). I have, there-

fore, again carefully examined the lingual membranes previously described,

to learn if they give any difference worthy to be considered of specific

value. I have figured teeth from each lingual membrane. I regret not

having had the opportunity of examining Guadeloupe specimens also, but

have never been able to receive the latter with the animal; indeed it seems

118 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks.. —

to be now found subfossil only.* I can only treat the question of the

identity of the St. Kitts and Dominica forms, not their identity with Guade-

loupe forms.

It will be seen that the Dominica form has oe cutting pottita to the

large cusps of its central and lateral teeth than that of St. Kitts. Fig. B

shows a group of laterals of the former, in which some variation from the

pointed shape is indeed shown, but no decided tendency that way. On the

other hand, the laterals, from the St. Kitts form, show great constancy in

the square truncation of the cutting points. (Fig. B.)

The teeth of the St. Kitts form are broader in proportion to their length

than those of Dominica, have a greater curve in their outlines, and more

developed side cusps, which overlap the median cusps.

The Dominica lingual in the only row counted had 87-1-87 teeth. A row

of the St. Kitts form had 57-1-57. The marginal teeth of the St. Kitts form

show a greater tendency to splitting into sharp denticles on the cutting

cusps than those of Dominica.

It cannot be denied that certain variations may be noticed in the two lin-

gual membranes. I believe, however, that these differences are not such

as suggest specific distinction, especially as the shell furnishes no grounds

for doubting the specific identity of the forms.

Mr. Bland has given a detailed account of the species in Journal de

Conchyliologie, X XI, 342, October, 1873.

Amphibulina Rawsonis, Bl. Isle of Montserrat, between

Nevis and Guadeloupe. Gov. Rawson.

Jaw as in A. rubescens, about 33 ribs; those at the upper centre running

obliquely and meeting or ending before reaching the lower margin.

Lingual membrane (PI. XIII, figs. H, G) as usual in the genus. Centrals

with the base of attachment very much larger than that of the laterals, and

with an enormous, single, broad, long, rapidly and obtusely pointed cutting

point. No side cusps or side cutting points. Laterals of the form usual

in the Helicinw, with a stout, inner cusp, bearing a broadly truncated, short

cutting point, aud a small side cusp bearing a short cutting point.

The change from laterals to marginals is shown in the 10th, 15th and

27th teeth in the plate.

The marginals (28th and 68th teeth in the plate) have a long, narrow base

of attachment, which near its lower margin bears a short, slightly expand-

ing, bluntly trifid cusp; from this cusp springs a short, expanding, bluntly

denticulated, broad, cutting edge, the inner denticle the largest. This cut-

ting edge is shown in the 67th and 68th teeth on a more enlarged scale,

There is great variation in the denticulation of the cutting edge. There

are 68-1-68 teeth. |

* See, also, under A. Rawsonis, for Fischer’s description of the dentition

of the Guadeloupe form.

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 119

The peculiarity of this membrane is the enormous development of the

central tooth.

Fig. G shows a lateral in profile: I have given figures of the dentition of

A, patula, Brug., of St. Kitts and of Dominica, of A. appendiculata, Pfr., of

Guadeloupe, and of A. rubescens, Fér., of Martinique. Dr. Fischer (Journ.

de Conch., XXII, 1874, Pl. V) figures that of A. depressa of Guadeloupe.

and A. patula of Guadeloupe.

Dr. Fischer also (1. c.) figures the dentition of A. rubescens. He gives

inner side cutting points to the lateral teeth, which I did not find in my

specimens. Huis figure of the dentition of the Guadeloupe A. patula is cer-

tainly specifically distinct from the St. Kitts and Dominica form. It seems

as if there were the following distinct species of Amphibulima: depressa, ap-

pendiculata, rubescens, patula of Guadeloupe, patula of St. Kitts and Dominica,

and Rawsonis,

Amphibulima rubescens, Desh. Martinique. Gov. Rawson.

The jaw is readily detached from the muscles of the mouth, and is not

connected with the lingual membrane as usual with our Helices.* It is

thin, wide, low, arched, with attenuated, bluntly pointed ends, divided by

numerous (about 63) delicate ribs into separate plate-like divisions, as in

the jaw of Cylindrella. Bulimulus, etc., the ribs running somewhat obliquely

towards the centre of the jaw; there is no decided, upper median, triangular

plate. (Pl. XV, fig. D.) The lingual membrane (Pl. XIII, fig. F) is long,

broad, composed of numerous rows of 76-1-76 teeth. Centrals long, narrow,

expanding below, with the lower margin of the base of attachment squarely

excavated as in Succinea; tricuspid, the central cusp very long, wide, with a

greatly expanded, squarely truncated cutting point reaching beyond the lower

margin of the base of attachment; the side cusps short and narrow, simply

pointed. The lateral teeth are of same type as the centrals, but asym-

metrical and bicuspid. The marginals are a simple modification of the

laterals, with a long, bluntly truncated median cusp, and obsolete side cusps.

The extreme marginals are irregularly denticulated, the outer and inner

denticles being more produced, especially the outer, and greatly curved;

the inner denticles, usually two in number, are quite small.

_Amphibulima appendiculata, Pir. Guadeloupe. Gov. Rawson.

Jaw (Pl. XV, fig. F) extremely thin and transparent, long, low, slightly ar-

cuate, ends blunt, divided longitudinally by about 40 regular ribs into as many

* Even after boiling the whole buccal mass in potash, the lingual mem-

brane and jaw remain attached in most of our Heélices of N. A. showing a

decided connection between the two.

See last species for remarks on Dr. Fischer’s description and figure of

the dentition of the species. ;

120 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. .

plate-like sections, of the character found in the jaws of Cylindrella, Macro-

ceramus, and many species of Bulimulus. No appearance of triangular upper

median plates, however, as in Cylindrella, though the two specimens ex-

amined by me are not perfect at that part. Both margins serrated by the

extremities of the ribs. The jaw is quite membranous.

Lingual membrane (PI. XIII, fig. E).. Centrals subquadrate with a ver i

large, stout, short, pointed cusp, the side cusps obsolete. Laterals larger

and more narrow than the centrals, bicuspid, the inner cusp greatly pro-

duced, broad and quite squarely terminating. The base of attachment of

the laterals is cut away on the inner side, leaving a large outer lateral ex-

pansion, bringing to mind the much less developed one of Succinea.

Marginal teeth quadrate, gradually becoming modified from the laterals, .

the cusps finally passing off into simple, obtuse be a the inner one the

larger.

The species of this genus may be grouped by their lingual

dentition, independently of the character of the shell, into

(a) those having the type of teeth usual in the Helicide, and

(6) those haviug the peculiar type of dentition figured on PI.

XII, fig. G (see B. primularis), and (c) those having the denti-

tion of B. Lobli. (Pl. XIV, fig. E.) ‘The former two types are |

found in several of the subgenera noticed below.

The jaw of Bulimulus is usually thin, with delicate, separated

ribs as in Cylindrella, their ends serrating either margin; the

ribs at the upper centre of the jaw often run obliquely and ter-

minate before reaching the lower margin.

Drymeus altoperuvianus, Rve. Between Balsas and Caja-

marca, Peru. Prof. Orton.

Jaw with 31 ribs, delicate, separated, as in Cylindrelia.

Lingual membrane (Pl. XIV, fig. F) very peculiar, resembling that of

B. Lobbi, described below, excepting that the marginal teeth are of same

type as the laterals, with stil] more produced cutting point; one in profile

is shown in the left-hand figure.

Drymeus Vincentinus, Pfr., var.? Tobago.

Jaw as usual in Bulimulus, thin, transparent, with numerous delicate,

separated, narrow ribs.

Lingual membrane as in Bulimulus laticinctus. (See below.)

Drymeus Knorri, Pfr. Porto Cabello, Venezuela. Mr. Robert

Swift.

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 121

Jaw arched, high, ends attenuated, blunt; an obtuse median projection to

cutting edge; transverse lines of reinforcement, but no ribs.

An unusual form of jaw in this genus, though common in many sub-

genera of Helix.

Drymeus Lobbi, Rve. Between Balsas and Cajamarca, Peru.

Prof. Orton.

Jaw (Pl. XY, fig. P) thin, transparent, as usual in the genus, with 21

narrow, distant ribs, serrating either margin, running obliquely towards

the centre of the jaw, so that those of the upper centre meet or end before

reaching the lower margin; the substance of the jaw is so thin that it di-

vides, on maceration, into separate pieces at the ribs; in some specimens

the jaw seemed to be formed of distinct plates, whose overlapping forms

the ribs; I have no doubt, however, that it consists of one single piece.

Lingual membrane (Pl. XIV, fig, E) broad, very delicate in texture, and

difficult to handle; numerous rows of 90-1-90 teeth; the centrals have the

base of attachment longer than wide, with lower lateral expanded angles;

the reflection has one stout, median cusp, the side cusps being obsolete; this

cusp bears a short, rapidly attenuated, sharp cutting point; the laterals are

- of same type as centrals, but differ widely in the cutting point, which is

oblique, extremely long, broad as the upper margin of the base of attach-

ment, bluntly rounded at its end, near which on the inner side is a promi-

nent, blunt notch; the marginals are low, wide, with a very oblique cusp,

bearing a much broader, trifid cutting point, the middle one much the

largest, all with curving sides.

Drymeus Bahamensis, Pfr. New Providence, Bahamas.

Gov. Rawson.

Jaw as usual in the genus, over fifty ribs ; in some specimens the ribs at

the centre meet or end before reaching the lower margin, so oblique are they;

in others they are so slightly oblique as to reach and serrate the lower

margin.

Lingual membrane (pl. XII, fig. F) with no lateral teeth, all the side teeth

being marginals of the form described in B. Lobbi.

Drymeus Rawsonis, H. Ad. Tobago. Gov. Rawson.

Lingual membrane as in last species.

Liostracus multifasciatus, Lam. Antigua. Gov. Rawson.

Jaw as usual in the genus.

Lingual membrane as in last species ; the cusp of the central tooth has

three cutting points. The marginals are in waving rows.

122 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. —

Liostracus alternans, Beck. Islands in the Bay of Panama.

Mr. McNeil. |

Jaw as usual in the genus, 52 ribs.

Lingual membrane as in last species.

Lnostracus Marielinus, Poey.

See Terr. Moll., Y.

Mesembrinus primularis, Rve. Northern Peru. Prof. Orton.

Jaw as usual in the genus.

Lingual membrane (Pl. XII, fig. G) as in last species, but there is only

one cutting point in the central tooth. .

Mesembrinus pallidior, Sowb.

See Terr. Moll., V.

Lingual membrane as in the following, not as in last species.

Mesembrinus chrysalis, Pfr. Martinique. Gov. Rawson.

Jaw of the type common in Bulimulus, COylindrella, etc., arcuate, low ; ends

blunt ; thin, transparent ; with eighteen narrow, separated ribs; a trans-

verse central line of reinforcement. Attached to the upper margin is a strong

triangular membrane of the same consistence and material as the jaw itself,

and equally resisting the action of potash, so as readily to be mistaken for

the accessory plate of the Succinee. (P1._XV, fig. Q.)

Lingual membrane (Pl. XIV, fig. G) as usual in the Helicine. Centrals

about as broad as long, tricuspid, and median cusp short and stout, its short

point not extending to the base of the plate. Laterals like the centrals, but

bicuspid. Marginals wide, low, with one inner, long, blunt, stout, oblique

denticle, and one or two short, blunt side denticles.

Thaumastus immaculatus, Ad. Jamaica. Mr. Gloyne.

Jaw as usual in Bulimulus ; over 36 ribs.

Lingual membrane (Pl. XII, fig. H) as in Bul. chrysalis ; central teeth with

three cutting points. _

Mormus membranaceus, Phil. Brazil. J. G. Anthony.

Jaw as usual; with about 24 ribs.

Lingual membrane as in Bul. chrysalis.

Mormus laticinctus, Guppy. Dominica. Mr. Guppy.

Jaw not examined.

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 123

Lingual membrane (Pl. XII, fig. 1) as in Bul. Bahamensis; the transverse

rows of teeth in this type of membrane are waving.

Mormus suffiatus, Gld.

Jaw as usual in Bulimulus ; about 21 ribs.

Lingual membrane as in B. chrysalis.

Mormus Jonasi, Pfr.

Jaw as usual in Bulimulus.

Lingual membrane as B. Bahamensis.

Scutalus rhodolarynz, Rve. Northern Peru. Prof. Orton.

Jaw ruined by the action of potash.

Lingual membrane (Pl. XII, fig. D) as in B. chrysalis ; long and narrow ;

teeth 40-1-40.

Scutalus proteus, Brod. Northern Peru. Prof. Orton.

Jaw as usual ; 28 ribs.

Lingual membrane as in B. altoperuvianus.

Leptumerus linneordes, Fér. St. Kitts. Dr. Branch.

Jaw (Pl. XVI, fig. I) low, wide, semitransparent, slightly arcuate, ends

scarcely attenuated, blunt ; anterior surface with about sixteen ribs, denticu-

lating either margin. It is extremely difficult to decide upon the character

of these ribs. Some appear to be a simple thickening of the jaw, formed by

the overlapping of distinct separate plates. Others remind me of the distant

narrow ribs of most of the Bulimul, of the character of the ribs in Cylindrella,

ete. At other points upon the jaw there seem to be broad, flat ribs with

narrow interstices.

Lingual membrane long and narrow (Pl. XII, fig. E). Teeth as usual in

the Helicinew. The change from laterals to marginals is very gradual, the

latter being but a modification of the former, with two cutting points, the

inner the longer. Thus it appears that this species in its dentition agrees

with B. cinnamomeo-lineatus, pallidior, chrysalis, dealbatus, Guadalupensis, alter-

natus, sporadeus, solulus, sepulcralis, durus, Peruvianus, rhodolarynx, and not

with laticinctus, Bahamensis, auris-leporis, papyraceus, Jonasi, membranaceus,

trigonostomus, flavidus, virginalis, conveeus, Vincentinus, Lobbi, alternans, multi-

fascialus, primularis,

Teeth 30-1-30, with about ten laterals on each side. The outer cutting

point of the marginals is sometimes bifid.

124 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks.

Leptomerus sepulcralis, Poey. New Providence, Bahamas.

Jaw stout, wide, low, arcuate, of about equal height throughout, ends

bluntly rounded; anterior surface with 15 stout, broad, crowded ribs, their

ends crenulating either margin; some of these ribs are of equal thickness

throughout, and are separated by adccided, narrow interstices; the jaw can-

not, therefore, be said to resemble that usual in Bulimulus, though it seems

to combine some of the characters of that and of the simply ribbed form

of jaw.

Lingual membrane asin JB. chrysalis; no side cutting points to centrals

and inner laterals. (Pl. XI, fig. J.)

Leptomerus corneus. Nicaragua. Mr. McNiel.

Jaw as in Bulimulus ; 15 ribs.

Lingual membrane as in B. chrysalis.

Rhinus durus, Spix. Brazil. J. G. Anthony.

Jaw as usual in Bulimulus.

Lingual membrane as in B. chrysalis.

Plectostylus Peruvianus. Brug. 'Talcahuana, Peru.

Jaw as usual in Bulimulus; 30 ribs.

Lingual membrane (PI. XII, fig. J) combining the characters of that of

B. membranaceus in the marginals with those of B. chrysalis in the centrals

and the five laterals on both sides of the median line; the cusp of the last

is large, oblique, rounded.

Bulimulus Edwardsi, Mor. . Lake ‘l'iticuca. Pref. Alex.

Agassiz.

Jaw low, arcuate, ends rapidly acuminated, blunt; anterior surface

with over ten distant ribs, some of the usual Helix type, others like the

delicate ribs common in Cylindrella, Buiimulus, Geotis. Amphibulima, ete.

Lingual membrane (Pl. XI, fig. K) ‘with 44-1-44 teeth. Centrals of the

usual Helicine type, tricuspid; laterals like centrals, asymmetrical, and

consequently bicuspid. The change to marginals very gradual, and formed

by the simple modification of the laterals. without any splitting of the inner

cutting point.

Subgeneric position of this species is unknown to me, as of the following.

Bulimulus Gabbianus, Angas. Costa Rica. Dr. W. M. Gabb;

formerly referred to B. Jrazuensis.

Jaw asin Bul. limneoides, but median ribs oblique ; there are about 32

ribs.

Lingual membrane with marginals as in B. Bahamensis. (PI. XII, fig. L.)

Cylindrella.

Jaw arched, ends attenuated ; very thin, transparent; dis-

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 125

tant, delicate, oblique ribs, serrating either margin, those of the

upper centre meeting or ending before reaching the lower

margin.

Lingual dentition quite peculiar. As Messrs. Crosse and Fis-

cher, in their exhaustive paper (Journ. de Conch... XVIII, Jan.,

1870), have indicated the different types of dentition found in

the genus, I have referred to their respective groups the various

species I have examined.

Group A.—T'wo lateral teeth on each side of the median line;

marginals of a different form, varying in number.

Cylindrella (Casta) Chemnitziana, Fér. Jamaica.

There are 10-1-10 teeth; two laterals on each side.

Cylindrella cyclostoma, Pfr. (Trachella.) Lomas de Camoa,

Cuba. Mr. Arango.

Jaw with over 70 ribs.

Lingual membrane with 10-1-10 teeth, two being laterals on either side;

the first marginal is a modification of the laterals, other marginals of usual

long and narrow shape, upper margin reflected.

Cylindrella Humboldtiuna, Pfr. Cuba. Mr. Arango.

Jaw with over 100 ribs.

Lingual membrane with 8-1-8 teeth, as in @. rosea, figured by Crosse and

Fischer. The species belongs to their group Thaumasia.

Cylindrella rosea, Pfr. (Urocoptis.)

Jaw photographed in Am. Journ. Conch., V, p. 37.

Cylindrella subula, Fer. (Mychostoma.) Jamaica. Mr. H.

Vendreyes.

_ Lingual membrane with 10-1-10 teeth, as in @. yracilis, figured by Crosse

and Fischer. Lower margin of base of attachment of laterals delicately

fringed or crimped; marginals 8, long, laminar, with irregularly recurved

apices.

Cylindrella seminuda, Ad. (Mychostuma.) Jamaica. Mr.

Gloyne.

Lingual membrane as in last species.

troup C.—Lateral teeth more than two: marginal tceth simi-

lar to, and not to be distinguished from, the laterals.

126 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. —

Cylindrella elegans, Pfr. (Gongylostoma.) Cuba. Mr.

Arango. .

Lingual membrane (Pl. XIV, fig. B) with 12-1-12 teeth arranged en chevron ;

centrals long, narrow, apex recurved with three short, bluntly trilobed —

cusps and large cutting point ; laterals with one inner, widely expanding, -

oval, inner cutting point, surmounted by a blunt narrow pedicle, and one

much smaller cutting point on a narrow, high pedicle; there are no distinct

marginals, the teeth becoming much modified in shape as they pass off

laterally.

Oylindrella ornata, Gundl. (Gongylostoma). Cuba. A dried

specimen in Mr. Bland’s collection.

Lingual membrane (Pl. XIV, fig. A) with 18-1-18 teeth; as in last

species.

Cylindrella Poeyana, D’Orb.

See Terr. Moll., V. j

Macroceramus.

Jaw as in Cylindrella.

Lingual membrane, See Terr. Moll. V.

Macroceramus Gossei, Pfr. See Terr. Moll., V.

Macroceramus turricula, Pfr. Lomas de Camoa, Cuba. Mr.

Arango.

Jaw with 35 ribs.

Lingual membrane as in last species (P]. XIV., fig. D).

Macroceramus inermis, Gundl. Curagao. Mr. J. 8. Gibbons.

Lingual membrane as in WM. Gossei.

Pineria,

Pineria Viequensis, Pfr. Island. of St. Martine (Depa

Rijgersma.

Jaw with about 28 ribs as in Cylindrella (Pl. XV, fig. B’; upper median

portion of the jaw figured is imperfect.

Lingual membrane (Pl. XIV, fig. C) as in group A of Cylindrella; laterals

two ; marginals five or six, long, narrow, simple, with irregularly recurved

upper Margins.

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 127

Partula.

Jaw as in Cylindrella. Pl. XV, fig. O, represents that of an

undetermined species; there are over 60 ribs on that of P. vir-

ginea.

Lingual membrane broad; (that of amanda is figured on

Pl. XI, fig. L) the central tooth is as common in the Helicide,

with subobsolete side cusps, but side cutting points; the laterals

are longer and broader than the central, with a side cusp and

cutting point ; the marginals have a long, narrow, quadrangular

base of attachment, curving outward, extending beyond the re-

flection above ; reflection small, with a highly developed cutting

point, obliquely and bluntly tricuspid on its outer edge, the in-

ner division the largest; the number of perfect laterals varies

somewhat, 7 in citriza, 11 in planilabrum, 10 in abbreviata and

amanda, 8 in umbilicata, bilineata and virginea; 5 in gracilis ;

there were 120 marginals in virginea ; the number varies in the

different species, but they are always numerous; the dentition

of all examined by me agrees with the figure of that of d¢rata by

Heynemann, Mal. Blatt., 1867, Pl. I, figs. 1—1a.

The species were determined by Mr. Garrett. I examined :—

P. fusca, Pease. lugubris, Pease.

citrina, Pease. varia, Brod.

planilabrum, Pease. compacta, Pease.

abbreviata, Pease. Garretti, Pease.

, umbilicata, Pease. dentifera, Pease.

bilineata, Pease. crasstlabris, Pease.

wmomdd,.. * (Pl. Xl figs dy)y j:,.debe,. Pfr:

virginea, Pease. protea, Pease.

gracilis, Pease. globosa, Pease.

turgida, Pease. approxtmata, Pease.

rosea, Brod. faba, Martyn.

formosa, Pease.

ELASMOGNATHA.

Jaw with accessory plate to its upper margin.

Omalonyx.

Omalonyx felina, Guppy. Demarara. Mr. J. 8. Gibbons.

128 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. —

Jaw with the accessory plate as usual in the genus.

Lingual membrane (PI. XI, fig. M), centrals tricuspid ; laterals larger, but

also tricuspid ; marginals irregularly pectinate. a oe

Specimens from Trinidad have the same dentition.

Succinea, —

For jaw and dentition, see Terr. Moll., V.

Succinea pallida, Pfr. Raiatea Island. Mr. A. Garreit.

Jaw as usual ; no anterior ribs. ;

Lingual membrane (Pl. X, fig. K) with about 30-1-30 teeth ; eleven later-

als on either side.

Succinea papiilata, Pfr.

Jaw as in last.

Lingual membrane (Pl. X, fig. L) with 25-1-25 teeth, nine laterals on each

side ; some of the outer laterals have their outer cutting point bifid.

Succinea sagra, D’Orb. Jamaica

Jaw as usual; a median projection to cutting edge. -

Lingual membrane as usual in the genus.

Succinea canella, Gld. West Maui, Sandwich Islands.

Jaw and lingual membrane as usual.

Succinea Barbadensis, Guild. Barbadves.

As in last species.

GONIOGNATHA.

Jaw in separate pieces: the upper median one usually tri-

angular.

Orthalicus.

For jaw and lingual membrane, sce Terr. Moll, V.

Orthalicus obductus, Shuttl. Islands in the Bay of Panama.

Mr. MeNiel.

Jaw as usual in the genus.

Lingual membrane (Pl. XII, fig. B) as usual in the genus, with lateral

teeth; teeth about 96-1-96. The base of attachment in centrals and first

marginals is extended beyond the reflection.

Orthalicus gallina-sultana, Chemn. Marafion, Peru. Prof.

Orton.

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 129

Jaw with 15 plates (Pl. XV, fig. N).

Lingual membrane (Pl XII, fig. C) 183 mm. broad, 16 mm. long, The

rows of teeth are arranged in a backward curve from the median line for a

short distance, and then run obliquely to the outer margin of the membrane;

marginals as usual in the genus, but the central tooth differs in having a

long, stout, lance-like cutting point, bearing at the middle of each slde a

prominent, subobsolete, blunt spur ; three laterals on either side like the

central, but asymmetrical, with the spur only on their outer sides ; teeth in

one row 108-1-108.

Liguus,

For jaw and lingual membrane, see Terr. Moll., V.

Tiguus virgineus. Linn. Aux Cayes, Haiti. R. Swift.

Lingual membrane (Pl. XII, fig. A).

The marginal teeth are as usual in the genus, but centrals and laterals

- differ; membrane 44 x 18 mm.; teeth 40-1-40; the centrals and two first

laterals have a short, stout, pointed cutting point, of the same type as des-

cribed in Orthalicus gallina-sullana.

This completes the list of terrestrial Pulmonata* examined by

me; the following have also been described from other orders,

generally with a figure.

PULMONATA LIMNOPHILA.

Melampus bidentatus, Say. Ann. Lyc. N. H. of N. Y., IX, 286.

Aiexia myosolis, Dr. L. & Fr. W. Sh. N. A., II, 1.

Carychium exiquum, Say.“ es of 6.

Limnea appressa, Say. Am. Journ. Conch., VII, 161; L. & Fr. W. Sh., II, 28.

stagnalis, L. L. & Fr. W. Sh., II, 155.

meqasoma,SAy. Am. Journ. Conch., VII, 162.

columella, Say. L. & Fr. W. Sh. N.A., II, 24.

oatascopium, AY. “ i oat 5D:

Ponpholyx effusa, Lea. Am. Journ. Conch., VI, 312.

* Excepting Buliminus Natalensis, unfortunately omitted. (See Ann.

Ne Y. wead. Se; 1, 362; Ply XV, figs J.

130 Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks.

— .

Physa vinosa, Gup. L. & Fr. W. Sh. N. A., II, 81.

ancillaria, SAy. ‘‘ 53 Shrek Bee: |

Phy sa Ann. Lyc., IX, 255. Laiae q

Planorbis trivolvis, Say. Ann. Lyc., TX, 292.

Ancylus Newberryi, LEA. L. & Fr. W. Sh. N. A., II, 22. ;

Erinna Newcomdi. A. Ap. Ann. Lyc., X, 349; Phila. Proc., 1374, 54

Gundlachia Californica, RowELL. L. & Fr. W. Sh. N. A., Hi, 148.

PECTINIBRANCHIATA.

Geomelania. Am. Journ. Conch., VII, 185.

Blandiella reclusa, GuPPY. ‘“‘ oy eo

Megalomastoma bituberculatum, Sows. Am. Journ. Conch., VI, 213.

Tulotona magnificum, CONRAD. Ann. Lyc., IX, 293.

Pomus depressa, Say. L. & Fr. W, Sh., III, 1.

Vivipara inlertexta, Say. e Si 16.

Melantho integra, Say. if ii 35.

SCUTIBRANCHIATA.

Neritella reclivala, Say. L. & Fr. W. Sh., IIT. -101. .

Stoastoma pisum, AD. Am. Journ. Conch., VII, 184.

Helicina oceulia, Say. Ann. Lyc., IX, 287; Am. Journ. Conch., VII, 29.

LG Fr. W. Sis ly 116:

orbieulata, Say. Am. Journ. Conch., VI, 214.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATES.

PLATE TH.

LINGUAL DENTITION OF

Fig. A. Nanina subcircula, Mouss.

B implicata, Nevill.

C argentea, Rve.

D Rawsonis, Barclay.

E Calias, Bens.

F Calias, Bens. Abnormal central tooth.

G. Limax semitectus, Mérch.

H. Velifera Gabbi, W. G. Binn.

I. Macrocyclis euspira, Pfr.

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 131

J. Leucochroa Boissieri, Charp.

K. Sagda Haldemaniana, Ad.

L. Patula Huahinensis, Pfr.

M. Endodonta tumuloides, Garrett.

iN! me incerta, Mouss.

O. Acavus Phoenix, Pfr.

PLATE III.

LINGUAL DENTITION OF

Fig. A. Onchidium Schrammi, Bl.

B. Veronicella —— (from Brazil).

C. Polymita muscarum, Lea.

D. fa oe (central magnified).

E. co picta, Born.

F. Tornatellina aperta, Pse.

G. Achatinella producta, Rve.

H. Geomalacus maculosus, Allm.

I. Pella rariplicata, Bens.

PLATE IV.

LINGUAL DENTITION OF

Fig. A. Hemitrochus Troscheli, Pfr.

B. igs gallopavonis, Val.

C. rufoapicata, Poey.

Bp: i Milleri, Pfr.

E. a graminicola, Ad.

F. Caracolus excellens, Pfr.

G. as Sagemon, Beck, Cuba.

Ef. 5 * cs Gonave Is. Haiti.

I. a Arangiana, Poey.

J. a marginella, Gmel.

PLATE. ¥.

LiInGuAL DENTITION OF

Fig. A. Cysticopsis tumida, Pfr.

iB. pemphigodes, Pfr.

C. Plagioptycha loxodon, Pfr,

py. ae Albersiana, Pfr.

E a monodonta, Lea.

F ue Duclosiana, Feér.

+ ey diaphana, Lam.

H macroglossa, Pfr.

I. Leptoloma fuscocincta, Ad.

132

Fig.

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks.

Coryda Gossei, Pfr.

K. Plebicula lurida, Lowe.

L. Helix,—Ann. N. Y. Ac. Sc., I, 261 (see p. 118).

Zee Roe eos pone

On>

PLATE VI.

LINGUAL DENTITION OF

. Newcombia venusta, Mighels.

. Laminella picta, Mighels.

6é

obesa, Newc.

me decorticata, Gul. .

i Mastersi, Newc.

BF luctuosa, Pfr.

. Leptachatina textilis, Fer.

am nitida, Newc.

Carelia bicolor, Jay.

Fruticicola pubescens, Pfr.

. Dorcasia pyrozona, Phil.

‘« similaris, Fér.

*« globulus, Miill.

. Turricula tuberculosa, Conr.

PEATE. Vouk

LINGUAL DENTITION OF

. Strophia decumana, Fer.

mumia, Brug.

iostoma, Pfr.

6é

: ‘Stenogyra hasta, Pfr.

. Cionella Gloynei, Gibbons.

Ceecilianella Gundlachi, Pfr.

. Lithotis rupicola, Blandf.

. Clausilia tridens, Chemn.

Anadenus, :

Simpulopsis corrugatus, Guppy.

. Cryptostrakon Gabbi, W. G. B.

. Microphysa circumfirmata, Redf.

PLATE VIII.

LINGUAL DENTITION oF

. Pomatia Humboldtiana, Val.

5 Sieboldtiana, Phil.

. Leptaxis undata, Lowe.

Fig.

PASM EO i Ob

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks. 135

D. Thelidomus discolor, Fér.

E. S aspera, Fér.

Jake ¥ auricoma, Fér.

G. notabilis, Shuttl.

jal ne Jamaicensis, Chemn.

‘ie 3 provisoria, Pfr.

J. Eurycratera angulata, Fér.

€ = crispata, Fér.

L. Polydontes Luquillensis, Shuttl.

M. Stylodon Studeriana, Fér.

N. Tebennophorus Costaricensis, Mérch ?

PLATE. 1X.

LinecuaL DENTITION OF

Dentellaria orbiculata, Fér.

is Isabelle, Fér.

iB:

C. BS dentiens, Fér.

D: a nucleola, Rang.

EK. “4 nuxdenticulata, Chemn.

E. re pachygastra, Gr.

G: fs badia, Fér.

H. s formosa, Fér.

is . Josephine, Feér.

J. s perplexa, Feér..

‘* lychnuchus, Mill.

PLATE X.

LINGUAL DENTITION OF

Pleurodonta acuta, Lam.

oy Carmelita, Fér.

eg Schroceteriana, Pfr.

BS invalida, Ad.

. Merope fringilla, Pfr.

. Helix astur, Souv.

*« convicta, Cox.

. Macrodontes odontostomus, Sowb.

Pelecychilus auris-Sileni, Born.

s glaber, Gmel.

. Succinea pallida, Pfr.

a papillata, Pfr.

134

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks.

PLATE XI.

LINGUAL DENTITION OF

Fig. A. Anthinus multicolor, Rang.

Fig.

aa vOWP

Pachyotus egregius, Jay.

Orphnus foveolatus, Rve.

Hanleyi, Pfr.

Dryptus marmoratus, Dunker.

Eurytus aulacostylus, Pfr.

Canistrum fulgetrum, Brod.

I. Geotis,

Leptomerus sepulcralis, Boy

. Bulimulus Edwardsi, Mor.

. Partula amanda.

. Omalonyx felina, Guppy.

PLATE XII.

LINGUAL DENTITION OF

Liguus virgineus, Lin.

. Orthalicus obductus, Shuttl.

gallina-sultana, Chemn.

. Scutalus rhodolarynx, Rve.

Leptomerus limneoides, Fer.

Drymeus Bahamensis, Pfr.

. Mesembrinus primularis, Rve.

. Thaumastus immaculatus, Ad.

Mormus laticinctus, Guppy.

Plectostylus Peruvianus,: Brug.

Bulimulus Jrazuensis, Ad.

PLATE XIIL

LiInGUAL DENTITION OF

ere patula, ae St. Kitts.

Dominica.

appendiculata, Pfr.

rubescens, Desh.

se Ey Rawsonis, Bl.

Fig.

GSHmrye yaw

Qaboow

OVOZErP AVM Ret ReonP

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks.

PLATE XIV.

LInGuAL DENTITION OF

Cylindrella ornata, Gundl.

eb elegans, Pfr.

Pineria Viequensis, Pfr.

. Macroceramus turricula, Pfr.

. Drymeeus Lobbi, Rve.

sy altoperuvianus, Rve.

. Mesembrinus chrysalis, Pfr.

PLATE XY.

JAW OF

. Geotis.

. Pineria Viequensis, Pfr.

. Microphysa turbiniformis, Pfr.

. Amphibulima rubescens, Desh.

18 patula, Brug.

“i appendiculata, Pfr.

. Pella rariplicata, Benson.

. Fruticicola pubescens, Pfr.

Stenogyra hasta, Pfr.

. Clausilia tridens, Pfr.

. Polymita muscarum, Lea.

. Limax semitectus, Morch ?

. Caracolus Arangiana, Poey.

. Orthalicus gallina-sultana, Chem.

. Partula.

. Bulimulus (Drymeeus) Lobbi, Rve.

“e

(Mesembrinus) chrysalis, Pfr.

PLATE XVL.

JAW OF

. Cysticopsis tumida, Pfr.

. Helix astur, Souv.

. Lithotis rupicola, Blandf.

. Carelia bicolor, Jay.

. Achatinella (Laminella) Mastersi, Newe.

G. Cecilianella Gundlachi, Pfr.

. Pomatia Sieboldtiana, Phil.

Bulimulus (Leptomerus) limnzeoides, Fér.

. Hemitrochus Milleri, Pfr.

136

Fig.

Homa OO n>

fea moh (S) PN et le

Dentition of Pulmonate Mollusks.

Urocyclus Kirki, Gray. .

Cryptostrakon Gabbi, W. G. Binn.

Achatinella (Newcombia) picta, Mighels.

Dentellaria dentiens, Pfr.

a nucleola, Rang.

4 pachygastra, Gr. -

4 badia, Fer.

ef formosa, Fer.

is Josephine, Fer.

A perplexa, Fér. -

ny lychnuchus, Mill.

> nuxdenticulata, Fér.

we orbiculata, Fér.

PLATE XVII.

LINGUAL DENTITION OF

. Chlamydephorus Gibbonsi, W. G. By

Glandina rosea, Fer.

we semitarum, Rang.

ne Phillipsi, Ad.

= aurata, Mor.

Gonospira palanga, Fer.

a Newtoni, H. Ad.

‘« Mauritiana, Mor.

4 Nevilli, H. Ad.

Ennea clavatula, Lam.

. Spiraxis Dunkeri, Pfr.

. Rhytida vernicosa, Kraus.

. Stenopus decoloratus.

. Urocyclus Kirki, Gr.

. Nanina Chamoissi, Pfr.

ae radians, Pfr.

. Trochomorpha Cressida, Gld.

The Literature of Ozone. 137

IV.—The Literature of Ozone and Peroxide of Hydrogen.

Second Memoir, including :

J. HISTORICAL-CRITICAL RESUME OF THE PROGRESS OF DIS-

COVERY SINCE 1879.

IJ. INDEX TO THE LITERATURE OF OZONE, (1879-1883).

III. INDEX TO THE LITERATURE OF PEROXIDE OF HYDROGEN,

(1879-1883).

BY ALBERT R. LEEDs:

Read December 17th, 1883.

PREFACE.

At the meeting of the Chemical Section of the N. Y. Academy

of Sciences, held June 12th, 1880, I had the pleasure of present-

ing to the Academy a first Memoir upon “ ‘lhe Literature of

Ozone and Peroxide of Hydrogen.” ‘This memoir consisted of

four parts. 1st, A historical and critical essay upon the ‘‘ Lines

of Discovery in the History of Ozone,” from the first observation

of Schénbein in the year 1840, to the facts made known in the

earlier portion of the year 1879. This prefatory essay discussed

under separate sections, the original discovery of ozone, its

sources and its properties :—also, the nature of the constituent

matter of ozone :—finally, the exact nature of the relations exist-

ing between ozone and ordinary oxygen.

The second part of the memoir was an ‘‘ Index to the Litera-

ture of Ozone (1785-1879). This memoir was drawn up on the

plan suggested by my friend and predecessor as Corresponding

Secretary of the Academy, Dr. H. Carrington Bolton. Dr. Bol-

ton had been led, during the course of his classic investigations

upon the Fluorides of Uraninm (Berl. Akad. Ber., 1866, 299),

to prepare for his own more exact knowledge, a partial index to

the literature of uranium. In the hepe of saving future investi-

138 The Literature of Ozone.

gators from the great labor of repeating his work, Dr. Bolton

completed this Index, and published it in the Annals of the N.

Y. Academy of Sciences, or as the society was then called, the

N. Y. Lyceum of Natural History, Vol. IX, February, 1870.

This first publication was followed by.a second (idem, XI, Nov.,

1875), in which Dr. Bolton has given in the compass of 44 finely —

printed octavo pages, an ‘‘Index to the Literature of Manga-

nese,” beginning as far back as the year 1596, and brought oo

through nearly three centuries, to the year 1874.

His labors prompted Prof. E. J. Hallock to continue the work

by preparing an ‘‘ Index to the Iaterature of Titanium,” (1783-

1876,) published in Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., Vol. I, p. 53; Dee.

1876, and Prof. G. J. Rockwell, a similar ‘‘ Index to the Litera-

ture of Vanadium” (1801-1876), idem, Vol. I, p. 133. Since

the publication of the two indices by the author, the Academy

has also published an ‘‘ Index to the Literature of Electrolysis,”

idem, Vol. II, p. 313, by Mr. W. W. Webb.

The third portion of the author’s preceding memoir was an

essay upon ‘‘ The History of Antozone and Peroxide of Hydro-

gen.” It pointed out the fallacy of the arguments and proofs

offered by Schénbein and Meissner, for the existence of the so-

called Antozone, and described the experiments of Von Babo,

Nasse, Engler, and others, by which the certainty of the non-exist-

ence of Antozone had been demonstrated. ‘The essay furthermore

- gave some account of the artificial sources of Peroxide of Hydro-

gen, and of the experiments devoted to a demonstration of its

probable occurrence in nature. ‘This was followed by a fourth

part, devoted to an ‘‘Index to the Literature of Peroxide of Hy-

drogen ” (1818-1878), similar in plan to that upon ozone.

In returning to this subject, it is with the hope of assisting

fellow-students in two ways. First, by bringing these indices

down to date, which will make the preceding work of much

greater utility. Secondly, by pointing out the uselessness of re-

peating, as is being constantly done, the investigation of matters

previously studied with thoroughness, and of overlooking other

topics which are at present incompletely understood.

I. SouRCES AND PREPARATION OF OZONE.

The formation of ozone is to be looked for in all cases where

The Literature of Ozone. 139

the molecule of oxygen undergoes decomposition under conditions

which render it possible for the constituent atoms to exist in a

free or uncombined condition for an interval of time. This set-

ting free of the constituent atoms of the molecule is what was

known in the older chemistry as the nascent state of the element

in question. And whilst the increased energy of chemical pro-

- perties possessed by the element, at the instant of being liberated

from a previous chemical combination, or in statu nascenti, was

a fact of universally recognized importance, yet a satisfactory

explanation of this increase of energy was not possible until the

distinction between the chemical atom and the chemical molecule

was established as a fundamental fact of the newer chemistry.

Ordinarily, the nascent atom immediately enters into combina-

tion again, either with an atom of the same kind, as for instance

an atom of hydrogen with an atom of hydrogen to form a mole-

cule of hydrogen in all respects similar in its properties to ordi-

nary hydrogen gas, or with an atom of a different kind to form

a different substance. In the case of oxygen, however, these

free atoms may not only reunite by twos to form the ordinary

dual molecule, known as oxygen gas, but by threes to form the

triple molecule, which is ozone.

According to the older chemistry, it would have been difficult

to assign a reason why free hydrogen atoms might not reunite to

form a triple molecule of hydrogen, just as well as free oxygen

atoms. And as a matter of history, Osann endeavored to prove

that the hydrogen given off in electrolysis differs from ordinary

hydrogen, just as the oxygen given off differs from ordinary oxy-

gen. He ascribed to such electrolytic hydrogen a weak acid

smell, and the power of readily reducing silver and other metallic

salts, and distinguished it by the name of ozone-hydrogen. But

these properties were in reality due to other bodies in the elec-

trolytic hydrogen, to say nothing of the fact that absolutely pure

hydrogen gas has the power of slowly reducing silver from its

salts.

It is not in accordance with our present knowledge concerning

hydrogen, to regard the existence of such a body as Osann’s sup-

posed ozone-hydrogen as possible. Jor in all its known chemical

combinations, hydrogen possesses but one bond of chemical at-

traction, and a molecule of hydrogen possessing three or more

140 — ‘The Literature of Ozone.

hy drogen atoms would lack the bonds to hold it together. Chlo-

rine, on the other hand, has one, three, five, or seven bonds, ac-

cording to the nature of the element with which it is brought

into combination, and whilst it is certain that we do not under-.

stand the true meaning of this varying number of bonds, yet

there is no reason why a number of allotropic modifications of

chlorine might not exist, with different densities, color, chemi-

cal properties, etc. So is it likewise with phosphorus, arsenic,

nitrogen, and other polyvalent elements. The allotropism of

phosphorus, for example, may be due to one of three causes: a

difference in the amounts of internal energy, a difference in the

relative positions of the constituent atoms, or a difference in the

number of these atoms. ‘The first supposition we need not en-

tertain, because it would carry with it the admission that the

differences between the substance-matter of all the elements

themselves, consists in differences in the quantity and kind of

their internal energy. This admission chemists are not prepared

to make. ‘The last supposition includes the second, and explains

the most important difference in the properties of the allotropic

modifications of an element, their specific gravities. Moreover

it isin harmony with the only case of allotropism, in which we

are enabled to compare the allotropes in the gaseons condition,

and it is in the gaseous condition that the relative number of

atoms in a molecule may be best compared. ‘The specific gravity

of ozone is to that of oxygen as 3 to 2, which is in harmony with

the supposition, the most probable one on many other grounds

as well, that the molecule of ozone consists of three, the molecule

of oxygen of two atoms of oxygen.

The difference between the ordinary translucent modification

of phosphorus and the red, may be explained by supposing the

molecule of the former to contain 7 atoms, that of the latter 8.

In this case the weights of the molecules would be as 217 to 248,

or as 1.83 to 2.1, which latter numbers represent the actual spe-

cific gravities. Similarly, if we suppose the molecule of erystal-

lized metallic phosphorus, the third allotropic modification, to

consist of 9 atoms, its molecular weight in the solid condition

would be to the molecular weight of ordinary phosphorus as

279: 2172.35 :1.83, which latter numbers represent the actual

specific gravities as determined by experiment. ~

The Literature of Ozone. 141

Nitrogen was announced by Mr. Stillingfleet Johnson, in two

papers read before the English Chemical Society in 1880, to be

capable of existing in two allotropic modifications, his announce-

ment being based on an experiment in which a certain kind of

nitrogen, that obtained by the decomposition of ammonium

nitrite, had been made to enter into direct union with hydrogen

to form ammonia, while another kind of nitrogen, that existing

in atmospheric air, would not socombine. But Mr. H. B. Baker

has very recently shown (Chem. News, XLVIII, 187, 279), that

Mr. Johnson’s results were erroneous, the mixed gases containing

oxides of nitrogen, which gave rise to ammonia under the condi-

tions of the experiment; and the existence of a new allotrope

of nitrogen is still under discussion.

To return from this consideration of allotropism in general,

and examine the thesis at the beginning of the section :—The

formation of ozone is to be looked for in all cases where the

molecule of oxygen undergoes decomposition under conditions

which render it possible for the constituent atoms to exist in a

free or uncombined condition for an interval of time.

This setting free of the component atoms of the molecule

(status nascens), always precedes the formation of ozone, inas-

much as before a combination of atoms by threes can occur, a

decomposition of the preceding combinations by twos, must take

place. This, it will be urged, is a self-evident proposition, and

Iam very glad to admit that it is. But I am not the less im-

pressed with the importance of distinctly formulating it in this

place, because in much of the writing upon this topic it is ignored,

and also because in many places this oxygen of the nascent state

(free atoms), is called active oxygen and is frequently confused

with ozone itself. This confusion is so probable (since ozone is

most certainly the active allotrope of oxygen), that it appears to

me inexpedient to speak of nascent oxygen, as active oxygen, and

of the process of making it, as the activation of oxygen. To

gvard against this danger, I shall term the process the atomation

of oxygen, and the freed atoms themselves, not active, but atomic

oxygen. But, it may be asked, what experimental proof is there

that atomic oxygen precedes in every instance, the formation of

ozone? ‘The answer is to be found in the fact that ozone is in-

capable of producing certain chemical changes, readily produci-

142 The Literature of Ozone.

ble by atomic oxygen ; whilst, on the other hand, atomic oxygen,

under the conditions referred to, can produce not only these

chemical changes, but at the same time, and bya similar action,

ozone itself.

The proof of this statement is set forth in a paper whicl the

author published in the Journal of the American Chemical So-

ciety for 1879, p. 232, and subsequently in the Proceedings of

the German Chemical Society.

It was there shown that carbon monoxide would undergo con-

version into carbon dioxide, under the same circumstances as

would bring about the conversion of ordinary oxygen into ozone :

that is to say, when a mixture of carbon monoxide and air was

subjected to the action of moist phosphorus. Later in the same

year, I was induced by the theoretic importance of the subject, to

study itanew, and to endeavor to learn whether the production of

the carbon dioxide in this experiment was due to the action of

ozone, or whether it was due to the production in the first place of -

atomic oxygen, and the subsequent combination of this atomic

oxygen on the one hand with carbon monoxide to form carbon

dioxide, and on the other hand with oxygen to form ozone.

Whether in chemical language, the action was:

(1) 0, + CO = 00, + 0,

or, as a first step,

(2)0,=0+40

and then, as second steps occurring simultaneously,

(3) O +CO = CO,, and 0 + 0, = 0,

In this second series of experiments (ibid., p. 450) I employed

oxygen ozonized by the ozonizing battery to the extent of 72

megrms. of ozone per liter, while in the earlier experiments the

percentage did not exceed 5 mgrms. per liter. But no produc-

tion of carbon dioxide took place, however long the carbon mon-

oxide and ozone remained in contact. Furthermore, when car-

- bon monoxide and oxygen were separately submitted to the elec-

tric effluve, and then brought together, no carbon dioxide was

formed. But when the two gases were first brought together in

suitable proportion, and then the mixture submitted to the elec-

tric effluve, carbon dioxide was produced in quantities reanity

admitting of quantitative measurement.

The Literature of Ozone. 143

I regarded this experiment as demonstrating the existence of

atomic oxygen as prior to, and necessary to, the production of

both carbon dioxide and ozone. In other words, that equations

(2) and (3) represented the true sequence and codrdination of the

phenomena, and not equation (1).

Three years subsequently, Baumann repeated this experiment

(Ber. der deutsch. Chem. Gesell., XIV, 2706), and obtained the

same result. ‘These results having been questioned by Remsen

and Keiser (Amer. Chem. Jour., [V, 454) on the ground of their

haying obtained a negative result, I repeated my original experi-

ment with air and carbon monoxide over moist phosphorus, every

source of error being rigorously guarded against, and obtained

even larger amounts of carbon dioxide than in my earlier investi-

-gation,—in one case 15.5 mgrm. Since that time, Baumann

has likewise repeated the experiment, and obtained in one trial,

23.3 mgrm. carbon dioxide, in another case 64.6 mgrms.

The atomation of oxygen, and the setting free of atomic oxy-

gen, as a step necessarily antecedent to the formation of ozone,

has therefore, I conclude, been established by rigorous experi-

mental proof. In the case of the electric effluve, the intervening

oxygen dielectric undergoes polarization, and a certain number of

its molecules are decomposed intoatoms. Certain of these atoms

recombine among themselves, or combine with the oxygen mole-

cules, to form ozone, the amount of the ozone produced depend-

ing upon the strength of the electric effluve, upon the duration

of electrification, the temperature, presence of foreign gases or

vapors admixed with the gaseous electrolyte, and the other condi- »

tions of the experiments.

If the atomation of the oxygen be brought about by the reduc-

tion of the exygen molecule by means of phosphorus, partly

covered by water, there will be formed by the atomic oxygen

thus produced, ozone, hydrogen peroxide, and ammonium nitrate.

If ammonium nitrite is produced, as an intermediary step, itis not

found in the final products. These three substances, as I have al-

ways insisted since the publication of the investigation upon which

the statement is based (Jour. Amer. Chem. Soc., 1879, Vol. I, 150),

are three necessarily associated bodies, all secondary in their

genesis, and dependent upon the previous formation of atomic

144 The Literature of Ozone.

oxygen. ‘The reaction takes place, primarily, according to the

equations :— —_

(0) P20 P 0. Ornd 2 se Te

and secondarily, according to the equation

0, 0,0 + 0, + NN4 3H, O00, 7.10, -- Ae

The ozone passes off in the atmosphere. The hydrogen per-

oxide and the ammonium nitrate mostly remain behind in the

jar-water, though certain amounts can be detected in the wash-

waters, if any such be employed to wash the escaping ozone.

The white cloud above the wet phosphorus is mainly hydrogen

peroxide associated in a state of vesicular suspension with aque-

ous vapor, and constitutes the antozone cloud of Schénbein (the

atmizone of Meissner).

In all these cases, besides the production of atomic oxygen as

a necessary antecedent, its formation at temperatures consistent

with the possible formation of ozone, hydrogen peroxide, etc.,

must be predicated. And inasmuch as ozone is slowly converted

even at the boiling point of water into oxygen (at once at a tem-,

perature of 237° C.), the importance of maintaining a low tem-

perature is manifest. When the atomation of oxygen is brought

about by moist phosphorus, no action occurs below 6° C. At

24° the formation of ozone is at a maximum, the production

falling off very rapidly, as the temperature rises above this point.

When atomic oxygen is set frec in the electrolysis of acidulated

water, the gas evolved at the positive electrode contains, accord-

ing to Soret, 1 p. c. of ozone, when the temperature of the elec-

trolyte is maintained at 6° C., and 2 p. c. when at 0°.

But whilst the lower temperatures spoken of are those most

favorable to the permanence of the products of the action of

atomic oxygen, yet the evidence is very strong that even under

circumstances apparently unfavorable and at high temperatures,

the atomic oxygen may bring about the formation of ozone, hy-

drogen peroxide and ammonium nitrite. It was stated by Loew

* In an article upon the ‘‘ Preparation of Phosphoric Acid by the oxida-

tion of Phosphorus with Air in presence of Moisture,” (Pharm. J. Trans. [3],

XIV, 24-26, and Jour. Chem. Soc., December, 1883, p. 1050), W. T. Wen-

zell has obtained the same results, and has adopted in their explanation the

hypothesis here stated.

The Literature of Ozone. 145

(Chem. News, XXI, p. 107,) that ozone is formed when air is

blown through a gas-flame under proper conditions. This was

denied by Béttger (Chem. Centr., 1870, 161), who stated that

ammonium carbonate and hydrogen peroxide are formed under

these conditions. During the same year (1870), Than brought

forward certain experiments to show that ozone was formed du-

ring the rapid combustion of all hydrogenous bodies. (J. pr.

Chem. [2], 1, 415.) The year following, Pincus confirmed Than’s

statement (Poge., Aun., CXLIV, 480), and Struve published

his research to show that ozone, hydrogen peroxide and ammo-

nium nitrite, all three were formed in the combustion of hydro-

gen (Bull. de PAcad. Imp. des Sci. de St. Petersbourg, XV,

No. 3). By experiments conducted with extreme care, Zoeller

and Grete (Berl. Berichte, X, 2144), showed that in the burning

of pure hydrogen in pure air, ammonium nitrite is formed in

very notable quantities. Much later Béttger (Chem. Centr.,

1878, p. 574) found that hydrogen peroxide is formed on the ex-

plosion of a mixture of pure oxygen and hydrogen. Inasmuch,

however, as certain very careful observers, like Zoeller and Grete,

have demonstrated the formation of one only of the three products,

it is necessary that a more complete demonstration of the pro-

duction of all three bodies in rapid combustion be brought for-

ward, before it can be regarded as finally established.

The subject of the atomation of oxygen was studied at great

length by Schénbein, and a large number of important facts

noted by him. But at that time the true nature of ozone was

not known. According to Schénbein, ozone itself was one kind

of atomic oxygen, namely, the free atom in an electro-positive

condition, and antozone another kind of atomic oxygen, the free

atom in an electro-negative condition. He supposed that it was

the Jatter kind which, in contact with water, generated hydro-

gen peroxide. Although ozone is certainly not what Schénbein

supposed it to be, yet the existence of atomic oxygen as some-

thing necessarily preceding the formation of ozone may now be

regarded as a demonstrated fact. And whilst it has not been

shown that the free oxygen atoms may exist in two electro-nega-

tive conditions, yet such an hypothesis is theoretically not un-

tenable, nor has it been demonstrated to be false.

Latterly, the number of cases in which the formation of active

146 The Literature of Ozone, ete. .

oxygen has been noted has been largely increased. Thus Hoppe-

Seyler has pointed out that is formed when palladium-hydrogen

is shaken up in contact with water and air (Berl. Berichte, XI,

1551). Under these circumstances he noted the formation of

the third by-product, ammonium ritrite, as well. The author,

prompted by theoretical considerations, sought for the presence

of ozone and hydrogen peroxide, since according to the hypothe-

sis above enunciated, both should be present. Ozone he failed

to detect, hydrogen peroxide was found in quantity large enough

to admit of its quantitative estimation (Berl. Berichte, XIV,

976). So also, palladium, platinum, and other so-called ‘‘ car-

riers of oxygen,” owe the energetic oxidizing actions which occur

in their presence, and which were formerly spoken of as ‘* cata-

lytic,” to their power of effecting a separation of the oxygen

molecule into its constituent atoms. ‘This is shown by the ex-

periments of Traube and Baumann, who found that palladium

will cause the oxidation of carbon monoxide to dioxide in pre-

sence of hydrogen peroxide, whilst without palladium no such

oxidation occvrs. It has been likewise noted by the author that

platinum black, when shaken up in a bottle partly filled with

air along with a solution of indigo, turns the latter yellow by

causing its oxidation and the formation of isativ. Since this

very powerful oxidizing action is not produced by oxygen in its

ordinary condition, it may be ascribed to the.atomation of the

oxygen under the influence of the platinum black.

The number of observed cases of the formation of atomic oxy-

gen has been largely increased by the recent researches of Rad-

ziszewski on the Phosphorescence of Organic Bodies. He di-

vides such phosphorescent organic bodies into two groups: Ist.

Those which phosphoresce when the atomic oxygen which they

already contain, and which has been previously formed under

the influence of some activating agent like sunlight, operates

upon the organic body, on the addition of an alkali.. 2d. Those

bodies which, on the addition of an alkali, themselves form

atomic oxygen, and by combining with this atomic oxygen, be-

come phosphorescent. ‘l’o the first group belong various hydro-

carbons, especially the aromatic, the terpenes, etc. ‘To the sec-

ond, belong more especially the aldehydes, or such bodies as

when treated with an alkali, form aldehydes. ‘To the latter sub-

The Literature of Ozone, ete. 147

division belong the fats of the series Cy Hon-2 O02 Radziszewski

explains in like manner the phosphorescence of organisms, since

he finds in them a fat, together with an alkaline body. And in

one of these, the Pelagia noctiluca, he thinks he has demonstrated

the presence of atomic oxygen, by showing that the Pelagia de-

velops a blue color when placed on porous plates moistened with

potassium iodide, starch paste, and tincture of guaiacum.

Il. NATURE AND PROPERTIES OF OZONE AND HYDROGEN

PEROXIDE.

The recent remarkable discoveries concerning the properties

of ozone have strengthened the grounds on which the hypothesis

of the nature of ozone stands. Recently, a lengthy series of

memoirs has been written by Traube, in which he controverts

both the present theory, as to the constitution of hydrogen

peroxide, and the views now entertained of its action as an oxi-

dizing agent. Hitherto, chemists have looked upon hydrogen

peroxide as oxidized water, from the fact that it yields up one

of its atoms of oxygen with great readiness, and therefore acts

as an energetic oxidizing agent. In order that water may take

up another atom of oxygen, a molecule of oxygen or an oxide

must be decomposed, or an atom of atomic oxygen must enter

into direct combination. Thus—

Te et | ESS ah ele geen ¢ eae Oa ed 8

Traube, on the other hand, has brought forward a number of

experiments to show that peroxide of hydrogen is reduced oxy-

gen; that is to say, the oxygen in the peroxide enters as a whole

molecule, and as a molecule exists in combination with two

atoms of hydrogen. But whilst Traube states the above as his

hypothesis, and-that both the atoms of oxygen are combined in

the same manner, and with the same degree of chemical attrac-

tion, yet the structural formula which he gives is the same as

the one ordinarily adopted; nor is the fact that one only of the

oxygen atoms is readily parted with, explained by his theory any

more satisfactorily than by the ordinary one. Moreover, the

experiments, as detailed by Traube, are in opposition to the

results many times obtained by the author in their repetition.

Without detailing these results in this place, it will suffice to

148 The Literature of Ozone, etc.

state, that when zinc in fine division is shaken up with water

and air, the oxygen of the air causes an energetic oxidation of

the zinc. Asa result of this oxidation, the oxygen molecule is

divided, one atom going to the zinc and the other being for an ~

instant set free. This atomic oxygen brings forth very energetic

oxidations, oxidizing indigo to isatin, forming hydrogen. perox-

ide, decomposing potassium iodide and developing nitrous acid.

The latter speedily disappears, being oxidized by the peroxide

of hydrogen to nitric acid, while the excess of peroxide of hydro-

gen, which appears to be the most abundant product of the

reaction, is decomposed by the zine.

It might be supposed that these nhoromiens are due to the

oxidation of nascent hydrogen set free by.the decomposition of

the water itself. But this is not the case. Pure zine does not

decompose water, and ordinary zinc decomposes it in too small

an amount to explain the observed phenomena. This being the

case, zine acts in a manner analogous to phosphorus, viz. :

Zn+ H,O + O, = ZnH,0, + O

An experiment recently performed by Kappel can be best ex-

plained in hke manner. On agitating Cu with an alkaline solu-

tion and air, he obtained the reaction both for ozone and hydro-

gen peroxide, but not the nitrous reaction. His test-papers sus-

pended above the liquid became blue, but were immediately de-

colorised, a result attributed to the decomposition of the ozone

first formed, by the peroxide of hydrogen. For on passing a

current of air so as to remove the ozone, the hydrogen peroxide

reaction was readily obtained. (Berl. Berichte, XV, 2359.)

III. LigUrEFACTION AND COLOR OF OZONE.

The most important discoveries during the past three years

concerning the properties of ozone, are those made by Haute-

feuille and Chappuis. They found that ozone is a blue gas, the

color appearing sky-blne even when only so much ozone is present

as is obtained in the ozonation of the oxygen contained in a tube

a metre in length, by the silent discharge. Furthermore, they

found that under very great pressures the condensed gas becomes

indigo blue. If the pressure is increased to 75 atmospheres and

then suddenly relieved, a dense white cloud is formed, showing

the beginning of liquefaction, whilst the same phenomenon does

get ty oe Re at

The Literature of Ozone, ete. 149

not take place with pure oxygen until a pressure of 300 atmo-

spheres is attained. The ozone must be compressed slowly and

with constant cooling, otherwise it will explode with evolution

of heat and light. By mixing the ozone with carbon dioxide,

and then submitting the mixture to great cold and pressure,

Hantefeuille and Chappuis succeeded in obtaining a deep blue

liquid, the blue color being due to the liquefied ozone.

The same observers have studied the absorption-spectrum of

ozone, and accurate measurements of the same have been made by

W.N. Hartley. The latter has extended the research to the ab-

sorption of certain parts of the sun’s rays by atmospheric ozone.

By this new optical method he has arrived at the conclusions—

Ist. That ozone is a constayt constituent of the upper atmo-

sphere. 2d. That it is present in larger amounts in the upper

than in the lower part of the earth’s atmosphere. 8d. That it

is the cause of the blue color of the sky.

IV. ATMOSPHERIC OZONE.

In a former paper published in the Annals of the Academy,

‘“Upon Ozone and the Atmosphere,” I have detailed at length

the experiments by which I sought to show that the so-called

ozonoscopes, such as Schénbein’s potassium iodide starch-papers,

and Houzeau’s potassium iodide and litmus papers, were of no

value as tests for ozone per se, since they were equally affected

by hydrogen peroxide, which is also present in the air. Schéne

has arrived at the same results. But he has also shown that whilst

even thallium papers are of no value as ozonoscopes, they are of

value in the determination of atmospheric hydrogen-peroxide by

exact chemical methods. Thus at the very time when the esti-

mation of atmospheric ozone by any known chemical method

had been found impossible, the researches of Hautefeuille, Chap-

puis and Hartley pointed out an entirely unlooked-for means of

overcoming the difficulty. But as yet the practical utilisation

of their discovery, and the influence of moisture, hydrogen per-

oxide, and other constituents of the atmosphere, in confusing or

rendering difficult the observation of the ozone absorption-spec-

trum, have not yet been made known.

HoBOoKEN, December 15, 1885.

150 The Literature of Ozone.

SECOND INDEX

TO THE

LITERATURE OF OZONE,

Continued from p. 403, Vol. [, Annals.

1879;Hoppe-Seyler |Berl. Berichte, XII, 1551. |Activation of oxygen by

nascent hydrogen.

Leeds J. Am. Chem. Soc., I, 450;)Oxidation of carbon mon-

Berl. Berichte, I, 1836;| oxide by air over moist

Amer. Chem. J., 1, 373. phosphorus.

of J. Am. Chem. Soc., I, 442/Non-production of Ozone

et seq. from potassium dichro-

mate and _ sulphuric

acid. Non-production of

Ozone from potassium

permanganate and sul-

phuricacid. Production

from barium peroxide

and sulphuric acid. Pro-

duction from hydrogen

peroxide and sulphuric

acid.

Van Slouten J. Am. Chem. Soc., I, 263: |Relative amounts of Ozone

and organic impurities

in the atmosphere.

Wright |J. Chem. Soc., XX XVII,|No Ozone, but nitrous acid,

422; Chem. News, XL,| formed in combustion of

169. coal gas.

1880|A. Volta Gazz. Chim. Ital., LX, 521;/Action upon certain noble

; Berl. Berichte, XIII, 203;| metals.

Chem. News, XLI, 54; J.

Chem. Soc., XXXVIII,

205. |

Leeds ‘Berl. Berichte, XIII, 568; J.|\Upon ammonium nitrite

Am.,Chem. Soc., I, 145. and the secondary pro-

ducts obtained in the

ozonation of air over

moist phosphorus.

McLeod ‘Berl. Berichte, XIII, 568;/Formation of Ozone by

J. Chem. Soc., XX XVII,| slow oxidation of phos-

118; Chemikerzeitung,| phorus.

1880; 5.2 J.. Am: -Chem;

| ssoey Lie aol.

Leeds ‘Berl. Berichte, XIII, 1066,'Formation of hydrogen

1182; J: Am. Chem. Soc.,| peroxide and Ozone by

II, 34, 147; Chem. News,| action of moist phospho-

| Xe 16s. rus upon air.

cd Chem. News, XLI, 35. ‘Solubility in water.

The Literature of Oz

one. 151

1880|Kingzett

Renard

Kingzett

Schone

Schéne

Hautefeuille

and Chappuis

Leeds

Hautefeuille

and Chappuis

Mulvany

Ridout

Chappuis

J. Chem. Soec., XXXVII,

792; Berl. Berichte, XIV,

248.

Chem. News, XLI, 182.

Ann. de Chim. [5], XVI,

289, 337; J. Chem. Soc.,

XXXVIII, 24.

Chem. News, XLI, 76.

Berl. Berichte, XIII, 1503,

2400: J. Chem. Soc.,

XX XIX, 20.

Berl. Berichte, XIII, 1508;

J. Chem. Soc., XXXIX,

345.

Compt. Rend., XCI, 228;

Berl. Berichte, XI11,1972;

Chem. News, XLII, 119.

Compt. Rend., XCI, 134; J.

Chem. Soc., XX XIX, 221.

Compt. Rend., XCI, 522;

Berl. Berichte, XIII, 2230;

Chem. News, XLII, 179 ;

Chem. Centr., 1880, 754;

J: Chem- Soc, XX XIX,

18.

Berl. Berichte, XIII, 2351;

Chem. News, XLII, 304 ;

J. Chem. Soc., XX XIX,

221.

Compt. Rend., XCI, 815 ;

Berl. Berichte, XIII,2408;

Chem. News, XLII, 294;

J. Chem. Soc., XX XIX,

786.

Compt. Rend., XCI, 762;

Berl. Berichte, XIII, 2408;

Chem. Centr., 1880, 787 ;

Chem. News, XLII, 293.

Chem. News, XLI, 292.

Chem. .News, XLI, 98;

Pharm. J. Trans. [8], X,

G27,

Compt. Rend., XOI, 985;

R. Soc. Proc., XXX, 152;

Chem. News, XLIII, 36;

J. Chem. Soc,” X XX1TX,

213; Amer. Chem. J., III,

158.

deeAme Chem, Socselis 4 ii:

Berl. Berichte, XIV, 105;'

Atmospheric oxidation of

phosphorus, and some

reactions of Ozone and

hydric peroxide.

Peroxide of hydrogen and

Ozone.

Action of Ozone obtained

by electrolysis upon the

alcohols.

Note on the assumed for-

mation of Ozone by the

atmospheric oxidation

of phosphorus.

Proofs of the presence of

Ozone in atmospheric

air.

Ozonometry with thallium

papers.

Influence of temperature

and pressure upon the

production of Ozone.

Absorption bandas.

‘Liquefaction of Ozone and

its color in the gaseous

state.

Preparation of Ozone by

heating substances con-

taining oxygen.

Liquefaction of Ozone in

presence of carbon di-

-oxide and its color in

the liquid state.

‘Conversion of oxygen into

Ozone by electricity in

the presence of foreign

gases.

Ozone in nature, its rela-

tions, sources and influ-

ences.

Production of Ozone du-

ring combustion of coal

gas.

Absorption spectrum of

Ozone.

152

1880) Potilitzin

Arnold

Berthelot

1881 | Hartley

Leeds

‘Chappuis

Hautefeuille

and Chappuis

Berthelot

Hartley

Chappuis

Papasogli

De Valmagini

Bottger

Baumann

Becquerel

Schuhmeister

Jeremin

1882|Hautefeuille

eee Cha

)

ppuis|

The Literature of Ozone.

Berl. Berichte, XIII, 2400. |KI ozonoscopes value-

less on account of action

of CUZ

Rep. Anal. hem, sf ma

Arch. Pharm. 3], XIX,

Al.

Occurrence in milk (?).

Compt. Rend.. XC, 895 ;' Action upon ether with

Bull. Soc. Chim. [2], formation of ethyl per-

XXXVI, 72. oxide. j

J. Chem. Soc., XX XVIII,/Absorption spectrum.

111; R. Soc. Proc., XX XI,

dl and XXXII, 288.

Chem. News, XLII, 268.

Berl. Berichte. XIV, 841;'Formation of Ozone,

Chem, News, XLIII,1881;| HO, and NH, NO, by

J. Am. Chem. Soc., III, 5.| ozonation of air with

moist phosphorus.

Action of Ozone, HO,

Berl. Berichte, XIV, 975

J. Am. Chem. Soc., ne and nascent, oxygen

16. | upon benzole.

Berl. Berichte, XIV, 1014; Action upon the spores

Bull. Soc. Chim. [2],| contained in air.

XXXV, 290; Am. Chem.

J.; 118) 182.

Compt. Rend., XCII, 134.| Nitrification (Pernitric

Acid).

Action upon ether with

formation of ethyl per-

Berl. Berichte, XIV, 1200.

oxide.

Ber]. Berichte, XIV, 1390; Absorption of the sun’s

Chem. News, XLII, a rays by atmospheric

Ozone.

Bull. Soc.Chim.[2], XX XV, Influence upon phospho-

419 ; Berl. Berichte, XIV, rescence.

1394.

Gazz. Chim. Ital., XI, 277 J ae of CO, upon ozon-

Berl. Berichte, XIV, 2303.| oscopes.

Chemikerzeitung, 1880, 242, Peroxide of manganese as

from. Polyt. Notizblatt,) an ozone-carrier.

XXXV, 91.

‘Chem. Centr., 1880, 351. Peroxide of manganese as

an ozone-carrier.

Chem. Centr., 1880, 719. ‘Neutral AuCl, as an ozono-

| scope.

'‘Zeitsch. physiol. Chem., V,|Active oxygen and Ozone.

244 ; Berl. Berichte, XIV,

2706.

Compt. Rend., XCIJT, 348; Specific magnetism of

J. Chem. Soc., XXXIX,| Ozone.

340. /

Wien. Akad. Berichte, Magnetic constant of

LXXXIII, 45. Ozone.

‘Formation around the are

of electric lamp.

Reconversion into oxygen

| during continued elec-

trification.

Berl. Berichte, XIV, 1704.

Berl. Berichte, XV, 1076.

Literature of Hydrogen Peroxide. 15

SECOND INDEX

TO THE

LITERATURE OF PEROXIDE OF HYDROGEN.

Continued from p. 414, Vol. I Annals.

1879) Vasey

1880) Bertrand

Schone

Leeds

Berthelot

Chem. News, XL, 47, 91.

Berl. Berichte, XIII, 579.

Berl. Berichte, XIII, 1508 ;

Bulk Soc? * Chim: *"[2}-

XXXIV, 337; Chem.

Centr., 1880, 393.

Ber]. Berichte, XIII, 623 ;

Bully Soe. Chim! . [2]:

XXXIV, 682.

Ann. de Chem., Vol. 196,

58, 74; J. Am.Chem. Soc.,

FL,60.:

Berl. Berichte, XII], 627;

Ball. Soc. Chim-.- [2],

XXXIV, 683.

Ann. der Chem., Vol. 197,

187; J. Am. Chem. Soc.,

LEASE.

Berl. Berichte, XIII, 1066,

1132, 1858 ; J. Am. Chem.

Soe, bi sa4, 447:

‘Berl. Berichte, XIII, 1132 ;

Compt. Rend., XC, 897;

Ann. Chim. Phys. [5],

XXL, 160=. -Bull.. Soe.

Chim. [2], XXXIV, 78.

Berl. Berichte, XIII, 1018 ;

Compt. Rend., XC, 572 ;

Bull. Soc. Chim. [2],

XXXIV, 135; Ann.Chim.

Phys. [5], X XI, 164.

1879 continued.

Determination of nitrous

acid by Eee;

Titration.

Determinations in atmos-

pheric air with thallium

papers.

Decomposition in presence

of alkalies and alkaline

earths.

Hydrogen peroxide and

the oxides of thallium.

Behavior towards KI.

Behavior towards the gal-

vanic current.

Formation of H.O. and

Ozone by action of moist

phosphorus upon air.

Stability of.

Action upon AgO and Ag.

154 Literature of Hydrogen Peroxide.

Berthelot Berl: Berichte, XIII, 1019 ; Decomposition. of KMnO,

Ann. Chim. Phys. [5],| by H.O2

XXL 176. .

ey Compt. Rend., XC, 331 ;|/Heat of formation.

Ann. Chim. Phys. [5],

XXL 194-sibull” Soe:

Chim., XX Xil, 246. ;

Compt. "Rend., XC, 334 ;| Decomposition 1 in presence

Bull. Soc. Chim, [2],| of alkalies and BaO,. ~

XXXII, 289; Ann. Chim.

Phys. [5], Kx 153.

SS Ann. Chim. Phys. [5], X XI,|Theory of the catalysis of

146. H.0. by alkalies,

BaH.O., AgO, Pt,

Compt. Rend., XC, 5384;

Ann. Chim. Phys. [5],

XXI, 158.

Formation and decompo-

sition of the double com-_

pounds of Bal 202 and

H.O2

Combination of persul-

phuric acid with H.O2

od Compt. Rend., XC, 269;

Bull Soe. Chim... 2[ 2},

XXIII, 242.

Downes and |Nature, XX,521; Ann.Phys./Decomposition in sun-

Blunt Beibl., IV, 286. light.

Schone Ann. der Chem., Vol. 196,/Behavior towards Ozone.

239 ; J. Am. Chem. Soc.,

/ IL, 59:

1881| Leeds Berl. Berichte, XIV, 975. |Action of H2O2, Ozone

and nascent oxygen

upon benzene.

rs The same, XIV, 1382. Action upon phenole, nap-

thaline, anthracene, aro-

matic amines, &c.

Kingzett The same, XIV,1220; Chem.|Quantitative determina-

News, XLII, 161. tion.

Schone Berl. Berichte, Sane 1102 ;|Critique of Kingzett’ S pa-

Chem. News, XLII, 47,| per.

249.

Leeds Berl. Berichte, XIV, 976 ; Production of H.O2 by

Pharm. J. Trans. [31, XI} palladium hydrogen in

1068. contact with water and

air.

Hamlet - J. Chem. Soc., XX XVIII, |Destruction of bacteria by

326 ; Chem. News, LL) SEO;

175.

1882)Traube Berl. Berichte, XV, 663. |Production in processes of

oxidation, structure and

re-actions.

g The same, XV, 2854; J./Action of Pb and Pd on

; Chem. Soc. for 1888, p.| CO andH. (CO, formed

422. and H,O,).

Radulowitsch |Berl. Berichte. XV, 1461. |Formation during oxida-

tion of terpenes.

Action upon organic sub-

stances and upon fer-

mentation.

Bert and The same, XV, 1585.

Reynard|

Literature of Hydrogen Peroxide. 156

— ,

1882 Béchamp ‘The same, XV,1768; Compt.|Decomposition by certain

Kingzett

Schuller

Picini

Berthelot

Kappel

1883|Capranica

and Cobosanti

Classen and

~ Bauer

Rend., XCIV, 1601, 1653;| organic matters.

J. Chem. Soc. for 1883,

108.

Berl. Berichte, XV, 2271 ;;Action upon the red color-

Compt. Rend., XCIV,| ing matter of the blood

1653 ; J. Chem. Soc. for} and on haematosin.

1883, p. 108.

Berl. Berichte. XV, 3092 ;|/Evolution of O from H.O,

Compt. Rend., XCV, 925;| by fibrine.

J. Chem. Soc. for 1883, p.

227.

Berl. Berichte, XV, 2750. |Active O and the origin of

lalla

The same, XV, 719. Formation in combustion.

The same, XV, 2221. Oxidation of titanic acid

by HG;

The same, XV, 2212. Electrolysis.

Arch. Pharm. [3], XX, 574;|Formation of Ozone and

Berl. Berichte, XV, 2359 ;| H.Oz. by air over Cu and

J. Chem. Soc. for 18838, p.| fixed alkalies.

282.

Moleschott, Untersuch., , XIII

Part 2; Berl. Berichte,

XVI, 1104. -

Berl. Berichte, XVI, 1061 ;

J. Chem. Soc. for 1883, p.

934.

(156 New Birds from Yucatan.

IV.—Descriptions of supposed New Species of Birds of the

Families Tyrannide, Cypselide and Columbide. .

BY GEORGE N. LAWRENCE.

Read December Ist. 1884.

I. Contopus albicollis, |

Crown dark hair-brown ; back and upper tail-coverts dark olive-green ;

tail feathers dark liver-brown, the outer web of the lateral feather ashy, the

inner webs of all are edged with whitish, the ends of the tail-feathers are

_ just edged with dull white ; the quills are blackish-brown, with their inner

margins of a very pale ochreous-white, the inner primaries are tipped with

whitish. the secondaries narrowly edged and ending with white, and the

_ tertiaries more conspicuously margined with white ; the wing-coverts are

dark-brown. largely ending with dull white. forming two bars across the

wings ; under wing-coverts dull pale ochreous intermixed with dark ash ;

chin and throat white, breast and sides of a rather light cinereous, abdomen

and under tail-coverts very pale yellow ; the upper mandible is black, the

-under is of a light dull yellowish-brown, dusky at the tip ; tarsi and toes

black.

Length, 6 inches ; wing, 3.20; tail, 2.50: “bill” from front, 0.60 ;

tarsus, 0.50.

Habitat, Yucatan. Collected by Geo. F. Gaumer.

Remarks.—This does not require minute comparison with any

other species ; the white throat and generally pale colors of the

under plumage are distinguishing characters.

2. Cheetura Yucataniea.

The upper plumage is deep brownish-black, with the exception of the

rump and upper tail-coverts, which are dark ash-color with a wash of fuli-

ginous on the longer tail-coverts ; the tail-feathers are brownish-black, the

webs at the end tapering up to the delicate spines, where they are edged —

with whitish ; wings black, the ends of the inner quills narrowly margined

with dull white ; lores black ; the chin, throat and upper part of the breast

are light ash, the lower part of the breast and the abdomen are of a dark

New Birds from Yucatan. 157

ash-color, with a smoky tinge on the lower part of the abdomen and on the

under tail-coverts ; bill and feet black.

Length to end of spines. 4 inches ; wing, 3.90; tail to end of spines, 1.65;

length of spines, 0.25.

Hlabitat, Silam, Yucatan. Collected by Geo. F. Gaumer.

Type in my collection.

Remarks.—Vhis is a smaller species than my Chetura Gau-

meri (Annals, Vol. II, p. 245), but resembles it in general color-

ation, except in having the throat more ashy, and in being darker

on the abdomen and on the rump, with the tail blacker, and the

webs of the tail-feathers tapering at their ends, these being

rounded in C. Gaumeri.

In my account of C. Gaumert, I stated that the spines of the

tail-feathers were worn off close to the webs, and that this fea-

ture was probably caused by the bird’s inhabiting rocky cliffs. I

haye now seen six specimens of this species, all precisely alike in

the worn character of the shafts of the tail-feathers. I am of

the opinion that the shafts do not extend much beyond the webs.

The tail-feathers at the end closely resemble in shape those of

Chetura cinereicauda, andi judge that the shafts in perfect

condition are also similar, 1. e., extending only a short distance

beyond the webs.

It will be seen by the subjoined communication from Mr. Gau-

mer, that the two species were obtained at different localities,

and at about the same season. He writes: ‘‘I would call your

attention particularly to the bird. numbered 107 (?); this speci-

men and another which I have, were taken at Silam in June;

the spines are quite long and sharp, while those birds of the in-

terior (C. Gaumeri), taken both before and since, have the spines

very short and blunt.”

3. Engyptila Gaumeri.

Front, as far as the middle of the crown, pure white ; hind part of the

crown and the occiput grayish-blue ; hind neck and upper part of back with

bright crimson reflections mixed with green on the lower part ; back, wings

and upper. tail-coverts light brownish-olive; middle tail-feathers olive-brown,

the other tail-feathers black, rather narrowly white at their ends ; lesser and

middle wing-coverts of a light reddish-brown ; the primaries have their outer

webs reddish-brown, of the same color as the wing-coverts, the outer edges

158 New Birds from Yucatan.

whitish towards their ends ; the secondaries have their outer webs of i

warmer brown than the primaries, and they are also edged with white as in

the primaries ; the inner webs of all the quills are clear cinnamon-red, the

primaries at their ends for one and a half inches are dark brown ; the under

wing-coverts are deep cinnamon-red ; bill black ; tarsi and toes clear flesh-_

color—probably crimson in the living bird. *

Length (skin), 10 inches; wing, 5.75 ; tail, 4.25; bill from front, 0.70;

tarsus, 1.

Habitat, Silam, Yucatan. ‘Type in my collection. Collected

by George F. Gaumer, whose name I have conferred upon it.

Concerning it Mr. Gaumer writes as follows: ‘‘ During one week

that I was at Silam, I found the doves to be quite rare ; ten were

taken, all of which were like the specimen sent yeu, 1. e., with

the white front and brilliant reflections on the neck. The spe-

cimens from the interior (2. fulviventris) are larger and darker.

The song of the coast bird is more prolonged and oftener repeated

than the other.”

Remarks.—TVhis species, in distribution of colors, most resem-

bles #. Jamaicensis, but differs from it in being smaller in all

its dimensions, except that the bill is perceptibly larger and

stronger. The upper plumage is of a much lighter olive, being

brownish in Jamaicencis ; the middle tail-feathers are darker

aud narrower, with their shafts dark brown, these in the other

being of a light reddish-brown ; in the new species the cinnamon-

color of the inner webs of the primaries reaches up to the shafts,

in Jamaicensis it is separated fram them by a dusky space. I

have before me four specimens of the latter, with which to make

comparison.

From #. albifrons, it is readily distinguished by its tate the

front largely pure white, which in alb¢frons is bluish-white and

the color more restricted ; also by the more brilliant reflections

on the hind neck and by its white throat ; the most marked dif-

ference is, that the inner webs of the quills are entirely of a cin-

namon-red, whereas in oles ons they have only a very pale edging

of that color.

Last spring Mr. Gaumer went to Yucatan on his second expe-

dition to that country, to collect specimens in the different

branches of natural history. Lately I received from him two

small collections of birds, which contained the pe above

described.

* Chin and throat white; sides of the head, the breast and sides, pale

vinaceous; abdomen and under tail coverts white.

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 159

V.—A Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

BY H. CARRINGTON BOLTON.

Read Jan. 5th, 1885.

Introductory.—This Catalogue is intended to contain the titles

of the principal chemical periodicals of all countries, from the

rise of this literature tothe present day. ‘The tendency in serial

publications, especially in those of earlier date, to include in a

single journal many departments of science, makes it difficult

for the bibliographer to draw the line accurately between period-

icals devoted to given sciences. Therefore any attempt to classify

chemical periodicals is liable on the one hand to too great exclu-

siveness to satisfy the needs of some, and on the other to too

great comprehensiveness and consequent voluminosity.

Chemistry is so commonly treated in periodical literature to-

gether with the kindred sciences of physics and of pharmacy,

that strictly speaking a full bibliography of chemical periodicals

should include all those devoted to the two sciences just named.

Moreover there is a large and growing number of technical jour-

nals dealing with a special branch of chemical technology, such

as brewing, dyeing, gas-making, sugar-refining, etc. ; and these

also should be included in any bibliography claiming to be ex-

haustive. The following catalogue is however confined to the

more limited plan, for two reasons;—first, because it is prepared

for the convenience of chemists needing a reasonably full list of

chemical journals for use in compiling indexes to special topics,

in accordance with the scheme of codperative indexing in charge

of a committee of the American Association for the Advance-

ment of Science ; and second, because my ‘‘ Catalogue of Sci-

160 Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

entific and Technical Periodicals, 1665-1882,” published by the

Smithsonian Institution, includes works in every department

of pure and applied science, and to this comprehensive work we

refer librarians and others seeking a wider range. The data

in the following pages have been drawn in great measure from

the larger catalogue just named ; the works have been brought

down to a later date, and society journals have been introduced.

That no bibliography of periodicals which can be classed as

chemical, will contain all the literature of chemistry, goes with-

out saying; chemical papers are unfcrtunately widely scattered —

in society publications and in serials devoted to general science ;

to include all these is of course out of the question, but a

few have been admitted to this list. For a more complete bibli-

ography we refer for society journals to the ‘‘ Catalogue of Sci-

entific Serials” of Mr. 8. H. Scudder (Cambridge, 1879, 8vo),

and for journals of general science to our own ‘‘ Catalogue”

already mentioned.

Plan of Catalogue.—Vhe arrangement of titles is strictly alpha-

betical, the articles and the adjective New alone excepted. The

different titles borne by a periodical at different periods, are

arranged in chronological order under the first or earliest title.

Cross-references have becn freely introduced, and are of three

kinds: 1st, from the later to the first title of a periodical which

has undergone changes in title ; 2d, from short titles in common

use to the accurate bibliographical designations; 3d, from the

names of editors to the periodicals conducted by them. Besides

these, in the case of societies, references are made from the cities

in which the societies are located, and from the proper designa- :

tion of the societies to the titles of the journals published by

them. A geographical index, arranged by He: and cities,

will be found at the close. .

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 161

CATALOGUE

CHEMICAL PERIODICALS.

EXPLANATION OF SIGNS.

+ Following a date signifies current at the date in question.

|| Following a date signifies publication discontinued.

ACADEMIE DES SCIENCES, Paris.

See Comptes-rendus hebdomadaires des séances [etc. ].

ACADEMIE IMPERIALE DES SCIENCES DE St. PETERSBOURG.

See Mélanges physiques et chimiques [etce. ].

AFHANDLINGAR I Fysitk, Kemi ocw MINERALOoGI. Utgifne

af W. Hisinger och J. Berzelius. 6 vols., 8vo. Stock-

rolme 30618. Vol. a7 d806 = 11, 18075 111,° 18103: Ly,

RSL: WNL Sis. |

AGENDA DU CHIMISTE. 16mo. Paris, 18**~82-++

AKADEMIE DER WISSENSCHAFTEN — —-—-— WIEN.

See Monatshefte fiir Chemie.

ALBERTONI, P.

See Revista di chimica e farmaceutica.

ALLGEMEINE CHEMIKER ZEITUNG. Central-Organ fiir

Chemiker, Techniker, Ingenienre, Maschinenbauer, Fab-

rikanten chemisch-technischer Apparate. | Correspon-

denzblatt chemisch-technischer und Gewerbe-Vereine.

162° Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. —

Chemisches Central-Annoncenblatt. Herausgegeben von.

G. Krause. 8 vols., 4to. Cdéthen, 1877844

In 1879 the prefix ALLGEMEINE was dropped.

4, ALLGEMEINE CHEMISCHE BIBLIOTHEK DES NEUNZEHNTEN |

JAHRHUNDERTS. Herausgegeben von J. B. Trommsdorff.

5 vols., 8vo. Erfurt, 1801-05. |

ALLGEMEINE NORDISCHE ANNALEN DER CHEMIE.

See Nordische Blatter fiir Chemie.

5. ALLGEMEINES JOURNAL DER CHEMIE. Herausgegeben von

Alex. Nic. Scherer. 10 vols., 8vo. Leipzig, 1798-1803.

Continued under the title : 5; |

[a.] Nenes allgemeines Journal der Chemie, von Klaproth,

Hermbstidt, Scherer, J. B. Richter, J. B. Tromms-

dorff, herausgegeben von Ad. Ferd. Gehlen. 8 vols.,

Svo. Leipzig, 1803—06.. |

Continued under the title : f

[b.] Journal fiir die Chemie, Physik [from vol. 1v] und

Mineralogie, von Bucholz, Crell, Hermbstidt, Klap-

roth, Richter, Ritter, Trommsdorff, herausgegeben

von A. F. Gehlen. 9 vols., 8vo. Berlin, 1806-10.

Continued under the title :

[c.] Journal fiir Chemie und Physik, in Verbindung mit

J. J. Bernhardi, J. Berzelius, C. F. Bucholz, L. von

Crell, A. F. Gehlen [and others], herausgegeben von

J. S..C. Schweigger. 69 vols., 8vo. Nurnberg,

181133. |

Changes in the title as follows :

1st Series, vols. I-xxx, 181120, also wnder the title, Beitrage

zur Chemie und Physik. .

2d Series, vols. XXXI-LX, 1821-30, also under the title, Jahr-

buch der Chemie und Physik herausgegeben von Schweigger

und Meinecke.

3d Series, vols. LXI-LXIX, 183133, also under the title, Neues

Jahrbuch der Chemie und Physik. From 1829, edited by

Fr. W. Schweigger-Seidel.

United in 1834 with the Journal fir technische und oekono-

mische Chemie and continued under the title:

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 163

[d.] Journal fiir praktische Chemie, herausgegeben von Otto

Linné Erdmann, F. W. Schweigger-Seidel (und R. F.

Marchand). [From 1853, edited by O. L. Erdmann

and Gustav Werther.] 108 vols, 8vo. Leipzig,

1834-69. |

[e.] Neue Folge. Herausgegeben von Hermann Kolbe.

[ From 1879 by H. Kolbe and Ernst von Meyer.] 30

vols., S8vo. Leipzig, 1870-84-+-

Sach- und Namen-Register zu Band 1-xxx. Leipzig, 1844.

Ditto, ditto, Baud xxx1-ux. Leipzig, 1854.

Ditto, ditto, bearbeitet von Friedrich Gottschalk, Band

LxI-xc. Leipzig, 1865.

Ditto, ditto, Band xci-cvii1. Leipzig, 1871.

ALMANACCO DI CHIMICA AGRICOLA. Dal A. Selmi. 6 vols.,

16mo. Milano, 187378 [+ ?]

ALMANACH DE LA CHIMIE, par-H. du M. 8 vols., 18mo.

Rouen et Paris, 1854-'61.

ALMANACH FUR SCHEIDEKUNSTLER UND APOTHEKER. Her-

ausgegeben von J. F. A. Géttling. 23 vols., 8vo. Wei-

mar, 1780-1802.

Continued under the litle :

[a.] Taschenbuch fiir Scheidekiinstler und Apotheker, her-

ausgegeben von Ch. Fr. Bucholz. 17 vols. (xxIv—

XL), 8vo. Weimar, 1803—19.

Continued under the title :

[b. |] Trommsdorff’s T'aschenbuch fiir Chemiker und Phar-

maceuten. 10 vols. (xLI-L), 8vo. Jena, 1820-29. ||

Edited from 1780-1802, by J. F. A. Géttling ; 1803-15, C. ~

F. Bucholz; 1806-17, C. F. Bucholz with Wilh. Meiss-

ner; 1818, C. F. Bucholz with Rud. Brandes ; 1819, Rud.

Brandes ; 1820—29, J. B. Trommsdorff.

ALMSTROM, P. O.

See Tekno kemisk Journal.

AMERICAN CHEMICAL REVIEW.

See Chemical Review and Journal [a].

164

10.

11.

12.

13.

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. —

AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY.

See Journal of the.

AMERICAN CHEMICAL JOURNAL. Edited, with the aid of

chemists at home and abroad, by Ira Remsen. 6 vols.,

Svo. Baltimore, Md., 1879—84-+ |

AMERICAN (THE) CHEMIST. A monthly journal of theoret-

ical, analytical, and technical chemistry. Edited by Chas.

F. Chandler and W. H. Chandler. 6 vols. and 6 nos.,

4to. New York, 1870-77. || :

AMERICAN (THE) Laporatory. A bi-monthly journal of

the progress of chemistry, pharmacy, medicine, recreative

science, and the useful arts. 4to. Boston, 18795.

ANALYST (THE), including the proceedings of the ‘‘ Society

of Public Analysts.” A monthly journal of analytical

chemistry. Edited [in 1882] by G. W. Wigner and J.

Muter. 9 vols., 8vo. London, 1876-84. i

ANNALEN DER CHEMIE UND PHARMACIE

See Annalen der Pharmacie.

ANNALEN DER CHEMISCHEN LITERATUR.

See Bibliothek der neuesten physisch-chemischen — — — Literatur.

ANNALEN DER PHaRMActIg. Eine Vereinigung des Ar-

chives des Apotheker-Vereins im nérdlichen Tentschland,

B. xL; und des Magazins fiir Pharmacie und Experi-

mentalkritik, B/’ xxxviz. Herausgegeben von Rudolph

Brandes, Ph. Lorenz Geiger, und Justus Liebig. 10 yols.,

8vo. Lemgo und Heideiberg, 1832-34.

Continued (from vol. x1, 1834) under the title :

[a.] Annalen der Pharmacie. Vereinigte Zeitschrift des

Neuen Journals der Pharmacie fiir Aerzte, Apotheker

und Chemiker, Band, xxvit1; des Archivs des Apothe-

kervereins im nérdlichen Deutschland, Band, xix;

und des Magazins fiir Pharmacie und Experimental- _

Kritik, Band X1Lvi. Von Johann Bartholomi

Trommsdorff, Rudolph Brandes, Philipp Lorenz Gei-

ger, und Justus Liebig. 22 vols. (xI-xxxu1), yo.

Heidelberg, 183439.

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 165

Vols. xvui-xxul, edited by J. B. Trommsdorff, Justus

Liebig, and Emanuel Merck. Vols. xx11I-xxvi, edited by

Justus Liebig, Emanuel Merck, and Friedrich Mobr. Vols.

XXVII-XXXII, herausgegeben unter Mitwirkung der HH.

Dumas in Paris und Grahvm in. London, von Friedrich

Wobler und Justus Liebig.

Continued under the title :

[b. | Annalen der Chemie und Pharmacie. Unter Mitwir-

kung der HH. Dumas in Paris und Graham in Lon-

don, herausgegeben von Friedrich Wohler und Justus

Liebig. 136 vols. (XXXITI-CLXVIII), 8vo. Heidel-

berg, 1840-1873.

From vol. Xu the names Dumas and Graham are dropped.

From vol. LXXvIt (1851), edited by Friedrich Wohler, Jus-—

tus Liebig, avd Hermann Kopp; neve Reihe Band 1. From

vol. CLIX (1871), edited by the same, together with E. Erlen-

meyer and J. Volhard.

Continued under the title : ;

[c.] Justus Liebig’s Annalen der Chemie und Pharmacie.

Herausgegeben von Friedrich Wohler, Hermann

Kopp, Emil Erlenmeyer, Jacob Volhard [later, by

the same, with A. W. Hofmann, Aug. Kekulé]. 58

vols. (CLXIX—CCOXXVI), 8vo. Leipzig und Heidel-

berg, 1873-—84-++

[d.] Supplement-Band 1, 1861 ; 11, 1862-63 ; 111, 1864—'65;

bye e697 665-9. 1867 5 vi, 18683) vil,18705 Vint,

1872. ;

Autoren- und Sach-Register zu den Binden 1-c (Jahr-

gang, 1832-1856) der Annalen der Chemie und Phar-

macie. Bearbeitet von G. C. Wittstein. 8vo. Leip-

zig und Heidelberg, 1861.

Autoren- und Sach-Register zu den Banden cI-cxv1

(Jahrgang, 1857-1860) der Annalen der Chemie und

Pharmacie. Bearbeitet von G. C. Wittstein. 1

vol., 8vo. Leipzig und Heidelberg, 1861.

Autoren- und Sach-Register zu den Banden cxvu—

CLXIV und den Supplementbinden I-vii1, (1861-1872)

166 Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

der Annalen der Chemie und Pharmacie. Bearbeitet

von Friedrich Carl. 1 vol., 8ve. Jeipzig und Hei-

delberg, 1874.

General-Register zu den Banden cLxv—-ccoxx (1873-

1883), von Liebig’s Annalen der Chemie (frither An-

nalen der Chemie und Pharmacie), bearbeitet von

Friedrich Carl. 1 vol., 8vo. Leipzig, 1885.

Cf. Magazin fiir Pharmacie. -

ANNALEN DER PHysIK UND CHEMIE.- Poggendorff. See Journal

der Physik. Gren.

14. ANNALES DE CHIMIE, ou Recueil de mémoires concernant

la chimie et les arts qui en dépendent, [ from vol. xxx111]

et spécialement la pharmacie. -Parde Morvean, Lavoisier,

Monge, Berthollet, de Fourcroy, de Dieterich, Hassen-

fratz, et Adet. 96 vols., 8vo. Paris, 1789-1816.

Vols. 1, 11, and WI were reprinted at Paris in 1830.

Tables des matiéres. 3vols. Paris, 1801, 1807, 1821.

Continued under the title :

'[a.] Annales de chimie et de physique, par Gay-Lussac -et

Arago. Deuxieme série.. 78 vols., 8yo. Paris,

1817-40.

Tables des\matiéres. 3 vols., 8vo. Paris, 183141.

Continued under the title :

[b.] Annales de chimie et de physique, par Arago, Chey-

reul, Dumas, Pélouze, Boussingault, Regnault. Avec

une revue des travaux de chimie et de physique pub-

hées a l’étranger, par Wurtz et Verdet. Troisiéme

serie. 69 vols., 8vo. Paris, 1841-63.

‘Tables des matiéres. 2 vols., 8vo. Paris, vols.I-Xxx,

1851; vol. XXXI-LXIX, 1866.

Continued under the title :

[c. ] Annales de chimie et de physique, par Chevreul, Du-

mas, Pélouze, Boussingault, Regnault, avec la col-

laboration de Wurtz. Quatriéme série. 30 vols.,

Svo. Paris, 1864-73. i

Table des matieres. Vols. I-Xxx. Paris, 1874.

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 167

'd.}] Cinquiéme série. Par Chevreul, Dumas, Boussingault,

Wurtz, Berthelot, Pasteur, avec Ja collaboration de

de Bertin. 30 vols., 8vo. Paris, 1874—~84+

15. ANNALI DI CHIMICA [from vol. Iv] e storia naturale,

ovvero raccolta di memorie sulle scienza, arti e manufat-

ture ad esse relative, di L. Brugnatelli. 21 vols., 8vo.

Pavia, 1790-1802. |

Vol. XXI contains index.

ANNALI DI. CHIMICA APPLICATA ALLA MEDECINA. Polli. See Gior

nale di farmacia, chimica e scienza accessorie.

16. ANNALI DI FISICA, CHIMICA E MATEMATICHE, col bullettino

dell’ industria, meccanica e chimica, diretti dall’ ingegnere

G. A. Majocchi. 28 vols., 8vo. Milano, 1841-’47.

Continued under the litle :

La. | Annali di fisica, chimica e scienze affini, col bollettini

di farmacia e di technologia, redatti da G. A. Majoc-

ehi je-1 Selmi, || from vol. mi) e. P. A..Boscarelli.

Seconda serie. 4 vols., 8vo. Torino, 1850.||

ANNALI DI Fisica, dell’ Abbate F. C. Zantedeschi. See Raccolta

fisico-chemico-italiano.

17. ANNALS OF CHEMICAL MEDICINE, including tle applica-

tion of chemistry to physivlogy, pathology, therapeutics,

pharmacy, toxicology, and hygiene. Edited by J. L. W.

Thudicum. 2 vols., 8vo. London, 1880 ’81-++

18. ANNALS (THE) OF CHEMICAL PHILOSOPHY, [etc.] By W.

Maugham. 2 vols., 8vo. London, 1828 ’29.

19. ANNALS OF CHEMISTRY, [etc.], by de Morveau, Lavoisier,

[and others.| ‘Translated from the French. 1 vol., 8vo.

London, 1791.

This is a translation of the fifth volume of the Annales de chimie.

20. ANNALS (THE) oF CHYMISTRY AND PRACTICAL PHARMACY.

Being a weekly summary of the discoveries of philoso-

phers, chiefly continental and transatlantic, in their appli-

cations to the chemistry of medicine, agriculture, manu-

factures, and to the several branches of physics, electricity,

galvanism, photography, ete. 1 vol., 8vo. London, 1843.

168 Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

21. ANNALS OF PHARMACY AND PRACTICAL CHEMISTRY. Edit-

ed by W. Bastick and W. Dickenson. 3 vols., 8vo. Lon-

don, 185254. a

22. ANNALS oF PHILOSOPHY ; or Magazine of Chemistry, Min-

eralogy, Mechanics, Natural History, Agriculture, and

the Arts. By Thomas Thomson. 16 vols., 8vo. Lon-

don, 1813-’20. 3

New series. [Edited by Richard Phillips.] 12 vols., 8vo.

London, 182126. ae

United in 1827 with the Philosophical Magazine and Journal. See

Philosophical Magazine.

23. ANNUAIRE DES PRODUITS CHIMIQUES, de la droguerie et de

Vepicerie en gros, contenant la liste complete des fabri-

cants, etc., de France, de l’Italie, de Belgique, et de la

Suisse. 4 vols., 8vo. Paris, 1874—’78.

24. ANNUAIRE DE CHIMIE, comprenant les applications de cette

science a la medecine et a la pharmacie, ou répertoire des

découvertes et des nouveaux travaux en chimie faits dans

les diverses parties de l’ Europe, par K. Millon et J. Reiset,

avec la collaboration de F. Hoefer et de Nicklés. 7 vols.,

8vo.. Paris, 1845-51. |

ANNUAIRE DE CHIMIE - - - par Laurent et Gerhardt. See Comptes-

rendus mensuels des travaux chimiques, etc. .

25. ANNUAIRE DES SCIENCES CHIMIQUES, ou Rapport sur

les progrés des sciences naturelles présenté 4 l’académie de

Stokolm [sic]. Par Berzelius. Supplément a son Traité

de chimie. Traduit en Frangais par-H. D. 8vo. Paris,

1837.

See Rapport annuel sur les progrés des sciences ; also Arsberat-

telse om Framstegen i Fysik och Kemi.

26. ANNUAL REPORT OF THE PROGRESS OF CHEMISTRY and

the allied sciences, physics, mineralogy, and geology ; in-

cluding the application of chemistry to pharmacy, the arts

and manufactures. By Justus Liebig and H. Kopp with

the codperation of H. Buff, Frederick Knapp, Ernest Dief-

28.

dl.

32.

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 160

fenbach, Charles Ettling, Henry Will, Frederick Zammi-

ner. Edited by A. W. Hofmann and Warren de la Rue.

1847-53. 7 vols., 8vo. London, 1849-55.

See Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte der reinen - - - Chemie.

Giessen.

ANNUARIO ALMANACCO PEI CHIMICI, FARMACISTI E MEDICL

ITALIANI, redatto per cura del farmacista Ign. Cugusi-

Persi da Cagliari. 5 vols., 16mo. Milano, 1874-’79.

ANNUARIO CHIMICO ITALIANO dell’ anno 1845, diretto da

Francesco Selmi e compilato dal medesimo in compagnia

dei Signori Giuseppi Parmeggiani e Giovanni Giorgini.

1 vol., 8vo. Modena, 1846.

ANNUARIO DELEE SCIENZE CHIMICHE E NATURALI. 1 vol.,

S8vo. Verona, 1840.

ANNUARIO DELLE SCIENZI CHIMICHE, FARMACEUTICHE, E

MEDICO-LEGALI ad uso dei farmacisti e medici, in contina-

zione del Supplimento al trattato di farmacia, del Sign.

Virey ; della Gazzetta eclettica di farmacia e chimica. 1

vol., 8vo. Mantova, 1840.

Continued under the litle :

[a.] Annuario delle scienze chimiche, farmaceutiche e

medico-legali, contenente tutte le scoperte relative

a queste scienze, la relazione di lavori chimici e natu-

rali, delle riunioni degli scienziati italiani e stranieri,

di quelli particolari di J. J. Berzelius, e la traduzione

della chimica organica di J. Liebig. Redattore G.

B. Sembenini. 9 vols., 8vo. Mantova, 1841-49.

Cf. Gazzetta eclettica di farmacia e chimica.

ANTI-ADULTERATION REVIEW. —vols. London, 1871

80+

ARCHIV DER AGRICULTURCHEMIE ftr denkende Land-

wirthe. Herausgegeben von Sig. F. Hermbstidt. 7 vols.,

Syo. Berlin, 1803-18. ||

170 Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

33. ARCHIV FOR PHARMACI, redigeret af S. M. Trier. 3 vols.,

8vo. Kjgbenhavn, 1844-46.

Continued under the tlle : Bae ic

[a.| Archiy for Pharmaci og technisk Chemi med deres |

Grundvidenskaber. Kedigeret af 8. M. Trier. Det

technisk-chemiske Afsnit redigeret af P. Faber. 34

vols. (IV-XXXVII), 8vo. Kjgbenhavn, 1847—80-4

Index. Vols. I-xv, 1844-58. Kjybenhavn, 1859.

34. ARCHIV FUR DIE GESAMMTE NATURLEHRE. In Verbind-

ung mit Bischoff, Forstmann, C. G. Gmelin, Grischow,

F. W. von Paula Gruithuisen, Hallaschka, P]. Heinrich,

A. von Humboldt, John, Kleefeldt, Lichtenberg, Marx,

Olbers, Pleischl, Precht], Schmidt, Schén, Spath, Woll-

ner, und Zimmerman, herausgegeben von C. W. G. Kast-

ner. 27 vols., 8vo. Nurnberg, 1824~—35.

Vols. XIx-xxvili also under the litle:

Archiy fiir Chemie und Meteorologie, in Verbindung mit

mehreren Gelehrten, herausgegeben von C. W. G. Kast-

ner. 9 vols. (I-IX), 8vo. Nurnberg, 1830-35.

ARCHIV FUR CHEMIE UND METEOROLOGIE.

See Archiv fiir die gesammte Naturlehre.

ARCHIV FUR PHYSIOLOGISCHE UND PATHOLOGISCHE CHEMIE.

See Beitriige zur physiologischen und pathologischen Chemie.

33. ARCHIV FUR DIE THEORETISCHE CHEMIE. Herausgegeben

von Alex. Nic. Scherer. 1 vol., 8vo. Jena und Berlin,

1800-02. |

36. ARcHIV FUR DIE THIERISCHE CHEMIE. Herausgegeben

yon Johann Horkel. 1 vol., 8vo. Halle, 1800, 701.

37. ARSBERATTELSE OM FRAMSTEGEN I Puysik ocH CHEMI

till Kongl. Vetenskaps-Akademien afgiven af Jac. Berze-

lius. 1821-40. 20 vols., 8vo. Stockholm, 1822—41.

Continued under the title :

[a. | Arsberiittelse om Framstegen 1 Kemi och Mineralogi

afgiven af Jac. Berzelius. 1841-47. 7.vols., 8vo.

Stockholm, 1841—'48.

Followed by:

Catalogue of Chemical Pertodicals. et

[b. | Arsberiittelse om Framstegen i Kemi till Kongl. Ve-

tenskaps-Akademien afgiven af L. F. Svanberg.

1847-49. 3vols., 8vo. Stockholm, 1849-51.

~Sak- och Namn-Register éfver alla af Berzelius - - -

afgifna Arsberiittelser (182147). Pa Kongl. Ve-

tenskaps-Akademiens fOranstaltande utgifvet af A.

Wiemer. 1 vol., 8vo. Stockholm, 1850.

Cf. Rapport annuel sur les progrés des sciences physiques

et chimiques.

ArTts, W.

See Jahrbuch fiir 6konomische Chemie ; also Vierteljahresschrift

fiir technische Chemie.

38. AUSWAHL ALLER EIGENTHUMLICHEN ABHANDLUNGEN

UND BEOBACHTUNGEN IN DER CHEMIE, mit einigen Ver-

besserungen und Zusitzen. Heransgegeben von Lorenz

Crell. 5 vols., 8vo. Leipzig, 1786, ’87.

Cf. Crell, Lorenz.

39. AUSWAHL VORZUGLICHER ABHANDLUNGEN AUS DEN

SAMMTLICHEN BANDEN DER FRANZOSISCHEN ANNALEN

DER CHEMIE zur vollstandigen Benutzung derselben durch

Erginzung der von ihrem Anfange an den chemischen

Annalen einverleibten Aufsiaitzen ftir deutsche Scheide-

kinstler von Lorenz vou Crell. 1 vol., 8vo. Helmstadt,

1801.

Cf. Crell, Lorenz.

Bastick (W.) AND DicKENSON (W).

See Annals of Pharmacy and Practical Chemistry.

BEIBLATTER ZU DEN ANNALEN DER PHYSIK UND CHEMIE.

See Journal der Physik.

-BEILSTEIN’S ZEITSCHRIFT FUR CHEMIE.

See Kritische Zeitschrift fiir Chemie. |

40. BerrraAGE zUR CHEMIE in Uebersetzung oder vollstindigen

Auszigen neuer chemischer Abhandlungen, sammt eini-

gen neuen Aufsaitzen. Herausgegeben von F. A. X. von

Wasserberg.. 1 vol., 8vo.° Wien, 1791.

BEITRAGE ZUR CHEMIE UND Puystk, von J. 8. OC. Schweigger. See

Allgemeines Journal der Chemie.

172 Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

41. BrITRAGE ZUR CHEMISCHEN KENNTNISS DER MINERAL-

KORPER. Herausgegeben von M. H. Klaproth. 6 vols.,

8vo. Berlin und Stettin, 1795-1815.

42. BritRige zuR ERWEITERUNG UND BERICHTIGUNG DER

CHEMIE. Herausgegeben durch C. F. Bucholz. 3 vols.,

Svo. Erfurt, 1799-1802.

43. BErrRAGE ZUR PHYSIOLOGISCHEN UND PATHOLOGISCHEN -

CHEMIE und Mikroscopie in ihrer Anwendung auf die

praktische Medicin, unter Mitwirkung der Mitglieder des

Vereins fiir physiologische und pathologische Chemie und

anderer Gelehrten, herausgegeben von Franz Simon.

lvol., 8vo. Berlin, 1843.

Continued under the title :

[a.| Archiv fir physiologische und pathologische Chemie

und Mikroscopie in ihrer Anwendung auf die prak-

tische Medicin. Organ fir die Fortschritte der

gesammten = pitta Chemie im In- und Aus-

lande. Unter Mitwirkung mehrerer Gelehrten des

In- und Auslandes als Fortsetzung der von Franz Si-

mon in Berlin gegrindeten Zeitschrift ‘‘ Beitrige,

etc.,” herausgegeben und redigirt von J. F. Heller.

4 vols. (I-IV), 8vo. Wien und Berlin, 184447. |

Continued under the title :

[b.] Archiy fiir physiologische und natholopicea Chemie

und Mikroscopie mit besonderer Rucksicht auf die

medicinische Diagnostik und Therapie. Herausgege-

ben von Joh. Florian Heller. Neue Folge. 2 vols. '

(v, v1), 8vo. Wien, 1852-54. ||

BENNEWITZ, PAUL.

See Deutscher Chemiker-Kalender; also, Technisch-chemischer

Kalender.

BERGE, HENRI.

See Chimiste (Le).

44. BERICHTE DER DEUTSCHEN CHEMISCHEN GESELLSCHAFT.

17 vols. [ from 1874 each volume in two parts], 8vo. Ber-

lin, 1868-84-++

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. Li.

Generalregister tber die ersten zehn Jahrgiinge (Ls68—

1877) der Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft

zu Berlin. Bearbeitet von ©, Bischoff. 1 vol., 8vo. Ber-

lin, 1880.

BERLIN, DEUTSCHE CHEMISCHE GESELLSCHAFT.

_ See Berichte der deutschen

45. BERLINISCHES JAHRBUCH DER PHARMACIE. 1 vol., 12mo.

Berlin, 1795.

Continued under the title :

[a.] Berlinisches Jahrbuch fiir die Pharmacie und fiir dic

damit verbundenen Wissenschaften. 42 vols. (11-

XLII), 12mo. Berlin, 1796-1840. ||

From 1803—10 published with the additional title:

Neues Berlinisches Jahrbuch fiir die Pharmacie, {ed-

ited by F. A. Gehlen and Val. Rose]. From 1811-14,

with the additional title: Neues Jahrbuch der Phar-

macie, herausgegeben von W. Dobereiner. From

181529, with the additional title: Deutsches Jahr-

buch fiir die Pharmacie. dited from 181820 by

C. W. G. Kastner ; 1821-25, G. H. Stoltze; 1826-29,

Wilhelm Meissner; 1830, 731, A. Lucas; 1833-40,

Lindes.

BERZELIUS, J.

See Afhandlingar i Fysik, Kemi [etc.]; also, Arsberiittelse om

Framstegen i Physik och Chemi; also, Rapport annuel sur les

progrés des sciences physiques et chimiques.

BERZELIUS’ JAHRESBERICHT.

See Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte der physischen Wissen-

schaften. ‘

BIBLIOTECA DI FARMACTA.

See Giornale di farmacia - - - Cattaneo.

46. BIBLIOTHEK DER NEUESTEN PHYSISCH-CHEMISCHEN, ME-

'TALLURGISCHEN, technologischen und pharmaceutischen

Literatur. Herausgegeben von S. F. Hermbstiidt. 4 vols.,

Svo. Berlin, 1788~’95.

Continued under the title :

{a.] Annalen der chemischen Literatur. Herausgegeben

von Wolf. 1 vol., 8vo. Berlin, 1802.

174 — Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

BIEDERMANN, R.

See Centralblatt fiir Agriculturchemie; also, Chemiker-Kalender;

also, Technisch-chemisches Jahrbuch.

47. Boston JoURNAL OF CHEMISTRY. Devoted to chemistry,

as applied to medicine, agriculture, and the arts. [rom

vol. v, devoted to the science of home life, the arts, agri-

culture, and medicine.| Edited by Jos. R. Nichols. 14

vols., 4to. Boston, (July) ae

Continued under the title:

[a.] Boston Journal of Chemistry and Popular Science Re-

view. Devoted to chemistry, pharmacy, geology,

agriculture, astronomy, hygiene, medicine, practical

arts, home science, fetc.}. 2 vols. (Xv, xvi), 4to.

Boston, 1881, ’82.

Continued under the title :

[b.] Popular Science News and Boston Journal of Chemis-

try. A journal of useful knowledge for all classes—

house-keepers, farmers, mechanics, physicians, drug-

gists, dentists, chemists, lawyers, etc. 2 vols., 4to.

Boston, 1883, ’84-+-

BRANDES, RUDOLPH.

See Annalen der Pharmacie.

BREWSTER’S JOURNAL OF SCIENCE.

See Edinburgh Journal of Science, and ¢f. Philooenied Mag-

azine.

BRUGNATELLI, L.

See Annali di chimica ; also, Giornale di fisica, chimica e storia

naturale.

BucHouz, Cu. FR.

See Almanach fir Scheidekiinstler [a]; also, Beitrige zur Er-

weiterung - - - der Chemie ; also, Taschenbuch fir Scheide-

kinstler.

BucHNER’S REPERTORIUM.

See Repertorium fiir die Pharmacie.

BULLETIN DE LA SOCIETE CHIMIQUE DE PARIs.

See Répertoire de chimie pure et appliquée [q@].

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 175

48. BULLETIN DE PHARMACIE [ from vol. vi] et des sciences

accessoires. Rédigé par Parmentier, C. L. Cadet, Ju. A.

Planche, C. F. G. Boullay, J. P. Boudet et P. R. Des-

touches. 6 vols., 8vo. Paris, 1809-14.

Continued under the title :

[a.] Journal de pharmacie et des sciences accessoires. Reé-

digé par C. L. Cadet, I.. A. Planche, P. F. G. Boul-

lay, J. P. Boudet, J. J. Virey, J. Pelletier et A.

Vogel. Deuxiéme série. 27 vols. (I-xxvlJ), 8vo.

Paris, iSlo— 4.1.

Continued under the title :

[b.] Journal de pharmacie et de chimie contenant une re-

vue de tous les travaux publiés en France et a l’etran-

ger sur les sciences physiques, naturelles, médicales

et industrielles, ainsi que le bulletin des travaux de la

Societé de pharmacie de Paris. Troisiéme série. 46

vols. (I-XLVI), 8vo. Paris, 1842-64.

Continued under the title :

[c.] Journal de pharmacie et de chimie, par Boullay, Bussy,

Sonbeiran, Henry, F. Bondet, Cap, Boutron-Char-

lard, Frémy, Guibourd, Barreswil, Buignet, Gobley

et Léon Soubeiran, contenant une revue médicale par

Le Vigla et une revue des travaux chimiques publiés

a Vétranger par J. Nicklés. Correspondants: Du-

rand, Girardin, Morin, Sobrero, C. Calvert, J. Liebig,

Taddei, Vogel, Redwood, Malaguti, Persoz, de Vrij,

Christison. Quatriéme série. 30 vols. (I-XXX). 1865

79.

[d.] Cinquiéme série. 10 vols (I-x). Paris, 1880-’84-+-

Table analytique des auteurs cités et des matiéres contenus

dans les tomes I-xvi (1809-30) du bulletin de phar-

-macie et des sciences accessoires. 8vo. Paris, 1831.

‘Table analytique des auteurs cites et des matiéres contenus

dans les tomes XVII-XXVII (1831-41) du journal de

pharmacie et des sciences accessoires. 8vo. Paris,

1842.

176 Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

49. BULLETIN DES SCIENCES MATHEMATIQUES, ASTRONOMIQUES,

PHYSIQUES ET CHIMIQUES. Reédigé par Saigey. Pre-

miére section du bulletin universel des sciences et de lV’in-

dustrie, publie sous la direction du Baron de Férussace.

16 vols., 8vo. Paris, 182431. | |

Y °

50. Casopis cHEmMIKU CxskYcu. Redaktor: Karel Otakar |

Gech. Roy. 8vo. v Praze, 1869.

Continued under the title:

[a.] Casopis chemiku éeskych. Spolu organ spolku cukro-—

varniki vychodnich Cech. Redaktor: Karel Otakar

Cech. Hlavni spolupracovnik : Frant. Stolba. Roy.

SVvO:. ¥ Praze. £7 Oe 7

Continued under the title :

[b.] Zpravy spolku chemiku Geskych. Rediguje V. Safa¥ik,

2 VOls.g OVO. Yoeraze, 1872—76:

CATTANEO, ANTONIO.

See Giornale di farmacia, chimica e scienze accessorie.

CrecH, KAREL OTAKAR.

See Casopis chemiku ceskych.

51. CENTRALBLATT FUR AGRICULTUR-CHEMIE UND RATIO-

NELLEN WIRTHSCHAFTSBETRIEB. Referirendes Organ

fiir naturwissenschaftliche Forschungen in ihrer Anwen-

dung auf die Landwirthschaft. Herausgegeben von Rh.

Biedermann. [Hdited in 1875 by W. Detmer ; in 1876-

"79 by R. Biedermann, unter Mitwirkung von Mor.

Fleischer und Bernh. Tollens.| 18 vols., 8vo. Leipzig,

1872-80.

Continued under the title :

[a.] Biedermann’s Centralblatt fir Agrikulturchemie und

rationellen Landwirthschafts-Betrieb. Referirendes

' Organ fur naturwissenschaftliche Forschungen in

ihrer Anwendung auf die Landwirthschaft. Fort-

gesetzt unter der Redaction von M. Fleischer und

unter Mitwirkung von W. Borgmann, O. Kellnei,

A. Konig, [and others]. 4 vols., 8vo. Leipzig,

1881-’84-++

-~2

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. Vy

CHANDLER, C. F.

See American Chemist.

o2. CHEMICAL (THE) GAZETTE ; or, Journal of Practical Cheni-

“istry in all its applications to Pharmacy, Arts, and Manu-

fuctures. Conducted by William Francis and Henry

Croft. 17 vols., 8vo. London, 1843~’59.

Followed by ;

[a.] Chemical (The) News [ from vol. 111, and Journal of

Physical Science], with which is incorporated the

“Chemical Gazette.”” A journal of practical chemis-

try, in all its applications to pharmacy, arts, and

manufactures. Edited by William Crookes. 50 vols.,

sm. 4to. London, 1860-*84+

53. CHEMICAL News (THE) AND JoURNAL OF PHYSICAL

Science, with which is incorporated the ‘‘ Chemical Ga-

zette.” A journal of practical chemistry in all its appli-

cations to pharmacy, arts, and manufactures. Edited by

William Crookes. Authorized American reprint. 6 vols.,

Ato. New York, 1867-70. |

Followed by the American Chemist, q. v.

CHEMICAL RECORD,

See Pharmacist and Chemical Record.

54. CuHeEwicaL (THE) REcoRD AND Drue@ PRICE CURRENT.

1 vol., 4to. London, 1851, 752. |

55. CHEMICAL (THE) Review. A monthly journal for man-

ufacturing chemists and druggists, dyers, printers, bleach-

ers, sizers, paper-makers and stainers, leather-dressers,

&e. 14 (?) vols., 4to. London, 1871-84+

56. CuemicaAL Review and Journal for the Spirit, Vinegar,

and Sugar Industry. Published by J. E. Siebel. 1 vol.,

4to. Chicago, 1881.

Continued under the title :

[a. | American Chemical Review and Journal for the Spirit,

Vinegar, and Sugar Industry. Devoted to the inter-

ests of the arts of apphed chemistry. 3 vols., 4to.

Chicago, 1882—"84-++

178 Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

CHEMICAL (THE) TIMES AND JOURNAL OF PHARMACY.

See Pharmaceutical Times.

57. CHEMIKER-KALENDER. Herausgegeben von Rudolph Bie-

dermann. 5 vols., 16mo. Berlin, 1880~’84. —

Accompanied by a second part, entitled :

[a.] Technisch-chemisches Jahrbuch. Heransgegeben yon

Rudolph Biedermann. 5 vols., 16mo. Berlin,

1880-84.

CHEMIKER-ZEITUNG.

See Allgemeine Chemiker-Zeitung.

58. CHEMISCHE (DER) ACKERSMANN, Naturkundlches Zeit-

blatt fir deutsche Landwirthe, herausgegeben von J.

Adolph Stéckhardt. 21 vols., 8vo. Leipzig, 1855-75. ||

59. CHEMISCHE ANNALEN FUR DIE FREUNDE DER NATUR-

LEHRE, Arzneigelahrtheit, Haushaltungskunst und Man-

ufacturen von Lorenz Crell. 40 vols. (2 vols. per annutm,

not numbered), 8vo. Helmstadt und Leipzig, 1784-1803.

Accompanied by :

Beitrige zu den chemischen Annalen von Lorenz Crell.

6 vols., 8vo. Leipzig und Dessau, 1785-99. Vol. 1.

1785, ’86; 11, 1787; a, L7885 Lv, 17895 veo

1709: .

Vol. tv also under the title: Beitrage zur Erweiterung

der Chemie.

Cf..Chemisches Archiv ; also Chemisches Journal.

60. . CHEMISCHE (Di£) INDUsTRIE. Monatsschrift, herausgege-

ben vom Verein zur Wahrung der Interessen der chemi-

schen Industrie Deutschlands. Redacteur: Emil Jacob-

sen. 7 vols., 4to. Berlin, 1878—’84+

61. CHEMISCHE EN PHIJSISCHE OEFENINGEN VOOR DE BEMIN-

NAARS DER SCHEI- EN NATUURKUNDE. Door P. J. Kas-

telyn, vervolgt door Bondt en J. R. Deiman. 3 vols. Am-

sterdam en Leyden, 1788.

Foliowed by ;

[a.] Nieuwe chemische en phijsische oefeningen. 1 part,.

Ove. rT,

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 179

62. CueEMiIscHEs ARCHIV. Herausgegeben von L. F. F. von

Crell. 2 vols., 8vo. Leipzig, 1783.

Continued under the title :

[a.] Neues chemisches Archiv. Herausgegeben von L. F.

F. von Crell. 8 vols., 8vo. Leipzig, 1784-91.

Followed by :

[b.] Neuestes chemisches Archiv. Herausgegeben von L.

F. F. von Crell. 1 vol., 8vo. Weimar, 1798. ||

Cf. Chemische Annalen ; also Chemisches Journal.

CHEMISCHES CENTRALBLATT.

See Pharmaceutisches Centralblatt.

63. CHEMISCHES JOURNAL FUR DIE FREUNDE DER NATUR-

LEHRE, Arzneygelahrtheit, Haushaltungskunst und Ma-.

nufakturen. Entworfen von Lorenz Crell. 6 vols., 12mo.

Lemgo, 1778-81.

Continued under the title :

[a.] Entdeckungen (Die neuesten) in der Chemie. Gesam-

melt von Lorenz Crell. 13 vols., 8vo. Leipzig,

1781-86. ||

Cf. Chemische Annalen fiir die Freunde der Naturlehre ;

also Chemisches Archiv.

64. CHEMISCH-PHARMACEUTISCH ARCHIEF; uitgegeven door J.

K. de Vrij, B. Eickma en A. F. van der Vliet. 2 vols.

Schoonhoven, 1840, 741.

CHEMISCH-PHARMACEUTISCHES CENTRALBLATT.

See Pharmaceutisches Centralblatt.

65. CHEMISCH-TECHNISCHEN MITTHEILUNGEN (DIE) DER

NEUESTEN ZEIT; ihrem wesentlichen Inhalte nach alpha-

betisch zusammengestellt. Herausgegeben von L. Elsner

(later, fortgefihrt von F. Elsner]. 1846-83. 33 vols.,

8vo. Berlin, 1849-84+

Sach-Register zu den ersten acht Heften der chemisch-

technischen Mittheilungen der neuesten Zeit ihrem wesent-

lichen Inhalte nach alphabetisch zusammengestellt von

L. Elsner. Die Jahre 1846-59 enthaltend. 8vo. Ber-

lin, 1860.

180

66.

67.

69.

Catalogue of Chemical Pervodicals. |

Sach-Register zu den bisher erschienen zwanzig Heften,

fete.]. Die Jahre 1846~’71 enthaltend. S8vo. Berlin,

1873. | (a

CHEMISCH-TECHNISCHES REPERTORIUM. Uebersichtlich

geordnete Mittheilungen der neuesten Erfindungen, Fort-

schritte und Verbesserungen auf dem Gebiete der tech-

nischen und industriellen Chemie mit Hinweis auf Mas-

chinen, Apparate und Literatur. Herausgegeben von

Emil Jacobsen. 1862-82. 21 vols., 8vo. Berlin, 1863-84.

General-Register zu Jahrg. XI-xvil [1872-—78). 1 vol.,

8vo. Berlin, 1879..

CHEMIST (THE). [Edited by Mongredieu ?] 2 vols., 8vo.

London, 1824, ’25.|| _

CueEmist (THE) ; or, Reporter of Chemical Discoveries and

Improvements and Protector of the Rights of the Chemist

and Chemical Manufacturer. Edited by Charles Watt and

‘ John Watt. 6 vols., 8vo. London, 1840—"45.

Continued under So litle :

[a.] Chemist (‘l'he) ; or, Reporter of Diseateae and Im-

provements in ieee Manufacturing, and Agri-

cultural Chemistry. Edited by John Higgs Newton.

1 vol. (vit), 8vo. London, 1846—48.

Continued under the title :

[b.] Chemist (The). A monthly journal of chemical phi-

losophy and of chemistry, applied to the arts, mannu-

factures, agriculture, and medicine, and record of

pharmacy. Edited by John and Charles Watt. New

series. 4 vols., 8vo. London, 1849-753.

Continued under the title ;

[c.] Chemist (The). A monthly journal of chemical and

physical science. Edited by John and Charles Watt.

New series. 5 vols., 8vo. London, 1854-58. ||

CueEMIST (THE) AND Druceisr. A monthly trade circular.

12 yols., 8vo. London, 1859-71.

Continued under the same title ;

ja.] 13 vols. (x11I-xxyv), 4to. London, 1872~84-+

—waT Fr.

70.

71.

a2.

73.

7A.

75.

76.

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 181

CHEMISTS’ AND Druagists’ Apvocate. London, 1873-’80.

Cuemist (THE) AND METEOROLOGICAL JOURNAL. July

8th to Dec. 9th, 1826. John R. Cotting, Editor. Am-

herst, Mass. 8vo. 2. d.

CHEMISTS’ (THE) Desk COMPANION for 1865 |—66]. The

Year-Book of Pharmacy. A practical summary of re-

searches in pharmacy, materia medica, and pharmaceuti-

cal chemistry. Edited by Chas. Wood and Chas. Sharp.

2 vols.; Svor-London, 1865, ’66.

(f. Year-Book of Pharmacy.

CueEmMists’ (THE) JouRNAL. 6 vols. London, 1880-’82 +

CHEVALLIER. FEE, GUSBOURT, JULIA FONTENELLE, LAUGIER, OR-

FILA, [etc.] See Journal de chimie médicale.

CHEVREUL, E.

See Annales de chimic et de physique.

CHTAPPERO, F.

See Giornale di farmacia, chimica [ete, ].

CHICAGO COLLEGE OF PHARMACY:

See Pharmacist and Chemical Record.

CHIMISTE (LE). Journal de chimie appliqué aux arts a

Vindustrie et a agriculture ; publié par Henri Berge. 5

vols., 8vo. Bruxelles, 1865-69. 7

CHIMISTE (LE). JOURNAL DES DISTILLATEURS. Organe

spécial de la chimie appliquée a la distillation et a la con-

servation des vins et spiritueux. Rédacteur en chef: Si-

mon. 4too” Parisy heag 200:

COLUMBIAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY.

See Memoirs of the

ComPpTEs-RENDUS HEBDOMADAIRES DES SEANCES DE

-LACADEMIE DES SCIENCES, publiés conformément a une

décision del? Académie en date du 13 Juillet, 1835, par MM.

les Seerétaires perpétuels. 98 vols., 4to. Paris, 1835-.

g4.

Supplément aux Comptes-Rendus hebdomadaires des

scances de l’ Académie des Sciences, publiés conformément

77.

78.

79.

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

a une décision de l’Académie en date du 13 Juillet, 1835,

par MM. les Secrétaires perpétuels. 2 vols., 4to. Paris,

1856 and 1861.

Table générale des Comptes-Rendus hebdomadaires des

séances de l’Academie des Sciences, publié par MM. les

Secrétaires perpetuels, etc. ‘Tomes I-xxxI, 3 Aott 1835 ©

a 30 Décembre 1850. 1 vol., 4to. Paris, 1853.

CoOMPTES-RENDUS MENSUELS DES TRAVAUX CHIMIQUES de

Pétranger, ainsi que les laboratoires de Bordeaux et de

Montpellier, redigés, avec la collaboration de A. Laurent,

par Charles Gerhardt. 7 vols., 8vo. Montpellier, 1845-

SOs .

The paper cover also bears the tille: Annuaire de chimie.

CRELL, LORENZ von. See Auswahl aller eigenthtimlichen Abhand-

lungen; also, Auswahl vorziiglicher Abhandlungen; also, Chemische

Annalen fiir die Freunde der Naturlehre; also, Chemisches Archiv;

also, Chemisches Journal.

_CRELL’s CHEMICAL JOURNAL. Giving an account of the

latest discoveries in chemistry, with extracts from various

foreign transactions; translated from the German, with

occasional additions. 3 vols., 8vo. London, 1791-93.

An English edition of Chemische Annalen fir die

Freunde der Naturlehre, gq. v.

CROOKES, Wo.

See Chemical Gazette [b].

DENZER’S GEWERBEBLATT. °

See Technisch-chemisches Gewerbeblatt.

DETMER, W.

See Jahresbericht der Agriculturchemie.

DEUTSCHER CHEMIKER-KALENDER. Jahrbuch und Notiz-

buch fir den theoretischen und praktischen Chemiker,

Fabrikanten, Bierbrauer, Branntweinbrenner, Zuckerfab-

rikanten. Herausgegeben von Paul Bennewitz. [| Later,

von H. von Gehren.] 3 vols., 16mo. Dresden, 1875-77. ||

DEUTSCHE CHEMISCHE GESELLSCHAFT.

See Berichte der ——.

DEUTSCHES JAHRBUCH FUR DIE PHARMACIE.

See Berlinisches Jahrbuch der Pharmacie.

Catalogue of Chemical Pertodicals. 183

, ~

89. Eprnpureu (THE) JOURNAL OF ScreNcE. Exhibiting a

view of the progress of discovery in natural philosophy,

chemistry, mineralogy, geology, botany, zodlogy, compar-

ative anatomy, practical mechanics, geography, naviga-

tion, statistics, antiquities, and the fine and useful arts.

Conducted by David Brewster; with the assistance of

John MacCulloch for geology, chemistry, etc. ; W. Jack-

son Hooker for botany ; John Fleming for natural history;

Will. Haidinger for mineralogy ; Robt. Knox for zodlogy

and comparative anatomy ; Sam. Hibbert for antiquities

and geology. 10 vols., 8vo. Edinburgh, 1824~’29.

Second series. 6 vols.. 8vo. Edinburgh, 1829-2.

United in 1832 with the ‘* Philosophical Magazine, or Annals.”

[etc.], forming the ** London and Edinburgh Philosophical Mag-

azine.” See Philosophical Magazine.

ELsner, L. (AND F.).

See Chemisch-technischen Mittheilungen.

ELWEkrt, J. C.

See Magazin ftir Apotheker, Chemisten, [etc. ].

ENTDECKUNGEN (DIE NEUESTEN) IN DER CHEMIE.

See Chemisches Journal.

ERDMANN, OrrTo L.

See Allgemeines Journal der Chemie [d].

ERDMANN’S JOURNAL.

See Journal fiir technische und 6konomische Chemie. :

ERLENMEYER, E.

See Kritische Zeitschrift fiir Chemie.

Frrussac, BARON DE.

See Bulletin des sciences mathématiques - - - et chimiques.

81. FortscHRITTE (DIE) AUF DEM GEBIETE DER TECHNISCHEN

CHEMIE. 1874—76. l1no., 8vo. Leipzig, 1877.

Reprinted from Vierteljahres-Revue der Naturwissenschaften.

82. ForTscHRITTE (DIF) AUF DEM GEBIETE DER THEORETI-

SCHEN CHEMIE. 1no., 8vo. Leipzig, 1874.

Reprinted from Vierteljahres-Revue der Naturwissenschaften.

83. ForTSCHRITTE (DIE) DER CHEMIE. — nos., 8vo. KoOln,

1879, *80.

Reprinted from Vierteljalires-Revue der Naturwissenschaften.

184

84.

85.

86.

87.

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals, Es !

Francis (WM.) AND CrorTt (HENRY).

See Chemical Gazette.

FRESENIUS’ ZEITSCHRIFT.

See Zeitschrift fiir analytische Chemie.

GAJANI, MARIANO.

See Giornale di farmacia, chimica. [ete. ].

GAUGER, C.

See Repertorium fiir Pharmacie und praktisehe Chemie.

Gay-Lussac ET ARAGO.

See Annales de chimie.

GAZZETTA CHIMICA ITALIANA. Ed. da M. Paterno. 14

vols., roy. 8vo. “Palermo, 1871—84+

GAZZETTA ECLETTICA DI CHIMICA TECNOLOGICA. Red.:

Sembenini. — vols., 8vo. Verona, 1833, 34.

GAZZETTA ECLETTICA DI FARMACIA E CHIMICA MEDICA.

Red.: Sembenini. — vols., 8vo. Verona, 1831-’34.

United with Gazzetta eclettica di chimica tecnologica and con-

tinued under the title:

[a.] Gazzetta eclettica di chimica farmaceutica medica tec-

nologica e di rispettiva letteratura e commentario

della conversazione chimico-farmaceutica. Red.:

Sembenini. — vols., 8vo. Verona, 1835—37.

Serie terza. — vols.. 1838, 39 [+?]

Cf. Annuario delle scienze chimiche, farmaceutiche e medico-

legali.

GAZZETTA DI FARMACIA E DI CHIMICA che da prima pub-

blicavasi in Este. 8vo. Venezia, 1855-57.

GEHLEN, A. F.

See Allgemeines Journal der Chemie [a] ; also, Repertorium fir

die Pharmacie.

GEIGER, PH. LORENZ.

See Annalen der Pharmacie.

GEIGER’S MAGAZIN. .

See Nordische Blatter fiir Chemie [5].

GILBERT'S ANNALEN.

See Journal der Physik. Gren.

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 185.

88. GIORNALE FISICO-CHIMIVO. ITALIANO, ossia raccolta di

scritti risguardanti Ja fisica e la chimica deg! italiani Ui

Francesco Zantedeschi. 8vo. Venezia, 1846-48 [-’51 (?) |

89. GIORNALE DI CHIMICA E VETERINARIA. Di Pozzi. 8vo.

Milano, 18** (?)

90. GIORNALE DI FARMACIA, CHIMICA E MATERIA’ MEDICA

APPLICATA ANCUE ALLA VETERINARIA. Diretto dal

Mariano Gajani. 4to. Ancona, 1861, ’62.

91. GIORNALE DI FARMACIA, CHIMICA E DI SCIENZE AFFINI.

Diretto da F. Chiappero ; pubblicato della societa di far-

macia di Torino. 29:vols., 12mo. Torino, 1¢52-~’80-+

$2. GIORNALE DI FARMACIA, CHIMICA E SCIENZE ACCESSORIE ;

ossia raccolta delle scoperte, ritrovatie migloramenti fatti

in farmacia ed in chimica.. Compilato. da Antonio Cat-

taneo. 19 vols., 8vo. Milano, 1824-34.

Continued under the title :

[a.] Biblioteca di farmacia, chimica, fisica, medicina, chi-

rurgia, terapeutica,. storia naturale, [etc.]; compilato

da Antonio Cattaneo. 23 vols. (I-xx11I), 8vo. Mi-

lano, 1838445.

Continued under the title: -

[b.] Annali di chimica applicata alla medicina civé, alla

farmicia, alla tossicologia, all’ igiene, alla fisiologia,

alla patologia ed alla terapeutica, compilati da Gio-

vanni Polli. 71 vols. (I-LXxX1), 8vo. Milano, 1845-

"80-4

93. GIORNALE DI FISICA, CHIMICA ED’ ARTI. Dal Majocchi.

8vo. Milano, 1839.

94. GIORNALE DI FISICA, CHIMIGA E STORIA NATURALE, ossia

raccolta di memorie sulle scienze, arti e manufatture ad

esse relative. Di I... Brugnatelli.. 10 vols., 4to. Pavia,

1808-17.

Continued under the title:

186 Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. —

[a.] Giornale di fisica, chimica, storia naturale, medicina ed

; arti dai Brugnatelli, Brunacci e Configlachi, compi-

lato dal Gaspare Brugnatelli. Wecade seconda. 10

vols.(I-X), 4to. Pavia, 1818-27. || Ro:

G6OTTLING. J. F. A.

See Almanach fiir Scheidekiinstler. — -

GREN, F. A. C.

See Journal der Physik.

GRETSCHEL, H.

See Jahrbuch der Erfindungen.

HELLER, J. LF.

See Beitrige zur physiologischen und pathologischen Chemie.

HERMBSTADT, Sic. F. ?

See Archiv der Agriculturchemie ; also Bibliothek der neuesten

physisch-chemischen - - - Literatur.

Hirzeu, H. ahs

See Jahrbuch der Erfindungen.

HoFMANN (A. W.), AND DE La RUE.

See Annual Report of the Progress of Chemistry.

HoFFMANN’S JAHRESBERICHT.

See Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte der Agriculturchemie.

Hopre-SEYLER.

See Zeitschrift fiir physiologische Chemie.

HoRKEL, JOH.

See Archiv fir die thierische Chemie.

95. INTRODUCTION AUX OBSERVATIONS SUR LA PHYSIQUE, SUR

L7NISTOIRE NATURELLE ET SUR LES ARTS. Par Vabbé

Rozier. (18 vols., 12mo. Paris, 1771, 772.

A second edition in 2 vols., 4to, was published in 1777. Vol.

has also the title;

Tableau du travail annuel de toutes les académies de

Europe; ou observations sur la physique, sur Vhistoire

naturelle et sur les arts et métiers. Par Jean Rozier. 1

vol., 4to. Paris, 1777.

Continued under the title:

[a.] Observations et mémoires sur Ja physique, sur histoire

naturelle et sur Jes arts et métiers. Par l’abbé Rozier.

1 yol., 4to. Paris, 1773.

Continued under the title:

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 187

{b.] Observations sur la physique, sur histoire naturelle et

sur les arts. Par Vabbé Rozier [ from 1779] ct J. A.

Mongez [ from 1785] et de la Méthérie. 42 vols.

(II-XL11i), 4to. Paris, 1773-94.

Continued under the title:

[c.] Journal de physique, de chimie, d’histoire naturelle et

des arts. Par Jean Claude Laméthérie [ from 1817]

et HW. M. Ducrotay de Blainville. [From vol. Lxxxv,

by de Blainville alone.| 53 vols. (xLIV—xcvI1), 4to.

Paris, 1794-1822. ||

Supplements. 2 vols., 4to. Paris, 1778, 1782.

Vol. x contains: Table des articles contenus dans

les volumes in 4t0 de ce recueil imprimés depuis le

commencement de 1773 et dans les 18 vols. in 12mo

Imprimés depuis Juillet 1771, jusquw’ a la fin de 1772,

actuellement imprimés en 2 vols. in 4to sous le titre

d’Intreduction aux observations sur la physique, eic.

Vol. xxix, 1786, contains: Table générale des ar-

ticles contenus dans les vingt volumes de ce journal

depuis L778.

Vol. tv, 1802, contains: Table générale des arti-

cles contenus dans les vingt-six derniers volumes du

Journal de physique, depuis 1787 jusqw en 1802,

pour faire suite a celle qui est imprimée 4 la fin du

secund volume de année 1786. Par L. Cotte.

JACOBSEN, EMI1.

ee Chemische Industrie; also Chemisch-lechnisches Reper-

torium.

JAHRBUCH DER CHEMIE UND Puysik ; Schweigger.

See Allgemeines Journal der Chemie.

96. JAHRBUCH DER ERFINDUNGEN UND FORTSCHRITTE AUF

DEN GEBIETEN DER PHYSIK UND CHEMIE, der Tech-

nologie und Mechanik, der Astronomie und Metcorologie.

Werausgegeben von H. Tlirzel und H. Gretschel [later, by

H. Gretschel and G. Wunder.] 20 vols., 8vo. Leipzig,

1865841

188 Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

JAHRBUCH (NEUES) DER PHARMACIE. See Berlinische Jahrbuch

der Pharmacie.

97. JAHRBUCH FUR OKONOMISCHE CHEMIE UND VERWANDTE

FAcHER. Eine Sammlung des Wichtigsten aus der land-

wirthschaftlichen Chemie, den mit derselben verwandten —

landwirthschaftlichen Gewerben und der Hauswirthschaft.

Herausgegeben von Wilibad Artus. 3 vols., 8vo. Leip-

zig, 1847-49.

98. JAHRESBERICHT DER AGRICULTURCHEMIE. Separat-Aus-

gabe des Centralblattes fir Agriculturchemie und ration-

ellen Wirthschaftsbetrieb. Herausgegeben von W. Dei-

mer. 2 vols., 8vo. Berlin, 1875.|l

Cf. Centralblatt fiir Agriculturchemie.

99. JAHRESBERICHT UBER DIE FORTSCHRITTE AUF DEM GE-

BIETE DER REINEN CHEMIE. Bearbeitet im Verein mit

mehreren Fachgenossen und herausgegeben von Wilhelm

Staedel. 187382. 10 vols., roy. 8vo. Tubingen,

1874—84-++

100. JAHRESBERICHT UBER DIE FORTSCHRITTE DER AGRICUL-

TURCHEMIE, mit besonderer Beriicksichtigung der Pflan-

zenchemie und Pflanzenphysiologie. Herausgegeben von

Robert Hoffmann. 1858-64. 6 vols., 8vo, Berlin, -

1860-65.

Continued under the litle :

[a.| Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte auf dem Gesammt-

gebiete der Agriculturchemie. Fortgesetzt von Kd-

ward Peters. [From 186*, edited by Th. Dietrich,

H. Hellriegel, J. Flittbogen, H. Ulbricht.] 14 vols.

(viI-xx), 8vo. Berlin, 1864—77.

Neue Folge. von A. Hilger. 5 vols. (XxI-xxv). Ber-

lin. 1878—83-+

From 1874, annual volumes are divided into portions having in-

dependent pagination and bearing the foilowing titles :

Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte der Chemie des

Bodens, der Luft und des Diingers. Herausgegeben

yon Th. Dietrich.

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 189

Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte der Chemie der

Pflanze. Uerausgegeben von J. Flittbogen.

Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte der Chemie der

Thiernihrung und der chemischen Technologie der

Jandwirthschaithchen Nebengewerbe. Herausgege-

ben von J. Kénig und A. Hilger.

General-Register tiber Jahrg. I-xx [1858-77]. Unter

Mitwirkung von E. von Gerichten, C. Krauch, EK. von

Raumer, W. Réssler und O. H. Will. Herausgege-

ben.von A. Hilger. 1:vol., 8vo. Berlin, 1879.

101. JAHRESBERICHT UBER DIE FORTSCHRITTE DER CHEMI-

SCHEN TECHNOLOGIE fiir Fabrikanten, Hiitten- und Forst-

leute, Cameralisten. Chemiker und Pharmaceuten. Her-

ausgegeben von Joh. Rud. Wagner. 6 vols., 8vo. Leip-

zie 1856-760.

Continued under the title :

[a.|] Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte und Leistungen

der chemischen ‘Technologie und technischen Chemie.

Herausgegeben von J. R. Wagner. 9 vols. (VII-xv),

8vo. Leipzig, 1861-69.

Continued under the title :

[b.] Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte und Leistungen

der chemischen Technologie und technischen Chemie,

(from vol. XV1iI,) mit besonderer Beriicksichtigung

der Gewerbsstatistik. Herausgegeben von J. R. Wag-

ner. Neue Folge. 11 vols. (KVI-xxvI), 8vo. Leip-

zig, 1870-80.

Continued under the title :

[c.] Wagner’s (R. von) Jahresbericht tiber die Leistungen

der chemischen ‘Technologie, mit besonderer Bertick-

sichtigung der Gewerbestatistik fiir das Jahr 1880-’83.

Herausgegeben von F. Fischer. 3 vols., 8vo. Leip-

zig, 1881-’84+-

General-Register ttber Band 1 bis 10, bearbeitet von

Fr. Gottschalk., 1 vol., 8vo. Leipzig, 1866.

General-Register ttber Band 11 bis 20, bearbeitet von

Fr, Gottschalk. 1 vol., 8vo. Leipzig, 1876.

190 Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. —

JAHRESBERICHT UBER DIE FORTSCHRITTE DER CHEMIE DES Bo-

DENS. See Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte der Agricultur-

chemie.

JAHRESBERICHT UBER DIE FORTSCHRITTE DER CHEMIE DER

PFLANZE. See Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte der Azriculter-

chemie.

J AHRESBERICHT UBER DIE FORTSCHRITTE DER CHEMIE DER THIER-

NAHRUNG. See Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte der Agricultur-

chemie.

1¢2. JAHRESBERICHT UBER DIE FORTSCHRITTE DER PHYSISCHEN

WISSENSCHAFTEN. Von Jacob Berzclius. Aus dem

schwedischen tibersetzt von C. G. Gmelin [/afer,] und F.

Wohicr. 20 vols., Svo. Tiibingen, 1822-741.

Continued under the tiile:

[a.] Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte der Chemie und

Mineralogie. Eingereicht an die sch wedische Akade-

mie der Wissenschaften. Von Jacob Berzelius. {rom

1849-51, edited by L. F. Svanberg.] Aus dem schwe-

dischen tbersetzt von F. Woéhliecr. 10 vols. (xxa—

Xxx), 8vo. Tubingen, 1842-51. ||

Cf. Arsberiittelse om Framstegen i Fysik och Kemi ; also An-

nuaire dcs sciences chimiques ; also Rapport annuel sur les

progres des sciences physiques et chimiques.

103. JANRESBERICHT UBER DIE FORTSCHRITTE DER REINEN,

PHARMACEUTISCHEN UND TECHNISCHEN CHEMIE, Phy-

sik, Mineralogie und Geologie. Unter Mitwirkung von

H. Buff, E. Dieffenbach, C. Ettling, Ff. Knapp, HW. Will,

F. Zamminer. Herausgegeben von Justus Liebig und

Hermann Kopp. 1847-56. 9 vols., Svo. Giessen,

1849-57.

Continued under the title :

[a.] Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte der Chemie und

verwandter Theile anderer Wissenschaften. Von

Hermann Kopp und Heinrich Will. (/2 1861, unter

Mitwirkung von Th. Engelbach, W. Hallwachs, A.

Knop, herausgegeben von Hermann Kopp und Hein-

rich Will. Ja 1864, unter Mitwirkung von C. Bohn

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 191

und Th. Engelbach, herausgegeben von Heinrich Will.

Zn 1868, unter Mitwirkung von Th. Engelbach, Al.

Naumann, W. Stiidel, -heransgegeben von Adolph

Strecker. Jz 1870, unter Mitwirkung von K. Birn-

baum, W. Dittmar, F. Hoppe-Seyler, A. Laubenhei-

mer, A. Michaelis, I’. Nies, Th. Zincke, K. Z6ppritz,

herausgegeben von Alexander Naumann. Jn 1875,

unter Mitwirkung von K. Birnbaum, C. Bocttinger,

C. Hell, H. Klinger, A. Laubenheimer, EK. Ludwig, A.

Michaelis, A. Naumann, F. Nies, H. Salkowski, Zd.

H. Skraup, K. Zéppritz, herausgegeben von F. Fit-

tica. Jn 1882, unter Mitwirkung von A. Borntra-

ger, A. Elsas, E. Erdmann, C. Hell, H. Klinger, E.

Ludwig, A. Naumann, F. Nies, H. Salskowski, G.

Schultz, herausgegeben von F. Fittica.] 1857-’82.

26 vols. (K-XxXxXv), 8vo. Giessen, 1858—84-+

Since 1857 also under the title:

Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte der reinen, phar-

maceutischen und technischen Chemie, Physik, Min-

eralogie und Geologie. Bericht tiber die Fortschritte

der Chemie und verwandter Theile anderer Wissen-

schaften.

Accompanied by:

Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte der Physik, von

Friedrich Zamminer. Fiir 1857. 1 vol., 8vo. Gies-

sen, 1858.

Svo. Giessen, 1857.

Svo. Giessen, 1868.

8vo. Giessen, 1880.

104. JAHRESBERICHT UBER DIE FORISCHRITTE DER THIER-

CHEMIE. Herausgegeben von Richard Maly. 1871-83.

13 vols., 8vo. Wien, 1872—84+

105. JOURNAL DE CHIMIE ET DE PHYSIQUE, ou Recueil péri-

odique des découvertes dans les sciences chimiques et phy-

192° Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

siques, tant en France que chez Vétranger. Par J. B.

van Mons. 6 vols., 12mo. Bruxelles, An x [4801]-x11

[1804]. ;

Cf. Journal de chimie pour servir [ete. ].

106. JoURNAL DE CHIMIE MEDICALE, DE PHARMACIE ET DE

TOXICOLOGIE. Reédigé par Chevallier, Fée, Guibourt,

Julia-Fontenelle, Laugier, Orfila, Payen, Gabrielle Pelle-

tan, Lassaigne, Achard Richard, Aaa Segalas d’ Etche-

pare. 10 vols., 8vo, Paris, 1825-3

Continued under the title:

{a.] Journal de chimie médicale, de pharmacie et de toxi-

cologie. Revue des nouvelles scientifiques nationales

et étrangéres. Par les membres de la Société de

chimie médicale. Deuxiéme serie. 10 vols. (1-x),

8vo. Paris, 1835-44

Table générale des matiéres et des auteurs de Ja deux-

iéme séric du Journal de chimie médicale, de phar-

macie et de. toxicologic; de 1835-44. 1 vol., 8vo.

Paris, 1845.

Continued under the title:

[b.] Journal de chimie médicale, de pharmacie, de toxi-

cologie et revue des nouvelles scientifiques nationales

et étrangéres. Par les membres de la Société de

chimie médicale, Béral, Chevallier, Dumas, Fée,

Guibourt, Lassaigne, Orfila, Payen, E. Péligot, G.

Pellctan, Pelouze, A. Richard, S. Robinet. eis

série. 10 vols. (I-x), 8vo. Paris, 1845-754.

Continued under the titie : \

[c.] Journal de chimie médicale, de pharmacie, de toxi-

cologie et revue des nouvelles scientifiques nationales

et étrangéres. Publié sous Ja direction de A. Cheval-

lier. Quatriéme série. 10 vols. (I-xX), 8vo. Paris,

1855-64.

Continued. under the-tille :

[d.] Journal de chimie médicale, de pharmacie, de toxicolo-

gie et revue des nouvelles scientifiques nationales et

étrangéres. Revue industrielle. Publié sous la direc-

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 193

tion de A. Chevallier. Cinquiéme série. 12 vols.

(I-x11), 8vo. Paris, 1865-’76.

United in March, 1876, with the Répertoire de pharmacie and

continued under the title; Répertoire de pharmacie et journal de

chimie médicale réunis, g. v.

107. JOURNAL DE CHIMIE pour servir de complément aux An-

nales de chimie et d’autres ouvrages périodiques frangais

de cette science.- Rédigé par J. B. van Mons. 6 vols.,

8vo. Bruxelles, 1792-1804.

G. Journal de chimie et de physique.

JOURNAL DE LA SOCIETE CHIMIQUE RUSSE.

See Zhurnal russkova khimicheskova (etc. ).

JOURNAL DE PHARMACIE.

See Bulletin de pharmacie.

JOURNAL DE PHYSIQUE, DE CHIMIE - - - - Laméthérie.

See Introduction aux observations sur la physique [e.].

JOURNAL DER CHEMIE.

ee Alleemcines Journal der Chemie.

168. JOURNAL DER PHARMACIE FUR AERZTE UND APOTHEKER.

Ierausgegeben von Joh. B. Trommsdorff. 26 vols., 8vo.

Leipzig. 1793-1816. .

Continued under the title :

[a.] Neues Journal der Pharmacie fiir Aerzte, Apotheker

und Chemiker. Herausgegeben von Joh. B. Tromms-

dorff. 27 vols., 8vo. Leipzig, 1817-34.

United in 1834 with the Annalen der Pharmacie, q. v.

169. JoURNAL DER Puysrtk. Herauseegeben von Fr. Albrecht

Carl Gren. 8 vols., 8vo. Halle und Leipzig, 1790-94.

Continued under the litle :

[a.] Nenes Journal der Physik. Herausgegeben von Fr.

Albrecht Carl Gren. 4 vols. (I-1v), 8vo. Halle und

Leipzig, 1794-98.

Continued under the litle ;

[b.] Annalen der Physik. Angefangen von Fr. Albr. Carl

Gren, fortgesetzt von Ludwig Wilhelm Gilbert.

(From vol. iv, Herausgegeben von Ludwig Wilhelm

194 Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

Gilbert.) 30 vols. (I-xxx), 8vo. Halle, 1799-1808.

Neue Folge. 30 vols. (I-XXX and XXXI-LX), 8vo.

Halle, 1809-18.

‘upplement zu Band x11. 1803.

Continued under the title :

[c.] Annalen der Physik und der physikalischen Chemie.

Herausgegeben von Ludwig Wilhelm Gilbert. Dritte

Reihe. 16 vols. (I-XvI and LXI-LXXVI), 8vo. Halle,

1819-24. |

Vol. LxX1, 1819, is also entitled: Neueste Folge. Band 1.

Continued under the title :

[d.] Annalen der Physik und Chemie. Herausgegeben von

Julius C. Poggendorff. 30 vols. (I-XxxX and LXXVII

-CVI), 8vo. Berlin, 1824-33.

Zweite Reihe. 30 vols. (I-Xxx and CVII-CXXXVI).

1824-43.

Dritte Reihe. - 30 vols. (I-XXX and CXXXVII-CLXV]I).

184453. ,

Vierte Reihe. 30 vols. (I-XxXx and CLXVII-CKXxCV1).

1854~63. |

Finfte Reihe. 30 vols. (I-xxx and CXCVII-CCXXVI).

186473.

Sechste Reihe. 10 vols. (I-X and CCOXXVII-CCXXXVI).

1874-'77.

Continued under the title :

[e.] Annalen der Physik und Chemie. Neue Folge. Unter

Mitwirkung der physikalischen Gesellschaft in Berlin

und insbesondere des Herrn H. Helmholtz. Heraus-

gegeben von G. Wiedemann. 23 vols. (I-XxlI and

CCXXXVII-CCLIX), 8vo. Leipzig, 1877-’84++

Erginzungs-Bande: Bd. 1, 1843; 11, 1848; 111, 1853 ;

Iv, 1854; v, 1871; v1, 1874; Jubelband, 1874.

Indexes: Vols. I-XXx, 1833 ; XxX XI-XLII, 1837 ; XLIII-LI,

1842; LI-LxX, 1844; LXI-LxIx, 1846; LXI-LXXv,

- 1848; LXXVI-LXXXIV, 1851; LxI—xc, 1854.

Namen-Register zu Band 1 bis cL, Erginzungsband I bis

vi nebst Jubelband, und Sach-Register zu Band CXxxI

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. -195

bis cL, Ergiinzungsband v and vi nebst Jubelband,

bearbeitet von W~. Barentin, nebst einem Anhange

von J. CO. Poggendorff enthaltend Verzeichniss der

verstorbenen Auctoren, und Zeitafel zu den Biinden.

8vo. Leipzig, 1875.

From 1877 the Annalen are accompanied by :

[ f:] Beiblatter zu den Annalen der Physik und Chemie.

Herausgegeben unter Mitwirkung befreundeter Phy-

siker von J. CO. Poggendorff. Svyols., 8vo. Leipzig,

1877-844

JOURNAL DER RUSSISCHEN PHYSISCH-CHEMISCHEN GESELLSCHAFT.

See Zhurnal russkova khimicheskova [etc. ].

116. JoURNAL FUR PHYSIK UND PHYSIKALISCHE CHEMIE DES

AUSLANDES. In vollst&éndigen Uebersetzungen, heraus-

gegeben von A. Krénig. 3 vols., 8vo. Berlin, 1851.|

JOURNAL FUR PRAKTISCHE CHEMIE. See Allgemeines Journal der

Chemie.

JOURNAL FUR DIE CHEMIE, PHystIx [etc. ].

See Allgemeines Journal der Chemie [b].

111. JoURNAL FUR TECHNISCHE UND OKONOMISCHE CHEMIE.

Herausgegeben von Otto Linné Erdmann. 18 vols., 8vo.

Leipzig, 1828-33.

Also under the title :

Forschungen (Die neuesten) im Gebiete der technischen

und 6konomischen Chemie.

United in 1834 with ihe Journal fiir Chemie und Physik and con-

tinued under the title: Journal fiir praktische Chemie. See Allge-

meines Journal der Chemie.

112. JouRNAL (THE) OF APPLIED CHEMISTRY. Devoted to

chemistry as applicd to the arts, manufactures, metallurgy,

and agriculture. 10 vols., 4to. New York, Philadelphia,

and Boston, 1866-775. ||

113. Journa (A) of Naturat PuiLosopHy, CHEMISTRY, AND

THE Arts. Illustrated with engravings. By William

Nicholson. 45 vols., 4to. London, 1797-1801.

Second series. 36 vols. (I-xxxv1), 8vo. London, 1802-713.

United in 1814 with the Philosophical Magazine, q. v.

‘196 Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

JOURNAL OF THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY.

fee Proceedings of the American Chemical Society. —

JOURNAL OF THE LONDON CHEMICAL Socrery.

See Proceedings of the Chemical Society of London. -

JOURNAL OF THE RusstAN PHYSICAL AND CHEMICAL SOCIETY.

See Zhurnal russkova khimicheskova [cte. ].

‘U4. Journat (Tur) of tue Soctety or CnemicaL INDUSTRY.

A monthly Record for all interested in chemical manufac-

tures. Edited by Watson Smith. 3 vols., 4to. Lon-

don, 1882—84+

KastE.Lyn, P. J.

See Chemische en phijsische oefeningen.

Mastin en CW jG oy ean.

See Archiv fiir die gesammte Naturlehre.

KEKULE, A. pie Teena te

See Kritische Zeitschrift fir Chemie.

Kuaproth, M. H.

See Beitrige zur chemiischen’Kenntniss der Mineralkorper.

115. KLEINE PHYSIKALISCH CHEMISCHE ABITANDLUNGEN.

Herausgegeben von Joh. If. Westrumb. §& vols., 8vo.

Leipzig, 1785-97.

KLETZINSKY, V.

fee Mitt icilungen aus dem Gebiete der reinen und angewandten

Cheniie.

Koss, H.

See Allgemeines Journal der Chemie [e].

Kopp, H.

See Jahresbericht iber die Fortschritte der reinen - - - Chemie.

116. Kritiscn& ZEITSCHRIFT FUR CHEMIE, PHYsIK UND Ma-

THEMATIK. Herausgegeben in Heidelberg von A. Kekulé,

F. Eisenlohr, G. Lewinstein, M.- Cuntor. Ivol., 8vo.

Erlangen, 1858.

Continued under the litle :

[a.] Kritische Zeitschrift fir Chemie, Physik, Mathematik

und die verwandten Wissenschaften und Disciplinen,

als Pharmacie, Technologie, Agriculturchemie, Phy-

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. “197

sik und Mineralogie. Unter Mitwirkung von Fach-

miinnern, herausgegeben von KE. Erlenmeyer und G.

Lewinstein. 1 vol. (11), 8vo. Erlangen, 1859.

Continued under the title :

[b.] Zeitschrift fir Chemie und Pharmacic. Correspon-

denzblatt. Archiv und kritisehes Journal fiir Chemie,

Pharmacie und die yverwandten Disciplinen. Unter

Mitwirktng von Fachminnern, herausgegeben zu

If[cideiberg von I. Erlenmeyer und G. Lewinstein.

4 vols. (It1-vi1), 8vv. Erlangen (later, He:delberg),

1860-64.

Continued under the title ;

[c.] Zeitschrift fir Chemie. Archiv fiir das Gesammtgebiet

der Wissenschaft. Unter Mitwirkung von F. Beil-

stein und hud. Fittig, herausgegeben von []. ltbner.

Neuve Folge. 7% vols. (vii-xiv), 8vo. Gdéttingen,

1865-71. |

Kronie, <A.

See Journal fiir Physik und physikalische Chemic.

HZ. Lasoratroriem (Das). Eine Sammlung von Abbildungen

und Beschreibungen der besten und neuesten Apparate,

zum Behuf der practischen und physikalischen Chemie.

44 nos., 4to. Weimar, 1825-40

118. Laporatory (THF). A monthly journal of the progress

of chemistry, pharmacy, mnedicine, reereative science, and -

the useful arts. By J. F. Babcock. 2-vols., 4to. Bos-

ton, 187476. |

119. LaBoratory (THE). A weekly record of scientific re-

search. 1 vol., 8vo. London, April to October, 1867. |

LABORATORY (THE).

See American Laboratory.

LARTIGUE, A.

See Répertoire de pharmacie.

LAURENT (A.) ET GERHARDT (CH).

See Comptes-rendus mensuels des travaux chimiques.

Lresic’s ANNALEN.

See Annalen der Pharmacie [e].

198 Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. |

LIEBIG AND Kopp’s JAHRESBERICHT.

See Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte der reinen, pharmaceu-

tischen und technischen Chemie.

Pox

120. Listy CHEMIKE. — vols.’ v Praze, 18**~81-—

Lonpon CHEMICAL SOCIETY.

See Proceedings of - - - .

Loéwie, C.

See Repertorium fiir organische Chemie.

MAANDBLAD VOOR TOEGEPASTE SCHEIKUNDE.

See Toegepaste Scheikunde.

MACKENSIE, COLIN.

See Mémorial pratique de chimie manufacturiére.

121. MaGazin FUR APOTHEKER, CHEMISTEN UND MATERIA-

LISTEN. Herausgegeben von Joh. Casp. Elwert. 3 parts,

8vo. Nurnberg, 1785-87.

Continued under the litle:

[a.] Repertorium ftir Chemie, Pharmacie und Arzneimittel-

kunde. Herausgegeben von Joh. Casp. Elwert. 8vo.

Hildesheim, 1790 [second edition in 1796).

122. MAGAzIN FUR DIE HOHERE NATURWISSENSCHAFT UND

CHEMIE. 2 -vols., 8vo. Tubingen, 178487.

MAGAZIN FUR DIE NEUESTEN ERFAHRUNGEN - - - - DER PHAR-

mMaAciz. See Nordische Blatter fiir Chemie [}].

Magsoccui, G. £

See Annali di fisica, chimica e matematiche ; also Giornale di

fisica, chimica ed arti.

Mary, Ricu

See Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte der Thierchemie.

MARTIN, C8.

See Répertoire de chimie, de physique [etc. ].

MavuGcuam, W.

See Annals of Chemical Philosophy.

123. MECHANIC AND CHEMIST. 8 vols. London, 1836-42.

124. MBLANGES PHYSIQUES ET CHIMIQUES tirés du Bulletin

physico-mathématique de l’Académie Imperiale des sci-

ences de St. Petersbourg. 1846-82. 12 vols., 8vo. St.

Pétersbourg, 1854-8 4+

125.

126.

127.

128.

129.

130.

131].

132.

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 199

MEMORIAL PRATIQUE DE CHIMIE MANUFACTURIERE. Par

Colin Mackensie. 3 vols., 8vo. Paris, 1824.

MEMOIRS OF THE COLUMBIAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY OF

PHILADELPHIA. 2 Yols., 8vo. [Philadelphia], 1813, 714.

METHERIE, DE LA.

See Introduction aux observations sur la physique [etc. ].

MILLON (E.) ET REISET (J.).

See Annuaire de chimie.

MISCELLANEA DI CHIMICA, FISICA E STORIA NATURALE.

8vo. Pisa, 1843.

MITTHEILUNGEN AUS DEM GEBIETE DER REINEN UND

ANGEWANDTEN CHEMIE. Fir Fachchemiker, Aerzte,

Oeconomen, ete. Als Jahresbericht des Laboratoriums

fur 18**. Verdffentlicht von V. Kletzinsky. 4to. Wien,

PS65. 6:

MITTHEILUNGEN AUS DEM LABORATORIUM DER ALLGE-

MEINEN CHEMIE an der Kais. Kon. technischen Hoch-

schule zu Brinn. 3 nos., 8vo. Wien, 1876.

Reprinted from Sitzungsberichte der K. Akademie der Wissen-

schaften.

MONATSHEFTE FUR CHEMIE UND VERWANDTE THEILE AN-

DERER WISSENSCHAFTEN. Gesammelte Abhandlungen

aus dem Sitzungsberichte der K. Akademie der Wissen-

schaften. 5 vols., 8vo. Wien, 1880—84-+

MONITEUR SCIENTIFIQUE DU CHIMISTE [etc.]. See Revue scienti-

fique et industrielle.

MONITEUR (LE) DES PRODUITS CHIMIQUES, pour lVindus-

trie, les sciences et les arts, et du matériel de ces indus-

tries. Publié par une Sccieté de chimistes et d’industriels.

Edmond Rousset, gérant. 14 (?) vols., 4to. Paris,

187184

MontTHLy (THE) MAGAZINE OF PHARMACY, CHEMISTRY,

MEDICINE (ete.|. 5 (?) vols. London, 1876-’80-+-

200

Catalogue of Chemical . Periodicals.

Mons, J. B. VAN. :

See Journal de chimie et de physique ; also Journal de chimie

pour servir [ete. ]. Senn,

MuLDER, G, J.

See Scheikundige onderzoekingen.

Murer, J.

See Analyst (The).

133. NATURHISTORISCHE UND CHEMISCH-TECHNISCHE NOTIZEN,

nach den neuesten Erfahrungen zur Nutzanwendung fir

Gewerbe, Fabrikwesen und Landwirthschaft. 11 vols.,

8vo. Berlin, 1854-59. |

Neue Folge. 4 vols. (XII-XV), 8vo. Berlin, 1860-62. ||

NicHoLson’s JOURNAL. |

See Journal of Natural Philosophy.

Nionots, Jos. R.

See Boston Journal of Chemistry.

134. Norpiscur BiATrER FUR CHEMIE. IIcrausgegeben von

Alex. Nie. Scherer. 1 vol., 8vo. Tlalle, 181%.

Foliowed by ;

[a.] Allgemeine nordische Annalen der Chemie fir die

Freunde der Naturkunde und Arzuciwissenschatt

insbesondere dcr Pharmacie, Arzneimittellehre, Phy- |

siologie, Physik, Mineralogie und ‘Technologie im

russischen Reiche. Herausgegeben von Alex. Nic.

Scherer. 7% vols. (1I-vill), 8vo. St. Petersburg,

1819-22.

Followed by:

[b.] Magazin fiir die nenesten Erfahrungen, Entdeckungen

und Berichtungen im Gebiete. der Pharmacie, mit

Hinsicht auf physiologische Prifung und practisch

pewahrte Anwendbarkeit der Meilmittel, vorziiglich

nenentdeckter Arzneistoffe in der Therapie. Her-

ausgegeben von G. F. Llinle [ from 1829, by P. I.

Geiger]. 36 vols., 8vo. Carlsruhe, 1823-31. |

From 1§29-31 also under the title: Magazin fiir Pharmacie

und Experimental-Kritik. United in 1822 with Archiv des

‘Apotheker-Vereins im nordlichen Teutschland, forming the An-

nalen der Pharmacie, q. ”. .

—_

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 201

OBSERVATIONS ET MEMOIRES SUR LA PHYSIQUE [ete. ].

See Introduction aux observations sur la physique.

OpwyrpbDa, R. J.

See Toegepaste Scheikunde.

135. Orost (L’). Bollettino di chimica, farmacia e scienze

_affini. Pubblicato per cura dell’ associazione chimico-far-

maceutica fiorentina. 3 vols., 8vo. Firenze, 1878—’81-+-

Paris, SOCIETE CHIMIQUE DE.

See Répertoire de chimie pure et appliquée.

PATERNO, M.

See Gazzetta chimica italiana.

136. PEnNy MECHANIC AND CHEMIST. 8 vols. London,

1836-’42.

137. PHARMACEUTICAL (THE) Times. A journal of chemistry

applied to the arts, agriculture, and manufactures. 3

vols., 4to. London, 1847, *48.

Continued under the title:

[a.] Chemical (The) Times and Journal of Pharmacy, Man-

ufactures [etc.]. [Hdited by G. M. Mowbray.] 2 vols.,

4to. London, 1848, *49.

138. PHARMACEUTISCHES CENTRALBLATTY. [ Hdited from 1830-

38 anonymously ; from 1840-44, by A. Weinlig; 1845-

°47, by R. Buchheim; 1848, ’49, by W. Knop.] 20 vols.,

8vo. Leipzig, 1830-'49.

Continued under the title :

[a.] Chemisch-pharmaceutisches Centralblatt. Redacteur:

W. Knop. 5 vols. (xxI-xxv), 8vo. Leipzig, 1850-55.

Continued under the title :

[b.] Chemisches Centralblatt. Repertorium fir reine, phar-

maceutische, physiologische und technische Chemie.

Redaction: W. Knop. [from 1862, Red.: Rud.

Arenat.] Neue Folge. 14 vols. (XXVI-XXXIXx), 8vo.

Leipzig, 1856-’69.

Dritte Folge. Redigirt von Rudolph Arendt. 15

vols. (XL-LIV), 8vo. Leipzig, 1870-'84-++

General-Register zum chemischen Centralblatt, 111

Folge, Jahrgang I-x11. 1870-’81. Redigirt von

Rud. Arendt. 1 vol., 8vo. Leipzig, 1882, ’83.

2()2

139.

140.

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

PHARMACIST (THE) AND CHEMICAL REcorp. A monthly

journal devoted to pharmacy, chemistry, and the collater-

al sciences. Published by the Chicago College of Phar-

macy. Editor, N. Gray Bartlett; associate editor, Albert

E. Ebert. [From vol. 111, edited by E. H. Sargent.] 5.

vols., 8vo. Chicago, 1868-72.

Continued under the title : ;

[a.] Pharmacist (The). 6 vols. (vI-1x). Chicago, 1873-78.

Continued under the title :

[b.] Pharmacist (The) and Chemist. [Published by the

Chicago College of Pharmacy. (Conducted by Ro-

bert H. Cowdrey.} 6 vols. (x11-xvi1). Chicago,

1879~84+ |

_ PHILADELPHIA.

See Memoirs of the Columbian Chemical Society.

PHILOSOPHICAL (THE) MaGazINE. Comprehending the

various branches of science, the liberal and fine arts, agri-

culture, manufactures, and commerce. By Alexander

Tilloch. 42 vols., 8vo. London, 1798-1813.

United in 1814 with the Journal of Natural Philosophy, by William

Nicholson, and continued under the title:

[a.} Philosophical (Che) Magazine and Journal. Compre-

hending the various branches of science, the liberal

and the fine arts, geology, agriculture, manufactures,

and commerce. By Alexauder Tilloch [from 1824,

by Alexander Tilloch and Richard Taylor). 26 vols.

(XLIII-LXVIII), 8vo. London, 1814—26.

United in 1827 with the Annals of Philosophy, or Magazine of

Chemistry. by Richard Phillips, and continued under the title ;

(b.] Philosophical (The) Magazine; or, Annals of Chemis-

try, Mathematics, Astronomy, Natural History, and

General Science. New and united series of the Phi-

losophical Magazine and Annals of Philosophy. By

Richard Taylor and Richard Phillips. 11 vols. (I—x1),

8vo. London, 1827-82.

United in 1832 with the. Edinburzh Journal of Science, by

David Brewster, and continued under the title;

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 203

[e.} London and Edinburgh Philosophical Magazine and

Journal of Science. Conducted by David Brewster,

tichard Taylor, and Richard Phillips. New and

united series of the Philosophical Magazine and Jour-

nal of Science. 37 vols. (I-Xxxxvi1), 8vo. London.

1832-50.

Continued under the tiie:

[d.] London, Edinburgh, and Dublin Philosophical Maga-

zine and Journal of Science. Conducted by David

Brewster, Richard Taylor, Richard Phillips, Robert

Kane, and William Francis. Fourth series. 50 vols.

(I-L), 8vo. London, 1851-75.

Fifth series. Edited by R. Kane, W. ‘'homson, and

W. Francis. 18 vols. (I-xvil1), 8vo. London,

187684

141. Prria (It). Giornate di scienze chimiche. Napoli, 1875.

POGGENDORFF’S ANNALEN.

See Journal der Physik.

POLLI, GIOVANNI.

See Giornale di farmacia, chimica e scienze accessorie.

PoPULAR SCIENCE NEWS.

See Boston Journal of Chemistry.

Post, JULIUS.

See Zeitschrift fiir das chemische Grossgewerbe.

142. PROCEEDINGS OF THE AMERICAN CHEMICAL SOCIETY.

1876-78. 1 vol., 8vo. New York, 1877.

Continued under the title:

[a.] Journal of the American Chemical Society. 6 vols.,

8vo. New York, 1879-’84+

143. ‘PROCEEDINGS OF THE CHEMICAL SociETY OF LONDON.

1841—48. lvol., 8vo. London, 1843.

[a.] Memoirs and Proceedings of the Chemical Socicty of

London. 1841-48. 3 vols., 8vo. London, 1843-48.

[b.] Quarterly Journal of the Chemical Society of London.

14 vols. (I-XIv), 8vo. London, 1819-62.

Continued under the tille:

204 Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

Journal of the Chemical Society of London. 1 vol. (xv),

Svo. London, 1862. ir eee

Second series. 14 vols. (I-x1v). London, 1863-"76.

Third series. 2 vols. (1-11). London, 1876.

Fourth series. 16 vols. (I-xv1). London, 1877-’84.

PuBLic ANALYSTS, SOCIETY OF.

See Analyst (The).

QUESNEVILLE, DR.

See Revue scientifique et industrielle. ©

144. RACCOLTA FISICO-CHIMICA ITALIANA. Ossia collezione di

memorie originali edite ed inedite di fisici, chimici e natu-

ralisti italiani dell’ Ab. Francesco Zantedeschi. 3 vols.,

roy. 8vo. Venezia, 1846-—’48. :

Followed by :

Annali di fisica, dell’ Abbate F. C. Zantedeschi. 1 vol.,

’ roy. 8vo. Padova, 1849, 50.

145. RAppoRT ANNUEL SUR LES PROGRES DES SCIENCES PHY-

SIQUES ET CHIMIQUES présenté - - - 4a lacadémie

royale des sciences de Stockholm par J. Berzelius. Tra-

duit du Suédois par Ph. Plantamour. 4 vols., 8vo. Paris,

1841-44.

Continued under the title:

[a.] Rapport annuel sur les progrés de la chimie, présenté

- - - &Vacadémie royale des sciences de Stockholm

par J. Berzelius. Traduit du Suédois par Ph. Plan-

tamour. 2 vols., 8vo. Paris, 1845, ’46.

Cf. Annuaire des sciences chimiques ; also Arsberiittelse om Fram-—

stegen i Physik och Chemi ; also Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte

der physischen Wissenschaften.

146. RECHERCHES PHYSICO-CHIMIQUES. 3 nos., 4to. Amster-

dam, 179294. |

147. RECUEIL DES TRAVAUX CHIMIQUES DES Pays-Bas, Par

W. A. van Dorp, A. P. N. Franchimont, 8. Hooge-Werff,

E. Mulder et A. C. Oudemans, Jr. 3 vols., Roy. 8yo.

Leide, 1882-—’84+-

REMSEN, IRA.

See American Chemical Journal.

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 205

148. REPERTOIRE DE CHIMIE, DE PHYSIQUE, ET D’APPLICATIONS

AUX ARTS. Contenant les traductions ou extraits des

travaux qui se publient sur ces matiéres dans les pays

étrangers, et de plus un résumé rapide des mémoires parus

en France. Rédigé par Ch. Martin, sous la direction de

Gaultier de Claubry. 1 vol., 8vo. Paris, 1837.

Continued under the title :

|a.] Répertoire de chimie scientifique et industrielle. Con-

tenant les traductions ou extraits des travaux qui se

publient sur cette matiére dans les pays étrangers, et

de plus un resumé des mémoires les plus intéressants

parus en France. Rédigé par Ch. Martin, sous la

direction de Gaultier de Claubry. 4 vols., 8vo.

Paris, 1837, 738.

Continued under the title :

‘[b.] Répertoire de chimie. Mémorial des travaus étran-

gers. Rédigé par Gaultier de Claubry et Ch. Ger-

hardt. Deuxiéme série. 1 vol., 8vo. Paris, 1839.|

149. [4.] REPERTOIRE DE CHIMIE PURE ET APPLIQUEE. Compte

rendu des progrés de la chimie pure en France et a

Vétranger. Par Adolphe Wurtz, avec la collaboration

de Chas. Friedel, Girard, LeBlanc, et A. Riche, pour

la France; Williamson, pour Angleterre; Lieben,

pour Allemagne; L. Schischkoff, pour la Russie ;

Rosing, pour Jes pays Skandinaves; Frapolli, pour

Vitalie. 5 vols., 8vo. Paris, 1858-63.

Simultaneously with the above a section devoted to applied chemistry

was published under the title :

[B.] Répertoire de chimie pure et appliquée. Compte rendu

des applications de Ja chimie en France et a l’étran-

ger. Par Ch. Barreswil, avec Ja collaboration de

Daniel Koechlin, Hervé Mangon, Em. Kopp, de Cler-

mont, pour la France; Knapp, Boettger, Sobrero,

Rosing, Boutlerow, pour l’étranger. 5 vols., 8vo.

Paris, 1858-’63.

In 1864 [A] and [B] were united and continued under the title ;

[a.] Bulletin de la Société chimique de Paris. Compre-

nant le compte rendu des travaux de la Société et

206 Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

Yanalyse des mémoires de chimie pure et appliquée

publiés en France et & Vétranger, par Ch. Barreswil,

J. Bouis, Ch. :Friedel, E. Kopp, F. LeBlane, A.

Scheurer-Kestner et Ad. Wurtz, avee la collaboration

de C. G: Foster, A. Girard, A. Lieben, A. Riche, A.

Rosing, Thoyot, A. Vée et E. Willm. Nouvelle série. ,

42 vols., 8vo. 1864844 Bie

150. REPERTOIRE DE PHARMACIE, DE CHIMIE, DE PHYSIQUE,’

D’HYGIENE PUBLIQUE, de la médecine légale et de théra-

peutique ; réimpression générale des ouvrages périodiques

publiés en France sur ces sciences. 1 vol., 8vo. Bruxelles,

1842.

151. REPERTOIRE DE PHARMACIE. Recueil pratique. Rédigé

par A. Lartigue. [from vol. 111, by Bouchardat.] 29

vols., 8vo. Paris, 1844-73.

Nouvelle série. 3 vols., 8vo. Paris, 187476.

United with the Journal de chimie médicale and conlinued under the

litle :

[a.] Repertoire de pharmacie et Journal de chimic médicale

rénnis. Dirigé par Eug. Lebaigue. 14 vols., 8vo.

Paris, 1876—84+

Of. Journal de chimie médicale.

152. REPERTORIUM DER ANALYTISCHEN CHEMIE fir Handel,

Gewerbe und Offentliche Gesundheitspflege. Redigirt von

Skalweit. 8vo. Hannover, 1881+

153. REPERTORIUM DER CHEMIE UND PNARMACIE. I[leraus-

gegeben von Swittau. 8vo. St. Petersburg, 1837 [+7]

REPERTORIUM FUR CHEMIE. Elwert.

See Magazin fiir Apotheker.

154. REPERTORIUM FUR DIE PHARMACIE. Angefangen von

AdoJph Ferdinand Gehlen und fortgesetzt in Verbindung

mit C. F. Bucholz, Rink und Anderen, von Johann An-

dreas Buchner. [From vol. v, unter Mitwirkung deg

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 207

Apotheker-Vereins in Baiern, herausgegeben von Johann

Andrews Buchner.| 50 vols., 12mo. Nitinberg, 1815-34.

Zweite Reihe. 50 vols., 12mo. Nurnberg, 1835-748.

Dritte Reihe. 10 vols., 12mo. Niinberg, 1849-751.

: Continued under the title :

[a.] Repertorium (Neues) fir Pharmacie. Unter Mitwir-

kung von Alb. Frickhinger, C. F. Hinle, J. E. Her-

berger, X. Landerer, ‘Th. W. Ch. Martius, W. Mit-

tenheimer,: Friedrich Mohr, Max Pettenkofer, A.

Schnizlein, F. L. Winkler, herausgegeben von J. A.

Buchner. 25 vols., 12mo. Nirnberg, 1852-76. ||

Erganzungsband. 1 vol.,12mo. Niinberg, 1816.

155. REPERTORIUM FUR ORGANISCHE CHEMIE. Herausgegeben

von C. Léwig. 3 vols., 8vo. Zitirich, 1841-43. |

REPERTORIUM FUR PHARMACIE. Buchner.

See Repertorium fiir die Pharmacie.

156. REPERTORIUM FUR PHARMACIE UND PRAKTISCHE CHEMIE

IN RtssLanvD ; oder, Zusammenstellung des Wichtigsten

nnd Wissenswerthesten aus den neuesten Entdeckungen

im Gebiete der Pharmacie und Chemie mit vorztiglicher

Riicksicht auf das russische Reich. Red.: C. Ganger.

Svo. St. Petersburg, 1842.

157. REVUE SCIENTIFIQUE ET INDUSTRIELLE des faits les plus

utiles et les plus curicux observés dans la médecine, l’hy-

giene, Ja physique, la chimie, la pharmacie, |’économie

rurale et domestique, Vindustrie nationale et étrangére.

Sous la direction de Quesneville. 16 vols. (I-XVI), 8vo.

Paris, 1840-’44.

Deuxiéme série. 15 vols. (I-xv), Svo. 1844-47.

Troisiéme série. 9 vols. (I-Ix), 8vo. 184851.

Quatriéme serie. 1 vol., 8vo. 1852.

Followed by :

[a.] Moniteur (Le) scientifique du chimiste et du manufac-

turier. Livre-Journal de chimie appliqué aux arts et

208 Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

a Vindustrie. Spécialement consacré a Ja chimie

générale pure et appliquée, par (Juesneville. 5 vols.

(I-v), 4to. Paris, 1857-63.

Continued under the title: —

{b.] Moniteur (Le) scientifique. Journal des sciences pures |

et appliquées. Deuxieme série. 7 vols. (VI—XII),

4to. Paris, 1864-70.

Continued under the title :

(c.) Moniteur scientifiqune—Quesneville. Journal des sci-

ences pures et appliquées, compte rendu des académies

et sociétés savantes et revue des progrés accomplis

dans Jes sciences mathematiques, physiques et natur-

elles. Photographie, chimie, pharmacie, médecine,

revue des inventions nouvelles et industrie manufac-

turiére des arts chimiques. Journal fondé et dirigé

par Quesneville. Troisiéme série. 14 vols., 4to.

Paris, 1871—84+

158. REVUE DES INDUSTRIES CHIMIQUES ET AGRICOLES. 7

vols., 8vo. Paris, 1878—~84-++

RicuTeR, J. B.

See Ueber die neueren Gegenstinde in der Chemic.

ROZIER’s JOURNAL.

See Introduction aux observations sur la physique [etc. ].

159. RIVISTA DI CHIMICA, MEDICA E FARMACEUTICA, TOSSICO-

LOGIA, FARMACOLOGIA E TERAPIA. Diretta da P. Al-

bertoni e J. Guareschi. 1 vol. ‘Torino, 1883+

Sararik, V.

‘See Casopis chemikt Ceskych [b.] ; aiso Zpravy spolku chemikt

Vv ,

ceskych.

160. SAMMLUNG AUSERLESENER ABHANDLUNGEN UBER DIE

INTERESSANTESTEN GEGENSTANDE DER CHEMIE. Aus

dem lateinischen mit einigen Anmerkungen begleitet.

Redigirt von Hochheimer. 1 vol., 8vo. Leipzig, 1793.

161. SCHEIKUNDIGE BIBLIOTHEEK, waarin de voornaamste

nieuwe ontdekkingen en verbeteringen, welke in der

. scheikunde in uns vaterland, doch wel meest in andre

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 209

landen van tijd tot tijd gedaan worden, kortelijk worden

voorgetragen. Door een gezelschap van beminaaren dezer

wetenschap. 2 vols., 8vo. Delft, 1790-98.

Continued under the title:

[a.] Scheikundige (Nieuwe) bibliotheek. 3 vols., Svo.

Amsterdam, 1799-1802. :

162. SCHEIKUNDIGE BIJDRAGEN. — vols. Amsterdam, 1867.

163. SCHEIKUNDIGE ONDERZOEKINGEN, GEDAAN IN HET LABO-

RATORIUM DER UTRECHTSCHE HooGEScHOOL. Uitgege-

ven door G. J. Mulder. 6 vols., 4to. Rotterdam,

1845-52.

Foliowed by ;

[a.] Scheikundige verhandelingen en onderzoekingen uitge-

geven door G. J. Mulder. 3 vols., 8vo. lotterdam,

1857-64.

Followed by:

[b.] Scheikundige aanteekeningen uitgegeven door G. J.

Mulder. 1 vol:, 8vo. Utrecht, 1865-67.

Followed by:

[c.] Scheikundige onderzoekingen, gedaan in het physiolo-

gisch laboratorium der Utrechtsche Hoogeschool.

Nieuwe serie. 3 vols., 8vo. Rotterdam, 1867-71.

Derde serie. 4 vols., 8vo. 1871-76 [4 ?]

ScHEIKUNDJGE VERHANDELINGEN. Rotterdam.

See Scheikundige onderzoekingen.

ScHERER, ALEX. NIC. :

See Allgemeine nordische Annalen der Chemie ; also Allgemeines

Journal der Chemie ; also Archiv fiir die theoretische Chemie;

also Nordische Blitter fiir Chemie.

164. Scnoot (THE) oF MINES QUARTERLY. Published by the

chemical and engineering societies of the School of Mines,

Columbia College, New York. 6 vols., 8vo-. New York,

1879-84

SELMI, FRANCESCO.

See Annuario chimico italiano.

210

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

ScHWEIGGER, J. S. C.

See Allgemeines Journal der Chemie [c. ].

SEMBENINI, G. B. ;

See Annuario delle scienze chimiche [etc.]; also Gazzetta eclettica

di chimica tecnologica ; also Gazzetta eclettica di farmacia e

chimica medica.

SIEBEL, J. E.

See Chemical Review and Journal.

SIMON, FRANZ. .

See Beitrige zur physiologischen und pathologischen Chemie.

SKALWEIT’S REPERTORIUM.

See Repertorium der analytischen Chemie.

SociETIES, CHEMICAL.

American, see Proceedings of the American Chemical Society.

Chemical Industry, see Journal of the Society of Chemical In-

dustry.

Columbian, see Memoirs of the Columbian Chemical Society.

French, see Répertoire de chimie pure et appliquée.

German, see Berichte der deutschen chemischen Gesellschaft.

London, see Proceedings of the Chemical Society of London.

Public Analysts, see Analyst (The).

Russian, see Zhurnal russkova khimicheskova [ete. ].

School of Mines, see School of Mines Quarterly.

STAEDEL, W.

See Jahresbericht iiber die Fortschritte auf dem Gebiete der

reinen Chemie.

STOCKHARDT, J. A.

See Chemische Ackersmann.

St. PETERSBURG.

See Zhurnal russkova khimicheskova [etc. ].

SVANBERG, L. F.

See Arsberiittelse om Framstegen i Physik och Chemi [0. ].

SwITTAUs REPERTORIUM.

See Repertorium der Chemie und Pharmacie.

TABLEAU DU TRAVAIL ANNUEL (etc.).

See Introduction aux observations sur la physique [etc. ].

TAYLOR, RICHARD.

See Philosophical Magazine.

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 211

165. TTASCHENBUCH FUR SCHEIDEKUNSTLER UND APOTHEKER.

Herausgegeben von Ch. F. Bucholz. 8vo. Weimar,

1803-719.

Cf. Almanach fiir Scheidekiinstler und Apotheker.

166. ‘1 ECHNISCH-CHEMISCHER KALENDER FUR OESTERREICH-

UNGARN. Jahrbuch und Notizbuch fiir den theoretischen

und praktischen Chemiker, Fabrikanten, Bierbrauer,

Branntweinbrenner, Zuckerfabrikanten. Herausgegeben

von Paul Bennewitz. 2 vols.,16mo. Wien, 1875, ’76.||

167. TECHNISCH-CHEMISCHES GEWERBEBLATT. Gesammelte

Vorschriften und Hrfahrungen in der technischen Chemie.

Zum Nutzen der Gewerbtreibenden und Fabrikanten,

herausgegeben von L. F. Denzer. 1 vol., 8vo. Berlin,

1849. 750. | :

168. 'TECHNISCH-CHEMISCHES JAHRBUCH. Herausgegeben von

; Rudolph Biedermann. 5 vols., 16mo. Berlin, 1880—~84+

This forms the second part of the Chemiker-Kalender. Herausgegeben

von Rudolph Biedermann. 5 vols., 16mo. Berlin, 1880-84+-

169. TEKNO-KEMISK JOURNAL. P.O. Almstrém. Stockholm,

1847-48.

THOMSEN, A. (AND J.).

See Tidsskrift for Physik og Chemi.

THomson’s ANNALS.

See Annals of Philosophy.

THupicuum, J. L. W.

See Annals of Chemical Medicine.

170. TIDSSKRIFT FOR ANVENDT CHEMI, for fabrikanter, chemi-

kere, pharmaceuter og handlende. Udgivet af T. Holm

og A. EK. M. Schleisner. 1 vol., 8vo. Kjgbenhavn,

1869, *70.

171. TIDSSKRIFT FOR PHYSIK 0G CHEMI SAMT DISSE VIDEN-

SKABERS ANVENDELSE. Udgivet af A. og J. Thomsen.

9 vols., 8yo. Kjgbenhayn, 1862-’70.

Anden Rekke. 12 vols., 8vo. 1871—82+

172. TIsDSCHRIFT VOOR WETENSCHAPPELIJKE PHARMACIE,

benevens mededeelingen over chemie, pharmacie en phar-

212 Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

macognosie van het planten-, dieren- en delfstoffelijk rijk.

Geredigeerd door P. J. Haaxmann. 5 vols., 8vo. Voor-

burg, 1849-53. es

‘l'weede serie. 5 vols., 8vo. ’s Gravenhage, 1854-58.

Continued under the title : .

[a.] Tijdschrift voor wetenschappelijke pharmacie. Gere-

digeerd door P. J. Haaxmann, bevattende de mede-

deelingen der Nederlandsche maatschappij ter bevor-

dering der pharmacie. Derde serie. 6 vols., 8vo.

Gorinchem, 1859-64. 3

Nieuwe serie. 9 vols., 8vo. Gorinchem, 1865-—’73.

TILLocH, ALEX.

See Philosophical Magazine.

173. ToOEGEPASTE SCHEIKUNDE. ‘lweemaandelijksch tijdschrift,

bevattende mededeelingen uit het gebied der toegepaste

scheikunde voor het algemeen. Onder redactie van R.

J. Opwyrda. 5 vols., 8vo. “Vlaardingen, 186569.

Nieuwe serie. 4 vols., 8vo. 1870-75.

Continued under the title ;

[a.] Maandblad voor toegepaste scheikunde, bevattende

mededeelingen uit het gebied der toegepaste schei-

kunde voor het algemeen. Redacteur: R. J. Op-

wyrda. ‘Tredie serie. 5 vols., 8vo. Amsterdam,

1876-80 (+7).

Trier: Se Me

See Archiv for Pharmaci.

TROMMSDORFF, J. B.

See Allgemeine chemische Bibliothek ; also Almanach fir Schei-

dekiinstler [b] ; also Annalen der Pharmacie ; also Journal der

Pharmacie fiir Aerzte und Apotheker.

TROMMSDORFF’S TASCHENBUCH FUR SCHEIDEKUNSTLER.

See Almanach fiir Scheidekiinstler. .

174. UEBER DIB NEUEREN GEGENSTANDE IN DER CHEMIE.

Herausgegeben von J. B. Richter. 11 parts, 8vo. Bres-

lan, Hirschberg und Lissa, 1791-1802. |

175. UNTERSUCHUNGEN AUS LIEBIG’S LABORATORIUM. 1 vol.,

8vo. Wien, 1872.

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. 213

176. VIERTELJAHRESSCHRIFT FUR TECHNISCHE CHEMIE, land-

wirthschaftliche Gewerbe, Fabrikwesen und Gewerbtrei-

bende iiberhaupt. Unter Mitwirkung we'irerer Gelehrten,

Fabrikanten und Techniker, herausgegeben von Wilibad

Artus. 10 vols., 8vo. Quedlinburg, 1859-’69. ||

WAGNER'S J AHRESBERICHT.

See Jahresbericht tiber die Fortschritte der chemischen Tech-

nologie.

W ASSERBERG, F. A. X.

See Beitriige zur Chemie.

Watt, CHARLES (AND JOHN).

See Chemist (The).

WESTRUMB, J. F.

See Kleine physikalisch-chemische Abhandlungen.

WIEDEMANN’S ANNALEN.

See Journal der Physik [e].

WIGNER, G. W.

See Analyst (The).

WOuLER, FR.

See Annalen der Pharmacie [)].

Woop (CHARLES H.), AND SHARP (CHARLES).

See Chemist’s Desk Companion ; also Year-book of Pharmacy.

_ Wurtz, ADOLPHE.

See Repertoire de chimie pure et appliquée.

177. Ynar-pook oF PHarRMacy. A practical summary of re-

searches in pharmacy, materia medica, and pharmaceuti-

cal chemistry, [77 1881, and transactions of the Pharma-

ceutical Conference]. Edited by Charles H. Wood and

Charles Sharp. 18 vols., 8vo. London, 1865-’82-+-

Cf. Chemist’s (The) Desk Companion.

ZANTEDESCHI, FRANCESCO.

See Giornale fisico-chimico italiano; also Raccolta fisico-chimica

italiana.

178. ZEITSCHRIFT FUR ANALYTISCHE CHEMIE. Herausgegeben

von C. Remigius Fresenius. 23 vols., 8vo. Wiesbaden,

1862-84. :

Autoren- und Sach-Register zu den Banden I-x (1862—

71). 1vol., 8vo. Wiesbaden, 1872.

Autoren- und Sach-Register zu den Banden xI—xx (1872-

’81). Bearbeitet von Heinr. Fresenius, unter Mitwir-

kung von Wilh. Lenz. 8vo. Wiesbaden, 1882.

214 Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals. —

ZEITSCHRIFT FUR CHEMIE UND PHARMACIE.

See Kritische Zeitschrift fiir Chemie.

179. ZeEITSCHRIFT FUR DAS CHEMISCHE GROSSGEWERBE. Kur-

zer Bericht. tiber die Fortschritte der chemischen Gross-

industrie. Unter Mitwirkung von angesehenen Technolo-

gen und Technikern, sowie von F. Frerichs, J. Landgraf,

K. Polstorff, P. Wagner, H. Wiesinger, F. Wunderlich,

herausgegeben von Jul. Post. 7 vols., 8vo. Berlin,

1876-82. ||

180. ZEITSCHRIFT FUK PHYSIOLOGISCHE CHEMIE. Unter Mit-

wirkung von KE. Baumann, Gihtgens, Hifner, [etc.], her-

ausgegeben von F. Hoppe-Seyler. 8 vols., 8vo. Strass-

burg, 1877-84+

18l. *“ZHURNAL RUSSKOVA KHIMICHESKOVA I FIZICHESKOVA

obschetsva pri St. Peterburgskom Unuiversitetye. 16

vols., 8vo. St. Peterburg, 1869—84+

182. ZeRAVY SPOLKU CHEMIKO GeskyYcH. Rediguje: V. Safatik.

2 vols., 8vo. v Praze, 1872—76 [+ ?]

Cf. Casopis chemiku ceskych.

* Attempts to transliterate Russian are very unsatisfactory; instead of rendering the

title phonetically, as above. it may be given literally thus:—Journal russkago khimiches-

kago i fizicheskago obschetsva, [etc.].

‘ae

' «, (ie

———

Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

215

GEOGRAPHICAL INDEX.

The numbers refer to the titles of publications.

Austria.

Prague, 50, 120, 182.

Wien, 40, 104, 128, 129, 130,

166, 175.

Belgium.

Bruxelles, 74, 105, 107, 150.

Denmark.

Kjgbenhavn, 33, 170, 171.

France.

Montpellier, 77.

Paris, 2, 7, 14, 23, 24, 25,

AS, AY, 1,76, 9d, 106,

is. bot) 145... 148;

149, Lol, 157, 158:

Rouen, 7.

Great Britain.

Edinburgh, 80.

Hondon, 12,: 17; 18;°19;-20,

B22 26, af, 52, 54,

was Oks GO, 69; 70,372,

oe dee tS, EE Eo

123,182, 1386, 137, 140,

13H 177.

Germany.

Berlin, 50, 32, 35, 41, 48, 44,

45, 46, 57, 60, 65, 66,

OSy LOOSE10. 153, 267,

StGa. 79.

Breslau, 174.

Dresden, 79.

Carlsruhe, 1340.

Cothen, 3.

Erfurt, 4, 42.

Germany (continued).

Erlangen, 116.

Giessen, 103.

Gottingen, 116c.

Halle, 36, 109, 134.

Hannover, 152.

Heidelberg, 13, 1160.

Helmstadt. 39, 59.

Hirschberg, 174.

Jena, 80, 35.

Koln, 83.

Leipzig, 5, 13c, 38, 51, 58,

59, 62, 63a, 81; 382, 96,

97, 101, 108, 109, 111,

115, 138, 160.

Lemgo, 13, 63.

Essa. P74.

Nurnberg, 5c, 34, 121, 154.

Quedlinburg, 176.

Stettin, 41.

Strassburg, 180.

Tubingen, 99, 102, 122.

Weimar, 8, 626, 117, 165.

Wiesbaden, 178.

Italy.

Ancona, 90.

Firenze, 135.

Mantova, 30.

Modena, 28.

Milano, 6, 16, 27, 89, 92, 93.

Napoli, 141.

Padova, 144a.

Palermo, 84.

216 Catalogue of Chemical Periodicals.

Italy (continued). Russia.

Pavia, 15, 94. St. Peterburg, 124, 134a, 153,

Pisa, 127. | | 156, 181. Ree

Torino, 16a, 91, 159. 3 4

| i ; Sweden.

Venezia, 87, 88, 144.

Sigel thay tockholm, 1 169.

Verona, 29, 85, 86. ebork tole Oe ies

tzerland.

Netherlands. Boies so :

—!. Zarich, 158:

Amsterdam, 61, 146, 162,

173a. United States of America.

Delft, 161. Amherst, 71.

Gorinchem, 172a. Baltimore, 9.

Leiden, 61, 147. Boston, 11, 47, 112, 118.

Rotterdam, 163. Chicago, 56, 139.

Schoonhoven, 64. New York, 10, 53, 112, 142,

164.

’s Gravenhage, 172.

Viaardingen, 173.

Voorburg, 172.

Philadelphia, 112, 126.

CORRECTIONS.

Title 66, for Ueberisichtlich read Uebersichtlich.

«« 4, line 1, for a read i.

Page 188, line 1, for Berlinische read Berlinisches.

Title 106[7], for serie read série.

Peculiar Fossils from the Chemung Locks. 21%

VII.—Descriptions of some peculiar screw-like Fossils fiom

the Chemung Rocks. |

BY J. S. NEWBERRY.

Read Dec. 10th, 1883.

In the sandstones of the Chemung Group in Northern Penn-

sylvania and Southern New York, have been found a number of

cylindrical or fusiform bodies, traversed by spiral raised ridges,

which have been something of a puzzle to those who have col-

lected them. At first sight, they would seem to bear a‘close re-

lationship to some species of Spirangiwm, particularly Sp.

Quenstedti, Sch. (Paleoxyris. Quenstedt, Handbuch d. Petrefac-

ten, ‘Tab. Lxxxtr, Fig. 9), and Sp. Gilewii, He AT Sb (Geol.

Markestaune p. 135, Taf. 23, Fig. 3).

But in these, as in all the other species of Spirangium de-

scribed, the fusiform body is traversed by six or more spiral

raised lines, instead of two as in the specimens under considera-

tion. |

The geological horizons of these fossils are also different, Sy-

rangium ranging from the Coal-measures to the Wealden, while

our screw-like casts, to which the name Spirazis is now given,

are confined, so far as yet known, to the Chemung.

The resemblance between some of the species of Spiraxis and

the species of Spirangium enumerated above, is so striking that

. it is difficult to resist the conviction that they are of similar char-

acter and somewhat closely related. Spirangium las been gen-

e-ally considered as a fruit of some kind, and the first species

noted was described by Brongniart under the name of Palwoxy-

ris regularis, (Ann. Sc. Nat., Ire Sér:, Vol. XV; p. 456) from

a conviction that it was the fruit of a plant allied to Yyris.

Ettingshausen has also suggested that Spirangium is the fruit

of an extinct plant related to the living Bromelia, and so his

called it Paleobromelia, (Abhandl. d. K. K. Geol. Reichsan-

218 Peculiar Fossils from the Chemung Rocks.

stait, I, 3, p. 3). These views have not been generally accepted,

however, and no satisfactory conclusion has been reached in re-

gard to the botanical relations of Spirangium.

The first impression of the writer in examining the fossils now

under consideration, was that they were the stems of algae.

They are mere casts, all traces of the original structure having

disappeared, as is generally the case with fossilized sea-weeds.

It is also true that in the same and adjacent formations the re-

mains of fucoids with spiral fronds, Spirophyton, are not un-

common. ‘The stems of Spirophyton, however, are never found

stripped of the fronds, and nothing which resembles the fossils

before us has been detected in a careful examination of the upper

extremity of the stems of Spirophyton 'The Archimedes Screw,

Retepora Archimedes, has a great 1esemblance in form to these

fossils, but that is a calcareous animal organism, of which the

structure is very easily made out, for the salient revolving ridges

which it bears are only the bases from which the expanded fronds

of a Bryozéon have been torn away. On the contrary, Spirazis

is a simple cast, no calcareous matter remaining, as would cer-

tainly be the case if it represented a coral or mollusk. The

original substance has entirely disappeared, and yet it had suffi-

cient solidity to form a defined mould in the sand where it was

buried ; and when the organic tissue disappeared, as it did com-

pletely, the cavity was filled by infiltration, and a perfect cast

was thus produced. Nothing is more common than to find the

casts of sea-weeds formed in this way; but it is also true that

sponges are sometimes fossilized in a similar manner. ‘The

group of Dictyospongia, formerly considered sea-weeds, and de-

scribed under the name of Dictyophyton, generally exhibit the

same absence of organic structure, and are simply casts in the

sandstone ; but they have been referred to of Jute by all writers as

sponges, and in some instances slight traces of original tissue have

been preserved, which place their true character beyond a doubt.

Among the sponges there are none known to the writer which

exhibit anything like the regular spiral structure which is char-

acteristic of our fossils ; but a tendency to a spiral mode of growth

appears in some sponges, and is very distinctly seen in Hyalo-

nema, and in Siphonocelia, Roemer, (Stachyspongia, Zittell).

No positive evidence can therefore yet be adduced to satisfy the

Peculiar Fossils from the Chemung Rocks. 219

questions which have been asked in regard to the biological rela-

tions of these singular ‘‘sandstone screws” from the Chemung.

The interior, in all cases yet observed, is composed of sand, with

sometimes smal] quartz pebbles. These indicate that the organic

tissue was soft, and early disappeared, leaving a cavity which was

filled in with sand and fine gravel introduced through an orifice

at one extremity. The upper end is conical and, in several speci-

mens which I possess, complete ; but the lower end is broken off,

and the nature of the part removed remains unknown. It is

‘possible that we have nearly the entire organism, and that it was

fusiform with two conical extremities. ‘This is, however, less

probable than that it continued below in some sort of a stem

that served as a support. Doubtless future discoveries will solve

this problem.

The specimens in my possession may be concisely described as

follows :

SPIRAXIS,. (nov. gen.)

Body cylindrical, or sub-fusiform, somewhat abruptly corical

above, more gradually tapering below ; surface traversed by two

parallel revolving spiral ridges, in some species closely approxi-

mated, in others separated by intervals half as wide as the diame-

ter; no traces of internal structure or distinct surface-markings

visible.

Two species are known to me, viz.,

1. Spiraxis major, n. sp.

Pic XV. Bc. 1.

Body cylindrical, about one inch in diameter, terminating above in a

conical summit, traversed by two strong spiral revolving ridges which cross

the axis at an angle of about 45°. These ridges are flattened or sulcated

and somewhat roughened, as though for the attachment of some frond-like

appendage. They are separated by broad, deep and smooth furrows about

three times the width of the flattened summit of the ridge ; the surface of

the furrow is smooth or obscurely granulated.

Only a single specimen of this species is known, but this is remarkably

well preserved. It is about 7 inches in length by one in diameter. The

summit is complete, but it is broken off below, leaving the entire form un-

certain. It apparently shows a tendency to narrow downward, and the

spiral ridges are there somewhat more widely separated, as though tending

to open and become obsolete.

Formation and locality, Chemung Rocks, Southern New York.

220 Peculiar Fossils from the Chemung Rocks.

2. Spiraxis Randalli, 1. sp.

PL. XVII, Fies. 2; 3:

Body fusiform, three or four inches in length by six to eight lines in di-

ameter ; surface marked by two revolving and closely approximated ridges,

which below are broad and flattened or rounded, and separated by narrow —

furrows, above acute and narrow, separated by broader furrows.

From 8S. major this species may be distinguished by its smaller size, its

somewhat curved or sinuous form, and the closer approximation of the

raised ridges, which are also more flattened and relatiyely broader.

Formation and locality, Chemung Group, Warren, Penna., where it was

first obtained by Mr. F. A. Randall, to whom it is dedicated.

Since the above descriptions were written, Prof. J ames Hall, of ©

Albany, and Prof. H. 8. Williams, of Cornell University, have

kindly sent to me for examination the considerable number of

specimens of Spirazis which they have obtained from the Che-

mung rocks of Northern Pennsylvania and Southern New York.

Of these, all those received from Prof. Hall represent the species

S. Randalli; none are more complete than those now figured,

and none exhibit characters which throw any light on the bio-

logical relations of these fossils. Among the specimens sent by

Prof. Williams, is one larger than the others, much curved and

flattened and having the spiral ridges relatively broad and flat.

It approaches most nearly to S. Randulli and may be only a

phase of that species, but more material will be required before

this question can be settled.

It is to be hoped that by the publication of this notice of these

singular organisms, the attention of those who are making col-

lections from the Chemung rocks will be specially directed to

them, and that by the discovery of specimens which are better

preserved, or by tracing their connections or relations as they

lie in the rock, their true nature may be determined.

The originals of the figures now given are in the Geological

Cabinet of the School of Mines of Columbia College.

On the Temperature of Inecandescence. 221.

VIII.—WNote on the Temperature of Incandescence, and its

bearing upon Solar Physics.

BY WALLACE GOOLD LEVISON.

Read Feb. 2d, 1885.

It has long been assumed that all solid and liquid substances

begin to emit light, or become visibly incandescent, at a common

temperature which has been fixed at

635° by Sir Isaac Newton.

812° ‘* Sir Humphrey Davy.

947° “* Mr. Wedgewood.

980° ‘* Mr. Daniell,—and

Si Dr. W Draper.

‘

The last figure was obtained by Prof. Draper as the result of

a series of experiments which he considered sufficiently conclu-

clusive to authorize the suggestion of three laws’ :—First, that

all substances become visibly incandescent at the same tempera-

ture ;—second, that this temperature is 977° ;—third, that the

length of spectrum of an incandescent solid or liquid substance

is a measure of its temperature. Now, in view of the following

facts, it would seem that these laws must be modified, or at least

- restricted in application to opaque solids and liquids only.

When a rod of hard German glass (potash and lime silicate)

and a rod of soft glass (alkali or lead silicate) are held side by

side in the flame of a Bunsen burner, the soft glass rod soon be-

-comes red-hot or visibly incandescent, while the hard glass is

but faintly luminous; and even when they have equally acquired

the temperature of the flame, about 2.350 C., *the hard glass has

-1 Draper. Dr. J. W., on the radiation cf red-hot bodies and the production of light by heat.

Am. Jour. Sci., 2 Series, Vol. LV. 1847. London, Edinburg and Dublin Phil. Mag.. May,

1877. Harpers’ Monthly. No, 322. Memoirs N. Y.. 1878 8vo. Astor, 446 D. Ist Memoir.

2 Roscoe, on Spectrum Analysis, p 54.

222 On the Temperature of Incandescence. |

made but little progress toward incandescence compared with

the other. Ifa number of little discs of platinum are arranged

in a figure within a hard glass combustion-tube, and while the

tube is highly heated over a blast lamp are imbedded in the

glass, and the tube then allowed to cool gradually in a dark

room,—long after the tube has become aie the pieces of

platinum may be distinctly seen.

Again, take a hard glass combustion-tube and within its mid-

dle third arrange a scrieS of pieces of platinum, copper, iron,

lead, asbestos, pumice, and soft and hard glass, and heat them

in a combustion-furnace to bright redness. ‘Then, partly closing

the ends of the tube with the finger, to prevent a current of cold

air through it, carry it into a perfectly dark room and watch it

cool. The tube soon becomes absolutely invisible, but long after-

ward the objects within it, with the exception of the pieces of

hard glass, may be clearly distinguished. That the continued

incandescence of the contained objects within the tube is not due

to difference in rapidity of cooling, or other variability of condi-

tion, is it seems to me conclusively shown by the fact that the

enclosed pieces of hard glass become invisible at the same time

as the tube itself.

The visibility of the heated contents of a combustion-tube in ~

the furnace, is an instance of this phenomenon, that is perfectly

familiar to organic analysts.

These experiments were suggested to me by one which I tried

over two years ago for a gentleman who conceived the idea that

spirals or baskets made of threads of pure silica might be advan-

tageously employed instead of platinum wire spirals for suspend-

ing in hydrogen, water-gas, or other non-luminous gas-flames,

to produce incandescent lights. I found that by taking two an-

gular fragments of amorphous quartz in separate pincers, heat-

ing their pointed ends in an oxyhydrogen flame, touching them

together where fused and suddenly drawing them apart,—

threads of silica as much as two decimeters long may be made.

No crystallized quartz I have tried will answer, because it de-

crepitates too violently ; and a jet of pure hydrogen and oxygen

seems necessary, because the common jet of coal-gas and oxygen

appears to produce insufficient heat to well fuse the silica. I

found however that when such a thread of silica was held side

by side with a platinum wire, of the same diameter, in the flame

On the Temperature of Incandescence. 223

of a Bunsen burner, it could not be rendered incandescent,

though the platinum wire glowed brightly. Examination with

a spectroscope showed that the silica thread gave practically no

spectrum, and consequently emitted no light whatever, except

at points where some opaque foreign particle might be entangled

within it. Bearing as it does upon several applications of quartz

in the form of lenses and prisms, and upon various diathermic

considerations, this. experiment evidently suggests the desira-

bility of an examination of the relation to radiant energy of

quartz which has been fused and which can therefore no longer

contain microscopic water-cavities. Professor C. A. Young, who

saw it at a meeting of the American Astronomical Society, in

June, 1883, regarded it as a very pretty experiment and probably

« consequence of Kirchoff’s law.

As is usually the case when once a general principle is revealed

to us, evidences of it are easily recognized in the most familiar

instances, and the phenomena of this principle are presented to

us in all varieties by the ordinary blow-pipe beads.

If a bead of borax or microcusmic salt be heated and allowed

to cool. the bead itself at any moderate temperature is hardly

visible ; but even after it has cooled in a dark room until quite

invisible, the platinum wire ring still remains red-hot, and may

be distinctly seen. A bead of carbonate of soda behaves differ-

ently. When very hot, in a dark room it appears almost non-

luminous, even though the ring of platinum wire glows quite

hot, but at the moment of solidifying it suddenly incandesces

with a red heat, and it and the wire then degrade together in

luminosity until they become, at the same instant, invisible.

Upon the surface of, or within such a bead, of borax or car-

bonate of soda, while hot and transparent, a foreign particle

floats about red-hot ; and under a considerable depth of certain

melted fluxes, I have seen a button of pure silver, at the bottom

of a crucible, almost as clearly as it could be seen through so

much cold glass.

Another interesting instance involving this principle occurs in

the case of melted gold, which is less luminous at a certain tem-

perature. than after it has cooled down to the point at which it

solidifies, when it suddenly emits a brilliant light.

224 On the Temperature of Incandescence. < |

- From these considerations it seems to me we may fairly con-

clude, not that silicates, borates, phosphates and similar hyaline

compounds are absolutely non-luminous at very high tempera-

tures, but even though not many such compounds have been

carefully examined, that a substance which remains transparent

will be far less luminous at a high temperature than one which

becomes opaque. ou

Sir J. F.. W. Herschel, in the text of his Outlines of

Astronomy, like many other observers, describes the physical

appearance of the sun as most nearly resembling a fused liquid

mass, covered by'a luminous envelope ; and while he argues for

a very high temperature in the sun, he suggested,* as long ago as

the year 1833, that it would be a highly curious subject of ex-

perimental enquiry, to determine how far a mere reduplication

of sheets of flame, one behind the other, would communicate to

the heat of the resulting compound ray, the penetrating charac-

ter, which distinguishes the solar calorific rays. Now two recent

investigators claim a low temperature in the sun, and the argu-

ment of one of them, Mr. W. M. Williams, is founded upon a

development of the idea thus advanced by Herschel in 1833, and

a study more or less reliable, of superposed radiant surfaces,

more especially of certain methods of heating iron plates, by ra-

diant heat from gas flames, of low temperature, but great body.

Many students of solar-physies remark the close resemblance of

the sun’s surface phenomena to those presented by a fused flux

or slag, and its surface crust; but the assumption that the sun

actually consists of a fused mass, covered by a pasty or solidifying

crust, has been opposed by four apparently inconsistent condi-

tions, namely :—first, its supposed enormously high temperature ;

—second, its supposed gaseous, because dark, interior ;—third,

the supposed necessity that a more luminous crust should be at

a higher temperature than the fused material of which it is

formed ;—and fourth, its low specific gravity. If the present

tendency to lower the temperature of the sun ends in the general

acceptance of figures even approximately as low as those of Dr.

3 Herschel, J. F. W. Outlines of Astronomy ; New York, 1859, page 212. Note from edi-

tion of 1833. ;

On-the Temperature of Incandescence. 22:

Siemens,‘ Mr. Williams’ and M. Violle,® the assumption that

the known constituents of the sun must be wholly gaseous,

will, in so far as temperature is concerned, be no longer neces-

sary, and the idea that it is a sphere of fused material, such

as originally constituted our melted earth, or such as is now

ejected by terrestrial voleanoes, will be quite admissible; and

it seems to me that the experiments I have herein apparently

correlated will then account for its dark interior. For, assum-

ing it to be a perfectly limpid fused globe, like many a blow-pipe

bead at about that temperature, covered with a crust of less fusi-

ble or incompatible material, crystallizing out from the mass, as

feldspar and hornblende perhaps crystallized out from granite,

or a crust of the same material reduced to a pasty or opaque

condition upon the surface, by the chill of its radiation into sur-

rounding space, the great luminosity of the crust would be per-

fectly consistent with its temperature, whether the same as that

of the sun or lower, and the predica‘ed phenomena of its surface

would almost precisely accord with those actually observed. In-

ternal convective disturbances and general equilibrium currents

of the crust, in large areas, by whatever cause produced, should

give rise,—the first to the production of the willow-leaves, facu-

le, and spots,—and the latter, to their actual translation over

the sun’s surface. Every little local depression of the pasty

crust would cause a slight local exudation of the interior transpa-

rent lava, which would chill by radiation, become opaque and

brightly luminous, and then gradually retrograde to a condition

of incandescence determined by the general temperature of the

surtace, and where especially violent local disturbances, such as

gaseous eruptions, might break away or part the crust, there the

interior would seem, as it actually would be, non-luminous or

dark.

The common assumption that the red protuberances or so-

called hydrogen flames are of the nature of flames, and consist

of hydrogen gas at a temperature enormously high, I am dis-

posed to question, for I am unable so far to find the evidence of

4 Siemens, Dr. C. W. Solar Physics. Lecture at the Royal Institution, April 27, 1873.

Nature, Vol. 28, p, 19.

5 Williams, W. Mattieu. Fuel of the Sun. Humboldt Library, No. 41, p. 215. .

6 Compte Rendus, Vol. LXXVIII, pp. 186 and 1425,

226 On the Temperature of Incandescence.

a single physical experiment, to show that hydrogen can be

caused to glow with a red light or yield its characteristic spec-

trum by heat alone, or that it is actually highly heated by the

electric influence which causes it thus to glow when rarified in

a Geissler tube. On the contrary, the temperature of the sun

might be comparatively low, yet if still above the temperature

of the dissociation of water (approximately 4,800 degrees C.)" be

consistent with all the eruptive phenomena of the chromosphere

and protuberances, the chromatic phenomena of which incon-

sistent with that temperature may it seems to me, as yet be

attributed to purely electrical influences. If the maintenance

of the opening in the crust which we call a spot, were consistent

with a comparatively quiet condition of the surface upon which

the crust floats, the penumbra might perhaps be an image of the

the interior side of the crust seen through the sun’s mass, or it

might be the less Juminous reflection of the side of the opening

from the sun’s actual surface. Were the mass of the sun metal-

lic, the image would appear almost as bright as the reflected

object, like the image of a ring of litharge, reflected from the

surface it surrounds, or of a button of silver, melted in a scori-

fier or cupel; but if the sun be a mass of a transparent silicate,

the image would be far less brilliant than the side of the cavity

in the crust. And in this connection it may be remarked, that

in certain details many of the drawings of sun-spots which have

been published appear to afford to a person prejudiced in its

favor, striking illustrations of this hypothesis, and the famous

representation of a sun-spot reproduced in almost all astronomi-

eal works, and which was drawn by Prof. Langley without refer-

ence to such an hypothesis, wonld seem to support it conclu-

sively, for it shows a projection of the crust over an annular

chasm and its apparent image in a mirror-like surface beneath.

If, whatever the size of the sun-spot, the pennmbra be found

to have approximately always the same width, that if is an image

of the walls of the chasm would be strongly indicated, but it by

no means follows that it must be such an image to accord with

this hypothesis.

On the contrary, while reflection would still occur to a greater

or less extent, the penumbra might actually be a thin film, of

7 Deville.

On the Temperature of Incandescence. 227%

low incandescence, such as usually forms upon a slag when its

surface is exposed by the removal of its crust, spreading to the

sides of the spot and leaving in the centre a clear space; and

nothing in the admission of such a film is perhaps irreconcilable

with ordinary penumbral phenomena.

Undoubtedly this hypothesis should be carefully considered

and submitted to the test of elaborate experimental examination,

before it could claim acknowledgment as a theory ; but although

the low specific gravity of the sun still opposes its acceptance,

unless perhaps it may be a mean of the specific gravities of the

liquid sphere and its gaseous surrounding atmosphere, I con-

cluded with some diffidence to advance it as naturally suggested

by the experiments herein described.

Should it survive the scrutiny of critical consideration, it will

afford us the satisfaction of at least partly solving an important

problem, and furnish a striking illustration of the connection of

small things with great, 1n the transition of reasoning from

the phenomena of a blow-pipe bead to the phenomena of the

sun.

228 Revision of the Genus Seleria.

IX.—A Revision of the North American Species of the

Genus Scleria.

BY N. OL BRITTON.

Read May 25th, 1885.

The genus SCLERIA contains, according to Bentham and

Hooker, about one hundred species, distributed throughout the

warmer regions of the globe, in North America alone extending

into the higher temperate zone—one species reaching even into

Canada. The materials on which the present arrangement of

our forms is based comprise the specimens in the Philadelphia

Academy of Natural Sciences ; in Dr. Gray’s Herbarium; in the

Torrey, Meisner, and Chapman Herbaria, of Columbia College ;

those of the Torrey Botanical Club; of the private herbaria of

Judge Addison Brown, Mr. I. C. Martindale, and Mr. J. H.

Redfield, and my own collection for the Geological Survey of

New Jersey.

_ Scleria.—Berg. in K. Vetensk.. Acad. Handl., Stockholm, xxvi (1765),

142, t. 4, 5. Flowers unisexual, the fertile solitary, in androgynous spike-

lets below the sterile, or in distinct spikelets ; the sterile indefinite in num-

ber in androgynous or distinct spikelets. Glumes imbricated on all sides,

the 1—3 lower and sometimes 1—3 above the fertile flowersempty. Bristles of

the hypogynium none. Stamens 1, 2, or rarely 3. Style continuous with

_the ovary, terete, or somewhat swollen at the base ; divisions of the stigma

3, filiform. Achenium globose or ovoid, often white, obtuse and erostrate,

_ or mucronate by the short, persistent base of the style, the gynophore often ~

supported by a simple or double cartilaginous dilated disk, which is rarely

obsolete.—Herbs. Leaves either flaccid and grasslike, or long, broad, and

plicate-nervose. Spikelets small, in terminal, or terminal and axillary, or

glomerate-spicate fascicles. Bracts leaflike or setaceous. (Vide Bentham

and Hooker, Gen. Plant., iii, pt. ii, 1070.)

Revision of the Genus Sceleria. 229

(A) INFLORESCENCE A SINGLE TERMINAL CLUSTER; ACHENIUM SMOOTH

AND EVEN, OR LONGITUDINALLY RIBBED.

1. S. gracilis, Ell. Culms, very slender and sometimes filiform, ten to

fourteen inches high, smooth ; leaves filiform, smooth ; bracts and scales

glabrous; achenium ovate, obtusely triangular, obtuse, shining or dull,

distinctly longitudinally ribbed, about 1} lines long, with two pits on each

side of the triangular base; perigynium none. Sketch, ii, 557; Kunth,

Enum., ii, 359 ; Eaton and Wright, 419 ; Steud., Syn., 175 ; Dietrich, Syn.

Plant., v, 254; Chapman, 532; Darby, 564; Wood, Class-book, 747 ; Bot.

and Flor., 368; Boeckeler, Linnea, xxxviii, 450; Grisebach, Cat. Flor.

Cuben., 249.

Hypoporum gracile, Torr., Ann. N. Y. Lyc., iii, 381.

Habitat, South Carolina and Florida to Texas. Also in Cuba

(Plante Cubenses Wrightiane, No. 3420).

2. S. Baldwinii, Steud. Culms triangular, smooth, or somewhat

rough above, one to three feet high ; leaves linear, smooth, or slightly

scabrous ; achenium ovate, dull, smooth and even, about two lines long,

obscurely triangular, apiculate, destitute of pits, the base triangular, pointed;

perigynium none; bracts and scales glabrous. Syn., 175; Wood, Class-

book, 747; Bot. and Flor., 368; Boeckeler, Linnea, xxxviii, 450.

S. dioica, LeConte, in Herb. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila.

Hypoporum Baldwinii, Torr., Ann. Lyc., iii, 382.

In a specimen collected in Western Florida by Dr. Chapman,

and now in the Short Herbarium, Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., there

is an additional lateral cluster of spikelets.

Hatitat, Florida to Texas.

Var. costata, n. var., Achenium longitudinally ribbed ; otherwise as

in the type.

S. Baldwinii, Chapman, 532.

Habitat, Georgia, Florida, Texas.

(B) INFLORESCENCE IN TERMINAL, OR IN TERMINAL AND LATERAL,

MORE OR LESS PEDUNCLED OLUSTERS.

* Achenium smooth.

3. 8. triglomerata, Michx. Culms triangular, 18 inches to 3 feet high,

scabrous or nearly smooth ; leaves broadly linear, smooth or slightly hairy,

roughish on the margins; sheaths smooth ; clusters near the summit of the

culm, with or without additional smaller pedunculate ones from the lower

230 Revision of the Genus Scleria.

axils, the upper one somewhat triglomerate; bracts naked or slightly ciliate,

cuspidate ; achenium varying from depressed to ovate-globose, generally

obtuse but pointed, obscurely triangular, shining ; perigynium narrow, very

obtusely triangular, covered with a white rough Saeh

Fl. N. A., ii, 168; Muhl., Gram., 269; EIl., Sketch, ii, 558; Pursh, Flor.

Amer. Sept., i, 46 (7); Eaton and Wright, 418; Beck, 480; Darlington, Flor.

Cestr., 2d Ed., 26; 8d Ed., 343; Torrey, Compend., 349; Ann. Lyc., iii, 380;

Flor. N. Y., ii, 368; Steud., Syn., 173; Eaton, 454: Dewey, Plants Mass.,

260; Chapman, 531; Darby, 564; Gray, Manual, 570; Wood, Class-book,

746; Bot. and Flor., 367; Boeckeler, Linnea, xxxviii, 464.

S nitida, Willd., Herb., fide Kunth. Enum, ii, 350; Darby, 564 ; Steud.,

Syn., 174; Dietrich, Syn. Plant., v, 252.

S. flaccida, Steud,, Syn., 174.

Cladium triglomeratum, Nees, Linnea, ix, 301; Kunth, Enum, ii, 304.

Trachylomia triglomerata, Nees, Mart., Flor. Bras., ii, Pt. i, 174.

Pursh describes the nut as rugose, but he must have con-

founded this with some other species.

Habitat, Massachusetts and Vermont to Wisconsin, and south-

ward to Florida and Texas.

Var. gracilis, n. var. Culms slender, 15 inches to two feet long ; fasci-

cles few-flowered, small, the lower of but two or three flowers on very long,

filiform peduncles ; achenium not more than one-half the size of that of the

type, ovate, acutish.

Habitat, Leeds Point, N. J., Dr. Gray’s Herbarium ;—near

Haddonfield, N. J., A. H. Smith ;—Quaker Bridge, N. J.,

W. H. Leggett.

A. 8S. oligantha, Ell. Culms about two feet high, slender, triangular,

the angles somewhat winged ; leaves linear, about two lines wide, smooth ex-

cept their scabrous apices ; lateral fascicles one or two, mostly on long ex-

serted peduncles; bracts somewhat ciliate, scales ovate, cuspidate; achenium

ovate, obtuse but generally pointed ; perigynium a narrow obtusely trian-

gular border, supporting eight or nine small tubercles. Sketch, ii, 557 ;

Michx., Fl. N. A., ii, 167 (2); Eaton and Wright, 419 ; Torrey, Ann.

Lyc., iii, 377; Steud., Syn., 178; Chapman, 531; Boeckeler, Linnea, xxxviii,

462.

S. leptoculmi Wood, Class-book, 746 ; Bot. and Flor., 367.

Scleria, No. 4, Muhl., Gram., 268.

Revision of the Genus Scleria. 231

Habitat, Virginia to Florida, and through the Gulf States to

Texas.

Very distinct from S. pauciflora, Muhl., to which it has been

referred by Willdenow and Pursh. |

> SS. lithosperma, Willd., Sp. Pl., iv, 316; Var. filiformis. Culms

slender, smooth, one to two feet long; leaves narrowly linear, somewhat

scabrous on the margins and keel ; sheaths ciliate at the throat ; clusters

2-8, distant, erect, each interruptedly spicate ; the upper with setaceous

bracts, the lowest remote and leafy-bracted ; scales lanceolate, acuminate,

with rough points ; achenium smooth and glossy, oblong or obovate, desti-

tute of pores ; base small, triangular ; perigyniumnone. Whole plant some-

what glaucous.

S. lithosperma, Willd., (emend. ) veal 2, Boeckeler, Linnza, xxxviii, 452.

S. gracilis, Richard, Act. Soc. Hist. Nat. Paris, i, 113, ( Willd .fide)

S purpurea. Poiret, Encycl., vii, 4; Sprengel, Syst. Veg., iii, 832.

S. filiformis, Swartz, Fl, Ind. Occ., i, 91; Sprengel, Syst. Veg., iii, 832 ;

Steud., Syn., 172; Kunth, Enum., ii, 348; Willd., Sp. Pl., iv, 316; Chap-

man, 582; Grisebach, Fl. Br. W. I., 579; Dietrich, Syn. Plant., v, 251.

Hypoporum purpurascens, Nees, Linnea, ix, 303.

Habitat, Southern Florida. Also in Cuba and throughout

the West Indies.

The type is native to Australia, the East Indies and Southern

Asia; our plant differs from it mainly in its more slender habit.

** Achenium reticulated or irregularly rugose.

6, S. reticularis, Michx. Culms slender, erect, triangular, scabrous,

particularly below, or nearly smooth, one to two and a half fect high ; leaves

linear, one to one and a half lines wide, smooth ; lateral fascicles of spike-

lets one to three, remote, nearly erect, on short, often included peduncles,

loosely flowered ; bracts and scales glabrous, the latter mucronate ; ache.

nium globose, distinctly reticulated, its reticulations quadrangular-oblong,

pitted; perigynium conspicuous, 3-lobed, its lobes acute or somewhat obtuse,

appressed to the hase of the achenium.

232 Revision of the Genus Scleria.

Fl. N. A., ii, 167; Sprengel, Syst. Veg., iii, 831; Willd., Sp. Pl. iv,

314 ; Eaton and Wright, 419 ; Torrey, Ann. Lyc., iii, 375; Flor. N. Y.. ii,

367; Gray, Manual, 570 ; Chapman, 531 ; Wood, Class-book, 747 ; Biitedig:

Flor., 368 ; Beeckeler, Linnea, xxxvili, 467.

S dictyocarpa, Grisebach, Cat. Plant. Cuben., 249.

Habitat, Eastern Massachusetts and Rhode Island to Florida.

Also in Cuba (Plante Cubenses Wrightiane, No. 3416 a).

Var. pubescens, n. var. Edges of the reticulations more or less hairy,

especially towards the apex of the achenium ; lateral fascicles generally on

longer peduncles.

_ S. trichopoda, C. Wright, Plantee Cubenses. No. 3803. Name not in Grise.

bach’s Cat. Plant. Cuben.

Habitat, New Jersey Pine Barrens to Florida. Also in Cuba.

(C. Wright No. 3800.) Often distributed as S. Jaza, Torr., (S.

Torreyana, Walpers), from forms of which species it can gene-

rally be distinguished by the absence of transverse or spiral ridges

on the achenium.

Var. obscura, n. var. Achenium bony. its surface marked with very ob-

scure reticulations, nearly even at the summit.

Habitat, Salem, North Carolina, Schweinitz; Rhode Island,

Thurber and Calder. All the specimens of this well-marked

form which have come under my notice are in the herbarium of

the Philadelphia Academy of Natural Sciences.

Var. pumila, un. var. Culms only 4 to 6 inches high, smooth ; leaves

linear, short, smooth; fascicles of but a single fertile and two or three

sterile flowers, sessile or very short-peduncled ; achenium very nearly as in

the type.

Habitat, Orizaba, Mexico, Botter, No. 774.

This species, as Dr. Torrey has already pointed out,* is closely

allied to S. tessellata, Willd., of the East Indies, tropical Asia

and Australia, differing mainly in its smaller size, more slender

habit, and its fewer, smaller, nearly sessile lateral clusters. ‘The

achenium is practically the same in each.

* Ann. Lyc., iii, 376.

Revision of the Genus Scleria. 233

7. §S§. Torreyana, Walpers. Culms weak, diffuse, slightly scabrous

or smooth ; leaves linear, two to four lines wide, smooth ; lateral fascicles

on more or less elongated filiform peduncles, loosely flowered ; scales and

bracts smooth ; achenium globose, somewhat pointed, irregularly rugose

with ridges arranged in a somewhat spiral manner, or by the anastomosing

of these with shorter longitudinal ridges, somewhat or even distinctly reticu-

lated, its ridges more or less hairy, or sometimes smooth ; perigynium

three-lobed, the lobes acutish and appressed. Ann., iii, 696; Beeckeler,

Linnea, xxxviii, 468.

S. reticularis. Muhl., Gram., 266 ; Pursh, Flor. Amer. Sept., i, 45; Ell,

Sketch, ii, 560 ; Kunth, Enum., ii, 348; Dietrich, Syn. Plant., v, 252.

S. laxa, Torrey, Ann. Lyc., iii, 376; Flor. N. Y., ii, 868; Gray, Manual,

570 ; Chapman, 531 ; Wood, Class-book, 747 ; Bot. and Flor., 368. (Not of

R. Brown).

S. Muhlenbergii, Steud., Syn., 173.

S. hemitaphra, Steud., Syn., 169.

ar: debilis, Wright, Plante Cubenses, No. 3416 pp., a form with smooth

achenia.

S. bracteata, Cav.; var. angusta, Griseb., Flor. Br. W. I., 579.

_ Habitat, Pine-Barrens of New Jersey to Florida, and through

the Gulf States to Mexico. Also in Cuba (Plante Cubenses

Wrightiane, Nos. 3802, 3416, 720).

*** Achenium pupillose or warty.

8. S. ciliata. Michx. Culms one to two feet high, slender, smooth,

or more usually scabrous or hairy above ; leaves narrowly linear, smooth or

pubescent ; sheaths hairy ; inflorescence generally a single terminal cluster;

sterile spikes large; bracts conspicuously ciliate ; achenia globose or glo-

bose-ovoid, pointed, roughened with scattered unequal warty projections

or ridges, those at the base larger and deflexed ; perigynium a narrow

obtusely triangular border, supporting three hemispherical entire tubercles.

Flor. N. A., ii, 167; Willd., Sp. Pl., iv, 318; Pursh, Fl. Amer. Sept.,

i, 46; Ell., Sketch, ii, 559; Torrey, Ann. Lyc., iii, 378; Dietrich, Syn.

Plant., v, 252; Kunth, Enum., ii, 350; Eaton and Wright, 419; Steud.,

Syn., 173 ; Wood, Class-book, 746; Bot. and Flor., 367; Chapman, 531 ;

Darby, 564; Boeckeler, Linnea, xxxviii, 463.

Habitat, South Carolina to Florida.

S. ciliata is in its fruit-characters very similar to S. pauciflora,

especially resembling the var. Alliottii of the latter species. It

234 Revision of the Genus Scleria.

may generally be distinguished by its solely terminal inflorescence

and by the three distinct and entire tubercles above the perigyn-

jum. In all the forms of S. pauciflora there are either six, or

three two-lobed, tubercles. , = .

9. S. paucifiora, Muh]. Culm slender, erect, 9—24 inches high, |

smoothish or hairy ; leaves narrowly linear, smoothish ; sheaths more or

less pubescent ; fascicles few-flowered, the lateral sessile or pedunculate or

sometimes absent ; bracts more or less ciliate, glumes acute or acuminate,

naked ; achenium globose-ovate, the papillz toward the base elongated and

depressed ; perigynium a narrow obtusely-triangular border, supporting six

small globose tubercles somewhat approximated in pairs.

In Willd., Sp. Pl., iv, 318 ; Gram., 267; Pursh, Flor. Amer. Sept., i, 46 ;

Ell., Sketch, ii, 559; Darlingt., Flor. Cestr., 2nd Ed., 26; 3d Ed., 344;

Spreng., Syst. Veg., ili, 832 ; Eaton and Wright, 419; Torrey, Ann. Lyc.,

iii, 377; Compend., 849; Flor. N. Y., ii, 369; Kunth., Enum., ii, 349;

Dietrich, Syn. Plant., v, 252; Beck, 480; Eaton, 454; Gray, Manual, 571 ;

Chapman, 531 ; Steud., Syn., 173 ; Wood, Class-book, 746 ; Bot. and Flor,

367 ; Boeckeler, Linnea, xxxviii, 461.

S. Oakesiana, Robbins in Gray Herbarium.

Habitat, New Hampshire to Ohio, and southward to Florida

and Texas. Also in Cuba (Plante Cubenses Wrightiane, No.

3799).

Var. Caroliniana, Wood. Stems very slender, pubescent, as also the

sheaths and leaves ; achenium wrinkled or papillose.

Bot. and Flor., 368.

S. Caroliniana, Willd., Sp. Pl., iv, 318; Torrey, Ann. Lyc., iii, 379;

Steud., Syn., 179; Kunth., Enum., ii, 359; Darby, 564; Dietrich, Syn.

Plant., v, 254.

Spermodon, sp., Endlicher, Gen. Pl., 114.

S. hirtella, Michx., Fl. N. A., ii, 168(?); Eaton and Wright, 419; Ell.,

Sketch, ii, 560.

S. pauciflora, var. hirtella, Chapm. in Herb.

Habitat, South Carolina and Florida.

Var. Eliottii, Wood. Culms stout, erect, densely rough-pubescent on

the angles, leaves broader than in the type, hairy ; sheaths pubescent ;

lobes of the perigynium three, each two-lobed.

Bot. and Flor., 368.

Revision of the Genus Scleria, 235

&. Eliiottii, Chapman, 531.

S. hirtella, Michx, Fl. N. A., ii, 168(7).

S. hirtella, Michx., var. strigosa, Ell., Sketch, ii, 560; Eaton and Wright,

419.

Habitat, North Carolina to Florida, and through the Gulf

States to Texas and the Indian Territory. Also in Cuba (Plan-

te Wrightiane, No, 3798).

Var. glabra. Chapman. Smooth throughout, or the leaves and bracts

somewhat scabrous at the suinmit ; processes of the perigynium three, each

two-lobed ; achenium wrinkled or papillose.

Flor. South. States, 532; Wood, Bot. and Flor., 368.

Var. B, Torrey, Ann. Lyc., iii, 378.

< apitat, North Carolina to Florida.

Var. elongata, pn. var. Smooth throughout ; stems very slender, two

to two and a half feet long, diffuse ; achenium as in the last variety.

Habitat, Georgia, Florida.

(C.) INFLORESCENCE INTERRUPTEDLY GLOMERATE-SPICATE.

* Achenium smooth ; pistillate scales bristly.

10. S. hirtella, Swartz. Culms 6—19 inches high, slender, smooth or

nearly so ; leaves linear and, with their sheaths, hairy ; clusters of flowers

48, sessile, erect or nodding ; scales of the fertile flowers oval or lanceo-

late, cuspidate ; those of the sterile flowers Janceolate or linear, pointless,

glabrous ; achenium globose, half a line broad. pointed, its base somewhat

attenuated, triangular, each side furnished with from 5—7 minute pores :

perigynium none.

Fl. Ind. Occ., i, 93 ; Sprengel, Syst. Veg., ili, 832; Kunth., Enum., ii.

300; Steud., Syn., 175; H. B. K., Nov. Gen. et Sp. Pl., i, 132; Grise-

bach, Fl. Br. W. L., 579; Dietrich, Syn. Plant., v, 253 ; Boeckeler, Linnea,

XxXXviil, 439.

S. humile, Nees, Linnzea, 1x, 303.

S, distans, Poiret, Encycl., vii, 4; Kunth., Enum., ii, 353 ; Steud., Syn.,

176 ; Dietrich, Syn. Plant., v, 253.

S. nutans, Kunth, Enum., ii, 351; Steud., Syn., 175; Dietrich, Syn.

Plant., v, 252.

S. mollis, Kunth, Enum., ii, 352; Steud., Syn., 175; Dietrich, Syn.

Plant., v, 252.

236 Revision of the Genus Scleria.

S. cenchroides, Kunth, Enum., ii, 352; Steud., Syn., 175 ; Dietrich, Syn.

Plant., v, 252.

S. interrupta, Michx., Fl. N. A., ii, 168 (fide Torrey, Ann. Lyc., iii, 388) ;

Wood, Class-book, 747; Bot. and Flor., 368. a

S. Michauxii, Chapman, 532.

Hypoporum hirtellum, Nees, Linnea, ix, 303 ; Mart., Flor. Bras., ii, Part

rt 70) k

H. humile, Nees, Linnea, ix, 303.

FH, nutans, Nees, in Mart., Flor. Bras., ii, Pt. i, 170.

H., interruptum, Nees, Linnea, ix, 303; Torrey, Ann. Lyc., iii, 382.

Habitat, Florida to Louisiana. Also in Mexico, Central

America, Columbia, Peru, Chili, Venezuela, Guiana, Brazil, the

West Indies, and Middle and Southern Africa. *

Var. pauciciliata, n. var. Scales sparingly ciliate-bristly or nearly

naked.

Cuba, Plante Cubenses Wrightianz, No. 3418, mixed with S.

tenella, Kunth, in Dr. Gray’s Herbarium.

* Pursh records S. hirtella, Willd., in Flor. Amer. Sept., i, 46, as growing

‘‘in dry woods on slate rocks: Virginia, Carolina. The smallest species.”’

Dr. Torrey notes on the margin ‘‘Pursh’s plant in Herb. Lamb. is Isolepis

stenophylla.”’

Here may be noted :—

S. interrupta, Richard. Closely resembles S. hirtella, Swartz, differing in

the transversely tuberculate-rugose achenium.

Act. Soc. Hist. Nat. Paris, i, 113; Flor. Abyss., 511 (fide Beckeler) ;

Kunth, Enum., ii, 352; Willd., Sp. Pl. iv, 318; Steud., Syn., 175; Darby,

564; Pursh, Flor. Amer. Sept., i, 45; Dietrich, Syn. Plant., v, 252.

S. Kunthiana, Steud., Syn., 176.

8S. verticillata, Kunth, Enum., ii, 353 ; Dietrich, Syn. Plant., v, 253.

S. hirtella, Swartz, var. Y, Beeckeler, Linnea, Xxxvili, 441.

I have seen no specimens of this plant from North America. though it has

been recorded by several authors. It occurs in Cuba (Plantz Cubenses

Wrightiane without a number, and mixed with S. verticillata, Muhl.), and

was originally described from specimens collected in French Guiana. Beeck-

eler (Linnea, xxxviii, 441), reduces it to a variety of S. hirtella, Swartz, but

I regard it as a distinct species. The.achenium is very similar to that of S.

verticillata,

Revision of the Genus Scleria. 237

** Achenium with short, transverse ridges, or by additional

longitudinal ridges, somewhat reticulated ; scales naked.

fi. S. verticillata, Muhl. Culms slender, simple, 4—24 inches high,

smooth ; leaves narrowly linear and, with their sheaths, smooth, or some-

what hairy ; clusters of flowers 3—9, sessile, generally erect ; bracts seta-

ceous ; scales smooth ; achenium globose, half a line broad, somewhat tri-

angular at the base, its sides destitute of pores ; perigynium none.

In Willd., Sp. Pl., iv, 317; Gram., 266 ; Ell., Sketch, ii, 561 ; Pursh, Flor.

Amer. Sept., i, 45; Spreng , Syst. Veg., iii, 832 ; Eaton and Wright, 419 ;

Torrey, Compend., 349 ; Flor. N. Y., ii, 369; Steud., Syn., 176; Eaton,

454 ; Gray, Manual, 571 ; Chapman, 532 ; Wood, Class-book, 747 ; Bot. and

Flor., 368 ; Beeckeler. Linnea, xxxviii, 445.

Hypoporum verticillatum, Nees, Linnea, ix, 303; Torrey, Ann. Lyc., iii,

384.

Habitat, Long Island, Eastern Massachusetts, Southern Cana-

da, Michigan and southward. Also in Texas, Mexico, and Cuba.

I have found the achenium of this species reticulated only in

southern specimens ; the northern forms produce achenia which

are marked with short, distinct, transverse ridges; in a plant

from Biscayne Bay, Florida, (E. Palmer, 1874) nuts with each

style of ornamentation occur.

It is allied to the Kast Indian and African S. pergracilts,

Kunth, Enum., 1), 354, as has been remarked by Dr. Torrey

(Ann. Lye., 111, 384), which may however be distinguished by its

rather tuberculate acheninm, and oblong or ovate bracts. *

* Here may be noted

S, tenella, Kunth, Enum., ii, 352: Culms slender ; inflorescence branched

or simple ; achenium finely reticulated, one half the size of that of S. verti-

cillata.

Beeckeler (Linnea, xxxviii, 446), unites this species with the last ; but I

believe them to be distinct. 8. tenella grows in Cuba, Mexico, Columbia,

Guiana and Brazil. It is figured in Mart., Flor. Bras.,i, pt. ii, 171, t. 9,

fig. 2. 8. verticillata is said by Beckeler (ibid.), to occur in Sierra Leone ;

but as he regards the species as inseparable, I cannot say which is meant.

I have seen no African specimens of either.

238 Hanksite, a new Anhydrous Sulphato- Carbonate.

X.—On Hanksite, a new Anhydrous Sulphato- Ca biibee from

San Bernardino County, California.

BY WM. EARL HIDDEN.

Read May 25th, 1885:

In the very complete and attractive exhibit of California min-

erals brought: to the World’s Industrial and Cotton Centennial

Exposition at New Orleans, by Prof. Henry G. Hanks, State

Mineralogist of California, were several species of unusual in-

terest.

Among these, was the new borate, Colemanite, with its large

and lustrous crystals so much resembling the finest of the Ber-

gen Hill datolites; the new vanadium mica, Roscoelite, mixed

as it 1s mechanically with much native gold between its folia ;

borax crystals, clear and bright, of unusual size; stibnite in su-

perb crystals almost equalling the late discoveries in this species

in Japan, and many others equally noteworthy, and to which I

may refer in a separate paper later.

Of particular interest to the writer was a small lot of appa-

rently hexagonal crystals to which had been given the name of

««Thenardite.” Now as Thenardite is asserted in the text books

to be orthorhombic, I was prompted to measure the angles of these

crystals. Their seeming non- -conformity in shape pointed to

the possibility of their being new—in angle, or type of form,

especially. The results confirmed my first suspicions of their

true hexagonal character, though my measurements were only

approximate, being made with a hand goniometer. |

Since the hexagonal character of the mineral, which seemed so

evident, might possibly be due to complex twinning of ortho-

rhombic individuals, it seemed advisable to have this question

decided on the basis of an optical examination ; and for this pur-

pose three of the best crystals were kindly given by Prof. Hanks,

and sent by me to Dr. Edward. 8. Dana for that exact crystallo-

graphic definition needed in this case, and which he always so

Hanksite, a new Anhydrous Sulphato- Carbonate. 239

ably and generously gives to science. ‘The crystals sent being

quite clear, Dr. Dana was, in a few days, enabled to report them

“fas uniaxial (double refraction negative) and that normally,”

and thus their positive difference from Thenardite was proven

beyond question. ‘They were true hexagonal crystals. Believing

now the mineral to be either a dimorphous form of sodium sul-

phate, or possibly an entirely new species, an analysis seemed

necessary. Accordingly I placed sufficient material in the hands

of Mr. James B. Mackintosh, KE. M., for that purpose, and he

has very kindly done the work. His results showed the mineral

to contain the following substances :

SO, : - - | 43,89

COV ys - - 5.42

Cl. : : - 2.36

*Na,O - - - 46.34

Corresponding to

Na, SO, . - 81.45

Na, CO, - - - 13.06

Na Cl - - . 3.89

Na, O (excess) - 1.08

99.48

These results give the following molecular ratios for

MeO ee ei BY.3-) | 3.95

NaeG One. b) kom 14S 11.00

pa ns) Genet 2 46

Ae fe 94 foe (ede

Or closely in the ratio of 4:1:%3:4. This all points to the for-

mula, |

4 (Na, SO,) + 1 (Na, CO,) + 4 (Na Cl)

as representing the composition of the crystals under examina-

tion. Or, neglecting the sodium chloride as non-essential, the

formula could be given thus:—

4.Na, SO, + Na, CO,

which is probably the true one.

* All bases calculated as soda. Lime and magnesia were not present.

240 Hanksite, a new Anhydrous Sulphato- Carbonate.

The observed excess of soda is either due to errors of analysis.

as only a small quantity was used, or it may have been combined

with boracic acid, as borax is very abundant at the locality.

The interesting anomaly of a sulphate and carbonate being in

chemical combination reminds us of the rare sulphato-carbonate

of lead, Leadhillite, to which this alone bears relation as a natu-

ral species.

The angles I obtained were as follows :-—

OGn' "50" O on 1 = 130° 30’

1 on ft e- 0: on 2°— Tiss se

Accordingly the value of the vertical axis is 1.17085. Cleavage

parallel to O nearly perfect, but difficult to obtain.

Crystals striated horizontally. They are commonly terminated

at both ends of the prism and are very symmetrical in shape.

They average, as thus far seen, about one centimeter in length

and thickness, with O and I as predominating planes (see

ne, Ty:

Sometimes the crystals are confusedly grouped (see fig. 2),

as from a common centre, much like the Aragonite from a

noted European locality. For some late years mineralogists have

received from several localities in the far West, groups of crystals

that were hexagonal (tabular) in appearance, very impure in com-

position, and to which the name of Aragonite has been attached.

For the most part they are simply calcium carbonate mixed with

sand and mud, and are without cleavage. It is very probable

that they are pseudomorphs after the sodium sulphato-carbonate

Hanksite, a new Anhydrous Sulphato- Carbonate. 241

here described. In particular I refer to crystals which I have

seen credited to Colorado and to Nevada.

The crystals here analysed were found with salt, henardite,

tineal, ete., at the works of the San Bernardino Borax Co., in

San Bernardino County, California.

The density of this new California mineral is 2.562. Its

hardness, 3.-3.5. It is readily soluble in water. Effervesces

with acids. It affords, when dissolved in water, an abundant

precipitate of barium sulphate when barium chloride is added to

the solution. On addition of silver nitrate, to a fresh solution,

chloride of silver is precipitated, showing that chlorine is also

present. Gentle ignition developes no appreciable loss in the

weight of the mineral.

The crystals are transparent to semi-opaque, with a white

waxy color inclining to yellow. Surfaces never highly polished

or very smooth.

The definite formula deduced from Mr. Mackintosh’s analysis,

taken together with the form, warrants me in announcing these

crystals as a new mineral species. I therefore propose for it

the name of Hanksite, after Prof. Henry G. Hanks, of Califor-

nia, than whom no man has done more to give to the world a

correct knowledge of the minerals of the great States of our

Pacitic coast.-

Newark, N. J., May 23, 1885.

Hanksite, a neu Anhydrous Sulphato- Carbonate. 241

here described. In particular I refer to crystals which I have

seen creditcd to Colorado and to Nevada.

The crystals here analysed were found with salt, Thenardite,

tincal, ete., at the works of the San Bernardino Borax Co., in

San Bernardino County, California.

The density of this new California mineral. is 2.562. — Its

hardness, 3.-3.5. It is readily soluble in water. HEffervesces

with acids. It affords, when dissolved in water, an abundant

precipitate of barium sulphate when barium chloride is added to

the solution. On addition of silver nitrate, to a fresh solution,

chloride of silver is precipitated, showing that chlorine is also

present. Gentle ignition developes no appreciable loss in the

weight of the mineral.

The crystals are transparent to semi-opaque, with a white

waxy color inclining to yellow. Surfaces never highly polished

or very smooth. |

The definite formula deduced from Mr. Mackintosh’s analysis,

taken together with the form, warrants me in announcing these

crystals as a new mineral species. I therefore propose for it

the name of Hanksite, after Prof. Henry G. Hanks, of Califor-

nia, than whom no man has done more to give to the world a

correct knowledge of the minerals of the great States of our

Pacific coast.

Newark, N. J., May 23, 1885.

242 Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad.

X1.— Notes on the Geology and Botany of the Country bordering —

the Northern Pacific Railroad. ti

BY J. S. NEWBERRY.

Read February 4th, 1884. ee

Having been several times over the line of the Northern

Pacific R. R., and through the country bordering the lower

Columbia and Puget’s Sound, and having found some things

that were of interest to me, I venture to offer a few notes upon

them to the members of the Academy.

Going west from Duluth to Brainerd, the line of the road for

the most part lies in what is evidently the old deserted bed of a

westward extension of Lake Superior. The ground is still low

and swampy, and much of the surface is formed of what is un-

mistakably lake sand.

From Chicago through Wisconsin and Minnesota, the road

passes over an almost unbroken sheet of drift, which though of

great interest, has been so fully illustrated in the able reports of

Messrs. Chamberlin, Winchell and Upham, that nothing further

need be said here in regard to it. At various points the true

till is seen, with its striated pebbles; and one such exposure is

within reach of every traveler, at Audubon. Beyond this, the

boulders are scattered over the surface, and pebbles in the

ditches continue as evidence of the transport of material from

the eastern highlands. About Bismarck the boulders, though

fewer, are still not rare, and are gathered in groups, as elsewhere

along the margin of the drift area, constituting a kind of fringe,

and suggesting their transport by ice floats. The last of these

boulders is seen at Sims, about 20 miles from Bismarck. From

this point to the crossing of the Little Missouri, one could hardly

find a stone to throw at a bird, or a shrub big enough to make

a tooth-pick. This region is an extension northward of that

broader prairie area which I have crossed in many places further

Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad, — 243

south. Here, between the eastern drift and that from the

Rocky Mountains, the soil is formed entirely by the decomposi-

tion of the underlying rocks; and wherever these are shales and

calcareous sandstones, as they are throughout most of the Creta-

ceous formation, there are no outcropping ledges of rock, the

country is smooth, and stone of all kinds is scarce.

This belt, which runs from the Mexican to the Canadian line,

is prairie because of the dryness of the climate, and not on ac-

count of the geological substructure ; for, between the ‘‘ Cross-

timbers” and the Raton Mountains, with a great variety of geol-

ogy and topography, there are no trees except along the water-

courses ; which, fed by the melting of the snow on the Rocky

Mountains, are perennial, and supply constantly the amount cf

moisture that is a necessity for tree growth. The peculiar fine-

ness of the soil of the northern portion of this belt has been sup-

posed to have something to do with the prevalence of grass and

the absence of trees; since 1n Illinois and Wisconsin, along the

border line between the forest area and the prairie, the levels

where the soil is fine are grass-covered, while the swells and ridges,

rocky or gravelly, carry trees; but as I have shown elsewhere,

these local peculiarities of the soil, favoring, the first grass and

the second trees, have simply caused the interlocking of prairie

and forest along the debatable line.

Further west, with every kind of soil, geological structure and

topography, there are no trees, but everywhere grass ; while east

of the Mississippi and beyond the ba tle-ground between the two

forms of vegetation, all kinds of topography, soil and geological

substructure are covered with forest. Noone who has traversed

the continent, as I have done, along several parallels of latitude,

and has studied the relations of vegetation to soi] and geological

structure, will fail to find conclusive evidence that the influence

which has determined the kind and quantity of vegetation in the

varied topographic and climatic districts of the West, is the

rainfall.

The valley of the Little Missouri is deeply cut in a table-land

composed of the Laramie coal-measures, of which 200 or 300 feet

are exposed in the cliffs, with several seams of coal. Thousands

of silicified tree-trunks lie scattered over the surface, and innu-

merable stumps are standing apparently where they grew ; but

no foreign material is anywhere visible.

244 = Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad.

A few miles below the railroad crossing, the valley. expands

and opens into the famous mawvaises terres, or ‘bad lands of

the Missouri.” The course of that stream is here nearly east and —

west ; and the valleys of the tributaries running north and south,

coalesce, and form in the old lake-bed a picturesque but danger-

ous labyrinth. Se.

As soon as one enters the valley of the Yellowstone, he finds

himself surrounded by transported material. Gravel and bould-

ers of crystalline, sedimentary and volcanic rocks form the bed

and bars of the river, increasing in coarseness and quantity all

the way to Livingston ; but in all this material I was unable to

find anything that was to me even presumably of eastern origin.

Dr. C. A. White, (Am. Journal of Sci., vol. XX V, 1883, p. 206.)

reports finding what he considers eastern glacial drift along the

valley of the Missouri and that of the Yellowstone ; but my

search for such material was vain. As will be seen further on,

I found in the valley of the Missouri about the Falls, great quan-

tities of drift with boulders of fossiliferous limestone, quartzite,

gneiss and granite, all remarkably like the Eastern drift, but -

which I subsequently traced to their places of origin in the Belt

Mountains. | |

The surface geology of the Yellowstone Park has been de-

scribed in considerable detail by Mr. W. H. Holmes and Mr.

A. C. Peale; but I was surprised to find the traces of glacial

action so wide-spread and unmistakable. It is probably not

too much to say that every valley of the Park was once filled

with ice; for moraines, boulders, glacial lakes, and more rarely

glacial strive, give testimony that cannot be disputed. Ice-borne

blocks are seen on the sides of the Yellowstone valley, below

the mouth of Gardner’s River ; and about Mammoth Hot Springs,

every depression once held a glacier. Swan Lake is of glacial

origin, and is bounded on the south by a moraine, while lateral

moraines and striated rock-surfaces mark the old ice-level

high up on the sides of the valley. Near Marshall’s, the

road leads over a succession of great moraines of clay and

boulders, which continue to and around the Fire Hole basin,

and prove that this also was once largely filled with ice. From

all that I could learn, the evidences of glacial action, found here

in the lowest portion of the Park, may be traced through all

parts of it. ,

Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad. 245

Between Livingston and Bozeman, the railroad passes over a

spur of the Rocky Mountains composed chiefly of Palaeozoic lime-

stones, part of which are Carboniferous. Above these are red

beds which probably represent the Jurassic and Triassic, and still

higher Luramie rocks with coal, apparently the same section ex-

posed in Cinnabar Mountain, in the valley of the Yellowstone

just north of the Park. ‘The strata are very much disturbed,

the coal much crushed and twisted, so that it works small, but

it is extensively mined for use on and along the railroad, and is

esteemed a good fuel. Fossil plants associated with the coal,

prove it to be of the same age with that exposed in the cliffs at

the crossing of the Little Missouri. One feature of the Bozeman

coal it has in common with some of that from much disturbed

beds in Washington Territory and Colorado. It contains a large

quantity of yellow, translucent amber-like resin, in seams and

patches. As this occurs in the joints of the coal, it is evidently

a secondary product resulting from its partial distillation.

DRIFT OF THE UPPER MISSOURI.

The Missouri River, formed by the union of the Madison, the

Gallatin and the Jefferson, at Gallatin City, traverses with a

north-westerly and then northerly course, the valley between the

Rocky and Belt Mountains, and finds its way out to the plains

by a long circuit around the northern bases of the Belt and

Crazy Mountains, which belong to the Rocky Mountain system,

and constitute their eastern outliers. Cutting through barriers

formed by low interlocking spurs, at the ‘‘Gate of the Mount-

ains,” the river enters an undulating prairie country which ex-

tends from the north side of the Belt Mountains to and beyond

the Canadian line. All this region is occupied by a sheet of

drift that in thickness and extent rivals that of the plains sur-

rounding the Canadian highlands; but as far my observation

extended I found this to be of local origin.

At the Great Falls of the Missouri, the underlying rock is

fully exposed, but the drift sheet comes up to the edge of the

gorge and forms the low hills which stretch away to the east and

north like the long swells of the ocean. In the valleys of the

streams which come down to the Missouri from the Belt Moun-

246 Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad.

' 6

tains, the rock substructure is visible; but the intervening

plateaus are covered with a sheet of drift clay and boulders,

that varies greatly in thickness, as it is spread over a rock-sur-

face that was once deeply and irregularly eroded. For example,

near the Upper Falls of the Missouri, where the banks of the

river are perhaps a hundred feet high, of solid rock, a tributary.

coming in from the south cuts across an old valley filled with

drift which extends almost to the present river channel. At its

mouth, this tributary has high rocky banks; but a few hundred

yards above, they are altogether composed of drift. ‘his drift

is a true till, thickly set with boulders,. some of which are two

feet or more in diameter. They are usually rounded, sometimes

subangular, and are composed of gray or red granite, quartzite,

palzeozoic limestone, and a variety of eruptive rocks. ‘The re-

semblance of this drift to that from the Canadian highlands, is

so great that I was only convinced of its local origin when I

found all of its constituents in place in the Belt and Rocky

Mountains. ‘The granites were to my eye indistinguishable from

those of the eastern Laurentian series ; they are of Archean age,

as I subsequently learned ; and nothing but careful microscopic

examination will show them to be distinguishable, if they are so.

These facts lead me to suspect that even the very careful and

experienced observers who have reported the finding of eastern

Laurentian boulders on the flanks of the Rocky Mountains, 4,000

feet above the sea, may have been misled by this striking resem-.

blance. | é ?

On the undulating surface of the table-lands between the tribu-

taries of the Missouri, large boulders are occasionally seen, as in”

the States bordering the Great Lakes; and one of these, some-

what angular in form, has served so long as a rubbing-post for

the buffaloes which recently abounded in that region, that its

sides are all polished and a deep furrow is worn around it.

Immediately south of the Falls of the Missonri, an extensive —

coal-basin of Cretaceous (?) age is opened by the valleys of the

streams which come down from the Belt and Highwood Mount-

ains. ‘Two coal seams are exposed, one thin, the other from 12

to 18 feet in thickness, the latter a compound seam, some of the

benches of which are bright, pure coking coal.

The Falls of the Missouri, caused by beds of sandstones belong-

(reology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad. — 247%

ing to this coal formation, consist of a series of cascades having

an aggregate height of over 200 feet ; the lower fall is 98 feet,

the next 25, the next 40, the next 20, ete. They occupy the

whole breadth of the river, which is here about 1500 feet ; and

as the volume of water is large, they are exceedingly beautiful

and also furnish a water-power rivalling in magnitude that of

Niagara, and far more available.

GEOLOGY OF THE BELT MOUNTAINS.

The streams which flow into the Missouri from the Crazy and

Belt Mountains, form valleys which are remarkably picturesque

and of great geolugical interest. ‘The coal-basin to which I

have referred is underlain by paleeozoic limestones more than

two thousand feet thick. These rise toward the south, where

they rest upon the Cambrian and Archean nucleus of the

mountains. Deeply cut by the draining streams, they form the

walls of a series of narrow valleys or cafions, which, though less

impressive in magnitude, are more beautiful than those of the

Colorado. The limestones are sometimes blue, more generally

cream-colored, and lie in massive beds of 100 to 200 feet in

thickness ; these form a series of steps in the precipitous walls of

the valleys, from which project spires, castles, fortifications,

and other colossal imitations of human architecture. The light

cream tint of the prevailing limestone contrasts charmingly

with the dark green of the fir-trees that crown the summits and

cluster in picturesque groups wherever they can find a foothoid

on the declivity. Add to these elements a variety of minor

plants, which with varied colors decorate the cliffs, and the

whole forms a combination which in beauty surpasses anything

that I have elsewhere seen in somewhat extended wanderings

through the far West.

Cutting through the limestones and in places the coal-bearing

rocks, are eruptive dykes of three distinct kinds, which Mr. J.

P. Iddings has been kind enough to examine for me microscopi-

cally. He reports them to be, first, a typical augite-andesyte,

which forms the Bird Tail Divide and the upper portion of

‘** Square Butte,” a conspicuous landmark on the west side of the

Missouri ; second, a true trachyte, with large crysta!s of feldspar,

248 Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad.

much like that of the Drachenfels, at the head of Belt Creek ;

and third, a rhyolite, on the summit of Little Belt Mountain.

At Neihart, the centre of the Archean nucleus of the Little

Belt Mountains is reached. ‘The prevailing granite is reddish

and somewhat banded with brown and green, and though very

massive is indistinctly bedded and apparently metamorphic. It

is cut by enormous dykes of a very coarse and mottled granite,

consisting of obscurely rounded masses of feldspar separated by

hornblende and black mica. These granite rocks are traversed

by a great number of fissure-veins, generally with vein stones of

quartz, heavy spar, and oxide of manganese, and carrying sul-

phides of silver and lead ; the ores are rich but the veins small.

On the south side of the valley at Neihart the cliffs of granite,

1200 feet in height, are covered with a sheet of Potsdam sand-

stone several hundred feet in thickness, the contact being visible

for miles. ‘The sandstone is red, generally soft, but sometimes

a coarse and hard conglomerate. It here contains no fossils, but

is full of annelid borings (Scolithus), and has the aspect—as it

has the geological relations—of the Potsdam in the Black Hills

and in the Adirondacks. On the summit of the mountain, some

of the upper beds of sandstone are filled with, and largely com-

posed of, primordial trilobites.

The evidences of former glacial action in the Belt Mountains

are abundant but are not of a striking character. They con-

sist of beds of boulder clay, and in some of the higher val-

leys, of roches moutonnées or smoothly planed surfaces. Gla-

cial striz were not observed, AYRE been obliterated by wea-

thering.

All the upper portion of the Belt Mountains is covered with a

dense forest composed of Douglas’s and Engelmann’s spruces,

Abies Douglasii, and A. EHngelmanni, the balsam fir, Abies

concolor, and Pinus contorta. In places, the trees are heavily

draped with tufts and streamers of the jet-black fibres of Alec-

toria sarmentosa; while many trees and particularly dry

branches are decorated with bunches of the lemon-yellow Zver-

nia vulpina. Lower down on the mountain are scattered trees

of Pinus ponderosa.

The valley of Smith’s River separates the Great Belt from the

Little Belt Mountains. It is as picturesque and beautiful as the

Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad. — 249

valleys on the north side of the mountains, but is quite different

in aspect. ‘The sides generally are smooth and unbroken slopes,

1500 feet or more in height, covered with rich grass and pre-

senting no rock exposures. ‘The summits of the hills are crowned

with evergreens which here and there creep down the ravines,

of which they occupy, in preference, the slopes having a north-

ern exposure, because here the snow les deepest and longest,

supplying the greatest amount of moisture. The cause of the

peculiar topography of the valley of Smith’s River is to be found

in its geological substructure, for it is cut all the way to Sulphur

Springs, in Cambrian rocks, which form a series several thousand

feet in thickness. They are mostly argillaceous shales or slates,

which break down together and form gentle slopes.

Sulphur Springs is a well-built, handsome town, of several

thousand inhabitants, gathered around hot springs which have

a high reputation for their medicinal properties. From Sulphur

Springs we crossed the southern extension of the Great Belt

Mountains to the valley of the Missouri at Townsend. ‘The

range is here altogether composed of the Cambrian (?) slates

which form the banks of Smith River,—probably the same series

that is cut by the somewhat famous and picturesque Prickly

Pear Cafion on the west side of the Missouri. In some places

these slates are compacted by local metamorphism into masses of

considerable hardness, but generally they are rather soft, fine

grained argillo-silicious rocks, blue or gray in color, and finely

laminated by planes of deposition. Occasionally a harder layer,

an inch or two in thickness, is more silicious and rings like

novaculite. These rocks have suffered no change which would

obliterate fossils, and look as promising as any shales; but the

most careful search failed to detect a single fossil in them, al-

though specks of carbonaceous matter were often seen, and some

shadowy outlines that suggest sea-weeds. ‘There is little doubt

that this is the same formation with that seen beneath the Pots-

dam in Little Cottonwood Cafion near Salt Lake City, and in

the Cafion of the Colorado,—a formation considered Cambrian by

King, Powell and Walcott, and which has yielded the latter a

few fossils, but is universally barren and disappointing. It does

not occur between the Potsdam sandstone and the granite in

the Belt Mountains, for the same reason that the ‘‘ Georgia

250 Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad.

slates’ do not underlie the Potsdam in the Adirondacks, viz.,

because the Potsdam is a sheet of sea-beach, produced by a wide-

spread, almost continental, depression of the land, or general ele-

vation of the sea-level, which carried the shore-line inland beyond

the areas where the Cambrian rocks had accumulated. —

The valley of the Missouri about Gallatin, and for nearly 100.

miles below, is very broad and fertile, and is generally occupied

by farmers or stock-raisers. Wheat, rye, and especially oats are

successfully cultivated, but mainly by irrigation. All the low-

lands and the foot-hills of the mountains are covered with a fine

growth of bunch-grass, blue-stem and grama, upon which cattle,

sheep and horses are well sustained throughout the year. The

winters are long and severe, but not more so than in Minnesota,

and the snow-fall is somewhat less. ‘The stock is not generally

fed or housed, though it would be more merciful and probably

more economical to provide some shelter.

THE Rocky MouNTAINS.

Helena, the capital of Montana, is a well-built and wealthy

town of some 8,000 inhabitants, located in and about the mouth

of Last Chance Gulch, one of the famous gold-camps in he

time of placer mining.

The foot-hills of the first range of the Rocky Mountains, here

and northward to the British line, are composed of the paleo-

zoic rocks which surround the Belt Mountains. About Helena,

they are generally limestones, somewhat metamorphosed, but

not much broken up. ‘The various ravines which lead to the

Missouri valley, head in the granite rocks of the core of the

range; and near these, the paleozoic series is very much dis-

turbed. The granites, as well as some of the sedimentary

rocks, are traversed by many mineral veins, some of which are

auriferous and have furnished the large amount of gold that has

been taken from the gulches. Most of the mineral veins are,

however, silver-bearing, and these form a number of groups

where there are, or will hereafter be, prosperous mining camps.

At Wickes, twenty miles sonth of Helena, are numerous mines

now success.ully worked, and a very extensive plant for the

concentration and treatment of. the ores by smelting and Jeach-

Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad. — 251

ing. A branch of the N. P. R. R. runs up to Wickes, carrying

coke and other supplies at so cheap a rate as to give success to

enterprises which were before unprofitable. The ores worked

are argentiferous galena, containing much blende and pyrites.

The limestone series in this valley is underlain by heavy beds

of quartzite, which apparently represent the Potsdam sand-

stone.

Red Mountain, sixteen miles west of Helena, lies at the head

of another valley similar to that at Wickes; but the quartzites

are here less conspicuous; the limestones only becoming silicious

and flinty at their base. Red Mountain is cut by an immense

number of mineral veins, generally of small size,—from one to

six feet in thickness,—but exhibiting a remarkable uniformity

in direction and mineral characters. They are approximately

parallel, apparently continuous through the mountain, stand

nearly vertical, and carry argentiferous galena, gray copper,

zinc-blende and pyrites. ‘lhe veinstone is chiefly quartz, but in

some places consists almost entirely of black hornblende. The

ores generally carry from 25 to 100 ounces of silver, but the

gray copper, which is the richest, contains from 200 to 2,000

ounces per ton. Systematic mining operations are just begin-

ning here; and should a branch road be carried up to the

mines, it would seem that they must be productive and pro-

fitable.

After passing Helena, the line of the Pacific Railroad soon

turns into the mouniains and crosses the first or main range,

coming down on to the head waters of Clark’s Fork and enter-

ing a broad and fertile valley, which has its chief center of

population at Missoula. The western border of this valley is

formed by the Bitter Root Mountains, part of the broad belt

made up of the western ranges of the Rocky Mountain system.

All these consist of granite, broken through in many places by

eruptive rocks, and flanked by quartzites, slates and limestones,

which probably represent the Cambrian, Silurian and Carboni-

ferous systems. In the lowlands which he between the ranges,

there are basins of quite modern Tertiary rocks.

A few miles below Missoula the road crosses a series of

deep ravines, spanned by bridges, one of which is 211 feet in

height. ‘The rock exposed here is all slate of Archean or Cam-

252 = Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad.

brian age. Below this, the road closely follows the course of

Clark’s Fork, through one of the most picturesque valleys on the

continent. ‘T’he immediate banks of the river are often precipi-

tous masses of limestone, above which the wooded mountains

rise to the height of 3000 or 4000 feet. The course of the

railroad is northwest, until it approaches within fifty miles of.

the British line. This great deflection is caused by the western

ranges of the Rocky Mountains which are high and continuous

until the vicinity of Pend Oreille Lake is reached. Here they

fall off, and the road turns directly west through them. The

lake is an irregular sheet of water, crescent-shaped and fifty

miles in length ; set with numerous islands and surrounded with

mountains, it is extremely picturesque. ‘The mountains con-

sist of granite, flanked by slate, quartzite and limestone, all

much metamorphosed, but apparently the paleozoic series which

is seen holding the same relation to the granite in so many

places in Idaho and Montana.

The western range of the Rocky Mountains, like the eastern,

is metalliferous, but to what degree is hardly known, because

most of it is yet unexplored. Veins of argentiferous galena and

auriferous quartz have been found in the vicinity of Pend

Oreille Lake, and the already famous but greatly over-rated

Ceeur d’Alene mines lie a few miles south of the line of the road.

FORESTS OF THE Rocky MOUNTAINS.

The forest vegetation of the Rocky Mountains and the valley

of Clark’s Fork, is abundant and interesting. About Helena,

are seen the trees which are characteristic of the Park and all

the eastern flank of the Rocky Mountains. The round-leaved

cottonwood, Populus monilifera, with willows, the buffalo-berry,

Shepardia argentea, etc., flourish along the rivers ; Pinws ponde-

rosa and Douglas’s spruce in the foot hills; on the mountain-sides,

the narrow-leaved poplar and the aspen, (Populus angustifolia

and P. tremuloides) Engelmann’s spruce and the western balsam

fir; and Pinus contorta and Pinus flexilis on the mountain sum-

mits.

Immediately after passing the divide, however, the character-

istic elements of the Pacific coast vegetation begin to make their

Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad. — 253

appearance. Douglas’s spruce becomes more abundant, and the

trees grow larger, evidently feeling more at home, while the

western larch (Larix occidentalis), the western arbor vite (7Thu-

ja gigantea), the western hemlock (Tsuga mertensiana), and

Pinus monticola, never seen on the east side of the mountains,

multiply until they constitute the greater part of the forest.

The upper Columbia is the special home of the western Jarch

and the mountain pine. thongh they extend westward to and on

to the Cascade Mountains; but about the mouth of Clark’s Fork

they often constitute half the forest. The western hemlock be-

gins here with small trees, which have the aspect and indeed all

the characters of its eastern representative, of which it is in fact

only a variety. In the moist and equable climate of the lower

Columbia it acquires the greater size, smoother bark and more

fine-grained wood, which are its distinguishing characters.

The interval between the Rocky Mountains and the Cascades 1s

quite different in its topography, geological structure and vege-

tation from any region east of it. It is generally destitute of

trees, though a few scattered yellow pines reach out from the

Rocky Mountains on the one side and the Cascades on the other,

along this line, and though not numerous grow to a large size.*

In a general way this is a plain, but the monotony of the sur-

face is broken by a great number of low hills and knobs of

black or brown basalt, the product of the voleanic eruptions by

which the plain has been repeatedly flooded in Tertiary and

* Further south this arid belt is the special home of this tree. One hun-

dred miles south from the Columbia River, it forms continuous forests

where the trees, rooted in the light volcanic soil, closely set, are often four,

five or six feet in diameter. In these forests there is no other tree and

scarce any undergrowth. Here and there a clump of Cercocarpus or red

gooseberry is seen. The ground is usually bare, and so soft that horses

sink into it to the fetlocks. The absence of animal life is also striking : one

may travel through this forest an entire day and scarce hear the chirp of a

bird or the hum of an insect ; and yet the yellow pine is there in its glory,

its huge, cylindrical trunk covered with large plates of cinnamon-colored

bark, standing as they have done for ages waiting the advent of their insa-

tiable enemy, the railroad man, who will some day split their trunks for

ties and burn their branches for fuel ; and the forests of yellow pine, like

those of the redwood and white pine, will be gone from the face of the

earth.

254 Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad.

recent times. Between the rugged rock-masses are level spaces

dotted over with bunch grass, sage (Artemisia), and Linosyris.

The geological substructure consists of a series of Tertiary

beds of various kinds, sedimentary volcanic ash, washed: down —

from the highlands, and diatomaceous earth, interstratified with

sheets of basalt. It is evident that this belt was for a long

time, either wholly or in part, occupied by lakes. During

long periods of quiet, all forms of life were abundant ; the land

supported a varied growth of arborescent and herbaceous plants,

which furnished food to a great variety of animals, while the

water was inhabited by fishes and mollusks of many kinds.

At intervals, however, showers of ashes, mostly emanating from

the volcanic vents of the Cascade Mountains, covered the coun-

tay, destroyed, over large areas, all forms of animal and vege-

table life, and washing into the lakes, formed strata many feet

in thickness. At other times, floods of lava poured down into

this valley, spreading over the land and the lake-bottoms, to be

covered again in time with other sheets of stratified tufas, or by

fresh-water fossiliferous beds.

The Columbia, Snake River, John Day’s River, the Des

Chutes, and many minor streams, cut deeply into this plain,

and expose in their banks sections of the beds described. In

the valley of the Des Chutes, cliffs 1,000 feet in height are

formed of them; and about the Dalles, the remains of horizon-

tal Tertiary beds are seen 2,000 feet above the present level of

the Columbia. These show that the lofty and continuous chain

of the Cascades formed a mighty dam, which kept back the

drainage of the interior so that it formed a series of great lakes,

bounded on the east by the Rocky Mountains, and on the west

by the Cascades, and separated into several basins by the Blwe

Mountains and others of the desert ranges.

The accumulated water found an outlet to the sea through the

lowest gaps in the Cascade Mountains. Of these, the most im-

portant was that where the gorge of the Columbia is now situ-

ated ; others exist further south and are now traversed by the

the Klamath and Pit River (Sacramento). In the Columbia

basin, the old lakes are all drained, or filled, and their bottoms

are deeply scored by the draining streams. The lake of the Kla-

math basin is now represented by the Klamath Lakes, Rhett Lake,

Geology and Botany of Northern Pacifie Railroad. — 55

Wright Lake, Goose Lake, etc., which occupy the points of

greatest depression.

Though much of this great plain has the aspect of a desert,

only a small portion of it is absolutely sterile. There is much

prairie land covered with a continuous sheet of grass; and even

the more sandy and rocky surfaces have proved to be fairly good

grazing ground. It is also true that the attempts to cultivate

the soil have been attended with unexpected success, and about

Walla-walla, that which was supposed to be a desert surface is

producing great crops of wheat.

THE CASCADE MOUNTAINS.

Although represented on most maps as an unbroken line of

elevation stretching with an almost north and south course from

the Californian to the British line, with its hachures looking like

an enormously long hairy caterpillar, no just conception is thus

given of this broad and compound mountain belt. It is contin-

uous with the Sierra Nevada of California; and it would have

been better if they had been designated by acommon name. The

mountain belt is in Oregon and Washington from thirty to fifty

miles in width, consisting of a number of parallel ranges of

which the highest is along its eastern border. This is crowned

by a series of volcanic cones, Mt. Shasta, Mt. Pitt, Mt. Mc-

Laughlin, Mt. Jefferson, Mt. Hood, Mt. Adams, Mt. Rainier

(Tacoma), and Mt. Baker, which range from 10,000 to over

14,000 feet in height, are all capped with perpetual snow, and

form the most impressive group of mountains on the continent.

From the California line northward, the material of which these

mountain ranges are composed is mainly eruptive in character.

The peaks mentioned, and many others, are volcanic vents of

which the fires are not yet extinct, and some of them have been

in active eruption within a few hundred years. Like the Sierra

Nevada, this great fold in the earth’s crust was formed after the

Triassic and Jurassic, but previous to the Cretaceous age; and

yet, like all other great mountain belts, it has been formed by

many additions made at various times. In California, the range

is largely composed of granite and other crystalline rocks of an-

cient date, flanked by slates which have been proved by the Cal-

ifornia geologists to be of Triassic and Jurassic age ; while the

256 Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad.

Cretaceous is deposited unconformably upon these, rising to the

height of but a few hundred feet above the sea. North of the

California line, the rocks forming the mountains, as has been

mentioned, are almost entirely eruptive ; and it is evident that

this has been the theatre of more violent volcanic action than

any other part of the continent known to us. Most of the erup-

tions took place in Tertiary times, ‘as we know from the inter-

calation of the trap overflows with the Tertiary lake-sediments,

many of which are store-houses of vegetable and animal fossils ;

but they have continued down to the present day.

Many years ago, when connected with Western Government

Surveys, I followed these mountains from the California line

to the Columbia, and at several points crossed lava streams

which had flowed down the east flank of the Cascades, and

were as fresh and ragged as the modern lava streams of Vesuvius.

Not a particle of vegetation ha attached itself to them, and it

is certain that not a hundred years have passed since some of

them were flowing.

ANCIENT GLACIERS OF THE CASCADE MOUNTAINS.

As has been stated, the Rocky Mountains, from New Mexico

to British Columbia, abound in evidences of ancient glaciation.

This is also true of the Uinta Mountains, the Wasatch, the Si-

erra Nevada and the Cascade Mountains.

In the group of five snowy peaks, called in Oregon the Three

Sisters—because only three are visible from the Willamette Val-

ley—miniature glaciers were found by our party in 1855 at the

heads of McKenzie’s Fork, and of one of the tributaries of the Des

Chutes ; and on Mt. Rainier a dozen or more have been described,

some many miles in length. But all the glaciers and snow-fields

now existing on the Cascade Mountains are utterly insignificant

compared with those of the glacial period. Then every gorge

was filled with snow and ice, the broader and more irregular

summits were covered with glaciers, and these descended several

thousand feet below the present line of perpetual snow. Now

we find, over miles square, the rock-surfaces planed smooth or

grooved like a plowed field, and every projecting crest of volcanic

rock, rough and ragged as it was, is rounded over and worn into

Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad. 257

dy a ¥y 0 !

a roche moutonnée. Fiom the Three Sisters the glaciers descend-

ed into the valley of the Willamette on the west and that of the

Des Chutes on the east; and I traced with the barometer the gla-

cial markings, from the snow-line to a point 2500 feet lower,

where they pass under the alluvium of McKenzic’s Fork.*

THE FORESTS OF THE CASCADE MOUNTAINS.

All the summits and western slopes of the Cascade Mountains

are covered with a dense forest, mainly of evergreens, of which

many of the trees are of gigantic dimensions. On the eastern

slopes, the prairies in places run up the mountain sides, but the

timber follows all the valleys down to the plain. East of the

mountains are scattered trees of the yellow pine (Pinus ponde-

rosa) and the western cedar (Juniperus occidentalis), and in some

localities, as has been mentioned, groves and forests of the former.

The evergreens which cover the mountains consist of four spe-

cies of pine, viz., Pinus Lambertiana, P. monticola, P. albi-

* It has been claimed by Lecog (Les Glaciers et les Climat:), and following

him, by Prof. Whitney and others ( Later Climatic Change), that the great devel-

opment of glaciers during the Ice Period, such as those of the Canadian

highlands, the Rocky Mountains and the Cascades, of which we have such

abundant evidence, was not the effect of a cold period, but a warm one,

which increased the precipitation and consequently the snow-fall, at all

places where the temperature was low enough to cause it to take the form

of snow. If this was all, however, the most extensive glaciers should be

in the Alpine districts of the tropics or of the temperate zones, wherever the

precipitation is most abundant and the temperature low enough to produce

perpetual snow. But we have, on the summits of the Cascades, a demon-

stration of the fallacy of this view ; since here some of the mountains rise

14,000 feet and the line of perpetual snow is not over 7,000 feet, while the

annual precipitation is greater than in almost any other portion of our

country. In fact the snow accumulates in such quantity that. even in mid-

summer, it reaches so low tl:at it is met and opposed by a vigorous forest

growth, the product of a mild climate. It is evident that no elevation

of temperature, though it should increase the evaporation on the Pacific and

the rainfall on the coast, would cause the renewal of the ancient glaciers ;

but with a depression of temperature which should continue the present

winter conditions through the year, the precipitation remaining the same,

the accumulation would soon cover the mountain summits with snow and

ice and bring the glaciers down to their old limit.

258 (reology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad. :

caulis, and P. contorta. Of these, the first is the most gigantic

species of the genus, attaining in its chosen habitat in this range

of mountains, a height of 300 feet and a diameter of from 12.to

15 feet. P. monticola is much smaller, hardly equalling in di-

mensions its eastern representative, the white pine, but closely

resembling it in general habit and mincr botanical characters. —

On the mountains it is less abundant than in the valley of Clark’s

Fork, but attains somewhat larger size. This, with the sugar

pine and white pine, constitute a well defined sub-genus, charac-

terized by five-leaved and blue-green foliage ; fusiform, resin-

ous, imbricated cones, hanging on the ends of a few large and

high branches ; and in the character of the wood. Three firs,

designating by that name those bearing erect cones with perma-

nent axes and deciduous scales, are also common, viz., Abies

grandis, A. nobilis, and A. amabilis. Of these, the first is the

western balsam-fir, resembling our eastern balsam, but a more

magnificent tree, attaining an altitude of 300 feet. The last two

are remarkable for the magnitude of their cones, which are six

inches in length and two ana a half in diameter, the first deco-

rated with reflexed and fimbriated bracts, the second purple in

color and dotted over with resin. Four spruces, Douglas’s, Men-

zies’s, Patton’s, and the hemlock, are there. Of these, the first

is the largest and the most abundant, attaining an altitude of

over 300 feet and a diameter of 10 feet ; Menzies’s spruce (Abies

Sitchensis) grows to a height of over 200 feet, and is generally as

strict as a church spire; the hemlock is comparatively rare on

the high lands, and is only seen at its best in the valleys; Pat-

ton’s spruce (Abies Pattoniana) is a near relative of the hem-

lock, having the same feathery foliage, but that which is denser

and richer. On the whole, it isin my judgment the handsomest

of all the conifers. On some ofthe Alpine meadows among the

snow mountains—especially the 'Three Sisters—are scattered in-

dividual trees or groups of two or three kinds of fir and spruce,

which surpass in symmetry and graceful grouping any human

achievement in the way of landscape gardening. Where the fir

forests are most dense, the trees are so thickly set that two great

trunks may generally be reached by the extended arms. No un-

dergrowth occupies the ground, and the foliage of the firs is con-

fined to the higher branches, which interlock to make a roof

Gealogy and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad, — 269

impenetrable by the sun’s rays. Sometimes the gloom of these

forests is further enhanced by gray or black lichens, which drape

the trunks and hang from the dead branches hke the Spanish

moss, but producing a far more funereal effect. Where fire has

run through these forests, the trees, killed but not consumed,

and subsequently overthrown by the wind, form a labyrinth

through which it is sometimes well-nigh impossible to force one’s

way. The ground thus open to the sunshine is soon covered

by a dense growth of bracken -(Pleris aquilina), which often

reaches a height of from six to eight feet. After this or with it,

comes Ceanothus or manzanita, with huckleberries and service-

berries, which fruit so abundantly as even to tint the mountain

sides with the black, purple or blue of their berries.

The larch, to which reference has already been made, is scat-

tered sparsely over the eastern slope of the Cascades, and it here

attains its maximum dimensions. The trunk Is sometimes 200

feet in height, the branches relatively small, and the foliage fine

and delicate in color, so that the larger trees look like lofty col-

umns wreathed and decorated by climbing vines.

The hard-wood trees are few and insignificant as compared

with the conifers. In the gorges and along the streams are the

narrow-leaved and trembling poplars, and on the uplands the

large-leaved maple and chinquapin (Acer macrophyllum and Cas-

tanopsis chrysophylla) ; the first is the only real tree-maple of

the west coast. It attains a height of 75 to 80 feet, and the

leaves, averaging six inches in diameter, on young plants are

sometimes many times as large. The chinquapin, though usually

a shrub, occasionally forms a handsome tree 30 to 50 feet in

height, conspicuous for the contrast between the bright green

of the upper «nd the golden yellow of the under surface of its

leaves. |

THE GORGE OF THE COLUMBIA.

This is one of the most impressive and interesting topographi-

cal features in all the picturesque West. It is cut with a nearly

straight westerly course, across the whole breadth of the Cascade

Mountains, fifty miles, and its banks rise from 2,000 to 4,000

feet directly from the river side. Most of the material of which

the walls are composed is basalt. This can be seen to form dis-

260 Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad.

tinct layers, the products of different aenioe roth the great

volcanic vents north and south of it... Cape Horn, a bold head-

land, shows a vertical face of trap nearly 500 feet i height. —

No one who examines the gorge of the Columbia will fail to

be convinced that it has been cut by the river. The general

altitude of the mountains, in which there are no other passes.

lower than about 5,000 feet, as well as the altitude of the lake

deposits on the eastern side, indicate that the work of cutting

this channel began at a height of not less than 3,000 feet above

the sea. At this time the river must have had a fall of at least

this number of feet into the valley of the Willamette, and we

must picture to ourselves a series of cascades of greater magni-

tude and more picturesqne than any now known. ‘This water-

power was, however, busily engaged in cutting down the barrier;

and in process of time this was so completely removed that a

navigable canal was opened from the Dalles to the ocean. The

western entrance to the gorge is now at tide-level, and the lower

part of the river is, like the Hudson, an arm of the sea. It is

true that at present the ‘‘ Cascades of the Columbia” form a se-

rious interruption to the navigation of the river, for they are

produced by a dam 63 feet high, which fills the channel for three

miles. But this dam, as we know, is of recent date, and has

been caused by an avalanche from the sides of the gorge. Above

it, the river is simply a long lake, and in low water a series of

stumps and trunks can be seen coming up from below the water-

level, which belonged to trees that could never have grown in

the places they occupy, if the barrier of the Cascades had

existed.

Steamboats navigate the bolt from the Dalles down, with

a transfer at the Cascades ; and this is much the better ronte to

take for those who would get a good view of the gorge, with its

imposing walls, its hanging forests and its picturesque waterfalls

which leap 1,000 feet from. the cliffs,—to say nothing of the old

Indian burial-grove, and the multitude of silicified tree trunks at

the Cascades. ‘The railroad is built along the face of the south-

ern cliff, high above the water, and although it gives only a one-

sided view of the gorge, is generally chosen by travelers who pre-

fer rapid transit to beauty of scenery.

(reology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad. 261

THE LOWER COLUMBIA.

The country bordering the Lower Columbia is too well-known

to require detailed description. I am compelled, however, to

refer to one or two points in its physical structure, which are of

special interest when brought into connection with facts of simi-

lar import observed in the region about Puget’s Sound. I have

said that the Lower Columbia is an arm of the sea. It is in fact

a deep river valley which has been flooded by an influx of the

sea caused by subsidence. ‘This brings the tide-water to the foot

of the falls of the Willamette at Oregon City, and to the Cas-

cades. It requires no argument to prove that such a channel

could not have been cut unless by a rapid stream flowing into

the ocean when it stood at a lower level. Whether the change

in the relative level of Jand and sea here remarked was part of a

general movement that produced the influx of the sea into the

fiords which fringe the northern coast ; and whether this is not a

part of a still grander movement that flooded the old excavated

valleys of the James River, the Potomac, the Schuylkill, the

Hudson, the St. Lawrence and the Saguenay, and at the same time

filled the fiords of the northeastern coast, are questions which

cannot now be fully answered, but are worth considering.

It will be noticed that the general plan of the topography of

this part of the coast is altogether similar to that of California ;

namely, the great wall of the Cascades, bordered on the west by

the Willamette and Cowlitz valleys and the Coast Mountains,

are re-produced further south by the Sierra Nevada, the great

California valley, and the Coast Ranges; and their topographical

features are not only physically similar, but are gevlogically iden-

tical,—the Cascades being the northern continuation of the Si-

erra Nevada, the more modern Coast Mountains following con-

tinuously the coast line; the great trough between them being

essentially one, but filled, in its centre, by a mass of mountains.

The forests of the country bordering the lower Columbia are

a physical feature that will strike every traveler with surprise

and admiration. ‘They are also of primary importance economi-

cally, since they form the basis of the most important industry

of the northwest coast. ‘They are mostly composed of evergreen

trees which attain an altitude of 200 to 300 feet, and are crowded

262 Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad.

so closely that when an opening is made in the forest it seems

surrounded by a wall of timber. These great forests stretch

from the Californian to the British line on the summits and

eastern flunk of the Cascades, over all the Coast Mountains, and

in the lowlands along the Willamette and the Cowlitz, and about

Puget’s Sound, with the exception of prairies that form part of

the surface of the Willamette valley, and occupy limited areas

about the Sound. |

In southwestern Oregon and northern California are the famous

redwood groves, the only place in the world where this magnifi-

cent tree (Sequoia sempervirens) grows in such numbers as to

form forests. It extends in clumps and scattered trees far down

the coast in California, and it does not reach the Columbia on

the north, so that its range is quite restricted. About Port Or-

ford and Humboldt Bay it is the principal timber tree, and in

size it almost equals its gigantic relative, the mammoth tree of

Calaveras County (Seguova gigantea).*

At Port Orford one may see hundreds of redwood trees of

which the trunks attain a diameter of 10 to 15 feet; but as the

lumber and timber they furnish is of excellent quality, they are

being destroyed at a rate that will soon exhaust the supply.

Along the Columbia and about Puget’s Sound the principal

trees are the Douglas and Menzies spruces, the balsam fir, the

western arbor vite and the hemlock. In some localities, espe-

cially further north, two cypresses are abundant, the Nootka cy-

press (Chamecyparis Nutkaensis) and the ginger pine (C. Law-

soniana). ‘The latter is sometimes called the ginger pine from

the fragrance of its wood. It is cultivated for its beauty and

esteemed for the excellence of its umber. Much less numer-

ous, but widely scattered, is the western yew (Zuaxus brevifolia),

often a handsome tree 50 to 60 feet in height. Along the river

* Great scientific interest attaches to these two species of Sequoia, since

they are the only representatives of the genus now living on the earth’s sur-

face, and are a relic of the grand forests which in Tertiary times covered all

the northern part of this continent, and in which they were associated with

other species of Sequoia, and with a multitude of other evergreen and decid-

uous trees, most of which have disappeared, but a few remain,—the tulip

tree, deciduous cypress, magnolias, etc.,—which form the glory of our pres-

ent forests. %

Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad. — 263

sides are many cottonwoods (Populus trichocarpa), the Oregon

ash (Fraxinus Oregona), and an arborescent alder (Alnus rhom-

bifolia), which reaches an altitude of 60 feet, with a trunk-diam-

eter of 12 to 15 inches. On the dryer and ligher ground is

found Pinws ponderosa, and on the lower, thickets of P. contorta,

often growing like canes in a cane-brake. Scattered through

this lowland forest are also the two arborescent maples of the

west, Acer macrophyllum and A. circinnatum. Of these the

latter, called the vine maple, is a peculiar feature in the forests

of the Lower Columbia, Puget’s Sound, and Vancouver’s Island.

It is rarely more than six inches in diameter, the trunks very

slender, and several springing from the same root. These droop,

and reaching the ground, frequently take root at the summit.

Where these interlacing trunks are numerous, they form a thicket

which is almost impenetrable. To this meagre list of angio-

spermous trees, I should add Garry’s oak and the Madrofia ( Quer-

cus Garryana, and Arbutus Menziesii). The oak, scattered

about the open grounds of the Willamette Valley and Puget’s

Sound, occasionally attains a diameter of three or four feet, but

with a spreading and irregular growth and brittle wood, so that

it has little value asa timber tree. The “ Madrofia” is a small

tree, but much admired for the beauty of its foliage, and the pe-

culiarity of its bark. Theformer is persistent and rich, and the

latter exfoliates in brown and greenish layers of different shades.

The undergrowth of the Pacific coast forest, where the latter is

not tou dense, is abundant and varied. Over the rocks and fallen

tree-trunks is a thick mat of mosses, which grow with a luxuri-

ance and exhibit a variety nowhere rivalled in the eastern States.

Ferns are less numerous than might be expected in this moist

climate, but a few species are abundant and grow with great

luxuriance. The most common is the cosmopolitan bracken

(Pteris aquilina), the next, Aspidium munitum, strikingly

like our eastern A. acrostichoides, but having a much stronger

growth. Of the less numerous species, a respectable list could

be made, but on the whole the ferns are not an important ele-

ment in vegetation. Of the under-shrubs, the most striking is

Fatsia horrida ; this has the aspect of an Aralia ; it has a thick

woody stem six to ten feet long, somewhat decumbent at base,

but bearing above a number of large palmate leaves. Both stem

264 (Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad.

and leaves are very prickly, and it is a common but probably un-

grounded belief that its spines are highly poisonous. A large

shrubby Spirea (S. Douglasii) grows six to ten feet in height,

with numerous large open panicles of inconspicuous flowers.

Several species of Ceunothus abound, the most common being

C. velutinus, which forms dense thickets. Lonicera involu-

crata, conspicuous from its black delladunna-like fruit, surround- —

ed by large persistent purple involucres, is found along the

streams, with one of the most showy of all the Oregon shrubs,

Cornus Nuttallii, Audubon, the western representative of our

dogwood. Usually it is smaller. but occasionally becomes a tree

50 feet in height. The flower-like calyces are large, white, and

less crumpled than those of the eastern tree.

More interesting than these to botanists, as well as to the gen-

eral public, are the fruit-bearing shrubs, the ‘‘Salal,” (Gaultheria

shallon,) the Oregon grape (Berberts aquifolium and B. pinnata),

and the ‘‘salmon-berry,” (Rubus spectabilis). Of these, the

first covers the ground over great areas with its creeping or de-

cumbent stem, its broad, oval, shining leaves, and its pendent,

black and edible fruit. The two species of Berberis, so well

known under their old name, Mahonia, are low shrubs, with

pinnate, spiny leaves, yellow, clustered flowers and blue bloom-

covered acid berries. ‘They are not unfrequently cultivated as

ornamental plants in the eastern States. The salmon-berry takes

its name from the color of the fruit, which resembles that of the

flesh of the salmon. It is a tall, strong-growing raspberry, with

conspicuous purple flowers and large ovoid fruit, much esteemed

by the Indians, but rather insipid. Rubus Nutkanus, the white

variety of our flowering raspberry, 1s everywhere common, with

the precise habit of its eastern representative.

SURFACE GEOLOGY OF THE PUGET’S SOUND BASIN.

The name Puget’s Sound is, in popular use, made to cover all

the peculiar group of inlets and tideways which lie immediately

east of Vancouver’s Island,—Pnuget’s Sound proper, Admiralty

Inlet, Hood’s Canal, etc. These occupy the northern extension

of the great Columbian valley, which, like its counterpart in

California, lies between the Coast ranges and the Cordilleras.

Further north still, this depression is deflected toward the north-

Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad. — 266

west by a change in the direction of the Cascade Mountains, and

of the representatives of the Coast ranges on Vancouver's Island,

is mostly occupied by water, and is known as the Gulf of Georgia.

In Washington Territory the Coast Mountains are higher than

in Oregon, and have received the local name of the Olympian

range, of which the highest summit is called Mt. Olympus. This

range terminates somewhat abruptly, but is apparently continued

in the mountains of Vancouver’s Island. ‘Through the gap

between these and the Olympian range a deep channel is cut,

now an arim of the sea, called the Strait of Juan de Fuca. In

former times, when this portion of the continent, and probably

the whole north west coast, stood higher above the ocean, this strait

was the valley of a great river, which drained most of the western

slope of the Cascades in Washington Territory, and had as

branches the Skagit, Snoqualme, Dwamish, Puyallop, Nisqually

and various minor streams. During the ice period, this hydro-

graphic basin was filled with a great glacier made up of contri-

butions from all the surrounding mountains. It flowed out to

sea by the Strait of Fuca; but this channel was far too narrow

for it, and it spread all over the southern portion of Vancouver’s

Island, planing off, rounding over or deeply scoring the rocks in

its passage, and leaving its autograph so plainly written that he

who runs may read.

As the glaciers retreated, they left behind a sheet of drift

several hundred feet in thickness,—partly waterworn and strati-

fied, partly unstratified boulder clay with striated pebbles.

These drift deposits formed a plain of which the surface was

nearly level. In process of time, the draining streams had cut

in this plain a series of valleys-all tributary to one which led out

through the Strait of Fuca to the ocean. After perhaps some

thousands of years, during which the excavation of these valleys

progressed, a subsidence of the land or rise of the water-level

caused the sea to flow in and occupy the main valley and all its

tributaries up to the base of the mountain slopes. Such in few

words is the history of the formation of this remarkable system

of inlets. ‘They are simply the flooded valleys of a great river

and of the branches which formerly joined it, but which now

empty into the extremities of the finger-like inlets that have

partially replaced them.

266 Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad.

There are but few localities in the Puget’s Sound basin where

the rocky substratum rises so as to be visible above the water-

level. Along the northern and western margin of Vancouver’s,

Sucia, Orcas and Whidby Islands, and at Chuckernuts and So-

horne the rock appears, but at Tacoma, Steilacom, Seattle, Port

Madison, Port Townsend, and it may be said generally about the

Sound, the shores are steep bluffs, 100 to 150 feet in height,

composed of drift alone. From the cliffs at Port Richmond and

Tacoma, I took sub-angular scratched and ice-worn pebbles, as

characteristic and convincing as any to be found in the boulder

clay of the eastern States.

The subsidence which caused the sea-water to flow into the

subaerial excavated valleys of Puget’s Sound, filled also the chan-

nel of the Columbia to the Cascades, and the system of fiords

that fringe the northwest coast, of which these are repre: enta-

tives.

We have evidence, too, that the area occupied by the sea was at

one time much more extensive than now, for all the country im-

mediately about Puget’s Sound is marked with a series of marine

terraces which Mr. Bailey Willis, who studied them when con-

nected with the Transcontinental Survey under Prof. Pumpelly,

tells me can be traced to a height of 1,600 feet above the present

ocean level. These terraces are conspicuous on the low divide

which separates the valley of the Cowlitz from the basin of Pu-

get’s Sound ; and here, as over much of this region, the ground

is covered with pebbles and waterworn boulders, the produet of

the long-continued dash of the shore waves on a slope composed

of drift materials. In the advance and recession of the shore-

line, the finer materials have been mostly washed away, and the

stony surface has little agricultural value. Fortunately it is

well adapted to the growth of trees; and the splendid forest

which covers it is perhaps an equivalent for all it has lost. The

facts here given show why the cultivation of the soil in Washing-

ton Territory is limited to the narrow belts of modern alluvium

along the streams, and indicate that the fisheries, coal-mining,

and lumber industry must be in the future, as they are now,

the most important sources of wealth.

Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad. — 26%

GEOLOGICAL SUBSTRUCTURE.

~ The sheet of drift which has been described covers most of the

lowland, and conceals the underlying rocks so that they appear

only about the margin of the basin. The foot-hills of the Sierra,

like the more elevated portions, are composed chiefly of eruptive

rocks ; but at various places along the northern and eastern mar-

gin of the basin, the drainage streams have exposed sedimentary

strata. ‘These are all Cretaceous or Tertiary. On Queen Char-

lotte’s Island, as we learn from the Canadian geologists, are

Lower Cretaceous rocks, very much disturbed, but containing

beds of lignite converted into anthracite, and many mollusks

which apparently represent the Neocomian of the Old World.

On Vancouyer’s Island, the granites and old metamorphic sed-

iments are succeeded by Upper Cretaceous strata, which contain

several valuable seams of coal that have been worked for many

years. Specimens of the fossil plants and mollusks associated

with these beds, were sent by Mr. George Gibbs to the writer in

1858. Among the former were /noceramus and Baculites, which

gave the earliest information of the Cretaceous age of these de-

posits. Descriptions of some of the fossil plants were published

by the writer in the Proceedings of the Boston Society of Natural

History for 1863. On Orcas and Sucia Islands are also exposures

of Cretaceous rocks which abound in fossils.

On the east side of the basin, coal outcrops at several points,

and has been worked at Bellingham Bay on the Skagit River, at

Newcastle, Carbonado and Wilkinson. At Carbonado the coal-

bearing rocks, turned up at a high angle, are cut across in a

cafion formed by Carbon River, and a very satisfactory view is

here obtained of the structure of one of the local basins. The

series 1s several thousand feet in thickness ; and in this section

nine workable seams of coal are exposed. At Wilkinson and in

that vicinity, Mr. Willis made a careful exploration of another

basin, which also includes several beds of coal and some thous.

ands of feet of associated rocks. From these localities and others

further north, large collections of fossil plants have been made

by the writer and his assistant, Mr. Edward Lorrarce. These

represent a rich and interesting flora of Upper Cretaceous and

268 Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad.

Tertiary ages, of which figures and descriptions will be. prblished

by the U. S. Geological Survey.

MopDERN GLACIERS OF THE SIERRA.

From the Willamette Valley and Puget’s Sound, splendid

views are obtained of the great snow-peaks of the Cascade Mount-

~ains,—the Three Sisters, Mt. Jefferson, Mt. [ood. Mt. Adams.

“Mt. St. Helens, Mt. Tacoma and Mt. Baker. Of these. Met.

Hood has an altitude of 11,225 feet, Mt. Adams 12.250, and Mt.

Tacoma 14,400. In Colorado and California are a number of

summits of equal absolute height, but they have nothing like

the relief above their surroundings that these nave, carry far Tess

perpetual snow, and are in every way less impressive. In Wash-

ton Territory, the permanent snow-line on the west side of the

mountains is about 6,500 feet, on the east side several hundred

feet higher. Mt. Tacoma carries, therefore, about 8,000 feet of

snow. Below this it is covered with a dense forest. Its foot-

hills nowhere rise to the height of 2,000 feet above the sea, and

hence are invisible at a distance ; so from many places about the

Sound, practically the whole of the mountain is seen in one

view,—a gigantic cone 14,000 feet in height, apparently rising

directly from the sea-level! Mt. Shasta has the same altitude,

and as seen from Scott’s or Strawberry Valley, is wonderfully

impressive ; but it 1s situated further inland and further south,

its base is higher and it has less snow, and it is therefore some-

what less imposing. Mt. Hood, as seen under favorable circum-

stances from Fort Vancouver, especially when reflected from the ~

lake-like surface of the Columbia, is as beautiful but far less

grand. It is not too much to say then, that no other mountain

on this continent, and none in Europe, rivals in grandeur and

beauty Mt. Tacoma; and it is doubtful whether in the world

there is any that produces a greater impression upon the be-

holder.

Though appearing in the distance so symmetrical and smooth,

Mt. Tacoma has been found to be a ragged and compound mass

consisting of three conspicuous summits, and many subordinate

peaks, with precipices of 2,000 to 3,000 feet in height, and deep

gorges which make the ascent difficult and even dangerous. It

Geology and Botany of Northern Pacific Railroad, — 269

has been ascended, however, several times, and its labyrinths

sufficiently explored to prove that it curries from eight to twelve

glaciers, some of which are many miles in length and will bear

comparison with those of the Alps.

Every traveller who enters the Puget’s Sound region from the

south, is sure to be struck by the turbid, milky appearance of

the water of the Cowlitz River, along which the railroad runs

for miles. This character it shares with all streams which drain

glaciers, and has caused the Swiss mountaineers to give to the

water of such streams the name of ‘‘ Gletscher Milch.”” This

turbidity is due to the sediment produced by the constant grind-

ing action of these enormous masses of moving ice, set with

stones, upon their beds, and attests the sometimes disputed efti- .

ciency of glaciers as eroding agents. The Puyallop, White River,

and other streams which come down from Mt..Tacoma, are alike

milky, and each shows that one or more glaciers are continually

grinding away at its head. On the contrary, the streams which

do not come from glaciers and are supplied by rain only and

that filtered threugh the decaying vegetation of the dense forests,

carry very little sediment, and that chiefly carbonaceous matter.

These are clear but brown, and the contrast which the water of

such streams presents to that of the rivers which drain the gla-

ciers, is very striking, justifying the names borne by two such,

of Black and White Rivers.

It has been contended by some writers. as before mentioned,

that the extension of glaciers in former times was due simply to

an increase in the amount of precipitated moisture ; but it is

easy to see that the heavy rainfall of Washington Territory might

be increased indefinitely with no considerable elongation of the

glaciers. But even with the rainfall remaining as it is, if a de-

pression of temperature shouJd take place, carrying the present

- conditions of winter through the year, the glaciers would soon

creep down into their old beds, fill all the valleys of their drain-

ing streams, and finally coalesce to form one grand glacier which

would flow ont through the Strait of Fuca to the ocean.

Following the coast northward from Puget Sound, we find

the glaciers coming down lower and lower, until in Alaska they

reach the sea-level. No one can claim that this is because the

precipitation is greater there, since observations show that it is

a0 New Species of Bird of the Genus. Engyptila.

not; but the careful observer. must surely ‘recognise that it is

because at the north the temperature is lower. He must also

accept these facts as a demonstration that the prime factor in

the production of the phenomena of the Ice Period, was a secular.

depression of die didi that it was a period of cold and not

of warmth. | |

XI.— Description. of a New-Species of Bird of the Genus

Engyptila, with Ne obes on two Yucatan Birds.

BY GEORGE N. LAWRENCE.

Read October 26, 1885.

Engyptila vinaceifulva

The front is of a pale vinaceous white, the hind part of the head and the

hind neck, are of a rather light reddish vinaceous, the hind part and the

sides of the neck are glossed with very pale crimson, only perceptible in

certain lights ; the feathers of the back are of a light tawny, ending largely

with a very pale tawny-white ; the feathers of the rump and upper tail-

coverts are of a darker and brighter tawny than the back, with lighter-

colored margins ; the two central tail-feathers are of a warm tawny color

for half their length from the base, the terminal portion being very much

lighter in color with a grayish cast ; the shafts of these are white; the

other tail-feathers are light tawny-brown, their outer margins narrowly

edged with whitish, and their ends terminating with white having just a

tinge of tawny; these have their shafts tawny-white ; the smaller wing-

coverts are in color much like the rump; the middle and larger co-

verts are lighter and warmer in color; the quills are of a light brown

ish-tawny, with their ends and outer margins whitish, the shafts are

light tawny in color ; the under wing-coverts are bright cinnamon red, and

the inner margins of the quills are very pale cinnamon ; the sides of the

head are colored much like the front ; the chin is pure white ; the throat

and upper part of the breast are light vinaceous, the lower part of the breast

is of a lighter shade of the same color ; the abdomen and sides are of a very

New Spectes of Bird of the Genus Lngyptila. 271

pale warm tawny color ; in the middle of the abdomen there is a spot of

silky white feathers ; the under tail-coverts are white, with just a tinge of

tawny ; bill black ; tarsi and toes yellowish flesh-color.

. Length, skin, 10} inches: wing, 5}; bill, 3; tarsus, 7,

Habitat, Temax, Yucatan. Type in my collection.

Remarks.—Vhis does not resemble any other member of the

genus, and is a most delicately colored species. It is another of

the discoveries of Mr. Geo. F. Gaumer in Yucatan, who has

kindly presented me with the type.

The coforing of some of the feathers has somewhat the appear-

ance of being due to partial albinism; but I think they are of

normal color, and J consider it not to be in an immature stage

of plumage.

Mr. Gaumer’s account of it seems to preclude the possibility

of the whitish colors of this species being caused by albinism.

He writes: ‘‘I have recently added several species to the Yuca-

ton list, the most important of which, is a dove called the Can-

cab.. I have been told about this dove a great many times in

past years, but it has never been my good fortune to capture a

specimen until a few days ago. It is the size of ZL. albifrons.

The specimen taken is in immature plumage; there were two,

but when I shot the one the other escaped, but I hope soon to

get another.”

Notes on YUCATAN BIRDS.

Engyptila fulviventris, Lawr.

I received from Mr. Gaumer three specimens of the pigeon I

described as Leptoptila fulviventris (Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci.,

Vol. II, p. 287). The generic name of this group of pigeons

has been changed to Hngyptila.

I pointed out (Joc. cit.) wherein it differed from Z. albifrons,

but Mr. Salvin (Proc. Zool. Soc., 1883, p. 434) considers it not

to differ from that species, under which he puts it as a synonym,

and remarks as follows: ‘“‘' These Yucatan birds have the rufous

tint of the underparts slightly darker than is usual in Guatema-

lan examples ; but the difference is tvo slight to be considered of

specttic value.” |

272 Noles on Yucatan Birds.

My opinion of its distinctness has been fully confirmed by the

further comparison of the specimens now received, with exam-

ples of albifrons from Guatemala and also from Yucatan, whence

I have specimens not differing from Guatemalan ones.

I sent an example to Mr. R. Ridgway, of the National Museum,

Washington, requesting his opinion ; he wrote as follows: ‘* Ln-

gyptila fulviventris 1 should regard as distinct. We have one

just like yours. It was obtained at Merida, by Schott, Jan. 17,

1865 ; besides, I have compared them both with a series of 31

adult examples of /. albifrons, and find none intermediate.”

In my original description I say: ‘‘ Fore part of the head of

a pale bluish-white,”’ this is not of so clear a color nor so well

defined as in albifrons, and has a vinous tinge; the tail-feathers

are narrower than those of #. aldifrons, and the white at their

ends less in extent; the chin in &. albifrons is pure white, in

the other tinged with vinous; the examples last received have

their backs of a lighter shade of olive than in albifrons, instead

of ‘‘rather darker” as in the description of the type, perhaps

the difference may be seasonal.

Chetura Gaumeri, Lawr., Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., Vol. I, p. 245.

I have received from Mr. Gaumer three more specimens of C.

Gaumeri, one having the spines unworn, in which state I have

been desirous to get it.

He writes of this species as follows: ‘‘I have several specimens ;

none of them have the spines so long as C. Yucatanica; of this -

latter species I have one more specimen. C. Gaumeri lives in

wells with rocky walls, hence the worn appearance of the spines.”

One specimen now sent is the first I have seen with perfect

spines. ‘The rocky character of the placcs they inhabit, accounts

satisfactorily for the worn condition of the spines in most of the

specimens obtained.

The central spines of C. Gawmeri are in length, - 0.13 in.

The shortest outer do. do. do. - Oo ee

The central ones of C. Yucatanica, are do. - 0.205

The outer ones, do. do. ~" Oars

New Species of Birds from Yucatan. 273

XIII.— Characters of Two supposed New Species of Birds from

Yueatan.

BY GEORGE N. LAWRENCE.

Read November 23, 1885.

-Polioptila albiventris.

Male. Front and crown of a glossy jet black, this color extending on the

sides of the head as far as upon a line with the middle of the eye; entire

upper plumage of a clear light plumbeous; two middle tail-feathers black;

the first outer tail-feather is white, black on the inner web for a short dis-

tance from the base, the next is black for half its length, with the terminal

portion white, the third feather is black for most of its length, ending

with white, the fourth feather is black tipped with white ; the primaries

and secondaries are blackish-brown, very narrowly edged with white ; the

tertiaries are of the same color and have broader white margins ; the under

wing-coverts are white; third and fourth quills longest and equal; the

under plumage is entirely white ; the feet are dark plumbeous; the bill

black.

Length, 3 75 inches ; wing, 1.85 ; tail, 1.75 ; tarsus, .75; bill, 40.

Habitat, ‘Temax, Yucatan. ‘Type in my collection.

Remarks.—Myr. Gaumer sent a single specimen of this species,

which he thought might be P. nigriceps. It differs however

_ from that species in being smaller; in the black of the crown

being more restricted, not extending on to the occiput; and

in the color of the upper plumage, which is of a: clearer and

lighter plumbeous, while its under plumage is of a purer white.

Chztura peregrinator.

The upper plumage is smoky-black ; the rump and upper tail-coverts are

dark ash-color, the feathers of the latter with a very narrow edging of

whitish ; the tail-feathers are blackish-brown, with their shafts black ; the

274 “New Species of Birds from Yucatan. —

wing-coverts are colored like the back ; the quill feathers are black and

have the margins of the inner webs of a brownish color; the lores are

black ; the chin and throat are grayish-white; the abdomen, sides and

under tail-coverts are light fuliginous, darker on the latter ; the bill and

feet are black.

Length, 4.63 inches ; wing, 4.38; tail, 1.75; middle spine, 0.15 ; outer,

0.10.

Habitat, Temax, Yucatan. ‘Type in my collection.

Remarks.—Differs from C. Gaumeri in being somewhat

larger and in having the quill-feathers much broader; the upper

plumage is darker, the rump of C. Gawmeri is of a clear ash-

color; the breast, abdomen and under tail-coverts are darker in

the new species, more fuliginous. |

Mr. Gaumer writes concerning it as follows:—

“On the 12th of September, at 4 o’clock P. M., a flock of

about 150 swallows seemed to have recently arrived in Temax.

They were evidently strangers, as they went at once to hunt for

a suitable well (sexote) in which to pass the night. They en-

tered several, and at last selected one in the suburbs of the

town, that was in daily use. They were very quict and all en-

tered the well at 5.30 P. M. I put some boys to work tu catch

them, and thirty-two good specimens were caught; of these I

send you twenty tails and one entire bird. Next day they were

all gone; and the C. Gaumeri, which is resident, was abundant

as usual; five were secured, but all had their spines shorter and

blunter, and all seemed to be at home, and not wearied as those

of the day before.” ;

As will be seen by Mr. Gaumer’s account, the region usually

inhabited by this species is unknown, its appearance in ‘Temax

being a transient one.

The spines on the tail-feathers of all the specimens sent are

in good condition, whereas in nearly all of those of C. Gawmeri

received they are worn off.

Copper Minerals from Arizona. 275

XIV.—On Remarkable Copper Minerals from Arizona.

BY GEORGE F. KUNZ.

Read October 5, 1885.

Some of the recent output at the Arizona copper mines equals

in beauty any heretofore found in the United States, and these

mines bid fair to outrival the world in the perfection of their

mineral yield. Among the principal varieties are azurite, mala-

chite, chrysocolla, native copper, and cuprite. Although the

azurites are not equal to the finest from Chessy, still they do not

appear to disadvantage in the comparison. ‘The malachite is

not abundant, but considered as single specimens, it is hardly

- inferior to that from Siberia. —

MALACHITE.

This mineral, from the Copper Queen mine at Bisbee, Ari-

zona, in beauty and thickness of vein almost equals the Russian.

One mass, in particular, weighing 15 lbs., would furnish a

magnificent table-top of no mean dimensions. Its measure-

‘ments are: Length, 20 cem.; width, 15 cm.; height, 15 cm.

It is covered throughout with mammillary protuberances mea-

suring 35mm. Among other pieces of peculiar interest, one,

weighing 14 lbs., has a vein several inches in thickness and a

surface roughened with mammillary knobs, the result of radia-

tions 2.5 cm. across. On this there is a stalactite projecting as

much as 10 cm., and from 2.5 to4 cm. in diameter. Another

specimen with a mammillary surface has a dozen stalactites,

measuring from 10 to 20 mm. in diameter, and 5 cm. in height.

We also have malachite in seams, 7.5 cm. thick, and sometimes

30 cm. square, covered on both sides with mammillary tufts of

malachite, so compact as readily to admit of a polish. In addi-

tion to these, there are wonderful pockets of transparent cal-

cite and malachite, measuring 10 to 20 cm. in width, filled

with tufts of brilliant green, transparent, acicular crystals of

malachite from 5 to 10 mm. ‘long, grouped with beautiful

276 Copper Minerals from Arizona.

flat nail-head crystals of calcite, also transparent, measuring 39

mm. in width.

In some instances, groups of these malachite crystals nearly

25 mm. across, penetrate ‘the pellucid calcite, forming -one of

the most beautiful of mineral combinations, a malachite coun-

terpart to the native copper in calcite from Lake Superior.

Malachite from the Copper Queen mine, forms thick crusts

and seams, geodes and cavities over one foot across, and entirely

made up of fine acicular, velvety crystals—these often two to

four mm. long—the whole surface presenting the rich sheen of

a green plush velvet. No locality has furnished finer specimens

of this form.

AZURITE.

Azurite from the Clifton mines, Graham County, Arizona,

and also from the Longfellow mine, occurs in beautiful groups

from 1 to 12 mm. in diameter, and of a dark blue color. One

form of the larger crystals is O. 1’. I.

One spherical group radiating’ from a centre in all directions,

consists of crystals 20 mm. long and 7 mm. thick, partially

altered to malachite on the surface. Indeed, this mineral is

here found in ail stages of transition, some entire groups in

large crystals being completely altered to malachite. Perhaps

the finest group of azurite ever found on this continent is in-

cluded here, measuring 25 cm. in height and 7.5 to 15 cm.

across. It is covered on both sides with brilliant dark blue

crystals from 5 to 12 mm. long. Very interesting perfect

spheres of azurite are found here, composed of small crystals,

and associated with beautiful spheres of malachite, pseudomorph

after azurite.

Azurite coated with malachite was observed, and beautiful

groups of perfect spheres 15 mm. in diameter, and of a rich

Berlin blue color. Azurite from the Copper Queen mine is

usually in the form of small crystals from .5 mm. to 5 mm. across,

in delicate druses, or in compact mammillary masses about 12

mm. thick, or in radiations.

CHRYSOCOLLA.

This mineral is found of a beautiful turquoise-blue or green-

-~>

Copper Minerals from Arizona.

ish blue color, and containing cavities 8 to 4 cm. across, filled

with thin layers of chalcedony and druses of quartz, which

together form a compact coating over it. ‘These cavities are

often 7.5 cm. across, and of remarkable beauty. ‘The quartz

and chalcedony are thick enough to be susceptible of a polish,

or the gangue can be cut with it, and thus a curious and attract-

ive gem-stone can be made. The handsomest mineral of this

description comes from the Old Globe mine in Gila County.

Chrysocolla, in beautiful blue patches 1 to 2. cm. across, occurs

in an impure black oxide of copper, making an exceptionally rich

combination. The handsomest form, however, (and perhaps no

finer was ever found,) is the glassy-green chrysocolla from the

Clifton district. It is filled with transparent green flakes 25

mm. long, 6 mm. wide, and 3 mm. thick, and penetrated by

tubular hollows like the centres of stalactites. Another form

consists of dark blue or bluish-green surfaces, from 7.5 cm. to

25 em. across, only asa thin coating. This is equal in beauty

to that from any other known locality.

CUPRITE.

This species occurs in brilliant red crystals of cubic form,

measuring from 1 to 5 mm., in groups of several dozen crystals

embedded in massive cuprite and associated with native copper,

from the Clifton group of mines, Graham Co., Arizona. It is

also found in very dark cochineal-red crystals, almost black in

fact, associated with malachite and calcite. One fine cube,

coated with acicular crystals of calcite, measures 8 mm., and one

fractured crystal 10 mm. One group, 3.5 cm. by 6 cm., con-

sisting of several hundred crystals, principally elongated cubes

from 1 to 3 mm. wide, has, in addition to the elongated form,

crystals of the simple octahedron, the cube, and dodecahedron,

and the cubo-octahedron and dodecahedron combined. ‘The

crystals from the Copper Queen Mine are from .5 to 1 mm. in

size, and are simple octahedrons sharply defined, of a deep red

color, implanted on malachite coated with limonite.

These crystals are usually white, but the color is due to a film

which can be easily removed byfwashing.

Dioptase is obtained in beautiful bluish-green crystals 5 mm.

in diameter, from the Clifton District ; also native copper of a

278 - Copper Minerals from Arizona.

branching coralloid form, in groups of indistinct crystals, beau-

tified by a red amorphous coating of cuprite, often 1 to 2 mm.

in thickness, which is again enveloped in a thin white coating of

kaolin, or, as is frequently the case, with an alteration of mala-

chite after cuprite; in both instances the cuprite and copper

‘protruding through the other coating. ey:

Aurichalcite, from Copper Queen Mine, is found lining and ~

covering cavities from two inches to seven and eight across (5

to 20cm). It forms beautiful tufts and radiations of a light

green, and bluish green color, or is also associated with opaque

white calcite crystals in limonite cavities. The crystals, in the

tufts, are from 2 mm. to 4 mm. high, and for beauty of associa-

tion rival anything yet found.

Cerusite is abundant at the Flux Mine in Pima Co., where it

occurs in wonderful masses and veins of a pure snowy white

color. Solid blocks are taken out a foot square, and weighing

from 50 to 60 lbs., made up entirely of crystals from 1 to 4 cm.

in length, although the form is not distinct, except in occasional

cavities. |

One interesting group 10 cm. square is beautifully tinted with

green by a deposit of carbonate of copper. ‘The crystals are

very perfect but indistinct. In respect to quantity of material

these specimens are unsurpassed.

At the Belle Mine, Yavapai County, cerusite is also plentiful,

but is not so white, and usually covered with a brown coating.

I am indebted to Messrs. Adams, Shaw and Nivens for in-

formation and specimens.

[All these mineral varieties were illustrated with a large set of very ele-

gant specimens. | ; .

North American Species of Petromyzontide. 279

XV.—A Review of the North American Species of

Petromyzontide.

BY DAVID S. JORDAN AND MORTON W. FORDICE.

Read December 21, 1885.

[ With an additional note on the Lamprey of Cayuga Lake.

BY SETH E. MEEK. |

In the present paper we have attempted to give the synonymy

of the Lampreys of North America, with analytical keys by

which the species may be distinguished. The specimens studied

belong to the Museum of the Indiana University, while numerous

others belonging to the United States National Museum have

_also been examined.

The North American species fall naturally into two groups,

which it seems most suitable to regard as genera; although in

both groups there are large anadromous forms with strong denti-.

tion and small fluviatile forms with the teeth less specialized,—

modifications which may indicate subgenera. ‘These genera may

be defined as follows :—

ANALYSIS OF GENERA OF PETROMYZONTID.

a. Supraoral lamina (‘‘ maxillary tooth’’) contracted, composed of two or

three cusps placed close together ; discal teeth numerous, in concen-

tric series ; anterior lingual tooth with a median depression or groove;

buccal disk large in adult (contracted in young).

PETROMYZON, 2.

aa. Supraoral lamina very large, expanded laterally, forming a crescent-

shaped plate, with a cusp at either end, and sometimes a median

cusp ; anterior lingual teeth serrate more or less.

AMMOC@TES, 3.

To these may be added a third genus, BATHYMYZON Gill,

which is said to differ from Petromyzon, in having “the suproral

280 North American Species of Pelromyzontide.

and infroral plates or lamin destitute of odontoid tubercles, the

armature of the lamprey type being obsolescent.”’

This genus is probably valid, unless its characters ‘be due to

mutilation ; as the “teeth” in all lampreys are readily lost in

badly preserved examples. :

Genus 1._BATHYMYZON Gill.

Batuymyzon Gill, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1883, 254 (bairdi).

1. BATHYMYZON BAIRDI.

Petromyzon ( Bathymyzon) bairdi Gill, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1883, 254 (Gulf

Stream, Lat. 49°, at a depth of 520 fathoms).

Bathymyzon bairdi Jordan, Cat. Fish. Waters N. A., 1885, 4 (copied).

Habitat.—Bassalian fauna of Atlantic.

This species has not been described, further than that it is

“closely related to P. marinus.”

Genus 2.—PETROMYZON.

PETROMYZON (Artedi) Linnzus, Systema Nature, Ed. X., 1, 1758, 230-

(marinus).

IcHTHYoMYzON Girard, U. S. Pac. R. R. Expl., 1858, 381 (castaneus ;

hirudo, etc.).

ScoLEcosoma Girard, U.S. Pac. R. R. Expl., 1858, 385 (concolor, ete.). -

ANALYSIS OF SPECIES OF PETROMYZON.

a, Anterior lingual tooth divided into two by a median groove ; dorsal fin

continuous, with a broad notch ; fluviatile species of small size.

(Ichthyomyzon Girard.)

b. Supraoral lamina (maxillary tooth) tricuspid ; some of the lateral teeth

bicuspid. Infraoral lamina (mandibulary plate) with 7 to 12

cusps ; head 9 in length. : . : - - CASTANEUS, 2.

bb. Supraoral lamina bicuspid ; infraoral lamina with 7 cusps ; teeth on

disk in about four concentric series ; all of them simple ; origin of

dorsal nearly midway between tip of snout and end of tail; body

more compressed than in other lampreys ; head 74 in length ; depth

12 ; 51 muscular impressions between gill-openings and vent ; color

silvery, bluish above, often mottled ; a small bluish spot above

each gill-opening, usually conspicuous even in the larve ; similar

spots scattered along sides of back. - - - CONCOLOR, 3.

aa, Anterior lingual tooth with a deep median groove and terminating in an

incurved point ; dorsal fin divided ; species of large size, anadro-

mous (Petromyzon).

)

North American Species of Petromyzontida. 281

d. Supraoral lamina bicuspid ; infraoral lamina with 7 to 9 cusps ; teeth

in obliquely transverse rows, 4 to 7 in each row ; the lateral teeth

on each side of mouth bicuspid, the other teeth simple ; head and

disk large ; dorsal fins low, well separated ; 64 muscular impres-

sions between gill-openings and vent ; back with an elevated fleshy

ridge anterior to dorsal fin (in males ?) in spring ; color bluish

brown, mottled with blackish confluent patches, rarely nearly plain,

dull brownish white below. . - . - - MARINUS, 4.

2. PETROMYZON CASTANEUS.

Ichthyomyzon castaneus Girard, U. 8S. Pac. R. R. Surv., 1858, 381 (Galena,

Minn). Gunther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., VIII, 1870, 507 (copied) ;

Bean, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 1882, 117 (Forlorn Hope, Louisiana).

Petromyzon caslaneus Jordan & Gilbert, Synopsis Fish, N. A., 868, 1883

(name only). Jordan, Cat. Fish. Waters N. A., 1885, 4. Cragin,

Bull. Washburn Coll. Lab., Topeka, Kas., 1885, 99 (Mill Creek,

Shawnee Co., Kas.).

? Ichthyomyzon hirudo Girard, U. 8. Pac. R. R. Surv., 1858, 382 (Fort Smith,

Arkansas). Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., 1870, VIII, 507 (copied).

Bean, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 1882, 119 (original type).

? Ammoceetes hirudo Jordan, Man. Vert., Ed. 1, 1876, 350 (in part).

? Pelromyzon hirudo Jordan, Cat. Fish. N. A., 1885, 4.

Habitat.—Mississippi Valley.

Of this species, only the above-named examples are known.

Thus far it appears to be distinct from P. concolor.

The type of J. hirudo has 7 teeth in the infraoral lamina, in-

stead of 9 as in the specimens referred to castaneus. The origin

of dorsal is said to be nearer tip of caudal than the tip of snout

in hirudo, while in castaneus it is nearly midway between these

two points. No second specimen properly referable to P. hirudo

has been found, and as the characters referred to are known to

be not very constant in this group, P. hirudo will probably be

found to be identical with P. castaneus.

Since the above was written, we have seen an important ‘‘ Note

on the Chestnut Lamprey,” published by Prof. F. W. Cragin,

in the Bull. Washburn College Laboratory for March and April,

1885. Of four specimens of Petromyzon castaneus obtained by

him from the mouth of Mill Creek, Shawnee Co., Kansas, one

had eight mandibulary teeth, two nine, and one twelve. All

had the maxillary tooth tricuspid, and the color more yellowish

282 North American Species of Petromyzontide.

than in P. concolor. It is probable that P. concolor and P. cas-

taneus are distinct species, distinguished chiefly by the number

of supraoral cusps.

3.—PETROMYZON CONCOLOR. F

Petromyzon argenteus Kirtland, Boston Journal Nat. Hist., 1840, 342, with

plate (Big Miami R.). Gray, Cat. Chondr. Fish, 1851, 139 (copied).

Jordan & Gilbert, Synopsis Fish. N. A., 1883, 867 (not of Bloch).

Ichthyomyzon argenteus Cope, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1864, 276 (Michi_

gan); Nelson, Bull. Ills. Mus. Nat. Hist., I, 52, 1876. Jordan, Man. -

Vert., 1880, 848. Jordan & Gilbert, Synopsis Fish N. A., 10, 1882.

Ammoceetes argenteus Jordan, Man. Vert., Ed. I, 1876, 349; Jordan, Ann. —

N. Y. Acad. Sci., 1877, 120 (Lake Erie, White R., Ohio R_).

Scolecosoma argenteum Jordan, Zool]. Ohio, IV, 1882, 757.

Ammocetes concolor Kirtland, Bost. Journ. Nat. Hist., 1840, 473, with plate

(larva ; Mahoning and Scioto Rivers). Gray, Cat. Chondr. Fish,

Brit. Mus., 1851, 146 (copied).

Petromyzon concolor Jordan, Cat. Fish. N. A., 1885, 185.

? Ammocetes borealis Agassiz, Lake Superior, 1850, 252 (Michipicoten. Lake

Superior). [Description not diagnostic ; may be young of P. marinus

or of A. branchialis. ]

? Ammoceetes epyplerus Abbott, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila , 1860, 327. (Ohio

River). [Description inadequate and perhaps inaccurate; may be young

of A. branchialis. |

Petromyzon bdellium Jordan, Cat. Fish N. A., 4, 1885 (substitute for P. argen-

teus, Kirtland, preoccupied).

Habitat.—Great Lakes and Ohio and Mississippi Valleys, not

rare. :

The specimens examined by us are from the Ohio River at

New Albany, from Ohio, from White River, Mississippi River,

and from Lakes Erie and Michigan.

This species is a common parasite of the sturgeon and other

large fishes.

The specific name, ‘‘argenteus,” by which the species has

been usually known, is preoccupied, for which reason Dr. Jor-

dan has recently proposed the new name of P. bdellium. A study

of the changes undergone by the larve of P. marinus has con-

vinced him that the description of Ammocetes concolor would

apply to the larve of this species, the small size of the mouth

being one of the characters of larval forms. ‘This view is ren-

dered more probable because of the presence in concolor of the

dark dots above the gill-openings which are seen in the adult

North American Species of Petromyzontide. 283

form. The Ammocetes borealis of Agassiz is probably the larval

form of this species, as the long description agrees almost entirely

with a certain stage in the larva of P. marinus, and it is pre-

sumable that P. concolor passes through similar stages of growth.

P. concolor is certainly known to occur in the Upper Great

Lakes, whither the other species have not been traced.

The Ammocetes epypterus of Abbott, likewise based on a lar-

yal example, is not described in such a way as to enable us posi-

tively to identify it. Of the two species (concolor, branchialis)

thus far found in the Ohio Basin, the description most resembles

the former.

4.—PETROMYZON MARINUS.

Petromyzon maculosus Artedi, Ichthyol., 90, 1738 (non-binomial.) European

seas.

Petromyzon marinus Linneus, Syst. Nat., X, 1785, 230 (after Artedi, etc.).

AMERICAN SYNONYMY.

a. Anadromous form (marinus ).

Petromyzon marinus Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., 1870, VIII, 501 (Nova

Scotia ; Merrimack R.; New York.). Jordan & Gilbert, Synopsis

Fish. N. A., 1883, 11. Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1883, 367 (Ha-

vre de Grace). Jordan Cat. Fish. N. A., 1885, 4; and of recent

writers generally.

Petromyzon Americanus Le Sueur, Trans. Am. Phil. Soc., 1818, 373 (marine

form). Storer, Rept. Fish. Mass., 1839, 195 (Charlestown). De Kay,

New York Fauna, Fish, 1842, 379, pl. 66. f. 216. Gray, Cat. Chondr.

Fish., 1851, 139. Storer, Synopsis, 1846, 256; Storer, Hist. Fish.

Mass., 1867, 251, pl. 38, f. 4 (Massachusetts).

Petromyzon nigricans Le Sueur, Trans. Am. Phil. Soc., 1818, 385 (half grown).

Storer, Rept. Fish. Mass., 1839, 197. De Kay, New York Fauna,

Fishes, 1842, 381, pl. 79, f. 247 (copied). Linsley, ‘‘Am. Journ. Sci.

Arts., 1844,” (Connecticut). Storer, Synopsis, 1846, 517. Gray, Cat.

Chondr. Fish., 1851, 139. Storer, Hist. Fish. Mass., 1867, 253, pl.

Fs ae a

Ammoceetes bicolor Le Sueur, Trans. Am. Phil. Soc., 1818, 386 (larval form).

Storer, Rept. Fish. Mass., 1839, 198 (copied). DeKay, New York

Fauna, Fishes, 1842, 383, pl. 79, f. 248 (Connecticut R.). Gray, Cat.

Chondr. Fish., 1851, 146 (name preoccupied).

Petromyzon appendix DeKay, New York Fauna, Fishes, 1842, 381, pl. 68,

f. 211 (Providence ; Hudson River; young, in fresh water). Gray,

Cat. Chondr. Fish., 1851, 148.

Ammoceeles appendix Jordan & Gilbert, Synopsis Fish. N. A., 1883, 868

(copied).

284 North American Species of Petromyzontide.

? Petromyzon lamotteni (Le Sueur, Mss.) DeKay, N. Y. Fauna, Fishes, 1842,

382, pl. 79, f. 249 (no locality ; description insufficient ; pessibly intended

for A. branchialis. ) . oan

Petromyzon maculosus Gronow, Cat. Fish. Ed. Gray, 1854, 2 \ Europe’.

b. Land-locked form (unicolor).

Ammocetes unicolor DeKay, New York Fauna, Fishes, 1842, 3838, pl. 79,

f. 250 (larva ; Lake Champlain). Gray, Cat. Chondr. Fish., 1851, 146.

Ammocetes fluviatilis Jordan, Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., 1877. 118 (Cayuga

Lake ; not Pelromyzon fluviatilis L.).

Petromyzon nigricans Jordan & Gilbert, Synopsis Fish. N. A., 1888, 11 (Ca-

yuga Lake).

Pelromyzon marinus dorsatus (Wilder, Mss.) Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N.

A., 1883, 869 (Cayuga Lake). Jordan, Cat. Fish. N. A., 1885, 4.

Hahitat.—Streams of North-eastern North America and of

Northern Europe, south to Chesapeake Bay. Ascending rivers

in the spring for the purpose of spawning, and thus Jand-locked

in lakes and streams of Western and Northern New York.

The larva of this species is for a time blind, toothless, and

with a contracted mouth, in which the lower lip forms a lobe

distinct from the upper. Later this lower lobe becomes conflu-

ent with the upper, and the eyes appear, while yet the mouth is

narrow and contracted. We have examined marine examples of

this species, and also numerous specimens in all stages of growth

from the larval to the adult form, collected by Dr. Burt G.

Wilder, in Cayuga Lake, at Ithaca, N. Y. Among these are

types of P. dorsatus Wilder, which seems to be merely a land-

locked form not permanently distinct from P. marnus.

The name wnicolor is based on the larva of the land-locked

form, and it has priority over dorsatus. The characters assumed

to distinguish this form from the true marinus are, however,

more or less inconstant and not of specific value.*

* The following are the characters assigned to P. marinus dorsatus (uni-

color) :

““The Cayuga Lake Lamprey is apparently a distinct subspecies, differing

from P. marinus in the longer head (snout 14 in chest ; head half longer than

chest ; in P. marinus, the snout is 13 in chest ; head one-third longer than

chest). Mandibulary teeth usually 8 or 9. Males with the back before dorsal

jin compressed in a long hard fleshy ridge: Interspace between dorsals varia-

fp! Ns hi

North American Species of Petromyzontida. 285

The synonymy needs little further remark. ‘There seems to

be no doubt of the identity of the American P. americanus wita

P. marinus. It seems also certain that P. nigricans is the

young or river form of the same species, while A. dicolor repre-

sents the larval condition, blind, with the mouth contracted and

toothless.

It is also most probable that P. appendix represents a later

stuge in the growth of the young lamprey ; but of this we are

not quite so certain.

The P. lamotteni of Le Sueur has the coloration of P. ma-

rinus; but the figure of the dentition is unsatisfactory and pro-

bably unreliable.

Additional Note on the Lamprey of Cayuga Lake.

BY SETH E. MEEK.

Since the above was in the hands of the printer, I have re-

ceived from Mr. Seth E. Meek, now Fellow in Cornell University,

many specimens of the Cayuga Lake Lamprey, together with the

following notes, which will prove valuable for purposes of com-

parison. DoS. J.

ble in length, shortest in males, 14 to 2 base of first dorsal. Tail 32 in length.

Coloration of P. marinus, and size not much less. Abundant in Cayuga

Lake, New York ; not yet observed elsewhere. The differences above noted

are not very constant.” .

This peculiar carination of the back in breeding males has not been

noticed by us in P. marinus. We are, however, informed by Mr. Meek,

_ that several specimens from the streams of Massachusetts, now in the Mu-

seum of Comparative Zoology, show the same character.

North American Species of Petromyzontide.

286

yaa ena “h hh 8 6 8 ‘h 8 aie re eee Sen) HAE Na LDUBU: JO JOquUIn Kt

‘e | Ole @ "@ re ore | Ose Oe Ole ot eaal acs SG a oar Ceg oa yO -ayerd Axepnqripuru jo qysua'y

08'S | 08 y .0¢°S | 09'S | 8's y (02S |OLS |0GS [otc tt ug pesiop ystg ye Apog Jo WIPIM.

069 (08:9 ,099 | 069 Qaite Or Use Oro MEO 000) Potters yt erties: SoG qe Pua FO (IPL.

OCT OPT |0@T . OGL | 08'T 0¢'L | 0@'t | 09'L O91 | OGL [oo *: p28 EG cemoe Ch es <8 HSH TREO jo WYSIOY

Oo7 |08F' |0Cr 06h |OLP |09F | 09h |O8F |OGh | OS Jt tt Qseqwors) jesiop puooas Fo WY SIOH

‘e “@ 08'S "e 08°? 06'S 0k '% 0G '% eure 09'S Citi ence taco celtere co evaiatinis © 01/016) ere ie *(4S04RO.19 ) [Bsop say ae) {SH

‘99 ‘eg | 0G°99 ‘eg | 02°99 | 06°69 99 | 0629 | 06°99 | 06°99 [ett Peete eee etee teen ete ee ess) Tegiop

* |puooes JO ULsIRUT IOLIa}Uv 0} JNOUS JO diy WO.AJ 9OULISIC,

0ze¢ ote |oe'1¢ 0gTe ee | 99 ‘0G Te |0G06 | 061¢ OG TE octet ttt ttt) 7es10p

ISI JO UISIVUE AOIIa}UR OF ynNOUS Jo diy WOAJ ddULISIC,

086 (096 | 086 | 066 | 066 | 066 Ail ROMO eROL Gen 26 9 9: seas RSOUO}IROUS TO. dr} wolf souvystg

OL ONSOr ‘IT | 0G OL | 096 | O02 OT | OG TL ‘IT | OG OT | OS OL |* FtGQ10 Jo ULoIBUL LOLL9}UB OF JNOUS JO diy WOIZ DOUVISTC]

2 zg OLS e 4 08'S OLS 02'2 0a's 0G '% Mer e\isiie) etveele) a, nun sinveiiens eve 6 el eiaiie ces. e.'asiel ieee a “oko Jo IojowUvig.

0S '8 8 | 04'8~-|0¢'8 | 09'8 | 0g'8 ‘6 |098 | 088 | 088 Se eee TOUT TO AeleueTp, snl

ee cre ROC ommieU nes Q0G Ore QursusOGRGns| Sea OOG mNGi ig 8 a amour fo. IOJOULVIP ISLOASUBA YT,

kb % | 0G°2 ‘L (069 | 092 |062 | 092 | 062 Sh espn SUIPN[OU!) [VsIOp pUOdas 40 UTSILO ye Apog Jo ydoq

0g | O18 8 | 088 |0G¢'4 | OL'8 | 0S’°8 | 038'8 ‘8 | 0G | (esprit Surpnyour) [Bslop ys1y. jo uLSLIO ye Apoq Jo yWdoq

069 | 06°¢ 9 | 099 a!) 9 L | 0¢'9 | 0¢°9 Clo ea Be ae se SOUS Ee peayi FO qidod

QGee Fe $e Ee | QGPR ‘ez | OG'e | OG FZ OCHS OGRE Ce pea Jo ySuary

HLONG'T 'TVLOL JO SHLGANAGNOH NT

0¢°Ge | O's | OL SS | 06 FS | 09°SS | OG'SS | 09'1S | 0970S] “7° | OLBT | ct 4yuea 07 ynous Jo dy wousy yysueT

09 Fe 0c 'P£e 08’ 1e ‘Te OF ‘0g ‘0g "6Z 088% OL, Qe 06 FZ ia \e) ke ve lapis leiei is, Bi slip. are ag eats Oar chee gee gaan NAL) [BIOL

‘SUMLANWILNGQ NT

‘podopoaop [JOA OOpPlt [VSLOp TIM suoumoodg ‘Py

AIVT VOOAVO

(snuwmu uozhwouag )

WOU SATUMNVT FO SLNGWAUOS VAN

s of Petromyzontide.

cle

can Spe

meri

North A

(c°

06°

Rahs ad eos

06 C6

O8 CE

| OG

' 08

| 06°

| OC"

086

OG”

OG:

CD ix

et ch

Meo)

| OL St

eet or ot

09°82

‘8 te) 8 8

Ore OL 0L-6 g

06° | 02'S 08'S 5;

01:9 | 069 ‘9 | 0g’¢

09r |088 | 08'F ‘g

(i SwlKOGre s1F0SS

0¢°99 | ~P9 | OL'89 ‘89

"ec 6P | OE 'eg ge

OS'S | OS ST | OS'ST | OS FI

0¢'8 | 062 |066 | 0°°6

03°6 | 08'8 ‘OT ‘OT

OG 0620. o01e 1%

Het eOe Os 0Ge, 08rd

ede. Oe Gs

‘Lh | 089 ‘8 | 02

0972 | OS's 6 | OLS

Ore | 0S'P ‘ce | 0¢'e

"CZ | 0S SZ | O8'FS PG

‘eS | OS SS OF'TS | 0G 02

0G 1E | OL'OS O8'L | OL LE

0ST

06'S

08 LO

Og eG

0g ET

0¢'8

So >

uD GO

eet Bact ole rkank a

sdsno Areynqrpuvut Jo requ N

(ee Sosa regs Se grmOselD Arvpnqipuvut jo yj0ue'yT

Be a gd “‘Testop sug yew Apo JO IPI

rresess-gQk9 4B pvoly JO (APEAN

ee eee eso eee eeerre eevee &

So gd Nan ge each ee (qsoyvars) [Vs1op puodveS JO WSIOH

oe ee see eC "(9809¥0.18) [es1op {Say jo {USO}

he eee SMT Re Mowe gates GA Ok reese es TRgTOp

puooes Jo uLo4eU JOT19jUv 0} Nous Jo dry WoAZ 9OUeISICT

SE ae 0 he rn vente etree eet ees es TRSTOp

ISI. JO ULSIVUT IOTIaZUB O} yHOUS Jo dI} WoAy 99URISTC,

OINSSY [VIPOUBIG 481 0} JnOUS Jo dry wioay soueysiqy

“++ -TTWSOM OF NOUS JO diy WoAF dOURISICT

"*4Iq40 Jo ULGIVUL LOLL9}Uv O} NOUS Jo dT) WOAF 9OTIRYSIC,

‘aka JO 1o}OWvIG,

‘qynour Jo aajourvip onbijqo

*YPINOUL JO LOJOWRIP OSIIOASUBAY,

‘]es10p puodes Jo uLsi10 ye Apoq jo ydeq

‘]BsIOp sly JO UIstIO ye Apoq Jo yIdoq

‘[Iujsou ye proy jo qydoq

piokr ionettetle: einige eVeNeco\reliasuelue ‘poy Jo qyouay

eoeoe ee ee ee He oO

ees enee seo eso e eee eee

Ce ee ee

ose eeo eee eee eo &

oeerer erro ee tee es

eevre eee

IVLO]T, 40 SHLGUYGNOF, Nt SLNGWAMOS VAL

"+ "qu9A 07 ynouS Jo dry UIOAZ YVCUAT

Svaker viel sisi) sere ce eee le UOT [VIO],

‘SUMLANIONGS) NI SENGNAYOS Ma YA

‘podopasop [Jam jou {Ve yw yuosord Jr ‘ospia

—— ——— —

[vsiop oy} YI suounoedg ‘g

288 North Ameriran Species of Petromyzontide. —

Having made use of notes and suggestions from Dr. Burt G.

Wilder and Prof. Simon H. Gage, I have the following to offer :

I have examined in all 106 specimens from Cayuga Lake.

Of these, 64 possess the prominent dorsal ridge, on the remain-

ing 42 the ridge is obsolete or less prominently developed. ©

The ridge was considered by me as a sexual distinction (pre-

sent on males only), until I found gravid females with the ridge

quite prominent. oe

‘he papilla at vent also proved to be rather an unsafe guide,

and so I resorted to an examination of the ovaries or testes.

This was equally unsatisfactory. A few very doubtful cases

were referred to Prof. Gage for microscopical examination. which

resulted in more doubt than ever. He did not think that he

could tell with absolute certainty which were males or which

were females, without some previous study of fresh specimens.

All that is left is to get these and study them from a sexual

standpoint, which thing we intend to do as soon as possible.

It seems to me that the question has this value in classifica-

tion : if we find that the dorsal ridge is peculiar to the lampreys*

of Caynga Lake, that all males possess it, and no males are found

without it, it is a character of specific rank. If on the other

hand, males are found without the dorsal ridge as well as with

it, and the same prove true of females, the character is without

value in classification.

It may be the case that the ridge is to the lampreys as “horns”

are to some minnows, but I hardly think so.

There are no whole specimens from the Atlantic in the Cor-

nell University Museum. A few are here in sections, having

been used for class study. The dentition of these is the same as

that of the Cayuga Lake specimens.

The mandibulary cusps are as follows :

Sea lampreys (Heads), 2 with 7 cusps.

6 66 8 ce

* Since the above was written, Mr. Meek has shown that the dorsal ridge

is present in many specimens of P. marinus (from Lawrence, Mass.), and

that no distinction exists between the latter and the Cayuga Lamprey, except

that the latter does not reach the fult size of the former.

North American Species of Petromyzontide. 289

Lake lampreys (heads), 3 with 7 cusps.

3 ee $ ee

4 ee G . ee

No. with No. with No. with

Cayuga Lake Specimens. 7 cusps. 8 cusps. 9 cusps.

Specimens with well developed ridge, 26 23 15

Specimens without well developed ridge, 11 21 10

Total, LER - - - 37 to 25

—— ~- —

Grand total, - - - 106

When there are more than seven cusps, usually from two to four

or five are smaller than the others. I noticed no variation in

the disposition of the other teeth.

The mandibulary plate is proportionally about the same length

in all specimens ; its cusps are from 7 to 9.

The caudal margin of the cephalic dorsal fin is always distinct.

In a few specimens the dorsal fins are well separated, the dis-

tance between them in some cases equals the distance from first

to fifth branchial fissure. ‘his separation is greater and occurs

oftener in specimens Without the dorsal ridge.

The height of dorsal fins varies in different individuals. The

fins are usually lower when the distance between them is greater.

The caudal margin of the caudal dorsal is in all specimens

quite distinct, the distance from its caudal margin to tip of cau-

dal varies in different individuals; it is longer in the more slen-

der specimens. The distance from caudal margin of caudal

dorsal to tip of caudal fin is in some individuals nearly equal to

distance from caudal border of eye to seventh branchial fissure.

A transection at nostril would cut or pass slightly cephalad of

cephalic margin of orbit.

The distance from first to fifth branchial fissure is in some

specimens slightly greater than the distance from nostril to tip

of snout ; In some specimens equal to this distance, in others

much less. These characters vary as stated in all mature speci-

mens, whether large or small. Among the many larval speci-

mens examined, those of the same size all look alike.

290 North American Species of Petromyzontide.

Genus 3._—AMMOCCTES.

LAMPREDA Rafinesque, Analyse de la Nature, 1815, 94 (name only).

Pricus Rafinesque, 1. c. (name only).

AmmMocates (Duméril’, Cuvier, Regne Animal, Ed. I, 119, 1817 (branch.

ialis, a larval form).

LAMPETRA Gray, Proc. Zool. Soc. London, 1851, 235 (fluviaiilis),

CHILOPTERUS Philippi, Wiegmann’s Archiv, 1858, 306 (larva).

ENTOSPHENUS Gill, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila., 331, 1862 (tridentatus : nomen

nudum).

ENTOSPHENUS Jordan & Gilbert, Bes Fishes N. A., 1883, 7 : 867 ure

dentatus).

This genus will perhaps admit of further subdivision, as Dr.

Gill has suggested, but to us, the characters distinguishing Am-

mocetes and Hntosphenus seem rather of subgeneric value.

ANALYSIS OF SPECIES OF AMMOCCTES.

a. Supraoral lamina with a well-developed median cusp which is about half

the length of the other two ; anterior lingual tooth wedge-shaped

with an almost straight, finely serrate edge ; dorsal fin divided ;

buccal disk moderate. Marine species of large size, anadromous

(Entosphenus Gil}).

b. Infraoral lamina with five or six cusps ; teeth on buccal disk mostly

in one series ; those above mouth unicuspid, those on sides of disk

larger, the first and last bicuspid, the two middle ones tricuspid ;

those below rather small, mostly bicuspid ; space between dorsals

about two-fifths length of first dorsal ; head about 10 in length ; 73

muscular impressions between last gill-opening and vent; color

plain dark brown. - : - . - TRIDENTATUS, 5.

aa. Supraoral lamina with a very small median cusp or with none ; anterior

lingual tooth little developed, with a crescentiform dentated edge,

the median denticle enlarged ; buccal disk small, with the teeth few

and small, none of them tricuspid ; small species, mostly fluviatile

(Ammocetes).

c. Dorsal fin divided into two fins, which are separate, or joined at base

only.

d. Infraoral lamina with 7 cusps, the outer ones largest ; head shorter

than thorax, 104 in total length ; interspace between dorsals 14 in

in first dorsal; height of first dorsal half that of second ; color

plumbeous above, golden below. = : - - AUREUS, 6.

.. dd. Infraoral lamina with 8 or 9 subequal cusps ; about three bicuspid

teeth on each side of buccal disk ; teeth on upper part of disk sim-

ple ; head 10 in length ; dorsai fins slightly connected by membrane

at base ; second dorsal not much higher than first, much lower than

North American Species of Petromyzontide. 291

in A. branchialis ; insertion of dorsal a little behind middle of body:

63 muscular depressions between last gill-opening and vent ; color

plumbeous above, sides and below silvery. - - CrBarius, 7.

ce. Dorsal fin continuous, tbe two parts of the fin separated not quite to

base by a sharp notch ; insertion of dorsal fin a little before middle

of body ; both dorsals high, the first 13 in height of second ; teeth

-very feeble ; infraoral plate with from 5 to 9 feeble, bluntish, sub-

equal cusps, about 3 bicuspid teeth on each side of buccal disk ; teeth

on upper part of disk simple ; supraoral lamina rarely with a median

cusp ; head about as long as thorax, 8} in total length ; 67 muscu-

lar impressions between last gill-opening and vent ; color bluish-

black, silvery below. - . : - BRANCHIALIS, 8.

5._AMMOCCE:TES TRIDENTATUS.

? Pelromyzon marinus camtschaticus Pallas, Zoogr. Rosso-Asiatica, III, 1811,

67 (Kamtschatka).

Petromyzon tridentatus Gairdner Mss., Richardson, Fauna Boreali-Americana,

1836, 293 (Columbia River). DeKay, New York Fauna, Fishes, 1842,

382 (copied). Storer, Synopsis Fish. N. A., 1846, 266 (copied).

Gray, ‘‘Proc. Zool. Soc., London, 1851, 240, - 19.” Gray, Cat.

Chondr. Fish. Brit. Mus., 1851, 144. Girard, U.S. Pac. R. R. Surv..

377, 1858 (Fort Reading, Cal.).

Entosphenus tridentatus Gill, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1862. 331 (name

only). Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1880, 458, and 1881,

30.(Columbia R. at Astoria and Monterey Bay at Santa Cruz). Jor-

dan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A,, 1888, 868. .

Ichthyomyzon tridentatus Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., VIII, 1870, 506

(copied).

Lampetra tridentata Jordan & Gilbert, Synopsis Fish. N. A., 1883, 7. Bean,

. Proc. U. 8S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 89, 98 (Walla Walla River, and Garrison

Creek. Washington Ter.).

Ammoceetes trideniatus Jordan, Cat. Fish. N. A., 1885, 3.

Petromyzon ciliatus Ayres. Proc. Cal. Ac. Sci. 1855, 43 (San Francisco). Gi-

rard, U. 8. Pac. R. R. Surv., 1858, 378 (San Francisco).

Entosphenus ciliatus Gill, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1862, 331 (name only).

Petromyzon lividus Girard, U. 8. Pac. R. R. Surv., 1858, 378 (Wahmah-

math It.).

Petromyzon astori Girard, U.S. Pac. R. R. Surv., 1858, 380 (Columbia R. at

Astoria).

Entosphenus astori Gill, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1862, 331 (mame only).

Ichthyomyzon astori Giinther, Cat. Fish., VIII, 1870, 307 (copied).

Lampetra astori Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1883, 8 (copied).

Entosphenus epihexodon Gill, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1862, 331 (based on

Petromyzon tridentatus Girard, erroneously supposed to be distinct from

P. tridentatus Gairdner).

Lampetra epihecodon Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1882, 8 (copied).

ye ee

* rial Pee

mn ¢.

292 North American Species of Petromyzoutide.

Habitat.—Coasts of Western North America, from British

Columbia to Monterey, ascending rivers in spring to spawn.

The studies and collections of Professors Jordan and Gilbert

on the Pacific Coast of North America, seem to leave no doubt

that all the specimens of anadromous lampreys on the Pacific

Coast (called tridentatus, ciliatus, lividus, astori and epthexodon

by authors) are forms of a single species.

The specimen now before us is from Walla Walla, ide is 26

inches in length. It was obtained by Capt. Charles Bendire.

6._AMMOCCTES AUREUS.

~ »?

??Petromyzon fluvialis Richardson, ‘‘ Franklin’s First Journey, 1823, 705

(Arctic America). ? Richardson, Fauna Boreali-Americana, 1836,

284 (not P. fluviatilis L.).

?? Petromyzon borealis Girard, U. S. Pac. R. R. Surv., 1858, 377 (no descrip-

tion ; based on Richardson ; not Ammocoetes borealis Agassiz).

Ammocetes aureus Bean, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1881, 159 (Anvik, Yukon R.).

Jordan & Gilbert, Synopsis Fish. N. he 1882, 868 (copied). Jordan,

Cat. Fish. N. A), 1885, 4.

Habitat.—Streams of Alaska.

This species is known to us only from the description of Dr.

Bean. It seems to approach more nearly than any other of our

species to the European Ammocetes fluviatilis L. A comparison

of Dr. Bean’s description with figures of the latter species shows

numerous differences in details of measurement.

7.—_AMMOCC:TES CIBARIUS.

Pelromyzon plumbeus Ayres, Proc. Cal. Ac. Nat. Sci., 1855, 27 (San Fran_

cisco). Girard, U. 8. Pac. R. R. Surv., 1858, 380 (San Francisco).

(Not Petromyzon plumbeus Shaw.)

Lampetra plumbea Gill, Proc. Ac. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1862. 331 (name only).

Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. A., 1883, 8 (copied).

Ammoceetes plumbea Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. 8S. Nat. Mus., 1880, 458 ;

1881, 30 (Seattle, Puget Sound ; San Francisco). Bean, Proc. U. 8.

Nat. Mus., 1882, 93 (Garrison Creek, near Walla Walla).

Ammoceetes cibarius Girard, U. 8. Pac. R. R. Surv.. 1858, 383 (Puget Sound,

larval form). Jordan, Cat. Fishes N. A., 1885, 4.

Petromyzon ayresi Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., VIII, 505, 1870 (British

Columbia).

Habitat.—Rivers of Western North America from Frazer’s

River to the Sacramento.

North American Species of Petromyzontide. 293

This small species seems to be chiefly contined to the fresh wa-

ters along the Pacific Coast. ‘The specimens before us are about

7 inches in length, and come from near Walla Walla, where they

were collected by Capt. Charles Bendire. |

There seems to be no doubt that the Ammocetes cibarius of

Girard is simply the larva of this species. The older name, plum-

deus, cannot be retained, as the name Petromyzon plumbeus was

loug ago given by Shaw to another species.

8. AMMOC®TES BRANCHIALIS.

EUROPEAN SYNONYMY.

Petromyzon pinna dorsali posteriori lineari, etc. Linneeus, Fauna Suecica, 274

(larva). .

Petromyzon branchialis Linnzeus, Syst. Nature, X, 1758, 230 (based on the

Fauna Suecica,) and of late authors.

Ammoceetes branchialis Cuvier, Régne Animal, 1827, and of many authors.

Petromyzon planert Bloch, Fische Deutschlands, III, 47, about 1785, and of

many authors.

Le Petromyzon rouge* Lacépéde, Hist. Nat. Poiss., II, 99, f. 1, 1798 (Rouen ;

larva).

Le Petromyzon suce* Lacépéde, op. cit., II, 101, 1798 (Rouen’.

Petromyzon septeuil Lacépéde, op. cit., 1V, 667, 1803 (Rouen).

Petromyzon niger Lacepéde, op. cit., IV, 667, (Louviers).

Petromyzon bicolor Shaw, Gen’l Zool., V, 2, 263, 1805.

Petromyzon plumbeus Shaw, |. ec.

Petromyzon lumbricalis Pallas, Zoogr. Rosso-Asiat., II, 69, 1811 (larva).

Petromyzon coecus Couch, ‘‘ Lond. Mag. Nat. Hist., V, 23, f. 10” Ularva).

AMERICAN SYNONYMY.

Petromyzon nigrum Rafinesque, Ichth. Ohiensis, 1820, 84 (near Falls of Ohio).

Petromyzon niger Jordan, Man. Vert., Ed. I, 1876, 315. Nelson, Bull. Ils.

Mus. Nat. Hist., I, 1876, 52. (Not of Lacépéde.)

‘Ammocetes niger Jordan, Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., 1877, 120 (Fox R.,

Peckatonica R., White R., Rock R., Wabash R.). Jordan, Bull.

Ills. Lab. Nat. Hist., 1878, 70. Jordan, Man. Vert., Ed. 2, 1878, 349.

Jordan, Zool. Ohio, 1882, 756. Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fishes N. A.,

1882, 9.

Ammocetes wpyplerus Jordan. Cat. Fishes N. A., 1885, 4 (not of Abbott).

——

* To these species, only French names were given by Lac¢péde. The

Latin names, P. ruber, and P. sanguisuga, were supplied by later writers.

294 North American Species of Petromyzentide.

Habitat.—Streams of Wisconsin and Indiana.- i

throughout the Mississippi Valley.

This little species is very abundant in the spring in many

streams of Southern and Central Indiana and in Southern Wis-

consin. Its distribution outside of these regions is unknown ;

but it will probably be found in all parts of the Upper Missis-

sipp! Valley. Part of the numerous specimens before us are |

from Big Prairie Creek, a tributary of the Peckatonica River

near Monroe, Wis., collected by Mr. Winfred Copeland. Other

specimens are from the streams about Bloomington, Indiana.

All are about eight inches in length.

This species ascends the streams in spring, and is then found

in the little brooks and spring runs in some abundance. Later,

it disappears. We have never seen its larva, nor any specimens

taken in summer or fall.

This is unquestionably the Petromyzon nigrum, carelessly de-

scribed by Rafinesque.

It may be that it is Le Sueur’s P. lamotteni, known only from

a drawing of Le Sueur, published after his death. But this

drawing is either unfinished or inaccurate ; and while the denti-

tion figured looks somewhat like that of the present species, the

coloration is that of P. marinus. We think that P. lamottent

must be regarded as unidentifiable. The possibility of the iden-

tity of Ammocetes borealis and Ammocetes epyptera with the

larva of this species, has been elsewhere discussed.

We have carefully compared our specimens with descriptions

and figures of the European species, especially with those given

in Day’s Fishes of Great Britain and Ireland. We can detect no

differences whatever, and are therefore compelled to record our

specimens under the name of Ammocetes branchialis. Should

comparison of specimens show that real differences exist, a new

name must be given to the American species, as the name niger

has been already used in this genus.

North American Species of Petromyzontidea.

299d

List oF NoMINAL SPECIES OF PETROMYZONTIDA! MENTIONED IN 'THE

PRESENT PAPER.

(Tenable specific names are in ilalics.)

Nominal Species.

Petromyzon marinus L. -

branehialis L. -

planeri Bloch, — -

(ruber) Lacépéde, -

(sanguisuga) Lacépéde,

septoeuil Lacépéde,

niger Lacépéde, -

bicolor Shaw, =

plumbeus Shaw,

lumbricalis Pallas, -

(marinus) camtschaticus Pallas,

ccecus Couch, -

americanus Le Sueur,

nigricans Le Sueur,

Ammocecetes bicolor Le Sueur,

Petromyzon nigrum Rafinesque,

eé

tridentatus Gairdner,

argenteus Kirtland,

Ammoceetes concolor Kirtland,

Petromyzon appendix DeKay, -

Ammoceetes unicolor DeKay,

Petromyzon lamotteni Le Sueur,

Ammoceetes borealis Agassiz.

Petromyzon maculosus Gronow,

ciliatus Ayres, -

plumbeus Ayres, -

lividus Girard, -

astori Girard,

borealis Girard, -

Ammoceetes cibarius Girard, — -

Ichthyomyzon castaneus Girard,

hirudo Girard, -

Ammoceetes ~pyptlera Abbott,

Entosphenus epihexodon Gill, -

Petromyzon ayresi Ginther, -

Ammocecetes aureus Bean, - =

Petromyzon marinus dorsatus Wilder,

“6

bairdi Gill, — -- :

bdellium Jordan,

Date.

1758

1785?

1798

1803

18038

1805

1811

1813

1818

1820

1836

1840

1842

1850

1854

1855

1858

1860

1862

1870

1881

1883

1885

PUP Er ODP Pb b> pb bP bb Py

Identification.

. Marinus.

. branchialis.

. brauchialis.

. branchialis.

. tridentatus ?

. branchialis.

marinus.

marinus (larva).

. branchialis.

. tridentatus.

. concolor.

. concolor (larva).

. marinus

marinus (larva).

? P. marinus.

? P. concolor (larva).

P. marinus.

YU>p > ebb

. tridentatus.

. cibarius.

. tridentatus.

. cibarius.

. castaneus.

. castaneus (?hirudo).

? P. concolor (larva).

Lie

tridentatus.

cibarius.

aureus.

marinus.

Bathymyzon bairdi.

concolor.

296 North American Species of Petromyzoniide.

RECAPITULATION.

Genus 1.—Baruymyzon Gill.

(Doubtful genus ; possibly based on a mutilated Pelromyzon ?) _

Bathymyzon bairdi Gill. (Species not well known.) —

Genus 2.—PETROMyYzon (Artedi) Linneeus.

§ Ichthyomyzon Girard.

. Petromyzon castaneus Girard. (Possibly two species : hirudo, castaneus,

contained in the synonymy.)

. Petromyzon concolor Kirtland.

§ Petromyzon.

. Petromyzon marinus L.

Genus 3.—AMMoca@TES Duméril.

§ Entosphenus Gill.

. Ammoceetes tridentatus Gairdner.

$ Ammocettes.

. Ammoccetes aureus Bean.

. Ammocecetes cibarius Girard.

. Ammoceetes branchialis Linnzeus. (Possibly distinct from the European

species, in which case a new name should be given to the American

form.)

INDIANA UNIVERSITY, October 21, 1885.

_-—

A Review of American Diodontide. 294

XVI.—A Review of the Genera and Species of Diodontide

found in American seas.

BY CARL H. EIGENMANN.

Read December 21, 1885.

At the suggestion of Dr. David 5. Jordan, I have made a study

> of the American Diodontide, with «a view to ascertain the num-

ber of valid species and their correct nomenclature. I give in

this paper the synonymy of the species recognized, with keys for

their identification. ‘The specimens studied belong to the Mu-

seum of the Indiana University, at Bloomington, Ind. Some

important questions in regard to the species cannot be settled

without a greater amount of material than has been at my dis-

posal ; but it is believed that the conclusions here reached rep-

resent some advances in our knowledge. I am indebted.to Miss

Rosa Smith for the description of two specimens from La Paz,

at San Diego. .

The American genera are two, which may be defined as fol-

lows :

a. Body moderately inflatable ; head broad : nasal tentacle in front of eye,

with two lateral openings ; jaws without median sutures ; vertical

fins rounded ; pectorals short, broad.

b. Spines slender, mostly two-rooted, erectile ; in the three-rooted spines,

the anterior root is formed by a prolongation of the anterior ridge

of the’spine.

Diopon, 1.

bb. Spines robust, all three-rooted, fixed; the anterior root similar to

the lateral roots.

CHILOMYCTERUS, 2.

io2)

A heview of American Diodontide.

1. DIODON.

Diopon Linneus, Syst. Nat., Ed. X, 335, 1758 (atinga, hystrix, etc.).

? TRicHopi0pon Bleeker, ‘‘ Atl. Ichth. Gymnod., 49,” 1865 (pilosus).

Parapiopon Bleeker, ‘‘ Atl. Ichth. Gymnod., 56, plate 8, fig, 2,” 1865

(hystrix). Z

The genus 7richodiodon is based on a description by Mitehill,

of a species which has not been since recognized. It is not un-

likely that it is simply the very young of Diodon hystrix. At

any rate, its place in the system needs verification.

The name Paradiodon is the result of Bleeker’s rule of always

regarding the first species mentioned in any new genus as the

type of the genus. In this case, atinga is the first species men- .

tioned under Diodon by Linneeus, and this atinga is a species of

Chilomycterus. |

——_-

ANALYSIS OF THE SPECIES OF DIODON. Fi pe 4

a. Spines terete. : - f E - = - - - Hystrix, ie

b, Frontal spines not as long as post-pectoral spines (in adults not half as _

long, about as long as eye); pre-dorsal spines very short, three-

rooted, fixed or nearly so ; 20 spines in a series between snout and

dorsal ; post-pectoral spines very much elongate ; dorsal rays, 15; |

anal, 15 ; upper lobe of pectorals little longer than lower. Adult .

above everywhere spotted with round black spots ; these are largest

in front of dorsal, smallest on naked area about mouth ; white be

low ; young with large dark blotches, the coloration precisely simi.

Jar to that of holacanthus. - = - - Var. HystTRix.

bb. Frontal spines longer than post-pectoral spines, about twice as long as

eye; pre-dorsal spines not shortened, two-rooted, erectile; 14 to 17)...

spines in a series between snout and dorsal ; post-pectoral spines

not especially elongate ; dorsal rays, 12 ; anal, 12; pectoral broader

than long, upper lobe pointed, lower lobe rounded. A broad black

bar from eye to eye, continued below the eye as a narrow bar; a

broad bar across occiput ; a black blotch above each pectoral ; a

short bar in front of dorsal ; another in which the dorsal is inserted ;

a blotch behind the pectoral, and many small spots and blotches on

the upper parts. - - - - - Var. HoLACANTHUS.

aa, ‘‘Spines compressed laterally, short ; 15 spines in a series between snout

and dorsal ; upper parts covered with round spots; those about

pectorals sometimes confluent into a blotch ; fins immaculate.”

MacuLiFER, 2

_”

A Review of American Diodontide. 299

1. DIODON HYSTRIX.

a (var, Aystria,)

Orbis echinalus Rondelet, De Piscibus, 324, 1558 (* Northern Occan’).

Gunnajacu quara Marcgrave, Hist. Nat. Bras., 159, 1648 (Brazil).

Pore-cpics de-Mer Froger, Voyage de la Mer du Sud, 119, 1715 (Isles Sainte

Anne).

Ostracion conico oblougns Artedi, Genera, 60, No. 19. Sueci Desc. Spec.

Pise:, 86, No. 21, 1738:

(rayracion Nos. 12, 13, 14, Klein, Historia Pisc., 19 and 20, 1740.

Erizo Parra. Desc. Dif. Piezas Hist. Nat. Cuba, 60, tab. 29, fig. 1, 1787

(Havana).

Diodon hystrix Linneeus. Syst. Nat., Ed. X, 335, 1758 (India : after Artedi).

Id., Ed. XII, 413, 1766 (Cape Good Hope). Bloch, Auslandische

Fische, I, 91, plate cxxvi, 1787. Gmelin, Syst. Nat, 1448, 1788

(copied). Walbaum, Artedi Pise., 597, 1792 (copied). Bloch &

Schneider, Syst. Ichth., 512, 1801 (Indian Ocean; copied). Turton Ed.

Linneus Syst. Nat., I, 892, 1806 (Indian and American Seas). Cuvier,

Régne Animal. Ed. I, 336 (note), 1829. Oken, Naturgeschichte, VI,

116, 1836. Barneville, ‘‘Revue Zo6l., 141,” 1846. Bleeker, En. Spec.

Pisc. Arch. Ind , 203, 1859 (Java, Sumatra, Batu, Celebes, Flores,

Ternate, Amboina, Ceram, Banda, in mari’. Castelnau, Mem. Poiss.

PAfr, Aust., 74, 1861. Ginther, Voy. Challenger, 58, 1869 (Tahiti).

Id., Cat. Fish Brit. Mus., VIII, 806, 1870 (West Indies, Jamaica,

Indian Ocean). Klunzinger, Syn. Fisch. Rothen Meeres, 647, 1870

(Red Sea). Cope, Trans. Am. Phil. Soc., 480, 1870 (Lesser Antilles).

Goode, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 1879, 109 (East Coast Florida). Bean,

Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 1880, 75 (Bermudas). Swain & Smith, Proc.

U.S. Nat. Mus , 1882, 141 (Johnston’s Island, Mid-Pacific). Jordan

& Gilbert, Bull. U.S Fish Com., 1882, 105 (Mazatlan). Jordan &

Gilbert, Syn. Fish N. A., 868, 1883. Jordan, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus.,

1884, 146 (Key West). Id., Cat. Fish N. A., 141, 1885 (mame only).

Id., Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 1885, 393 (Mazatlan).

Holocanthus hystrix Gronow, Cat. Fish. Ed. Gray, 27, 1854 (American Seas.)

Paradiodon hystrix Bleeker, ‘‘ Atl. Ichth. Gymnod, 56, plate 3, fig. 2,” 1865.

Poey, Syn. Pisc. Cub., 480, 1868. Id... Enum. Pisc. Cub., 169,

1875. Goode, Bull. U. 8. Nat. Mus., V, 21, 1876 (Bermudas). Blee-

ker, L’ile Maurice, 23, 1878. Poey, Anal. de Hist. Nat., 346 (Porto

Rico’.

Diodon atinga var. hystrix Walbaum, Artedi, Pisc., 596, 1792.

Diodon atinga Bloch, ‘‘Ichth., IV, 75,” plate cxxv, 1787. Gmelin, Syst.

Nat., 1451, 1788 (in part). Walbaum, Artedi, Pise., 597, 1792 (co-

pied). Bloch & Schneider, 511, 1801 (copied). Shaw, Gen. Zool., V,

434, 1804. Miller & Troschel, ‘‘ Hist. Barbadoes, 677,” 1848.

Ruppell, ‘‘ Verz. Senckenb. Mus. Fish. 35,” 1852. Kaup, ‘‘ Wiegm.

Arch., XXI, 227,” 1855. Bleeker, Enum. Pisc. Arch. Ind., 203,

1859 (Java, Sumatra, Batu, Celebes, Flores, Ternate, Amboina, Ce-

300 A Review of American Diodontide.

ram). Castelnau, Mem. Poiss. l’Afr. Aust., 74,1861. Juan, Anim.

Nov. Caledonie, Mem. Soc. Imp. Sci. Nat. Cherbourg, 18, 1861-63. ?

Cope, Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc., 480. 1870 (St. Martins, New Provi-

dence ; Tortugas). [Not Diodon atinga L., which is a species Of Chilo-

mycterus |

Le Diodon atinga Lacépéde, Poissons, II, 1-10, plate XXV, fig. 5, 1798.

Le Diodon plumier Lacépéde, Poissons, II. 1 and 10, Pee Ill, fig. 3, 1798

(Martinique ; on a drawing by Plumier).

Le Diodon holocanthe Lacépéde, Poissons, II, 1798 (copied).

Diodon brachiatus Bloch & Schneider, 513, 1801 (after Parra, tab. 29, fig. 1).

Diodon punctatus Cuvier, Mem. Mus. Hist. Nat., IV, 182, 1818. Id., Régne

Animal, Ed. II, 336 (note), 1829. Bleeker, ‘‘ Verh. Bat. Gen., XXIV,

Blootk. Visch., 19,” 1852. Bleeker, Achtste Bij. Ichth. Fauna Cele-

bes, 301, 1855 (Macassar). Id., Zesde Bij. Ichth. Fauna, Amboina,

403, 1855. Id., Consp. *‘ Moluce. Coquit., 21” (Amboina, Ternate,

Ceram, Archip. Molucc., Banda). Id., ‘:Elfde Bij. Visch. Celehes,

4” (name only). Id., Zez. Bij. Visch. Sumatra (Lampony). Id...

Reschrij. Visch. Amboina, 8, 23 (mame only).. Id., ‘‘ Bij. Visch.

Amboina, 28” (name only) Id., Tweede Bij. Ichth. Fauna Batoé,

- 4 (name only, Batoé).

Diodon echinus *‘ Rafinesque.” Bonaparte. Cat. Met. Pisce. Eur., 87, 1846

(Mediterranean Sea, accidental).

Diodon pilosus DeKay, Nat. Hist. New York, 326, plate LV, fig. 180, 1842

(New York). [Young ; perhaps not Diodon pilosus Mitchill. ]

Diodon maculatus var. 8, Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., VIII. 307, 1870

(East Indian Arch., Amboina .

Habitat.—All warm seas.

(6. var. ? HOLACANTHUS.)

Crayracion, Nos. 9 and 15, Klein, Historia Pisc., 19 and 20 tab. 3, fig. 6,

1740.

Ostracion oblonqus holacanthus Artedi, Genera 60, No. 20; Sueci. Desc. Spec.

Pisc., 86, No. 22, 1738.

Diodon falateeandhiis Linneus, Syst. Nat., Ed. X, 335.1758 (India ; based on

Artedi). Gmelin, Linneus, 1451, 1788 (American Seas and Good

Hope). .

Diodon atinga var. holacanthus Walbaum, Artedi Pisc., 598, 1792 (copied).

Diodon hystrix, var. 8, Linneeus, Syst. Nat., Ed, XII, 413,1766 (Cape Good

Hope).

? Diodon pilosus Mitchill, Fish. New York, 471. plate VI, fig. 4, 1814 (New

York). Cuvier, Régne Animal, 337 (note), 1829 (very young’.

? Trichodiodon pilosus Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., VIII, 316, 1870 (co-

pied).- Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. Am., 862, 1883 (copied).

Jordan, Cat. Fish. N. Am., 141, 1885 (name only).

A Review of American Diodontide. 301

Diodon spinosissrmus Cuvier, Mem. Mus., IV, 134, 1818. Id., Reégne Ani-

mal, 336 (note), 1829. Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., VIII, 307,

1870 (Cape Good Hope ; Siam ; and type of D. melanopsis Kaup.).

Diodon melanopsis Kaup., Wiegm. Arch., 1855, 228.

Paradiodon quadrimaculatus Bleeker, ‘* Atl. Ichth., Gymnod., plate 8, fig. 2,”

1865. f

Diodon maculalus var. a, Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., VIII, 307, 1870 (St.

Croix ; Jamaica ; Panama ; South America ; Sandwich Is. ; China ;

Sooloo Sea ; Indian Ocean).

Diodon maculatus Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 1880, 453 (La

Paz), and 1881, 70 (La Paz).

Diodon liturosus Jordan, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., 1884, 46 (Diodon macu-

latus var. a Giinther).

Habitat. All warm seas, its range apparently co-extensive with

that of D. hystria. ;

The following references belong apparently chiefly, to Diodon

holacanthus. but in some eases the young of D. hystriz is more

or less confused with the former.

Erizo Guanabana Parra. Desc. Dif. Piezas Hist. Nat. Cuba, 62, tab. 29, fig.

2, 1787 (Havana).

Le Diodon tachelé Lacépéde, Poissons. II, 13, 1798 (New Cytherea).

Diodon aiinga Turton, Ed. Linneeus Syst. Nat., 895, 1806 (compiled).

Diodon liturosus Shaw, ‘* Gen. Zool.. V, pl. 2, 436,” 1804 (after Diodon tachelé

Lacépéde). Jordan & Gilbert. Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882, 377 (Pa-

nama). Bean, Collection Fish. Internat. Fish. Exh. London, 42, 18838

(Garden Key . Jordan, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 1884, 150 (Florida

Keys). Bean & Dresel, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1884, 151 (name only).

Jordan, Cat. Fish. N. Am., 141, 1885 (name only). Id., Proce. U. S.

Nat. Mus., 1885, 393 (Lower California).

Diodon novemmaculutus Cuvier, Mem. Mus. Hist. Nat., IV, 136, plate 6, 1818.

Id., Régne Animal. Ed. IJ, 336 (mote), 1829. Brevoort, Fish Japan,

285, 1850. Bleeker, Nat. Tyds. Ned. Ind., III, 567, 1852. Id., Con.

Spec. Mol. Huc. Cogn., 21(Amboina). Id., Zesde Bij. Ichth. Fauna

(Amboina), 403, 1855.

Paradiolon novemmaculatus Bleeker, ‘‘ Atl. Ichth., V, 57, plate 206,” 1865.

Id., Poissons du Japan, 26, 1879.

Diodon sexemaculatus Cuvier, Mem. Mus. Hist. Nat., IV, 136, plate 7, 1818.

_Id., Régne Animal, 336 (note). Kaup, ‘‘ Arch. Naturgesch., X XI,

I, 229,” 1855. Bleeker, Enum. Pisc. Arch. Ind., 208. 1859. (Japan;

Sandwich Is.; Hindostan ; Mauritius ; Good Hope). Giinther, Fish.

Central Am., 396, 1869 (Panama).

302 A Review of American Diodontide..

Diodon quadrimaculatus Cuvier, Mem. Mus. Hist. Nat., IV, 137, plate 6, 1818

(Otaiti). Bleeker, Enum. Pisce. Arch. Ind., 203, 1859 (Amboina).

Id., *‘ Act. Soc. Sci. Indo. Neerl.. II, Amboina, VIII, 94.” —_

Diodon multimaculatus Cuvier, Mem. Mus. Hist. Nat., IV, 136, 1818, Id.,

Régne Animal, 336 (note’, 1829. Kaup, ‘* Arch. Naturgesch., XXI,

T, 227,” 1855. : . oe

Paradiodon sp. dubia Poey, Syn. Pisc. Cub., 431, 1868 \‘‘ Comparese con el

D. pilosus de Mitchill”’). :

Diodon maculatus var. y & 6, Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., VIII, 308 (Am-

boina ; West Indies ; Cape Good Hope ; Bourbon ; Formosa).

Diodon maculatus Streets, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus, VII, 43 (Lower Cal.).

In the foregoing synonymy, several references are of course

doubtful, on account of the confusion in authors of the young of

D. hystrix with the adult of the variety holacanthus.

The Diodon atinga of Linneus is certainly a Chilomycterus,

probably Ch. jaculifer of Ginther, but the species so called by

Bloch and those following him is the hystriz of Linneus.

Diodon brachiatus of Bloch & Schneider is based upon Parra,

tab. 29, fig. 1; this plate represents D. hystriz.

The figure of Diodon pilosus, given by DeKay. is apparently

a young hystriz ; the pilosus of Mitchill is perhaps the young

of holocanthus, or possibly of some species still unrecognized,

with very slender spines.

Under the head of Diodon maculatus, Dr. Ginther includes

the true holacanthus and also the young of hystriz. The mark-

ings of the body are the same in both, and in one young speci-

men examined (141) the sma]] round spots characteristic of the

adult of hystrix were seen within the round black blotches which

had faded somewhat.

The specimens before me are from Havana, Saint Thomas and

Lower California.

As shown by the evidence at my disposal, the form or variety

or species, Diodon holacanthus differs from D. hystrix in having

the frontal spines as long as the post-pectoral spines, and in

having all of its spines long and similar in form ; all without any

anterior root.

The holacanthus of Linneus is based upon a description of

Artedi. As this description fits this form rather than the hys-

triz, I have substituted the name holacanthus for the liturosus

of Shaw and the maculatus of Giinther. Shaw based his name

A Review of American Diodontide. 303

liturosus on Lacépéde’s description of his ** Le diodon tacheté.”

Lacépéde describes merely the coloring of this specimen, giving

general statements about the spines; this leaves it uncertain

which species he had. All the references of authors to liturosus

are equally doubtful, except in the few cases where the speci-

mens have been especially described. The spinosissimus of Cu-

vier is a holacanthus. and the fact that Giinther refers his speci-

mens to the holacanthus seems to indicate that they belong there,

although he does not mention in his deseription the prolonga-

tion of the frontal spines. ‘The descriptions of novemmaculatus,

sexmaculatus, quudrimaculatus and multimaculatus, are none of

them so exact as to leave no doubt as to the species intended ;

although in all these cases-I think it likely that holacanthus is:

meant rather than the young of hystrix. Diodon maculatus

var. @ Giinther is certainly a holacanthus ; var. 8 is a hystriz.

The others I can not certainly identify.

The specimens examined by me are from Havana.

If, as is possible, this is only a variation of the young of hys-

triz, all the foregoing synonymy should be referred to the latter. |

At present I think the probabilities are in favor of absolute iden-

tity of the two forms, but pending the settlement of this ques-

tion, it has seemed best to group the synonymy as above.

I give below a tabulated account of the different specimens

examined by me, and those described by various writers, which

seem referable to Diodon hystrix and D. holacanthus. The ex-

tent of the variations in the diagnostic characters will appear

from this account.

4. Armature of the tail.

b. In specimens described by authors, and referred by me to Diodon

hystrix.

1. D. punctatus Cuvier. ‘‘ Autour de la queue il y en a quatre (€pines) qui

la rendent comme prismatique.”

2. D. hystrix Giinther. The upper and lower sides of the tail with two or

three pairs of immovable spines.”

3. D. hystrix Klunzinger. ‘‘Der vordere Theil des Schwanzes ist besta-

chelt, die Stacheln daselbst nicht dicht, die hintere Halfte desselben

nackt. Stacheln neben dem Schwanzriicken je 3-4, an den Seiten des

Schwanzes meist 2, und eben so viele neben der Bauchseite des

Schwanzes.”

304 A Review of American Diodontide.

4, D. hystrie Swam & Smith. ‘‘Shorter and stronger spines in front of

dorsal, becoming longer again on tail. Length 244 inches.”

cn specimens referred to D. hystrix var. holacanthus

1. D. novemmaculatus. seemaculatus. quadrimaculatus, multimaculatus, Cuvier.

‘* La queue n’en a que deez (épines) en dessus.”

2. D. spinosissimus Giinther. ‘‘ Upper part of the tall with a pair of spines -

besides those on the sides.”

3. D. maculatus Giinther. ‘‘ Upper part of tail with a pair of spines besides

those on the sides.”

d. In specimens examined by me.

1. No. 3728, Mus. Ind. Univ.. from Saint Thomas ; 20 inches long, with

16 spines on tail ; two and a half pairs of spines at base of tail; no

spines on sides ; a series around root of tail; procumbent spines

irregularly placed on upper side (= hystria). ees

2. No. 3728, Mus. Ind. Univ., from Havana; 21 ine hés long, w be 15

spines on tail ; 3 pairs form 2 ridges on the sides above. 2 pairs

similarly placed below, others about the root of tail (= hystrix .

3. No. 876, Mus. Ind. Univ., from Key West ; 19 ches long, with 15

spines on tail ; 5 on lower side ; 4 forming a ridge on one side on

top ; 3 with a fourth subdermal spine on opposite side ; none on

sides ; the others at the root of the tail = hystrix).

4, No. 1244. Mus. Ind. Univ., from Lower California near San Diego ; 11

inches long with 12 spines on tail, all of them more or less con-

cealed under skin ; 2 pairs on lower side, 3 pairs on upper side ;

none on sides ; others at root of tail oe, hystrix).

5. No. 383, Mus. Ind. Univ., from Havana; 7 inches long, wit) 4 spines

on tail ; a pair on lower side, a pair on upper (= holacanthus).

6. No. 141, Mus. Ind. Univ., from Havana ; 5 inches long, with 5 spines

on tail] ; a pair on upper side, others at the root of tail (= hystria).

7. No. 3727, Mus. Dr. Jordan, from Havana; 5 inches long, with 2

spines on the tail, one on each side above (= holacanthus). _

8. Specimen from La Paz*+ at San Diego ; ‘8? inches long. One spine

on either side at the base of caudal peduncle at the middle of the

side” (= holacanthus).

9. Specimen from La Paz* at San Diego ; ‘‘1lincheslong. 3 spines along

upper edge of caudal peduncle and one at the lower edge” (= /hys-

trix).

B. Frontal spines.

om e. In specimens referred to D. hystrix.

1. D. punctatus Cuvier. ‘‘Ceux (épines) de la téte en general sont moins

_ longs que ceux du dos et surtout que ceux des flancs.”

* Examined at my request by Miss Rosa Smith.

+ This is the specimen mentioned by Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1880, 453;

1881, 70, as from near San Diego.

A Review of American Diodontida. 305

D. hystrix Ginther. ‘‘ Frontal spines of medium size.”

D. maculatus, var. 6, Giinther. ‘+The front spines being sometimes

shorter than the eye.”

f. In specimens referred to D. hystrix, var. holacanthus.

D. holacanthus Linneus. ‘‘ Aculeis longissimis teretiformibus in capite

imprimis collo.”

D. spinosissimus Cuvier, (Les épines) ‘‘du dessus de la téte, qui sont

aussi longs que ceux des flancs.”

D. novemmaculatus, etc. Cuvier. ‘‘Ceux du dos sont assez egaux” (6

inches long).

D. maculatus, var. a, Giinther. ‘‘Spines, especially those in front, long,

much longer than eye.” Var. y. ‘‘ Frontal spines longer than eye.”

Var. 6, ‘‘ Frontal spines longer than eye.”

g. In specimens examined.

. No. 3728. Frontal spines about half length of post-pectoral spines, about

as long as eye (= hystrix).

No. 3229. Frontal spines not half length of post-pectoral spines.

No. 876. Frontal spines not half length of post-pectoral spines, shorter

than eye (= hystrix).

No. 1244. Frontal spines about two-thirds as long as post-pectoral spines,

little longer than eye (= hystriz).

. No. 383. Frontal spines longer than post-pectoral spines, about twice

as long as eye (= holacanthus).

No. 141. Frontal spines about three-fourths post-pectoral spines, as long

as eye (= hystria).

No. 3727. Frontal spines a fourth longer than post-pectoral spines

(= holacanthus).

‘« Nasal spines one and one-fourth times in longest post-pectoral spine”

= holacanthus).

«* All the spines from snout to dorsal much shorter than those behind

pectoral ” (= hystriz).

Pre-dorsal spines.

h. In specimens referred to D. hystrix.

D. punctatus Cuvier. ‘‘ La troisiéme racine - - - n’est guére que la con-

tinuation du piquant principal” (not stated what part of body’.

D. hystrix Giinther. Spines ‘‘of the posterior part of the back short

and broad.” .

D. maculatus Giinther. ‘‘Spines varying in length - - - ; those on the

posterior part of the back sometimes fixed by the projecting ante-

rior ridge of the spine.”

D. hystrix Klanzinger. Ich finde immer 3 Wurzeln, die mittlere Wurzel

oder die Fortsetzung des Stachels nach vorn ist aber bei den vorderen

Stacheln Kurz bei den hinteren wird sie linger und dann oft so

lang oder liinger als der Stachel selbst.”

306 A Review of American Diodontide.

5. D. hystrix Swain & Smith. ‘‘ Shorter and stronger spines in front of

dorsal.”

4. In specimens referred to D. hystrix var. holacanthus.

1. D. spinosissimus Cuvier. ‘* Les piquants sont de Ja méme forme (as

those of punctatus) - - - et a deux racines transverses.’

2. D. spinosissimus Giinther. ‘‘ All spines long, slender.”

3. D. maculatus Giinther (see above, C. h. 38).

Jj. Jn specimens examined.

No. 3728. Pre-dorsal spines very short, three-rooted.

No. 3729. Pre-dorsal spines short, three-rooted (= hystrix).

No. 876. Pre-dorsal spines very short. three-rooted (= hystrix).

No. 1244. Pre-dorsal spines very short, three-rooted (= hystriz).

No. 383. All spines similar, long, none with three roots (= holacanthus).

No. 141. All spines more or less three-rooted (= hystriz.) _

No. 3727. Pre-dorsal spines, with the exception of the one immediately

in front of dorsal, two-rooted (= holacanthus).

. ‘The pre-dorsal spines are two-rooted, though a few have a very short

prolongation of the base of the spine (= holacanthus).”

9. ‘‘ Pre-dorsal spines conspicuously three-rooted”” (= hystrix).

Se eee

2 DIODON MACULIFER.

Diodon maculifer Kaup, ‘‘ Wiegm. Arch., 229,” 1855. Giinther. Cat. Fish.

Brit. Mus., VIII, 309, 1870 (Cape Good Hope, Cuba). Poey, En.

Pisce. Cub., 169, 1875 (copied). Bleeker, L’ile Maurice, 23, 1855

(Mauritius).

Habitat.—Southern seas.

This species seems to be distinguished from its congeners by

its longitudinally compressed spines. It is possibly merely a va-

riation of hystriz. Klunzinger (as also Swain and Smith) de-

scribes his hystrix as having the spines somewhat compressed.

Several others speak of compressed spines, but the descriptions

are not definite enough to warrant the reference of D. maculifer

to the synonymy of D. hystriz. Giinther records D. maculifer

from Cuba, but Poey has not found it there. The species is

known to me only from the description of Gunther.

2. CHILOMYCTERUS.

Diopon Linneus, Syst. Nat., Ed. X, 335, 1758 (in part).

Les Chilomyctéres Bibron, Mss. Barneville, Revue ZoGdlogique, 1846, 140.

CHILOMYCTERUS Kaup, Wiegm. Arch., 365, 1847 (antennatus),

A Review of American Diodontide. 307

Cycuiicutuys Kaup, Wiegm. Arch., 231, 1855 (orbiculuris),

CYANIcHTHYys Kaup, Wiegm. Arch., 231, 1855 (cwruleus).

Diopon Bleeker, ‘‘ Atl. Ichth. Gymnod.,” 55, 1865 (atinga).

This genus is well characterized by the form of the spines,

which are all broad, three-rooted and immovable.

ANALYSIS OF THE SPECIES OF CHILOMYCTERUS.

a, Superciliary spines two, with generally a tentacle between them ; a spine

in middle of forehead.

b. Superciliary edge raised ; tins unspotted.

c. Upper parts dark greenish, with a series of white and bluish lines

running from nape backwards ; a similar series between eyes and

across face ; an ocellated black spot above pectoral ; a larger one

behind pectoral ; an ocellated spot on each side of dorsal, and an

elongated spot behind each of the ventral antenne.

ScH@PFI, 3.

ec. Upper parts plain, without a series of lines ; spots as in Schepfi.

SpPrInosus, 4.

bb. Superciliary edge not raised ; upper parts with numerous black dots,

some with a bluish centre ; a black spot in the middle of nape ;

a large kidney-shaped spot above the pectoral, and a subtriangu-

lar blotch before and along the base of the dorsal fin ; a series of

antenne along the lower part of the side. ANTENNATUS, 5.

aa. Supraorbital spines three, feeble ; none on forehead. Upper parts dense-

ly covered with small, round, blackish-brown spots ; a large black

blotch before and around dorsal; another on each side above

gill-opening and pectoral; spines short, compressed, anterior

root flat, longer than the others. - - RETICULATUS, 6.

3. CHILOMYCTERUS SCH@PFI.

The Toadfish, Schepf, ‘*Schriften Berlin. Gesellsch. Naturf, Freunde,

VII, 192,” 1788 (Long Island).

Diodon schepfi Walbaum, Artedi, Pisc., 601, 1792 (after Schepf ).

?Diodon meulini Walbaum, Artedi, Pisc., 602, 1792 (no locality).

- Diodon geometricus var. linealus Bloch & Schneider, Ichth., 518, 1801 (after

Scheepf ).

Chilomycterus geometricus Kaup, Wiegmann’s Archiv, 1847. Gill, Cat. Fish.

E. Coast N. Am., 1861. Poey, Syn. Pisc. Cub., 4380, 1868 (Cuba).

Var. a & B, Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., VIII, 310, 1870 (Ameri-

can waters). Cope, Trans. Amer. Phil. Soc., 480, 1870 (Tortugas).

Gill, Cat. Fish. East Coast N. Am., 15, 1873 (Vineyard Sound). Poey,

Enum. Pisce. Cub., 171, 1875. Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U.S. Nat.

Mus., 1878, 366 (Beaufort Harbor). Goode, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus.,

1879, 109 (Mouth of St. John, Indian River). Goode & Bean, Proc.

308 A Review of American Diodontide.

U. S. Nat. Mus., 1879. 122 (Pensacola, Fla.). and 1879, 333 (Key

West). Jordan, Proc. U.S. Nat. Mus., 1880, 18 (Indian River, Fla.).

Bean, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1880, 75 (Noank, Conn.; East Shore.

Va. ; Beaufort, N.C. ; Fort Macon, N. C. ; Coast New Enetand ;

Newport, R.I.). Jordan & Gilbert, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1882,

241 (Galveston) ; and 1882, 619 (Charleston, 8. C.). Jordan & Gil-

bert, Syn. Fish. N. dm , 863, 1883. Bean, Coll. Fish. Internat. Exh.

London, 42, 1883 (Pensacola). Jordan, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus., 1884,

146 (Key West). Id., Cat. Fish. N. Am., 141, 1885 (name only).

Le Diodon orbe Lacépéde, ‘‘ Poissons, II, page —,” 1798 (Rio Janeiro).

Diodon maculostriatus Mitchill, Fish. New York, 470, plate LVI, fig. 3, 1814

(New York). DeKay, Nat. Hist. New York, Fishes, 323, plate LVI,

fig. 185, 1842 (New York). Ayres, Boston Journal Nat. Hist., IV-

284, 1842 (Brookhaven, Long Island).

Diodon rivulatus Cuvier, Mem. Mus. Hist. Nat., IV, 129, plate VI, 1818; Id.,

Régne Animal, Ed. II, 337 (note), 1829.

Diodon nigrolineatus Ayres, Boston Journal Nat. Hist., IV, 68, 1842 (Brook-

haven, Long Island). ;

Diodon fuliginosus De Kay, Nat. Hist. New York, Fishes, 324, plate LV, fig.

181, 1842 (New York; young).

Chilomycterus geometricus subsp. fuliginosus Jordan & Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N.

Am., 864, 1883 (young).

Chilomycterus fuliginosus Jordan, Cat. Fish. N. Am., 441, 1885 (name only).

Diodon verrucosus DeKay, Nat. Hist. New York, Fishes, 325, plate LVI, fig.

184, 1842 (New York).

Chilomycterus sp. dubia, ‘‘ An Chylomycterus fuliyinosus ?” Poey, Syn. Pisc:

Cub., 429-30, 1868 (Havana).

Habitat.—New England to West Indies.

This species is readily recognized by the dark and light lines

of the upper parts. ‘The lines are parallel and meet towards the

back. <A reticulation is sometimes formed when these lines meet

on the anterior part of the back. In the young there seem —

to be more lines than in the old. ‘Two specimens examined, 3

inches long, have 17 lines between the pectorals ; a specimen 5

inches long has 10 lines; and the largest specimen examined, 10

inches long, has 12 lines.

Dr. Jordan has identified the schepfi of Walbaum with the

present species. Walbaum in his description of schwpfi says,

‘‘color in dorso fulvus, lineis albis longitudinalibus notatus ;”

as the other part of the description agrees quite as well, the

name schepfi has been substituted for geometricus, which name

in fact belongs to the next species rather than to this, if

«L Review of American Diodontide. 309

the two be different. DeKay has well figured and described

the young of this species under the names /uliginosus and

VErTUCOSUS, |

The many specimens examined by me are from Beaufort, N.

C., and from Key West.

4. CHILOMYCTERUS SPINOSUS.

Guamaicu atinga Marcgrave, Hist. Nat. Bras., 168, 1648 (in mari).

Ostracion subrotundus ventre glabro Artedi, Gen., 59, No. 15. Sueci Desc

Spec. Pisc., 86, No. 18 (based on Marcgrave).

Diodon spinosus Linneeus, Syst. Nat., Ed. X, 335, 1758 (India ; based on

~ Artedi).

Cycloptlerus lumpus var. 6, Linnzeus, Syst. Nat., Ed. XII, 414, 1766.

Diodon geometricus Bloch & Schneider, Ichth., 513, plate 96, 1801 (America).

Cyclichthys cornutus Kaup, *‘ Wiegm. Arch., 231,” 1855 (Bahia).

Chilomycterus geomeivicus var. y, Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus., 311, 1870

(Brazil ; Bahia, the latter the type of C. cornutus Kaup).

Habitat.—West Indies and coast of Brazil.

This species, according to Giinther, differs from schepfi only

in the coloration, the lines on the back being absent. Marcgrave

gives a figure and description which certainly refer to the same

fish. Artedi bases his description on Marcgrave, and this ac-

count in turn is the basis of the spinosus of Linneeus.

I have seen no specimens of this species, which would seem to

be a southern representative of Ch. schepfi. Perhays the two

may be color-variations of the same species, in which case the

hame spinosus must be adopted.

3. CHILOMYCTERUS ANTENNATUS.

Diodon antennatus Cuvier, Mem. Mus., 1V, 131, plate VII, 1818. Id., Régne

Animal, 337 (note), ‘‘ plate IX, fig. 1,” 1829. |

Chilomycterus antennatus Kaup, ‘‘ Wiegm. Arch., 232,” 1855. Giinther, Cat.

Fish. Brit. Mus., VIII, 311, 1870 (St. Croix ; Jamaica ; Cape Good

Hope). Bean & Dresel, Proc. U. S. Nat. Mus., 1884, 151 Mame

only).

Chilomycterus puncticulatus Poey, Anal. Hist. Nat., 346, 1881 (Porto Rico).

Habitat.—Southern seas of America.

This species is characterized by the tentacles along the side,

by the coloration, and by the colorless fins. It is known to me

only from descriptions. ~

310 A Review of American Diodontide.

6. CHILOMYCTERUS RETICULATUS.

Ostracion subrotundus Artedi, Gen., 59, No. 16. Sueci, Desc. Spec. Pisc.,

86, No. 19, 1788.

Crayracion No. 16, Klein, Historia Pisc., 20, 1740 (after Artedi). .

Diodon reticulatus Linneeus, Syst. Nat., Ed. X, 334, 1758 (after Artedi).

Gmelin, Syst. Nat., 1449, 1788 (copied). Lowe, Fish. Madeira, 87,

plate 18, 1848-60.

Chilomycterus reticulatus (Bibron Mss ) Barneville, ‘‘ Revue Zodl., 141,” 1846.

Bleeker, ‘‘Atl. Ichth., V, 54,” 1865. Giinther, Cat. Fish. Brit. Mus.,

VIII, 313, 1870 (St. Helena ; Bermudas). Poey, Enum. Pisce. Cub.,

171, 1875. Goode, Bull. U. S..Nat. Mus., V, 21, 1876. Jordan &

Gilbert, Syn. Fish. N. Am., 969, 1883 (Florida Reefs). Jordan, Cat.

Fish. N, Am., 141, 1885 (name only).

Diodon atringa var. reticulatus Walbaum, Artedi, Pisc., 596, 1792.

Diodon atinga var. reliculatus Walbaum, Artedi, Pisc., 596, 1792 (copied).

Diodon atinga 6, Linnzeus, Syst. Nat., Ed. XII, 413, 1766 (India).

?Diodon atinga var. orbicularis Walbaum, Artedi, Pisc., 588, 1792 (Pacific

and Indian Ocean).

Diodon hystrix var. orbiculatus Bloch & Schneider, Ichth., 512, 1806 (Ja-

maica).

Diodon tigrinus Cuvier, Mem. Mus., IV, 127, plate VI, 1818. Id., Régne

Animal, Ed. II, 337 (note), 1829.

Diodon atinga Poey, Syn. Pisc. Cub., 429, 1868.

Chilomycterus orbitosus Poey, Annals Lyc. Nat. Hist. New York, 1875, 69

(Cuba). Id., Enum. Pisc. Cub., 171, 1875 (Havana).

Hatbitat.—West Indies north to Bermuda and the Florida

Keys.

The Diodon reticulatus differs from antennatus in the absence

of the antenne, and in the coloration. ‘The fins especially are

marked with small black spots.

This species is well known to naturalists, but I have not been

able to examine it.

A Review of American Diodontide. 311

List oF ese SPECIES OF DIODONTID IN CHRONOLOGICAL ORDER,

WITH IDENTIFICATIONS.

—"

SCP ar awk wwe

—

5 =

—

> Oo

a re

ami SD ol

[Tenable specific names are in italics. ]

. Diodon reticulatus Linnzus,

. Diodon spinosus Linneeus,

. Diodon hystrix Linnzeus,

Diodon holacanthus Linneeus, -

Cyclopterus lumpus var. 8, Linneus,

Diodon atinga orbicularis Walbaum,

. Diodon schewoft Walbaum,

. Diodon meulenii Walbaum,

Le Diodon plumier Lacépsde,_ -

. Le Diodon tacheté Lacépéde, - -

. Le Diodon orbe Lacépade, - -

Diodon brachiatus Bloch & Schneider,

. Diodon geometricus Bloch & Schneider, 1801

. Diodon geometricus lineatus Bloch &

Schneider, - - - :

. Diodon liturosus Shaw, - = -

. Diodon echinus* Rafinesque, -

. Diodon maculostriatus Mitchill,

. Diodon pilosus Mitchill, - - -

19.

. Diodon rivulatus Cuvier, - -

. Diodon antennalus Cuvier, - -

. Diodon punctatus Cuvier, : -

. Diodon spinosissimus Cuvier, -

. Diodon novemmaculatus Cuvier, -

Diodon tigrinus Cuvier, — - -

25. Diodon sexmaculatus Cuvier, -

. Diodon quadrimaculatus Cuvier, -

. Diodon multimaculatus Cuvier, -

. Diodon fuliginosus DeKay, - -

. Diodon verrucosus DeKay, =

. Diodon nigrolineatus Ayres, .

. Diodon melanopsis Kaup, . -

32.

33.

. Diodon maculatus Giinther, -

Diodon maculifer Kaup, — -

Cyclichthys cornutus Kaup, -— -

. Chilomycterus orbitosus Poey, -

. Chilomycterus puncticulatus Poey,

—

1758

1766

1892

1792

1793

1798

1801

1804

1810

1814

1818

1842

1855

1870

1875

1881

Chilomycterus reticulatus.

Chilomycterus spinosus

Diodon hystrix.

Diodon holacanthus.

Chilomycterus spinosus.

Chilomycterus reticulatus.

Chilomycterus schoepfi.

Chilomycterus scheepfi.

Diodon hystrix.

? Diodon holacanthus.

Chilomycterus scheepfi.

Diodon hystrix.

Chilomycterus scheepfi.

Chilomycterus spinosus.

? Diodon holacanthus.

Diodon hystrix.

Chilomycterus scheepfi.

? Diodon holacanthus.

Chilomycterus reticulatus.

Chilomycterus scheepfi.

Chilomycterus antennatus

Diodon hystrix.

Diodon holacanthus.

? Diodon holacanthus.

Chilomycterus scheepfi.

Chilomycterus schoepfi.

? Diodon holacanthus.

Diodon maculifer.

Diodon spinosus.

Diodon hystrix & holacan-

thus.

Chilomycterus scheepfi.

Chilomycterus antennatus,

* Rafinesque, Indice, 58, 1810 (Catania ?; young).

INDIANA UNIVERSITY,

Dec. 7, 1885.

312 New Species of Aplodontia.

XVI.—Description of a New Species of Aplodontia, from

California.

Read March 15, 1886.

Up to the present time but a single representative of the

somewhat remarkable family Haplodontide of Lilljeborg has

been recognized by naturalists. This is the Sewellel of Lewis

and Clark (1814), upon whose description Rafinesque’s A nisonyz

rufa (1817) was wholly based. Subsequently (in 1829) Richard-

son correctly characterized the animal and gave it the name

Aplodontia leporina, by which it has been designated by most

American writers. Rafinesque’s generic term Anisonyz has been

rejected because it had already been applied to a species of Cyno-

mys by the same author,* but his specific name rufa, as sug-

gested by Baird and adopted by Coues, must be accepted as the

proper specific name of the species. )

This singular animal, which has come down to us as a relic of

* Rafinesque characterized the genera Cynomys and Anisonyx on the same

page, the former name occurring first. The genus Cynomys was framed for

the reception of the ‘‘ Barking Squirrel” of Lewis and Clark, now com-

monly known as the ‘‘ Prairie Dog”—the Cynomus ludovicianus of recent

writers. The genus Anisonyx was framed for the reception of the ‘‘ Burrow-

ing Squirrel” of Lewis and Clark, since ascertained to be another species of

Prairie Dog—the Cynomys columbianus of recent writers—and hence becomes

asynonym. To this genus was referred, though not without hesitation, the

Sewellel of Lewis and Clark. Following is the whole of Rafinesque’s

account of it: ‘“‘ Anisonyx ? rufa. Raf. Fur long, silky, entirely reddish

brown, ears short, pointed with short hair.—Obs. This animal called

Sewellel by Capts. Lewis and Clark, is of a doubtful genus, since they only

saw the fur of it ; it burrows and runs on trees like the ground squirrels ;

length eighteen inches, found in neighborhood of the Columbia River.”—

American Monthly Magazine, Vol. II, 1817, p. 45.

———————————— re

New Species of Aplodontia. 313

the past, and which has no near affinities with any existing

group, inhabits a narrow strip of country on the north-west coast

of the United States. It is not known from the region east of

the Cascade Range,* and all the specimens thus far obtained have

come cither from Oregon or Washington, or from the Chiluk-

weyuk River near its junction with the Frazer, que across our

border in British Columbia.

Rumors have from time to time appeared to the effect that a

Sewellel or Show’tl lived in the mountains of California, but the

only animal purporting to have been taken within the limits of

that State which has actually fallen under the eye of a natural-

ist, so far as I have been able to ascertain, is one which reached

the Museum of the University of Berlin twenty-two years ago.

This specimen will be discussed at length later in the present

paper.

In June, 1885, Mr. C. A. Allen, who was collecting mammals

for me in California, wrote as follows: ‘‘There has just been

discovered, about twenty-five miles from here, an animal which

I have for years been trying to secure. It is what the mountain

people in the Sierras call a ‘ Mountain Beaver.’ A man has

caught six alive in his garden, and all were thrown away except

one, which was sent to the Academy of Sciences in San Fran-

cisco. I am wild to see one.. I offered a miner $5.00 for one

when in the Sierras two years ago, but he failed to get it. - - -

I have seen their holes. ‘They inhabit springy side-hills where

they burrow and make theirhomes. ‘They are very shy animals,

and are probably nocturnal,—at least I judge so from not having

been able to see them in my searches after them. I am told that

they have no tail, or at most a slight apology for one.” This

description, meagre and aggravating as it was, satisfied me that

* T am aware that Newberry, in the XII Vol. of the Pacific Railroad Re-

ports, states that he saw an ‘‘absolutely black” specimen which was ‘‘ ob-

tained near the base of the Rocky Mountains” (No. 2, Reports upon the

Zoology of the Route. By J. S. Newberry, M. D., Chapter I. Report

upon the Mammals, 1859, p. 58). But since the same sentence contains an

obvious mistake, and since no other naturalist has recorded the species from

the region between the Cascade Range and the Rocky Mountains, it seems

safe to assume that Newberry’s record was based on faulty information.

314 New Species of Aplodontia.

the animal in question must be a species of Aplodontia, and I

urged Mr. Allen to exert himself to the utmost to secure speci-

mens of it. This he was not able to do in the locality above

alluded to, which was near the coast in Marin County.

Later in the season, at my request, he made a special trip

about 150 miles to the eastward of the former locality, and spent —

two weeks collecting in the heart of the Sierra Nevada Moun-

tains of Central California, in Placer County. Here his efforts

were rewarded by the capture of no Jess than eight specimens of

the so-called ‘Mountain Beaver,’ representing both sexes and

various ages. ‘Their carefully prepared skins and skulls, with

four skeletons, reached me in December last, and but a glance

was necessary to show that they were distinct from the only pre-

viously described species. Hence the fullowing facts, contribu-

ted by Mr. Allen, are of much interest.

The length of the adults in the flesh was 16 inches, and their

weight four pounds. The tail was “about an inch long.and all

fur.” The eyes were very small.

‘‘The animals live in small colonies and inhabit wet ground

where there is plenty of running water. None were found away

from water. They are very compact and strong, with a head

which resembles that of a ‘pug’ dog. ‘They are very shy, timid

but on being aroused are savage enough. ‘They bite fearfully.

I gave one a stick to take hold of, and by that means pulled him

out of his hole. One got hold of my hunting-shoe and broke off

one of the teeth in his under jaw against the big nails in the

sole. I was trying to get him out of the trap tu bring home

alive, but he was so ugly and: bit everything so ferociously that

I was obliged to kill him.

‘‘T find that they come out of their burrows abore aad

to get their food, and again at daylight in the morning. Ido

not think they move about during the day, as I watched about

one of their places several hours, but cou'd not see or hear a

movement.

‘The Sewellel’s food is in large part composed of aquatic

plants. They are very fond of a species of lily that grows along

the margins cf the small streams ;—I do not know that they dive

down and get the roots, but the stems and leaves they cut off

New Species of Aplodontia. 315

and carry to their burrows. ‘They eat the stem part and throw

away the broad leaf, which is twelve inches in diameter, heart-

shaped, and grows to the height of twenty inches or more. The

reason I said that these animals resemble the muskrat is because

they live about the water all the time ; their burrows are always

on a low hill-side in the cafions or gulches where the ground is

springy or boggy, the wetter the better. In fact, the spring wa-

ter can be seen running down through most of the holes, and

nearly all the animals secured were caught in traps set in the

water. They cannot be found away from water in the Sierras.

They are not very particular as to what they eat. I saw willows,

red osiers, small fir trees, wild llies, manzanita bushes, and va-

rious other plants cut by them. I found small fir trees four feet

high with every limb cut off to the top; also small willows and

manzanita bushes pruned of their limbs as high as three and four

feet. These limbs and other vegetable substances they carry to

the mouths of their holes and drag just inside of the entrance to

eat in safety under cover. That they can and do climb small

trees and bushes, which have plenty of limbs, I am well assured.

They can grasp and hold anything in their fect as well as a mon-

key. One that was in a trap took hold of a limb of a small wil-

low tree, and I had to pull very hard to tear it away.”*

Comparison of the eight specimens sent me by Mr. Allen, from

the Sierra Nevada Mountains of Central California, with a still

larger series from Oregon and Washington, reveals many points

of difference. ‘These differences are shown in absolute size, size

of fore and hind feet, size of ear, character and color of pelage,

color of whiskers, and in cranial and skeletal characters.

The above-mentioned differences are marked and constant,

and no animals in any way intermediate are known to exist.

Hence I have no hesitation in describing the newly-discovered

California animal as a distinct species, designating it as follows :

* For remarks on the habits of A. rufa, the reader is referred to the writ-

ings of Suckley, Newberry, Gibbs, and Cooper, in the twelfth volume of

the Pacific R. R. reports ; to an interesting chapter by John Keast Lord in

his ‘‘ Naturalist in Vancouver Island and British Columbia” (vol. I, 1866,

pp. 346-358) ; and to articles by Matteson and Lum in the American Natu-

ralist, vol. XI, 1877, pp. 484-485, and vol. XI1, 1878, pp. 10-13.

316 New Species of Aplodontia.

APLODONTIA MAJOR sp. nov,

CALIFORNIA SHOW'TL; ‘*‘ MOUNTAIN. BEAVER.”

Diagnosis.—Length about 400 mm. ; hind foot with claws

about 60 mm. ; height of ear about 8 mm. she

Pelage comparatively coarse and harsh ;_ hairs of flanks longer

than those of the surrounding parts, forming on each side a more

or less pronounced oval patch from 60-80 mm. in length and

40-60 in breadth, which terminates abruptly about opposite the

hip-joint, and which is most marked in specimens not fully

adult - oe

Color. —W hiskers black ; back grizzled grayish-brown, the tint

of the brown being that of a dilute bistre ; hairs at base, and the

under fur, very dark plumbeous; rump and belly grizzled mouse

gray, sometimes faintly and superficially washed with very dilute

brown ; a distinct patch of white in the anal region; tip of nose

sooty-brown, which color: sometimes extends backwards in a nar-

row stripe.almost to a pot midway between the eyes.

DIFFERENTIAL DIAGNOSIS BASED ON EXTERNAL CHARACTERS.’

APLODONTIA RUFA.

Length of head and body about

340 mm.

Hind. foot with claws about 53

mm.

Height of ear from crown about

10 mm.

Pelage comparatively fine and

soft.

Long hairs of the sides not form-

ing a distinct flank patch, and not

ending abruptly posteriorly.

Whiskers white.

Back pale burnt-umber largely

mixed with black-tipped hairs, the

burnt-umber becoming lighter and

brighter on the sides and flanks.

APLODONTIA MAJOR.

Length of head and body about

400 mm.

Hind foot with claws about 60

mn)... . .

Height of ear from crown about

8 mm.

Pelage comparatively coarse and

harsh. “

Long hairs of the sides forming

a more or less pronounced flank

patch, which posteriorly ends ab-

ruptly opposite the hip joint.

Whiskers black.

Back grizzled grayish-brown (tint

of brown dilute bistre) which color

terminates posteriorly about opposite

the hip joints.

New Species of Aplodontia. 31

Hairs at base plumbeous. Hairs at base very dark plumbeous.

Belly mouse-gray, strongly washed Rump and belly grizzled mouse-

with dilute umber. gray. the latter sometimes’ faintly

washed with very dilute brown.

No distinct patch of white in anal A distinct patch of white in anal

region. region.

Cranial Characters.—The material before me consists of six-

teen skulls—eight of Aplodontia major and one of A. rufa from

my own collection, and seven of Aplodontia rufa from the U.S.

National Museum.* ‘These skulls represent both sexes aud ya-

rious ages. Of the eight skulls of A. major, four are males and

four females. Of these, two of the males and three of the fe-

males are adults, there being two young males and one young fe-

male. Of the eight skulls of A. rufa, three (Nos. 3891, 3942,

and 11358 U.S. Nat. Mus.) are fully adult—in fact old—and

they are doubtless males. The remaining five are more or less

Immature and pertain to both sexes. ‘Two of them are too much

broken to furnish complete tables of measurements. In the fol-

Jowing comparisons, the skulls of adult males only are referred

to, unless the contrary is stated.

Comparison of the skull of Aplodontia major with that of A.

rufa shows several points of difference, though none of much

taxonomic valne. In absolute size A. mzjor is much the larger.

The average of the basilar-length in the two adult males is 68.85

-mm., and of the zygomatic breadth 62.35 mm. ; while the ave-

rage basilar-length in the three adult skulls of A. rufa is 64.20

mm., and the zygomatic breadth 55.66 mm. Coupled with this in-

crease in size, is a marked increase in the weight of the skullt

and in the development of its processes, ridges and muscular im-

pressions. While the skull of A. major has come to be much

* For the privilege of examining these specimens, I am indebted to Prof.

S. F. Baird, Director of the U. 8. National Museum, and Mr. F. W. True,

Curator of Mammals.

+ The largest and heaviest skull of A. rufu that I have examined weighs

a little less than 16 grams, while the largest of A. major weighs nearly 24

grams,

318 ‘ew Species of Apl

larger than that of A. rufa, the tect] mained of the same

absolute size, the differences noted ng

vidual variation. Thus the ratio of the m lar series (measured

on the crowns) to the basilar-length is 26.2€

of 4. major, and 28.59 in the largest of uy rufa.

The occipital crest is much more pronounced in A. major,

giving the posterior aspect of the cranium a contour quite dif- |

ferent from that of A. rufa. The greater height of the occipital

crest in A. major is relative as well as absolute, the ratio of its

vertical height from the apex of the paroccipital process in an

adult male being 37.09, while in the largest male of A. rufa this

ratio is but 29.38.

The zygomatic arches furnish some of the best cranial charac-

ters in distinguishing the two species. ‘The jugal bones are not

only twice as thick and heavy in A. major as in A. rufa, but

they are farther apart anteriorly,* and the arches are more bowed

outward, giving the skull a very different outline. Moreover,

the vacuities which they enclose differ in shape and relative size

in the two species. Viewed from above, they are shorter and

brvader in A. major ; measured from below, their absolute length

is the same in both, notwithstanding the fact that the skull of

A. rufa is so much smaller. Hence the ratio of the greatest

length of the zygomatic vacuity to the basilar-length is 37.68 in

A. major and 39.63 in A. rufa.

The post-zygomatic notch is a trifle narrower and deeper in

A. major than in A. rufa.

The length of the frontal and parietal together, and the ratio

of this length to the basilar-length, are considerably greater in

A. major than in A. rufa.

The length of the ascending or frontal process of the premax-

illary is about the same in the two species, notwithstanding the

* This greater breadth across the maxillary roots of the zygome affects

somewhat the position of the ant-orbital foramina. They are set out farther

from the muzzle in A. major than in A. rufa. The average of the least dis-

tance between them in the largest four skulls of A. major is 18.47 mm. ;

while in the three largest of A. rufa it is 16.08 mm. The ratio of these ave-

rages to averages of the basilar-length in these same skulls, is 27.01 in A.

major and 24.92 in A. rufa.

ly those of indi- —

in the lar gest skull

New Species of Aplodontia. 319

difference in the size of the skulls. Hence it appears that the

ratio of the average length of this portion of the premaxillary to

the average of the basilar-length, in four skulls of A. major, is

36.12; while in four skulls of A. rufa it is 39.60.

In all of the skulls of A. major excepting the youngest (No.

2103 Mus. C. H. M.) the nasals terminate posteriorly either ex-

actly or nearly on a line with the premaxillaries. In the young

male No. 2103, they fall short of this line by 2mm. The con-

trary is true in the series of eight skulls of A. rufa. Here the

nasals normally fall short of the fronto-premaxillary suture by

from 1 to 5 mm., in exceptional cases only ending flush with it.

Still, since both conditions are found in both species, this char-

acter cannot be regarded as distinctive.

But the nasal bones furnish another character apparently more

constant than the foregoing. In adult males of A. major, the

greatest breadth of the nasals is at or near their anterior extremi-

‘ties, while in A. rufa it is situated some distance posteriorly—

usually about 8 or 10 mm. from the anterior end of the bone. In

the specimens before me, this difference is very marked, and the

greatest breadth in A. rufa is absolutely as well as relatively

greater than the measurement of the corresponding part in A.

major. For example, in the largest skull of A. rufa (No. 11358

U. 8. Nat. Mus.) the nasals anteriorly measure 11.90 mm. At

a point 10 mm. posteriorly their breadth is 13.40 mm. In the

largest male of A. major (No. 2106 Mus. C. H. M.) these mea-

surements are respectively 12.60 mm. and 12mm. Hence ata

point 10 mm. from the front end of the nasals, the breadth of

those of A. rufa is actually 1.40 mm. greater than those of A.

major, While the skull of the latter is much the larger.

In brief, skulls of A. major are distinguishable from those of

A. rufa (1) by absolute size ; (2) by absolute weight ; (3) by the

ratio of the upper molar series to the basilar-length ; (4) by the

contour of the occiput and the development of the occipital crest;

(5) by the distance between the antorbital foramina ; (6) by the

shape of the zygomatic arches and of the vacuities which they

enclose ; (7) by the shape of the nasal bones, and by the ratio of

their length to that of the ascending process of the premaxillary;

(8) by the ratio of the ascending process of the premaxillary to

the basilar-length; (9) by the distance between the antorbital

foramina ; and (10) by the fronto-parietal length.

320 New Species of Aplodontia.

Geographical Distribution.—Very little can be said concerning -

the geographical distribution of Aplodontia major, since the only

known specimens came from Placer County, California.* The

County, may or may not belong ‘o the present form. ‘The same .

remark applies to a species of Aplodontia which, as I am told by

its portions of Siskiyou and. Lassen Counties, in the northern

part of the State, where, also, it is called ‘Mountain Beaver’ by

the hunters. Unfortunately, no specimens Were obtained.

Mr. 8. K. Lum, in an article on the habits of Aplodontia

rufa, states: ‘‘In Southern Oregon, it is found in moist situa-

tions on the tops of the Siskiyou and Rogue’s River Mountains,

and is there called ‘mountain beaver.’”’+ -In the absence of spe-

cimens, it 1s impossible to say to what, species these animals per-

tain. The localities mentioned, however, are not far distant

from Coquille, Coos County, Oregon, where Dr. Matteson has

vbtained specimens of A. rufa§ |

In the present state of knowledge, it is cat dl as say. ches

representatives of the genus Aplodontia inhabit the Pacific coast

region from about lat. 50°, in British Columbia, southward at

least to lat. 38° 35’, in central California.. The geographical. —

distribution of these animals is peculiar: like the Columbia —

deer, and certain birds, they are restricted on the East by the

castern bases of the Cascade Range and Sierra Nevada Mount-

uins; while on the. West they extend neal or quite to the

coast. .

HISTORY AND cet as =

The Geea species, fortunately, is not encumbered with i a

long, involved synony my ; and Its history 1 is simple.

* Since this article has beén put in type, the U. 8. National Museum has

received two imperfect skins of my new species from Lieut. P. H. Ray,

who obtained them from the Indians in Hoopa Valley, in northwestern

California.

+ American Naturalist, Vol. XII, 1878, p. 10.

§ Ibid, Vol. XI, 1877, P. 434.

New Species of Aplodontia. 321

In 1854 Audubon and Bachman, writing of the Washington

Show’tl, remarked that it ‘thas also been procured in Califor-

nia,”* but on what authority this statement was based does not

appear. ‘Three years later Baird said: ‘‘I have heard. of an

Aplodontia from California, probably the same species, but have

not seen a specimen. ”’t

The Proceedings of the California Academy of Natural Sciences

for 1866 (Vol. III, p. 224) contains a record of the donation to

the Society’s cabinet of a ‘‘Specimen of <Aplodontia leporina,

shot near lake Tahoe, by Mr. J. M. M’Donald.” This specimen

was presented at the regular meeting held September 18, 1865.

No farther details are given, and since Lake Tahoe occupies por-

tions both of California and Nevada, it is uncertain from which

State the animal came. The probabilities are, however, that it

was killed in Placer County, California, this being the region

from which my specimens were procured. {

The specimen previously mentioned as having been sent to the

Berlin Museum, was described by the late Dr. W. Peters in the

Monatsberichte der Konigl. Preuss. Akademie der Wissen-

chaften zu Berlin, 17 Mdrz, 1864, pp. 177-179. His de-

* Quadrupeds of North America, Vol. III, 1854, p. 102.

+ North American Mammals, 1857, p. 354.

t In the first volume of the above-mentioned Proceedings, under the head

of donations made to the Cabinet at the meeting held September 24, 1855,

occurs the following paragraph : ‘‘ From Mr. E. C. Gibbes, an animal from

the vicinity of the ‘Great Trees,’ Calaveras County. It is a species of

Marmot, perhaps undescribed, but the specimen is too imperfect for a close

comparison. Better specimens will probably soon reach us, as the species

is quite common in that portion of the State. The miners call it Mammoth

Mole.” (Proc. Cal. Acad. Natural Sciences, Vol. 1, 1854-57, p. 71 of the

original ed. ; p. 76 of reprint.)

Concerning the above specimen, the venerable Dr. J. G. Cooper has writ-

ten me, under date of February 7, 1886: *‘I was present and saw this skin,

and compared it soon after with that of the Aplodontia [from Astoria] pre-

sented Oct. 15th [by Lt. W. P. Trowbridge]. All thought it the same ani-

mal, though some differences noticed might prove it to be the Marmot

[ Arctomys flaviventer| well known from higher elevations. I will see if the

specimen still exists.” .

322 New Species of Aplodoutia.

scription is so important in the present connection that I make

no apology for quoting it verbatim. :

“* Haplodon (.Aplodontia) Richards. Von dieser merkwiirdigen

Gattung kennt man bis jetz nur eine Art aus dem westlichen

Theile von Nordamerika am Puget-Sunde, den AH. leporinus

Richards., welcher neuerdings von Hrn. Spencer F. Baird (4Zam-

mals of North America, Philadelphia. 1859, p. 353) genauer be-—

schrieben und mit dem Biber in eine Familie zusammengestellt

worden ist, wahrend Hr. Brandt dieselbe den Sciurini als eine

besondere Unterfamilie mit wurzellosen Zibnen anreiht. Unser

Museum hat neuerdings ein Fell nebst Schade] aus den Gebirgen

Californiens erhalten, und hiernach muss ich mich der Ansicht

Brandt’s mehr anschliessen. Der Unterkiefer stimmt im We-

sentlichen ganz mit dem von Arctomys tiberein, wenn man davon

absieht, dass der hintere Winkel desselben eigenthimlich ver-

bogen erscheint. Die Foramina incisiva liegen wie bei den Sc7-

urini nur zwischen den Zwischenkiefern und die Fotamina infra-

orbitalia sind miassig gross, kaum grésser als bei den Zamius.

Der allenthalben gleich breite Gaumen, die Fligelbeingruben

und die Gehérbullen sind ganz ahniich wie bei Arctomys. Der

vordere aufsteigende Theil des Jochbeins verbindet sich mit

einem gleich breiten Theil des Thrinenbeins, in abnlicher Weise

wie bei Yeros, mehr noch wie bei den Chinchillina. Die Unter-

schenkelknochen sind getrennt; leider wissen wir aber noch

immer nichts ven dem inneren Bau, nicht einmal ob Schlissel-

beine und Blinddarm, wie es wahrscheinlich ist, entwickelt sind.

Ob das uns vorliegende Exemplar wirklich zu A. leporinus ge-

‘hort, ist nicht ganz sicher. Auffallend ist jedenfalls ein ziemlich

‘grosser (15 bis 20 Mm. im Durchmesser haltender) rundlicher

regelmassiger weisser Fleck an jeder Kérperseite, ganz nahe vor

dem Oberschenkel, dessen bei der Beschreibung jener Art nicht

erwihnt wird. Esentsteht dieser Fleck dadurch, dass die Woll-

haare an dieser Stelle etwas verlangert und mit weisser Spitze

yersehen sind, so dass ich vermuthete, es méchte am Grunde

desselben vielleicht eine Driise ausmiinden. Dagegen spricht

jedoch, das die Haare hier ebenso dicht, wie an allen anderen

Korperstellen stehen. Auch erscheint der Schwanz viel kurzer ;

ohne Haar 13 Mm. (6 Lin. Engl.), walrend derselbe nach Baird

bei H. leporinus 10 Lin. lang ist. Er kénnte jedoch an dem

New Species of Aplodontia. 323

einzigen Exemplar verstiimmelt sein, obgleich es den Anschein

hat, als sei er unverletzt. Der Schidel zeigt, mit der von

Baird gegebenen Abbildung verglichen, sich darin auffallend

verschieden dass die obere Backzahnreihe nicht auffallend kirzer,

sondern ganz gleich ist der Kntfernung der Schneidezihne von

den Backziihnen, dass der Ausschnitt hinter dem Processus zygo-

maticus des Schlifenbeins ein viel grés-erer ist, das Foramen

mentale weiter nach vorn, die hintere 6ffnung des Canalis infra-

maxillaris weiter nach hinten liegt und letztere von oben sichtbar

ist, dass ferner der Processus coronoideus an seiner Basis breiter

erscheint. Ich werde daher wegen dieser Unterschiede, bis die

Identitit oder Verschiedenheit der Thiere festgestellt sein wird,

das Californische als H. leporinus var. Californicus bezeichnen.”

The mere existence of the above description of an Aplodontia

which is stated to have come from California, at once raises the

question of its identity with the present species. If reasonable

grounds exist for the belief that the two forms are not separable,

Peters’s name Californicus must of course be accepted as the pro-

per specific name for the subject of the present paper. To deter-

mine this point, it is necessary to review somewhat in detail the

characters attributed to the Berlin animal.

Peters’s comparisons, it must be remembered, were based wholly

ou Baird’s description and plate. Baird’s plate of the skull is a

fairly good one, and shows quite accurately most of the points

spoken of by Peters.

The cranial differences mentioned by Peters are: Ist, that the

upper molar series of teeth is of the same length as the distance

between the molars and incisors, instead of being considerably

less ; 2d, that the post-zygomatic notch is much larger; 3d, that

the mental foramen is farther forward; 4th, that the posterior

opening of the inframaxillary canal is farther behind and is visi-

ble from above; and, Sth, that the coronoid process appears

broader at its base.

The first point relates to the length of the upper molar series

us compared with the length of the muzzle—a character which

in both species varies with the age of the animal. In the adults

of both the muzzle is considerably longer than the molar series,

while in the young it is equal to or even shorter than the molar

324 New Species of Aplodontia.

series. Hence it is clear that Peters’s animal was young, and

that the supposed difference was due solely to immaturity.

The second point relates to the size of the post-zygomatic

notch, which Peters says is much larger in his specimen than in

that figured by Baird. Baird’s plate shows very well the size

and form of the notch, as it exists in the seven skulls of A. rufa.

In the California animal this notch is still narrower, though

perhaps a trifle deeper; hence in this respect Peters’s specimen

differs from both. !

The third point relates to the position of the mental foramen.

Peters says that it opens more anteriorly than shown in Baird’s

figure. In all of the jaws of both species examined by me (16

in number) this foramen is situated more peer ly than indi-

cated in the above mentioned plate.

The fourth point relates to the position and angle of the open-

ing of the inframaxillary canal—the inferior dental foramen.

Peters says that it is situated more posteriorly than indicated in

Baird’s plate and that it is so placed as to be visible from above.

In the specimens examined its position agrees very well with that

indicated by Baird ; and whether or not the opening can be seen

from above depends neither upon age, sex, nor species, but solely

upon individual variation—as demonstrated in the series before

me. ‘Two specimens of the same age, taken at the same place

and on the same date, present the extremes of this peculiarity.

Tn one the opening is distinctly visible from above ; in the other

it is entirely hidden by the ridge of bone which extends from the

condylar process to the posterior alveola.

The fifth point relates to the breadth of the coronoid process

at the base. Peters states that it looks broader than in Baird’s

figure. But since Peters himself did not feel sure upon this

point, and since the specimens at hand fail to show any tangible

difference in this particular, the character may be safely dis-

missed.

Three other important points were mentioned incidentally by

Peters. The first relates to the size of the infraorbital foramen,

which in his specimen was ‘‘scarcely larger than in Tamias.”

The smallest infraorbital foramen in the 16 skulls before me is

at least three times larger than its maximum condition in any of

the skulls of Zamias (upward of a hundred in number) in my

Pas)

New Species of Aplodontia.

collection, and the average size of this foramen is larger in the

California than the Washington animal.

~The second and third points relate to the audital bulle and

pterygoid fossa, which parts Peters states are entirely like those

of Arctomys. ‘The resemblances in these parts in the two geuera

wre hard to find, while the points of difference are numerous and

striking.

It is difficult to understand how a naturalist of Peters’s expe-

rience could be led to state that much similarity exists between

the large, roundish, and somewhat inflated audital bulle of Arc-

tomys, and the small, irregularly flattened, and transversely

elongated ones of Aplodontia. The pterygoid fosse are even

more dissimilar. In Arctomys this fossa is more than twice as

long as in Aplodontia, it is constricted in the middle, and its

walls terminate posteriorly in long hamular processes. More-

over, its anterior boundary bears a long, slender spine which pro-

jects backward from the palate. In Aplodontia the pterygoid

fossa is remarkably short, its sides are parallel, and its anterior

boundary is formed by a notch into the palate. Indeed, should

the above mentioned resemblances to Arctomys really exist, it

will be necessary to constitute a new genus for the reception of

Peters’s specimen.

Turning now from cranial to external chsracters, but two

points remain for consideration. The shortness of the tail spoken

of (‘‘6 lines”) is perfectly normal. Richardson, in his measure-

ments ‘‘ of a full-grown specimen,” gives exactly the same length

(6 lines).* Peters used Baird’s measurement of 10 lines as his

standard of comparison, but Baird expressly stated that his

measurements were from a mounted specimen (North American

Mammals, 1847, p. 353). However, the tail presents considera-

ble individual variation, sometimes, according to Suckley, at-

taining the length of 13 inches; and the material now in hand

does not indicate that the tail of A. rufa is longer than that of

A. major.

The white spot on the flanks, which is stated to be 15-20 mm.

in diameter, roundish, and symmetrical on the two sides, is a

peculiarity which may prove to be characteristic of a very distinct

* Fauna Boreali-Americana, 1829, p. 212.

326 New Species of Aplodontia.

animal known as yet from the single specimen in the Berlin Mu-

seum, or it may prove to be a case of abnormal individual varia-

tion. Be this as it may, no trace of it has been found in any

other individual of the genus thus far reported. a

Recapitulating, it is found that some of the supposed differ-

ential characters attributed to the Berlin specimen are due to

age ; that others fall within the limits of normal individual vari-

ation ; while others still are either really distinctive or markedly

abnormal. ‘To the latter category belongs the white flank-patch,

the most important if not the only external peculiarity.. If Pe--

ters’s description is reasonably accurate, the following cranial

characters are distinctive:

Ist. Size of post-zygomatic notch.

2d. Position of mental foramen.

3d. Position of dental foramen.

4th. Size of infraorbital foramen.

5th. Size and form of audital bulle.

6th Size and form of pterygoid fossa.

It may not be out of place here to allude to the geographical

source of the Berlin specimen. ‘The only information given by

Peters on the subject is that the animal came from ‘‘ aus den

Gebirgen Californiens ;” and since at the time this paper was

written (22 years ago) the term ‘California’ was somewhat

vaguely applied by most Europeans to the whole west coast re-

gion of the United States, it seems safe to assume that very little

certainty attaches to this part of the record. .

In view of the above facts, brought to light by a somewhat

critical analysis of Peters’s description, with an ample series of

both the Washington and the California animals at hand for

comparison, the conclusion arrived at is that the Berlin specimen

is widely distinct from the California Aplodontia herein de-

scribed ; that it shares several points in common with the original

species (A. rufa) ; but that, unless Peters’s description is grossly

erroneous, it possesses certain distinctive characters which are of

sufficient taxonomic importance to demand the establishment of

a new genus for its reception.

In concluding this part of. the subject it is necessary, perhaps,

to say a word in regard to the summary manner in which Peters’s

New Species of Aplodontia. 32%

animal was disposed of by Coues in his Monograph of the genus.

** Professor Peters,” writes Dr. Coues, ‘*described specimens

from California as constituting a new variety, to which he ap-

plied the name Haplodon leporinus var. Californicus. I have

seen no specimens from that region, nor is the material at present

available sufficient to enable us to come to final conclusions re-

specting the normal rate of susceptibility to individual variation.

The few specimens, however, indicate that the rate is at least as

high as that which has been established for various mammals

more or Jess closely allied; and, should such prove really the

case, there would be no impropriety in considering var. califor-

nicus as strictly synonymous.” (Monographs of North Ameri-

can Rodentia, 1877, p. 598.). This statement of Coues contains

one error of fact (for Peters had but one specimen—not speci-

mens), and its final assumption was based, doubtless, on a very

hasty examination of Peters’s description.

CRANIAL DIFFERENCES RESULTING FROM SEX AND AGE.

In placing the adults of A. major side by side, the most notice-

able sexual difference is found in the suture which separates the

frontal bones from the premaxillaries and nasals. This suture

is open in the females and closed in the males.

Fig. 1. APLODONTIA MAJOR ¢ ad. (No. 2107 Mus. C. H. M.) showing

persistent fronto-premaxillary suture. Natural size.

328 New Species of Aplodontia.

As a whole, the skull of the female is less heavy and massive

than that of the male, and the occipital crest is not so highly de-

veloped. ‘The zygomatic arches are not so much bowed out-

ward, and the post-zygomatic notches are larger. In all these

points the females show an approach, though distant, to the

condition of the adult male of A. rufa.

The study of a series of young, with which I am fortunately

provided, serves to bridge over very completely the gap left be-

tween the adult females of A. major and adults of A. rufa.

_ The evidence of this is found not only in the occipital region, in

the lesser development of the various crests and processes, and

in the post-zygomatic notch, but in the size and shape of the

zygomatic arches and the vacuities which they enclose; in the

length and shape of the nasals; in the length and ratios of the

fronto-parietal line and of the premaxillaries ; in the position of

the antorbital foramina, in the ratio of the upper molar series to

the basilar-length—in fact in all the characters which serve to

distinguish the adults of the two species.

The growth of the teeth in A. major has not kept pace with

that of the skull. They were doubtless large enough in A. rufa

to subserve the wants of the animal ; and since the increase in

size which the California species has undergone has not been

accompanied by change in food-habits, a corresponding enlarge-

ment of the teeth has not been necessary. Conversely, while

the grinding apparatus remains the same in both, the machinery

by which it is worked has come to be largely increased in size

and power.

From the foregoing study of the development of the skull in

the present species, it appears that Aplodontia major was de-

rived from A. rufa or its immediate predecessors, and that it is

the most highly differentiated form yet known of the remarka-

ble, primitive Haplodont type of the Sciuromorph series.

]

_ 22205

4 ad.

3942

4 ad.

64.00

60.50

56.80

36.90

9.90

28.40

13.00

6.80

17.00

12.80

20.20

41.40 |

18.30 |

17.70

4.60 |

0.70

4.30 |

19.40

14.80

19.20

50.50

30.00

10.80 |

18.70 |

17.20

88.75

64.68

28.59

44.37

31.56

78.90

59.40

49.29

95.53

68.42

30.24

29.25

46.94

33.38

83.45 |

16.36

51.738

APLODONTIA RUFA.

U. S. Narionat Museum.

3891

é ad.

63.00

59.70

67.00

55.00

34.70

8.80

23.80

TT eho,

5.60

15.30

11.50

21.50

41.00

17.70

16.40

5.60

6.30

18.50

15.40

21.80 |

19.50

49.00

30.00

22.50

11.80

18.00

16.70

87.30

65.07

28.09

SUT

34.12

OR he

61.22

46.66

92.12

68.67

29.64

27.47

39.86

36.01

82.07

14.74

32.32

22203

im.

59.70

56.30

62.50

51.40

33.30

47.00

11.40

21.30

130)

4.70

16.80

10.50

22204

im.

60.50

06.70 |

61.50

50.70

39.20

49.89

9.80

22.60

11.40

4.80

16.00

10.00

19.50

37.70

15.80

14.80 |

5.40

6.10

4.4()

18.80

21a)

14.20

19.40

18.59

47.99

28.50

20.80

11.40

16.40

15.00

84.07

62.52

26.20

32.33

79.438

59.49

o4.44

89.41

66.49 |

27.86 |

Poe |

59.8)

54.39

84.47

17.28

32.62 |

22146 |

51.30

43.53

68.37

29.97

28.20 |

43.58 |

39.00

28.37

2476

(Mus. CH M

1130

bi. Seams

59.60

5d. 00

66.50

50.60

| $88.99

46.70

10.30

25.00

10.00

4.00

15.60

11.00

19.00

Bet

17.20

16.10

5.60

6.20

4.50

17.40

21.20

15.00

19.80

18.20

47.30

28.40

20.60

11.00

17.20

16.10

84.89

63.25

28.8)

41.94

31.87

79.36

60.04

49.00

92.00

G8.54

i ard

29.25

45.45

34.54

86.00

18.72

33.09

1 ¥ med

TABLE OF CRANIAL MEASUREMENTS.

(ALL MEASUREMENTS IN MILLIMETERS. )

APLODONTIA MAJOR. APLODONTIA RUFA.

Museum or C. Harr Merrram. U. S. Nationa Museum. Mus. CHM

2102 | 2105 2103 22203 | 22204 | 22146 | 2476 | 1130

gad. | sim. é im. im. im. | | gim.

Basilar-length (from one of the Occipital condyles to the posterior edge of alveola of incisor of same side). 65.00 63.20 61.00 59.70 | 60.30 63.00 _.. | 59.60

Basilar-length of Hensel (from inferior lip of foramen magnum to posterior edge of alyeola of incisor)... . 61.00 | 59.40 56.70 56.30 56.70 | 58.50 "| 5500

Occipito-nasal length (from occipital crest in median line to most anterior point of nasals).............-- 70.50 69.50 66 00 62.50 61.30 me: 66.50

EERE UR SEN ZAEROTEEEDN TO 7) EY Ui ORR 8 RR ye nets oe SM te ia St pS Oc ane ee ee 55.80 52.7 51.00 51.40 50.70 aes 50.60

HieanpOLeNdthLOr post-zy fOMaLiG NOCH: <sors Gc a.cic/she sie oa ~ieledaveiase nrcieiers 0.6 nxn10ib, euevele cvenaPeyeterave siaxe-wvere-cim Susisis nis 36.80 36.70 | 35.00 33.30 352) 34.50 | 83.99

MELE ALES EA ONE AC UMA CHOSS UN TSLOLAB s/s etait slots ccevelelu'> a crarnia qs ar eleisiede a din si ie ale ‘s-ersrole cal eiemudmterfeetereteca bia eieleysnevaiats o.0re 53.60 50.30 47.80 47.00 49.8) BIeSOI Bees 46.70

MCHA aDYe aa uutanTerOnDitAl GONSETICHLOM «isis «u nieridie sini Givic wel vie ais arolese Selmore » sieleraintcterers i trary clube orevetbenvas 10.70 11.60 | 11.20 11.40 9.80 cal ae fie 0 10.30

Re Me MES CHO NTO LMT ASH MUOMIES iyres caceharereneta ce icici arson meulete ave lone sisserm olen mveU sis ie tet eelvebneisinve-sisiccduve wvatven 27.40 25170 | 24.30 21.30 22.60 25.50 | 26.40 25.00

SS ewitih — ite MRE on yee ee ae tes ace ne ce eee arsine ROE ce eas oa ce. we 1200 | 11.00 11.00 11.80 | 11.40 | 11.10 | 11.90 | 10.00

Least 6 “ “ posteriorly 6 ae onan Ben ae St OCR OICPPRCECT ERY PROTO RE AIRED E-5 ciir cae ERS Een Eee 6.00 6.00 i 4.00 4.70 4.80 5.70 | 7.50. | 4.00

Fi seaeeee OLSTOS LU UITIL INY TONE TO ZV ODI UR ye fevers cio fh ade ic lasa one afcie)ercisage Pee eT teen 1 ctteh cia iescecte’s ara | 16.20 15.50 19,00 16.80 | 16.00 | 15.50 | 15.50 15.60

Distance between outer rims of alveole of upper incisors.............-..... JON Goa J gRG Gund OR ee Aa taeOeT 12.00 | 11.60 10.30 10.50 | 10.00 | 11.00 | 11.10 , 11.00

fe from posterior rim of alveola of incisor to anterior rim of alyeola of 2d upper premolar........ | 21.30 19.50 18.60 19.50 19.50 | 20.80 14.80 | 19.00

cS Es Oe Oe ae cc ‘* post-palatal notcH’(: palatal length’),............. ... | 41.80 | 39.50 37.80 | 38.60 | 37.70 | 40.00 | 39.30 | 87.70

Length of upper molar series measured on the alveol@ .........-6 cece cece eect eee eee eee eee 17.80 | 17.50 7.30 | 17.00 15.80 | 17.30 | 17.80 | 17.20

Joa Aas ws ws wu CET Oh Aart Ree ROE OID S REMIT AIST facta Oth cD Deon o eae eG | 16.70 15.80 15.70 16.30 14.80 | 16.50 | 17.20 ; 16.10

Distance between alveole of upper molar series eneenlonly FHOSMioUs TAD e Ope stkpaso scou VERSO oy AUDA DOO On!) ae oe ra 6.70 5.40 5.80 4.80 | 9.60

es ae ak Wee ut : posteriorly ..........-.. Seana Cine. > SOU DaSND OOUUpaeN aut i 5.8 G | 3.5) Bp , B 6.20 | 6.2

Ue ntinO fa pLenymOldmLOSsanat LAS Creneierempeteueieteestte steicstcteke els lelelctaes cl=icrenciciel lel corseker te alaieteee tater laisse rs fe resctaleinteret= i 4.50 5.30 5.40 4.80 4.40 vo Mes 4.50

Apex on post-palatal notch to foramen MAMI. <6... sels lis ole seins wheiemiaic) creiieeine sie sere cies el 19.30 Mee 19.00 17.50 18.80 18.70 Bet 17.40

Greatest ene bn (Crans verse) Ol UCIT MND UL Be. a ceserecsntere leva soon elm > erelore ovmiele/ayoin te latetet ee) eve esove aici se sie ey ofa | 23.90 22.20 21.00 21.00 21.50 23.70 | vidi bg BAR

Distance between outer borders of occipital condyles... 2.1.2.2... 6.0. c cece eee cece cece eee tees one \ | 16.00 16.40 16.00 14.30 14,20 15.20 | 15.00

Height of occipital crest from inferior lip of foramen magnum............. 000.2 e cee eee eee ee eee 20.70 | 19.80 18.50 18.50 19.40 | 18.70 ae 19.80

- > BLAMICG GrOLsMNO Als SEULES a e-tais aa eres otha eclein ice eee ME eT Re ic fer osm <icmnree re | 19.80 19.80 18.00 17.70 18.50 16.60 18.60 18.20

Fronto-palatal depth (taken at m sere . Ie ve 48% cf 8.5 j 18.4

Greatest length of single mandible (exclusive of incisors)........... pao bu:00 50.60 ae 47.40 | 47.90 vers | 49.40 | 47.30

Vote hii OiNcoyray Neyo ewolgerindone MV s so Sonon aon o ope sunave anode gob apo. bach onososn oe sbOemoU bea |} 32.00 SL ee 27.00 28.50 30.50 © 28.40

Breadth of flattened transverse plate of angle........... 2.0600 ce eee reece eee eee e tenes vee eees | 24.60 22.50 ae 23.00 20.80 - | 22.20 | 20.60

Distance from incisors to 1st premolar (on alveole®)... - 2.2... 00-1. e ee eee eee eee 13.00 11.80 man Ba 11.40 11. 0) en

Length of under molariform series measured on the alveoli. .... 2.6.66. e eee eee eee eee ees ae vue ean Hos | fa Tan Bee

ae he wat ee a ° co SABHA CHOWN to oye diet o slants caper ee tee oe wales vakramee 6. 5.7 5.4 90 | 15.00 5. 6,

Rano obzyeomatic breadth) to) bastlarclenethiy. ec se a dieteete cic «in eeleie)s tele ia estates) asin ey se] oe Be sete iG i B07 et 84.39

rey ae NEpe are eae series (alveolie) to basilar-Jength podmnmdesoouGans, cones sioud Seeomdoouese.o6 pee Be ae Pe . seep 97.46 | rae ee

‘ ** Jength of nasals OS ae eee OCC oF decors 3. acute. cL CPR ane enrae Sea | oatte Seige ieniay tee) ay,

*« —** muzzle (incisors to 1st pm.) of OI SPs tomer Co aG in qe Ab UU a OUCa Rom Oreo mao 2.7 . BF AS } 32.6 32.3: ae al woeeeks 31.8

: F “ “ 81.53 | 80.06 79.83 79.39 | 79.43 A ed 6.5 T).36

ASO Thee hiorireayel fella» 9 RT SGN SU pnatenosmaecdnoatiaccs ee UANQUEo DTG ue | Bt ; ae ine | es ;

% height of coronoid (from angle) to length of mandible........ | eee ye be et Pane cai | 43.53 | A507 49.00

“_« greatest breadth of nasals to length of same... ... 0... 6-56 e cere eee eee t eee eee \ aa ae es anne Bie ese ee a ann

By % on to basilar-length of Hensel. cher RII Si On Ue EOS ee Ge nae aatan i | 68.52 66.49 66.66 | 68.56 66.49 | 68.37 | ee

ale - Ry ie RRO OLN 2 se eee BOS 22 O15 2 a alee as ae | i rp * VE Z 1 37 6 29 57 eee ‘ 197

“ z upper molariform series (alveole) to basilar-length of Hensel. ge SS 6 ea | a aS ane Boe eae . Shee Bae Das aoe

eee Is oka “ ee ce MRI ce SRC 44.91 | 43.26 42.85 37.83 | 39.85 | 43.58 | 45.45

pare Ok bass Teme aN fa ee | 34.91 | 32.82 32.80 34.62 | 34.39 | 35.55)... | 84.54

aay “ muzzle (incisors to Ist pm.) en a Cn na a eer | 86.88 85.18 85.89 81.17 RL AT a 86.00

“ “ SPE ac | Sat at a a eA EE RE clr ace | |

a length of mandible 2 ie Oe, «Ae a, 17.54 | 19.52 19.75 | 20.24 | 17.28] .... . | 18.72

Eee ea dca eee Ee: 32.45 | 33.38 BLT | 3143 32002 28.7 33.09)

Meteorites from New Mexico. 329

XVIII.—The Meteorite from Glorieta Mountain, Santa Fe Co.,

New Mexico.

BY GEORGE F. KUNZ.

Read Nov. 30, 1885.

On August 9th, 1884, three large masses of meteoric iron were

found by Mr. Charles Sponsler, on the ranch of Mrs. Roival,

near Canoncito, Santa Fé Co., New Mexico, five miles from the

summit of Glorieta Mountain, and three and a half from Glori-

eta Post Office. Mr. Sponsler, who was prospecting at the time,

supposed that he had stumbled upon a mineral of some value,

but as yet I have had no word from him, and for the exact

information I am indebted to Mr. J. H. Bullock, who, during

the month of August, 1885, thoroughly examined and dug over

the ground, working about six weeks steadily, and was rewarded

by securing three more masses. In the meanwhile, a Mexican

had also f.und a small piece, making seven fragments thus far

obtained. ‘This latter piece disappeared with the Mexican be-

fore I could secure it.

No. 1 weighs 1483 Ibs. (67.35 kilos). About one-third of the

whole surface shows the disjuncture very plainly, as also the

exact point where this began. ‘The mass measures 153 inches

(39 cm.) in length, 12 inches (80 cm.) in width, and 8? inches

(22 cm.) at the thickest part, and at the thinner 5d inches (12

em.). One portion has a peculiar bubbled pasty appearance, as

if the mass had been cooled in water at this point. Some of the

depressions on the surface, or pittings, are 5 cm. across, and

quite deep and well-marked. The upper figure on plate XXIII

represents the torn side of this mass. Plate XX VI shows the

Widmannstiatten figures produced by etching a surface of an en-

tire cut from No.1; this plate is printed from an electrotype

taken directly from the etched slab.

No. 2 weighs 115 Ibs. (52.38 kilos.), and measures 163 inches

330 Meteorites from New Mexico.

(41 cm.) in Jength, 10 inches (24 cm.) in width, and 64 inches

(16 cm.) in thickness. About one-third of the surface of this

piece shows the remarkable rupture, the remainder being covered

with the pittings. On one corner there is a portion, 10 inches:

by 6, which is evidently the spot where the mass struck the rock.

Here the pittings are flattened and the whole mass distorted and —

curled over, giving it a radiated or fan-lke appearance. The

front, or pitted, side of No. 2 is well exhibited in Plate XXI,

and the torn side in Plate XXIII, lower figure plate. }

No. 3 weighs 533 lbs. (24.263 kilos.), and measures 12 inches

(30 cm.) in length, 84 inches (214 cm.) in height, and 6 inches

(15 cm.) in thickness in the thickest part. Over five-sixths of

the entire suiface is pitted, some of the depressions being 5 cm.

across and nearly 2cm. deep. ‘The place of rupture is plain,

and the iron here is covrsely fibrous, pcssibly because it was far-

ther from the point of impact. Thcre is also a fissure about 4

inches (10 cm.) decp and nearly 1 cm. wide, opposite the broken

face. In this fissure are two ends of chisels which were

broken in the attempt to pry off this piece, and which may

have enlarged the opening. ‘The front side of No. 3 is shown in

Plate X XII.

All the new masses are as follows:

No. 4 weighs 1.204 kilos (2.65 Ibs.). One-third of the surface

shows the disruption, as in No. 2, the other parts being unaf-

fected and showirg the crust surface, Plate XXV. The broken

surface is partially drawn out toward the part that was broken

off from it, and one edge shows a fracture suggesting cleavage.

It is 50 mm, high, 125 mm. long, and 50 mm. wide, or about

2 by 5 by 2inches. One of the pittings which has been increased

in size by the disruption measures 60 mm. in length, 25 mm. in

width, and 15 mm. in breadth. (See Plate X XIV.)

No. 5 weighs 1.126 kilos (2.48 ]bs.), measures 100 mm. in

length, 75 mm. in width, and 48 mm. in height, about 4 by 3

by 2 inches. Five-sixths of the entire surface bears marks of the

violent disruption, Plate XXIV, and is undoubtedly from the

upper corner, between Nos. 1 and 3. A raised octahedral struc-

ture is revealed on two-thirds of its surface, and the pitted side

shows evidence of having received a part of the blow, Plate

XXYV.

Meteorites From New Mexico. 331

No. 6 weighs 1.05 kilos (2.31 lbs.), measures 125 mm. in length,

82 mm. in width, and 45 mm. in thickness at the thickest part,

or about 5 by 34 by 12 inches. It is quite flat, the fracture

having left a flat surface suggestive of a cleavage. Altogether

this mass closely resembles No. 4. (See Plates XXIV and XXV.)

When the meteorite struck the rock, all these pieces flew

asunder; the 1483 lb. piece was found eight feet from the 115

lb. and 533 Ib. pieces, a fact which shows conclusively that the

meteorite did not burst in mid-air. The small pieces picked up

by Bullock and the Mexican were 45 and 50 feet from the large

masses, having been hurled further because of their comparative

lightness. ‘They were all buried in the vegetable mould covering

the rock in places, the larger pieces to the depth of ten inches,

but some of the smaller fragments were buried only about three

inches.

The accompanying diagram will give a general idea of the rela-

tive position of the three pieces:

No. 1'projecting above and below No. 2, as indicated by*the

shading, and No. 3 fitting in at the lower right hand end. The

other four pieces evidently fitted in between the upper end of No.

3.and No.1. The dimensions of the whole were approximately as

follows: length 25 inches (65 cm.), height 10 inches (25 cm.),

thickness 15 inches (37 cm.). It is curious that so large and

ir ees

* s So A...

302 Meteorites from New Mexico.

compact a mass of iron should have been so completely broken

asunder, and in this respect the fall is quite unique. The frac-

tures are very clean considering the size of the fragments,

although the edges are somewhat irregular. No. 1 is filled with

elongated hollows, proving that it was disturbed, and the twist-—

ings in No. 2 at the point of impact would lead to the conclusion

that the falling body was partly semiplastic; but Prof. R. H. —

‘’bhurston, who kindly examined the iron, compares the fracture

to the effect that is produced by a sudden heavy blow on cold

iron, and has observed the same violent wrenching in an iron tar-

get used in heavy gunning practice and now at the Stevens In-

stitute, Hoboken, N. J. | .

In order to separate these large pieces, the force of the blow

must have been enormous, for the disrupted surface is over one

foot square, and the material as tough as any meteoric iron yet

found. ‘That the impact was on a rock may well be proven by

the fact that the smaller pieces were torn off as readily as the

Jarger ones. The iron has few signs of weathering, and hence

fell recently. It is not deliqnescent. and hence contains no chlo-

rine. A red, ochreous, coating from the soil in which it was

imbedded, not removable by washing, is a distinguishing char-

acteristic of all the pieces of this iron.

The following is the result of an analysis of a compact piece

of iron from No. 3, made by Mr. James B. Mackintosh, E. M.,

of the School of Mines, New York City :

Ke>- : Sake - - - 87.93

Bag 5 eon . - - - dia

Co - - . - . - - 0.33

P : é . . - - - 0.36

99.77

Carbon, sulphur, and other constituents were not determined.

The specific gravity of mass No. 2 was taken on a common steel-

yard, and found to be 7.66+. ‘The figures may be of interest

as showing the homogeneity of the mass, although the method

employed was not delicate.

This iron is one of the Holosiderites of Daubrée, and comes

under the general group of Caillite of Stanislaus Meunier ; it is

Meteorites from New Mexico, 333

related to the irons of Augusta County, Virginia; Whitfield

County, Georgia, and Washington County, Wisconsin, It is of

characteristic octahedral structure, and the Widmanstitten

figures are made up of kamacite (Balkeneisen or beam-iron), 7. ¢.,

iron with little nickel, enveloped in taenite (Bandeisen), 7. ¢@.;

iron rich in nickel, and plessite (Fiilleisen). - On the single cut

made, one field of dark plessite measured 17 by 8 mm., the

kamacite from 5 to 2 mm. in breadth. ‘The taenite was abun-

dant and brilliant. ‘This is perhaps one of the most beautiful

etching irons ever found, as the print from the large section will

show. (Folding Plate XXVI.) Nearly all the large mass has

been cut into slices, and the iron is seen to be very homogeneous

throughout, with the exception of an occasional space measuring

1 to 4mm. across. One of these spaces, near the centre of the

mass, was evidently formed by the shock of disruption. Ina few

instances this explanation is verified by a palpable curving of the

Widmanstitten figures, showing that nearly every part of the

thick mass was twisted and wrenched, when it burst with such

tremendous force. ‘The ruptures on Nos. J and 3 show large

patches of troilite. In cutting No. 1 large streaks of this metal

and schreibersite were observed, the largest of which was 10 cm.

long and 4mm. wide. ‘l'wo of the streaks, 10 cm. apart, ran

parallel to each other in peculiar crescent like shapes.

Olivine was observed at the upper end of No. 1, a surface

about 10 cm. square being completely filled with it. The color

in some instances was brownish-golden, or rich yellow, and as

plentiful as in the ‘‘ Pallas Iron.” The largest grains observed

measured from 8 to 14 mm., and some of these pieces yielded per-

fect gems over 4 mm. in width.

I was kindly informed by Dr. Whitman Cross, of Denver, Col.,

that on Oct. 6th, 1884, a meteorite was presented to the Colo-

rado Scientific Society, with descriptive remarks, by Mr. Richard

Pearce, of the Boston and Colorado Silver Mining Company. It

was sent to the Company from Albuquerque, New Mexico, as

silver bullion, and could not be traced further back, although it

was probably found in the vicinity of the place from which it

was forwarded. Its weight, before cutting, was about 2.5 kilo-

grams, and its dimensions were 45x80x100 mm.

d04 Meteorites from New Mexico.

A short paper upon this meteorite was read before the Col-

orado Scientific Society, on June 1st, 1885, by Mr. L. G. Eakins,

of the Geological Survey, containing an analysis of the iron, which

is subjoined : : )

Fe - - - 88. 760* Mu “= = = - trace

Ee a ee ee ORR) C - oe SS eee

Can hima ive 0.510 PP - 0) 2 e

Onl leigh paint AR eet S - + See eres

Va eiin na deacote 0.030 Si 2. - Se

Cr S : - trace |

99.842

This paper by Mr. Eakins appears in the Proc. of the C. 8. 8.

for 1885, and these figures were kindly furnished by him.

The similarity between this analysis and that of the Glorieta

meteorite leads me to believe that the Colorado iron is the seventh

fragment, which was found by the Mexican, and that he mis-

took it for silver bullion and disposed of it as such.

* Mean of 88.66, 88.77 and 88.84.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

Plate XXI. Front or pitted side of piece No. 2. ‘Two-fifths

natural diameter.

Plate XXII. Same of No. 3. Four-ninths nat. diam.

Plate XXIII. Upper figure; torn side of No. 1.

_ Lower figure; same of No. 2. Both one-third

nat. diam.

Plate XXIV. Torn surfaces, Nos. 4, 5 and 6.

Plate XXV. Crust surfaces of the same. All seven-tenths nat.

diam. ee

Plate XXVI. Etched surface of a cut from No..1, natural size.

A scale of inches was photographed with the specimens shown

on Plates XXI, XXII and XXIII, and appears therefore, cor-

respondingly reduced.

Fishes from the Monongahela River. 339

XIX.—WNotes on a Collection of Fishes from the Monongahela

River.

BY BARTON W. EVERMANN AND CHARLES H. BOLLMAN.

Read April 12, 1886.

During July and August, 1885, Mr. Bollman made a small

collection of fishes in the Monongahela River and a few small

creeks flowing into it. ‘he bulk of the collection was made in

the Monongahela at Monongahela City, at Lock Number Nine,

on that river, near where it enters the State of Pennsylvania

from West Virginia, and in a little stream called Pigeon Creek,

which flows into the river near Monongahela City. As the col-

lecting was done with a small twelve-foot seine, the smaller or

more common shallow-water species constitute the chief part of

the collection.

The common names given are those in local use. The num-

bers in parentheses refer to Dr. Jordan’s Catalogue of North

American Fishes.* All the specimens of this collection are now

in the museum of the Indiana University, Bloomington, Ind.

1. LEPIsOsTEUS OSsEUS (Linneus). (107.)

Gar Pike.

Abundant at Lock No. 9.

2. NoTuRus FLAVUS Rafinesque. (119.)

Found to be common in Pigeon Creek.

3. ICTALURUS PUNCTATUS (Rafinesque). (134.)

Channel Cat.

One specimen taken at Lock No. 9; very common in the river at

Monongahela City.

* A Catalogue of the Fishes known to inhabit the waters of North Amer-

ica, North of the Tropic of Cancer, with notes on the species discovered in

1888 and 1884. By David Starr Jordan, Washington.

336 Fishes from the Monongahela River.

IcTALURUS FURCATUS (Cuvier & Valenciennes). (135.)

Two specimens secured at Lock No. 9.

ICTIOBUS VELIFER (Rafinesque). (148.)

Carp Sucker.

One seen at Lock No. 9; common at Monongahela City.

CATOSTOMUS TERES (Mitchill). (170.)

Common Sucker.

Common in Pigeon Creek.

CATOSTOMUS NIGRICANS Le Sueur. (171.)

**Mullet ;’ Stone-Roller.

Abundant at all places visited.

MoxosTOMA MACROLEPIDOTUM (Le Sueur). (185.)

White Sucker.

Very common everywhere.

CAMPOSTOMA ANOMALUM (Rafinesque). (219.)

Rather common in Pigeon Creek ; a few taken in the river at Lock

No. 9.

. PIMEPHALES NOTATUS (Rafinesque). (219.)

Taken from the river at Monongahela City ; not common.

. CLIOLA VIGILAX Baird & Girard. (223.)

Abundant at all places seined.

. NOTROPIS DELICIOSUS STRAMINEUS (Cope). (233b.)

Only one specimen taken.

. NoTROPIS HUDSONIUS (Clinton). (246, 246b.)

Clupea hudsonia Clinton, Ann. Lyc. Nat. Hist., N. Y., I, 49, pl. 2,

fig. 2, 1824 (Hudson River).

Leuciscus hudsonius DeKay, Nat. Hist. N. Y., 206, pl. 34, fig. 109,

1842 (Hudson River). Agassiz, Lake Superior, 372, 1850,

(Lakes Superior and Huron). Storer, Synopsis Fish., 409, 1845.

Giinther, Cat. Fish., VII, 251, 1868.

Hybopsis hudsonius Cope, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1864, 279

(Michigan). Cope, Cypr. Penn., 386, 1866 (Delaware River).

Abbott, Am. Naturalist, VIII, 1874, 332 (Delaware River). Nel-

son, Bull. Ill. Mus. Nat. Hist., I, 46, 1876. Forbes, Bull. Il.

Lab. Nat. Hist., 82, 1883. Uhler and Lugger, Fishes Md., 149,

1876 (Patapsco River).

Alburnops hudsonius Jordan, Cat. Fresh Water Fish N. A., 419, 1878.

Jordan, Ann. N. Y.-Acad. Sci., 1877, I, 109 (Delaware River).

Jordan, Bull. Ill. Mus. Nat. Hist., IJ, 56,1878. Jordan, Man.

Vert.. 290, 1880.

Fishes from the Monongahela River. 307

Cliola hudsonia Jordan & Gilbert, Synopsis, 171, 1883.

Notropis hudsonius Forbes, Rept. Ill. Fish Comm., 1884, 77. — Cragin,

Bull. Washburn Coll. Lab. Nat. Hist., I, 108, 1885 (Wild Cat

Creek). Jordan, Cat. Fish. N. A., 24, 1885.

Hybopsis storerianus Cope, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phil., 1864, 299

(Michigan). | Cope, Cypr. Penn., 386, 1866 (Delaware and Poto-

mac Rivers). Jordan, Geol. Rept. Ind., 1874. Nelson, Bull.

Ill. Mus. Nat. Hist., I, 46, 1876.

Leuciscus storerianus Giinther, Cat. Fish., VII, 250, 1868 (Susquehanna

River).

Ailburnops storerianus Jordan, Cat. Fresh Water Fish. N. A., 419,

1878.

Hudsonius storerianus Jordan, Man. Vert., 290, 1880.

Cliola storeriana Jordan & Gilbert, Synopsis, 171, 1883.

Hudsonius fluviatilis Girard, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1856, 200

(Chicago). Jordan, Man. Vert., 290, 1880.

Hudsonius amarus Girard, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1856, 200

(Potomac River).

Hybopsis amarus Cope, Fresh Water Fish. N. C., 460, 1877 (Catawba

River).

Alburnops amarus Jordan, Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., 1877, I, 109 (Ocmul-

gee River). Jordan, Cat. Fresh Water Fish. N. A., 419, 1878.

Notropis hudsonius amarus Jordan, Cat. Fish: N. A., 24, 1885.

Hybopsis phaénna Cope, Proc. Acad. Nat. Sci. Phila., 1864, 279 (De-

laware River). Abbott, Am. Naturalist, VIII, 1874, 333 (Dela-

ware River).

Alburnops saludanus Jordan & Brayton, Bull. U. S. Nat. Mus., XII,

16, 1878 (Saluda and Catawba Rivers). Jordan, Cat. Fresh Wa- |

ter Fish. N. A., 419, 1878 (Santee Basin).

Cliola saludana Jordan & Gilbert, Synopsis, 170, 1883 (Santee Basin).

LIuxilus selene Jordan, Bull. U.S. Nat. Mus., X, 60, 1877 (Bayfield,

Wis.). Jordan Ann. N. Y. Acad. Sci., 1877, I, 110, (hake Supe-

rior). Jordan, Man. Vert., 298, 1880.

Minnilus selene Jordan & Gilbert, Synopsis, 188, 1883 (Lake Superior).

Hudsonius euryopa Bean, Proc. U. 8. Nat. Mus. 1879, 285 (McBean

Creek, Ga.).

Cliola euryopa Jordan & Gilbert, Synopsis, 171, 1883 (Savannah River).

Habitat.—Great Lakes east and southward to Georgia and

Alabama. Lakes Superior, Michigan and Huron; Hudson River;

Delaware River ; Susquehanna River; Patapsco River; Potomac

River; Catawba River; Ocmulgee River; Saluda River; McBean

Creek, Ga.; Savannah River; Kankakee River; Manhattan, Kans

aT ae

‘td

aT co

338 Fishes from the Monongahela River.

We have compared specimens of hudsonius and the supposed

amarus from different localities and believe them to be identical.

An examination of the teeth of a number of specimens shows

that the difference, 1, 4-4, 0 or 1, and 2, 4-4 2 or 1, is too va-

riable to be considered a reliable character. The caudal spot,

prominent in the young, is most persistent in those specimens

from sluggish and reedy streams, and we are convinced that this

and other color characters depend simply upon the nature of

the streams which the particular individuals inhabit.

We have examined numerous specimens from the following

localities: Potomac River, U. 8. Fish Comm. Carp Ponds,

Kankakee River, Lake Michigan, Manhattan, Kans., and the

Monongahela. |

In this connection we wish to say that an examination of con-

siderable material leads us to agree with Profs. Jordan and Gil-

bert in making Ceratichthys lucens equal to Rutilus storerianus

Kirtland. Among the specimens examined, is one which was

collected by Prof. Baird and Dr. Kirtland in Yellow Creek,

Ohio, in August, 1853. In this specimen, the barbel is very evi-

dent. The synonymy of these species has been greatly confused

heretofore, and it is with the hope of clearing up the confusion

as much as possible that we have given the synonymy of WV. hud-

sonius so far as we have been able to determine it.

14. NoTRoPIS WHIPPLEI (Girard). (261.)

Very common at all places seined.

15. NoTROPIS MEGALOPS (Rafinesque). (273.)

Silverside.

Very common everywhere.

16. NOTROPIS JEJUNUS (Forbes). (288.)

But two specimens from Lock No. 9. These we have compared with

Forbes’s type and find them identical.

17. NoTRoPiIs ATHERINOIDES Rafinesque. (808.)

Two specimens.

18. NoTROPIS RUBIFRONS (Cope). (810.)

The collection contains but two specimens, which are from Pigeon

Creek.

19. ERICYMBA BUCCATA Cope. (814.)

Three specimens in the collection.

28.

30.

Bot

34.

Fishes from the Monongahela River. 339

. RAINICHTHYS ATRONASUS (Mitchill). (821.)

A single specimen from Pigeon Creek. Others were seen, however.

. HYBOPSIS STORERIANUS (Kirtland). (830.)

Abundant in the river. There is little doubt that this species equals

Ceratichthys lucens Jordan.

2. SEMOTILUS ATROMACULATUS (Mitchill). (347.)

Chub.

Very abundant in Pigeon Creek.

. DOROSOMA CEPEDIANUM (Le Sueur). (455.)

Abundant in the river.

PERCOPSIS GUTTATUS Agassiz. (532.)

Very common in the river.

. POMOXIS ANNULARIS Rafinesque. (842.)

Calico Bass.

Very common.

. POMOXIS SPAROIDES (Lacépéde). (843.)

Calico Bass.

_ Found in about equal numbers with the preceding.

. AMBLOPLITES RUPESTRIS (Rafinesque). (845.)

Red-eye ; Goggle-eye.

Abundant in the creek, less so in the river.

MICROPTERUS DOLOMIEI (Lacépéde). (877.)

Small-mouthed Black Bass.

Abundant in the river.

ETHEOSTOMA PELLUCIDUM Baird. (880.)

Common everywhere in suitable places.

ETHEOSTOMA NIGRUM Rafinesque. (885d.)

One of the most abundant darters of the locality.

ETHEOSTOMA BLENNIOIDES Rafinesque. (894.)

Not very common.

. ETHEOSTOMA CAPRODES Rafinesque. (899.)

Very common, especially at Lock No. 9.

ETHEOSTOMA PHOXOCEPHALUM Nelson. (901.)

The collection contains four specimens, all from Lock No. 9.

ETHEOSTOMA VARIATUM Kirtland. (912.)

Little, if anything, was known of this interesting darter since

340 Fishes from the Monongahela River.

1840, when it was first described by Dr. Kirtland, until recently.

T'wo specimens were obtained April 25, 1885, by Mr. Amos W.

Butler, at Brookville, Indiana ; and a day later, Prof. Charles H.

Gilbert obtained a specimen from lower down in the same river, -

—the Whitewater. The collection made by Mr. Bollman con-

tains a single specimen which he obtained from the Mononga-

hela, about one-half mile below Lock No. 9. This specimen is

% inches in length, and does not differ materially from the

Brookville specimens. A full description of the Brookville spe-

cimens was published by Dr. Jordan in the Proceedings of the

United States National Museum for 1885, pp. 163-165.

30. ETHEOSTOMA ZONALE (Cope).) (916.)

Zoned Darter.

But one specimen of this darter was obtained.

36. ETHEOSTOMA FLABELLARE Rafinesque. (923.)

Fan-tail Darter.

Very abundant everywhere.

37. ETHEOSTOMA CCERULEUM Storer. (936.)

Rainbow Darter.

Perhaps the most abundant darter in the Monongahela.

38. STIZOSTEDION VITREUM (Mitchell). (948.)

Yellow Pike.

Only one specimen taken in the river at Monongahela City.

39. APLODINOTUS GRUNNIENS Rafinesque. (1083.)

~ White Perch.

This species was abundant in the river.

40. CoTTUS RICHARDSONI Agassiz. (1520.)

Miller’s Thumb.

Not very common ; two or three specimens were obtained at Lock

No. 9.

INDIANA UNIVERSITY,

March 15, 1886.

Geology of Long Island. 341

XX.—On the Geology of Long Island.

BY Ke’ J. oi. MER REE,

Read November 7, 1884.

The following contributions to the Geology of Long Island are

the result of some five weeks’ exploration and study of that well-

known and interesting region, during the summer of 1883. This

paper is but preliminary ; and many questions which have been

merely touched upon or wholly neglected, the writer hopes to

discuss at length when more extended research and deeper exca-

vations have given him further data.

The surface geology of this region has already been minutely

described by Mather in his Report on the Geology of the First

District of New York, 1843, and also, with special reference to

the glacial deposits, by Mr. Warren Upham, in his articles on

“*Terminal Moraines of the North American Ice Sheet,” Am.

Jour. Sci., II, 18. I shall therefore review very briefly the

physical characteristics of the island and endeavor to throw what

additional light I can upon its geological history, from the study

of sections of strata recently exposed, and such other phenomena

as it has been my fortune to observe.

Long Island as a whole is comparatively low and flat, but

throughout the central part is a range of hills extending from

Bay Ridge northeasterly to Roslyn, and thence continuing to

Montauk Point in a series of elevations, the more important of

which are known as West, Dix, Comac, Bald, and Shinnecock

Hills. The average height of this chain is about 250 feet ; but

at some points it is much greater. Harbor Hill at Roslyn is 384

feet above tide; Jane’s Hill is 383 feet high ; Reuland’s Hill has

an elevation of 340 feet, and Wheatly Hill is 369 feet above the

sea. ;

There is also, along the north shore, an elevation which usually

follows the contour of the numerous deep bays and inlets, vary-

ing in hight from 30 to 200 feet, and almost continuous from

B42 Geology of Long Island.

Astoria to Orient Point. These two ranges of hills are the re-

sult of glacial action, and the more southern chain marks the

southern limit of the drift. .

Upham and others, in speaking of these ranges, ue. called

them moraines. If the word moraine is to be thus used, and

present custom in the United States appears to sanction the use,

it must be taken in a different sense from that accorded to it in

most regions of glacial action. In Switzerland and other moun-

tainous countries, the term is applied to great accumulations of

boulders and rock detritus, pilea up along the sides or front of

a glacier. Throughout most of Long Island and at many points

on the New England coast, however, the thickness of the drift

on the ridges marking the southern limit of glacial extension is

very slight and in some cases it is wanting. In these cases, the

term moraine would be AyROLy TIONS with the southern limit of

the continental glacier. |

South of the backbone, as the central range of hills is called,

the surface is nearly level, gently sloping southward in an unbro-

ken gravelly plain ; while between this ridge and the north shore

is a second plain with an elevation of 50 to 100 feet, and espe-

cially noticeable between Port Jefferson and Riverhead. From

many of the deep bays on the north shore, valleys extend through

the hills in a southerly direction. These depressions, thirty in

number between Hast New York and Riverhead, have been ex-

plored by Mr. Ehas Lewis, Jr., of the Long Island Historical

Society.* He finds them to average about 25 feet in depth and

to be occupied usually by small streams most of which flow south-

ward. ‘These valleys are evidently the beds of rivers formed by

the melting of the ice sheet in the Champlain Period.

There are no important lakes or rivers now on Long Island,

but there are numerous ponds of clear cool water, without visi-

ble inlet or outlet. The existence of these ponds depends on the

fact that in the stratified sands of the island, which are under-

lain by clays, a uniform water-level, or plain, exists,— which

rises northward from low-tide-level on the south shore at the

rate of 12! feet per mile. Wherever a basin has been excavated

* Am. Jour. Sci., Series III, Vol. XIII.

+ Dana, Manual of Geology, p. 664.

Geology of Long Island. 343

below the surface of this plain, it would necessarily be filled by

these subterranean waters, which, by their constant percolation

through the sand, would remain pure aud clear, without material

or sudden change of Jevel under average conditions. The largest

of these ponds is Lake Ronkonkoma, which is three miles in cir-

cumference, and has a maximum depth of 83 feet.

The coast-line of Long Island is strikingly irregular. Along

the north shore are eight deep and extensive bays, which form

excellent harbors, and also a large number of inlets, most of

which are navigable. At the heads of these bays, numerous

springs of pure water issue from the hillsides, indicating the

presence of an impervious stratum within the hills. The east

end of the island is penetrated by Great and Tittle Peconic Bays

to a depth of 22 miles, while the south shore west of Southhamp-

ton for about 95 miles, consists of an intricate series of shallow

creeks partly surrounded by salt marsh, tributary to Shinnecock,

Moritches, Great South, Hempstead, and other bays, which are

divided from the ocean by long sand beaches, or reefs intersected

in places by narrow inlets. Shelter, Robbin’s, Plum, Gull and

Gardiner’s Islands, which form part of Suffolk County, New

York, do not differ from Long Island essentially in physical or

geological characteristics.

The lithology of the island is comparatively simple, the crys-

talline rocks being confined to quite a limited area. The greater

part of the region consists of gravel, sand and clay, overlain

along the north shore and for some distance southward, by gla-

cial drift. This material forms an important element of the

surface formation, and though it has been already described by

Mather and Upham, I shall devote a short space to its discussion.

For the sake of clearness, we may describe the drift as of two

kinds: Ist, the till or drift proper, a heterogeneous mixture

of gravel, sand and clay, with boulders, and 2d, the gravel

drift, a deposit of coarse yellow gravel and sand, brought to its

present place by glacial and alluvial action, but existing near

by in a stratified condition, before the arrival of the glacier.

This yellow gravel drift, which in a comparatively unaltered

condition forms the soil of the pine barrens of southern and

eastern Long Island, and is exposed in section at Crossman’s

brickyard in Huntington, is equivalent to and indeed identical

“okey

344 (reology of Long Lsland.

with the yellow drift or preglacial drift of New Jersey, a forma-

tion of very great extent in that State, and of which the origin

and source have not yet been fully explained, though it is always

overlain by the glacial drift proper where these formations occur -

together.

In the hills near Brooklyn the till attains its maximum depth.

This has never been definitely ascertained, but is probably be-

tween 150 and 200 feet. ‘The only information we have on the

subject is from a boring in Calvary Cemetery, where the drift

was 139 feet deep, and this point is nearly five miles north of

Mt. Prospect, which is 194 feet high and probably consists for

the most part of till. The occurrence of this till is quite local

and very limited along the north shore between Roslyn and Hor-

.ton’s Point. From the former locality eastward the hills are

mainly composed of stratified gravel and sand, probably under-

lain by clay. On the railroad. between Syosset and Setauket, is

an abundance of coarse gravel with but slight stratification.

Hast of Setauket for some distance the drift is a fine yellowish

sand which washes white on the surface, and at Wading River

the drift with cobble-stones was only eighteen inches thick where

exposed, being underlaid with fine yellow sand. Along the re-

mainder of the north shore to Orient Point, 6 feet was the max-

imum depth of drift observed. Under this were stratified sands,

gravels and clays, usually dipping slightly from the shore. On

Brown’s Hills, north of Orient, the drift is overlaid by 3 feet of

fine micaceous sand, which has probably been carried to its pres-

ent position by the wind. ‘The drift at this locality is a clayey

till, and its surface is strewn with an abundance of boulders of

coarse red gneiss. On Shelter Island are high ridges of gravel

overlain by a few feet of till. The hills from Sag Harbor east-

ward are also composed partially of unmodified drift, but the

most extensive deposit on the east end of Long Island is between

Nepeague Bay and Montauk Point. Here the drift is disposed

in rounded hillocks from 80 to 200 feet above the sea, with bowl

and trough-shaped depressions between. ‘The bluffs along the

south shore, which are rapidly yielding to the action of the waves,

consist for the most part of boulder clay and hard-pan of consid-

able depth, covered by a shallow layer of till. At a few places,

however, on the south shore, west of the point, laminated blue

Geology of Lony Island. 345

clay streaked with limonite occurs, intercalated with the till.

At the end of the point, a similar bed of clay is exposed, over-

lain by stratified sand. From the extremely limited character

of the exposures, I am unable to determine whether the clay un-

derlies the whole of the point or is merely local in its occurrence.

In character and position, however, it is analogous to beds occur-

ring on Block Island.

The boulders of Long Island attract the attention of the geol-

ogist by their size and variety. ‘They represent almost every

geological age ; fossiliferons rocks of the Helderberg, Oriskany

and Cauda Galli, Hamilton, Chemung and Hocene periods having

been found in the drift. Examples of these are in the collection

of the Long Island Historical Society. There are also various

members of the Archean series, viz., gneiss, granite, syenite,

hornblende, chlorite, talcose and mica schist, limestone, dolo-

mite, and serpentine; and the Paleozoic and Mesozoic ages are

represented by Potsdam sandstone, Hudson River slate, Oneida

conglomerate or Shawangunk grit, Catskill sandstone, and Tri-

assic sandstone and trap. As the lithology of the boulders has

been described in detail by Mather,* it would be superfluous for

me to undertake a similar description.

In addition to the rocks mentioned above, a ferruginous sand-

stone and conglomerate occur abundantly in fragments along the

east shore of Hempstead Harbor, and in the drift between Glen

Cove and Oyster Bay. Many of these fragments contain vegeta-

ble impressions, but in only two localities have any leaf prints

been found. ‘These were West Island, Dosoris, and the well of

the Williamsburg Gas Co. The prints are supposed to belong

to Cretaceous plants, but the evidence is incomplete.

_ Many of the erratic blocks are of immense size, one in particu-

Jar, of gneiss, on Shelter Island, near Jennings’ Point, con-

tained as a solid mass over 9000 cubic feet. It has split in three

pieces since it was deposited. Mathert mentions a mass of gra-

nite near Plandome, which was estimated to contain 8000 cubic

yards above the surface of the ground.

Having thus briefly reviewed the characters of the surface

* Geol. 1st Dist. N. Y., pp. 165-177.

+ Geol. ist Dist., p. 174.

346 Geology of Long Lsiand.

drift, we will now consider in detail the strata which underlie it.

The crystalline rocks outcrop along the shore at Hellgate and

over a limited area in the vicinity of Astoria. They consist of

finely laminated gneiss and schists, tilted at a high angle, and

belong to the same formation as the rocks of Manhattan

Island. I am informed by Mr. Elias Lewis, Jr., that in

boring an artesian well in Calvary Cemetery, near Brooklyn, a

bed of gneiss was encountered at a depth of 182 feet. Further

than this, we know nothing of the extent of the crystalline rocks

on Long Island. ‘The section obtained in the boring mentioned

was as follows :

Surface loam and drift, - = - | 139 feet.

Greenish earth, = - - - - - 2

White clay with red streaks, - : 4g

Gneiss, - . - - - - A00—

Total, - - 582 feet.

The greenish earth referred to, lost its color on being treated

with hydrochloric acid, and the white residue examined under

the microscope appeared to consist of minute fragments of kao-

linized feldspar, with occasional grains of quartz sand. The

acid solution gave a strong reaction for iron, indicating a proba-

ble admixture of glanconite with the material. It is stated in

Cozzens’ Geol. Hist. of N. Y. Island, that a shell of HLaogyra

costata, with green-sand adhering, was found between Brooklyn

and Flatlands, at a depth of 60 feet. This locality is about five

miles south of the well just mentioned, and would indicate the

presence of Cretaceous strata near Brooklyn.

The following data, also furnished by Mr. Lewis, of a well dug

by the Nassau Gas Light Co., in Williamsburg, will give an idea

of the formation at that locality :

Surface loam, - - - - 38 feet.

Quick-sand (so called), - - yee

Boulder clay, somewhat sandy, = Oe

Blue clay with pebbles. - . i eas

Oyster shells, - : - : 6 inches.

Total, : 102 feet 6 inches.

Geology of Long Island. 347

The shell-bed was underlain by quicksand bearing water.

In the vicinity of Manhasset, on the road to Port Washington,

are extensive exposures of stratified sand, more or less inclined

from the horizontal. About 200 yards south of the post office,

on the west side of the road, is a bank about 40 -feet high, com-

posed of a white, coarse, laminated sand, streaked with hydrous

peroxide of iron, the layers dipping S. E. 13°. A little north-

east of the post office, along the road, there are banks of red

sand cemented together in places by sesquioxide of iron and re-

sembling the Cretaceous red sand bed of New Jersey.

On the shore of Manhasset Bay, near Port Washington, are

high banks of coarse yellow stratified sand and gravel. This de-

posit is very irregular in its stratification, as it shows in many

places the ‘‘flow and plunge” structure described by Dana, and

which is evidently produced by swift currents. The depth of

this formation cannot be determined, it is probably not less than

150 feet, and possibly is much greater. These beds dip about

15° W.; the strike is nearly due north and south. Along the

shore of Manhasset Bay, from Port Washington to Barker’s

Point, are extensive banks of stratified sand and gravel, much

stained with iron and dipping westward. At Prospect Point

and Mott’s Point, the banks are composed of coarse gravel simi-

lar to that at Port Washington.

Between Roslyn and Glen Cove, there are high banks of red and

flesh-colored sands, while at Carpenter’s clay pits a most interest-

ing section is presented (fig. 1). The greatest hight of this sec-

tion is 73 feet, the strike of the beds being N. 80° W. and the

dip about 37° northerly. The layers here are composed of coarse

white gravel and sand, apparently consisting of quartz, but sus-

ceptible of being easily crushed in the hand. The pebbles are

traversed by innumerable cracks, and appear to have been sub-

jected to the action of an alkaline solution. Interstratified with

the gravel are layers of fine white clay, from six inches to one foot

in thickness, stained pink in some places, and containing occasion-

al fragments of a soft hematite or red ochre. Besides these beds,

there is a deposit of kaolin farther south, but its stratigraphical

relations to the layer exposed could not be determined. This kao-

lin is a soft white granular clayey substance, consisting chiefly of

hydrous silicate of alumina from the decomposition of feldspar.

348 (reology of Long Island.

In fact the whole deposit would seem to be the decomposition

product of a granulite rock such as occurs abundantly in West-

chester Co., N. Y., and in southwestern Connecticut. In the north

end of the bank is an unconformability, the gravel beds, which

dip 37°, being overlaid by stratified sand dipping 15° in the same

direction. ‘The layers shown in this section form the north slope

of an anticlinal flexure, the lowest beds being, I am informed

by Mr. Coles Carpenter, one of the proprietors, almost vertical.

An excavation made about 100 yards W. S. W. of the main pit,

for the purpose of obtaining some leaf-prints, exposed the fol-

lowing section :

Gravelly drift, - - - 2 O feet:

White sand, - - - - 18 inches.

Coarse ‘‘ - rd ie ; Pet 6

Reddish clay, - Bec Reis Ua

Grey sandy carbonaceous clay

with leaf-prints, - - 4 «6

14 feet.

_ These beds dipped about 15° 8. W., the locality being on the

south slope of the anticlinal.. Owing to the sandy nature of the

clay, and the dryness of the season, no satisfactory specimens

could be obtained. ‘The prints retain no carbon, but simply

show the venation of the leaves. |

North of Sea Cliff, along the shore of Hempstead Harbor, to

the Glen Cove steamboat landing, is a series of clay beds out-

cropping on the beach and dipping N. by EH. about 10°; these

beds are of various colors, blue, yellow, reddish, white and black.

The reddish clays contain fragments of a soft hematite, and one

of the blue layers is overlaid by about two inches of lignite in

small fragments. Other layers contain pyritized lignite and

nodular pyrites, but it is impossible to determine the nature and

order of these beds accurately, without extensive excavations.

Dark clays, with pyrites, are also reported to occur in Carpenter’s

pits at a considerable depth. In fhe beds of decomposed gravel

already mentioned, are many geodes of sand cemented together

by hydrous and anhydrous sesquioxide of iron, containing a

dark granular mass which analysis shows to consist chiefly of

decomposed pyrites. The conclusion is therefore justifiable that

the nodules of marcasite which once existed in the gravel beds

Greology of Long Lsland. 349

have decomposed by oxidation, and the resulting ferric oxide

has cemented the sand about them into a hard crust, while the

nodules in the clay beds which were protected from oxidation

have remained unaltered.

North of Glen Cove, clays of various kinds occur at East and

West Islands, Dosoris’, and at Matinnecock Village. At the

East Williston brickyard, near Mineola, there is a local deposit

of grey micaceous clay. The depth of this, where excavated,

varies from 7 to 18 feet. The clay overlies white laminated

sands, stained with limonite, the upper surface of the sand being

cemented together for the depth of an inch by the yellow oxide.

Over the clay is about six inches of black alluvial earth.

At the brick-yard on Centre Island, in Oyster Bay, there is a

deposit of brown sandy clay over a bed of more homogeneous and

tougher clay. ‘These beds undulate in an east and west direction

or away from the shore, and the lower stratum contains shaly

concretions or claystones. About a mile north of the brick-yard,

it is said that a bed of white fire clay has been found at a depth

of 25 feet under the drift and sand. ~A little west from the U.

S. Fish Hatchery, at the head of Cold Spring Harbor, is a bank

of stratified gravel 70 feet high. About 40 feet below the top

of this bank is an exposure of laminated sand and sandy clay

stained red, brown and yellow with oxide of iron, and a short

distance below, a chalybeate spring issues from the bank. The

clay deposit at Stewart’s brick-yard, at Bethpage, is about 60

feet in depth. The surface stratum is a yellowish micaceous

clay, the lower part being mottled blue and yellow. It probably

was originally a gray or blue clay, its present yellow color being

due to the peroxidation and hydration of the iron contained.

Of this stratum there is about 35 feet ; below is about five feet

of reddish sandy clay, and beneath this a blue-black sandy clay

containing nodules of white pyrites. This stratum is about 25

feet deep and is underlaid by white sand. The beds are some-

what disturbed and folded, the uppermost being slightly undu-

lating, while the two lower appear to be raised in a fold trending

nearly E. and W.

I am indebted to Mr. Lewis for the following section obtained

in digging a well at Jericho in 1878, on the premises of Mr. Jules

Kunz:

390 | Geology of Long Island.

Surface loam, wey athe - - lS aches

Drift, - - - - - - BOT ae

Yetlowtgvavel) ssi 2 Ae ae 6i**

Sand, - - - - - - 15 **

Saudy clay with a carbonized branch, 4 ‘“

Yellow clay, - - - - “oun

Blue and gray sandy clay with pyrites, 30 <

Micaceous sand, - - - - (14°) Gam

Total, - - 198 ft. 6.1m.

From the same authority I have the following section of a well

on Barnum’s Island :

Sand and gravel, stratified, - - 70 ft.

Clay and clayey sand with lignite, - aa

Gravel and fine sand with clayey sand, 44 <‘

Blue clay, clayey sand and silt, with lig-

nite and pyrites, - - = Tb6est

Totaly: (i)° > a gees

In the third stratum, at a depth of 168 feet, a fragment of the

stem of a crinoid was found which, together with a complete set

of specimens from the well, is in the collection of the Long Island

Historical Society. The fossil fragment is probably from some

Paleczoic formation, and has no special importance.

At Crossman’s brick-yard in Huntington, on the east shore of

Cold Spring Harbor, we have the section shown in Fig. 2 of plate

XXVIII. The ridge which is intersected here trends a little H.

of N. ‘The section is as follows:

Till and stratified drift, - - - LOM

Quartz gravel, - - - : - 45 *

Red and blue ‘‘loam” or sandy clay, 20 ‘

Diatomaceous earth, - - - 3 pce:

Yellow and red stratified sand, - - Oran

Red plastic clay, - - - - 20 **

Brown . 66 ce ae a A a = 25 (a4

otal, << hy 2e- eee

Geology of Long Island. 301

The bed of diatomaceous earth is of undetermined extent, and

appears to be replaced a little to the east by a blue clay, which

however contains some diatoms. It is undoubtedly equivalent

to the bed of-ochre which overlies the sand throughout the re-

mainder of the section. At Jones’s brick-yard, adjoining Cross-

man’s, there is a similar fold nearly at right angles to the first,

but the upper portion has been removed by ice or water down to

the sand. This stratum, which is yellow and brown in the north

part of Crossman’s yard, is dark red in the south end and at

Jones’s. It appears to be mixed with a fine red clayey matter

which separates on washing.

The formation on Lloyd’s Neck is similar to that at Cross-

man’s, with regard to the composition of the strata. On the

north side of East Neck, at Eckerson’s brick-yard, is a deposit

of reddish clay underlain by brown clay very similar to that at

Crossman’s. ‘To the west of this is a bank of white quartz gravel,

while on the east is an extensive deposit of fine white quartz

sand, laminated with red, yellow and brown waved streaks.

The exact relations of these strata I was unable to determine,

but from their analogies to other deposits I am inclined to con-

sider the laminated sand as the more recent,

On the north end of Little Neck there is another large deposit

of these laminated sands. At this point they dip 8.E. about

15°. The following section given in Mather’s Report Geol. of

Ist Dist., p. 254, is more complete than any I could obtain at

the time of my visit :

1. Loose surface sand, - - . - - - 1d ft.

2. Dark colored loamy sand and clay, - - =f jes aes

3. Yellowish and reddish sand, waved lamine, on.

4, White sand tinged with yellow, . ~ : Ais Se

5. Sand similar but differing in color and direction

of lamine, - - - - . - ae a

6. Sand red, waved lamina, - - - - BO aa

7. White clay, - 2 = - = Bey At! Dale ee

8. White sand tinged ar red or om : . 4 <6

9. Clay, white like No. 7, - : - - ras eth

10. Sand, white like No. 8, - - Sey - a ees

ae a

352 Geology of Long Island.

11. White clay like No. 7, - - - = a eee

12. White sand like No. 8, - - - - > oe

Total,- - -.

South of this deposit, about half a mile, is a clay-pit which is

worked by Capt. Sammis, of Northport. Here the stratification

is as follows:

Surface loam and drift, - : - dor 4 ft.

Sandy kaolin, - - - - =e 10

Yellowish clay, - - - : : ee Sa

Dark blue sandy clay, - ~~ - : <i; Seine

Dip, a° W:

The lowest stratum is separated into thin lamine by equally

thin layers of sand, in which are numerous impressions of frag-

ments of vegetable matter, but only one leaf-print has been

found ; this is in the museum of the Long Island Historical So-

ciety. It is a small, broadly elliptical leaf, about # in. long. In

this same bed was found several years ago a shark’s tooth which

has been identified as Carcharodon angustidens or megalodon.

It is difficult to determine the relation of this stratum to the

other layers in the vicinity, but it is probably of the same period

as the laminated sands, and seems to be identical with a bed

which Mather describes as occurring on Eaton’s Neck. (Geol.

Ist Dist., p. 228.) |

At the brick-yard near West Deer Park, beneath the gravel

and drift, is a stratum of flesh-colored clay, underlaid by dark

blue clay containing pyrites. I was informed by the owner, Mr.

Conklin, that in the centre of the hill of gravel the clay rises up

ina fold. Between Bethpage and West Deer Park is a deposit

of ferruginous conglomerate and sandstone formed by the solidi-

fication of the stratified gravel and sand or yellow drift. This

rock is very similar in composition and appearance to one which

occurs in fragments in the glacial drift and contains vegetable

impressions. At Provost’s yard, near Fresh Ponds, are quite ex-

tensive beds of brown sandy clay, reddish clay, and chocolate-

brown clay, dipping from the shore. ‘The red and chocolate

Geology of Long Island. 353

clays are probably identical with the similar beds at Crossman’s

in Huntington. |

Lake Ronkonkoma is in a basin of which the bottom is about

210 feet below the high ground on the south. Its southern bank

is composed of Jaminated sand streaked with oxide of iron, and

the rest of the shore appears to be formed of the same material.

At Crane Neck Point are bluffs, 60 feet high, of sand and gravel

‘containing masses of ferruginous sandstone of recent date. At

Herod’s Point the bluffs consist of fine yellow sand and gravel,

slightly stratified, and dipping a few degrees south. Limonite

concretions are here abundant. The bluffs at Friar’s Head are

about 120 feet high, and consist of yellow stratified sand with

pebbles. Over these is a dune of yellowish drifted sand 90 feet

high, making the total hight of the peak 210 feet. On the west

side of Robbin’s Island is an exposure of blue clay overlaid by

laminated ferruginous sand. The depth of this clay-bed has not

been determined, but it is similar in appearance and quality to

some of the clays near Huntington, especially at Crossman’s

brick-yard. - A chalybeate spring issues from the laminated sand

on the shore, a little to the south of the clay-pit. The clay bed

appears to dip southward about 10° throughout the whole extent

of the island. Near the railroad between Southold and Green-

port are two brick-yards. At the more easterly of the two there

are various deposits of stratified sand and clay very much folded

and tilted. At this place the section exposed shows two parallel

folds, the axes of which trend a little N. of E. The upper stra-

tum of brown clay contains angular fragments of mica schist.

(See fig. 3.) At the other yard they are working a bed pre-

cisely similar to that just mentioned and also containing angular

fragments of rock.

On Shelter Island are high hills of gravel with a thin covering

of till; the highést point is about 180 feet above tide. West of

the village of Orient is a narrow isthmus of sand beach and salt

meadow, about a mile and a half long and not more than ten

feet above tide. ast of this, on the north side of the peninsula,

Brown’s Hills extend along the shore for a mile and a half, the

highest point being 128 feet above Long Island Sound. The

structure of these hills is difficult to determine, as extensive land

slides have occurred, and the slopes are covered with grass and

bushes. One exposure gave the following section:

ees)

B04 Geology of Long Island.

Drift, = - - - - - 3 feet.

Fine yellow sand, - - - - Se

Micaceous clay, ot ake = - “oe

Micaceous sand, - . -— Qa: ee

Total, . = - 37 feet.

The micaceous sand occurs at the foot of the bluffs along the

shore in this vicinity. It may also be seen half a mile west of”

- Orient, in a bank by the road-side.

On Gardiner’s Island a very complete section is exposed on the

southeast shore, which exhibits the strata to the depth of about

250 feet (see figs. 4&5). Here stratified sands and clays of vari-

ous kinds and colors are raised up in two parallel anticlinal folds.

In the southerly fold, the stratum is a light red, fine, plastic clay,

very similar to that at Crossman’s in Huntington ; it is here ex-

posed to a depth of about 100 feet and is upheaved at a high

angle, its outer slopes dipping about 45°, while along the axis of

the fold the lamine are vertical. ‘The northern anticlinal has

about 15° dip on either side, and in its north slope is a stratum

of yellowish clayey sand containing a bed of post-pliocene shells,

at an average hight of 15 feet above the sea. ‘The formation

which is here brought to view probably underlies the whole of

the island, as it is exposed at various other points. On the north

and southeast shores the beds are very much disturbed and

folded, and the surface of the island is raised in a series of par-

allel ridges corresponding in position to the folds and having a

general trend of N. 65° E. The highest point on the island is

128 feet above the sea; the bluffs along the shore being from 25

to 70 feet high. The fossiliferous stratum is about 20 feet long

and 4 feet thick, containing an abundance of shells, most of

which appear to have been crushed by superincumbent pressure.

The locality was visited in 1863 by Prof. Sanderson Smith, who

describes the bed as 150 to 200 feet long. Prof. Smith has iden-

tified the following species* all of which are recent: Vassa

trivittata, N. vibex, Fusus decemcostatus, Purpura lapillus,

Columbella lunata, +Natica duplicata, N. heros, Chemnitzia

* Annals N. Y. Lyceum of Nat. Hist., Vol. VIII, 1865.

+ Species also collected by the writer.

Geology of Long Lsland. 309

interrupta, Crepidula fornicata, *C. plana, Tornatella pwneto-

striata, Bulla canaliculata, * Venus mercenaria, * Ostrea Virgini-

and, Pecten Islandicus, P. Magellanicus, Arca transversa, A.

pexata, Cardita borealis, * Astarte sulcata or undata, Mactra la-

teralis, Lucina radula, *Mya arenaria ; fragments of a Bala-

nus ; a coral, Astrangia Dane.

Napeague Beach, east of Amagansett, 1s three miles long and

one quarter of a mile broad, consisting entirely of white quartz

sand. Along the shore on the north and south are dunes of

drifted sand 20 or 30 feet high, but the main portion of the

beach probably averages less than 10 feet above the sea. East

of the beach, the country for twelve miles to the end of Montauk

Point, is chiefly a terminal moraine, and as such I have already

briefly described it.

HISTORICAL GEOLOGY.

Having thus reviewed in detail the various strata underlying

the drift, we come now to consider their age and history. With-

out attempting to decide the geological equivalence of the crys-

talline rocks at Astoria, we will discuss the unsolidified deposits

which have just been described.

From the position and strike of the Cretaceous strata in New

Jersey and Staten Island, it has been surmised by geologists that

they underlie Long Island throughout the whole or a portion of

its extent. The locality at which the strata most resemble

the Cretaceous beds of New Jersey is Glen Cove, where the

clays already described are probably of this age. If the Cre-

taceous formation extends under the whole of Long Island it

must occur at a very great depth, since deep sections at points

east of Glen Cove do not reveal its presence.

In regard to this formation and the following, it should be un-

derstood that sufficient data have not yet been obtained to war-

rant an attempt to map out their extent. The only exposures

are in vertical sections along the shore and in various clay-pits

or similar excavations ; and there being an immense amount of

quaternary material overlying them, no satisfactory degree of

accuracy can be as yet attained in this regard.

* Species also collected by the writer.

* oi L@ A i a thet

306 (reology of Lon g Island.

The Tertiary strata of Long Island cannot as yet be identified

with much more certainty than the Cretaceous. From their

character and position we may surmise that the brown and

red plastic clays of Huntington, Gardiner’s Island and else-

where, belong to the age in question, but we have no paleon-

tological evidence except from the shark’s tooth found on Lit-

tle Neck, which would identify the bed in which it occurred

as Eocene or Miocene. The stratified sands and gravels however,

which overlie the supposed Cretaceous and Tertiary beds, and in

turp are overlain unconformably by surface drift and till, we

may accept as Post-pliocene, from the analogy of their composi-

tion, structure and position to the deposits of Gardiner’s Island

and Sankaty Head, of which the fossils determine the age beyond

question ; unfortunately, however, there is no unconformability,

to show where the Tertiary ends and the Quaternary begins.

At varions times and places, fossil shells and lignite have been

found on Long Island. I append a synopsis of a list of these

compiled by Elias Lewis, Jr., from Mather’s Report and from

other sources :

10.

12.

13,

14.

16. Clam. oyster and

scallop shells.

17.| Wood.

18, Oyster shells.

19. Shells.

Stem of Crinoid.

. | Lignite.

.| Wood.

3.| Wood.

_|Carb’nized wood

.|Lignite.

.| Wood.

.|Carcharodon an-

gustidens. .

.| Log of wood.

.|Clam shells.

.|Shells.

.|Bones of Masto-

don.

3.| Venus mercenaria

34.| Ostrea Virginiana

Lakeville.

Great Neck, 1813.

Manhasset, 1813.

Bet. Manhasset and Ros-

lyn.

Barnum ’s Island.

Near Westbury.

Hempstead Plains, 1804.

Sea Cliff, 1845.

Glen Cove, 1864.

Jericho, 1878.

Cold Spring. -

Little Neck.

Strong’s Neck.

Shelter Island, 1898.

Wells at Amagansett.

Jamaica Pond, 1846.

Yaphank.

Sag Harbor, 1864.

Geology of Long Island. 307

- NATURE OF

Fossi.. LocaLity AND DaTE. | DEPTH. AUTHORITY.

.|Recent shells. (Ft. Lafayette. 23—53 ft. |E. Lewis, Jr.

.|Pyrula, clam, |New Utrecht. 43—67 ft. |Thompson’s Hist.

oyster, of T..t,

. Clam and oyster Well in Prospect Park. E. Lewis, Jr.

shells.

.|\Clam and oyster; Well at Flatbush Alms-|40—50 feet.| “‘ oe

shells. house.

. 2 Petrified clams Flatbush. 100 ft. W. J. Furman An-

tiquities of L. I.

Dr Ji CL Jay:

.| Oxogyra costata, ‘Bet. Brooklyn and Flat-|60 ft. Ann. of Lyc.

with gr’fis’nd.| lands. Nat. Hist., 1842.

. Oyster shells. (High grounds in Brook-|73 ft. Furman’s Antiqui-

lyn. ties.

‘Clam shells. Fort Greene, 1814. 70 ft. | oc i

. Anomiaephip- ‘Cor. Jay & Front Street,|15 ft. ‘EK. Lewis, Jr.

pium. Brooklyn.

Oyster shells. |Nassau Gas Light Co.,/127ft. 6in.| “ i.

Williamsburg. |

Log of wood. (Bushwick. 40 ft. ‘Thompson’s Hist.

Shells. Newtown. 70 ft. se oC

Clam shells. East New York. 80 ft. es “f

Wood. 3 miles W. of Jamaica. |25 ft. os ue

| 89 ft. above

15. Clam and oyster| Lakeville. tide 140 HenryOnderdonk,

shells. to160 ti.) Jr.

200 feet

4 above tide. J. H. L’Homme-

47 ft. dieu.

50 ft. Thompson’s Hist.

78 Ei Pe a 66

140 fey 6c 66

168 ft. E. Lewis, Jr.

100-3883 ft. *g i

Great d’pths/Thompson’s Hist.

100-108 ft. |Dwight’s Travels.

94 ft. Isaac Coles.

40 ft. EK. Lewis, Jr.

96 ft. 3 *

(110 ft. Thompson’s Hist.

PBs Sills:

40 ft. Thompson’s Hist.

‘57 ft. Me (a

E. Lewis, Jr.

100 feet

|. above tide.|E. Lewis, Jr.

| 20 ft.

180ft. above|Dr. Cook. -

tide.

308 Geology of Long Island.

In view of the fact that we have nowhere else any good evidence

of achange of sea level amounting to 200 feet in the vicinity of New

York during the Glacial epoch, we can only account for the high

elevation of some of these fossils by supposing that they, with

their containing beds, have been raised to their present Doe?

by glacial action in the manner I shall describe. :

Of the physical conditions under which the presumed Creta-

ceous and Tertiary beds were deposited, we know nothing ;

though it is reasonable to conclude that they consist of the debris

of New York and New England rocks carried down from the

highlands and deposited along the coast by rivers.or by other

agencies of transportation. The overlying deposits of strati-

fied gravel, sand and clay, part of which, as before stated, are

equivalent to the “yellow drift” of New Jersey, are also difficult

to account for. They consist largely of transported material

from older beds, and by their structure indicate that they have

been formed by swift currents which carried along and deposited

coarse and fine material mingled together. ‘Their fossils, so far

as we know, exclude them from the Tertiary, and they underlie

the drift unconformably, although by definition the Glacial pe-

riod begins the Quaternary age.

If, however, we assume in the Quaternary a succession of

glacial epochs, or alternate periods of advance and retreat of

the ice-sheet, as suggested by Croll’s theory, we can explain

the origin of the beds in question by supposing that during

the epoch of glaciation immediately preceding their deposi-

tion, the ice-sheet did not reach so far south, while the floods of

of the succeeding warmer epoch modified and spread over the

sea-bottom the drift thus formed. |

In order to appreciate more exactly the relations of these Post-

pliocene beds to the glacial drift, it will be necessary to consider

some very interesting phenomena. Along the north shore of

Long Island from Flushing to Orient Point, are exhibited most

striking evidences of glacial action. We find the stratified gra-

vels, sands and clays upheaved by the lateral pressure of the ice-

sheet and thrown into a series of marked folds at right angles

to the line of glacial advance, which, judging from the grooves

and striz on the rocks of New York and Connecticut, was about

S. 30° E. The glacier having thus crumpled and folded the un-

Greology of Long Lsland. 309

derlying strata, it evidently rode over them and continued its

course southward, pushing before it an immense mass of sand

und gravel, together with debris from the rocks of New York and

New England.

The theory that Long Island Sound was a body of water pre-

vious to the arrival of the ice-sheet, would seem to be sustained

by the character of the detritus deposited by the ice on Long

Island. From Brooklyn to Whitestone, where the sound is nar-

row, the till or drift proper is quite conspicuous ; east of this it

becomes less noticeable, and beyond Roslyn, as before stated, it

does not again occur in abundance until we reach the vicinity of

Greenport, where the Sound again grows narrow. This seems

to be due to the fact that the finer debris of the northern rocks

was carried along imbedded in the lower part of the glacier.

The channel of the East River, owing to its narrowness, was

filled up and passed over, the till being deposited to form the

range of hills near Brooklyn; but in crossing the broader part

of the Sound, the ice probably lost the greater portion of its load

of till, and only carried over the boulders which were on the sur-

face or in the upper part of the glacier. On reaching the north

shore of the island the alluvial gravel and sands were scooped up

and pushed forward in front of the ice-sheet, to form the ‘‘ mo-

raine,” and the boulders, when the ice melted, were deposited

on the surface. The map shows that the principal bays on the

north shore penetrate the land in a direction identical with that

of the advance of the glacier. We may reasonably infer from

this fact, that these indentations were ploughed out by project-

ing spurs of ice, and the inference is supported by the fact that

the bays are walled in by high ridges which have been formed

largely through the upheaval of the beds by lateral thrust. The

best example of this displacement in the formation of a bay is

shown in the section at Crossman’s clay-pit in Huntington, (Fig.

2) which I have previously described. Harbor Hill, which stands

at the head of Hempstead Harbor, is 384 feet high, and chiefly

consists of gravel and sand more or less stratified. -Jane’s

Hill, four miles 8.8.E. of the head of Cold Spring Harbor, is

383 feet high, and is composed of the same materials. In the

vicinity of each of these hills, moreover, there are other ridges

and elevations averaging about 300 feet in height. Southeasterly

360 Geology of Long Island.

from Huntington Bay we have the Dix Hills and Comac Hills

rising about 250 feet. Southeast of Smithtown Harbor, we have

Mt. Pleasant, 200 feet in height; in a like direction from Stony

Brook Harbor, are the Bald Hills, also 200 feet high. Again

we have Beuladae Hill, which is 340 feet in height, and has the

seme general bearing from Port Jefferson Harbor. About South

30° East from Wading River, where there is quite a deep valley, -

we find Terry’s Hill, 175 feet high. South of Great Peconic

Bay rise the Shinnecock Hills, 140 feet, and southeasterly from

Little Peconic Bay are the Pine Hills about 200 feet high. From

these instances it will be seen that the areas of high elevation

bear a very marked geographical relation to the deep indentations

of the coast. That this relation is due to glacial action, seems

more than probable, as it can scarcely be an accidental coinci-

dence that the highest hills on the island should be in a line with

the deepest bays on the northern coast, and that the course of

these bays should coincide with that of the glacier.

At every point along the north shore where a section of the

strata is exposed, the flexed structure of the beds under the drift

may be observed. On Gardiner’s Island, these folds are remark-

ably prominent, the surface of the island being broken with nu-

merous parallel ridges having a general trend N. 65° EH. These

ridges correspond to folds in the stratified beds, which the sur-

face drift overlies unconformably, and as they are at right angles

to the line of glacial advance it is difficult to conceive any agency

which could have produced them except the lateral thrust of the

ice-sheet, Unless these phenomena can be referred satisfactorily

to some other cause, and of this I very much doubt the possi-

bility, we have in these folds a strong argument against the ice-

berg theory, as it seems evident that a mere drifting berg could

not develop sufficient progressive force to do the work here

shown. <A similar origin may be attributed to the ranges of

hills which form the so-called ‘‘back-bone” of the island ; as

their structure indicates that they have been formed partly of

gravel.and sand transported from the north shore, and partly

through the upheaval of the stratified beds by the friction of the

moving mass ofice. As the downward pressure of the glacier was -

about 450 lbs. per square inch for 1,000 feet of thickness, and its

progressive force was only limited by the resistance of the ice, -it

Geology of Long Lsland. 361

is quite reasonable to assume it capable of producing such a re-

sult. At one locality, West Deer Park, this 1s manifestly the

ease, and I have no doubt that in time it will be found generally

true. ‘The numerous springs that issue from the hillsides along

the north shore also lead one to infer that the substratum of clay

has been raised up in the centre of the hills. The occurrence of

the springs might be accounted for hypothetically by supposing

that these hills are the remnants of unequally eroded horizontal

strata of sand underlaid by clay ; but this we know is not the

case.

Mr. Upham, in his discussion of the moraines, attributes all

the stratified deposits to diluvial and alluvial action in the Cham-

plain period, to which the Gardiner’s Island deposit has been

erroneously referred. He also concludes that the more southern

drift hills, which are from 200 to 250 feet high, were formed

in ice-walled river-channels formed upon the surface of the gla-

cial sheet when rapidly melting. That this process has taken

place in some cases, is quite probable, as there are undisputed

kames in certain places, but from the analogy of the deposits in

question to the others described, I am inclined to refer them

generally to the same causes.

The changes which have occurred on Long Island since the

retreat of the glacier, have been mainly topographical, and un-

questionably very extensive. The streams of the Champlain

epoch carried down the drift from the morainal hills and distri-

buted it on the plain to the south, forming in many places local

beds of clay. In the vicinity of Bethpage and elsewhere, are

hillocks of stratified sand similar in appearance to the New Eng-

land kames. The valleys mentioned above, which have been ex-

amined by Elias Lewis, Jr., are unquestionably the channels of

streams resulting from the melting of the glacier.

The coast line of the island is rapidly changing, on account of

the action of the swift westerly currents which are wearing away

the east end and depositing the sediment along the north and

and south shores. By this means the bays which open into the

Sound are rapidly becoming shallow. The Great South Beach

is also an evidence of the action of the waves and currents in

changing the outline of Long Island. We have moreover abund-

ant evidence that the south shore has been gradually sinking.

362 Geology of Long Island.

This subsidence probably began in the later Quaternary and may

be still continuing. |

Economic GEOLOGY.

Magnetite : this is the only metallic ore found on Long Island,

and occurs almost everywhere on the beaches in the form of sand.

It is not, however, sufficiently abundant in any one locality to

render its collection profitable. A company was started some

time since for the purpose of separating the ore, in the vicinity

of Quogue, from its associated quartz and garnet sand by means

of powerful electro-magnets, but the enterprise proved unsuc-

cessful.

Iron Pyrites in its white variety, or marcasite, is common in

the lower clay-beds, but does not occur in sufficient abundance

to pay for utilizing it.

Lignite occurs only in small quantities and usually at great

depths.

Peat of an inferior kind, composed of. the matted roots of

grasses and other plants, occurs at the heads of most of the bays

on the south shore, but is not used to any extent.

Although not productive of any of the valuable minerals, Long

Island may be considered peculiarly rich, from the fact that

almost the whole of the island can be utilized in the arts:and

trades. Its sands and gravels are of every kind in use, and ifs

clays are suited for the manufacture of fine grades of brick

and pottery. The former materials are largely shipped from

Port Washington and the vicinity, for building purposes.

The most extensive deposit of fine pottery clay occurs at Glen

Cove, on the premises of the Messrs. Carpenter. This clay is

very plastic and burns a light cream-color. The friable quartz

pebbles described above, produce when ground the finest quality

of white sand for glass and pottery. ‘The deposit of kaolin is

also unsurpassed. In addition to these materials, this locality

furnishes fire-sand for pottery, grey and blue pottery clays, and

an excellent fire-clay.

The next locality of note is Huntington. In this town is an

immense deposit of the finest brick-clay, upheaved to such an

elevation that it is easily accessible. ‘The beds are worked at

Geology of Long Island. pet.

Crossman’s and Jones’s brick-yards, and extend throughout

Lloyds’ Neck. Between Huntington and Cold Spring a large

deposit of white pottery-clay has been worked for many years.

The brick-clay extends east over ten miles, and is worked at

Eckerson’s yard on East Neck, and Proyost’s at Fresh Ponds.

At Eckerson’s and at Sammis’s pits on Little Neck, are immense

deposits of fire-sand which extend over Katon’s and Lloyd’s Necks.

A little west of Greenport are two brick-yards at which a bed

of glacial clay is being worked. Between these two yards is a bed

of mottled blue clay usea for making flower pots. The most ex-

tensive deposit of all, however, is that on Gardiner’s Island. This

clay is unsurpassed for the manufacture of bricks, and from the

abuudant supply of moulding-sand and the easy accessibility of

the locality by water, must in time prove an important source

of revenue.

DESCRIPTION OF PLATE XXVII.

Fie. 1. ScaLe 1 1IncH—60 FEET.

Section at Carpenter’s clay-pits, Glen Cove, looking east.

a. Glacial drift.

b. Yellow sand.

c. Friable quartz gravel and sand.

' @. Fire-clay.

Fie. 2. ScaALe 1 1IncH=60 FEET.

Section at Crossman’s brick-yard, Huntington, looking north.

. Glacial drift.

. Quartz gravel, stratified.

Sandy clay or ‘‘loam,”—upper half yellow, lower half blue.

. Diatomaceous earth mixed with clay.

. Yellow sand, stratified.

Red laminated clay.

. Brown laminated clay.

QSQmesoases

Fie. 8. ScALE 1 INCH=30 FEET.

Section at Fulmer’s brick-yard, Greenport, looking north.

a. a. Reddish glacial clay, with fragments of mica schist.

b. Red clay.

c. Micaceous sand, laminated.

364 Greology of Long Island.

Fies. 4&5. ScaLe 1 iIncH=60 FEET.

Section on southeast shore of Gardiner’s Island, looking west.

a. Glacial drift.

6. Laminated white sand.

Cc. a white sand streaked with limonite.

d. “ yellow and blue clayey sand.

é. f white and yellow sand.

F: ca grey and yellow sand.

g. a yellow sand with blue clay.

h. cS grey sand with red clay.

4. < red clay and grey sand.

). Bs grey sand with red clay.

k. os sand, top streaked with limonite.

¢. Dark greenish clay.

(ees 1% ‘* somewhat granular.

m. ‘‘ grey clay and sand, laminated.

m’ Beach sand streaked with limonite. |

n. Laminated sand, stratification obscured by a slide and possibly in-

terrupted by a fault.

o. Laminated greenish sand.

eis , white and yellow sand.

Y. te green and yellow clayey sand.

s “ reddish clayey sand with fossil shells.

€. Dark greenish clay.

uw. Fine laminated sand.

PLATE XXVIII.

Map of Long Island, showing the southern limit of glacier action. (Pre-

pared on the basis of the U. 8S. Coast Survey Map.)

Decomposition of Iron Pyrites. 365

XXI.—On the Variation of Decomposition in the Iron Pyrites ;

tts cause, and its relation to density.

BY ALEXIS A. JULIEN.

Read April 26, 1886.

The popular name, iron pyrites, comprises three distinct, min-

eral species, pyrrhotite, marcasite, and pyrite, all consisting of

combinations of iron and sulphur, and differing in method of

crystallization, density, hardness, color, and other properties.

It is well known that these three minerals differ in their modes

and degrees of decomposition, when exposed to the weather in

outcrops of rock, masonry, and heaps of mined coal. But there

are equally decided differences in the methods of weathering in

varieties of one of these minerals, pyrite, which have not yet

been generally recognized, and whose cause yet remains un-

explained.

Two general processes of decomposition of these minerals

occur at the ordinary temperatures of the atmosphere.

a. Envelopment by a crust, and finally complete alteration

into compact iron oxide, generally in some hydrated form, ac-

companied by a trace of sulphuric acid and sometimes by free

sulphur. eee

This process is generally slow, and probably conditioned upon

a limited supply of moist air, and sometimes upon precipitation

by basic solutions, e. g., of earthy or alkaline carbonates.

Pyrite is commonly attacked in this Way, and sometimes

marcasite and pyrrhotite.

2. Conversion into copperas and other iron-sulphates, often

with the development of free sulphuric acid, generally accom-

panied by the production of more or less hydrated iron-oxide ;

this process is always attended by a splitting up of the mass,

and its minute disintegration effected by the crystallization of

the copperas, with a similar rending action to that which is

exerted by frost.

366 Decomposition of Lron Pyrites.

This process is rapid and implies apparently, in most cases,

an abundant supply of moist air and rapid ves = but pro-

tection from the flow of meteoric waters. | |

Marcasite is distinguished by its ready subjection to this mode

of weathering, which however often attacks nodular and con-

cretiouary pyrites of mixed constitution and some varieties of

pyrrhotite.

For the clear understanding of the causes of these various

phenomena of decomposition, it will be desirable to consider :

first, the relationship of composition to density and other phy-

sical properties in the artificial and natural sulphides of iron,

the origin and association of the latter, and their common

modes of decomposition ; and, secondly, the variation of decom-

position in pyrite, its probable cause, and the modes of discrimi-

nation between stable and unstable varieties of the mineral.”

Pane.

THE SULPHIDES OF IRON.

There are three iron sulphides theoretically recognized in

chemistry, but of even these the existence of one cannot yet be

regarded as established. They may be artificially prepared, in

conditions of uncertain purity, by Various methods.

Iron protosulphide, or ferrous sulphide, Fe 8. When pre-

pared by the process of Gahn, stirring a white-hot rod of iron

in molten sulphur, it forms ‘‘a yellowish crystalline mass, hay-

ing a metallic lustre, and sometimes crystallizing in hexagonal

prisms,”’ with specific gravity of 4.69. But when prepared by

throwing a mixture of three parts of iron filings and two parts

of sulphur into a red-hot Hessian crucible, *‘it is thus obtained

as a black porous mass, which at a higher temperature fuses,

solidifying to a greyish yellow, crystalline metallic mass of spe-

cific gravity 4.79.””

Rammelsberg,’ by heating octahedral pyrite from Elba in

hydrogen, prepared it of a specific gravity 4.694; and Rose,” by

1 Roscoe and Schorlemmer, Treat. on Chem. (1880), II, 118.

2 Frankland and Japp, Inorg. Chem. (1884), 766.

3 Pogg. Ann. (1864), CX XI, 387.

4 Idem (1849), LX XIV, 301.

Decomposition of Iron Pyrites. 367

heating ferric oxide with excess of sulphur, and removing the

excess of the latter by heating in dry hydrogen, obtained it as a

porous and blebby net-work of little flakes and plates, with a

specific gravity of 4.726, in coarse powder at 978 C.

These forms are readily soluble in dilute acids, with evolution

of hydrogen sulphide; but if prepared by ignition of ferric

oxide in an atmosphere of hydrogen sulphide, it is found to be

insoluble in cold dilute hydrochloric acid.*

A hydrated form, Fe $8, H,0, can be prepared, which is solu-

ble in dilute acids, even to some degree in carbonic and organic

acids.

Iron disulphide, Fe S*. Wohler heated slowly an intimate

mixture of ferric oxide, sniphur and sal ammoniac, above the

temperature at which the last substance volatilizes, and obtained

the disulphide in small brass yellow octahedra and cubes. Ram-

melsberg.* by reduction of ferric oxide in hydrogen, and heating

with sulphur below ignition, obtained the disulphide. In

neither case is the density reported. It is not attacked by di-

lute acids or by cold concentrated sulphuric acid, but readily

decomposed and dissolved, with separation of sulphur, by nitric

acid, aqua regia, and boiling concentrated sulphuric acid.’

A third intermediate compound, iron sesquisulphide, or

diferric trisulphide, Fe* S*, has been formed artificially. It

has been prepared by Rammelsberg, by gently heating iron and

sulphur together, as a powdery mass of specific gravity 4.41 ;

also, by the action of hydrogen sulphide on ferric oxide at

a temperature below 100° C. If obtained at a red heat, it

forms a yellow, non-magnetic, metallic mass, which has a spe-

cific gravity 4.4, and is decomposed by dilute sulphuric and

hydrochloric acids into hydrogen sulphide, ferrous sulphate, and

iron disulphide.*

Gray, bronze-colored and bronze-yellow powders have been

also prepared by Rammelsberg and Proust, which are magnetic,

possess the composition Fe’ S*, and in one case a specific gravity

5 Ebelmen, Ann. Ch. et Phys. (3), XXV, 97.

1 Berzelius, Lehrb., IJ, 728—725.

8 Berzelius, Joc. cit.

368 Decomposition of Iron Pyrites.

4.494, Two other compounds have been prepared by Arfvedson,

to which he assigned the formulas, Fe* S and Fe’ 8.

Of these iron sulphides, there are probably but two of whose

occurrence in nature we have any certain knowledge, viz., the

Proto- and Disulphide.

Iron protosulphide, Fe 8, Pah ee in 100 parts : iron, 63.64,

and sulphur, 36.36. |

This substance has not been recognized as an individual —

mineral on our globe, except in the form of the foreign mineral

trovlite, which occurs in many fallen aerolites.

The nature of this interesting mineral has been shown by

many analyses, of which it will suffice to present one by J. Law-

rence Smith, on troilite derived from the aerolite which fell in

Sevier County, Tenn. : iron, 63.80, and sulphur, 36.28. |

The specific gravity of the mineral varies in different stones

from 4.681 to 4.817.

As this mineral has separated from fusion, and owes its origin

to extra-terrestrial agencies and conditions of which we are en-

tirely ignorant, it cannot be safely used for discussion in relation

to the density of the iron sulphides of our own planet.

In the black mud of ditches, pools and salt-marshes, of flats

at low tide, and that between the stones of city pavements, in

peat, and in trunks of trees lying submerged along the sea-

beaches, the presence of an amorphous iron protosulphide has

been verified, in black particles, without metallic lustre, readily

decomposable by hydrochloric acid,* or even by exposure to the

air, with an efflorescence of copperas.

The sulphide occurs, also, in combination with nickel sul-

phide, in the form of a single bronze-colored mineral, pentlandite,

an ore of nickel, first found at Lillehammer, Norway, and whose

composition, according to Rammelsberg,”® is as follows: iron,

40.60; sulphur, 36.64; nickel, 21.07; and copper, 1.78. Spe-

cific gravity, 4.6.

Separating the intermixed chalcopyrite (5.14 per cent.) repre-

sented in this analysis, the mineral is found to consist of iron

sulphide (Fe S), 64.73, and nickel sulphide (Ni $), 34.45.

—_—

® A. Daubrée, Etudes Syn. de Géol. Expér., (1879), 87.

10 Poge, Ann. (1864), CXXI, 337.

Decomposition of Iron Pyrites. 369

Tron disulphide, Fe 8,, containing in 100 parts: iron, 46.67,

and sulphur, 53.33. :

This combination is dimorphous, 7. ¢., assumes two forms of

crystallization in nature, and thus constitutes two minerals,

marcasite and pyrite, of very common occurrence. ‘There is

also another natural form of iron sulphide, the mineral pyrrho-

tite or magnetic pyrites, whose composition and formula inter-

vene between those of the proto- and disulphides. The dis-

tinctive characteristics of these three kinds of pyrites may be

tabulated as follows:

Pyrrhotite. . Marcasite.

Composition, - Fe S® to Fe!®S!", Fe S’.

and commonly

nickeliferous.

Hardness, - 3.50—4.5. 6.—6.5.

With steel, - Striking fire imper-

fectly, with strong

sulphurous odor.

Specific gravity, 4.44.68. 4, 68—4. 85.

Color, - Bronze-yellow to Grayish white to

steel tomback- bronze-yellow.

brown.

Streak, - - Grayish black. Greenish gray to

brownish black.

Fracture, - : Uneven. Uneven.

Grains, - - Compact and Columnar struc-

magnetic. ture.

Crystals, - - Rare: hexagonal, Common: ortho-

rhombic, often in

striated twins,

generally tabu-

lar, and mag-

netic. toothlike or crest:

ed forms, etc.

Tgnition in Unchanged. Yielding sublimate

closed tube, of sulphur and

magnetic residue.

In nitric acid, Insoluble. Soluble with sepa-

ration of sulphur.

In hydrochloric ‘Soluble with sepa- Insoluble.

acid, - - ration of sulphur

and hydrogen sul-

phide.

Alteration, - Iridescent tarnish. Iridescent, often

efflorescent.

Pyrite.

Res.

6.—%.

Striking fire readi-

ly, with weak sul-

phurous odor.

4.74—5.19.

Golden to pale

brass-yellow.

Brownish black.

Conchoidal to un-

even.

Often fibrous and

radial.

Abundant ; iso-

metric, cubes, py-

ritohedra, octahe-

dra, etc.

(Like marcasite.)

Insoluble.

Iridescent, eftlo-

rescent, or hepatic.

370 Decomposition of Iron Pyrites. —

It is not easy to make a comparison of actual analyses of pure

crystals of these minerals with the densities obtained, as most

of the analyses have been made upon massive forms for com-

mercial purposes. From the scattered literature of the subject —

the following tables have been compiled. The full details of

chemical. composition and density are the more required for

our purpose in that they are but meagerly presented in all the

treatises on mineralogy—the eaves of pyrite being generally

entirely omitted. :

PYRRHOTITE.

Synonyms—Magnetkies (Hausmann), pyrite magnétique, mag-

netic pyrites, pyrrhotine (Haidinger), rhomboedrischer eisenkies

(Mohs).

The results of all the chemical examinations of this mineral

by various analysts, have been very fully presented by H. Haber-

meh], in his excellent paper,’ and need not be repeated here.

These analyses yield formulas which vary widely, thus :—

Fe’ 8’, Fe’ 8’, etc., up to Fe’* 8”, the mineral apparently con-

sisting of some form of combination of molecules of Fe S with

a vayring number of Fe 8’; or, according to another view, of

Fe S with Fe? S*.. To determine whether this form of combi-

nation be a true chemical compound, an isomorphous mixture of

sulphides, or a mere mechanical mixture of Fe S with Fe 98’,

EF’ 8’, or 8, has been the object of much investigation. The

analyses by Habermeh! of fifteen samples, successively sepa-

rated by the magnet from the pulverized mineral of Bodenmais,

show, by their accordant results, that the last theory, that of

mechanical mixture, may be put aside as impossible.

The fact that, on solution of most varieties of pyrrhotite in

hydrochloric acid, only sulphur is left behind, although Fe S* is

in every other form insoluble, has been considered an objection

to the supposition of the presence of iron disulphide. Its minute

molecular subdivision may perhaps account for its solubility in

this instance, but the question still remains unsettled.

In the following table are presented all the published deter-—

11 Ber, d. oberhess. Ges. f. Natur. u. Heilk. (1879), XVIII, 88, and

Jahrb. f. Min. (1880), II, 303.

Decomposition of Iron Pyrites. B71

minations of specific gravity on this mineral, which I have been

able to find. ‘hose varieties were nickeliferous (from 3 to 11

per cent.), whose localities are given in italics.

No Locality. PuSpe, Gr: Analyst.

1 |Horbach, Baden, : : - ; 4.700 |C. Rammelsberg.

2. |Klefoa, Sweden, — - - - - | 4.674 |J. Berzelius.

3. |Freiberg, Saxony, - - - | 4.642 |Lindstrém.

4. |Elizabethtown, Ontario, Can., — - 4.642 |J. Lawrence Smith.

d. /Trumbull, Conn., - - - 4.640 |C. Rammelsberg.

6. |Locality unknown, - - - 4.631 |Mohs.

%. |Ut6, Sweden, - : . 4.627 |Lindstrom.

8. |Conghonas do campo, Brazil, . 4.627 |O. F. Plattner.

9. |Locality unknown, - - - 4.623 |C. Rammelsberg.

10. |Bodenmais, Bavaria, - - - 4.622 |H. Rose.

11. |Bodenmais. Bavaria, - - - 4.622 |Schaffgotsch.

12. |Elizabethtown, Ontario, Can., - 4.622 |Harrington.

13. |Locality unknown, — - - - 4.609 |C. Rammelsberg.

14. |Boden, Saxony, - - : : 4.605 |Breithaupt.

15. |Craigmuir, Scotland, - - - 4.602 |D. Forbes.

16. Kongsberg, Norway, - . - | 4,584 |Lindstrém.

ve Auerbach, Germany, - . - 4,583 |Petersen.

18. |Harzburg, Germany, - - - 4.580 |C. Ranmelsberg.

19. | Hilsen, Norway, - - - - | 4,577 . 4

20. |Xalastoc, Mexico, - - - - 4,564 se «

21. |Bodenmais, Bavaria, - . - 4.546 |Schaffgotsch.

22. |Gap Mine, Pa., - : - - 4.543 |C. Rammelsberg.

23. |Bodenmais, Bavaria, - - - 4.540 |V. Leuchtenberg.

24. |Cornwall, England, - : - 4.518 |Hatchett.

25. |Moél Aelion, Wales, - - - 4.518 |Hatchett.

26. |Treseburg, Harz Mts., - - - | 4,518 |C. Rammelsberg.

27. |\Dobschau, Hungary, - - - | 4.510 |Breithaupt.

28. |Inverary, ‘Scotland, : . 4500 |D. Forbes.

29. |Artificial, by ignition of pyrite, - 4.494 C. Rammelsberg.

30. Piedmont, - - . - 4.270 |Tournaire.

dl. |Gap Mine, Pa., - - - - | 4.190 |Boye.

32. Rajputanah, India, - - - 2.580 'J. Middleton.

Notwithstanding the repeated investigations which have been

devoted to this mineral by the great company of eminent chem-

ists, some of whose names are stated in this table, the question

of the true signification of the varying composition of this spe-

cies, it is acknowledged, remains still unsettled. As every fact

bearing on this subject may have some value, I will present be-

low some results of the comparison of the chemical composition

and density of the varieties of pyrrhotite. For this purpose,

we will accept the analyses as corrected by Habermehl, though

carrying them out to 100 per cent., when necessary. All the

ae eas

B72 Decomposition of Iron Pyrites.

analyses of nickeliferous varieties are omitted from considera-

tion, as well as those of material whose density has been evi-

dently decreased by the presence of light impurities, such as

limonite (No. 26) and quartz (No. 30), and also the abnormal |

figures of the analyses of Hatchett, Middleton, ete. (Nos. 24,

25, 31 and 32). Some of the determinations of specific gravity,

‘presented in the preceding table, were unaccompanied by analy-

ses (Nos. 6, 14 and 27). The sixteen remaining varieties have

been arranged in the order of decreasing density, and divided,

as nearly as possible, into three groups as they stand.

| COMPOSITION. |

No. of Variety. Sp. Gat) He: [+ eae | ForRMULA.

3 4.642 | 60.75 39.25 |

4 4642 | 60.41 | 39.59

5) 4.640 | 60.76 39.24 |

< 4°627. 61.44 38.56 |

8 | 4.627 | 59:98 40.07 |

9 | £623 = -\ “60'S6 39.74 |

(Average of group.) | (4.638) | (60.59) | (89.41) Fe? S*

10 | 4.622 60.97 | 39.03 | P

11 | 4.622 | 61.18 °| “S882

12 4.622 | 60.81 | 39.19

16 4.584 | 60.75 |. 89.25

17 4.583 | 59.82 40.18 |

(Average of group.) (4.607) | (60.71) | (89.29) . Fe® 8?

18 4.580 | 60.83 Fa! Mi BF eur os)

20 4.564 61.30 | 38.70 |

21 4.546 61.15 38.85 |

23 |. 4.540 61.16 | 3884 |

29 4,494 | 60.76 | 39.24 |

(Average of group.) | (4.545) (61.04) | (88.96) Fe? S!°

In his discussion of the constitution of pyrrhotite, Ram-

melsberg states the opinion: ‘“‘ the density (volumgewicht)

leads to no conclusion, since the lightest show the same compo-

sition as the heaviest, to wit, about Fe’ S*.” Now, in fact, most

of the analyses of pyrrhotite (as well as of the other iron pyrites)

were partial and therefore imperfect, consisting only of a deter-

mination of the amount of iron, that of sulphur having been

estimated from the difference, by deduction from 100. But if

we can trust the accuracy of the figures in this table, the signifi-

cant fact appears to be brought out that an increase in the

amount of iron and a corresponding decrease in that of sulphur

are accompanied by a decrease of density. This at least sug-

gests a confirmation of the view that we may have in this min-

Decomposition of Lron Pyrites. 373

eral an association, in some form of replacement or combina-

tion, of iron protosulphide, Fe §, having a specific gravity of

about 4.4 or 4.5, as before estimated,—with iron disulphide,

Fe 8’, of specific gravity equal to 5.0, the density of the varie-

ties of pyrrhotite increasing with the proportion of iron disul-

phide. Nor is it necessary to conceive, it appears to me, that

the disulphide in combination must possess the physical proper-

ties of one of its crystallized forms, pyrite or marcasite. It may

be decomposable by acids, and this may account for the fact

that not pyrite but sulphur is left on digestion of pyrrhotite in

hydrochloric acid.

We may here refer to the ingenious suggestion of L. Bom-

bicci,” that pyrrhotite may be simply made up of the regular

association of two octahedral or isometric elements, 7. ¢., of true

pyrite, Fe 8° and of magnetite, Fe* 0*, in the proportion of 4:

i; 2. 6, 4 he S* -- Fe* 0* — Fe’ S*-0%. Though the absence of

oxygen in pyrrhotite is inconsistent with this hypothesis, it has

served to suggest that there may yet be found in this mineral

some analogous association of molecules of isometric pyrite,

Fe 8’, and of iron protosulphide, Fe 8, which, like pyrrhotite,

was found by Gahn ‘‘sometimes crystallizing in hexagonal

prisms.” The analyses of varieties of pyrrhotite, beginning

with the formula Fe® S°, have at last reached Fe Seana 1G,

seems likely that some variety may soon be found in which the

relationship of iron and sulphur will be as 1 to 1. The normal

composition of this mineral may then indeed be, as was held by

Frankenheim, that of iron protosulpbide; and it isa plausible

hypothesis that, from natural conditions of paragenesis, more

or less pyrite, Fe 8’, in octahedra, may be generally intermixed

through the native mineral in conformity to crystallographic

symmetry, and also enclosed in its artificial form, left as a resi-

due on the ignition of pyrite.

Weathering of Pyrrhotite.

The extent of the distribution of this mineral and its abun-

dance are comparatively so limited that its mode of decomposi-

tion appears to have been little studied.

* Nuovi studj sulla Poligenesi dei minerali, Mem. Acc. Sci. Ist. Bologna

(1883), 27, 28.

374 Decomposition of Iron Pyrites. s

According to Senft,** it decomposes slowly, but, according to

Roth,” more easily than pyrite, into copperas and reddish brown

iron-oxide. Copperas was observed on pyrrhotite, near Boden-

mais ; sulphate of iron and nickel on nickeliferous pyrrhotite,

at Horbach; limonite, pseudomorphous after pyrrhotite, near .

Ehrenfriedersdorf; and gothite after- pyrrhotite, at Walden-

stein, Carinthia. ‘These indicate the hepatic mode of alteration.

G. W. Hawes” stated, that, in New Hampshire :—

‘‘The magnetic pyrites do not decompose so readily as ordi-

nary pyrites. I have seen some gneiss from our State in build-

ings, and though the stone was sprinkled with particles of mag-

netic pyrites, it had not become stained by long exposure to the

weather.”

Prof. C. H. Hitchcock” corroborated this view :—

‘*One thing should be said of this impurity in the Hanover

rock. There is a building on Corey Hill, containing pieces of

the pyrrhotite as large as beechnuts; and, though the house has

been standing nearly seventy years, there are scarcely any iron

stains upon it. This species of pyrites sustains itself so well

that oftentimes.its presence need not be feared. A more re-

markable instance of the ability of this pyrites to resist decom-

position may be seen in the Francestown soapstone. I have

examined many of the stoves manufactured from this stone,

and ncticed that bright particles of this pyrites were thickly

sprinkled through it. I have also looked at pieces of this stea-

tite that had been subjected to great heat without much change.

It would appear, therefore, that this mineral may. not be in-

jurious to granites, as it seems to withstand successfully the

vicissitudes of both heat and cold.”

On the other hand, D. Forbes” stated, in regard to the pyrr-

hotite ore of Inverary, Scotland :— oe

<< After some time, on exposure to the air, the mineral crum-

bles to pieces, some specimens breaking up after a few months,

whilst others have resisted as many years.”

13 Lehrb. d. Min. u. Fels. (1869), 176.

14 Allg. u. chem. Geol. (1879), I, 108.

15 Geol. of New Hampshire (1878), Pt. IV, 31.

16 The Geol. of New Hampshire (1878), Pt. V, 80.

17 Phil. Mag. (1868), 4th Series, XX XY, 179.

Decomposition of Lron Pyrites. 375

Grains of brass-yellow pyrite were enclosed in this ore, and

‘*when the pyrrhotine fell to powder by the action of the at-

mosphere, these particles were quite unaffected, and were seen

to be so many irregular spheres of cupriferous iron pyrites which

externally retained still a sort of skin or crust of pyrrhotine,

but, on breaking, at once showed that the mass possessed the

bright brass-yellow color characteristic of pyrites.”

A specimen of crystallized pyrrhotite in my own possession,

from Elizabethtown, P. Ont., Canada, exhibits a brilliant iri-

descent tarnish, but no farther indication of decomposition.

It appears difficult to avoid the belief that we have, in these

conflicting observations concerning the stability of pyrrhotite,

results merely corresponding to the varying chemical constitu-

tion of the mineral; and that the indications of stability have

probably accompanied the increased proportion of sulphur, or

rather of the higher combination, iron disulphide—those of in-

stability, the predominance of iron protosulphide and nickel

sulphide. It appears certain that both stable and unstable

varieties exist.

PYRITE.

Synonyms.—Schwefelkies, eisenkies, pyrite jaune, pyrite mar-

tiale, iron pyrites, cubic pyrites, mundic (term used in mines

of Cornwall), sulphur (term used in coal mines, clay pits, etc.),

iron (term used in marble quarries), coal brasses (term used in

the manufactories of sulphuric acid).

Pyrite usually presents itself in opaque and brittle crystals of

yellowish color, brass-yellow when pure, of splendent lustre, and

possessing cubical, octahedral and other isometric forms; also

in scales, seams, and granular nodules, often with radiated

structure, and commonly stained by reddish-brown films, or

even coated or penetrated by ochreous crusts of the same color.

The best analyses of crystals or pure material, and determina-

tions of density, have been gathered into the following table,

in which those percentage figures for sulphur, evidently ob-

tained merely by deduction from 100, are enclosed in brackets.

Although the composition closely approximates that of iron di-

sulphide, it is probable that traces of.impurities are constantly

present, e. g., gold, copper, silver, nickel, cobalt, zinc, lead, tin,

thallium, selenium, and arsenic ; these must exert more or less

effect upon the density.

»f Lron Pyrite Ae

10n O

ecompost

376

“IVpNUvI

‘snodoJLINV

‘ayjoyardd ul pasozo

“Ud SUIBIX) “HT .09 38°") 'S| S67

v8 P

‘sured ACIS JSAM

op Surmoys ee V | e382 P

‘s[eqysAIQ

‘youdurog

« SOSSVI [BOD,,

‘soqno paysijod qoourg] [e9'P

‘saqnod payvi4yg

“‘BIPOTVIOpOp [VUOSRIUI | I&8'P

‘IVINALVI 40 AGNIY "dey “lg

‘09'L “sOIS

‘sOS ‘S6T ‘sO20d

"L0°8 “NO

‘t¥'0

F6'T “OD ‘661 ‘IN ‘STL ‘NO

‘GLP ‘onsues * ppp ‘NO

'83°0 ‘SSO * 06'S ‘“zOIS

°60'8 ent)

‘eh'9

‘ABO § EZ'O ‘NO 60'S ‘UZ

‘e"g “aya ‘ssol ‘ 9°g ‘2OIS

‘sO1S

04°0 UIT £ 08°0

‘SHILINOdW]

(@0'8P)

06 0S

66°69

6& 6P

88 67

6¢ TS

(0 Tg)

86 8P

(OP '8P)

(9¢"g¢)

(68'g¢)

(96 PS)

(6689)

ge'ec

(04°88)

(0¢' 3g)

(CT sg),

10 GF

68 GP

ov OF

SL oP

08 IP

0g SP

C6 0P

09 OF

OS TV

0S 97

6&9 OV

vl cy

80 9F

40 SP

O08 LY

OS LY

C8°LP

pg LIYIOOA "VW

rz o0un'y “9

‘OSUUTT “MA

og SOQIOW “CO

‘BINSSOOST Bl Op “T

gg ODD] W |[OMOAT

‘IOnvTT ‘A 'O

sr CMOS “V

gg wBydely

‘Toqvurpog

ae ‘SnI[oZtog]

zg, UOSdWOTLL, ‘Cd “YT

bed

gr oo eH

‘ISMIVNY

‘BIUTGITA ‘*OO BSINO'T

- SSB me Con ae

Sue) ‘Our STAR

- *RTULOFT[VD

‘pury}oog

‘AITYSOTAGSIV “OLsVo

AIVIOAUT DAOQV OUIT

- ‘uredg ‘oyuyo0ny

- WHS

- TUNTSpoq ‘INULe \T

‘AICS

“‘snvyuox[oo'T,

‘€UBOSN J,

‘U9SN TAL

Ivo ‘MISOSSYOLIULI TT

‘UdSoIg vou ‘ULI

_ Sanugoysddymd

eo epage: sie 6

un}

»”

‘pur[sug ‘T[VMULOD

‘ALITVOO'T

GALIWAd FO SHSATIVNV

AO HIDOoe

377

yf Iron Pyrites. -

vol O

Decomposit

"68S ‘ILA “G “199 ‘(QL8T) ‘SAU 9 ‘YD ‘P “UUY eg

"866 ‘ITTOO ‘PS881) MPT ee

‘

(FIST) “UUW “IHD ez

“199 Th “(898T) “PIL “Ud oz

‘QOUDISOPLIL MOT[OA

uoplos WIM ‘Avo yuRIpWg

asta pur MOTTO A

"IVINALV] JO ANDY

608

O18 PF

L087

C66 P

‘OLS ‘ATX’ (L981) “‘pucrt “4dut09 92

"OSS ‘TA ‘(QL-LL8T) “SU UL] JSUT “WY ‘sued, 42

‘8h ‘XITXOO ‘(P88T) “mor yATog [ould yz

‘Lh ‘TITX “P98T) ‘Gayee “WuUeyyNY ‘Nn “SING 67

TOE ae x

Bile BARK NEN

"C28 ‘AIOX ‘(FOST) ‘SURI, Md st

‘68'S ‘ND

‘OPO ‘SSOT

0G" ‘otngqstout + YG"'g “ZO IS

‘OL'0 ‘SSOT + O20 “BuTUINyE

0@'0 “OrNystout : OC"g ‘zO 1S

'03'0 ‘SSOT

‘O10 “vurumy[e ‘00% “.O IS

F0'0 ‘SV

‘TG'Q ‘aINjJsloul : Fe'(—) ‘*[osuT

‘POO ‘OINYSTOUL * OG'O ‘‘[OSUT

"P00 ‘oInjstoul + 1e'9 ‘"[osuy

‘OTT “yosuy

‘SHILIMAAW[

Lg"es

(046g)

(OP 6g)

(08°68)

8¢°8G

BP 'oe

60 °6¢

(18'S)

Liv

08°F

O1'Sh

0¢'eF |

L0°9F

eh OF

ov 9V

69 SP

Wood ‘Of

a” 9

ecUOW HL PIRATE) WV

‘IoOnvyT “A ‘O

“LSATVNY

2 “Bq ‘“[[BMUIOD) Cs

‘yuodioss] 4B ‘INIT V LFS

; a

- parvy) ‘LOT[NOG TZ

+] 9? 06

- “ouoTYy “Toq-uleg 6T

‘umMouyun Az[BIO'T| TR

- ‘9soIly ‘SuUayUOD ez

et —

‘KLITVOO'T Is

‘panuyuog-—ALIGAd AO SASATVNV

378

Decomposition of Iron Pyrites.

Density of Pyrite.

Locality. Analyst Sp. Gr

Freiberg, - Breithaupt.** 5. 001

- - - 5.007

es Mohs. 0.031

Rio Marina, Elba. Ic. Rammelsberg. ?* 5.027

“ Kenngott and V. v. 4.976

Zepharovich.?§

ce te<

Elba or Pied mont.

4.984

5.012

5.002

8.017

5.018

5.019

5.020

5.023

5.024

5.026

5.028

Piedmont, Elba, etc. e 29

Traversella, Pied- 5.078

mont,

Breithaupt.?+

Piedmont ?

cé | 6eé

Kenngott and V. v.

Zepharovich. 7 §

5.097

5.027

5.185

4.967

“e¢

Traversella, Pied- C. Rammelsberg. 27

mont. |

6eé cc

Kenngott and Y. v.| 5.016

Zepharovich. og

Brosso, Piedmont. 31

| s

5.000.

Tey

striated.

Kind of Material.

Pentagonal dodecahedra.

Smooth and shining crystals,

with minute black particles

of included hematite.

A similar crystal.

A crystal with pure exterior,

but not free from included

foreign particles.

Selected crystals, simple

and modified cubes.

Woe ee ee

Crystal.

Octahedra.

A crystal having little lustre,

with little cavities over its

surface occupied by brown

iron-ochre.

5.011 |A crystal with smooth and

brilliant surfaces, . slightly

27 Zeits. d. geol. Ges. (1864), XVI, 268.

28 Kenngott’s Min. Notiz. (1855), No. 11.

29 Sitzb. K. Ak. Wiss. in Wien (1853), XI, 392,

: 0. 9).

31 Kenngott’s Min. Notiz. (1855), Bey food I

32 Zeitschr. d. geol Ges. (1864), XVI, 267.

38 Kenngott’s Min. Notiz. (1855), No. 11.

34 Erd. Jour. f. pr. Chem. (1835), LY, 207.

(Kenngott’s Min. Notiz.,

Decomposition of Iron Pyrites. 379

Density of Pyrite.

(CONTINUED. )

Locality. Analyst. Sp. Gr. Kind of Material.

Brosso, Piedmont. Kenngott and Y. v.| 4.807 |A similar crystal.

Zepharovich.

* Ss e 5.015 oh re

¥ si ae 5.000 |A crystal with surfaces some-

what attacked and corroded.

( ri Lies Crystals with brown exte-

ie 5 053 rior, by partial alteration

Compostella. - rx Se 2 789 ' to limonite, with more or

| 4.891 | less yellow iron-ochre and

[ 3 930 J unaltered pyrite within.

{ | 4.925 | }

| 4.920 |

4.930 | | Crystals having little lus-

Toscana. * 31 { 4,922 |} tre, but with impurities

4.916 | indistinguishable.

| 4.878

L 4.853 | J

Compostella. C. Rammelsberg.*?? 4.750 |Crystal weighed unbroken,

but with a cavity within

‘ which contained yellowish

ochre.

| {, 4.815

5.013

| 0.015

| 4.854

| | 4,802

| 4.850

| 4.831

‘ 4.745 |

Namur, Belgium. |Kenngott and V. 4 4.798 | Crystals with smooth fa-

v.Zepharovich, 33 } | 4.792 ces, Shining or with little

| | 4.791 lustre.

| | | 4.809

| 4.769

| 4.844

| 4.833

4.833

14.908 J

31 Kenngott’s Min. Notiz. (1855), No. 11.

82 Zeitschr. d. geol. Ges. (1864), XVI, 267.

33 Kenngott’s Min. Notiz. (1855), No. 11.

380 Decomposition of Iron Pyrites. —

Density of Pyrite.

(CONTINUED. )

Locality. | Analyst. Sp. Gr. Kind of Material.

Tavistock, Devon-

shire. v. Zepharovich,??

(| 4.872 |Crystals with strongly stria-

acd , || 4.870 | ted faces, quite pure in ap-

ee 4.870 | pearance, but showing, un-

4.949 | der a lens, the inclusion of

| | 4.833 | little gray grains.

5.178) «

4.902|} «

4.830 |Crystal with upper surface

colored brown.

{

(| 5.181 Crystal.

|} 5 haa

Locality unknown. oe 4

Steiermark. ese 4.989

Johanngeorgen- Breithaupt. 3+ | 4.960 |Cube.

stadt.

Kamsdorf near ~ - 5.000] <“*

Saalfeld.

Kongsberg, Norway ee OIC. ck

Gouverneur, N. Y. 4.863 |Pale bronze-colored, radia-

ted, botryoidal, nickelife-

rous.

Annaberg. Breithaupt. 34 | 5.022

Schneeberg. Bi 5.029

The results above given, concerning pyrite, afford us little

means of exact comparison between chemical composition and

density. Most analyses of the mineral have been made upon

eranular or massive impure varieties, for commercial purposes.

In some cases selected crystals have been taken, but in none

have we the means of judging by complete analyses, color,

hardness, or other physical properties, how far the figures for

density have been increased by the presence of gold, copper,

etc., in the pyrite, or decreased by lighter impurities (quartz,

etc.), by partial decomposition, by intermixture with other

pyrites, or by the cavities enclosed in some beautiful crystal,

33 Kenngott’s Min. Notiz. (1855), No. 11.

34 Erd. Jour. f. pr. Chem. (1835), IV, 257.

Decomposition of Iron Pyrites. 381

which the analyst could not find it in his heart to crush up for

proper examination, and therefore weighed it as a whole.

In order to throw more light on this question, I present at

the close of this paper a large number of determinations of spe-

cific gravity, on the mineral crushed to a coarse powder, in dis-

tilled water at 15° C. (60° F).

The results thus far obtained have demonstrated a coincident

change of color and of density in varieties of pyrite possessing

differing powers of resistance to oxidation. As to the significa-

tion of such change in density, it will be generally accepted that

in every mineral possessing strong power of crystallization, the

figure for specific gravity will remain invariable in all pure sam-

ples, probably to the third place of decimals. A determination

made on coarsely powdered mineral, with the usual precautions,

and at standard temperature, can only vary on account of en-

closed cavities, the partial decomposition or alteration of the

mineral, its original enclosure of foreign matter, isomorphous

replacements of some one or more of its normal constituents by

lighter or heavier substitutes, or on account of an internal re-

arrangement of its molecules into a dimorphous form of different

density. |

The influence of the enclosure of cavities is shown by the

wide variation of the figures obtained by weighing entire crys-

tals, e. g., many of those of pyrite examined by Kenngott and

V. v. Zepharovich, and the one by Rammelsberg, on pyrite of

Compostella.

The influence of decomposition on the specific gravity has

been abundantly illustrated already, as in the figures for the

partially decomposed pyrite of Compostella, ete.

The influence of the enclosure of gangue, etc., is manifested

in the lessened figures in analysis No. 14, and in the following

analyses of both pyrite and marcasite, by C. Méne,* each set

arranged in the order of increasing amount of impurities.

35 Compt. Rend. (1867), LXIV, 870.

(AGS

(oa)

Decomposition of Iron Pyrites.:

Earthy

PYRITE. HESS Ss 4D WS.dG «

; rittes. ;

L’ Allier, : : 44.2 52.7 °3.1. 4.803 At Isserpent.

Elba, - +, °. 48.5. 52.2: 43 ~4.801 In the speemlanmores

Conflens, - - ABA 52.4 45 A810 Aes

L’Aude, - - - 48.5 49.1 7.2 4.748 Carcassonne.

Lavoulte,_ - - 42.9 48.7 8.2 4.771

Allevard, - - - 421 485 89 4.750 Isére.

Gard, - - 40.5 48.5 10°7 4.7382

Chessy and Sain- Bel, 39.3 46.5 14.0 4.621

MARCASITE.

Beauregard, etc., 44.0 50.7 5.0 4207 From ammonites.

Creusot, 32.0 49,1 8.0 4181 From coal-beds.

St. Etienne, 42.3 48.5 86 4.180 From coal-beds.

AIS ye- - - 42.0 48.2 9.6 4.182 From Oolite ore-beds.

Champagne, - - 40.9 46.4 12.2 4.176 Nodules.

Oise and Aisne, - 38.9 44.9 15.7 4.177 Bituminous pyrites.

It is thus well shown in each of these minerals, that, with

the increase in the percentage of earthy impurities, e. g., silica,

alumina, lime, organic matter and water (passing down the

fourth column), a corresponding decrease is generally shown in

the specific gravity figures (passing down the fifth column).

Kenngott and v. Zepharovich found in their examination of

pyrite-crystals, that, in those which were perfectly fresh and

bright, the specific gravity lay between 5.0 and 5.185, but that,

in the others, ‘through the intimate intermixture with quartz,

or. by incipient decomposition, it sank down to 4.8 and 4.7.”

The influence of the partial substitution of isomorphous sul-

phide combinations of copper, nickel, etc., is presented in many

analyses of pyrrhotite, and in Nos. 16 (balanced by the en-

closure of light gangue) and 17 of pyrite.

Weathering of Pyrite.

On the exposure of this mineral to weathering, both of the

main constituents, iron and sulphur, may combine with the

oxygen of the air at the ordinary temperatures, in the presence

of moisture, producing iron oxide, iron sulphates (copperas, etc.),

sulphur, and even free sulphuric acid. When this action occurs

a a pis

Decomposition of Lron Pyrites. 383

in nature, the mineral becomes coated by the rusty stains and

crusts of iron oxide already described. or even entirely trans-

formed into it, while the enclosing rock in its vicinity may be

stained or even corroded and disintegrated by the action of the

free acid. Where the enclosing or neighboring material con-

tains alumina, as in the common pyritiferous shales, whitish

crusts of aluminum sulphates and of true alums effloresce over

the weathered surfaces. This action is shown on very many

of the rock-cuttings all over New York Island, by white crusts

of astringent taste, on surfaces of the common pyritiferous

eneiss, which have been exposed to the weather but a few years.

The pyritiferous slates of the Mesozoic in Virginia,* the black

shales of the Coal formation in Pennsylvania, the Cretaceous clays

at South Amboy, N. J., and the shales of Strafford and Thet-

ford, Vt., contain pyrite of the same perishable nature ; and at

the latter localities, advantage has been taken of this property

to manufacture copperas and alum in large quantities, by the

exposure of the mineral in moistened heaps to the action of the

atmosphere.

It may also be remarked, in regard to the destination of sul-

phurie acid set free By pyritous decomposition, that, on its ex-

posure to the air, the introduction of organic matter, as dust or

in solution, must have resulted in its final deoxidation and

escape as hydrogen sulphide, sometimes perhaps with a partial

deposit in the form of free sulphur. :

Again, Senft refers to the other mode of decomposition in

pyrite —~

‘“‘In the air becoming variegated in color, and finally covered

with a compact smooth brown crust; which then protects it

against farther weathering.” |

In this process the mineral has lost its entire content of sul-

phur, which has been replaced by oxygen and by water, so that

the iron has reached the maximum of oxidation and senerally

of hydration, probably thus:

4FeS’+ 15 0’? + 11 H’O=> HY Fe’ 0.4 3H’S 04

Where crystals of pyrite have been altered in this way, a

mineral has been produced, retaining the form, exterior surface-

8° Q. J. Heinrich, Trans. Am. Inst. Min. Eng. (1877-78), VI, 274.

384 Decomposition of Iron Pyrites. —

markings, lustre, and volume of the original substance (some-

times with a core yet unaltered), and with a brownish-red or

liver-color, whence such pseudomorphs have been called hepatic.

In regard to these, H. Bauerman’ points out: ‘‘ Here the

proportion of the unaltered constituent, iron (46.7 per cent.),

in the molecule of pyrites, is to that in the molecule of limonite

(60 per cent.) as 1 to 1.3, while their specific gravities are in

the inverse ratio of 1.4 to 1, or 5.0 for iron pyrites and 3.6 for

limonite.”’

Where such crystals are enclosed in a rocky matrix, it has

been suggested that galvanic or electro-chemical currents have

been set in action by the introduction of moisture, through

which the crystals of pyrite have been attacked from the out-

side, free sulphuric acid released, aud a decomposition of the

surrounding rock produced, sometimes with disintegration, or,

in other cases, it may be, with consolidation, e. g., by the pro-

duction of gypsum.

A few instances of these pseudomorphs may be here presented

from the works of Blum,** Roth,” etc., and from my own col-

lection. |

Iimonite after pyrite:

Cubes, in Dutchess County, N. Y.; Yancey Cong Nos

Maryland, ete.

Octahedra, in New Jersey; in Llano and Bastrop counties,

‘Texas, ete.

Gothite after pyrite:

In Saxony; at Beresowsk, Siberia; in Maryland; at Monte-

video, ete.

Limonite and githite, one enveloping the other or the reverse,

after pyrite, or similar envelopments of limonite and compact

red hematite, after pyrite, at numerous localities :

Striated cubes, sometimes six inches in diameter, in Switzer-

37 Text-book of Syst. Min. (1881), 382.

38 Pseud. min. Reichs (1848), 187—197 ; Nachtrag (1847), 107, and (1863),

184, 185.

39 Alle. u. chem. Geol. (1879), I, 102—105.

Decomposition of Lron Pyrites. 385

land, Thuringia, Hungary, Piedmont, Scotland, Cornwall, Bra-

zil, Africa, etc. :

Octahedra, at Schmalkalden :

Pentagonal dodecahedra, in Bohemia, Rhenish Bavaria, and

Scotland.

Hematite and specular tron after pyrite :

At Ouval, Bohemia; at Hoy, in the Orkneys; at Kerrara,

Scotland, ete. :

Cubes, at Triblic and Posedlitz, ete. :

Octahedra, at Frassem, near Arlon:

-Pentagonal dodecahedra, at Lindenberg:

Pyritohedra, in Rio, Elba.

Magnetite, in little cubes after pyrite, near Kast Tarbet in Argyle-

shire, and near Portrush, Scotland,* ete.

However, the pseudomorphs in the crystalline iron oxides,

both specular iron and magnetite, after pyrite, may owe their

origin to more complicated processes of alteration, besides those

concerned in mere decomposition by weathering. |

Sulphur also is separated, in association with the hydrated

iron-oxide, in many cases of the decomposition of pyrite (as at

Bodenmais, Bavaria; at Frassem, near Arlon; at Burnt Hic-

kory, Georgia, etc.), and also, in association with copperas, in

that of marcasite (as at Schriesheim). Dr. J. 8. Newberry

states his observation of considerable quaritities of free sulphur

on the waste dumps of pyritiferous shales from the coal mines

of Ohio. G. Rose observed at Beresowsk, Siberia, that the

cubical cavities, left in the rock after the complete decomposi-

tion and removal of the pyrite crystals, still retained minute

glittering crystals of sulphur.“ As Senft remarks, ‘‘it has

been proposed to explain this kind of decomposition by means

of aqueous vapors” (“perhaps at elevated temperature,” Blum),

“which are decomposed by their reaction with the iron pyrites,

and, by means of their oxygen, have altered the iron into hy-

drated oxide, while simultaneously their hydrogen has united

40 Roth, op. cit., I, 235, 236.

41 Reise nach dem Ural, I, 196 and 214.

386 Decomposition of Iron Pyrites. —

itself with the sulphur of the iron pyrites to sulphuretted

hydrogen, from which the sulphur has finally separated itself.”

The reactions suggested are given in the following formule :

2 molecules of pyrite. Fe’ Ss.

plus 3 molecules of water HOR,

have yielded

1 molecule of iron oxide Fe’ O* (afterward

converted to hydrated oxide),

3 molecules of hydrogen sulphide H’*S*, and

1 molecule of sulphur wh

However, on this subject, it appears extremely unlikely that

such a dissociation of the constituents of water could occur at

ordinary temperatures, without the intermediation of a free acid,

any more than in the case of the decomposition of water by me-

tallic zinc or iron, or that of artificial iron sulphide. It has been

shown by Stromever that, on the solution of pyrrhotite in dilute

hydrochloric and sulphuric acids, there is an evolution of hydro-

gen sulphide and a separation of sulphur in fine powder. I

would therefore suggest that we have probably, in these cases

of the natural production of sulphur, the indications of a reac-

tion with carbonic acid or some purely organic acid, very likely

one of the humus group,” decomposing the iron sulphide—per-

haps converting the iron into an organic salt, afterwards passing

into peroxide and eliminating the sulphur as hydrogen sulphide

and free sulphur, soon mechanically carried away in most cases.

This hypothesis appears to be justified by the observations of

on digestion of pulverized pyrrhotite for twelve hours in a cold

concentrated solution of citric acid. He says :— 3

‘<Three specimens of pyrite heated with citric acid gave no

traces of the gas, and three of pyrrhotite liberated it both in the

cold and freely on boiling. On the other hand, all the speci-

mens named are decomposed by hydrochloric acid, except one

# Proc, Am. Ass. Ady. Sci: (1879); XX VIIL) sit

Decomposition of Lron Pyrites. B87

specimen of pyrite (from Germany). It is evident then that

citric acid may be used to distinguish pyrrhotite from pyrite.”

In a later experiment on the latter mineral alone, in which it

was subjected tou ‘prolonged contact with the same solution at

the ordinary temperature of the workroom, say 60° to 70° Fahr.,”

he found that even ‘‘ pyrite showed decided evidence of de-

composition in eight days; one month later, the solution ac-

quired a reddish-yellow color and reacted for iron and sulphuric

“veld d944

The powerful intervention of naturally acidified meteoric wa-

ters appears not to have been considered, in reference to the

mode of weathering of pyrites now under discussion, but seems to

be far more probably concerned in this alteration than the agent

suggested to Rose by the proximity of the dyke at Beresowsk—

aqueous vapor at elevated temperature. Percolating waters,

acidified with carbonic and organic acids, are universally distri-

buted and continuous in action, and the distribution of these

interesting limonite pseudomorphs is equally wide, and their

production apparently in constant progress. Another probable

mode of the formation of these pseudomorphs, by precipitation

in contact with solutions from a basic matrix, will be discussed

beyond, as well as the general subject of vitriolization, and the

important fact that a stable form of pyrite exists.

MARCASITE.

Synonyms: radiated pyrites, white iron pyrites, cockscomb

pyrites, pyrite blanche, pyrite rayonnée, strahlkies, speerkies,

kamkies, leberkies, wasserkies, zellkies, binarkies, kirosite.

The published analyses of this mineral, and determinations of

its density, are few, imperfect, and greatly scattered. It is be-

lieved that the best are presented below.

comms IN Yi. Acad. Sci. (1877), 1 18.

eevoce, Am, Ass. Adv, Set. (1882), XX XI, -Pt. 1, 271.

ite

tion of Lron Pyr

eCOMpost

388

“POS TIAX “OS F ‘(OGST) SOUTTY “p “UN 9.

. 896 ‘TAX “(P981) SOK) 1008 “p “ANOS 65

686 “ATX'T “(GP8T) PU “18G ‘ITTA'T (GF81) “Uy 550g 55

“poeduroy 186 F

‘IBINGOLS puv poywipey LLLP

‘[RLOUTU W6%

potopMod AToesavoo wo 4° pte

: GO

I88 7

‘ydnvyyorg

AQ “O'S “@L=H ‘“ONSOITY | 664 'F

‘sory.toodg

‘OPIxO

-UOAT Op}I[ ATOA VB SULUTRITOD

_‘soqtrdd

poyerped JO AJoLIVA LOT[VUIS VW] CL) 'F

‘soutkd poyerpeyy 869'F

“IVIUGLV]L LO ANIY Phy teks

LALO DSN CE IL 18K)

EO 0) : 668 <0 18

040 “CIN + 080 “O18

SALLI OLIN]

TAXX ‘(6I8T) “Moe ‘sslomyoR pur ‘egg ‘d ‘olForeaoury, 9+

"G68 “AIOX “ChOS1) “SURLL “Td «+

(OF'Gg)

(09 PS)

(188)

(@3'€9)

cQ'e¢

OG LP

C6 1G

LL es

(F&'F9)

‘09 €9)

| agg

| Sb CY

| 99 SP

OF OF

gp OLOQSTOULUIRY, “O

ep LONVYPIOyoOS “FT

» ddeizy,

a Slay evarera|

gp HOOT

LSAT V NY

‘eC ‘TTIXX (F981) ‘Siz ‘wuopny “n -S10g 1,

"118 “JAXX X (Zest) pur ‘49

> sh ss ‘yi

og LOTTO

-OAN(, PUB YROVR

‘umMOUyUN AVIPRIO'TT

‘OS80 []

¥ ‘OPOLOW] [YW SSO. |Q

‘O98ISQ) Ol[} JO

JSVOO OT} UO “UTT[O AA

‘OLO(VUUY

IVIU “OUIT SNDOOLIS] 9

‘uwopuny | |

ee -UdIEV Ivo ‘UDSSOI GC

—

‘Uopeg ‘[vywosUn F

‘umouyUN AY[ROOTT &

ws 9 G

‘T[BVMULOD if

‘KLITVOO'T

AULISVOUVIN AO SHSATVNV

Decomposition of Lron Pyrites.

LocALITy.

Gross-Allmerode,

Hesse.

Littmitz, Bohemia.

ee ee

Joachimsthal.

Schemnitz, Hun-

gary.

Freiberg.’

Derbyshire.

389

Density of Marcasite.

{

ANALYST.

We kohiler,.22-4

[

Breithaupt. °+

. Rammelsberg.

Mohs.

. Rammelsberg.

Gaiiose.??

Breithaupt. °#

mil

Sp. Gr.

4.826

4.837

4.545

4.859

4.907

4.879

4.919

4.847

4.878

4.857

4.865

4.848

4.601

| 4.879

4.878 |

KinpD oF MATERIAL.

Common radiated masses,

from the clay of the Brown

Coal.

Octahedra, all drusy.

Octahedra, with smooth

faces.

Cubo-octahedra.

Cubes.

Speerkies.

Speerkies, SG.) al iGreen es

Kanikies, Sy) Go at12° ok:

In considering, these analyses, it is safe to say that no exami-

nation of massive, radiated or granular forms (strahlkies, speer-

kies, ete.), nor of paramorphs after pyrite, can be relied upon,

as made upon pure material ; for in all such instances there is a

suspicion—often the visible evidence—of the intermixture of

more or less pyrite, causing the extreme variations in density.

51 Poge. Ann. (1828), XIV, 91.

5? Zeitschr. d. geol. Ges. (1864), XVI, 268.

53 Poge. Ann. (1849), LX XIV, 291. -

54 Erd.: Jour. f. pr. Ch. (1885), IV, 257.

390 | Decomposition of Iron Pyrites..

Only analyses and specific gravity determinations upon selected

rhombic crystals of pure marcasite can have any definite value,

and not a single investigation of that kind is on record ; most

of the analysts have not specified the exact kind of material

used, nor whether the density was determined on the coarse

powder. So that we have yet no evidence of the absolute

chemical composition of marcasite, except, of course, that it

closely approximates that of pyrite (Fe S*), nor of its exact

density. For the latter, the average of all the figures above

given is 4.847.

Weathering of Marcasite.

The phenomena of vitriolescence, 7. ¢., the development of

copperas, are best displayed in the ordinary decomposition of

this mineral. .

Senft states, in regard to its alteration: ‘‘In moist air usu-

ally weathering very rapidly, and covering itself with an earthy

or fibrous mould-like coating of copperas; but sometimes also

becoming brown like pyrite, and then resisting the farther

attack of moist air.”°°

According to Gmelin: ‘* Most yellow iron pyrites, and like-

wise the white variety when well crystallized, remains unaltered

in moist air.”*° :

T’. Egleston” refers to the ready oxidation of marcasite, and

also confirms the last author in reference to a more durable form :

‘<Tt decomposes very easily in the air, and forms sulphate of

iron. In order to preserve it in collections, it must generally

be coated with varnish. Sometimes, though rarely, the product

of decomposition is hepatic pyrites, as is the case with the balls

does not decompose.”

The alteration of marcasite into limonite, above referred to,

has been observed in specimens from Upper Silesia, Derbyshire,

°° Die Krystall. Felsg., 140.

°6 Hand-book of Chem., VY, 234.

7 Lectures on Min. (1871), Pt. IT, 123.

Decomposition of Lron Pyrites. 391

Scotland, ete.,* especially when nodules of the mineral are en-

veloped in clay.” as

Marcasite is also subject to decomposition into hydrated iron-

oxide, like pyrite, especially when protected from the atmos-

phere, as by envelopment in clay, etc.

Thus pseudomorphs in limonite after marcasite have been

found in Bohemia, Hungary, the Orkney Islands, Scotland, etc.”

Senft has suggested that such pseudomorphs of iron-ochre,

after pyrite and marcasite, may have been caused by a vitrioles-

cence affected by solutions of alkaline carbonates, resulting in

the alteration of the pyrites, atom by atom, into iron carbonate,

afterwards converted by higher oxidation and loss of carbonic

acid into iron-oxide.

One constituent of these limonite nodules, after marcasite or

mixed pyrites, possesses great interest, viz., native iron, which

has been detected in them, as small grains or scales, near. Chot-

zen, Bohemia; near Muhlhausen; near Porirush, Scotland, and

in California.®

PARAGENESIS OF THE [RON PYRITES.

During our consideration of the variations in density of the

three forms of iron pyrites, reference has been made to the in-

fluence of included cavities, the work of oxidation, etc. But

beyond the several agencies thus far alluded to, there is evidence

of some other of universal prevalence, to account for these con-

stant and wide variations. We need to go farther than the

opinion generally accepted, and which has been thus expressed

by vy. Zepharovich, in regard to his own examination of the

density of pyrite crystals, that ‘‘only when the intermixture of

foreign particles occurs, or the pyrite crystals have suffered al-

teration, are the specific gravity figures modified.”

The additional influence to which I refer is that exerted by

the several natural iron sulphides upon each other, not merely

by intermixtures and intercrystallizations, but either by iso-

58 Blum, Pseudomorphosen (1843), 197—199, and Nachtrag (1803), 185.

5? Blum, op. cit., Nachtrag (1847), 107—112.

60 Roth, op. cit., 105.

61 Idem, 236.

392 Decomposition of Lron Pyrites.

morphous replacements in some cases, or by internal develop-

ment through molecular re-arrangement. In order then to

obtain a full appreciation of these effects upon the. density, it

appears desirable to consider the genetic relationship of the three

species, their natural intermixtures and inter-crystallizations, and

their isomorphous replacements.

As to the geognostic distribution of the varieties of pyrites,

and an actual succession in their ordinary genetic a some

interesting facts may be recognized. ;

First, the development of iron sulphide within the mass of

sedimentary deposits, at ordinary temperatures—it may be, chiefly

as the very unstable protosulphide—has generally resulted in

the first place,” in the production of scattered amorphous parti-

cles of pyrrhotite (‘‘iron sulphide im mintmo” of Stromeyer),

with an excess of the metal and a varying but inferior amount of

sulphur, compared with the proportions in the disulphide. In

the magnetism of this product we may very probably find an in-

dication which has favored both its development and its later

concentration, by the electric currents which have always at-

tended the consolidation, initial crystallization, chemical reac-

tions, and metamorphism within sedimentary deposits. Another

result appears to have been the combination of a small part of

the sulphur at once in the form of Fe S*. the greater part as

He Ss 912."

Fe’ S—4FeS + Fe 8’,

Fe’ S’= 5 Fe S + Fe 8’,

ete., up to

Fe® S"— 15 Fe 8 + Fe 8’.

In reference to the agent and reaction concerned in the devel-

opment of natural sulphides, T. 8. Hunt” has suggested :

‘‘T have found that the unstable protosulphide which would

naturally be first formed, may, under the influence of a persalt

of iron, lose one half of its combined iron; and that from this

reaction a stable bisulphide results. This subject of the origin

of iron-pyrites is still under investigation.”

6 Knop, N. Jahrb. f. Min. (1873), 521.

’3 Chem. and Geol. Essays (1875), 230.

Decomposition of Iron Pyrites. 393

But the observations of Breithaupt and Bischoff" poimt de-

cidedly to quite another solvent, method of reaction, and signifi-

cant product. |

According to Breithaupt®™: ‘‘it is not improbable that many

iron-pyrites of the Freiberg lodes were once pyrrhotite. Pyrite

is also always the more recent product, even where it occurs in

association with pyrrhotite... Marcasite occurs also in hex-

agonal prisms, pseudomorphous after pyrrhotite, in part often

and regularly intermixed with pyrite. . . The pseudomorphs af-

ter pyrrhotite exhibit almost throughout acontraction of volume,”

indicated by abundant cavities which are occupied by crystals of

pyrite, quartz, and other minerals. In Wunsiedel, the pyrr-

hotite was observed to pass into pyrite with a diminution of bulk.

Roth” remarks that ‘‘in the alteration of pyrrhotite into pyrite,

a part of the iron is removed. Breithaupt observed that on the

larger pseudomorphs of the kind in Freiberg, carbonate of iron

occurred, partly with other carbonates containing iron-protoxide.

Calcite and quartz are other abundant associates.”’

Bischoff states :

‘‘The lodes near Freiberg not infrequently contain pseudo-

morphs of iron pyrites after magnetic pyrites, though the latter

mineral occurs but very rarely. Wherever the two minerals are

associated, the iron pyrites is always the more recent of the two ;

and probably much of the iron pyrites in lodes was originally

magnetic pyrites.

**In the conversion of magnetic pyrites into iron pyrites a por-

tion of the iron would be removed ; and, consistently with this,

it appears that in the neighborhood of Freiberg, where this

alteration has taken place very extensively, the magnetic pyrites

has furnished material for the production of iron-spar and other

minerals containing protoxide of iron. ‘Therefore the iron has

been extracted from magnetic pyrites by the action of carbonated

water. In this alteration the magnetic pyrites must lose 25.54

per cent. of iron ; and, since the density of iron pyrites is greater

than that of magnetic pyrites, the volume of the former would

4 Chem. and Phys. Geol. (1859), IIT, 455-456.

® Paragenesis, pp. 1380, 161-164 170.

Om. c2t., 1, 242.

394 Decomposition of Lron Pyrites. ;

amount to only 68 per cent. of the latter. The pseudomorphs

do almost always indicate a reduction of volume. . .. Since

inagnetic pyrites is most frequently amorphous, the iron pyrites

resulting from it would present its own crystalline form, so that

there would not be any indication of the change that might have

taken place.” . .

So too in regard to eruptive rocks, in all the fresh basalts ex-

amined by E. Boricky,” the pyritous particles consisted of pyrr-

hotite, while, in those basalts which had been weathered and

altered, pyrite crystals took its place.

It must be added, however, that with other conditions, even

at ordinary temperatures, the highest sulphide combination,

Fe 8’, pyrite, has sometimes been formed at once in the presence

of an excess of hydrogen-sulphide ; e. g., in the well-known ob-

servation of Forchhammer,* at a running spring on the seashore,

where the ferruginous water was borne into a mass of decompos-

ing sea-weed ; also, in one instance, in the mud at the bottom of

a pond.”

So too, in thermal waters, pyrite appears to have been, and to

be now, the original deposit; ¢. g., in the highly crystalline and

exceedingly pyritiferous lodes of Colorado, etc., and the deposit

from warm springs at Aix la Chapelle, Burgbrohl, etc., and, in

the form of brass-yellow crystalline globules, in the sand and the

Roman brickwork, at Bourbonne, France.”

Secondly, in the course of metamorphism of the rock, and

usually in proportion to its degree, the scattered particles of

pyrrhotite, usually Fe’ S° or 6 Fe S + Fe 8S’, have suffered a

further alteration—it may be by the common solvent, carbonic

acid—by which the entire amount of sulphur was combined as

Fe 8’, and the excess—over one quarter—of the amount of iron

was transported elsewhere. The new combination, Fe 8’, was

most commonly effected under certain conditions—probably

great pressure and high temperature—which resulted in the

67 Petrog. Stud. Bas.-gest. Béhmens (1878), 36, 258-259.

68 Rep. Brit. Ass. Adv. Sci.

69 Gmelin-Kraut, Handb. d. Chem., 6tb ed., III, 3338.

77 A. Daubrée, Etudes syn. de Géol. expér. (1879), 89.

Decomposition of Iron Pyrites. 395

form of pyrite. An example of this has already been given in

the reference to Freiberg.

However, under other conditions of alteration—I suspect, low

pressure and ordinary temperature of surface waters, and it may

be, as Méne suggests, under conditions of chemical double de-

composition—the iron disulphide, derived from the original

pyrrbotite, has at once assumed the form of marcasite. The

common occurrence of this mineral in calcareous beds, ¢. g., the

chalk of England, the Trenton limestone of New York, the car-

boniferous limestones of Wisconsin and Illinois, etc., suggests

the possibility that the presence of calcium carbonate, under

certain conditions, may determine the crystallization of iron di-

sulphide as marcasite, rather than pyrite, in a way similar to

that of the crystallization of calcium carbonate as aragonite,

rather than calcite, in the presence of strontium carbonate, gyp-

sum, or salts of lead, as shown by Credner.

A reference is here called for to the view advanced by Breit-

haupt,” who endeavored to account for the origin of the differ-

ent physical properties of the two dimorphous minerals, pyrite

and mareasite, by connecting them with those of the dimorphous

forms of sulphur itself, first ascertained by Mitscherlich. But

later investigation has even reversed the analogy attributed by

Breithanpt to some of the physical properties of the sulphur

forms, e. g., that of specific gravity; and little remains except

that the form Sa, 7. e., of native sulphur, and marcasite both

happen to be ortho-rhombic and homceomorphous.

Thirdly, by some process not yet understood, pyrite is often

transformed afterwards into its dimorphous associate, marcasite.

A discrimination of this kind has been recently made by Prof.

A. Liversidge,” between iron pyrites of primary and secondary

metamorphic origin, in his description of the occurrence of con-

cretions of pyrites at a mine, near Rydal, in New South Wales.

Here, he states, the pyrite was originally crystallized in cubes

through a slaty shale, afterward dissolved and redeposited ‘‘ in

the form of nodules of marcasite, 7. e., the rhombic and less

11 Erd. Jour. f. pr. Chem. (1835), IV, 257.

® Jour. and Proc. of Royal Soc. of New So. Wales (1884), XVIII, 47.

396 Decomposition of Lron Pyrites. —

durable form of iron pyrites.” He also states that the ‘ pyrites

of the nodules oxidizes with great rapidity ; specimens kept for

only a few months rapidly fall to powder, and. become incrusted

with crystals of iron-sulphate.” ;

DISTRIBUTION OF THE IRON PYRITES.

We may sum up the general distribution of the three minerals

as follows :

Pyrrhotite is comparatively of uncommon occurrence and

limited abundance, and generally more or less mixed with the

other pyrites. It is found in eruptive rocks, e. g., most basalts;

also in many granites, diorites, and serpentines; but mainly in

clay slates, mica slates, and rocks of incipient metamorphism,

e. g., in beds of limestone which have plainly escaped the altera-

tion into marble prevailing in adjacent districts.

Marcasite constitutes largely or altogether the pyrites occupy-

ing thin seams and coatings in the Coal-beds, lignitic shales, the

dolomytes of Saxony and Cornwall, the Chalk, many limestones

of America, and, in general, the unaltered sedimentary rocks,

such as sandstones, graywacke schists, peat, clay, bituminous

coals, casts of fossils, and also veins of galenite.

Pyrite has a far wider distribution, from its stability, but

nevertheless tends to predominate in the crystalline rocks, largely

constituted of magnesia- and iron-micas, hornblende, chlorite,

and serpentine, such as dioryte, chlorite- and hornblende-schists,

etc. It is prominent as well in weathered eruptive rocks and

most granites, marbles, argillytes, the scattered particles in an-

thracite, and nearly all metalliferous veins, e. g., the sulphuret

lodes of Colorado.

In clay-beds, the pyritous nodules generally consist of succes-

sive crusts or transition mixtures of this and the preceding min-

eral, as in the clays of Schoharie, N. Y., and Amboy, N. J.

The distribution of the three pyrites along the Appalachian

chain presents points of interest, in view of the great series of

extensive pyritous deposits which are scattered along, from Ala-

bama through the Carolinas, Virginia, Pennsylvania, New York,

and New England, into Newfoundland.

The association of the pyrites at the principal localities is about

as follows :

a "

Decomposition of Lron*Pyrites.

Loca.iry.

Ducktown, Tenn.

Sevier and Cocke Co.,

Tenn.

Greensboro, N.C.. and

the Piedmont region

of IW. C.

Ore Knob. N. C.

Richmond, Va.

Louisa Co., Va.

- Baltimore, Md-

Chester Co,, Pa.

Radnor. Pa.

Lancaster, Pa.

Gap Mine Lancaster

Co.5° Pa.

Cornwall,

Go: Ps:

Lebanon

Pottstown, n’r French

Creek, Pa.

Mahanoy City, Pa.

Seranton, Pa.

Hurdstown, Morris

Go. N: J:

Franklin, N. J.

Perth Amboy. N. J.

Jersey City and Wee-

hawken, N. J.

New York Island.

Westchester Co.,N.Y.

Cortlandt, N. Y.

Edenville, Orange

won N.Y.

KIND OF PYRITEs.

Pyrrhotite, with a Jittle

| chalcopyrite.

Pyrite, passing into alum

and alunogen.

Pyrite, brilliant and au-

riferous, with chalcopy-

rite

Pyrrhotite, with a little

pyrite and chalcopyrite.

‘Pyrite and marcasite.

)

Pyrite, partly decomposed,

| and chalcopyrite.

Paes and chalcopyrite.

Pyrite.

Pyrite in brilliant cubes.

Pyrite in cubes.

Pyrrhotite and nickelife-

rous pyrite.

Pyrite, cobaltiferous,

lustrous cubo-octahedra,

and chalcopyrite.

Pyrite, in brilliant octa-

hedra.

Pyrite, in dull octahedra.

Pyrite.

Pyrrhotite.

Arsenopyrite.

Pyrite in radiated nodules.

Pyrite in brilliant, smooth

octahedra, with a little

chalcopyrite.

Pyrite in bright octahedra

and granular flakes, ef-

florescing into alum ;

also chalcopyrite and

marcasite.

Pyrite, pyrrhotite, and

chalcopyrite.

Pyrite and pyrrhotite.

tite,

‘

in|

397

Rock-MATRIX.

Veins in mica slate.

Argillyte of the ‘‘alum

caves,”

Veins in granitoid gneisses

and in diorytes.

Vein in hornblende-schist.

Coal and associated shales.

Limestone, slate, etc.

Slaty limestone.

Magnetite and calcite vein.

Bituminous coal and asso-

ciated shales.

Anthracite and associated

slates.

Granular limestone.

Cretaceous clays.

Calcite veins in dykes of

Mesozoic diabase.

'Gneiss and mica-schist.

Granular limestone.

Granite, dioryte, etc.

Arsenopyrite and pyrrho-/Granular limestone.

398 Decomposition of Iron Pyrites..

LocaLiry. KIND OF PyRITEs. Rock- MATRIX.

Monroe, Orange shpat pyrite Granular limestone.

Warwick, Orange Co.,|Pyrite and marcasite. Granite.

N.Y,

Anthony’s Nose, N.Y./Pyrrhotite, with pyrite. | Vein in Laurentian granite

and hornblendyte.

Kent, Putnam Co., |Arsenopyrite.

NY:

Phillipstown, N. Y. |Marcasite. Magnesian limestone.

Jefferson Co., N. Y. |Marcasite, in drusy flakes. |Trenton limestone.

Orange and Milford.|Pyrite in cubes. Chlorite slate.

Ct.

Trumbull and Mon- |Marcasite, arsenopyrite.

roe, Ct. pyrite in octahedra, and

pyrrhotite.

Stafford, Ct. Pyrite, efflorescing into Mica slate.

alum and copperas.

Roxbury, Ct. Pyrite and arsenopyrite.

Canaan, Ct. Pyrite, decomposing into Merble, hydro-mica slate,

iron-ochre. _ and mica schist.

Sheffield, Mass. Pyrite, efflorescing into; White marble.

alum, and chalcopyrite.|

Great Barrington, Pyrite, in brilliant cubes Blue-gray dolomyte.

Mass. and grains, sometimes)

assuming a coppery tar-|

nish.

. ae § Pyrite. cimtestaney

Siockbridse, Mass. ( Pyrite and pyrrhotite. |Hydro-mica slate.

Lee, Mass. Pyrite in minute modified White magnesian marble.

cubes, quickly decom-

posing to iron-ochre. |

Cummington, Mass.,)|Marcasite, massive and fi-| Mica-slate.

and, in general, brous.

Western New Eng-

land. .

Charlemont, Mass. Ppoute and pyrite. ‘Vein in gneiss.

Rowe, Mass. _ Pyrite. /

Fairhaven, Vt. Pyrite, Roofing. slate.

Sutherland Falls, Vt. Pyrite, in small fine- (|Argillaceous bands in

__ grained bunches. white marble.

Thetford, Vt. ee

Vernon, Vt. lPyrite. ‘Roofing-slate.

Vershire, Vt. Pyrite, chalcopyrite, and|

| arsenopyrite.

Decomposition of Lron Pyrites. 399

_Locauiry. KIND OF PYRITES. Rockx-MatTRIX.

Shoreham, Vt. | Pyrite. ‘Limestone and black mar-

ble.

Stafford, Corinth and|Pyrrhotite, chalcopyrite,

Shrewsbury, Vt. and pyrite.

Brookfield. Waterbury|Arsenopyrite, pyrite, and,

and Stockbridge, Vt.|_ chalcopyrite.

Nova Scotia. Pyrite, arsenopyrite, and/Quartz veins in slate.

chalcopyrite.

Albert, N. B. Pyrite nodules, inclined to Carboniferous sandstone.

ready decay.

Notre Dame Bay, (Pyrite and chalcopyrite. (Slate.

Newfoundland.

Elizabethtown, Ont.,|Pyrite, with a little pyrr-|Laurentian quartzyte and

Can. hotite. gneiss.

Lennoxville, Q., Can.|Pyrite.

Lachute, Q., Can. Pyrrhotite. Laurentian crystalline

i limestone.

A consideration of the facts above presented renders it very

probable that in most of these instances the original condition

of the iron sulphide, along the Appalachian belt, has been that

of pyrrhotite, which now, as a rule, survives only in the belts of

less crystalline schists, especially mica-slates, and in the larger

beds and veins; that its conversion into marcasite and pyrite,

(and other pyritous minerals, in the presence of Cu, Ni, As, etc.)

has generally attended the progress of the metamorphism of the

enclosing rocks; that, as in Europe, the surplus of iron, separa-

ted in the transformation of Fe’ S* into Fe 8’, has been removed

by carbonated waters and re-deposited in the form of iron-car-

bonate within the interstices and larger cavities of limestone, ex-

cavated by the same solvent, through interchange for calcium

carbonate, and over the natural subterranean drainage-planes

afforded by beds of gneiss and mica-slate ; that some of these

ferruginous deposits may have been later converted into hematite

and magnetite, by local metamorphism, and that subsequent ox-

idation of all these deposits, partial or complete, still going on,

has been at least an important source of the limonite ores along

the Appalachians.

Doubtless the origin of the limonite-deposits has been due to

several causes, and we can hardly question, for example, their

400 Decomposition of Lron Pyrites.

direct derivation in many cases, by oxidation, from ancient beds

of pyrites, as claimed by Hunt and Prime”, and even of such

beds im situ, as held by Shepard and Percival, e.¢.; when the

two materials lie in contact, as in Carroll County, Virginia,” ete.

More recently, another theory has been advanced by J. D.

Dana” to account for these iron-ores, which may be Brien pre-

sented in the following quotations :

‘* But the nearly total absence from the ore of sulphur (seldom

over one-tenth of a per-cent.) appears to be evidence that pyrite

played a very subordinate part in the production of limonite.

It is a question of interest, whether the iron was in the state

of carbonate when the deposits were originally made by sedi-

mentary action, or, whether in some different state, from which

it was converted into carbonate as one of the results of meta-

morphism.”

He apparently inclines to believe that it has been caused by

drainage deposits of iron carried into the marshes as carbonate,

a “‘result no doubt favored by the excess of carbonic acid in the

Lower Silurian atmosphere and waters,” this action haying taken

place during some epoch of long-continued marshes during

which the schists were laid down.

In a more recent ‘‘ note on the making of limonite ore beds,

Prof. Dana states the view he is disposed to favor as to the

origin of the irregular ferriferous areas in the limestone forma-

tion, as follows:

9976

‘‘The stratigraphical change, in the region, from limestone

to slate, indicates that a change took place in the era of their

formation from limestone-making seas te mud-distributing

seas. During the transition from one to the other, iron was

washed down from not distant land, in the state of bicarbon-

ate or a salt of an organic acid, over limited areas of the

calcareous deposits. ‘These areas, so invaded by the iron solu-

tion, during the transition-epoch, were within interior seas or

basins, or marshes, half shut off from the ocean. ‘The calcare-

73 Trans. Am. Inst. Min. Eng. (1874-75), III, 410.

74 Idem (1876-77), V, 82. -

7% Am. Jour. Sci. (1877), 3, XIV, 139.

16 Idem (1884), 8, XXVIII, 398.

Decomposition of Lron Pyrites. 401

ous material, wherever receiving the iron-bearing waters, became

changed more or less completely to ferriferous limestone or

ferriferous dolomite, or received pure iron-carbonate,” ete.

This theory appears to me incomplete, in that it does not ac-

count for two important facts: first the destination of the vast

quantity of iron which was separated and transported somewhere,

during the metamorphism of the schists and the alteration of

the greater part of their contained pyrrhotite into the higher

sulphides. ‘The whole mass of the Appalachians is so saturated

with pyrites, that the slight divergence of the line of heavier

deposits of limonite from that of the concentrated bodies of

pyrites in Western New England—to which Prof. Dana calls

attention—seems to have little bearing on the main question.

For such a comparison, in my view, the kind of pyrites should

be distinguished ; and it is worthy of attention that the more

wbundant limonite-deposits are not in the vicinity of pyrrhotite

lodes (e. g., Straiford, Gap Mine, Ore Knob, and Ducktown),

but of masses of rock saturated by pyrite—as well as other iron

minerals, of course—and of the pyrite lodes, e. g., the limonite

beds at Brandon, Salisbury, Amenia, Kittany Valley, etc., or

even underlaid by pyrites, e. g., in Lonisa County, Va.”

Secondly, the improbability of the preservation down to this

day of any large bodies whatever of so unstable an ore as siderite,

intercalated in strata so long’exposed to sub-aerial atmospheric

action, seems inconsistent with the ancient origin involved in

Prof. Dana’s theory of its contemporaneous deposition. In my

view, the ferruginous marsh-deposits of that distant period may

be represented by the present pyritous ‘‘lodes,” pyritiferous

schists and limestones, and crystalline iron-oxides ; the concen-

tration of the siderites and the saturation cf beds by iron-

carbonate attended the long subsequent metamorphism of those

sediments ; and the limonites, pipe-ores, etc., have owéd their

development to oxidation, still in progress, throughout the up-

lifted terrane of crystalline rocks, during the comparatively re-

cent though very long subsequent period.

Intermixtures of the Iron Pyrites.

These intermixtures are now known to be very common, and

77 Trans. Am. Inst. Min. Eng. (1876-7), 529.

402 Decomposition of Lron Pyrites. |

indeed always more or Jess represented in any locality in which

these minerals abound. Some of the first distinct observations

of this fact were thus recorded by Stromeyer, in the study of

certain pyrrhotite ores : | |

“The magnetic pyrites of Fichtelberg and Breitenbrunn were

so intimately intermixed with pyrite that it was: ee ide to

separate it from them.” ”

He also observed a similar intimate intergrowth at other local-

ities, in the following per-centage proportions:

Pyrrhotite. Pyrite.

Treseburg, Hartz Mts., - - 96.08 3.92

Baréges, Upper Pyrenees, - - 75.58 24.42

Since the proportion of the pyrite in these magnetic pyrites

was found very constant, and the fragments employed for analy-

sis had been previously purified from all visibly intermixed pyrite

with the utmost care, with the assistance of a magnifying glass,

Stromeyer ccnsidered it very probable that this’ pyrite was not

mechanically intermixed with the magnetic pyrites. but occurred

chemically dissolved in it, and that the considerable quantity of

the same in the magnetic pyrite of the Pyrenees accounted for

its feeble magnetism.

This view, however, was at once controverted by Berzelius,”

who found that on slicing and polishing the same magnetic py-

rites, the intermixed pyrite was seen crossing it. with different

color and hardness, and was therefore not dissolved in it.

A similarly intermixed growth of these two minerals, or the

enclosure of crystals ws one within the other, has been observed

by G. Rose.*

Kenngott” later called attention to alike intergrowth in a

specimen of pyrite, associated with marcasite, from Tavistock,

Devonshire. In this it was evident that these dimorphous spe-

cies had crystallized simultaneously ; both were well intermixed,

and even intergrown in-the same crystal, plates of one often in-

tersected the crystals of the other, and minute or drusy crystals

73 Gilb. Ann. (1814), XLVIII, 186 and 163.

79 Gilb. Ann. (1814), XLVIII, 209.

80 Reise nach dem Ural, II, 117; Pogg. Ann. (1849), LX XIV, 293.

81 Sitzungsb. k. Akad. Wiss. in Wien (1853), X, 293 (Min. Notiz., No..2).

Decomposition of Lron Pyrites. 403

of one were implanted or encrusted upon the other. Wdohler

came to the same conclusion of the simultaneous formation of

the two minerals.

Zippe has discovered pseudomorphs of mixed pyrite and mar-

casite, after red and black silver ore, at Joachimsthal, in Bohe-

mia, in which ‘‘ sometimes the same pseudomorphs consist partly

of iron pyrites and partly of radiated pyrites ;” the same associ-

ution was observed by A. Stelzner in pseudomorphs after silver-

glance, near Brand, in Saxony.™

Displacement pseudomorphs also occur among these three

forms of iron pyrites :

Marcasite after pyrite, in cubes which are paramorphs, in plas-

tic clays of Liebnitz, Bohemia,“ and near Freiberg.”

Marcasite after pyrrhotite, in hexagonal prisms, near Freiberg,

Stranitza, Dognatzka, etc.,** and at Loben near St. Leonhard in

Carinthia.”

Pyrite after marcasite, as a paramorph, at Rodna,* Transyl-

yania, in the form of the well known double twin crystal of the

latter mineral, but made up of an aggregate of minute cubes and

pentagonal dodecahedra of the former.

Pyrite after pyrrhotite,, near Freiberg,“ Himmelsfirst, Wun-

siedel, etc.

It is significant that in no case has pyrrhotite ever been found

as a pseudomorph after either of the other two pyrites.

Our view of the part constantly played by the iron pyrites, in

isomorphous replacement, yet needs a brief reference to their ar-

rangement in the complex constitution of many other metallic

sulphides, as shown by Rammelsberg and Dana. In the table

below, some of the more simple and prominent are gathered to-

gether ; but the intermediate proportions, either of mere mechan-

® Blum, op. cit. (1848), 300-304.

83 Berg. u. Hiitt. Zeit., XXVIII, No. 10, 83.

“t Blum, op. cit., Nachtrag (1847), 149-151.

Prkoth,.op. ctt., 1, 110.

8¢ Idem, 242.

8i J. Rumpf, Verh. d. K. K. geol. Reichs. (1870), No. 1, 2-8.

88 Sillem, Jahrb. f. Min. (1851), 399.

89 Paragenesis, Breithaupt, 150.

404 Decomposition of Iron Pyrites.

ical intermixture or of chemical combination, are exceedingly

varied. In regard to the usual composition of chalcopyrite, for

example, Dana states that ‘‘some analyses give other propor-

tions, but probably from mixture with pyrite. These are in-

definite mixtures of the two, and with the increase of the latter

the color becomes paler. . . In Cornwall, . . its richness may

in general be judged of by the color ; if of a fine yellow hue, and

readily yielding to the hammer, it may be considered a good ore ;

but if hard and pale yellow, it is poor from admixture with py-

rite.” Taking then as materials the simple arsenide and the

protosulphide of iron, and the four minerals, pyrite (Fe S’.

S.G.=5.), marcasite (Ke S*. S.G.—4.85), chalcecite (Cu’ S.

S.G.—5.7), and léllingite (Fe As’. 8.G.—8.6), the constitution

of the minerals mentioned in the first column is found to present

the replacements stated in the last.

x Cornwall. 4(Cu®, Fe)S + Fe 8? 4 bornite + 1 pyrite.

MINERAL. Sp. Gr. FoRMULA. = ECO ee

Leucopyrite. 1 | 7.1 |Fe As + Fe As? 1 iron arsenide + 1

l6llingite.

Arsenopyrite. | 6.0 |Fe As? + Fe S? ‘1 léllingite +1 pyrite.

| i

Pacite. | 6.3 |4 Fe As? + Fe S? 4 léllingite + 1 pyrite.

Lonchidite. a 4.9 |Fe eee S?-+-23 to 2 25 1 arsenopyrite -+- 23 to

FeS | 25 marcasite.

Bornite, Killarney. FeS+2Cu’?S 1 iron monosulphide+

| 2 chalcocite.

% Corsica. 1Cu? S + Fe S? 1 chalcocite+-1 pyrite.

(

e Bristol, Ct. {| 6 (Cu?, Fe) S + Fe 8S? 6 bornite + 1 pyrite.

5 Lauterberg | 10 (Cu?, Fe) S + Fe 8?,10 bornite + 1 pyrite.

es Ramos, _ §.2 |11(Cu?, Fe) S + FeS?)11 bornite + 1 pyrite.

Mex. .}-4

Chalcopyrite. |}| 42 |Cu2 S+ FeS-+ Fe S?1 bornite + 1 pyrite.

| | |

Cubauite, >| 4.1 |Cu? S+ FeS+ 3 FeS? 1 chalcopyrite + 2 py-

rite.

Barnhardtite. J)| 4.5 |2 Cu? S+ Fe 8+ Fe S?/1 chalcopyrite + 1

/ . | chalcocite.

LIST OF SPECIMENS EXAMINED OF APLODONTIA MAJOR.

Chas. A. Allen.

COLLECTOR.

NATURE OF SPECIMEN.

Skeleton and skin.

Skull “ a

ee ce ee

ce oe 6é

Skeleton ‘‘ i

6é ce sé

6é ee ce

ce ry

EXAMINED OF APLODONTIA RUFA.

Skull

No. SOURCE. SEX. LocaLrry. DATE.

2101 | Mus. C. H. M. gad. | Placer Co., California, Oct. 7, 1885

Hee eee! ee

i ; : ; age

ipod i" : : eae Fe

1503 ) 12, *

2106 a a ad. “ 66 15, Gs

2107 se 9 ad. L oe ites

: 108 zs ee lass Q ac. aos we , oe WM, 6¢

LIST OF SPECIMENS

No. SOURCE. SEX. LOcALITy. Darr.

278 | U.S. Nat. Mus. F’t Steilacoom, W. T. 1854.

2476 os 66 oe

3891 ch é ad. Puvet’s Sound.

8942 6é ‘ d 6 66

ofa oat

fee08 es im. Coos Co., Oregon. May 5, 1883

22204 “6 46 sé se 66 66

15856

22203 | a 4 ad. Olympia, W. T.

11355 | 66 66 sé

11357 ig tS a

22146 a (No data.)

12592 ut Coquille, Oregon.

12846 %: é | (No data.)

13186 a 2 _ Clachamas Co., Oreg, 1878

1438 | Mus. C. H. M. | im. | Seattle, Wash. Ter. | Dec. 14, 1883

Dr. Geo. Suckley.

Todd, Alva & Abbott.

COLLECTOR.

Dre Tl; Re Peale:

Kk. C. Wingard.

66 6é H

Dr, F. 8. Matteson.

Old skin.

Skull.

Skull and mounted skin.

Skull and. skin.

ee 6eé

Mounted skeleton,

Skin in alcohol.

oe 6é

Skull.

Skin.

Je 1k hm. ;

O. B. Johnson.

Skull and skin.

EXPLANATION OF PLATES.

(ALL NATURAL SIZE. )

PLATE XIX.—SKULL OF APLODONTIA MAJOR 6 AD., No. 2101

Mus. C. H. M.

; ¢ man-

a. cranium from above; &. cranium from below ;

dible from below.

Drawn by Ernest E. T. Seton.

PLATE X X.—COMPARATIVE VIEW OF SKULLS OF APLODONTIA

MAJOR AND APLODONTIA RUPFA.

a.&b. A. major 2 ad., No. 2106 Mus. C. H. M.

above ; J. occipital Hist.

c. & d. A rufa éad., No. 22205 U.S. Nat. Mee c. from

above; d. occipital plane.

a. from

a. & c, drawn by Miss Villette Anderson ; b. & d. by Dr. Geo. Marx

Figure 1, page 327, SKULL OF APLODONTIA MAJOR ¢ AD. No

2107 Mus. C. H. M. Showing persistent fronto-premax-

illary suture.

Drawn by Miss Lillie Sullivan.

Vou, HI:

ANNALS,

| EPIC 1 |

SuuAI IE —

wel a |

—L

NOILVAS13 4d1Vvti

> Boston.

A ae BN eS het ate,

IIT.

ANNALS, VOL.

PLATE 1.

208 jaTsag.

dey VNOHVL , |

es Pe

‘

¥. Acad. oe Plate I :

¥ JH Eufords Sons Boston,

| TY LC RES Teas: mina IED arate ag LE pe yom BE ee ee ee

45 se

eee

i hah sy

TH Buffords Sond Boston.

Ve ns | aS i

= in. di ,

6 wy

i ie ie

amit dy d Mca ee eS 8 ae an, Ae

erty a ta ce eet) aye tee

Annals N.Y St : Plate IV. |

we eR «

‘ pt

y *

JA Futtords Sons Boston.

sa!

we Armls NY toad Sci

re : ee ig ae os s+. 4 tag

See eee eee tue

hay pe ye q 1

.% SRS,

__Annals NY. Acad. Soi

SH 2uHords Sons Boston.

Annals N.Y. Acad. Sci.

~_ —

eB Buforas Sons Boston.

ree

TH Butforas Sons Boston.

_f Acad-s¢

nals N

TH Buvorads Sons Boston.

TH Buftoras Sons Boston.

SH Zutfords Sons Boston.

fied

(enele WC tead Se

TE Buhords Sang Boston.

FH Buffords Sons Boston.

GB.del.

JH Zultoras Sons Boston.

Tenis

LH BuHoras Sons Boston.

. = =

EIT VRE.

Sent keep

-Annals N.Y. Acad. Sciences.

Vol. II. Pl. XVIII

;

ne a a

1. SPIRAXIS MAJOR .

T. Sinclair & Son, Phila .

é.3. SPIRAXIS RANDALLI.

Vol. III, No. 10.

ein

Ges Sor

Skull of APLoDoNTIA MAJOR $6 ad.

Nat. size,

n%,

“

‘

Say oe, Se

> Ue Bares - ‘se | - Ln. - a . - d

Remit Met aE ai fl Ser pia tte.

ey OM ap : a ; P b. ,

Vv midi. No. 10: > , ANNALS. Plate XX.

Comparative view of skulls of A. MAJOR and A. RUFA. Nat. size.

a, 6, Aplodontia major 4 ad. ec, d, Aplodontia rufa ¢ ad.

Plate XXI.

TBA?

a Reet Mae Me OEY MA ies:

in ly motes eR

StF | Le FT ees ANS

NS a Ai ; » NY

RS \ ;

TH py

Coe

ANNALS.

OOS

wut SS ae

BS =

Mh Se

VA a,

las}

—_

east

—_

loeel

| ell

—_

ay]

Crust surface.

: Pek =

Plate XXII.

ANNALS.

Vol. III, No. 11.

- ; .

, : ' F a: x “a . ‘ 4 Ft -, ° ,

MET sinh 8 ov Mae WaT IA ee MOR LL ARES id ragtio PRS. aia tl antes

_ —

Mass No.

ths natural size, |

near.

T-nin

Fou

. New York.

tory

f the Amer. Museum of Nat. H

10n O

the collect

-Now in

RPS,

Vol. III, No. 11. ANNALS. Plate XXII,

; id} mt “se eM — Ee i ‘

- “: Ig i AN i i ; \ XS “lj 2 ee | ‘

= :

a ; ee

} ne

ai on

*. fi ,

t vata)

Z tes

; a

«oe

f ya.

b ‘

i? 35

a 4

7 4

fi i SV IE fng

Te AAA ai ba Pe x .

7B we Ae aR

rj alk \\ S

of fs ps Pa eG

meat iene ae ane 1

Torn Side, Mass No. 2. ' ;

Both one-third natural size, linear. s

Pee Tee ie

”

way eid

P, a

fk aoe :

Ue eh ta? ae, 5 4,

eS ea ee

- ens Cen 7

;

- We Eger a ny

an eg ee

=e = ‘ «

oe es ais

Plate XXIV.

Disrupted S urface No4.

"s Disrupted Surface Noi,

’

| pa

| \y

. ¥

Re /

2 Disrupted Suctace No 6.

All seven-tenths nat. size, linear.

“ » /

. \

A a

>< s

- fed) ¥

iS |

Ss x “NG — A

AY ¥ Wr SB

z eS |

3 &

iS}

on \ & S

f y .

8 5

“ 5

So 5

r > _

E :

; (/ O =

ANNALS.

by, J BY}

All seven-tenths nat

Weol.. 111, No.-11.

- ‘ 3 : : ; iD

oe A ‘ ie Ser:

“rae nd ! . ve) * aa, P

ee rs a ee Se ee eS ee ee een ge a ee eT a - .

itt

yer

7 rh ot =~" fata

= ‘ Fate) Sis:

‘

Annats, Vo. III, No. 11, Phare XXVII. :

8 See

= >

— >= Q

a0}

as oa

of 8

\ \ \

AVA

HE RHAN KAN

TEM H A HAHA KHARA TRARY

i AHN \\ uty Wt AA \\

7 Ty TTI TTT Tr Tt .

My; Mii min il TWO AN

Hy itn

My], | (1!

eal PLL HET

\\n

~*~

oe te

q 4

Awnnats, Vou. II, Prarn XXV

MAP

OF $

LONG ISLAND, D

eS SHOWING aN!

> THE SOUTHERN LIMIT OF THE ICE SHEET,

Adapted from the U, S. Coast Survey Chart

F. J. H. MERRILL,

1884.

0000

BAY

SMITHTOWN

meee IN A TS

OF THE

NEW YORK ACADEMY OF SCIENCES.

VOLUME III, 1883—85.

"£h

The ‘‘Annals,” published for over half a century by the late Lyceum of

Natural History, are continued under the above name by the New York

ACADEMY OF SCIENCES, beginning with the year 1877.

- It is proposed, as before, to issue four numbers every year, each number

to consist of not less than thirty-two pages (octavo’, with or without plates.

Price of Yearly Subscription, to resident and honorary members of the

Academy, $2.00, or 60 cents a single number; to non-residents of New York

City, $3.00, or $1.00 a number ; to residents of the City, not members of the

Academy, $5.00, or $1.50 a number.

_ The Academy has for sale a series of back volumes of the Annals of the

Lyceum, each containing twelve or more numbers ; the price per volume is

$4.00 with uncolored plates, or $5.00 with colored plates.

The Academy has established a Publication Fund, contributors to which,

in the sum of $100 at one time, are entitled to all the Scientific Publications

of the Academy appearing subsequently to the payment of their contri-

butions.

Communications should be addressed to

Pror. D. S. MARTIN,

Chairman of Publication Committee, 236 West Fourth Street.

Or to

JOHN H. HINTON, M. D.,

Treasurer, 41 West Thirty-second Street.

[=$" Any person residing within the United States, on sending the amount

of his yearly subscription to the Treasurer, will receive the numbers as they

appear, without further cost.

Agents in London, TRUBNER & Oo.

7 Fry =e

= a is on =~ =